JP2024048749A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine that allows players to play smoothly. [Solution] A back lamp house 651 is formed with a light source exposure surface 663a that faces the inner circumferential surface of the reel and has an opening 662a that exposes an LED element 654a, and a shade portion 664a that extends cylindrically from the periphery of the light source exposure surface toward the inner circumferential surface of the reel and converges the illumination area of the LED element 654a to the range of the pattern display area, the LED elements 654a are provided corresponding to each of the multiple pattern display areas displayed in the display window, and a partition plate 665a is provided inside the shade portion 664a to match the position of the boundary line of each pattern display area in the multiple pattern display areas displayed in the display window, and the thickness TH3 of the partition plate 665a is shorter than the arrangement interval of the patterns. [Selected Figure] Fig. 37

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as slot machines and pachinko machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines include slot machines (reel type gaming machines), pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, and jankyu gaming machines, and among these types of gaming machines, there is a slot machine such as that shown in Patent Document 1.

JP 2017-144015 A

In conventional gaming machines, various efforts have been made to reduce malfunctions in the devices installed inside the cabinet, ease the burden of game operations, and reduce the possibility of fraudulent activity against the devices, allowing players to play smoothly, but there is still room for further improvement.

The present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that allows players to play smoothly.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a reel on which a plurality of symbols are drawn (e.g., reels 3a, 3b, and 3c in the embodiment) and a back lamp unit (e.g., back lamp unit 650 in the embodiment), the reel having an approximately cylindrical reel frame (e.g., reel wheel 721 and reel frame 731 in the embodiment) and a strip-shaped reel tape (e.g., reel tape 711 in the embodiment) attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel frame, the reel tape having a plurality of rectangular symbol display areas divided at equal lengths in the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the reel frame, one symbol being displayed in each symbol display area, the back lamp unit having a light source (e.g., LED element 654a in the embodiment) that irradiates light onto the plurality of symbols and a back lamp house (e.g., back lamp house 651 in the embodiment), the back lamp unit having a light source ... The clamp house is formed with a predetermined light source exposure surface (e.g., light source exposure surface 663a in the embodiment) facing the inner peripheral surface of the reel and having an opening for exposing the light source, and a shade section (e.g., shade section 664a in the embodiment) extending cylindrically from the periphery of the predetermined light source exposure surface toward the inner peripheral surface of the reel and converging the illumination area of the light source to the range of the pattern display area, the light source is provided corresponding to each of the multiple pattern display areas displayed in the display window, a partition plate (e.g., partition plate 665a in the embodiment) is provided inside the shade section in accordance with the position of the boundary line of each pattern display area in the multiple pattern display areas displayed in the display window, and the thickness of the partition plate (e.g., partition plate TH3 in the embodiment) is shorter than the arrangement interval of the patterns (e.g., minimum pattern interval DGmin in the embodiment).

The gaming machine with the above configuration allows players to play smoothly.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine. A front view showing the internal structure of the slot machine. This is a view of the front door of the above-mentioned slot machine as seen from the rear. A front view showing the state in which the main control device is installed inside the housing of the above-mentioned slot machine. A front view of the above slot machine showing the front door in an open state. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a main control device of the slot machine. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a main control device of the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of a main control device of the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a case body of the slot machine. A front view of the board case mounting mechanism in the above-mentioned slot machine. 13 is a perspective view of a circuit board case mounting mechanism in the slot machine. FIG. A front view of the main control board in the above-mentioned slot machine. FIG. 13 is a front view showing a modified example of the main control board in the above-mentioned slot machine. This is a diagram showing multiple types of electrical elements mounted in a specified area on the surface of another main control board in the above-mentioned slot machine, as viewed from the surface side of the board. 13 is a diagram showing the lead wires of multiple types of electrical elements mounted in the specified area of the other main control board as viewed from the back side of the board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing multiple types of electrical elements mounted in another specified area on the surface of the other main control board as viewed from the board surface side. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the lead wires of multiple types of electrical elements mounted in the other specified area on the back surface of the other main control board, as viewed from the back surface of the board. FIG. A diagram showing the relationship between the distance between the conductive layers of the above-mentioned another main control board and the thickness of the game medal. A figure showing the state in which a game medal abuts on the edge portion of the above-mentioned other main control board. A figure showing the state in which a pachinko ball abuts on the edge portion of the above-mentioned other main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between the protruding heights of lead wires of multiple types of electronic components mounted on the another main control board. A figure showing how the other specified area of the other main control board appears when viewed from the front. A figure showing how the above-mentioned other specified area of the above-mentioned other main control board looks when viewed with the head tilted to the side. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of part names printed on the surface of the other main control board. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing examples of component frame lines printed on the surface of the other main control board. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship between the height of the information display lamp and the LED element mounted on the surface of the other main control board. FIG. A front view of the sub-control board in the above-mentioned slot machine. A front view of the power supply board in the above-mentioned slot machine. This is a diagram showing multiple types of electrical elements mounted on the sub-control board and power supply board in the above-mentioned slot machine, as viewed from the front and side of the board. This is a diagram showing multiple types of electrical elements mounted on the sub-control board and power supply board in the above-mentioned slot machine, as viewed from the front and side of the board. This is a diagram showing multiple types of electrical elements mounted on the sub-control board and power supply board in the above-mentioned slot machine, as viewed from the front and side of the board. This is a diagram showing multiple types of electrical elements mounted on the sub-control board and power supply board in the above-mentioned slot machine, as viewed from the front and side of the board. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a reel unit in the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a reel module in the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a side view of a reel module in the slot machine. 3A and 3B are a perspective view and a front view of a back lamp unit in the reel module. 13A and 13B are a perspective view and a front view showing a modified example of the back lamp unit in the reel module. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a reel in the slot machine. 1 is an explanatory diagram of the symbols displayed on the reel tape that constitutes the reels in the above-mentioned slot machine. FIG. A side view showing the above-mentioned slot machine installed on an island equipment. An explanatory diagram of the signal paths exchanged between the main control board and various devices in the above-mentioned slot machine. A front view of a pachinko game machine of a second embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine. A control block diagram of the above-mentioned pachinko game machine. This is a functional block diagram of the main control board and the performance control board of the above-mentioned pachinko game machine. A schematic diagram showing a special pattern winning/losing lottery table. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first special pattern jackpot pattern table, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a second special pattern jackpot pattern table. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a special pattern variation pattern table 1. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a special pattern variation pattern table 2. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a special pattern variation pattern table 3. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern attributes of decorative patterns. FIG. This is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the type of jackpot, the jackpot pattern combination of decorative patterns, and the performance pattern during the jackpot. This is a schematic diagram showing an overview of the Choju jackpot presentation. This is a schematic diagram showing an overview of the Kotobuki jackpot A presentation. This is a schematic diagram showing an overview of the Kotobuki jackpot B performance. This is a schematic diagram showing an overview of the Kidai Hit A performance. This is a schematic diagram showing an overview of the Happy Hit B performance. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen during a round of play. A conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of the winning-related effects. A schematic diagram showing an example of an over winning presentation. A schematic diagram showing an example of a large prize slot count-up presentation. 13 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a bonus prize presentation. FIG. A schematic diagram showing an example of a general winning slot count-up presentation. This is a time chart explaining the priority of the large prize slot count-up performance. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram for explaining an emphasis effect. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram illustrating types of errors in a gaming machine. This is a time chart to explain whether or not the over prize effect will be executed at the end of a jackpot. This is a time chart to explain whether or not a bonus prize-winning effect will be executed at the end of a jackpot. 13 is a time chart showing the relationship between the detection state of the touch sensor and the over winning effect and the general winning effect. 13 is a time chart showing the relationship between the game state in which the game start preparation effect is executed and the game state in which the over prize effect and the bonus prize effect are executed. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a volume adjustment screen. This is a time chart explaining the overlapping execution of the over prize production and the bonus prize production. This is a time chart when over winning and bonus winning occur multiple times within a specified period. This is a time chart of the winning ball signal when a game ball enters a general winning port. This is a time chart of the prize ball signal when a game ball enters the big prize opening. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing on the main control side. This is a flowchart showing the control processing following Figure 77 of the main processing on the main control side. 13 is a flowchart showing the main control side timer interrupt processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing a start port monitoring control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern variation start monitoring and control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern change start monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a general-purpose special symbol control process. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern variation start processing. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during special pattern variation. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing performed while a special symbol stop symbol is being displayed. 13 is a flowchart showing a special electric feature control process. This is a flowchart showing the control processing following Figure 89 of the special electric feature control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a reset start process. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing on the performance control side. 13 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining the contents of a winning presentation. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance control command reception interrupt process. A flowchart showing the performance control side timer interrupt processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an image control command transmission interrupt process. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of a special pattern winning/losing lottery table in the third embodiment. A schematic diagram showing a special pattern jackpot pattern table of the third embodiment. A transition diagram of the game state and presentation mode in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a game status setting table of the third embodiment. 13 is a comparison table of the variable times of special symbols in the third embodiment. A schematic diagram for explaining the normal pattern lottery in the third embodiment. A schematic diagram for explaining simultaneous fluctuation processing (fluctuation interruption processing, fluctuation forced stop processing) of the third embodiment. A front view of a pachinko game machine related to a modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a front view showing the main control display device of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an emphasis effect according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing an emphasis effect pattern table according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing the execution timing of emphasis effects, special effect displays, and specific sound effect outputs during a jackpot game in the fourth embodiment. A time chart showing the relationship between the execution time of the emphasis effect and the execution time of the jackpot end demo in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing the execution timing of highlighting effects, light emitting effects, and gimmick effects in the fourth embodiment. 13A is a time chart showing the execution timing of the role presentation during fluctuation in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a time chart showing the execution timing of the role presentation during a jackpot in the fourth embodiment. 13A is a time chart when the execution of the emphasis effect of the fourth embodiment is restricted, and FIG. 13B is a time chart when the execution of the over winning effect of the fourth embodiment is restricted. This is a time chart showing when a power outage occurs while the jackpot type display is being executed in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart when a power outage occurs during execution of the round display in the fourth embodiment. A control block diagram showing the control configuration of a gaming machine of a fifth embodiment. A functional block diagram of the main control board and the performance control board of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a functional block diagram showing a power-on transition mode control unit and a performance information management unit according to the fifth embodiment. A front view showing the main control board unit of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a performance display monitor according to a fifth embodiment. A diagram showing basic game specifications of the fifth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing a special pattern winning/losing lottery table in the fifth embodiment. 13A is a schematic diagram showing a first special pattern jackpot pattern table of the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing a second special pattern jackpot pattern table of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a power-on operation and a transition mode in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display of setting values on a performance display monitor according to a fifth embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing the notification content in a setting change mode in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the notification content in a setting check mode in the fifth embodiment. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the memory area of the RAM of the main control board of the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the performance information memory area of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing an example of displaying base values for each section in the fifth embodiment; 13A and 13B are diagrams showing the display contents displayed in the discrimination segment and the ratio segment for each management section (measurement section) in the fifth embodiment. This is a time chart when the first hit occurs in section A for the first time when the power is turned on in the fifth embodiment. (A) is a time chart showing the initial display period when the game state when the power is restored after a power outage in the fifth embodiment is a special game state, and (B) is a time chart showing the initial display period when the game state when the power is restored after a power outage in the fifth embodiment is a normal game state. This is a time chart when a winning ball error occurs during a jackpot game. A front view of the game board of the sixth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing a sub-control display device of the sixth embodiment. An oblique view showing the performance button and cross key of the sixth embodiment. A schematic diagram for explaining the flow of button presentation in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing the types of button effects in the sixth embodiment. A schematic diagram for explaining the execution timing of the button vibration effect in the sixth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of the first button vibration effect α in the sixth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of the first button vibration effect β in the sixth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of the second button vibration effect in the sixth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of the second button vibration effect in the sixth embodiment (continuation of Figure 141). A schematic diagram showing an example of the third button vibration effect in the sixth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of the third button vibration effect in the sixth embodiment (continuation of Figure 143). FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing an execution pattern table of the button vibration effect in the sixth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart of an initialization operation process of a movable body according to the sixth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the flow of display screens displayed on the performance display device after the power of the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is turned on. 13 is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the button vibration effect in the sixth embodiment. 13 is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the first button performance in the sixth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of a special effect presentation (effect collection presentation) in the sixth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing a modified example of the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the first button performance in the sixth embodiment. 13 is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the second button performance in the sixth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of the display of a left-handed hit notification image in the sixth embodiment. This is a time chart explaining the execution timing of the left hit notification effect in the sixth embodiment. This is a time chart showing what happens when a power outage occurs during execution of the left-hit notification display in the sixth embodiment. This is a time chart used to explain the look-ahead performance after transitioning from a high base state to a low base state in the sixth embodiment. A schematic diagram for explaining the pending image display area and the changing image display area in the sixth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram for explaining the pending image and the changing image of the sixth embodiment, and (B) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the motion display (animation display) of the pending image and the changing image of the sixth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing examples of hold change suggestion effects and hold change effects in the sixth embodiment. This is a time chart when variable displays A and B are executed as the variable display of the first special pattern in the sixth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing a case where the display of a sound adjustment image and the initialization operation of a movable body are executed simultaneously after the power is restored from a power outage in the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. A time chart showing the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable parts after power is restored in the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment and the display content of the performance display device. A time chart showing the relationship between the performance operation (play piece performance) of the first movable plaything in the sixth embodiment and the display content of the performance display device. This shows the first presentation of the operation promotion presentation of a modified example of the sixth embodiment, in which (a) is a schematic diagram showing an image before a button operation and (b) is an image after the button operation. This shows the second presentation of the operation promotion presentation in a modified example of the sixth embodiment, in which (a) is a schematic diagram showing the image before freezing, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the image after freezing. This shows the second presentation of the operation promotion presentation of a modified example of the sixth embodiment, in which (a) is a schematic diagram showing the image after the freeze is released, and (b) is the image after the button is operated. This shows various periods and states during the second performance of the operation promotion performance of a modified example of the sixth embodiment, in comparison with the first performance, where (a) is a timing chart of the first performance and (b) is a timing chart of the second performance. This shows the second presentation of the operation promotion presentation of a modified example of the sixth embodiment, in which (a) is a schematic diagram showing an image before a button operation at the time of a reach, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an image after the button operation. This shows the second effect of the operation promotion effect of a modified example of the sixth embodiment, in which (a) is a schematic diagram showing an image after freezing when a reach is reached, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an image of a provocative effect when the reach is developed. This shows the second presentation of the operation promotion presentation of a modified example of the sixth embodiment, in which (a) is a schematic diagram showing the image after the freeze is released, and (b) is the image after the button is operated. A schematic diagram showing an operation promotion presentation pattern table of a modified example of the sixth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the configuration of the decorative pattern of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram for explaining mode presentation (stage presentation) of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing a display screen for the BGM selection effect in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram illustrating a variable waiting period according to the seventh embodiment; A schematic diagram showing examples of standby operation presentations and standby presentations during fluctuation in the seventh embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of the standby operation presentation and the standby presentation during change in the seventh embodiment (continuation of Figure 176). This is a time chart showing the case where a game ball enters the starting hole during execution of a standby demo performance in a low base state in the seventh embodiment. This is a time chart showing the case where a game ball enters the starting hole during execution of the low base state varying action presentation in the seventh embodiment. This is a time chart showing the case where a game ball enters the starting hole during execution of a standby demo performance in a high base state in the seventh embodiment. This is a time chart showing the case where a game ball enters the starting hole during the execution of the high base state varying action presentation in the seventh embodiment. A schematic diagram for explaining the image transformation effect in the seventh embodiment. A schematic diagram conceptually showing the layer structure of a frame image during a variable performance (when an image operation performance is not being executed) in the seventh embodiment. A schematic diagram conceptually showing the layer structure of a frame image during a variation performance (image transformation performance) of the seventh embodiment. A schematic diagram for explaining an overview of the button effects in the seventh embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the notification mode of the performance button in the seventh embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of a button effect including a weak operation trigger effect (dialogue preview effect) in the seventh embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of a button effect including a strong operation trigger effect (cut-in preview effect) in the seventh embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of a button effect including a specific type of operation trigger effect in the seventh embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of a button effect including a specific type of operation trigger effect in the seventh embodiment (continuation of Figure 189). FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a button effect including a weak operation trigger effect (failed decision effect) in the seventh embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of a button effect including a weak operation trigger effect (failed decision effect) in the seventh embodiment (continuation of Figure 191). A schematic diagram for explaining the contents of various effect buttons in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing a button image according to the seventh embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of the button appearance announcement performance in the seventh embodiment. This is a time chart when the button effect is executed when the winning/losing branch of the jackpot change display in the seventh embodiment. A functional block diagram of the main control board and the performance control board of the eighth embodiment. A diagram showing the basic game specifications of the eighth embodiment. 13A is a schematic diagram showing a first special pattern jackpot pattern table of the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing a second special pattern jackpot pattern table of the eighth embodiment. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the storage area of the RAM of the main control board of the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the suppression function information storage area of the eighth embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams for explaining the increment number and decrement number of the MY counter in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining a method of updating an MY counter in the eighth embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining a method of initializing an MY counter in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a suppression function pre-activation signal and a suppression function activation signal in the eighth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of a pre-notification display in the eighth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of a suppression notification display in the eighth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of a presentation when the count value of the MY counter reaches a specified value while a jackpot game is not being executed in the eighth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of a presentation (continuation of Figure 207) when the count value of the MY counter reaches a specified value while a jackpot game is not being executed in the eighth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of a presentation when the advance warning presentation is canceled after the count value of the MY counter in the eighth embodiment reaches a predetermined value. A schematic diagram showing an example of a presentation when the count value of the MY counter reaches a specified value during execution of a jackpot game in the eighth embodiment. This is a time chart when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during execution of the prize ball count-up presentation in the eighth embodiment. This is a time chart when the advance notification conditions are satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up presentation in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing a case where the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during execution of the emphasis effect in the eighth embodiment. This is a time chart showing a case where the advance notification condition is satisfied during execution of the emphasis effect in the eighth embodiment. A time chart showing the relationship between the execution time of the prize ball count-up effect and the execution time of the emphasis effect in the eighth embodiment. This is a time chart when multiple game balls enter the large prize opening in succession in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a performance when a song selection performance and an emphasis performance are executed simultaneously in the eighth embodiment. 23 is a time chart showing when the song is changed in the song selection presentation in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing a case where a power outage occurs immediately before a suppression function activation condition is satisfied in the eighth embodiment. 23 is a time chart showing a case where a power outage occurs immediately before an advance warning condition is satisfied in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing a case where a power outage occurs after a suppression function activation condition is satisfied in the eighth embodiment. 23 is a time chart showing a case where a power outage occurs after an advance warning condition is satisfied in the eighth embodiment. A front view of a controlled gaming machine of a ninth embodiment. A rear view of the managed gaming machine of the 9th embodiment. A block diagram showing the system configuration of a managed gaming machine of a ninth embodiment. A diagram showing the communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board in a managed gaming machine of the 9th embodiment from power-on.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the above drawings.
[First embodiment]
First, the slot machine according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 4. In the following, when describing the basic configuration of the slot machine with reference to Figures 1 to 3, the directions of the arrows shown in Figure 2 are defined as the up-down direction, the front-rear direction, and the left-right direction, respectively.

<External Configuration of Slot Machine>
1 to 3, the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a box-shaped housing 5 (main body member) with an open front (forward) and a front door 2 attached so as to be openable and closable to the front opening of the housing 5. The front door 2 is attached so as to be openable and closable to the side relative to the front opening of the housing 5 by using hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c disposed in front of the left side plate 5a of the housing 5 when viewed from the front.

As shown in Figures 1 and 2, an upper panel assembly 10, a middle panel assembly 20, a lower panel assembly 30 and a tray assembly 40 are attached to the front of the front door 2, in that order from the top. In the center of the upper panel assembly 10, the display screen 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 arranged on the back side of the upper panel assembly 10 is arranged facing forward, and a first performance lamp 12 and second performance lamps 13a, 13b are arranged around it. In addition, a pair of upper speakers 15a, 15b are arranged on the left and right below the front of the display screen 11a, and a decorative member 16 with a predetermined decoration is arranged in the center below the front of the display screen 11a.

At the center of the middle panel assembly 20, there is a reel window W that faces the surfaces of the left reel 3a, middle reel 3b, and right reel 3c that are arranged side by side inside the cabinet 5. On the upper surface side of the operation panel 21 provided below the reel window W, there are attached a medal insertion port 22 for inserting game medals (game media), a BET switch unit 23 for betting game medals within a credited range, and a performance switch unit 24 for performing operations related to performance. On the front side of the operation panel 21, there are attached a start lever (start switch) 25 that is operated when starting the rotation of all reels 3a to 3c, three stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c for individually stopping the rotation of each reel 3a, 3b, and 3c, and a reject switch 27 for returning game medals that have been inserted through the medal insertion port 22 and are stuck there.

The inside of the medal insertion port 22 branches into an acceptance passage (leading to a hopper 51, described below) through which the inserted game medal passes if the inserted game medal is validly accepted, and a return passage (leading to a medal payout outlet 41, described below) through which the inserted game medal passes if the inserted game medal is not accepted, and a blocker is provided at the branching point. This blocker is configured to selectively open one of the acceptance passage and the return passage and close the other, so that during the period when the inserted game medal is validly accepted, the game medal inserted into the medal insertion port 22 is guided to the acceptance passage, and during other periods, the game medal inserted into the medal insertion port 22 is guided to the return passage.

In addition, inside the medal insertion port 22, two medal insertion sensors for detecting game medals inserted into the medal insertion port 22 and validly accepted, and a medal passage sensor for monitoring the game medals inserted into the medal insertion port 22 are provided. The first medal insertion sensor is a transmission type optical sensor capable of detecting game medals, and is disposed downstream (closer to the hopper 51 described later) from the position where the blocker is installed. The second medal insertion sensor is also a transmission type optical sensor capable of detecting game medals, and is disposed next to the downstream side of the first medal insertion sensor. The medal passage sensor is a contact type sensor capable of detecting game medals, and is disposed downstream from the position where the blocker is installed and closest to the medal insertion port 22 (upstream of the two medal insertion sensors).

When the first and second medal insertion sensors detect the passage of game medals in this order, it means that the game medals have been inserted into the medal insertion port 22 and that the inserted game medals have been accepted validly. On the other hand, when the first and second medal insertion sensors detect the passage of game medals in the reverse order (second, first), it means that an abnormal passage such as a game medal flowing backwards has occurred. Also, when the medal passage sensor (or at least one of the two medal insertion sensors) continues to detect game medals for more than a predetermined time, it means that an abnormality has occurred such as a game medal being stuck in the receiving passage or a foreign object (such as a tool for cheating) being inserted from the medal insertion port 22 into the receiving passage.

The reel window W is configured so that when the left reel 3a, the center reel 3b, and the right reel 3c all come to a halt, three consecutive symbols on each reel are displayed so that a total of nine symbols are visible to the player. Here, of the three symbols on each reel displayed in the reel window W, the uppermost symbol display position is called the upper row, the lowermost symbol display position is called the lower row, and the symbol display position between the upper and lower rows is called the middle row. A winning line 29 that connects the symbol display areas of the middle rows of the reels 3a to 3c horizontally (in a horizontal straight line) is activated when a specified number of game medals are bet, and the presence or absence of a game combination is determined by the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the activated winning line 29.

The slot machine 1 is also provided with various display lamps, such as LED lamps. In this embodiment, the display lamps include a MAX-BET switch display lamp (not shown), a number of bets display lamp 46b, an insert possible display (INSERT) lamp 46c, a start of play display (START) lamp 46d, a replay display (REPLAY) lamp 46e, a status display (GAME OVER) lamp 46f, a number of reserved coins display (CREDIT) lamp 46h, and a number of payouts display (PAYOUT) lamp 46j. These display lamps are configured to be controlled by the main control board 110, which will be described later.

The MAX-BET switch indicator lamp (not shown) is lit when it is possible to bet gaming medals, and is disposed inside the MAX-BET switch (not shown) provided in the -BET switch unit 23, and when lit, causes the MAX-BET switch to light up partially or entirely. The other indicator lamps are disposed on the sides or bottom of the reel window W in the middle panel assembly 20.

The bet number indicator lamp 46b displays the number of game medals bet, and is made up of a 1-bet indicator lamp 46bC that lights up when one game medal is bet, a 2-bet indicator lamp 46bB that lights up when two game medals are bet, and a 3-bet indicator lamp 46bA that lights up when three game medals are bet. The insertion possible indicator lamp 46c lights up when game medals can be inserted, and the game start indicator lamp 46d lights up when a game can be started by operating the start lever 25. The replay indicator lamp 46e lights up when a replay role is established in any game and game medals are automatically bet by the automatic bet process.

The status display lamp 46f is turned on when the bet and/or reserved game medals are settled. The reserved medal number display lamp 46h is a seven-segment display of the number of reserved (credited) game medals, and the payout number display lamp 46f is turned on when the bet and/or reserved game medals are settled.
6j is a seven-segment display of the number of game medals to be paid out when a minor winning combination (a game combination configured to pay out a predetermined number of game medals when the combination is achieved) is achieved.

The payout number display lamp 46j is also configured to display letters (alphabets) or numbers indicating the type of error when an abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1. Furthermore, the payout number display lamp 46j also has the function of displaying a navigation number (symbols or numbers) indicating the operation sequence (pressing sequence) of the stop switches 26a to 26c.

A transparent lower panel cover 31 is attached to the center of the lower panel assembly 30, and a pair of lower speakers 32a, 32b are arranged on the left and right sides of the cover. A translucent lower panel base with a specified design and a lower panel light (neither shown) are attached to the back side of the lower panel cover 31, and the design on the lower panel base is illuminated from behind when the lower panel light is turned on.

The tray assembly 40 has a medal payout outlet 41 for paying out medals, and a medal storage tray 42 for storing medals is provided facing the medal payout outlet 41. An ashtray 43 is provided to the left of the medal storage tray 42.

<Internal structure of a slot machine>
As shown in FIG. 3, a medal payout device 50 is provided at the bottom of the cabinet 5 (above the bottom plate 5d) for paying out game medals acquired when a predetermined winning mode is formed as a result of playing. The medal payout device 50 has a hopper 51 for physically storing (accumulating) game medals inserted from the medal insertion port 22 and effectively received, and an ejection port 52 for ejecting the game medals stored in the hopper 51 one by one. An auxiliary storage 53 for storing game medals overflowing from the hopper 51 is provided near the medal payout device 50, and a fullness detection unit (not shown) for detecting whether the auxiliary storage 53 is full (a state in which game medals may overflow from the auxiliary storage 53) is provided. In addition, a power supply unit 55 for supplying power to various devices mounted on the slot machine 1 is provided to the left of the medal payout device 50.

In the center of the cabinet 5, a middle plate 5f is provided so as to span the left and right side plates 5a and 5b, and a reel unit 60 is provided on the middle plate 5f. The reel unit 60 is configured with the above-mentioned three reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, and three stepping motors (described later) that rotate the reels 3a to 3c, respectively. The left reel 3a, the middle reel 3b, and the right reel 3c are each made of a translucent material, and a translucent reel tape with multiple types of patterns is attached to the outer periphery. In addition, a back lamp (described later) is disposed on the inner side of each of the reels 3a to 3c. An external centralized terminal board 80 that outputs information related to the game to an external hall computer or the like is installed on the upper part of the right side plate 5b. The output information related to the game includes, for example, the number of medals inserted and paid out, and the number of times that so-called bonus games and AT games have started.

At the top of the cabinet 5 (the upper inner surface of the back panel 5e) is provided a main control device 100 that mainly controls the progress of the game. For example, when a specified number of game medals (e.g., three medals) are inserted and the start lever 25 is operated, the main control device 100 performs a role drawing and starts the rotation drive of the reels 3a to 3c, and when the stop switch 26a, 26b, 26c is operated to stop, it controls the stopping of the reels based on the result of the role drawing. In addition, when all the reels have stopped, if a combination of symbols for a small role is lined up on the winning line 29 (a small role has won), the main control device 100 controls the medal payout device 50 to pay out the number of medals corresponding to the winning small role.

<Front door rear structure>
FIG. 4 shows a front view of the front door 2 as seen from the rear. Since FIG. 4 illustrates the front door 2 as seen from the rear, the left and right directions of the arrows in FIG. 4 are reversed from those in FIG. 2. On the rear side (back side) of the front door 2, a sub-controller 500 is provided above the reel window W. The sub-controller 500 controls various performance devices (such as the first performance lamp 12, the second performance lamps 13a, 13b, the liquid crystal display device 11, and the upper speakers 15a, 15b) based on various commands transmitted from the main control device 100, thereby executing various performances to enhance the interest of the game according to the game situation. These functions are realized by various components mounted on a sub-control board (described later) housed in the sub-board case 501. The sub-controller 500 and the main control device 100 are electrically connected to each other using a cable harness, and information transmission between these devices can be performed only in one direction, from the main control device 100 to the sub-controller 500.

A medal selector 650 is provided below and to the right of the reel window W, which selects whether or not a game medal inserted through the medal insertion port 22 can be validly accepted. If the game medal inserted through the medal insertion port 22 can be validly accepted, the medal selector 650 passes it through an acceptance passage 71 leading to the hopper 51, and if the game medal cannot be validly accepted, the medal selector 650 allows it to flow down a return passage 72 leading to the game medal payout outlet 41. In addition, a medal passage port 73 is formed in the return passage section 72 so as to be aligned with the game medal ejection port 52 provided in the medal payout device 50.

<Configuration of main control device>
Next, the configuration of the main control device 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 5 to 13. As shown in Figs. 7 to 9, the main control device 100 is configured to have a main control board 110 and a main board case 210 that houses the main control board 110. As shown in Fig. 8, the main control board 110 is configured to have a control chip 121, an information display lamp 156, a plurality of electrical connectors such as a main board side connector 161, and a printed board 111 on which these various components are mounted. In addition, the various components mounted on the printed board 111 are mounted on a surface portion (also referred to as a "first surface portion") FS of the printed board 111. Therefore, when the main control device 100 is installed on the back plate 5e (see Fig. 3) of the housing 5, the surface portion FS faces forward and is aligned in the vertical direction. The details of the main control board 110 will be described later.

As shown in Figures 7 to 9, the main board case 210 has a case body 211 and a case lid 221, and is configured to be able to store the main control board 110 inside the case formed by combining the case body 211 and the case lid 221. As shown in Figure 8, the case body 211 is formed in a generally rectangular box shape that opens forward using a transparent resin material, and multiple coupling grooves 212 are formed in the upper and lower wall portions. This coupling groove 212 is an L-shaped groove consisting of an insertion groove portion that opens forward and a locking groove portion that extends to the right from the rear of the insertion groove. The case lid 221 is formed in a generally rectangular box shape that opens backward using a transparent resin material, and multiple engagement protrusions (not shown) are formed on the inner surface of the upper and lower wall portions at positions corresponding to the above-mentioned coupling grooves 212. This engagement protrusion is inserted from the front into the insertion groove of the coupling groove 212 of the case body 211, and the case lid 221 is slid rightward relative to the case body 211 to insert the engagement protrusion into the locking groove of the coupling groove 212, thereby restricting the movement of the case lid 221 in the forward/backward, up/down, and rightward directions relative to the case body 211, and the case body 211 and the case lid 221 are coupled together.

As shown in Fig. 8 and Fig. 10, the right part of the case body 211 is formed with a body side joint part 213 and a first body side sealing part 214 to which the sealing cover 241 is attached. A lid crimping member (not shown) having a locking claw is attached inside the body side joint part 213. Two case mounting protrusions 219 protruding to the right are formed on the right side surface of the first body side sealing part 214. The left part of the case body 211 is formed with a body side temporary engagement part 215 that can be engaged with a used body crimping member 340 (see Fig. 11) when collecting the main board case 210. The lower part of the case body 211 is formed with a second body side sealing part 216. The left front part of the case body 211 is formed with a board support protrusion 217 that supports the main control board 110 so as not to bend.

7 and 8, the right side of the case lid 221 is formed with a lid side joint 223 that is joined to the body side joint 213 of the case body 211 when the case body 211 and the case lid 221 are joined as described above, and a first lid side seal 224 that is joined to the first body side seal 214 of the case body 211. When the body side joint 213 and the lid side joint 223 are joined, the locking claw of the lid crimping member (not shown) attached in the body side joint 213 is inserted into the locking groove in the lid side joint 223, thereby restricting the sliding movement of the case lid 221 to the left (in the direction in which the case lid 221 is removed) relative to the case body 211, and the case lid 221 is fixed so that it cannot be removed from the case body 211. In addition, a seal sticker 242 is affixed across the first body side sealing part 214 and the first lid side sealing part 224, and a seal cover 241 is configured to be slid from the right and attached to the first body side sealing part 214 and the first lid side sealing part 224 so as to cover the seal sticker 242. After the seal cover 241 is attached to the first body side sealing part 214 and the first lid side sealing part 224, a cutter member 243 is attached to the seal cover 241 so that the cutting portion of the cutter member 243 is positioned inside the seal cover 241. Therefore, when the seal cover 241 is slid leftward to be removed, the seal sticker 242 is cut by the cutting portion of the cutter member 243.

At the left part of the case lid 221, a cover part 225 is formed to accommodate and cover the body side temporary engagement part 215 of the case body 211 when the case body 211 and the case lid 221 are joined as described above. At the top of the cover part 225, an upper case fixing part 225a is formed which can be engaged with the body crimping member 340 (see FIG. 11) described later and can also face the crimping type member 345 (see FIG. 11) described later. At the bottom of the cover part 225, a lower case fixing part 225b is formed which can face the crimping type member 345 and can also engage with the body crimping member 340. At the middle part of the cover part 225, a lid side temporary engagement part 225c is formed which can engage the used body crimping member 340 while overlapping with the body side temporary engagement part 215 of the case body 211.

At the upper left end of the case lid 221, a Nylatch-type upper temporary fixing device 238a is formed, which can be inserted into the upper temporary fixing hole 348a (see FIG. 11) of the bracket member 330 described later. At the lower left end of the case lid 221, a Nylatch-type lower temporary fixing device 238b is formed, which can be inserted into the lower temporary fixing hole 348b (see FIG. 11) of the bracket member 330. At the bottom of the case lid 221, a second lid-side sealing portion 226 is formed, which is connected to the second body-side sealing portion 216 of the case body 211. When the second body-side sealing portion 216 and the second lid-side sealing portion 226 are connected, a laser device or the like is used to print across the second body-side sealing portion 216 and the second lid-side sealing portion 226, thereby sealing the main board case 210.

A left connector exposure section 227 is formed on the left front side of the case lid 221 to expose the main board side connector 161 of the main control board 110 housed inside the case to the front. The main board side connector 161 exposed through the left connector exposure section 227 can be fitted and connected to a cable connector 192 provided at one end of a front door cable harness 191 (see FIG. 5).

A connector cover 246 that covers the left connector exposed portion 227 from the front is attached to the case lid 221. A groove-shaped first cover crimping attachment portion 229 is formed on the front surface of the case lid 221, and a first cover crimping member 228 having a locking claw can be slid from above and attached to the first cover crimping attachment portion 229. When the connector cover 246 is attached to the case lid 221, the first cover crimping member 228 attached to the first cover crimping attachment portion 229 is disposed inside the connector cover 246, and the locking claw of the first cover crimping member 228 is inserted into the locking groove in the connector cover 246. Therefore, the connector cover 246 is fixed so that it cannot be removed from the case lid 221 unless the connector cover 246 is destroyed to release the locking state with the first cover crimping member 228.

On the lower front side of the case lid 221, first to fourth lower connector exposure parts 231 to 234 are formed, which penetrate forward and backward to expose the reel connector 162, the sub-substrate connector 163, the setting change device connector 164, and the collator connector 165 of the main control board 110 housed inside the case. The reel connector 162 exposed through the first lower connector exposure part 231 is designed to be fitted and connected to a connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to a reel control board (not shown). The sub-substrate connector 163 exposed through the second lower connector exposure part 232 is designed to be fitted and connected to a connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to the sub-control device 500. The setting change device connector 164 exposed through the third lower connector exposure part 233 is designed to be connected to a connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to the setting change device 350. The connector 165 for the matching machine exposed through the fourth lower connector exposure portion 234 can be fitted and connected to the connector of a cable harness (not shown) that is electrically connected to the matching machine (not shown).

A sticker attachment section 235 is formed in the center of the front surface of the case lid 221, where the crimping usage record sticker 248 is attached. The sticker attachment section 235 is formed in a rectangular recess shape that matches the outer periphery of the crimping usage record sticker 248. The crimping usage record sticker 248 is formed in the form of a transparent sheet on which letters or figures are printed for recording the date when the main board case 210 was sealed, etc. (hereinafter referred to as the crimping usage record).

A recess 237 is formed on the inside of the case lid 221 at a portion of the case lid 221 that overlaps with the information display lamp 156 of the main control board 110. As shown in Figures 7 to 9, the recess 237 has a bottom 237e that is lower in height than the ceiling of the case lid 221, and an upper wall 237a, a lower wall 237b, a left wall 237c, and a right wall 237d that surround the front side of the bottom 237e from above, below, left, and right. The bottom 237e is formed in the shape of a flat plate that overlaps with the information display lamp 156 and extends approximately parallel to it near the front of the information display lamp 156. The upper wall 237a, the lower wall 237b, and the left wall 237c are formed in the shape of walls extending in the front-rear direction. Of the top, bottom, left and right walls 237a to 237d, the right wall 237d located on the side farther from the hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c is formed in a wall shape that slopes to the right (farther from the hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c) as it moves forward.

The main board case 210, which thus houses the main control board 110 inside the case, is attached to the upper part of the housing 5 (the upper inner surface of the back plate 5e) via a board case attachment mechanism 300, as shown in Fig. 5. As shown in Figs. 11 and 12, the board case attachment mechanism 300 is configured to have a left base member 310 attached to the upper left part of the back plate 5e, a right base member 320 attached to the upper right part of the back plate 5e, and a bracket member 330 attached to the left base member 310 so as to be swingable in the front-to-rear direction. The main board case 210 is attached to the inside of the bracket member 330 facing forward. The left end of the bracket member 330 is
The main board case 210 is connected to the left base member 310 so as to be swingable in the front-rear direction. Meanwhile, the right end portion of the bracket member 330 is configured to be fixed to the right base member 320 by using a lock member 360. In this way, the main board case 210 is swingably attached to the upper portion within the housing 5 via the board case attachment mechanism 300.

The left base member 310 is formed in a block shape extending in the vertical direction, and is attached to the upper left side of the back plate 5e of the housing 5 (near the lower side of the top plate 5c) using a mounting screw (not shown). The left base member 310 has three base side engagement parts 311, 312, 313 arranged in the vertical direction, each having a hinge hole that can engage with the bracket side engagement parts 331, 332, 333 of the bracket member 330. The right base member 320 is formed in a block shape extending in the vertical direction, and is attached to the upper right side of the back plate 5e of the housing 5 (near the lower side of the top plate 5c) using a mounting screw (not shown). The right base member 320 is also configured to be able to engage with a locking protrusion (not shown) provided on the right side of the rear surface of the bracket member 330.

The bracket member 330 is formed of a transparent resin material in a generally rectangular box shape that opens forward, and the main board case 210 is attached to its internal space to support the main board case 210. On the outer surface of the left side wall of the bracket member 330, three bracket side engaging parts 331, 332, 333 having hinge shafts that can be rotatably engaged with the base side engaging parts 311, 312, 313 of the left base member 310 are formed in a line in the vertical direction. As a result, the left end of the bracket member 330 is connected to the left base member 310 so as to be swingable in the front-rear direction with the base side engaging parts 311, 312, 313 engaged with the bracket side engaging parts 331, 332, 333.

In the bracket member 330, upper and lower case crimping attachment parts 334, 335 are formed adjacent to the left wall, to which the main body crimping member 340 and the crimping type member 345 are attached. The main body crimping member 340 (or the crimping type member 345) having a locking claw is inserted and attached through an opening formed on the right side of the upper case crimping attachment part 334. The crimping type member 345 (or the main body crimping member 340) without a locking claw is inserted and attached through an opening formed on the right side of the lower case crimping attachment part 335.

An upper temporary fixing hole 348a is formed at the upper left end of the bracket member 330, into which the upper temporary fixing device 238a of the main board case 210 (case lid 221) can be inserted. A lower temporary fixing hole 348b is formed at the lower left end of the bracket member 330, into which the lower temporary fixing device 238b of the main board case 210 (case lid 221) can be inserted. In addition, a cable clamp 336 capable of fixing and holding the front door cable harness 191 described above is formed at the lower left of the bracket member 330.

A locking member 360 is attached to the upper right part of the bracket member 330 to secure the bracket member 330 to the right base member 320. In addition, case mounting holes 339, 339 that open to the left are formed in a vertical line in the upper right part of the bracket member 330. The case mounting protrusions 219, 219 of the main board case 210 (case body 211) can be inserted into the case mounting holes 339, 339 from the left.

To mount the main board case 210 housing the main control board 110 inside the case to the bracket member 330, the case mounting protrusions 219, 219 of the main board case 210 are inserted into the case mounting holes 339, 339 of the bracket member 330, and then the upper and lower temporary fasteners 238a, 238b of the main board case 210 are inserted into the upper and lower upper temporary fastening holes 348a, 348b of the bracket member 330, and the main board case 210 is inserted into the bracket member 330. When the main board case 210 is inserted into the bracket member 330, the main body crimping member 340 mounted on the upper case crimping mounting portion 334 is positioned inside the upper case fixing portion 225a of the main board case 210, and the locking claws of the main body crimping member 340 are inserted into the locking grooves in the upper case fixing portion 225a. At the same time, the crimping member 345 attached to the lower case crimping attachment portion 335 is disposed facing the inside of the lower case fixing portion 225b of the main board case 210. This fixes the main board case 210 so that it cannot be removed from the bracket member 330 unless the upper case fixing portion 225a of the main board case 210 is broken to release the engagement with the main body crimping member 340.

In this way, the main board case 210 is attached to the bracket member 330 by first engaging the right side of the main board case 210 with the bracket member 330, and then engaging the left side. It is also possible to attach the crimping member 345 to the upper case crimping attachment portion 334 and place them facing each other inside the upper case fixing portion 225a, and to attach the main body crimping member 340 to the lower case crimping attachment portion 335 and place them inside the lower case fixing portion 225b, so that the locking claws of the main body crimping member 340 are inserted into the locking grooves in the lower case fixing portion 225b. This allows the main board case 210 to be attached to the bracket member 330 twice by swapping the upper and lower positions of the main body crimping member 340 and the crimping member 345.

For example, when first mounting the main board case 210 to the bracket member 330, the main body crimping member 340 is mounted to the upper case crimping mounting portion 334, and the crimping type member 345 is mounted to the lower case crimping mounting portion 335, and the locking claws of the main body crimping member 340 are inserted into the locking grooves in the upper case fixing portion 225a of the main board case 210. In this state, when removing the main board case 210 from the bracket member 330, the upper case fixing portion 225a of the main board case 210 is destroyed to release the locking state with the main body crimping member 340. Next, when the removed main board case 210 is mounted again to the bracket member 330, the crimping type member 345 is mounted to the upper case crimping mounting portion 334, and the main body crimping member 340 is mounted to the lower case crimping mounting portion 335, and the locking claw of the main body crimping member 340 is inserted into the locking groove in the lower case fixing portion 225b of the main board case 210. Then, when the main board case 210 is removed from the bracket member 330, the lower case fixing portion 225b of the main board case 210 is broken to release the locking state with the main body crimping member 340. Also, when the manufacturer or the like collects the main board case 210 removed from the bracket member 330, the used main body crimping member 340 removed from the lower case crimping mounting portion 335 (or the upper case crimping mounting portion 334) is engaged with the main body side temporary engagement portion 215 and the lid side temporary engagement portion 225c of the main board case 210. This restricts the sliding movement of the case lid 221 to the left (in the direction of removing the case lid 221) relative to the case body 211 of the main board case 210, making it possible to fix the case lid 221 so that it cannot be removed from the case body 211.

In addition to the main board case 210 being attached to the bracket member 330, the setting change device 350 is also attached to the bracket member 330. Specifically, the setting change device 350 is attached to the lower right part of the bracket member 330. To the left of the setting change device 350 in the lower right part of the bracket member 330, a cable cover 355 is attached to cover a cable harness (not shown) that extends from the setting change device 350 to the main control board 110 (connector 164 for setting change device) in the main board case 210. A groove-shaped second cover crimping attachment part 338 is formed in the lower right part of the bracket member 330, and a second cover crimping member 337 having a locking claw can be slid from the right side to the second cover crimping attachment part 338 and attached. When the cable cover 355 is attached to the bracket member 330, the second cover crimping member 337 attached to the second cover crimping attachment portion 338 is disposed inside the cable cover 355, and the locking claws of the second cover crimping member 337 are inserted into the locking grooves in the cable cover 355. Therefore, the cable cover 355 is fixed so that it cannot be removed from the bracket member 330 unless the cable cover 355 is destroyed to release the locking state with the second cover crimping member 337.

The setting change device 350 is a device that is operated when changing the setting value (such as the probability of winning a game role) of the slot machine 1 that determines the degree of advantage for the player. When the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the setting change key cylinder (not shown) provided on the setting change device 350 and rotated about 90 degrees clockwise, the setting change mode (a mode in which the setting value can be changed) is started. The setting change device 350 switches the above setting value among six levels from 1 to 6 each time the setting change switch (not shown) is pressed, and displays the setting value on the setting display lamp 151 (see FIG. 13) provided on the main control board 110. Then, when the start lever 25 provided on the front of the front door 2 is operated, the above setting value is confirmed, and when the setting change key is returned to its original position, the setting change mode is terminated and the mode is switched to normal mode. Furthermore, when the setting change key inserted into the setting change key cylinder is rotated approximately 90 degrees to the right (clockwise) while in normal mode, the main control board 110 starts the setting confirmation mode and displays the current setting value on the setting display lamp 151 on the main control board 110. Then, when the setting change key is returned to its original position, the setting confirmation mode ends and the mode transitions to normal mode.

<Configuration of main control board>
Next, the detailed configuration of the main control board 110 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 13. As shown in Fig. 13, the main control board 110 is configured to have a control chip 121, a plurality of ICs (also called "IC parts" or "IC drivers"), a monitor lamp 141 also called a monitor LED, a setting display lamp 151 also called a setting display monitor, an information display lamp 156 also called a role ratio monitor (corresponding to a performance display monitor in a pachinko game machine), a plurality of electric connectors such as a main board side connector 161, and a printed circuit board 111 on which these are mounted. The main control board 110 is configured to control the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 by operating each drive circuit etc. according to a control program stored in the ROM of the control chip 121. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted (some are illustrated by way of example and numbered), in the main control board 110, a plurality of capacitors including a film capacitor 171, a ceramic capacitor 172, an electrolytic capacitor 173, and a general capacitor 174, a plurality of transistors 175, a plurality of diodes 176, a plurality of resistor arrays 177, and a plurality of resistors 178 are mounted on the printed circuit board 111. The capacitors of the main control board 110 are used, for example, to stabilize the power supply of each IC. The transistors of the main control board 110 are used, for example, to drive each output circuit. The diodes of the main control board 110 are used, for example, as a static electricity countermeasure for each IC.

All elements mounted on the printed circuit board 111, excluding electrical connectors, such as the control chip 121, multiple ICs, monitor lamp 141, setting indicator lamp 151, and information indicator lamp 156, are covered by the case lid 221 of the main board case 210 when the main control board 110 is housed in the main board case 210. As described above, the main board case 210 is formed using a transparent resin material, and is configured so that the control chip 121, multiple ICs, monitor lamp 141, setting indicator lamp 151, and information indicator lamp 156 can be seen from the outside of the case lid 221.

A rectangular sticker pasting area AS is set on the upper central side of the main control board 110 (printed board 111). When viewed from the outside of the case lid 221, the sticker pasting area AS is an area that may overlap with the crimped use record sticker 248 pasted on the sticker pasting part 235 of the case lid 221. A rectangular solvent inflow area BS extending vertically is set on the right end of the main control board 110. The solvent inflow area BS is an area where, when the seal seal 242 of the main board case 210 is to be peeled off, the solvent used to peel off the seal seal 242 may flow into the main control board 110 inside the case. To the left and below the sticker pasting area AS on the main control board 110, a placement restriction area CS extending in a substantially L-shape is set. The placement restriction area CS is an area in which the placement of the setting display lamp 151 and the information display lamp 156 is restricted because it is close to the left side wall portion 221a and the lower wall portion 221b (see Figure 8) of the case lid 221 and there is a risk of visibility being impeded.

In addition, in the upper right corner of the printed circuit board 111, a drawing section 112 is provided on which the name of the board manufacturer is printed by a laser device or the like to prove that the main control board 110 is not an unauthorized board. This drawing section 112 is also covered by the case lid 221 of the main board case 210 when the main control board 110 is housed in the main board case 210, and is configured so that the drawing section 112 can be seen from the outside of the case lid 221. The drawing section 112 on which the name of the board manufacturer is drawn is positioned in a position that is not a sticker attachment area AS so that the name of the board manufacturer can be easily confirmed. Note that the name of the board manufacturer is not limited to being composed of characters only, and may be, for example, a combination of characters and a corporate mark, or may be a configuration that includes at least one of characters and figures.

The information display lamp 156 (and the setting display lamp 151) has a thicker shape than other electric elements, and if the drawing unit 112 is placed near the information display lamp 156 (and the setting display lamp 151), it may be hidden by the shadow of the information display lamp 156 (and the setting display lamp 151) and visibility may be reduced. Therefore, the drawing unit 112 is placed at a position away from the information display lamp 156 (and the setting display lamp 151) at a distance that does not interfere with the visibility of the drawing unit 112 when viewed from the outside of the case lid 221. The name of the board manufacturer is printed after all the electric elements are mounted on the printed circuit board 111. The soldered portion of the information display lamp 156 (and the setting display lamp 151) is relatively heat-sensitive and fragile. Therefore, when printing the board manufacturer's name using a laser device, it is preferable to position the drawing unit 112 away from the information display lamp 156 (and the setting display lamp 151) in order to prevent the heat of the laser from affecting the information display lamp 156 (and the setting display lamp 151).

The control chip 121 is configured with a CPU that performs various arithmetic processing related to the game, a ROM that is a read-only memory device that stores control programs and the like, and a RAM that is a memory device that can write and read information. The control chip 121 is mounted to the right of the center of the printed circuit board 111, that is, on the side of the printed circuit board 111 farther from the hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c. In order to make it easier to check whether or not the control chip 121 has been tampered with, the control chip 121 is placed in a position that is not a sticker attachment area AS. In addition, it is preferable that the control chip 121 is placed in a position that is not a solvent inflow area BS so that it is not adversely affected by the solvent. In addition, the control chip 121 is placed in a position that is a distance away from the setting display lamp 151 and the information display lamp 156 that allows the first to third display control ICs 132A to 132C to be placed.

The ICs include first and second oscillator ICs 131A to 131B, first to third display control ICs 132A to 132C, and first to eleventh main board ICs 133A to 133K. The first and second oscillator ICs 131A to 131B are electrically connected to the control chip 121 and are configured to generate a clock used in the control chip 121. The first and second oscillator ICs 131A to 131B are mounted on the right side of the center of the printed circuit board 111. The first and second oscillator ICs 131A to 131B are disposed in a position that is not a sticker attachment area AS, near the lower side of the control chip 121. The first and second oscillator ICs 131A to 131B may be disposed in a position that is a sticker attachment area AS, as long as they are near the control chip 121. This is because, unlike the control chip 121, there is less need to easily check whether or not any tampering has occurred.

The first to third display control ICs 132A to 132C are ICs for controlling the dynamic lighting of the seven-segment LEDs of the reserved number display lamp 46h, the payout number display lamp 46j, the setting display lamp 151, and the information display lamp 156. The first display control IC 132A is electrically connected to the control chip 121, and is also electrically connected to the main board side connector 161, the setting display lamp 151, and the information display lamp 156. The first display control IC 132A functions as a segment driver that sets (decodes) numbers and the like (numbers, alphabets, various symbols, etc.) to be displayed on the reserved number display lamp 46h, the payout number display lamp 46j, the setting display lamp 151, and the information display lamp 156 in response to a control signal sent from the control chip 121.

The second display control IC 132B is electrically connected to the control chip 121, and is electrically connected to the main board side connector 161 and the setting display lamp 151. The second display control IC 132B functions as a digit driver that switches whether numbers, etc. (set by the first display control IC 132A, which is a segment driver) are displayed on any of the digits (each digit) of the storage number display lamp 46h, the payout number display lamp 46j, and the setting display lamp 151 in response to a control signal transmitted from the control chip 121. The third display control IC 132C is electrically connected to the control chip 121, and is electrically connected to the information display lamp 156. The third display control IC 132C functions as a digit driver that switches whether numbers, etc. (set by the first display control IC 132A, which is a segment driver) are displayed on any of the digits (each digit) of the information display lamp 156 in response to a control signal transmitted from the control chip 121.

The first to third display control ICs 132A to 132C are mounted on the left side of the center of the printed circuit board 111, that is, on the side closer to the hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c on the printed circuit board 111. The first display control IC 132A is disposed to the left of the eleventh main board IC 133K in a position that will be the sticker attachment area AS. The second display control IC 132B is disposed below the first display control IC 132A in a position that will not be the sticker attachment area AS. The third display control IC 132C is disposed above the first display control IC 132A in a position that will be the sticker attachment area AS. All of the first to third display control ICs 132A to 132C may be disposed in positions that will be the sticker attachment area AS. This is because, like the first and second oscillator ICs 131A to 131B, there is little need to easily check whether or not any fraud has been committed.

The other ICs, the first to eleventh main board ICs 133A to 133K, are mounted on various parts of the printed circuit board 111. For example, as shown in FIG. 13, the main board ICs mounted on the right side of the printed circuit board 111 are the first main board IC 133A, the second main board IC 133B, and the third main board IC 133C. Also, for example, the main board ICs mounted on the upper central part of the printed circuit board 111 are the fourth main board IC 133D, the fifth main board IC 133E, the sixth main board IC 133F, the seventh main board IC 133G, the eighth main board IC 133H, the ninth main board IC 133I, the tenth main board IC 133J, and the eleventh main board IC 133K.

The first main board IC 133A is disposed above and to the right of the control chip 121. The second main board IC 133B is disposed above the control chip 121 and to the left of the first main board IC 133A. The third main board IC 133C is disposed below and near the control chip 121 and to the left of the first and second oscillator ICs 131A-131B. The first to third main board ICs 133A-133C are disposed in positions that do not constitute the sticker attachment area AS.

The fourth main board IC 133D is arranged above and to the left of the second main board IC 133B. The fifth main board IC 133E is arranged to the left of the fourth main board IC 133D. The sixth main board IC 133F is arranged below the fifth main board IC 133E. The seventh main board IC 133G is arranged below the sixth main board IC 133F. The eighth main board IC 133H is arranged below the seventh main board IC 133G. The ninth main board IC 133I is arranged to the left of the fifth main board IC 133E. The tenth main board IC 133J is arranged below the ninth main board IC 133I and to the left of the sixth main board IC 133F. The eleventh main board IC 133K is located below the tenth main board IC 133J and to the left of the seventh main board IC 133G. The fourth to eleventh main board ICs 133D to 133K are also located in the sticker attachment area AS.

The monitor lamp 141 is composed of 20 LED elements 142 arranged in two rows, 10 on each side, and is designed to emit light according to the operating state of each part of the slot machine 1. The monitor lamp 141 is used to check whether there is a malfunction or the like. For example, some of the 20 LED elements 142 constituting the monitor lamp 141 are designed to emit light when each of the reels 3a to 3c of the reel unit 60 is not positioned (or is positioned) at a predetermined rotation reference position. For example, the other part of the 20 LED elements 142 is designed to emit light when the start lever 25 is not in an operating state (or in an operating state). The monitor lamp 141 is mounted on the lower center side of the printed circuit board 111 (below the 4th to 11th main board ICs 133D to 133K). In order to make it easy to check the light-emitting state (on or off) of each LED element 142, the monitor lamp 141 is arranged in a position that is not in the sticker attachment area AS. In order to avoid any adverse effects of the solvent, it is preferable to place the monitor lamp 141 in a position that is not in the solvent inflow area BS. In addition, since the monitor lamp 141 is electrically connected to the main board side connector 161, it is preferable to place it near the main board side connector 161.

The multiple electrical connectors include a main board connector 161, a reel connector 162, a sub board connector 163, a setting change device connector 164, and a collator connector 165. The main board connector 161 is mounted on the left end of the printed circuit board 111, that is, on the side of the printed circuit board 111 closer to the hinge mechanisms 6a-6c than the first to third display control ICs 132A-132C, the setting display lamp 151, and the information display lamp 156. As described above, the main board connector 161 is adapted to be fitted and connected to the cable connector 192 provided at one end of the front door cable harness 191 (see FIG. 5).

The front door cable harness 191 is also electrically connected to a central display board 196 (see FIG. 5) disposed in the center of the rear side (rear side) of the front door 2. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the front door cable harness 191 is wired from the housing 5 to the front door 2 using a cable clamp 336 of the bracket member 330 and a plurality of cable clamps 194 disposed on the inner side of the left side plate 5a of the housing 5 (located on the side where the hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c are provided). At this time, the front door cable harness 191 is wired downward from the main board side connector 161 to the cable clamp 336 of the bracket member 330 so as not to cover the front of the information display lamp 156 (and the setting display lamp 151) disposed near the main board side connector 161 and impede visibility. However, the front door cable harness 191 may cover the cover portion 225 of the case lid 221 disposed to the left of the main board side connector 161, thereby hindering the visibility of the first and second case crimping members 340, 345, etc. For this reason, as described above, it is preferable to dispose the upper case fixing portion 225a engageable with the main body crimping member 340 on the upper side (relative to the lower case fixing portion 225b and the lid side temporary engagement portion 225c) of the cover portion 225. In this embodiment, the front door cable harness 191 is shown by a two-dot chain line in Figures 5 and 6 in order to easily explain the positional relationship with other components.

The central display board 196 is electrically connected to the left relay board 197 and the right relay board 198, etc., which are provided on the left and right rear sides of the reel window W. The left relay board 197 and the right relay board 198 are mounted with or electrically connected to various display lamps (BET number display lamp 46b, insertion possible display lamp 46c, game start display lamp 46d, replay display lamp 46e, status display lamp 46f, storage number display lamp 46h, payout number display lamp 46j, etc.) that are arranged in the reel window W described above. As a result, control signals for controlling the operation of the various display lamps are transmitted from the main control board 110 to the left relay board 197 and the right relay board 198 via the front door cable harness 191 and the central display board 196, and the operation of the various display lamps is controlled by the main control board 110.

As described above, the control signals for controlling the operation of the stored number display lamp 46h and the payout number display lamp 46j are configured to be output from the main board side connector 161 via the control chip 121, the first display control IC 132A, and the second display control IC 132B of the main control board 110. Control signals for controlling the operation of the BET number display lamp 46b, the insertion possible display lamp 46c, the game start display lamp 46d, the replay display lamp 46e, etc. are also configured to be output from the main board side connector 161 via the control chip 121, the first display control IC 132A, and the second display control IC 132B of the main control board 110.

The reel connector 162 is mounted on the lower left side of the printed circuit board 111. As described above, the reel connector 162 is adapted to be fitted and connected to the connector of the cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to the reel control board (not shown). The sub-board connector 163 is mounted in the center of the lower end of the printed circuit board 111. As described above, the sub-board connector 163 is adapted to be fitted and connected to the connector of the cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to the sub-control board (not shown). The setting change device connector 164 is mounted on the lower left side of the printed circuit board 111. As described above, the setting change device connector 164 is adapted to be fitted and connected to the connector of the cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to the setting change device 350. The collator connector 165 is mounted on the lower left side of the printed circuit board 111 alongside the setting change device connector 164. As described above, the collator connector 165 is adapted to be fitted and connected to the connector of the cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to the collator (not shown).

As mentioned above, the setting display lamp 151 is a 7-segment display of the setting value of the slot machine 1 that determines the degree of advantage for the player. The setting display lamp 151 is constructed using a 7-segment LED capable of displaying a single digit number. The setting display lamp 151 is mounted to the left of the center of the printed circuit board 111, that is, on the side of the printed circuit board 111 closer to the hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c than the control chip 121. To make it easy to check the setting value displayed by the setting display lamp 151, the setting display lamp 151 is placed between the first display control IC 132A and the main board side connector 161, in a position that is not within the sticker attachment area AS or placement restriction area CS.

The information display lamp 156 displays information about the role ratio in seven segments. The information display lamp 156 is configured using a seven-segment LED capable of displaying four-digit numbers, etc. As information about the role ratio, for example, a four-digit number combining a two-digit identifier code indicating the type of role ratio, etc. (role ratio, continuous role ratio, favorable period ratio, etc.) and a two-digit ratio corresponding to the identifier code can be displayed by the information display lamp 156. The information display lamp 156 is mounted on the left side of the center of the printed circuit board 111, that is, on the side closer to the hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c than the control chip 121 on the printed circuit board 111. In order to make it easier to check the information about the role ratio displayed by the information display lamp 156, the information display lamp 156 is disposed between the first display control IC 132A and the third display control IC 132C, at a position that is not in the sticker attachment area AS or the placement restriction area CS. In addition, since there is a possibility that the information display lamp 156 may be blocked by the usage record sticker 248 when viewed from diagonally forward, it is not preferable to place the information display lamp 156 adjacent to the sticker attachment area AS. Therefore, it is preferable to place the information display lamp 156 at a distance to the left of the sticker attachment area AS that allows the information display lamp 156 to be viewed from diagonally forward right without being blocked by the crimped usage record sticker 248.

In addition, unlike the control chip 121, the information display lamp 156 (and the setting display lamp 151) are reusable parts. Therefore, if an attempt is made to peel off the sealing seal 242 from the main board case 210 and the solvent used to peel off the sealing seal 242 flows into the main control board 110 inside the case, it is preferable that the solvent does not adhere to the information display lamp 156 (and the setting display lamp 151). Therefore, the information display lamp 156 (and the setting display lamp 151) are positioned so that they do not become part of the solvent inflow area BS.

In order to efficiently form the conductor pattern on the printed circuit board 111 (without complicating it), it is preferable to mount the information display lamp 156 on the path of the conductor pattern between the first and third display control ICs 132A, 132C and the main board side connector 161. Therefore, the information display lamp 156 is disposed near the first and third display control ICs 132A, 132C and near the main board side connector 161. The information display lamp 156 is electrically connected to the first and third display control ICs 132A, 132C, and has a distance from the first and third display control ICs 132A, 132C that is close enough to prevent other electrical elements (ICs, etc.) from being provided on the main control board 110. The information display lamp 156 also has a distance from the main board side connector 161 that is close enough to prevent other electrical elements (ICs, etc.) from being provided on the main control board 110. If other electrical elements (ICs, etc.) are provided between the information display lamp 156 and the first and third display control ICs 132A, 132C or the main board side connector 161, it will be necessary to bypass them, making it difficult to efficiently form the conductor pattern.

As described above, the first display control IC 132A is used as both the segment driver for the setting display lamp 151 and the segment driver for the information display lamp 156. In order to efficiently form a conductor pattern on the printed circuit board 111, it is preferable to mount the information display lamp 156 near the setting display lamp 151. Therefore, the information display lamp 156 is arranged near the upper part of the setting display lamp 151. The information display lamp 156 is spaced from the setting display lamp 151 close enough that other electrical elements (ICs, etc.) on the main control board 110 are not provided. However, in order to prevent the numbers displayed by the setting display lamp 151 and the information display lamp 156 from being mistaken for a series of (five-digit) numbers, it is preferable that the setting display lamp 151 and the information display lamp 156 are arranged so that they are not aligned horizontally.

The light emitted from each LED element 142 of the monitor lamp 141 is light with a relatively high brightness. Therefore, if the information display lamp 156 is placed near the monitor lamp 141, the light emitted from each LED element 142 may reach the information display lamp 156, which may reduce the visibility of the information related to the role ratio displayed by the information display lamp 156. Therefore, the information display lamp 156 is placed at a distance away from the monitor lamp 141 such that the light from each LED element 142 does not reach the information display lamp 156.
When other electric elements are arranged so as to block the light from LED element 142, the distance between information display lamp 156 and monitor lamp 141 may be a distance that allows the light from each LED element 142 to reach information display lamp 156. Note that information display lamp 156 can also be arranged in the vicinity of monitor lamp 141, and in this case, the information on the role ratio displayed by information display lamp 156 and the light emission state of each LED element 142 can be simultaneously visually confirmed, so that it is possible to reduce the effort required for confirmation.

If the main board side connector 161 is placed above the information display lamp 156, the front door cable harness 191 electrically connected to the main board side connector 161 may hang down and cover the front of the information display lamp 156, hindering visibility. Therefore, the main board side connector 161 is placed near the left of the information display lamp 156, excluding the area above the information display lamp 156. For the same reason, other electrical connectors such as the reel connector 162, the auxiliary board connector 163, the setting change device connector 164, and the collator connector 165 are also placed in positions excluding the area above the information display lamp 156. In addition, even if the electrical connectors such as the main board side connector 161 are placed in positions excluding the area above the information display lamp 156, if there is a possibility that the cable harness will cover the front of the information display lamp 156 and hinder visibility, it is preferable to avoid such positions.

The left side portion of the main board case 210, where the main board connector 161 is exposed, is fixed to the bracket member 330 by the first and second case crimping members 340, 945. When attempting to break the upper case fixing portion 225a of the main board case 210 to release the engagement with the main body crimping member 340 (for example, when burning it off with a hot cutter), it is preferable that the information display lamp 156 inside the case is not broken by mistake. For this reason, the information display lamp 156 is positioned to the right of the upper case fixing portion 225a of the main board case 210, at a distance sufficient to allow other electrical elements (such as the main board connector 161) in the main control board 110 to be provided.

As described above, the connector cover 246 is attached to the case lid 221 of the main board case 210 by the first cover crimping member 228. When attempting to destroy the connector cover 246 to release the engagement with the first cover crimping member 228 (for example, when burning it off with a hot cutter), it is preferable that the information display lamp 156 inside the case is not destroyed by mistake. For this reason, the information display lamp 156 is positioned so that it does not overlap with the first cover crimping attachment portion 229 of the case lid 221 (a position away from the first cover crimping member 228) when viewed from outside the case lid 221.

If the distance between the case cover 221 of the main board case 210 and the information display lamp 156 is too large, the visibility of the information display lamp 156 may be reduced depending on the viewing angle due to the influence of light reflection on the case cover 221. Therefore, as described above, a recess 237 is formed in the part of the case cover 221 of the main board case 210 that overlaps with the information display lamp 156. This recess 237 makes it possible to reduce the distance between the case cover 221 (recess 237) of the main board case 210 and the information display lamp 156, thereby suppressing the influence of light reflection on the case cover 221 and improving the visibility of the information display lamp 156. Also, as described above, the right wall portion 237d of the recess 237 is formed in a wall shape that inclines to the right (farther from the hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c) as it moves forward. This right wall 237d allows the information display lamp 156 to be seen through the recess 237 (bottom 237e) of the case lid 221 without interfering with the ceiling of the case lid 221, even when the main board case 210 inside the housing 5 is viewed from the diagonally front right side of the front door 2 opening.

In addition, it is preferable that the distance between the bottom 237e of the recess 237 and the information display lamp 156 is about 0.5 mm.
By ensuring a gap between the case cover 221 and the information display lamp 156, it is possible to prevent actions such as trying to destroy the information display lamp 156 by pushing the case cover 221 from the outside or trying to destroy the information display lamp 156 by generating static electricity, while ensuring the visibility of the information display lamp 156. Furthermore, when the distance between the bottom 237e of the recess 237 and the information display lamp 156 is about 0.5 mm, in order to ensure the visibility of the information display lamp 156, it is preferable that the length and width of the bottom 237e be larger on each side by about 1 mm than the information display lamp 156.

In the main control device 100 configured as above, to check each part of the main control board 110 housed in the main board case 210, with the front door 2 open, the main board case 210 attached in the housing 5 is viewed from the front or from the right diagonally forward. At this time, since the information display lamp 156 is arranged in a position that is not the sticker attachment area AS on the main control board 110 (printed board 111), the information on the role ratio displayed by the information display lamp 156 can be confirmed through the recess 237 (bottom 237e) of the case lid 221 without being blocked by the crimped use record sticker 248. Similarly, since the setting display lamp 151 is also arranged in a position that is not the sticker attachment area AS on the main control board 110, the setting value displayed by the setting display lamp 151 can be confirmed through the case lid 221 without being blocked by the crimped use record sticker 248. The monitor lamp 141 is also positioned on the main control board 110 in a location that is not in the sticker attachment area AS, so it is possible to check the light emission state of each LED element 142 that constitutes the monitor lamp 141 through the case lid 221 without being blocked by the crimped usage record sticker 248. The control chip 121 is also positioned on the main control board 110 in a location that is not in the sticker attachment area AS, so it is possible to check through the case lid 221 whether or not tampering has been done to the control chip 121 without being blocked by the crimped usage record sticker 248.

<Modification>
In this embodiment, when a common main control board is used by a plurality of board manufacturers, a plurality of drawing sections corresponding to the number of board manufacturers may be provided on the main control board, and the drawing section on which the name of the board manufacturer who actually manufactured the main control board is printed may be left, and the other drawing sections may be removed from the main control board. For example, as shown in Fig. 14, when a common main control board 110A is used by two board manufacturers, two drawing sections 112A and 112B on which the names of the two board manufacturers are printed by a laser device or the like may be provided in the upper right part of the printed circuit board 111.

The first and second drawing sections 112A, 112B are arranged side by side along the outer periphery of the main control board 110A (printed circuit board 111). The first and second drawing sections 112A, 112B are connected to the printed circuit board 111 via perforated joints, and are configured so that they can be individually removed from the printed circuit board 111. As a result, of the first and second drawing sections 112A, 112B, the drawing section on which the name of the board manufacturer that actually manufactured the main control board 110A is printed can be left, and the other drawing section can be removed from the main control board 110A. Therefore, even if a common main control board 110 is used by multiple (two) board manufacturers, it is possible to provide the main control board 110A with a drawing section on which the name of the board manufacturer that manufactured the main control board 110A is printed.

As in the above-described embodiment, the first and second drawing sections 112A, 112B are positioned so as not to be in the sticker attachment area AS, so that the name of the board manufacturer can be easily confirmed. As in the above-described embodiment, the first and second drawing sections 112A, 112B are positioned so as to be away from the information display lamp 156 (and the setting display lamp 151) by a distance that does not impede the visibility of each drawing section when viewed from outside the case lid 221. Also, when one of the first and second drawing sections 112A, 112B is removed from the main control board 110 while leaving the other, the force acting during the removal does not affect the information display lamp 156 (and the setting display lamp 151).
), it is preferable that the first and second drawing units 112A, 112B are located away from the information display lamp 156 (and the setting display lamp 151).

Below, other characteristic configurations applicable to the above-mentioned main control boards 110, 110A will be described with additional reference to Figures 15 to 27. Below, the characteristic configurations will be described using a main control board 410 that is different from the main control boards 110, 110A. This main control board 410 can be used in the slot machine 1 in place of the main control boards 110, 110A. The characteristic configurations of the main control board 410 described below can be similarly applied to the main control boards 110, 110A. It is also possible to apply the above-mentioned configurations of the main control boards 110, 110A to the main control board 410.

Furthermore, the characteristic configuration described below is not limited to the slot machine of this embodiment, but can be combined with pachinko gaming machines and other embodiments. In the following description, the directions indicated by the arrows in Figures 15 to 18 will be described as the up-down and left-right directions, respectively. These directions are consistent with the up-down and left-right directions indicated by the arrows in Figure 2.

<Aspects of lead wires of electric elements mounted on a substrate>
The main control board 410 is mainly composed of a printed circuit board 411 and a plurality of electric elements (electronic components) mounted on a surface portion (also referred to as a "first surface portion") FS of the printed circuit board 411. As shown in FIG. 15, a plurality of types of electric elements are mounted in a predetermined area (an area within a rectangular frame line FB10 shown by a solid line) on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411. Specifically, as the plurality of types of electric elements, one IC driver 420A arranged in a horizontally placed state (a state in which the longitudinal direction of the component is parallel to the left-right direction), four resistors 430A arranged in a line in the left-right direction in a vertically placed state (a state in which the longitudinal direction of the component is parallel to the up-down direction), two resistors 430B arranged in a line in the up-down direction in a horizontally placed state, an IC socket 440A to which one control chip 450A is attached in a horizontally placed state, and four ceramic capacitors 460A arranged in a line in the left-right direction in a vertically placed state are respectively mounted.

In FIG. 15, five rectangular frame lines FB11 to FB15 are shown in two-dot chain lines. These rectangular frame lines FB11 to FB15 are frame lines shown for convenience in order to explain the area where electrical elements are mounted on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411, and are not actually formed on the surface portion FS by printing or the like. The rectangular frame line FB11 indicates the area where the IC driver 420A is mounted, and the rectangular frame line FB12 indicates the area where four resistors 430A are mounted. Similarly, the rectangular frame line FB13 indicates the area where two resistors 430B are mounted, the rectangular frame line FB14 indicates the area where the control chip 450A is mounted via the IC socket 440A, and the rectangular frame line FB15 indicates the area where four ceramic capacitors 460A are mounted.

The IC driver 420A has a rectangular parallelepiped package section (also called "main body") 421 and multiple lead wires (also called "legs" or "terminals") 422 (in this example, 18 on each side along the longitudinal direction of the package section 421, totaling 36) extending from the package section 421. The tip of each lead wire 422 is thinner than the base (close to the package section 421), and is inserted and soldered into a number of predetermined through holes (not shown) formed in the printed circuit board 411. The resistors 430A and 430B have a cylindrical package section 431 and two lead wires 432 extending from both longitudinal ends of the package section 431, and each lead wire 432 is inserted and soldered into a number of predetermined through holes formed in the printed circuit board 411.

The control chip 450A has a rectangular parallelepiped package part 451 and a plurality of lead wires 452 (in this example, 36 on each side along the longitudinal direction of the package part 451, totaling 72) extending from the package part 451. The IC socket 440A has a receiving frame part 441 that receives the package part 451 of the control chip 450A and a plurality of lead wires 442 (72, the same number as the lead wires 452 of the control chip 450A) extending from the receiving frame part 441 (see FIG. 16). Each lead wire 442 of the IC socket 440A is electrically connected to each lead wire 452 of the control chip 450A, and is inserted and soldered into a predetermined number of through holes formed in the printed circuit board 411. The ceramic capacitor 460A has an elliptical plate-shaped package portion 461 and two lead wires 462 extending from the package portion 461, and each lead wire 462 is inserted and soldered into a predetermined number of through holes formed in the printed circuit board 411.

Figure 16 shows the main control board 410 as viewed from the front side from the rear surface RS (also referred to as the "second surface") of the printed circuit board 411. The rectangular frame line FB20 shown by a solid line in Figure 16 corresponds to the rectangular frame line FB10 shown in Figure 15 (showing an area of the same position and size on the front surface FS and rear surface RS of the printed circuit board 411), and the five rectangular frame lines FB21 to FB25 shown by dashed two-dot lines in Figure 16 correspond to the five rectangular frame lines FB11 to FB15 shown in Figure 15, respectively. The rectangular frame lines FB21 to FB25, like the rectangular frame lines FB11 to FB15, are frame lines shown for the sake of convenience in order to explain the area in which electrical elements are mounted, and are not actually formed by printing or the like on the rear surface RS.

As shown in FIG. 16, a large number of lead wires are soldered to the printed circuit board 411 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB20 on the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 411. Specifically, a total of 32 lead wires 422 are soldered to the area within the rectangular frame line FB21, and a total of 8 lead wires 432 are soldered to the area within the rectangular frame line FB22. In addition, a total of 4 lead wires 432 are soldered to the area within the rectangular frame line FB23, a total of 72 lead wires 442 are soldered to the area within the rectangular frame line FB24, and a total of 8 lead wires 462 are soldered to the area within the rectangular frame line FB25.

The 32 lead wires 422 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21 and the 8 lead wires 432 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB22 are arranged relatively close to each other in the left-right direction on the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 411. The 32 lead wires 422 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21 are arranged in two rows, one above the other, and the 8 lead wires 432 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB22 are also arranged in two rows, one above the other, and the lead wires 432 in each row are arranged in the left-right direction, and in this respect the two are similar. However, the arrangement pitch (the distance between adjacent lead wires 422) of the lead wires 422 arranged in the left-right direction in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21 is different from the arrangement pitch of the lead wires 432 arranged in the left-right direction in the area within the rectangular frame line FB22 (the former arrangement pitch is shorter than the latter arrangement pitch). In addition, the distance between the lead wire 422 located at the top right corner of the area within the rectangular frame line FB21 and the lead wire 432 located at the top left corner of the area within the rectangular frame line FB22 (also referred to as the "shortest distance between the lead wire 422 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21 and the lead wire 432 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB22") is different from the left-right arrangement pitch of each lead wire 422 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21 and the left-right arrangement pitch of each lead wire 432 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB22 (the former distance is longer than the latter two arrangement pitches).

Furthermore, the vertical positions of the lead wires 422 arranged in the upper row in the left-right direction in the region within the rectangular frame line FB21 are different from the vertical positions of the lead wires 432 arranged in the upper row in the left-right direction in the region within the rectangular frame line FB22 (the former are located higher than the latter). Similarly, the vertical positions of the lead wires 422 arranged in the lower row in the left-right direction in the region within the rectangular frame line FB21 are also different from the vertical positions of the lead wires 432 arranged in the upper row in the left-right direction in the region within the rectangular frame line FB22 (the former are located lower than the latter). In this way, based on the difference between the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 422 in the area within rectangular frame line FB21 and the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 432 in the area within rectangular frame line FB22, and the shortest distance between the lead wires 422 in the area within rectangular frame line FB21 and the lead wires 432 in the area within rectangular frame line FB22, and based on the difference between the up-down position of each lead wire 422 lined up in the left-right direction in each row in the area within rectangular frame line FB21 and the up-down position of each lead wire 432 lined up in the left-right direction in each row in the area within rectangular frame line FB22, it can be inferred that the type of electrical element having each lead wire 422 in the area within rectangular frame line FB21 is different from the type of electrical element having each lead wire 432 in the area within rectangular frame line FB22. By focusing on similar points, it can be inferred that the type of electrical element having each lead wire 432 in the area within rectangular frame line FB23 is different from the type of electrical element having each lead wire 422 in the area within rectangular frame line FB21 and the type of electrical element having each lead wire 442 in the area within rectangular frame line FB24, and that the type of electrical element having each lead wire 442 in the area within rectangular frame line FB24 is different from the type of electrical element having each lead wire 462 in the area within rectangular frame line FB25.

As described above, the 32 lead wires 422 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21 are divided into two rows, one above the other, with 16 lead wires 422 in each row arranged in the left-right direction. The arrangement pitch of the lead wires 422 arranged in the left-right direction is significantly shorter than the distance between the two rows. In addition, each lead wire 422 (the tip of each lead wire) protrudes linearly from the solder part (the part formed by the hardened solder material) SLR by a predetermined length from the back surface part RS in a vertical position relative to the back surface part RS. From the characteristics of the form of each lead wire 422 (the number of lead wires, the arrangement pitch of the lead wires, the arrangement of the lead wires, the distance between the rows of the lead wires, the shape (position) of the lead wires, the protruding length of the lead wires, etc.), it is possible to infer, from the back surface part RS side of the printed circuit board 411, that each lead wire 422 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21 is an IC driver (IC driver 420A in this example) arranged in a horizontal position among multiple types of electric elements.

As described above, the eight lead wires 432 in the region within the rectangular frame line FB22 are also divided into two rows, one above the other, with four lead wires 432 in each row arranged in the left-right direction. The arrangement pitch of the lead wires 432 arranged in the left-right direction is shorter than the distance between the two rows, but is longer than the arrangement pitch of the lead wires 422 arranged in the left-right direction in the region within the rectangular frame line FB21. From this, it can be inferred that the eight lead wires 432 soldered in the region within the rectangular frame line FB22 are paired (set) with each lead wire 432 in the upper row and each lead wire 432 in the lower row, and that the upper and lower pairs of lead wires 432 belong to a single electrical element. Based on this assumption, and focusing on the pair of upper and lower lead wires, the upper lead wire 432 extends from the back surface portion RS by a predetermined length in a position where it is bent diagonally downward from the solder portion SLR, and the lower lead wire 432 extends from the back surface portion RS by a predetermined length in a position where it is bent diagonally upward from the solder portion SLR. In other words, when the back surface portion RS of the printed circuit board 411 is viewed from the front as shown in FIG. 16, the upper lead wire 432 is inclined to the left by an angle of about 10° with respect to a virtual line segment (not shown) connecting the root portion of the upper lead wire 432 (the original portion extending from the solder portion SLR) and the root portion of the lower lead wire 432, and the lower lead wire 432 is also inclined to the left by an angle of about 10°.

From the characteristics of each lead wire 432 (the number of lead wires, the arrangement pitch of the lead wires, the arrangement of the lead wires, the distance between the rows of the lead wires, the shape (posture) of the lead wires, the way the lead wires are bent, etc.), it is possible to infer from the back surface RS side of the printed circuit board 411 that the eight lead wires 432 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB22 are paired (set) with each lead wire 432 in the upper row and each lead wire 432 in the lower row, and that each pair of lead wires 432 is a resistor (resistor 430A in this example) arranged vertically among multiple types of electrical elements.

In addition, the four lead wires 432 in the region within the rectangular frame line FB23 are divided into two rows, one on the left and one on the right, with two lead wires 432 in each row arranged vertically. The arrangement pitch of the lead wires 432 arranged vertically is shorter than the distance between the two rows, but is longer than the arrangement pitch of the lead wires 422 arranged horizontally in the region within the rectangular frame line FB21. From this, it is possible to infer that the four lead wires 432 soldered in the region within the rectangular frame line FB23 are paired (set) with each lead wire 432 in the left row and each lead wire 432 in the right row, and that the pair of left and right lead wires 432 is one electrical element. With this inference, focusing on the pair of left and right lead wires, the left lead wire 432 extends from the solder part SLR in a position bent diagonally downward to the right, and the two lead wires 432 in the right row extend from the solder part SLR in a position bent diagonally downward to the left. In other words, when the rear surface RS of the printed circuit board 411 is viewed from the front, the left lead wire 432 is inclined downward at an angle of about 10° with respect to an imaginary line segment (not shown) connecting the root portion of the left lead wire 432 and the root portion of the right lead wire 432, and the right lead wire 432 is also inclined downward at an angle of about 10°.

Based on the characteristics of each lead wire 432 (the number of lead wires, the arrangement pitch of the lead wires, the arrangement of the lead wires, the shape (posture) of the lead wires, the way the lead wires are bent, etc.), it is possible to infer from the rear surface RS side of the printed circuit board 411 that the four lead wires 432 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB23 are paired (set) with each lead wire 432 in the left column and each lead wire 432 in the right column, and that each pair of lead wires 432 is a resistor (resistor 430B in this example) arranged horizontally among multiple types of electrical elements.

The 72 lead wires 442 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB24 are divided into four rows, one above the other, with 18 lead wires 442 in each row arranged in the left-right direction. The distance between the first and second rows from the top and the distance between the third and fourth rows from the top are significantly shorter than the distance between the second and third rows from the top. The lead wires 442 in the first row from the top and the lead wires 442 in the second row from the top are arranged alternately in the left-right direction, and the lead wires 442 in the third row from the top and the lead wires 442 in the fourth row from the top are also arranged alternately in the left-right direction. The arrangement pitch of the lead wires 442 arranged in the left-right direction in each row is significantly narrower than the distance between the second and third rows from the top. The lead wires 442 (the tips of the lead wires 442) protrude linearly from the solder section SLR by a predetermined length in a perpendicular position to the back surface section RS. From the characteristics of each lead wire 422 (the number of lead wires, the arrangement pitch of the lead wires, the arrangement of the lead wires, the distance between the rows of the lead wires, the shape (posture) of the lead wires, the protruding length of the lead wires, etc.), it is possible to infer, from the rear surface RS side of the printed circuit board 411, that each lead wire 442 soldered to the area within the rectangular frame line FB24 is an IC socket (IC socket 440A in this example) of multiple types of electrical elements, and that a control chip (control chip 450A in this example) is attached to the IC socket.

Moreover, the eight lead wires 462 in the region within the rectangular frame line FB25 are divided into two rows, one above the other, and four lead wires 462 in each row are arranged in the left-right direction. The arrangement pitch of the lead wires 462 arranged in the left-right direction is narrower than the distance between the two rows, but is wider than the arrangement pitch of the lead wires 422 arranged in the left-right direction in the region within the rectangular frame line FB21. From this, it can be inferred that the eight lead wires 462 soldered in the region within the rectangular frame line FB25 are paired (set) with each lead wire 462 in the upper row and each lead wire 462 in the lower row, and that the pair of upper and lower lead wires 462 is one electric element. With this inference, focusing on the pair of upper and lower lead wires, the upper lead wire 462 extends from the solder part SLR in a bent obliquely upward to the right, and the lower lead wire 462 extends from the solder part SLR in a bent obliquely downward to the left. In other words, when the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 411 is viewed from the front, the upper lead wire 462 is inclined to the right by an angle of approximately 160° and the lower lead wire 462 is inclined to the left by an angle of approximately 160° with respect to an imaginary line segment (not shown) connecting the root portion of the upper lead wire 462 and the root portion of the lower lead wire 462.

Based on the characteristics of each lead wire 462 (the number of lead wires, the arrangement pitch of the lead wires, the arrangement of the lead wires, the distance between the rows of the lead wires, the shape (posture) of the lead wires, the way the lead wires are bent, etc.), it is possible to infer from the rear surface RS side of the printed circuit board 411 that the eight lead wires 462 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB25 are paired (set) with each lead wire 462 in the upper row and each lead wire 462 in the lower row, and that each pair of lead wires 462 is a ceramic capacitor (ceramic capacitor 460A in this example) arranged vertically among multiple types of electrical elements.

As shown in FIG. 17, multiple types of electrical elements are also mounted in another predetermined area (area within rectangular frame FB30 shown by solid lines) on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411. Specifically, the multiple types of electrical elements mounted include one information display lamp 470A arranged horizontally, one resistor array 480A arranged horizontally, and one LED element 490A arranged independently.

In FIG. 17, three rectangular frame lines FB31 to FB33 are shown, which are dashed two-dot lines. These rectangular frame lines FB31 to FB33 are frame lines shown for the sake of convenience in order to explain the area on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411 where electrical elements are mounted, and are not actually formed on the surface portion FS by printing or the like. The rectangular frame line FB31 indicates the area where the information display lamp 470A is mounted, the rectangular frame line FB32 indicates the area where the resistor array 480A is mounted, and the rectangular frame line FB33 indicates the area where the LED element 490A is mounted.

The information display lamp 470A has a rectangular parallelepiped package section 471 (having a 7-segment LED on its front section capable of displaying information such as a 4-digit number related to the role ratio) and a plurality of lead wires 472 (12 in this example, see FIG. 18) extending from the package section 471. Each lead wire 472 is inserted into a predetermined plurality of through holes (not shown) formed in the main control board 410 and soldered. The resistor array 480A has a rounded rectangular parallelepiped package section 481 and a plurality of lead wires 482 (9 in this example, see FIG. 18) extending from the package section 481, and each lead wire 482 is inserted into a predetermined plurality of through holes formed in the printed circuit board 411 and soldered. The LED element 490A has a shotgun-shaped, light-transmitting package 491 and two lead wires 482 (see FIG. 18) extending from the package 491, with each lead wire 492 being inserted and soldered into two predetermined through holes formed in the printed circuit board 411.

Fig. 18 shows the main control board 410 as viewed from the front side from the rear surface RS side of the printed circuit board 411. The rectangular frame line FB40 shown by a solid line in Fig. 18 corresponds to the rectangular frame line FB30 shown in Fig. 17 (showing the same position and the same size range on the front surface FS and rear surface RS of the printed circuit board 411), and the three rectangular frame lines FB41 to FB43 shown by two-dot chain lines in Fig. 18 correspond to the three rectangular frame lines FB31 to FB33 shown in Fig. 17. The rectangular frame lines FB41 to FB43, like the rectangular frame lines FB31 to FB33, are frame lines shown for convenience in order to explain the area in which the electric elements are mounted, and are not actually formed by printing or the like on the rear surface RS.

As shown in FIG. 18, a plurality of lead wires are soldered to the printed circuit board 411 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB40 on the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 411. Specifically, a total of 12 lead wires 472 are soldered to the area within the rectangular frame line FB41, a total of 9 lead wires 482 are soldered to the area within the rectangular frame line FB42, and a total of 2 lead wires 432 are soldered to the area within the rectangular frame line FB43.

The twelve lead wires 472 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB41 are divided into two rows, one above the other, with six lead wires 472 in each row arranged in the left-right direction. The arrangement pitch of the lead wires 472 arranged in the left-right direction is slightly narrower than the distance between the two rows. In addition, each lead wire 472 (the tip of each lead wire) protrudes linearly from the solder part SLR by a predetermined length from the back surface part RS in a vertical position relative to the back surface part RS. From the characteristics of the form of each lead wire 472 (the number of lead wires, the arrangement pitch of the lead wires, the arrangement of the lead wires, the distance between the rows of the lead wires, the shape (position) of the lead wires, the protruding length of the lead wires, etc.), it is possible to infer, when viewed from the back surface part RS side of the printed circuit board 411, that each lead wire 472 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB41 is an information display lamp (information display lamp 470A in this example) arranged in a horizontal position among multiple types of electric elements.

The nine lead wires 482 in the region within the rectangular frame line FB42 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction. The arrangement pitch of each lead wire 482 is approximately the same as the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 472 arranged in the left-right direction in the region within the rectangular frame line FB41. Of the nine lead wires 482, the three lead wires 482 at the left end and the three lead wires 482 at the right end protrude linearly from the solder part SLR by a predetermined length from the back surface part RS in a position perpendicular to the back surface part RS. On the other hand, of the nine lead wires 482, the three lead wires 482 in the center extend from the solder part SLR by a predetermined length from the back surface part RS in a position bent upward or downward. In detail, of the three lead wires 482 in the center, the two right-hand lead wires 482 extend from the rear surface RS in a position where they are bent downward from the solder portion SLR, and the one left-hand lead wire 482 extends from the rear surface RS in a position where they are bent upward from the solder portion SLR. From the characteristics of the state of each lead wire 482 (number of lead wires, arrangement pitch of lead wires, arrangement of lead wires, shape (position) of lead wires, bending of lead wires, etc.), it is possible to infer from the rear surface RS side of the printed circuit board 411 that the nine lead wires 482 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB42 are a resistor array (resistor array 480A in this example) arranged horizontally among multiple types of electric elements.

The two lead wires 492 in the region within the rectangular frame line FB43 are arranged in a line in the vertical direction. The arrangement pitch of the lead wires 492 is approximately the same as the arrangement pitch of the lead wires 472 arranged in the horizontal direction in the region within the rectangular frame line FB41. The two lead wires 492 extend from the solder section SLR by a predetermined length in a manner that bends to the right or downward. In detail, of the two lead wires 492, the upper lead wire 492 extends from the back surface portion RS in a manner that bends to the right from the solder section SLR, and the lower lead wire 492 extends from the back surface portion RS in a manner that bends downward from the solder section SLR. From the characteristics of each lead wire 492 (the number of lead wires, the arrangement pitch of the lead wires, the arrangement of the lead wires, the shape (posture) of the lead wires, the manner in which the lead wires are bent, etc.), it is possible to infer, when viewed from the back surface RS side of the printed circuit board 411, that the two lead wires 492 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB43 are LED elements (LED element 490A in this example) among multiple types of electrical elements.

In this way, in the main control board 410, it is possible to infer what type of electrical element is arranged in what position and in what orientation based on the state of each lead wire soldered to the printed circuit board 411 when viewed from the back side RS side of the printed circuit board 411. Therefore, the arrangement of various electrical elements mounted on the front side can be confirmed simply by viewing the main control board 410 from the back side and visually checking the state of each lead wire. Also, when inspecting the main control board 410 (inspection before placing the main control board 410 in the main board case or after removing it from the main board case), if a defect such as a crack in the solder part or the like is found in a predetermined area (position) of the back side RS of the printed circuit board 411 when viewing the main control board 410 from the back side, it is possible to quickly infer what type of electrical element is causing the defect by visually checking the state of each lead wire in that area, and therefore work to correct the discovered defect (for example, replacing the electrical element, etc.) can be performed smoothly. The lead wire configuration includes, but is not limited to, the number of lead wires, the arrangement pitch of the lead wires, the arrangement of the lead wires, the distance between the rows of the lead wires, the shape (posture) of the lead wires, the bending of the lead wires, and the protruding length of the lead wires. The lead wire configuration may also include aspects related to the strength of the lead wires, such as the thickness and cross-sectional shape of the lead wires (the shape of the lead wires when viewed from the axial direction).

In addition, three or more electric elements of the same type (same kind and model) may be arranged and mounted on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411. In that case, even if the electric elements are the same type, the state of the lead wires of those electric elements on the back portion RS of the printed circuit board 411 may be different. For example, when three or more IC drivers of the same type are arranged, the lead wires of the IC drivers arranged at both ends of the arrangement are arranged to protrude linearly from the back portion RS by a predetermined length in a vertical position relative to the back portion RS, while the lead wires of the IC driver arranged in the center are arranged to protrude from the back portion RS in a tilted position relative to the back portion RS. By taking such points into consideration, it becomes easier to guess what type of electric element is arranged in what position and in what direction based on the state of each lead wire soldered to the printed circuit board 411 when viewed from the back portion RS side of the printed circuit board 411.

<Relationship between the distance between the conductive layers of the substrate and the thickness of the gaming medal>
19 is a schematic diagram showing the layer structure (cross-sectional structure in the thickness direction of the board) of the printed circuit board 411. As shown in the figure, the printed circuit board 411 is a double-sided board (also called a "two-layer board") and is mainly composed of a board body 412 made of an insulating plate material, a first conductive layer 413 formed of a conductive thin film material such as copper foil on the front surface 412a of the board body 412, and a second conductive layer 414 formed of a conductive thin film material such as copper foil on the back surface 412b of the board body 412. The first conductive layer 413 constitutes a conductor pattern for the wiring circuit part and a land part for soldering formed around the through hole on the front surface 412a of the board body 412. Similarly, the second conductive layer 414 constitutes a conductor pattern for the wiring circuit part and a land part for soldering formed around the through hole on the back surface 412b of the board body 412.

19 to 21, the thicknesses of the first conductive layer 413 and the second conductive layer 414 are illustrated as being much larger than their actual ratios in order to make them easier to see. In reality, a solder resist layer, a silk screen printing layer, and the like are also formed on the front surface 412a and the back surface 412b of the board main body 412, but these are omitted from the illustration. In this embodiment, the front surface 412a of the board main body 412, the first conductive layer 413, the solder resist layer, the silk screen printing layer, and the like are collectively referred to as the front surface (first surface) FS of the printed circuit board 411 (or the main control board 410). Similarly, the back surface 412b of the board main body 412, the second conductive layer 414, the solder resist layer, the silk screen printing layer, and the like are collectively referred to as the back surface (second surface) RS of the printed circuit board 411 (or the main control board 410).

As shown in FIG. 19, the printed circuit board 411 is configured so that the interlayer distance (shortest distance between the two layers) DS1 between the first conductive layer 413 and the second conductive layer 414 is greater than the thickness TH1 of one game medal ML (DS1>TH1). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20, even if a situation occurs in which the side edge of the game medal ML abuts on the edge of the printed circuit board 411 during inspection of the main control board 410, the first conductive layer 413 and the second conductive layer 414 will not be conductive through the game medal ML. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first conductive layer 413 and the second conductive layer 414 from being electrically short-circuited through the game medal ML and causing malfunctions in electrical elements, etc. It is not often the case that the first conductive layer 413 and the second conductive layer 414 are formed to a position that reaches the edge of the printed circuit board 411. However, if the printed circuit board 411 is damaged and a portion of it is missing, or if a portion of the printed circuit board 411 is cut away (for example, if an unexpected crack occurs in the board when the above-mentioned drawing portion is cut away), the first conductive layer 413 and the second conductive layer 414 may be exposed at the edge of the printed circuit board 411.

As shown in FIG. 21, the interlayer distance DS1 between the first conductive layer 413 and the second conductive layer 414 in the printed circuit board 411 is only half or less than the radius of curvature CR1 of the pachinko ball PCB. Therefore, even if the surface (outer surface) of the pachinko ball PCB abuts against the edge of the printed circuit board 411 during inspection of the main control board 410, the first conductive layer 413 and the second conductive layer 414 will not be electrically connected through the pachinko ball PCB. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first conductive layer 413 and the second conductive layer 414 from being electrically shorted through the pachinko ball PCB, which would cause malfunctions in electrical elements. Note that the same relationship may hold for medal components such as currency other than the game medal ML used in games, and for spherical components other than the pachinko ball PCB, and the same effect can be obtained in such cases.

<Posture and protruding height of lead wires of electric elements mounted on a board on the back side of the board>
Fig. 22 illustrates several types of electric elements mounted on the front surface FS of the printed circuit board 411 of the main control board 410, and also illustrates the position and protruding height of the lead wires of each electric element on the back surface side of the board. The illustrated electric elements are an IC driver 420B, a resistor 430C, an IC socket 440B to which a control chip 450B is attached, and a ceramic capacitor 460B. In Fig. 22, these electric elements are illustrated in a simplified form. Also, the double-arrowed line DL1 shown in Fig. 22 indicates a direction perpendicular to the back surface RS (front surface FS) of the printed circuit board 411.

The IC driver 420B has lead wires 422 (only two shown) extending from the package portion 421 passing through predetermined through holes (not shown) formed in the printed circuit board 411 and protruding from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 411 in a position that is approximately perpendicular to the back surface RS (perpendicular (90°) or with an error angle from perpendicular within a few degrees (e.g. 5°)). In other words, the lead wires 422 (axis) of the portion protruding from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 411 are approximately perpendicular to the back surface RS and approximately parallel to the direction perpendicular to the back surface RS.

The resistor 430C has two lead wires 432 extending from both ends of the package portion 431, which are bent and pass through predetermined through-holes (not shown) formed in the printed circuit board 411, and protrude from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 411 at a predetermined inclination angle TA1 (for example, an angle in the range of 20° to 85°) with respect to a direction perpendicular to the back surface RS. That is, the lead wires 432 protruding from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 411 are greatly inclined with respect to a direction perpendicular to the back surface RS.

In the IC socket 440B on which the control chip 450B is mounted, the lead wires 442 (only four are shown) extending from the receiving frame 441 pass through predetermined through holes (not shown) formed in the printed circuit board 411 and protrude from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 411 in a position that is approximately perpendicular to the back surface RS. In other words, the lead wires 442 (axis) of the portion protruding from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 411 are approximately perpendicular to the back surface RS and are approximately parallel to the direction perpendicular to the back surface RS.

The ceramic capacitor 460B has two lead wires 462 extending from the package portion 461, which bend and pass through predetermined through-holes (not shown) formed in the printed circuit board 411, protruding from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 411 at a predetermined inclination angle TA2 (for example, an angle in the range of 20° to 85°) with respect to a direction perpendicular to the back surface RS. In other words, the lead wires 462 protruding from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 411 are significantly inclined with respect to a direction perpendicular to the back surface RS.

The lead wire 422 of the IC driver 420B is stronger because it is thicker and/or made of a stronger material than the lead wire 432 of the resistor 430C, the lead wire 442 of the IC socket 440B, and the lead wire 462 of the ceramic capacitor 460B. Also, the protruding height OH1 of the lead wire 422 of the IC driver 420B from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 411 (the shortest distance from the back surface RS to the tip of the lead wire 422) is greater than the protruding height OH2 of the lead wire 432 of the resistor 430C, the protruding height OH3 of the lead wire 442 of the IC socket 440B, and the protruding height OH4 of the lead wire 462 of the ceramic capacitor 460B (in this example, OH1>OH2>OH3>OH4, but the magnitude relationship between OH2, OH3, and OH4 is not limited to this).

Therefore, when the main control board 410 is placed on an inspection table or the like during inspection of the main control board 410, the lead wire 422 of the IC driver 420B abuts against the inspection table before the lead wires of other electric elements, and it is possible to prevent the lead wires of other electric elements from contacting the inspection table. Also, by abutting the lead wire 422 of the IC driver 420B against the inspection table, the IC driver 420B supports the main control board 410, making it possible for the main control board 410 to stand on its own. On the other hand, if the lead wires, such as the lead wire 432 of the resistor 430C and the lead wire 462 of the ceramic capacitor 460B, are relatively weak in strength and the portion protruding from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 411 is significantly inclined with respect to the direction perpendicular to the back surface RS, are configured to abut first, there is a risk that the lead wires (lead wire 432 and lead wire 462) will deform when abutted, causing a malfunction.

In addition, if the main control board 410 is accidentally dropped during inspection of the main control board 410, the lead wire 422 of the IC driver 420B is likely to come into contact with the inspection table or floor before the lead wires of other electrical elements. Therefore, while an impact is applied to the lead wire 422 of the IC driver 420B, the possibility of an impact being applied to the lead wires of other electrical elements can be reduced. Since the lead wire 422 of the IC driver 420B has high strength, when an impact is applied, cracks or the like may occur in the part where the lead wire 422 is soldered, which has the advantage that it is easy to visually confirm the occurrence of a malfunction. On the other hand, even if an impact is applied to a lead wire with low strength, the lead wire will simply deform and there is little possibility of cracks or the like occurring in the soldered part. Therefore, there is a risk that the occurrence of a malfunction will be overlooked.

In this embodiment, the lead wires of the IC driver are configured to come into contact with the inspection table or floor surface before the lead wires of the other electric elements, but the lead wires of the other electric elements may be configured to come into contact with the inspection table or floor surface before the lead wires of the other electric elements. In that case, it is preferable that the lead wires of the other electric elements have a higher strength than the lead wires of the other electric elements.

<Component names printed on the surface of the board>
As shown in Fig. 23, a plurality of types of electric elements are mounted in a predetermined region (region within a rectangular frame FB50 shown by a solid line) on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411. The rectangular frame FB50 indicates the same region as the region indicated by the rectangular frame FB30 in Fig. 17, but Fig. 23 illustrates a greater number of types of electric elements mounted in the region than in Fig. 17. That is, in addition to the information display lamp 470A, resistor array 480A, and LED element 490A illustrated in the region within the rectangular frame FB30 in Fig. 17, the region within the rectangular frame FB50 in Fig. 23 also includes an IIC driver 420C arranged in a horizontal position, a resistor 430D arranged in a horizontal position, a resistor 430E arranged in a vertical position, ceramic capacitors 460D and 460E arranged in a vertical position, and a transistor 495A.

On the surface FS of the printed circuit board 411, the names of components are printed in white by silk screen printing near each mounted electric element to make each electric element identifiable. Specifically, the names of components "R15", "SEG2", "RA3", and "IC11" are printed near the resistor 430D, the information display lamp 470A, the resistor array 480A, and the IIC driver 420C. The names of components "C27", "C29", "Q7", "R22", and "LED1" are printed near the ceramic capacitor 460D, the ceramic capacitor 460E, the transistor 495A, the resistor 430E, and the LED element 490A. The letters in the names of each component indicate the type of electric element or the type of component of the electric element. For example, "R" indicates resistor, "SEG" indicates segment lamp, "RA" indicates resistor array, "IC" indicates integrated circuit, "C" indicates ceramic capacitor, "Q" indicates transistor, and "LED" indicates LED element. When multiple part names are printed near a certain electrical element, the part name that is printed closest to the certain electrical element and contains English characters that match the type of the certain electrical element can basically be determined to be the part name of that certain electrical element. The silkscreen printing that forms the part names and the part frame lines described below is applied only to the front surface FS of the printed circuit board 411, and not to the back surface RS. Furthermore, the part names are silkscreened so that they do not overlap each other.

Note that FIG. 23 corresponds to the front view of the surface FS of the printed circuit board 411 (main control board 410). In other words, FIG. 23 corresponds to the appearance when an operator such as a game parlor clerk looks at the main control board 410 installed inside the cabinet 5 from the front with the front door 2 (see FIG. 6) of the slot machine 1 open, without tilting his head left or right. Therefore, in FIG. 23, the up, down, left, right directions from the operator's viewpoint (the up, down, left, right directions shown in parentheses on each arrow shown in FIG. 23) match the up, down, left, right directions in space (the up, down, left, right directions shown without parentheses on each arrow shown in FIG. 23). Here, the up, down, left, right directions from the operator's viewpoint refer to the direction in which the operator's eyes are lined up (left eye side is left) and the direction perpendicular to the left and right directions (top of the operator's head is up).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the surface FS of the printed circuit board 411 is viewed from the front, the component names "R15", "SEG2", "RA3", and "IC11" printed on the surface FS are arranged in a left-to-right order. That is, these component names are arranged on the surface FS in a horizontal writing manner (left-to-right writing) in which the characters are arranged from left to right when the surface FS of the printed circuit board 411 is viewed from the front. In contrast, the component names "C27", "C29", "Q7", "R22", and "LED1" printed on the surface FS are arranged in a bottom-to-top order. That is, these component names are arranged on the surface FS in a horizontal writing manner (a manner in which the characters (character strings) in a left-to-right writing state are rotated 90 degrees to the left (counterclockwise)) in which the characters are arranged from bottom to top when the surface FS of the printed circuit board 411 is viewed from the front. In this way, when the surface portion FS is viewed from the front, any part name printed on the surface portion FS is arranged in such an order that the characters constituting the part name are either arranged in an order from left to right, or arranged in an order from bottom to top.

Therefore, when the front door 2 of the slot machine 1 is open and the operator looks at the main control board 410 from the front without tilting his/her head left or right, as shown in FIG. 23, the letters constituting each of the part names "R15", "SEG2", "RA3", and "IC11" are arranged in a natural order that can be read from left to right when viewed by the operator (from the operator's perspective). Therefore, these part names are easy for the operator to read and recognize visually. In contrast, the letters constituting each of the part names "C27", "C29", "Q7", "R22", and "LED1" appear to be arranged in a order that requires the operator to read them from bottom to top when viewed by the operator (from the operator's perspective).

On the other hand, Figure 24 corresponds to a state in which the front door 2 of the slot machine 1 is open, the operator places his/her body at the open end of the front door 2 or at the front side of the main control board 410 (the front side of the cabinet 5), and looks at the main control board 410 while tilting his/her head (90°) to the left (towards the hinge end of the front door 2) from the operator's viewpoint. Therefore, in Figure 24, the up/down/left/right directions from the operator's viewpoint (the up/down/left/right directions shown in parentheses on each arrow in Figure 24) do not match (are shifted by 90°) the up/down/left/right directions in space (the up/down/left/right directions shown without parentheses on each arrow in Figure 24).

When the front door 2 of the slot machine 1 is open and an operator places his or her body at the open end of the front door 2 or in front of the main control board 410 and tilts his or her head to the left from the operator's perspective while looking at the main control board 410, as shown in FIG. 24, the letters that make up each of the part names "C27", "C29", "Q7", "R22", and "LED1" will appear to be in a natural order that can be read from the operator's perspective (from the operator's perspective). This makes these part names easy to read and see for the operator.

The same is true when the main control board 410 is installed on the back side of the front door 2 so as to face the housing 5 side. That is, when the front door 2 is open and the worker looks at the main control board 410 installed on the back side of the front door 2 from the front without tilting his/her head left or right, the part names "R15", "SEG2", "RA3", and "IC11" appear to be in a natural order in which the characters constituting those part names are read from left to right from the worker's perspective. Also, when the front door 2 is open and the worker places his/her body on the front side of the main control board 410 (the front side of the back side of the front door 2) and looks at the main control board 410 installed on the back side of the front door 2 while tilting his/her head to the left (the open end side of the front door 2) from the worker's perspective, the part names "C27", "C29", "Q7", "R22", and "LED1" appear to be in a natural order in which the characters constituting those part names are read from left to right from the worker's perspective.

When the main control board 410 is installed on the rear side of the front door 2 so as to face the housing 5, with the front door 2 open, an operator may place his/her body on the open end side of the front door 2 and tilt his/her head to the right (toward the hinge end of the front door 2) from the operator's viewpoint to look at the main control board 410. In that case, the characters constituting the part names "C27", "C29", "Q7", "R22", and "LED1" appear to be arranged upside down and in order from right to left from the operator's viewpoint.

Therefore, when the main control board 410 is installed on the back side of the front door 2, if the worker wants to check the part name, the occurrence of such a situation can be avoided by not looking in the manner described above (tilting the head toward the hinge end of the front door 2). The sub-control board in the slot machine 1 is installed on the back side of the front door 2 so as to face the cabinet 5, and the arrangement of the characters constituting each part name is the same as that of the main control board 410. Therefore, a situation similar to that when the main control board 410 is installed on the back side of the front door 2 can occur. However, by utilizing the occurrence of such a situation, it is possible to distinguish whether the board that the worker is looking at by tilting his/her head toward the hinge end of the front door 2 is the main control board 410 installed inside the cabinet 5 or the sub-control board installed on the back side of the front door 2, based on the arrangement of the characters constituting the part name.

As shown in FIG. 23, the area within the rectangular frame FB50 on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411 has characters (in this example, "NAME BANGOU33-X") indicating the manufacturer name, board name (number), etc. written on it. Unlike the component names, these characters (also referred to as "board name characters") are not silk-screened, but are formed from copper foil or the like that constitutes the conductive layer. Therefore, they are less noticeable than the component names silk-screened in white. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to scratch off the board name characters, the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411 will be scratched, making them more noticeable. This has the effect of deterring the fraudulent act of scratching off the board name characters.

Each component name is printed in a position excluding the land portion around the through-hole formed in the printed circuit board 411 and the solder portion formed on the through-hole and the land portion by soldering, so as not to overlap these portions. For example, as shown in FIG. 25(A), when the component name "LED" is printed near the through-hole (not shown), it is printed so as not to overlap the land portion LND and the solder portion SLR. This makes it possible to clearly see the component name. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25(B), if the component name "LED" is printed so as to overlap part of the land portion LND and the solder portion SLR, there is a risk that part of the character will be missing and it will be impossible to distinguish that the printed character is "LED". That is, in the example shown in FIG. 25(B), there is a risk that the "L" constituting the component name "LED" will be mistakenly recognized as "I", and the "E" will be mistakenly recognized as "F". Even if the component name is printed so that it overlaps partially with the land portion LND or the solder portion SLR, it is preferable to limit the overlap to a degree that does not cause such misinterpretation. Here, the component name "LED" is used as an example, but the same applies to any other component name.

<Component borders printed on the surface of the board>
23, in the area within a rectangular frame FB50 on the front surface FS of the printed circuit board 411, component frame lines corresponding to the outline shapes of the mounted electric elements are printed in white by silk screen printing. Specifically, a component frame line PB1 for the resistor 430D, a component frame line PB2 for the resistor 430E, a component frame line PB3 for the ceramic capacitor 460D, a component frame line PB4 for the ceramic capacitor 460E, a component frame line PB5 for the transistor 495A, a component frame line PB6 for the resistor array 480A, and a component frame line PB7 for the LED element 490A are printed. A component frame line for the information display lamp 470A and a component frame line for the IIC driver 420C are also printed but are not shown.

Each component frame line is printed at a position excluding the land portion around the through hole formed in the printed circuit board 411 and the solder portion formed on the through hole and the land portion by soldering so as not to overlap these portions. For example, as shown in FIG. 26, in the case where the land portion LND and the solder portion SLR to which the lead wire (not shown) of the transistor 495A is soldered are located near the portion where the transistor 495A is mounted, the component frame line PB5 for the transistor 495A is printed so as not to overlap the land portion LND and the solder portion SLR. Here, the component frame line PB5 for the transistor 495A is exemplified and described, but the same applies to any other component frame line. Note that each component frame line is preferably printed at a distance from the land portion LND so as not to contact the land portion LND, as in the component frame line PB5 shown in FIG. 26. This makes it possible to prevent the paint for silk printing from adhering to the land portion LND and the through hole portion.

<Ensuring visibility of information display lamps>
As shown in FIG. 23, the LED element 490A is mounted at a position relatively close to the information display lamp 470A. Also, as shown in FIG. 27, when the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411 is used as a height reference, the height HT1 of the information display lamp 470A is higher than the height HT2 of the LED element 490A (HT1>HT2). Also, the light emitted by the LED element 490A is light with a relatively high brightness. Therefore, there is a risk that the light emitted from the LED element 490A reaches the information display lamp 470A and is reflected by the side surface of the package portion 471 of the information display lamp 470A, thereby reducing the visibility of the information displayed by the information display lamp 470A. Therefore, in the information display lamp 470A, the side surface of the package portion 471 is subjected to matte printing (for example, white color) to make it difficult to reflect light. Specifically, the reflectance of light on the side surface of the package portion 471 is configured to be lower than the reflectance of light on the lead wire 472 of the information display lamp 470A. This makes it possible to ensure the visibility of the information displayed by the information display lamp 1070 even when the LED element 490A emits light. When mounting the setting display lamp on the front surface FS of the printed circuit board 411, it is preferable to perform a similar treatment on the side surface of the package portion of the setting display lamp.

<Configuration of sub-control device and power supply device>
Next, the configurations of the sub-control device 500 and the power supply device 55 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 28 and FIG.

(Configuration of the sub-controller)
4, the sub-controller 500 is attached to the rear of the front door 2 and above the reel window W. Similar to the main controller 100, the sub-controller 500 is configured by accommodating a sub-control board 502 on which various components are mounted, in a sub-board case 502 made up of a case body and a case lid.

28 shows a front view of the slot machine 1 viewed from the rear to the front with the sub-controller 500 installed on the front door 2 and the case lid of the sub-board case 502 removed. The up, down, left and right directions shown by the arrows in FIG. 28 correspond to the directions of the arrows in FIG. 2 and FIG. 4. As shown in FIG. 28, the sub-controller board 502 is composed of a sub-main board 510 and a sub-sub board 520, and when the sub-controller 500 is installed on the front door 2, the component mounting surfaces of the sub-main board 510 and the sub-sub board 520 face backward and are aligned in the up and down direction. In addition, the component occupancy rate of the sub-controller board 502 (the ratio of the total area of all mounted components (the total area of each component when the component mounting surface of the board is viewed in plan) to the area of the board) is about 50%.

The sub-main board 510 is rectangular in shape, and various electronic components (electronic elements) including integrated circuits such as a sub-CPU 511, a sub-ROM 512, a sub-RAM 513, and a three-terminal regulator 514, active elements such as transistors and LEDs, and passive elements such as resistors, ceramic capacitors, electrolytic capacitors, and toroidal coils are mounted on its component mounting surface. A connector 515 is disposed at the center of the left edge of the sub-main board 510, and is electrically connected to a connector 528 of the sub-sub board 520. Furthermore, a plurality of electrical connectors 516, 516, ... are disposed on the upper edge, right edge, and lower edge of the sub-main board 510, respectively.

The sub-sub board 520 is rectangular in shape, and its component mounting surface is equipped with integrated circuits such as an image processing CPU 521, an image ROM 522, a VIDEORAM 523, an audio processing board 524 on which an audio ROM storing audio data and an audio source IC are mounted, a logic IC 525, and various electronic components (electronic elements) including active elements such as transistors and LEDs, and passive elements such as resistors, ceramic capacitors, electrolytic capacitors, and toroidal coils, as well as electrical components such as a connector 526 and a slide switch 527. A connector 528 electrically connected to the connector 515 of the sub-main board 510 is disposed at the center of the right edge of the sub-sub board 520. The connector 515 of the sub-main board 510 and the connector 528 of the sub-sub board 520 are electrically connected to each other.

(Power supply configuration)
The power supply unit 55 converts the AC power input from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage value (for example, +5V, +12V, etc.), and outputs it to various devices installed inside the housing 5. The power supply unit 55 has a shape of a substantially rectangular parallelepiped, and is attached in the lower part of the housing 5 (on the bottom plate 5d) with the left side surface of the power supply unit 55 abutting against the left side plate 5a of the housing 5 as shown in FIG. 3. The front of the power supply unit 55 is a resin front panel provided with a power switch for turning on the power of the slot machine 1, and the top, bottom, back, left and right sides are formed of metal plates. In addition, the metal plates on the top, bottom, back and left sides are integrally molded as a single member, and the above-mentioned front panel is attached to the front of this member. Furthermore, the metal plate on the right side is configured to be removable, and by removing the metal plate on the right side, the power supply board 550 described later can be accommodated inside the power supply unit 55.

Figure 29 shows a front view of the slot machine 1 as viewed from right to left with the power supply unit 55 installed on the bottom plate 5d inside the housing 5 and with the metal plate on the right side of the power supply unit 55 removed. The up-down, front-back and rear directions shown by the arrows in Figure 29 correspond to the directions of the arrows in Figure 2. As shown in Figure 29, a power supply board 550 is provided inside the power supply unit 55, and when the power supply unit 55 is installed inside the housing 5, the component mounting surface of the power supply board 550 faces to the right and is aligned in the up-down direction. The component occupancy rate on the power supply board 550 is approximately 50%.

The power supply board 550 is rectangular in shape, and various electronic components (electronic elements) including integrated circuits such as logic IC 551 and three-terminal regulators 552a, 552b, and 552c, active elements such as transistors and LEDs, and passive elements such as resistors, ceramic capacitors, electrolytic capacitors, toroidal coils, and varistors are mounted on the component mounting surface. Here, the size of the electrolytic capacitors mounted on the various boards (main control board 111, sub-control board 502, power supply board 550) of this embodiment is divided into three types: small electrolytic capacitors with a rated voltage of 50 V and a capacity of up to 270 μF (external dimensions of diameter 8 mm, height up to 20 mm), medium-sized electrolytic capacitors with a rated voltage of 50 V and a capacity of more than 270 μF and up to 1000 μF (external dimensions of diameter 12 mm, height up to 25 mm), and large electrolytic capacitors with a rated voltage of 50 V and a capacity of more than 1000 μF and up to 4700 μF (external dimensions of diameter 18 mm, height up to 40 mm). In addition, the upper edge of the power supply board 550 is provided with a power supply input connector 553 for inputting AC power from the outside, and power supply output connectors 554a, 554b, and 554c for outputting power of various voltages generated in the power supply board 550 to various devices installed inside the housing 5. Furthermore, the front edge of the power supply board 550 is provided with a panel connector 555 for electrically connecting to a power switch (not shown) attached to the front panel 55a.

The top surface 55b of the power supply unit 55 has openings so that the power input connector 553 and the power output connectors 554a, 554b, and 554c can be fitted with connectors of various power cables. The bottom surface 55c of the power supply unit 55 has a number of round heat dissipation holes (not shown) for dissipating heat from inside the power supply unit 55 to the outside. A spacer SP is attached to the bottom surface 55c to provide a gap TH2 between the bottom plate 5d of the housing 5 and the bottom surface 55c so that the heat dissipated from these heat dissipation holes can escape to the outside.

The size of this gap TH2 (the distance between the bottom plate 5d and the bottom surface 55c) is larger than the thickness of one game medal and smaller than the thickness of two game medals. In this way, by providing the gap TH2 between the bottom plate 5d and the bottom surface 55c, heat generated inside the power supply device 55 is released into the housing 5 through the bottom surface 55c, so that the various components mounted on the power supply board 550 are less likely to be adversely affected by a rise in temperature inside the power supply device 55. In addition, since the size of the gap TH2 is larger than the thickness of one game medal, it is possible to eliminate the risk of a game medal being caught in this gap while securing a gap between the bottom plate 5d and the bottom surface 55c. For example, if the size of the gap TH2 is made approximately the same dimension as the thickness of one game medal, game medals spilling from the hopper 51 of the medal payout device 50 may be caught between the bottom plate 5d and the bottom surface 55c, and it may be difficult to remove the caught game medals.

Also, by making the size of the gap TH2 larger than the thickness of one game medal, even if a game medal gets stuck between the bottom plate 5d and the bottom surface 55c, it can be easily removed. In addition, by making the size of the gap TH2 smaller than the thickness of two game medals, it is possible to eliminate the risk of two game medals being stuck between the bottom plate 5d and the bottom surface 55c when two game medals are stacked on top of each other, and it is also possible to reduce the risk of foreign objects other than game medals getting stuck between the bottom plate 5d and the bottom surface 55c. Also, for example, when the slot machine 1 is transported, even if a strong impact is applied in the vertical direction when the slot machine 1 is lowered from the bed of the transport truck to the ground, since a gap is provided between the bottom plate 5d and the bottom surface 55c, there is room for the bottom surface 55c of the power supply unit 55 to bend, and it is expected that the impact transmitted to the power supply board 550 will be mitigated by the bending of the bottom surface 55c.

(Layout of components mounted on sub-control board and power supply board)
Next, the arrangement of various components mounted on the sub-control board 502 and the power supply board 550 will be described with reference to Figures 30 to 32. Figure 30 shows a state in which a component having a lead extending from the component body and soldered to the board with the component body floating above the surface of the board (i.e., with a gap between the component body and the board surface) has tilted due to some cause. Here, possible causes of the component tilting include, for example, an impact when the slot machine 1 is lowered to the ground, being pushed by a wire inserted through a gap in the board case due to fraud, or an operator accidentally touching a component on the board when attaching the board to the board case.

Figures 30(a-1) to (a-3) show the state in which the components attached to region BS1 of the sub-substrate 520 shown in Figure 28 are tilted. Here, Figure 30(a-1) shows the state when region BS1 is viewed from right to left, Figure 30(a-2) shows the state when region BS1 is viewed from bottom to top (the direction of arrow A in Figure 30(a-1)), and Figure 30(a-3) shows the state when region BS1 is viewed from rear to front (the direction of arrow B in Figure 30(a-1)). Note that the directions of the arrows shown in Figures 30(a-1) to (a-3) correspond to the directions of the arrows shown in Figure 2.

In the region BS1, the bodies of LEDLs1 and LEDLs2 are mounted side by side in the left-right direction while floating above the surface of the sub-substrate 520, and the resistor Rs1 is mounted below them, and Figures 30(a-1) to (a-3) show a state in which LEDLs1 is tilted downward. At this time, the body (light emitting part) of LEDLs1 abuts against the body part of resistor Rs1, so the lead wire extending from the body of LEDLs1 does not come into contact with the lead wire of resistor Rs1.

Figures 30(b-1) to (b-3) show the state in which the components attached to area BP1 of the power supply board 550 shown in Figure 29 are tilted. Here, Figure 30(b-1) shows the state when area BP1 is viewed in a direction from front to rear, Figure 30(b-2) shows the state when area BP1 is viewed in a direction from bottom to top (the direction of arrow A in Figure 30(b-1)), and Figure 30(b-3) shows the state when area BP1 is viewed in a direction from right to left (the direction of arrow B in Figure 30(b-1)). Note that the directions of the arrows shown in Figures 30(b-1) to (b-3) are also the same as those shown in Figure 2.

In region BP1, the body of the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cp1 is mounted in a state where it is floating above the surface of the power supply board 550, and the resistor Rp1 is mounted below it. Figures 30 (b-1) to (b-3) show the state in which the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cp1 is tilted downward. At this time, the body of the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cp1 abuts against the body of the resistor Rp1, so the lead wires extending from the body of the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cp1 do not come into contact with the lead wires of the resistor Rp1. Here, for example, if the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cp1 and the resistor Rp1 are mounted near the lower edge of the power supply board 550, the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cp1 may be mounted so that the top of the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cp1 does not protrude from the lower edge of the board when the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cp1 is tilted downward and abuts against the body of the resistor Rp1.

Figures 30(c-1) to (c-3) show the components attached to area BP2 of the power supply board 550 shown in Figure 29 in a tilted state. Here, Figure 30(c-1) shows the state when area BP2 is viewed in a direction from front to rear, Figure 30(c-2) shows the state when area BP2 is viewed in a direction from top to bottom (the direction of arrow A in Figure 30(c-1)), and Figure 30(c-3) shows the state when area BP2 is viewed in a direction from right to left (the direction of arrow B in Figure 30(c-1)). Note that the directions of the arrows shown in Figures 30(c-1) to (c-3) are also the same as those shown in Figure 2.

In region BP2, the body of fuse Fp1 is mounted in a state where it is floating above the surface of power supply board 550, and ceramic capacitor Cp2 is mounted above it, and Figures 30 (c-1) to (c-3) show a state in which fuse Fp1 is tilted upward. At this time, the body of fuse Fp1 abuts against the body of ceramic capacitor Cp2, so the lead wires extending from the body of fuse Fp1 do not come into contact with the lead wires of ceramic capacitor Cp2.

As shown in FIG. 30 (c-2), the lead wire of ceramic capacitor Cp2 has a roughly S-shaped bend bd (encircled by a dashed line in the figure) located near the component body. As a result, even if a force is applied to the ceramic capacitor Cp2 in the vertical direction, the force is absorbed by the bend bd, and it is expected that the force applied to the lead wire located near the board surface will be reduced. This makes the lead wire less likely to break, making it less likely to cause component malfunctions.

In this embodiment, even if a component mounted above the board tilts for some reason, the body of the tilted component abuts against the body of another component or the surface of the board, preventing further tilting, so that the lead wires of the components do not come into contact with each other. Therefore, even if a component mounted above the board tilts, the lead wires of the component do not come into contact with the lead wires of a nearby component and short out, making it difficult for the components mounted on the board to malfunction. In other words, by making it difficult for components to malfunction, the risk of the gaming machine stopping can be reduced, allowing players to play smoothly.

Here, it is necessary to provide a space between components so that even if a component tilts, it will not come into contact with other surrounding components. However, since the space available for installing devices inside the housing 5 is limited, it is difficult to increase the size of the board. In addition, if a connector is placed on the board, placing a component near it may damage the component when attaching or detaching the harness to the connector, so it is preferable not to place components around the connector. Furthermore, for LEDs and fuses, space is also required to ensure the visibility of the light-emitting parts and fuses. For these reasons, it is difficult to ensure that each component has a space for placement so that it will not come into contact with other surrounding components even if it tilts. Therefore, in such cases, a component is placed so that when it tilts, the main body of the component comes into contact with the main body or lead wires of other surrounding components, so that the lead wires of the components do not come into contact with each other.

Next, Figure 31 shows a component with lead wires extending from the component body, which is soldered to the board with the component body floating above the surface of the board (i.e., with a gap between the component body and the board surface), and in which the component mounted near the edge of the board has become tilted for some reason.

Figures 31(a-1) to (a-3) show the state in which the components attached to region BS2 of the sub-substrate 520 shown in Figure 28 are tilted. Here, Figure 31(a-1) shows the state when region BS2 is viewed from right to left, Figure 31(a-2) shows the state when region BS2 is viewed from bottom to top (the direction of arrow A in Figure 31(a-1)), and Figure 31(a-3) shows the state when region BS2 is viewed from rear to front (the direction of arrow B in Figure 31(a-1)). Note that the directions of the arrows shown in Figures 31(a-1) to (a-3) correspond to the directions of the arrows shown in Figure 2.

In region BS2, the body of the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cs1 is mounted in a state where it is floating above the surface of the sub-substrate 520, and Figures 31 (a-1) to (a-3) show the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cs1 tilted downward. Here, the tilt of the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cs1 stops when the peripheral part of the bottom of the body abuts against the surface of the substrate (see the part surrounded by the dashed line in the figure), but at this time, the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cs1 is mounted in a position where the body of the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cs1 (more specifically, the head of the body) does not protrude from the peripheral edge of the substrate (see the dashed line in the figure).

Figures 31(b-1) to (b-3) show the state in which the components attached to area BP2 of the power supply board 550 shown in Figure 29 are tilted. Here, Figure 31(b-1) shows the state of area BP2 when viewed from the front to the rear, Figure 31(b-2) shows the state of area BP2 when viewed from below to above (the direction of arrow A in Figure 31(b-1)), and Figure 31(b-3) shows the state of area BP2 when viewed from the right to the left (the direction of arrow B in Figure 31(b-1)). The directions of the arrows shown in Figures 31(b-1) to (b-3) also correspond to the directions of the arrows shown in Figure 2.

As described above, in the region BP2, the fuse Fp1 body is arranged in a state where it is floating above the surface of the power supply board 550, and the ceramic capacitor Cp2 is arranged above it. And Fig. 31 (b-1) to (b-3) show the state where the fuse Fp1 is tilted downward. At this time, the inclination of the fuse Fp1 body stops when the side of the fuse Fp1 abuts against the surface of the board (see the part surrounded by the dashed line in the figure), but the fuse Fp1 is mounted in a position where the fuse Fp1 body (more specifically, the head of the fuse Fp1 body) does not protrude from the periphery of the board at this time (see the dashed line in the figure). In this way, when the fuse Fp1 is tilted upward as described above, the lead wire of the fuse Fp1 does not come into contact with the lead wire of the ceramic capacitor Cp1, and when the fuse Fp1 is tilted downward, the fuse Fp1 is mounted in a position where the fuse Fp1 body does not protrude from the periphery of the board.

Figures 31(c-1) to (c-3) show the state in which the components attached to area BP3 of the power supply board 550 shown in Figure 29 are tilted. Here, Figure 31(c-1) shows the state when area BP3 is viewed in a direction from front to rear, Figure 31(c-2) shows the state when area BP3 is viewed in a direction from bottom to top (the direction of arrow A in Figure 31(c-1)), and Figure 31(c-3) shows the state when area BP3 is viewed in a direction from right to left (the direction of arrow B in Figure 31(c-1)). Note that the directions of the arrows shown in Figures 31(c-1) to (c-3) are also the same as those shown in Figure 2.

In area BP3, the bodies of LEDLp1 and Lp2 are mounted side by side in the left-right direction while floating above the surface of the power supply board 550, and resistor Rp2 is mounted above LEDLp1, and Figures 31 (c-1) to (c-3) show a state in which LEDLp1 is tilted downward. At this time, the tilt of the body (light-emitting part) of LEDLs1 stops when the bottom edge of the body abuts against the surface of the board (see the area surrounded by dashed lines in the figures), but LEDLp1 is mounted in a position such that the body of LEDLp1 (more specifically, the head of the body) does not protrude from the edge of the board (see the dashed line in the figures).

In this manner, in this embodiment, even if a component mounted floating above the board tilts for some reason, the body of the tilted component will come into contact with the surface of the board, and no part of the component will protrude beyond the periphery of the board. Therefore, even if a component mounted floating above the board tilts, there is no risk of the component being damaged by hitting the wall of the board case or device body that houses the board. Therefore, by making it less likely for malfunctions to occur in the components mounted on the board, the risk of the gaming machine stopping operation can be reduced, allowing players to play smoothly.

It would be ideal if there was enough space between the mounted components so that even if a component tilted, it would not come into contact with other surrounding components, but due to the reasons mentioned above, it is difficult to ensure that each mounted component has enough space to avoid contacting surrounding mounted components even if the mounted component tilts, and especially when the component occupancy rate on the board is high, there are cases where the mounted components have to be placed close to the edge of the board. Therefore, even in such cases, the components are placed so that when the component tilts, part of the body of the component does not extend beyond the edge of the board.

Next, with reference to Figures 32 and 33, the direction of multiple lead wires extending from components mounted on the board will be described. First, Figures 32(a-1) and (a-2) show the mounted state of components attached to area BP4 of power supply board 550 shown in Figure 29. Here, Figure 32(a-1) shows the state when area BP4 is viewed from the front to the rear, and Figure 32(a-2) shows the state when area BP4 is viewed from the right to the left (the direction of arrow A in Figure 31(a-1)). Note that the direction of the arrows shown in Figures 32(a-1) and (a-2) corresponds to the direction of the arrows shown in Figure 2.

A large electrolytic capacitor Cp2 is mounted in region BP4. As shown in FIG. 29, two large electrolytic capacitors are mounted behind the large electrolytic capacitor (Cp2) mounted in region BP4, and these large electrolytic capacitors are also the same size as the large electrolytic capacitor Cp2 shown in FIGS. 32(a-1) and (a-2). As shown in FIGS. 32(a-1) and (a-2), two lead wires LN1 and LN2 extend from the bottom surface of the large electrolytic capacitor Cp2, and the large electrolytic capacitor Cp2 is mounted on the board so that the lead wires LN1 and LN2 are aligned vertically (in other words, the line connecting the lead wires LN1 and LN2 is oriented vertically).

Figures 32(b-1) and (b-2) show the mounting state of the components attached to the area BP5 of the power supply board 550 shown in Figure 29. Here, Figure 32(b-1) shows the state when the area BP5 is viewed from the front to the rear, and Figure 32(b-2) shows the state when the area BP5 is viewed from the right to the left (the direction of the arrow A in Figure 31(b-1)). The direction of the arrows shown in Figures 32(b-1) and (b-2) corresponds to the direction of the arrows shown in Figure 2. LEDLp3 is mounted in area BP5, and as shown in Figures 32(b-1) and (b-2), two lead wires LN3 and LN4 extend from the bottom surface of LEDLp3. LEDLp3 is mounted on the board so that the lead wires LN3 and LN4 are aligned vertically (in other words, the direction of the line connecting the lead wires LN3 and LN4 is vertical).

Figures 32 (c-1) and (c-2) show the mounted state of the components attached to area BS3 of the sub-main board 510 shown in Figure 28. Here, Figure 32 (c-1) shows the state when area BS3 is viewed from right to left, and Figure 32 (c-2) shows the state when area BS3 is viewed from rear to front (the direction of arrow A in Figure 31 (c-1)). Note that the directions of the arrows shown in Figures 32 (c-1) and (c-2) correspond to the directions of the arrows shown in Figure 2.

A fuse Fs1 held by fuse clips Fh1 and Fh2 is mounted in region BS3. Terminals LN5a and LN5b are arranged side by side in the left-right direction and protrude from the bottom of fuse clip Fh1, and terminals LN6a and LN6b are arranged side by side in the left-right direction and protrude from the bottom of fuse clip Fh2. The fuse clips Fh1 and Fh2 are arranged vertically and spaced apart to hold fuse Fs1, with the terminals LN5a, LN5b, LN6a, and LN6b of each fuse clip soldered to power supply board 550.

In addition, in Figures 32 (c-1) and (c-2), the fuse Fs1 is held by fuse clips Fh1 and Fh2, but a fuse having lead wires extending from both ends of the fuse body, such as fuse Fp1 shown in Figures 30 (c-1) to (c-3), may also be mounted on a board so that the lead wires are aligned vertically (in other words, the line connecting the two lead wires is oriented vertically).

Here, for example, if a large impact is applied in the vertical direction when the slot machine 1 is lowered to the ground during the transportation process of the slot machine 1, the main body of the component mounted on the board may tilt in the vertical direction due to the impact. In particular, since the size and weight of the main body of a large electrolytic capacitor are large, if the two lead wires are mounted on the board in a state where they are arranged horizontally, when a large impact is applied in the vertical direction, the lead wires are easily bent and the main body of the component may tilt in the vertical direction, and the lead wires may be subjected to a large load and break. Therefore, as shown in each figure of FIG. 33, in this embodiment, the component is mounted on the board so that the multiple lead wires extending from the component are arranged in the vertical direction. Therefore, even if a large force in the vertical direction acts on the main body of the component due to a large impact in the vertical direction applied to the slot machine 1, the tilt in the vertical direction of the main body of the component is suppressed, so that it is possible to make it difficult for a malfunction such as the lead wires of the component mounted on the board being broken by the applied impact. In this way, by making it difficult for a malfunction of the component to occur, the risk of the game machine stopping operation can be reduced, and the player can play smoothly. In addition, the leads of small and medium-sized electrolytic capacitors, which are less susceptible to shock than large electrolytic capacitors, may be mounted on the board aligned in the left-right direction.

The direction of the lead wires of the components mounted on the board is not limited to the large electrolytic capacitor, LED, and fuse shown in FIG. 32, but can also be applied to other components. For example, the lead wires of the fuse Fp1 in the area BP2 shown in FIG. 30(c-1)-(c-1) and FIG. 31(b-1)-(b-3) may be mounted on the board so that they are aligned vertically. In this case, when the fuse Fp1 is tilted upward as described above, the lead wires of the fuse Fp1 do not come into contact with the lead wires of the ceramic capacitor Cp1, and when the fuse Fp1 is tilted downward, the main body part does not protrude from the periphery of the board, and it is possible to make it difficult for the lead wires to break due to an impact applied to the slot machine 1.

As shown in Figs. 33(a-1) to (a-3), the orientation of the lead wires of the components shown in Fig. 32 can also be applied to the toroidal coil TLp1 attached to area BP6 of the power supply board 550 shown in Fig. 29. Here, Fig. 33(a-1) shows the state when area BP6 is viewed from the front to the rear, Fig. 33(a-2) shows the state when area BP6 is viewed from the right to the left, and Fig. 33(a-3) shows the state when area BP6 is viewed from the bottom to the top. Note that the directions of the arrows shown in Figs. 33(a-1) to (a-3) correspond to the directions of the arrows shown in Fig. 2.

In the toroidal coil TLp1, one end LN7 and the other end LN8 of the winding wound around the toroidal core tc, which is a ring-shaped body with a rectangular cross section, serve as lead wires. When the toroidal coil TLp1 is viewed from the front to the rear as shown in FIG. 33(a-1), one end LN7 of the winding extends from the upper side of the toroidal core tc, and the other end LN8 extends from the lower side of the toroidal core tc. When the toroidal coil TLp1 is viewed from the right to the left as shown in FIG. 33(a-1), one end LN7 and one end LN8 of the winding extend from the center position of the toroidal core tc in the front-to-rear direction. Therefore, the toroidal coil TLp1 is mounted on a board so that one end LN7 and one end LN8 of the winding are aligned vertically (in other words, the direction of the line connecting the lead wires LN7 and LN8 is vertical).

In addition, in the power supply device 55 of this embodiment, the power supply board 550 is housed in a housing consisting of a resin front panel and a metal box, but it may also be housed in a transparent resin board case such as the main board case 210 shown in FIG. 7. In this case, the power switch that was installed on the resin front panel can be mounted on the power supply board 550, and an opening for the power switch can be provided in the lid of the board case so that it can be turned on and off from the outside. Even with this configuration, the orientation of the lead wires of the components mounted on the board shown in FIG. 32 can be applied.

As an example, Figures 33(b-1) and (b-2) show the state in which a power switch is mounted on the power supply board 550'. Figure 33(b-1) shows the state when the power supply board 550' is viewed from the front to the rear, and Figure 33(b-2) shows the state when the power supply board 550' is viewed from the right to the left. Note that the directions of the arrows shown in Figures 33(b-1) and (b-2) correspond to the directions of the arrows shown in Figure 2.

The power switch SW1 shown in Figures 33(b-1) and (b-2) has four terminals, terminals LN9a and LN9b, and terminals LN10a and LN10b, which are spaced apart in the vertical direction. Also, as shown in Figure 33(b-2), terminals LN9a and LN9b, and terminals LN10a and LN10b are arranged side by side in the front-to-back direction on the power switch SW1. In this case, the power switch SW1 is mounted on the power supply board 550' so that terminals LN9a and LN9b and terminals LN10a and LN10b are positioned in the vertical direction.

The arrangement of the components on the board shown in Figures 30 to 33 has been described using the components mounted on the sub-control board 502 and the power supply board 550 as examples, but it can also be applied to the components mounted on the main control board 111. The arrangement of the components on the board shown in Figures 30 to 33 is not limited to boards mounted on slot machines, but can also be applied to boards mounted on pachinko machines.

<Configuration of reel unit>
Next, the structure of the reel unit 60 shown in FIG. 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 34 to FIG. 40. As shown in FIG. 34, the reel unit 60 is configured to include the first to third reel modules 600a to 600c, a reel module attachment member 61, a relay board 65, and a board cover 66. The reel module attachment member 61 is made of a resin material and formed in a box shape with openings on the front and right sides, and is configured to be able to accommodate the first to third reel modules 600a to 600c arranged in the left-right direction (see the arrows in FIG. 2). That is, the reel module attachment member 61 has three storage positions, left, center, and right, and the first reel module 600a is accommodated in the left storage position, the second reel module 600b is accommodated in the center storage position, and the third reel module 600c is accommodated in the right storage position.

An upper flange portion 62 is formed on the upper side of the opening of the reel module mounting member 61, and an upper bracket coupling portion 602 formed on the upper part of the reel bracket 601 in each of the first to third reel modules 600a to 600c is coupled to the upper flange portion 62 by a bracket coupling member 641. A lower flange portion 62 is formed on the lower side of the opening of the reel module mounting member 61, and a lower bracket coupling portion 608 formed on the lower part of the reel bracket 601 in each of the first to third reel modules 600a to 600c is coupled to the lower flange portion 62 by a bracket coupling member 641.

A board mounting section 64 is formed on the top of the reel module mounting member 61. A relay board 65 and a board cover 66 are attached to the board mounting section 64. The relay board 65 is attached and fixed to the board mounting section 64 by a fixing means (not shown) such as a screw. The relay board 65 is electrically connected to the main control device 100, and controls the operation of the first to third reel modules 600a to 600c in response to a reel control signal transmitted from the main control device 100. The relay board 65 also relays various commands transmitted from the main control device 100 to the sub-control device 500, and relays signals exchanged between the main control device 100 and the medal payout device 50. The board cover 66 is made of a transparent resin material and is formed in a box shape capable of covering the relay board 65 from above, and is attached by being connected to the board mounting section 64 by a cover connecting member (not shown).

(Reel module configuration)
Next, the first to third reel modules 600a to 600c will be described with reference to Figures 35 and 36. The second reel module 600b has the same configuration as the first reel module 600a except that it uses a second reel 3b with a different pattern from the left reel 3a, and detailed illustrations and explanations will be omitted. The third reel module 600c has the same configuration as the first reel module 600a except that it includes a right reel 3c with a different pattern from the left reel 3a (and center reel 3b), and detailed illustrations and explanations will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 35 and 36, the first reel module 600a is composed of the left reel 3a, a reel bracket 601, a reel sensor 621, a back lamp unit 650, a stepping motor 680, and a reel connecting member 690. The reel bracket 601 is formed into a plate shape using a resin material, and the reel motor 680, the back lamp unit 650, and the reel sensor 621 (see Figure 36) are attached to the left side of the reel bracket 601.

A plate-shaped upper bracket coupling portion 602 is formed on the upper front side of the reel bracket 601. The upper bracket coupling portion 602 is coupled to the left middle portion of the upper flange portion 502 (see FIG. 34 ) of the reel module mounting member 501 by using a bracket coupling member 641. A plate-shaped lower bracket coupling portion 608 is formed on the lower front side of the reel bracket 601. The lower bracket coupling portion 608 is coupled to the left middle portion of the lower flange portion 508 (see FIG. 34 ) of the reel module mounting member 501 by using a bracket coupling member 641. The bracket coupling member 641 is configured by using a Nylatch or the like.

The upper connector mounting portion 603 is formed on the left side of the upper bracket joint portion 602. The first motor cable connector 606 (see FIG. 34) is attached to the upper connector mounting portion 603, to which a bifurcated motor cable (not shown) connected to the stepping motor 680 and the reel sensor 621 is connected. This first motor cable connector 606 is connected to the reel relay board 65 (see FIG. 34) by a cable. On both sides of the upper connector mounting portion 603, guide pin engagement holes 604 are formed with which the guide pins 607 (see FIG. 34) of the first motor cable connector 606 engage. The first motor cable connector 606 attached to the upper connector mounting portion 603 is electrically connected by fitting with a reel relay connector (not shown) arranged at the front of the reel relay board 65 when the first reel module 600a is accommodated in the reel module mounting member 61.

One of the two forks in the motor cable is electrically connected to the motor connector 675 of the stepping motor 680, and the other is electrically connected to a sensor connector (not shown) of the reel sensor 621. A cable insertion section 605 is cut out and formed in the lower right portion of the upper bracket joint 602, through which the motor cable extending toward the stepping motor 680 and the reel sensor 621 is inserted.

A rear connector mounting portion 613 is formed on the upper rear side of the reel bracket 601. A first lamp cable connector 616 is attached to one end of a lamp cable (not shown) that is electrically connected to a back lamp board 653 (see FIG. 38) on which multiple high-brightness LEDs are mounted. Guide pin engagement holes 614 are formed on both sides of the rear connector mounting portion 613, into which guide pins 617 of the first lamp cable connector 616 engage. When the first reel module 600a is housed in the reel module mounting member 61, the first lamp cable connector 616 attached to the rear connector mounting portion 613 is electrically connected to the back lamp board 653 by engaging with a lamp relay connector (not shown) arranged on the lamp relay board.

When the first reel module 600a is accommodated in the reel module mounting member 61, the first motor cable connector 606 (see FIG. 34) is fitted and electrically connected to a reel relay connector (not shown) arranged on the reel relay board 65, and the first lamp cable connector 616 is fitted and electrically connected to a lamp relay connector (not shown) arranged on the lamp relay board. Thus, simply by performing the work of fitting and mounting the first reel module 600a in the reel module mounting member 61, the stepping motor 680 and the reel sensor 621 can be electrically connected to the reel relay board 65, and the back lamp board 653 can be electrically connected to the lamp relay board (not shown). This eliminates the need to use separate cables to electrically connect the stepping motor 680 to the reel relay board 65, the reel sensor 621 to the reel relay board 65, and the back lamp board 653 to the lamp relay board (not shown), as was previously done, and allows the reel unit 200 to be assembled efficiently.

The stepping motor 680 drives the left reel 3a to rotate, and is attached and fixed to the motor attachment portion 631 of the reel bracket 601.
A through hole provided at the rotation center of the left reel 3 a is inserted into the output shaft of the stepping motor 680 , and the left reel 3 a is fixed to the output shaft of the stepping motor 680 by a reel connecting member 690 .

(Configuration of the back lamp unit)
Next, the configuration of the back lamp unit 650 will be described with reference to Fig. 37. Here, Fig. 37(a) is a perspective view of the back lamp unit 650, and Fig. 37(b) is a front view of the back lamp unit 650. The back lamp unit 650 is composed of a back lamp house 651 attached to the reel bracket 601, and a back lamp board 653 (see Fig. 38) attached to the back side of the back lamp house 651.

The back lamp board 653 is mounted with multiple LED elements for illuminating the three symbols displayed in the upper, middle, and lower rows of the reel window W from inside the reel. In this embodiment, six LED elements (18 in total) are mounted corresponding to each of the three symbols displayed in the reel window W. Specifically, six LED elements 654a for illuminating the symbols in the upper row of the reel window W, six LED elements 654b for illuminating the symbols in the middle row of the reel window W, and six LED elements 654c for illuminating the symbols in the lower row of the reel window W are mounted on one back lamp board 653. The six LED elements corresponding to the upper, middle, and lower rows are arranged in a matrix of two rows and three columns at a predetermined interval from each other.

The back lamp house 651 is made of a resin material, and on the right side of the back lamp house 651, an attachment arm portion 652 is formed for attaching the back lamp house 651 to the reel bracket 601. The back lamp house 651 also has three pattern illumination areas 661a, 661b, and 661c for illuminating the upper, middle, and lower patterns. Here, the pattern illumination area 661a is an area for illuminating the upper pattern, the pattern illumination area 661b is an area for illuminating the middle pattern, and the pattern illumination area 661c is an area for illuminating the lower pattern.

The pattern lighting area 661a is formed by an LED exposed surface 663a and a shade portion 664a. The LED exposed surface 663a is a rectangular surface facing the inner circumferential surface of the reel, and the LED exposed surface 663a has openings 662a for exposing the light-emitting surfaces of the LED elements 654a, one for each of the six LED elements 654a (total of six). The shade portion 664a has a cylindrical shape extending from each of the upper, lower, left, and right peripheral portions of the LED exposed surface 663a toward the inner circumferential surface of the reel. The inner surface of the shade portion 664a is inclined so that the opening of the pattern lighting area 661a gradually widens from the LED exposed surface 663a toward the inner circumferential surface of the reel. The pattern lighting area 661b is also formed by an LED exposed surface 663b and a shade portion 664b similar to the LED exposed surface 663a and the shade portion 664a of the pattern lighting area 661a. The pattern lighting area 661c is also formed by an LED exposed surface 663c and a shade portion 664c similar to the LED exposed surface 663a and the shade portion 664a of the pattern lighting area 661a. Here, the color of the LED exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, 663c and the shade portions 664a, 664b, 664c is white, which allows more light from the six LED elements 654a to be reflected. For reference, the LED exposed surface 663a is shown in FIG. 37(b) with diagonal lines slanting upwards to the right.

The pattern lighting area 661a and the pattern lighting area 661b are separated by a partition plate 665a having a thickness of TH3. The pattern lighting area 661b and the pattern lighting area 661c are separated by a partition plate 665b having a thickness of TH3. Here, the top plate portion 650a and the bottom plate portion 650b of the back lamp house 651 protrude forward (toward the reel 3a) more than the partition plates 665a and 665b. The thickness TH4 of the top plate portion 650a and the bottom plate portion 650b of the back lamp house 651 is thicker than the thickness TH3 of the partition plates 665a and 665b. Furthermore, the pattern lighting area 661b in the rotation direction of the reel 3a is
The width of the LED elements 654a, 654b, and 654c is narrower than the width of the pattern illumination areas 661a and 661c. By configuring the back lamp house 651 in this manner, the light from the LED elements 654a, 654b, and 654c is less likely to leak from the back lamp house 651.

The six openings formed on the LED exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, 663c are provided to match the mounting positions of the six LED elements 654a when the back lamp board 653 is attached to the back side of the back lamp unit 650. In addition, the upper, lower, left, and right surfaces forming each shade portion 664a, 664b, 664c are inclined so that the openings gradually widen as they move from the corresponding LED exposed surface 663a, 663b, 663c toward the inner peripheral surface of the reel.

Note that, in the LED exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, and 663c of the back lamp house 651 shown in FIG. 37, six openings 662a, 662b, and 662c corresponding to six LED elements are provided, but the shape of the openings is not limited to this. Here, a modified example of the openings provided in the LED exposed surface will be described with reference to FIG. 38. Note that in FIG. 38, the same reference numerals are used to designate the same configuration as in FIG. 37, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The openings 662a', 662b', 662c' provided on the LED exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, 663c of the back lamp house 651' shown in FIG. 38 are not provided to correspond to each of the six LED elements, but are a single opening that encompasses the light emitting surfaces of all six LED elements. Here, the color of the LED exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, 663c and the shade parts 664a, 664b, 664c of the back lamp house 651' shown in FIG. 38 is white, similar to the back lamp house 651 in FIG. 37, but the surface of the back lamp board 653 exposed from the openings 662a', 662b', 662c' on the LED exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, 663c is also colored white.

In this way, by forming one large opening for the six LED elements, it becomes easier to align the six LED elements with one opening when attaching the back lamp board 653 to the back side of the back lamp house 651, reducing the burden of assembling the back lamp unit 650. In addition, the height of the left and right side walls of the back lamp house 651 extends to the position of the front ends of the partition plates 664a and 664b. This reduces the light that leaks to the outside from the side walls of the back lamp house 651, allowing the pattern to be illuminated more brightly.

(Reel structure)
Next, the structure of the reels 3a to 3c will be described with reference to FIG. 39. Here, since the reels 3a to 3c have the same structure, the structure of the left reel 3a will be described as an example in the following description. As shown in FIG. 39, the left reel 3a is configured to have a reel tape 711, a reel wheel 721, and a reel frame 731. As shown in FIG. 39, the reel tape 711 is formed into a ring shape with multiple patterns (20 patterns in this embodiment) drawn on the outer circumferential surface by joining the ends of a film material formed in a long and narrow strip shape with a reel width RW. The right peripheral portion of the reel tape 711 is wound around the outer circumferential surface portion 732 of the reel frame 731, and the left peripheral portion is wound around the outer circumferential surface portion 722 of the reel wheel 721. As a result, the reel tape 711 has a cylindrical shape with the wheel 721 and the reel frame 731 as the bottom surface and the reel tape 711 as the side surface.

As shown in Fig. 40, the reel tape 711 is divided into 20 equal lengths DL (indicated by dashed lines in Fig. 40) in the longitudinal direction (i.e., the circumferential direction of the reel 3a) into 20 symbol display areas, and one symbol is displayed in each symbol display area. In Fig. 40, seven symbols (from the top to the bottom in the figure, "watermelon", "bell", "replay", "cherry", "seven", "bar", "bell", and "replay") are shown as examples of the 20 symbols displayed on the left reel 3a.

The area of each of the 20 symbol display areas is the same (=reel width RW×length of one section DL), but the size of the symbols displayed in each symbol display area varies depending on the type of symbol. Therefore, the intervals between the symbols displayed on the reel tape 711 are not uniform. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, the interval DGmin between the "Seven" symbol and the "Bar" symbol is the narrowest interval (hereinafter, the "interval DGmin" is referred to as the "minimum symbol interval DGmin"). Among these symbols, the "Seven" symbol has a transparent region LT that transmits light from the back lamp without diffusing it (i.e., you can see the other side through the reel tape 711). In the "Seven" symbol, the color of the colored areas other than the transparent region LT is red, and the transparent region LT is also colored red.

The length of the minimum symbol interval DGmin is determined by the stepping motor 680 shown in FIG.
This is longer than the movement distance Ad of the symbols when the reel 3a rotates by one step. This makes it difficult for the illumination of the symbols by the back lamp to be adversely affected even if the stopping positions of the symbols vary when the rotation of the reel 3a stops.

Returning to FIG. 39, the reel wheel 721 is formed in a generally disk-like shape using a resin material, and has an outer ring portion 722 formed in an annular shape, a hub portion 723 connected to the output shaft of the stepping motor 680, and four spoke portions 724 connecting the outer ring portion 722 and the hub portion 723. The outer ring portion 722 is formed with an outer surface portion 725 onto which the left peripheral edge of the reel tape 711 is affixed and wound. A wheel rim portion 726 of width Wr is formed on the right end portion of the outer surface portion 725, which extends radially inward of the outer ring portion 224 (in other words, toward the center of rotation of the left reel 3a).

The reel frame 731 is formed in an annular shape using a resin material, as shown in FIG. 39. An outer peripheral surface portion 732 is formed on the outer periphery of the reel frame 731, around which the right peripheral edge of the reel tape 711 is affixed and wound. In addition, a frame rim portion 733 of width Wr is formed on the left end portion of the outer peripheral surface portion 732, which extends radially inward of the reel frame 731 (in other words, toward the center of rotation of the left reel 3a).

<Relationship between the back lamp house and the reel>
The following describes the characteristics of the relationship between the back lamp house 651 and the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c.
(Relationship between the back lamp house and the reel symbols)
In this embodiment, the sizes of the LED exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, and 663c shown in Fig. 37 and Fig. 38 are smaller than the size of the pattern display area shown in Fig. 40. More specifically, the ranges of the LED exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, and 663c are sized to fit within the range of the pattern display area. More preferably, the ranges of the LED exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, and 663c are configured to fit within the outline of the largest pattern among the patterns displayed on the reel tape 711.

As described above, for example, the shade portion 664a is inclined so that the opening of the symbol illumination area 661a gradually widens from the LED exposed surface 663a toward the periphery of the reel contents (the same applies to the shade portions 664b and 664c). Here, if the shape of the LED exposed surface 663a becomes too large, the inclination of the shade portion 664a described above becomes gentler, and the light illuminating the symbols on the reels becomes more likely to be uneven. Therefore, by configuring the sizes of the LED exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, and 663c to have the above-mentioned relationship, the light illuminating the symbols on the reels is less likely to be uneven, and the symbols can be clearly illuminated. This improves the visibility of the symbols, allowing the player to play smoothly.

In this embodiment, the color of the area other than the pattern displayed on the reel tape 711 (hereinafter also referred to as the "background color of the reel tape") is different from the color of the LED exposed surface 663a, 663b, 663c and the side surface of the shade portion 664a, 664b, 664c viewed through the transparent region LT shown in FIG. 40. In addition, the background color of the reel tape is different from the color of the end surface of the partition plate 665a, 665b and the shade portion 664a, 664b, 664c viewed through the transparent region LT (surfaces shown with diagonal lines slanting downward to the right in FIG. 37(b)). Here, "different colors" include, for example, when one is achromatic and the other is chromatic, or when the other color is a color other than a similar hue of the one color (more preferably, the other color is a color corresponding to the opposite hue of the one color).

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the transparent area LT of the visible pattern from blending into the background color of the reel tape, which would reduce visibility. Also, even if the LED elements mounted on the back lamp board 653 malfunction and are unable to illuminate the pattern, the visibility of the light-transmitting area LT is less likely to decrease, making it easier to press the buttons and allowing the player to play smoothly.

In addition, in this embodiment, the thickness TH3 of the partition plates 665a, 665b shown in Figures 37 and 38 is smaller than the minimum symbol spacing DGmin shown in Figure 40. By configuring in this manner, the partition plates 665a, 665b can prevent the lights illuminating the symbols in the upper, middle, and lower rows of the reel window W from interfering with each other, and the light illuminating the symbols can illuminate the entire symbols without being blocked by the partition plates 665a, 665b, improving the visibility of the symbols and allowing the player to play smoothly.

(Relationship between the back lamp house and the reel structure)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 36, the reel 3a is fixed to the output shaft of the stepping motor 680 with the back lamp module 650 sandwiched between a wheel rim portion 726 formed on the reel wheel 721 and a frame rim portion 733 (see Fig. 39) formed on the reel frame 731. At this time, the wheel rim portion 726 and the frame rim portion 733 extend toward the rotation center of the reel 3a beyond the position of the opening of the back lamp house 651. Therefore, the opening of the back lamp house 651 is surrounded by the wheel rim portion 726 of the reel wheel 721, the reel tape 711, and the frame rim portion 733 of the reel frame 731.

As a result, even if the reel connecting member 690 becomes detached, either the wheel rim portion 726 or the frame rim portion 733 will catch on the back lamp house 651, preventing the reel 3a from falling off the reel module 600a, thereby reducing the risk of damage to the reel 3a.

In addition, for example, if the wheel rim portion 726 and the frame rim portion 733 are made of a material that does not transmit light, or if they are made of a material that transmits light but are painted a color that does not transmit light (e.g., black), the wheel rim portion 726 and the frame rim portion 733 can block light leaking from the side wall of the back lamp house 651. This allows more light to be shone on the patterns, improving their visibility and allowing the player to play smoothly.

<Measures against fraudulent activities>
Next, the relationship between the color of the material of the cabinet 5 and the paint color will be described with reference to Fig. 41. Fig. 41(a) is a right side view of the slot machine 1 installed in a gaming machine rack MC in a hall, and Fig. 41(b) is a cross-sectional view of a screw hole provided in the right side plate 5b. The directions of the arrows shown in Figs. 41(a) and (b) correspond to the directions of the arrows shown in Fig. 2.

In this embodiment, the material of the cabinet 5 shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 6 is a light brown particle board, and the surfaces of the left side plate 5a, right side plate 5b and top plate 5c constituting the cabinet 5 are painted black, while the surfaces of the bottom plate 5d and back plate 5e are not painted. As shown in FIG. 3, a medal payout device 50 is installed on the bottom plate 5d inside the cabinet 5, and due to the size of the medal payout device 50, the length of the bottom plate 5d in the front-rear direction is longer than the length of the top plate 5c. Therefore, the shape of the left side plate 5a and the right side plate 5b is a substantially right-angled trapezoid with the back plate 5e at a right angle. When a cabinet 5 of this shape is installed in a rack MC for game machines in a hall, a part of the right side plate 5b (and the left side plate 5a) (the part shown by diagonal lines in FIG. 41(a)) must be exposed to the outside in order to open and close the front door 2.

For example, if someone commits fraud by drilling a hole in the exposed part of the right side panel 5b, the side of the hole will turn light brown, which is the color of the particle board material. Therefore, it is easy to notice that the housing 5 has been damaged, as a light brown area will appear on the surface of the right side panel 5b against the black paint.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), the exposed portion of the right side plate 5b is provided with a screw hole SRH for attaching various devices and components inside the housing 5. As shown in FIG. 41(b), this screw hole SRH is a countersunk hole to prevent the head of the screw SCR from protruding from the surface of the housing, and the countersunk surface CHF is also painted black. As a result, if the countersunk surface CHF is damaged, for example, in an attempt to commit fraud, a light brown area will appear on the black painted background, making it easy to notice that the countersunk surface CHF has been damaged.

Next, referring to FIG. 42, the signal paths exchanged between the various devices installed inside the housing 5 will be described. FIG. 42 shows the signal paths exchanged between the main control device 100 and the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c, the medal payout device 50, and the external centralized terminal board 80. As shown in FIG. 42, the main control device 100 and the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26 are electrically connected by signal line sg1, and the main control device 100 and the reel relay board 65 are electrically connected by signal line sg2 and signal line sg3. In addition, the reel relay board 65 and the medal payout device 50 are electrically connected by signal line sg4, and the reel relay board 65 and the external centralized terminal board 80 are electrically connected by signal line sg5.

By using such a signal path, for example, a stop operation signal output by stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c to main control device 100 is input directly to main control device 100 via signal line sg1. This allows main control device 100 to control the stopping of reels 3a, 3b, 3c. Furthermore, if a minor winning combination is achieved as a result of main control device 100 performing stop control for all reels, it outputs a medal payout signal to medal payout device 50 to pay out a predetermined number of medals. This medal payout signal is output once to reel relay board 65 via signal line sg2, and then output from reel relay board 65 to medal payout device 50 via signal line sg4. This allows medal payout device 50 to output a payout completion signal to main control device 100 each time a medal is paid out.

This payout completion signal is outputted once to the reel relay board 65 via signal line sg4, and then outputted from the reel relay board 65 to the main control device 100 via signal line sg2. The main control device 100 then counts the number of times the payout completion signal has been inputted, and when the number of medals corresponding to the winning minor role has been paid out, it stops outputting the medal payout signal. When the main control device 100 outputs a game information signal indicating the number of inserted medals and the number of paid out medals to the external centralized terminal board 80, the signal is first transmitted once to the reel relay board 65 via signal line sg3, and then transmitted from the reel relay board 65 to the external centralized terminal board 80 via signal line sg5. The external centralized terminal board 80 then outputs the input game information signal to an external hall computer or the like.

For example, when the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c send a stop operation signal to the main control device 100 via the reel relay board 65, there is a risk of fraudulent activity in which an illegal board with the following functions is attached to the reel relay board 65. First, when a stop operation signal is output from the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c to the reel relay board 65, the illegal board uses the stop operation signal as a trigger to prevent a payout completion signal from being output to the main control device 100 for a specified time, even if a payout completion signal is output from the medal payout device 50. Also, during this time, even if a game information signal is output from the main control device 100, the game information signal is not output to the external centralized terminal board 80.

As a result, when a medal payout signal is output from the main control device 100 to the medal payout device 50 via the reel relay board 65 during the above-mentioned specified time, the medal payout device 50 starts paying out medals in response, but the fraudulent board prevents the payout completion signal from being output to the main control device 100 until the above-mentioned specified time has elapsed. As a result, the main control device 100 is unable to count the number of medals paid out, so the main control device 100 continues to output the medal payout signal, resulting in medals being paid out improperly. Also, during this time, no game information signal is output to the external centralized terminal board 80, so the hall computer is unable to recognize that an unnatural payout is occurring.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the signal path shown in FIG. 42 is adopted, and the stop operation signal that triggers the above-mentioned fraudulent acts is output directly to the main control device 100 without going through the reel relay board 65, thereby making it possible to nullify the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

In the above-mentioned embodiments, a slot machine (reel type gaming machine) that uses gaming medals as gaming value has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be similarly applied to, for example, pachinko gaming machines that use gaming balls as gaming value, reel type gaming machines that use gaming balls as gaming value, reel type gaming machines and pachinko gaming machines that use information recorded on an electronic recording medium as gaming value, mahjong ball gaming machines, and arrange ball machines, and the like, and similar effects can be obtained. The present invention can also be similarly applied to slot machines with four or more reels, and similar effects can be obtained.

Next, a preferred embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (including a managed gaming machine) will be described with reference to the drawings. The configuration of the boards installed in the slot machine of the first embodiment described above can be applied to the main control board P100, presentation control board P200, image control board P530, payout control board P400, power supply board P500, frame control board P800, etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machines of the following embodiments (second embodiment to ninth embodiment), and can achieve the same effects as the first embodiment described above.

[Second embodiment]
The front view and the back view of the pachinko game machine PM according to the second embodiment are shown in Fig. 43 and Fig. 44, and the overall configuration of the pachinko game machine PM will be described with reference to these figures. The pachinko game machine PM according to this embodiment is a model that combines two functions equivalent to conventional type 1 pachinko game machines, and is capable of developing a first game (first special symbol game) and a second game (second special symbol game).

<Basic structure of a pachinko machine>
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine PM will be described with reference to Fig. 43. As shown in Fig. 43, the pachinko game machine PM (also simply called "game machine PM") has an outer frame P1, which is a vertical fixed holding frame configured with an outer rectangular frame size, and a front frame P2, which is configured with a rectangular frame size to match this and is configured as an opening and closing mounting frame, attached to the front of the opening, so that it can be opened and closed sideways and can be attached and detached by upper and lower hinge mechanisms P3 arranged on the left edge of each front, and is always held in a closed state engaged and connected to the outer frame P1 by using a locking device P4 called a double lock provided on the right edge of the front.

A square glass frame P5 that fits the upper front area of the front frame P2 is attached to the front frame P2 using upper and lower hinge mechanisms P3 so that it can be opened and closed sideways and can be attached and detached, and is always kept in a closed state covering the front of the front frame P2 using a locking device P4. A game board P20 is set and held in the front frame P2 so that the game area PA in front of the game board P20 can be seen through the double-glazed glass of the glass frame P5, which is always kept closed.

On the front side of the glass frame P5, there is a frame lamp (LED lamp) P10 that emits light according to the development status of the game, and a speaker P11 that generates sound effects according to the development status of the game. At the bottom of the glass frame P5, there are upper and lower ball trays (upper ball tray P8 and lower ball tray P9) that store game balls. At the front center of the upper ball tray P8, there is a performance button (performance switch) P15 that is pressed by the player, and at the front right side of the lower ball tray P9, there is a launch handle P12 that launches the game balls. For convenience, the operation input means for the performance will be referred to as the "performance button P15" below, but the performance button P15 in this example is used as a concept that includes all operation input means, such as an on/off button-type switch, a cross-shaped switch (cross key, cross button) that outputs according to the direction of the operation input, a tilt-operated lever-type switch, a rotary-operated dial switch, a proximity switch that outputs when the player's hand approaches or touches it, a touch sensor, a touch panel, etc.

The game board P20 is constructed based on a substrate formed into a rectangular flat plate using synthetic resin materials such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, etc. On the front surface of the game board P20, an outer rail P41 and an inner rail P42 are fixed in an arc shape to define a substantially circular game area PA in which game balls can roll. In addition, a guide passage (not shown) is formed by the outer rail P41 and the inner rail P42 to guide the game balls to the game area PA, and a ball return prevention valve P43 is disposed near the exit opening of the game ball in this guide passage (at the tip of the inner rail P42) to prevent the game balls released from the exit opening into the game area PA from returning back to the guide passage. In addition to the windmill and numerous game nails, the game area PA is equipped with various winning holes such as the first starting hole P51, the second starting hole P52, the operating gate P53, the big winning hole P54, and the general winning holes P61, P62, P63, and P64, as well as various display devices such as the first special symbol display device P71, the second special symbol display device P72, the first special symbol hold lamp P73, the second special symbol hold lamp P74, the normal symbol display device P75, and the normal symbol hold lamp P76. A center ornament P21 is disposed approximately in the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the performance display device P70 is visible through the central opening of the center ornament P21.

The game area PA is divided into a left area PA1, which is the area to the left of the center ornament P21 (the board area corresponding to left-handed play), and a right area PA2, which is the area to the right of the center ornament P21 (the board area corresponding to right-handed play), based on the center ornament P21 at approximately the center. A top plate portion P22 that faces the outer rail P41 in the vertical direction is integrally formed on the upper part of the center ornament P21, and a communication passage P44 through which game balls can pass to the right area PA2 is formed between the top plate portion P22 and the outer rail P41 on the extension of the above-mentioned guide passage. In this embodiment, game balls flowing down the left area PA1 can mainly enter either the first starting port P51 or the general winning ports P61 to P63 located below the center ornament P21. Meanwhile, game balls flowing down the right area PA2 can mainly enter any of the operation gate P53, the general winning hole P64, the second starting hole P52, and the big winning hole P54, which are located to the right of the center ornament P21. At the bottom end of the game area PA, there is an outlet P29 that discharges game balls that roll down without entering any of the winning holes to the back side of the game board P20. Each of the components provided on the game board P20 will be explained in order below.

The first start port P51 is provided as a start winning port corresponding to the first special symbol game, and is equipped with a first start port switch P511 for detecting the entry of a game ball. This first start port P51 is a winning port that is always open and faces upward, and is mainly capable of receiving game balls that flow down the left side area PA1 (game balls hit to the left). The entry of a game ball into the first start port P51 triggers the drawing of the first special symbol. In this embodiment, the special symbol that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner on the first special symbol display device P71 is referred to as the "first special symbol."

The second start port P52 is provided as a start winning port corresponding to the second special symbol game, and is equipped with a second start port switch P521 for detecting the entry of a game ball. This second start port P52 is arranged in the right area PA2, which is a board area corresponding to right hitting, and is mainly capable of receiving game balls (game balls hit to the right) flowing down the right area PA2. The entry of a game ball into the second start port P52 triggers the selection of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, the special symbol displayed as a variable or stationary display on the second special symbol display device P72 is referred to as the "second special symbol". This second start port P52 is equipped with a normal electric device P522, generally called an electric chute, and a normal electric device solenoid P523 for driving the normal electric device P522 to open and close. The normal electric device P522 is variable between an open state where the game ball can or easily enters and a closed state where the game ball cannot or has difficulty entering the second starting hole P52. In other words, the normal electric device P522 is structured so that the game ball is difficult to enter the second starting hole P52 unless it is displaced to the open state, and when it is opened at a predetermined opportunity (opportunity to win the normal pattern lottery) described later, the game ball becomes easy to enter. This normal electric device P522 is equipped with a movable member P524 that slides back and forth to open and close the second starting hole P52. The movable member P524 is slidable in the front-rear direction (direction perpendicular to the board surface) between a closed position (protruding position) that closes the second starting hole P52 to make it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter, and an open position (retracted position) that opens the second starting hole P52 to make it possible or easy for the game ball to enter. The upper surface of the movable member P524 has a passage width of at least one game ball in the front-to-rear direction, and is formed so as to slope downward from the right side to the left side when viewed from the front. Therefore, when the movable member P524 is in the closed position (when the second starting port P52 is closed), the game ball can flow down the upper surface of the movable member P524 as a guide path, and flows down the guide path from the right to the left and falls from the left end of the normal electric role device P522.

The operating gate P53 is provided as a start winning hole corresponding to normal symbol play, and is equipped with an operating gate switch P531 for detecting the passage of a game ball. The passage of a game ball through the operating gate P53 triggers a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not the second start hole P52 is opened.

The large prize opening P54 is formed as a horizontally rectangular prize opening that is opened when the result of the lottery for the first or second special symbol is a big win or a small win. The large prize opening P54 is equipped with a large prize opening switch P541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric device P542 generally called an attacker, and a large prize opening solenoid P543 for driving the special electric device P542 to open and close. The special electric device P542 is variable between an open state in which the game ball can or easily enters, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot or has difficulty entering the large prize opening P54. In this example, the large prize opening P54 is provided in the right area PA2 in the game area PA. Therefore, in special games (big win games, small win games), when the game ball is released, it is easier to get the ball to enter the big prize hole P54 by aiming at the right side area PA2, i.e., hitting to the right.

The general winning ports P61 to P63 are arranged in the left side area PA1, which is the area of the board that corresponds to left-handed play, and game balls that flow down the left side area PA1 can enter the general winning ports. The general winning ports P61 to P63 are equipped with a left general winning port switch P611 for detecting the entry of game balls. From the perspective of cost reduction, etc., this left general winning port switch P611 is configured as a common sensor (single sensor) for the three general winning ports P61 to P63, and is able to detect the entry of game balls into any of the general winning ports P61 to P63.

The general winning port P64 is located in the right area PA2, which is the area of the board that corresponds to right-handed hits, and game balls that flow down the right area PA2 can enter the general winning port P64. The general winning port P64 is equipped with a right general winning port switch P641 for detecting the entry of a game ball. Note that the entry of a game ball into each of the general winning ports P61 to P64 does not trigger the drawing of a special or normal pattern, but does trigger the winning of a prize ball, just like the other winning ports (excluding the operating gate P53).

The first special pattern display device P71 displays the variation and final display of the first special pattern when the game ball enters the first starting hole P51. This first special pattern display device P71 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variation display of the first special pattern is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamps, and the first special pattern is displayed as final when the lamps stop blinking and switch to a lit display.

The second special pattern display device P72 performs a variable display and a final display of the second special pattern when the game ball enters the second starting hole P52. This second special pattern display device P72 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variable display of the second special pattern is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamps, and the final display of the second special pattern is displayed when the lamps stop blinking and switch to a lit display.

The first special symbol pending lamp P73 and the second special symbol pending lamp P74 are each composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and indicate the number of pending balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol (up to four for each) by lighting up or blinking the lamps. The number of pending balls for the first special symbol is a number related to a random number value obtained based on balls entering the first starting hole P51 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing or a jackpot game is being played, and indicates the number of balls for which the obtained random number value is to be reserved, that is, the number for which the hit/miss judgment is temporarily suspended until the hit/miss judgment permission condition (change start condition) is satisfied for the obtained random number value. Similarly, the number of balls pending activation of the second special pattern is a number related to the random number value obtained based on balls entering the second starting hole P52 while the first or second special pattern is fluctuating or while a jackpot game is being played, and indicates the number of balls for which the obtained random number value is pending, i.e., the number for which the win/loss determination will be temporarily suspended until the win/loss determination permission condition (change start condition) is satisfied for the obtained random number value.

The normal symbol display device P75 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and displays the normal symbol variations and confirmation. The normal symbol reserve lamp P76 is composed of, for example, four lamps, and the number of lamps that are lit corresponds to the number of reserved normal symbol variations (the number of normal symbol variations that have not yet been executed). In addition, on the left side of the normal symbol display device P75, the number of rounds (unit games) in the jackpot game (number of rounds: the number of times the special electric device P542 operates consecutively) is displayed.
A round display P77 is provided to display the following:

The performance display device P70 mainly displays performance images including a decorative pattern change display that changes and stops in conjunction with the first or second special pattern, and a preview display that preliminarily suggests or notifies the expectation of a jackpot, and displays reserved balls corresponding to the first and second special patterns. Specifically, on the screen of the performance display device P70, there are provided a decorative pattern display area P700 where the decorative pattern change display and preview display are performed, a reserved image display area P710 where reserved images of the first and second special patterns are displayed in synchronization with the first special pattern reserved lamp P73 and the second special pattern reserved lamp P74, and a changing image display area P720 where a changing image corresponding to the changing display is displayed. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the performance display device P70. In the decorative pattern display area P700, three display areas (left pattern display area Z1, middle pattern display area Z2, right pattern display area Z3) that are variable display areas of decorative patterns are provided on a predetermined effective line (not shown), and the left pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the left pattern display area Z1, the middle pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the middle pattern display area Z2, and the right pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the right pattern display area Z3 are stopped and displayed. In the reserved image display area P710, reserved images (reserved icons) corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the first special pattern and reserved images (reserved icons) corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern are displayed. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the order of occurrence of the activated reserved ball of the special pattern (ball entry order), and a maximum of four reserved images of the first special pattern and a maximum of four reserved images of the second special pattern can be displayed. Additionally, the changing image display area P720 displays a changing image (changing icon) that corresponds to the currently executing changing display.

The center decoration P21 is installed around the performance display device P70 and has functions such as a flow path for game balls, protection of the performance screen, and decoration. This center decoration P21 is provided with a movable part P24 that executes performance operations according to the development status of the game. The movable part P24 is configured with a motor M (e.g., a stepping motor) as a drive source. In addition, the game board P20 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) P25 that emits light according to the development status of the game. In the following explanation, for convenience, the frame lamp P10 and the board lamp P25 are also collectively referred to as "performance lamp LP".

Next, referring to FIG. 44, the basic structure of the rear side of the pachinko game machine PM will be described. On the rear side of the front frame P2, a back set board P30 is based on a base frame body formed in a rectangular frame shape somewhat smaller than the front frame P2 and having a window in the center that connects the front and rear, and is connected to the rear of the front frame P2 via upper and lower hinge mechanisms P3 so that it can be opened and closed sideways and can be attached and detached. A back set cover P30C in the shape of a rectangular box with an open front is attached to this back set board P30 in a removable manner, and is always arranged to cover the rear side of the game board P20 attached to the front frame P2 (thereby, the main control board P100, the performance control board P200, and the image control board P300 described later are covered by the back set cover P30C).

The rear set board P30 is provided with a storage tank P31 for storing a large number of game balls, a tank rail P32 that extends from the storage tank P31 to the right with a gentle downward slope, a ball supply passage P33 that connects to the right end of the tank rail P32 and extends downward, a prize ball payout unit P34 that pays out the game balls guided by the ball supply passage P33, and a prize ball passage P35 for guiding the game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit P34 to the upper ball tray P6.

On the back side of the game board P20, there are attached a main control board P100 that controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine PM, a performance control board P200 that controls the overall performance, an image control board P300 that controls image display and sound effects according to the game development, etc. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set board P30, there are attached a payout control board P400 that controls the launch and payout of game balls, a power supply board P500 that receives power from the game facility and supplies power to various control boards and electric/electronic components, an external information terminal board P600 (see FIG. 45) that outputs external information signals (outer end signals) to the outside of the game machine PM, etc. In addition, these control boards are arranged at predetermined positions on the back of the game board P20 or the back of the back set board P30 in an assembled state housed in a transparent resin board case having a crimping structure and a sealing seal structure to prevent illegal modification. These control boards and the electrical and electronic components of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PM are interconnected via harnesses (connector cables) so that the pachinko gaming machine PM is configured to be operable.

<Control configuration of pachinko game machine>
Next, each control board mounted on the pachinko gaming machine PM according to this embodiment will be described with additional reference to Fig. 45. Fig. 45 is a control block diagram showing the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM.

The main control board P100 is equipped with a main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) P110, which is configured with a main CPUP101 that performs various arithmetic processing related to the game, a ROMP102 that stores control programs and various data, a RAMP103 that functions as a work area and buffer memory that serves as a temporary storage area, and an I/O port circuit P104 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards and each device, and is configured so that the main CPUP101 executes main control related to the progress of the game according to the control program stored in the ROMP102. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the main control board P100 is equipped with a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from a crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, a WDT circuit that resets the main CPUP101 to return it to a normal state when it malfunctions or goes out of control, a CTC circuit that enables real-time interrupt generation and time measurement, and a random number generation circuit that operates as a system separate from the program processing (software random number) by the main CPUP101 to generate a predetermined random number (built-in random number), and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

The main CPUP101 reads out various control programs stored in the ROMP102 and performs arithmetic processing based on detection information from each switch, thereby executing various processes related to the main control of the game. The RAMP103 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power supply generated in the power supply board P500. In the event of a power outage, the backup area of the RAMP103 is an area for storing data such as stack pointers and each register that were held at the time of the power outage, and when the power is turned on (when the power is restored), the state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information in the backup area.

The main control board P100 is electrically connected to the first start port switch P511, the second start port switch P521, the operation gate switch P531, the big prize port switch P541, the left general prize port switch P611, the right general prize port switch P641, etc., and inputs detection signals from various switches to the main CPU P101 via the I/O port circuit P104. The main control board P100 is also electrically connected to the first special symbol display device P71, the second special symbol display device P72, the first special symbol hold lamp P73, the second special symbol hold lamp P74, the normal symbol display device P75, and the normal symbol hold lamp P76, and is electrically connected to the normal electric role solenoid P523 and the special electric role solenoid P543, and transmits control signals from the main CPU P101 to various display means and various solenoids via the I/O port circuit P104. The main control board P100 is also electrically connected to an external information terminal board P600, and transmits game information signals from the main CPU P101 to the external terminal board P600 via the I/O port circuit P104. This external information terminal board P600 transmits various external information signals to external devices (such as a data display device or hall computer) installed outside the gaming machine PM based on the game information signals transmitted from the main control board P100. The game information signals transmitted from the main control board P100 may be input to the external information terminal board P600 via, for example, the payout control board P400.

The main control board P100 and the performance control board P200 are connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe line, and are connected so that communication is possible in only one direction, from the main control board P100 to the performance control board P200, and various performance control commands are sent from the main control board P100 to the performance control board P200. It is not possible for the performance control board P200 to send data to the main control board P100, nor is it possible for the main control board P100 to be requested to send data.

The presentation control board P200 is equipped with a presentation control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) P210 which is configured with a sub-main CPUP201 which performs various calculation processes related to game presentations based on presentation control commands from the main control board P100, a ROMP202 which stores presentation control programs and various data, a RAMP203 which functions as a work area and buffer memory that serves as a temporary storage area, and an I/O port circuit P204 which inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards and each device, and the sub-main CPUP201 is configured to execute main control related to game presentations in accordance with the control program stored in the ROMP202. In addition, although not shown, the performance control board P200 is equipped with a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from a crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, a WDT circuit that resets the sub-main CPU P201 to return it to a normal state when it malfunctions or goes out of control, a TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, an interrupt controller that activates various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on signals from the TPU circuit, and a serial communication circuit for inputting and outputting serial data, all of which are connected to each other via an internal bus.

The performance control board P200 generates image control commands that instruct the image control board P300 on images and sounds, lamp control signals (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board P91, drive control signals (drive data) for controlling the motor driver P92, and the like, through performance control processing based on performance control commands from the main control board P100. The performance control board P200 is connected to the image control board P300 so that two-way communication is possible, and image control commands related to images and sounds are sent from the performance control board P200 to the image control board P300, while in response, a response command (ACK command) indicating that the image control command was successfully received is sent from the image control board P300 to the performance control board P200.

The performance control board P200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board P91 equipped with multiple LED drivers, and transmits a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board P91 via a serial communication circuit. In this example, the performance control board P200 and the lamp connection board P91 use clock-synchronized serial communication, and the lamp control signal is transmitted bit by bit via a signal line (clock line) separate from the data line for transmitting lamp data, in synchronization with the clock signal. The lamp connection board P91 has a built-in LED driver that receives the lamp control signal for driving the LEDs transmitted from the performance control board P200, and by switching on/off a switch in the circuit based on this lamp control signal, the driving current is supplied or cut off to the performance lamp LP, thereby controlling the lighting or extinguishing of the performance lamp LP.

Furthermore, the performance control board P200 is electrically connected to a plurality of motor drivers P92, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver P92 to the motor driver P92 via the I/O port circuit P204. The motor driver P92 controls the operation of each movable role P24 by supplying or cutting off a drive current to the stepping motor of each movable role P24 by switching on/off a switch in the circuit based on the drive control signal for driving the role transmitted from the performance control board P200. Note that a parallel communication method is used for transmitting data to the motor driver P92.

The image control board P300 is equipped with an image control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) P310, which is configured with a sub-sub CPUP301 that performs various calculation processing related to image performance based on image control commands from the performance control board P200, a ROMP302 that stores image control programs and various data, a RAMP303 that functions as a work area and buffer memory that serves as a temporary storage area, and an I/O port circuit P304 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards and each device, and the sub-sub CPUP301 is configured to execute main control related to image performance according to the control program stored in the ROMP302. In addition, the image control board P300 is equipped with a VDP that generates image data according to the performance content based on the control signal obtained from the sub-sub CPUP301, and a sound source IC that generates sound data according to the performance content based on the control signal obtained from the sub-sub CPUP301, although not shown in the figure. The VDP is a so-called image processor that reads image data stored in the image ROM in response to instructions from the sub-sub CPUP 301, processes the image data, and sends the generated video signal (image data) to the performance display device. A high-speed VRAM is connected to this VDP, which is used to expand and process the image data read from the image ROM. The sound source IC reads audio data stored in the audio ROM in response to instructions from the sub-sub CPUP 301, synthesizes the audio data, and outputs it to the speaker P11 via an amplifier (digital amplifier).

The payout control board P400 is mainly composed of a payout CPU P401, a ROM P402, and a RAM P403. The payout control board P400 is connected to the main control board P100 so as to be capable of two-way communication, and executes control to drive the prize ball payout unit P34 to pay out prize balls based on a payout control command from the main control board P100, and also executes control to launch game balls by synchronously driving the ball feed mechanism P13 and the launch mechanism P14 based on the amount of operation of the launch handle P12.

The power supply board P500, although not shown in detail, is configured with a normal power supply circuit for generating normal power used by each control board based on the primary power supplied from the power supply equipment of the game island, a backup power supply circuit for generating backup power, and a power interruption monitoring circuit for monitoring power interruption due to voltage drop, and supplies the power required for each control board and electronic and electrical components of the game equipment. A power switch for starting the power supply circuit is connected to the power supply board P500, and assuming that the primary power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island, when the power switch is turned on, a predetermined power is supplied from the normal power supply circuit of the power supply board P500 to each control board, etc. The power supply board P500 is configured to be able to detect when the power supply from the power supply device of the game island is interrupted, and when a power interruption is detected, a power interruption signal (NMI signal) informing the fact is sent to the main control board P100, the performance control board P200, and the payout control board P400. The backup power circuit is charged when power is being supplied to the pachinko game machine PM from the game island's power supply. A RAM clear switch (not shown) is connected to the power supply board P500 to erase the temporary memory contents of the RAM P103 of the main control board P100 and set the initial value when the pachinko game machine PM is powered on. The RAM clear switch may be connected to the main control board P100, for example, instead of the power supply board P500.

The external information terminal board P600 outputs an external information signal (outer end signal) to the outside of the gaming machine PM based on the gaming information signal from the main control board P100. The external information signal output by the external information terminal board P600 to an external device outside the machine as external information includes, for example, a big win signal, a consecutive win signal, a pattern determination signal, a prize ball signal (also called a prize ball information signal), a door frame opening signal, a security signal (also called a security information signal), a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormal sensor detection (ball entry time abnormality, etc.) signal, etc. In addition, the external device installed outside the gaming machine PM includes a data display and a hall computer. The data display is a device installed on the top of the gaming machine PM and displays data (game information) related to the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on the external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on this data display is useful information for a player to use when selecting a gaming machine. The hall computer is a device that compiles the operating status of each gaming machine (including this gaming machine PM) based on external information signals output from each gaming machine installed in the hall of a gaming parlor, and manages the operating status of each gaming machine, etc. This hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM via a data display device, or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without via a data display device.

<Basic operation of pachinko machines>
The pachinko game machine PM, which is constructed as described above, is provided for play with the outer frame 1 fixedly installed on the game island of the game facility, and the front frame P2, the glass frame P5, etc., closed and locked. The game is started by storing game balls in the upper ball tray P8 and rotating the launch handle P12. When the launch handle P12 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray P8 are sent one by one to the launch mechanism P14 by the ball sending mechanism P13 arranged on the back side of the glass frame P5, and are shot out by the launch mechanism P14 into the game area PA. At this time, when the launch handle P12 is operated less than a predetermined amount, the game balls do not reach the right area PA2 and flow down the left area PA1. In this left area PA1, a left flow path is formed for flowing the game balls down toward the first start port P51 and the general winning ports P61 to P63. On the other hand, when the launch handle P12 is operated by a predetermined amount or more, the game ball reaches the right area PA2 and flows down the right area PA2. In this right area PA2, a right flow path is formed for causing the game ball to flow down toward the operation gate P53, the general winning port P64, the second starting port P52, and the large winning port P54. In this way, the game ball flowing down the left area PA1 or the right area PA2 can enter either the first starting port P51, the second starting port P52, the operation gate P53, the large winning port P54, or the general winning ports P61 to P64 depending on the route allocated in the left area PA1 or the right area PA1, while if the ball does not enter any of the winning ports, it flows down to the out port P29.

When a game ball flowing down the game area PA enters any of the first start port P51, the second start port P52, the large prize port P54, and the general prize ports P61 to P63, the prize ball according to the type of the prize port is paid out to the upper ball tray P8 or the lower ball tray P9 by the prize ball payout unit P34. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when one game ball enters each prize port (referred to as the "unit prize ball number") is set as "4 balls" for the first start port P51, "1 ball" for the second start port P52, "3 balls" for the general prize ports P61 to P64, and "15 balls" for the large prize port P54. Note that the unit prize ball number for each prize port is not limited to the number exemplified in this embodiment, and other unit prize ball numbers may be applied. For example, the unit prize ball number for the first start port P51 may be "1 ball" instead of "4 balls". Also, the second starting port P52 may have "3" instead of "1". Also, the general winning ports P61 to P64 may have "5" instead of "3". Also, the large winning port may have "10" instead of "15".

When a game ball enters the first start hole P51 or the second start hole P52, a random number value for a special symbol is obtained, and the random number value is temporarily stored as an activation reserved ball for the special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit. Then, when a predetermined start condition (special symbol change start condition described below) is met, a special symbol hit/fail judgment, pattern judgment, and change pattern judgment are performed for the random number value for the first activation reserved ball, and the special symbol is displayed in a changing manner on the first special symbol display device P71 or the second special symbol display device P72, and the decorative symbol is displayed in a changing manner on the performance display device P70 in a changing manner according to the judgment result. The display of the special symbol and decorative symbol changes and stops synchronously after the change time according to the selected change pattern has elapsed.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in a fixed manner indicating a jackpot, the game moves to a special game (jackpot game) that is more advantageous to the player than normal game. In each round of the jackpot game (unit game), an opening and closing operation is performed to change the jackpot opening P54 to an open state once or multiple times. When a specified number of game balls enter the jackpot opening P54 or the opening time of the jackpot opening P54 reaches the opening limit time, the ongoing round of the game ends. Here, the stopping mode of the decorative symbol indicating a jackpot is, for example, a mode in which the types of three symbols match. In this embodiment, when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are displayed in a fixed manner indicating a jackpot, multiple rounds of the game (unit game) are executed as the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined jackpot is won, the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol may be activated from the end of the jackpot game until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined final number. When the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery transitions from a normal low probability state to a high probability state, so that a new jackpot (jackpot game) will occur relatively quickly. The probability fluctuation function of the special symbol may be set to continue until the next jackpot occurs. Also, the predetermined final number may be set to "10,000 times," which essentially corresponds to the number of times the display changes until the next jackpot occurs.

In addition, after the jackpot game ends, a special symbol fluctuation time reduction function may be activated in conjunction with or independently of the special symbol probability fluctuation function. When the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function is activated, the average fluctuation time of the special symbols and decorative symbols tends to be shorter than usual, increasing the number of special symbol draws per unit time (increasing the ease of winning a jackpot per unit time).

Furthermore, after the big win game is over, the electric chute support function (also simply called "electric support") may be activated in conjunction with or independently of the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function. The electric chute support function is a state in which the ease of scoring into the second starting hole P52 is increased (also called the "electric support state" or "easy scoring state") by activating the normal symbol probability fluctuation function, normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function, and normal electric role P522 opening extension function. When the normal symbol probability fluctuation function is activated, the normal symbol win probability is higher than in the normal state. When the normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function is activated, the normal symbol fluctuation time is shortened. When the normal electric role P522 opening extension function is activated, the normal electric role P522 opening time is extended more than in the normal state. In this easy-to-enter state, the number of times the normal pattern changes per certain time period is more likely to be higher than usual, and the ease of entering the second starting hole P52 also increases, so the possibility of an increase in the number of balls entering the second starting hole P52 also increases. Therefore, by activating the electric chute support function, the chances of winning a prize ball by entering the second starting hole P52 during that period increase, making it possible to continue playing without losing much of the balls you have. In other words, the "base," which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls fired, becomes higher. Below, the state in which the electric chute support function is activated is also referred to as the "high base state," and the state in which the electric chute support function is not activated is also referred to as the "low base state."

<Major functional configuration of a pachinko machine>
Next, various functions of the pachinko game machine PM (mainly the main control board P100/performance control board P200) according to this embodiment will be described with additional reference to Fig. 46. Fig. 46 is a functional block diagram of this game machine PM (mainly the main control board P100/performance control board P200).

As shown in Fig. 46, the main control board P100 includes a ball entry determination means P110, a game lottery random number generation means P120, a reserve control means P130, a pre-determination means P135, a special symbol lottery processing means P140, a normal symbol lottery processing means P145, a special game control means P150, a symbol display control means P155, an electric role control means P160, a game state control means P165, an error monitoring control means P170, a main information storage means P180, and a command transmission/reception means P190. Each of the above-mentioned means in the main control board P100 is a functional representation of the main CPU P101, ROM P102, RAM P103, hardware such as electronic circuits, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM P102, etc., provided on the main control board P100.

The ball entry determination means P110 determines whether a game ball has entered each entry port based on detection signals from the first start port switch P511, the second start port switch P521, the operating gate switch P531, the large prize port switch P541, the general prize port switch P611, 641, etc. When the ball entry determination means P110 detects the entry of a game ball at the first start port switch P511, it generates a presentation control command indicating that (referred to as the "first start port entry command"), when it detects the entry of a game ball at the second start port switch P521, it generates a presentation control command indicating that (referred to as the "second start port entry command"), when it detects the passage of a game ball at the operating gate switch P531, it generates a presentation control command indicating that (referred to as the "operating gate entry command"), and when it detects the passage of a game ball at the large prize port switch P541 If the left general prize gate switch P611 detects a game ball entering, it generates a presentation control command indicating that (called the "large prize gate entry command"), if the left general prize gate switch P611 detects a game ball entering, it generates a presentation control command indicating that (called the "left general prize gate entry command"), if the right general prize gate switch P611 detects a game ball entering, it generates a presentation control command indicating that (called the "right general prize gate entry command"), and temporarily stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means P180.

The gaming lottery random number generating means P120 uses software to take in the built-in random numbers generated by the random number generating circuit of the main control microcomputer P110, and adds the special symbol software random numbers described below to these to generate special symbol random numbers used in the lottery to determine whether or not a special symbol will be selected. The gaming lottery random number generating means P120 also includes random number counters for generating various software random numbers through program processing by the main CPU P101. These random number counters serve as random number generating means for generating random numbers in a software manner. These software random numbers include soft random numbers per special pattern which are added to the aforementioned built-in random number to generate winning random numbers, soft initial value random numbers per special pattern for determining the initial value for a new update after one cycle of updating the soft random numbers per special pattern is completed, special pattern stopping pattern random numbers used to determine the winning pattern (the combination of patterns that will activate the condition device) as the stopping pattern for the special pattern, special pattern stopping pattern initial value random numbers for determining the initial value for a new update after one cycle of updating the special pattern stopping pattern random numbers is completed, special pattern changing pattern random numbers for use in selecting the changing pattern of the special pattern, random numbers per ordinary pattern for use in drawing out the winning or losing results of ordinary patterns, initial value random numbers per ordinary pattern for determining the initial value for a new update after one cycle of updating the random numbers per ordinary pattern is completed, and ordinary pattern changing pattern random numbers for use in selecting the changing pattern of the ordinary pattern. These software random numbers are updated once each time a timer interrupt process occurs (increment, decrement, add prime numbers, etc.), and the initial value random numbers are updated using the remaining time of the interrupt period even when the timer interrupt process is not being executed (during loop processing).

The reservation control means P130 includes a special symbol reservation control means P131 and a normal symbol reservation control means P132.

The special symbol reservation control means P131 acquires the random number values for the special symbol game, the random number value for the special symbol, the random number value for the special symbol, and the random number value for the special symbol variation pattern, which are the lottery random numbers related to the special symbol game, when the game ball enters the first starting hole P51 or the second starting hole P52, and manages the random number values as the operation reserved ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol reservation control means P131 temporarily stores the operation reserved ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) in the first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main information storage means P180 in a form combined with the entry order of the reserved balls.

In the first special symbol reserved storage area and the second special symbol reserved storage area, reserved 1 memory area (first reserved storage area), reserved 2 memory area (second reserved storage area), reserved 3 memory area (third reserved storage area), and reserved 4 memory area (fourth reserved storage area) are provided in the order of balls entering each starting port 51, 52. Each reserved storage area can store a set of random numbers per special symbol, random numbers of symbols per special symbol, and random numbers of special symbol variation patterns as operating reserved ball information. The operating reserved ball information is stored in the order of reserved 1 memory area, reserved 2 memory area, reserved 3 memory area, and reserved 4 memory area, while it is consumed in the order of reserved 1 memory area, reserved 2 memory area, reserved 3 memory area, and reserved 4 memory area (first in, first out principle). In addition, when the reserved ball information in the reserved 1 memory area is consumed, the reserved ball information stored in the reserved 2 memory area, reserved 3 memory area, and reserved 4 memory area is shifted to the memory area with the lower number, and the contents of the reserved 4 memory area are cleared to zero.

The special symbol reserved control means P131 also has a first special symbol reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls of the second special symbol. As an update process for the number of activated reserved balls of the special symbol, the special symbol reserved control means P131 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time an activated reserved ball of the special symbol is obtained, and subtracts 1 from the corresponding counter each time an activated reserved ball is consumed.

In addition, when the special symbol reservation control means P131 updates (adds or subtracts) the number of activated reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it generates a performance control command (referred to as a "symbol memory number command") including the update information for the number of reserved balls, and temporarily stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means P180. This one command includes information on both the number of activated reserved balls for the first special symbol and the number of activated reserved balls for the second special symbol. In principle, the activated reserved balls for each special symbol are consumed in the order in which they are entered, but in this embodiment, a so-called priority consumption is adopted in which the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the first special symbol, so that while an activated reserved ball for the second special symbol game exists, the activated reserved ball for the second special symbol game is consumed preferentially, regardless of the presence of an activated reserved ball for the first special symbol game. In addition, under this priority consumption, if an activated ball with a second special symbol is present, the consumed ball with the first special symbol will be put on hold even if an activated ball with a first special symbol is also present.

The normal symbol reserved control means P132 acquires the random numbers for the normal symbol game, the random number for the normal symbol, the random number for the symbol for the normal symbol, and the random number for the normal symbol change pattern, when a game ball enters the activation gate P53, and manages the random numbers as activation reserved ball information for the normal symbol. The normal symbol reserved control means P132 temporarily stores the activation reserved ball information for the normal symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) in the normal symbol reserved storage area of the main information storage means P180 in a form combined with the entry order of the reserved balls. The normal symbol reserved control means P132 also has a normal symbol reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activation reserved balls for the normal symbol. As an update process of the reserved ball number for the activation normal symbol, the normal symbol reserved control means P132 adds 1 to the corresponding counter every time an activation reserved ball for the normal symbol is acquired, and subtracts 1 from the corresponding counter every time an activation reserved ball for the normal symbol is consumed.

When the pre-judgment means P135 acquires an activated reserved ball of a special pattern at a predetermined pre-judgment timing, it executes a pre-judgment for a pre-reading notice on the activated reserved ball. An example of the above pre-judgment timing is when any of the following conditions is satisfied: (1) when an activated reserved ball of a first special pattern is acquired while waiting for a win and the electric chute support function is not in operation, (2) when an activated reserved ball of a second special pattern is acquired while waiting for a win and the electric chute support function is in operation, and (3) when an activated reserved ball of a second special pattern is acquired during a big win or a small win. Note that the above pre-judgment timing is an example, and the pre-judgment timing may be changed according to the specifications of the gaming machine (for example, in a machine that has a starting port for a second special pattern that does not have a normal electric role and can accumulate eight reserved balls during normal times, the above (1) may be applied to not only the first special pattern but also the second special pattern, etc.), or a specification that performs a pre-judgment at any time without setting a pre-judgment timing may be adopted. Also, only the reserved balls of the special symbols that are the main players in the game in each game state may be subject to the pre-determination, and it is preferable that only the reserved balls of the first special symbol are subject to the pre-determination in the normal game state, and only the reserved balls of the second special symbol are subject to the pre-determination in the time-saving game state, the latent probability change game state, and the probability change game state. Specifically, the pre-determination means P135 reads out the random number value corresponding to the reserved balls obtained this time from the first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area of the main information storage means P180, and sequentially performs the pre-determination of whether or not the winning is won (pre-determination of whether or not the winning is won), the pre-determination of the symbol (pre-determination of the symbol), and the pre-determination of the variation pattern (pre-determination of the variation pattern). Although the pre-judgment table used in each pre-judgment is not shown, the table for pre-judgment of win/loss, the table for pre-judgment of pattern, and the table for pre-judgment of variation pattern are each divided into a plurality of regions, each of which corresponds to the total number of random numbers, and a lottery ID (a number indicating the result of the pre-judgment (also called "pre-judgment number")) is assigned to each of these regions (judgment number). Therefore, the result of this pre-judgment is equivalent to the result of the main lottery by the special pattern lottery processing means P140 described later (the result of the win/loss judgment, the result of the pattern judgment, and the result of the variation pattern judgment). Note that the table for pre-judgment of win/loss and the table for pre-judgment of pattern may be the same as the win/loss lottery table and the pattern lottery table used for the lottery when the variation actually starts. Here, since the game situation at the start of the variation (whether there is a probability change, whether there is a time reduction, whether there is a limited frequency period in which the special table is referenced, the number of reserved balls, etc.) may change, it is preferable to judge which of the plurality of regions the table for pre-judgment of variation pattern is included in, as described above. As a modified example, the random number value of a register or the like on the main CPU P101, which is temporarily stored before being stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area, may be pre-determined. Then, the pre-determination means P135 sequentially generates performance control commands (referred to as "pre-determination commands") including information on the results of the pre-determination (pre-determination numbers), and stores them in the command storage area of the main information storage means P180.

The special symbol lottery processing means P140 includes a special symbol hit/miss judgment means P141, a special symbol stop symbol judgment means P142, and a special symbol change pattern judgment means P143. When the first special symbol or second special symbol change start condition is satisfied, the special symbol lottery processing means P140 reads out the special symbol random number value, the special symbol random number value, and the special symbol change pattern random number value stored in the most advanced memory area (reserved 1 memory area) of the special symbol reserved storage area in the main information storage means P180, and stores them in the special symbol hit/miss judgment area, the special symbol pattern judgment area, and the special symbol change pattern judgment area of the main information storage means P180, respectively. Here, "the first special symbol change start condition is met" means that all of the following conditions are met: (A1) the jackpot is not in progress, (A2) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting to change, and (A3) the first special symbol's activation reserved ball is present. Also, "the second special symbol change start condition is met" means that all of the following conditions are met: (B1) the jackpot is not in progress, (B2) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting to change, and (B3) the second special symbol's activation reserved ball is present. Note that when the first special symbol change start condition and the second special symbol change start condition are met at the same time, the second special symbol change start condition is processed with priority under the above-mentioned priority consumption.

The special symbol hit/miss judgment means P141 reads out the special symbol hit random number value from the special symbol hit/miss judgment area of the main information storage means P180, executes hit/miss judgment, and determines whether the judgment result corresponds to a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. The result of this hit/miss judgment is temporarily stored in the special symbol judgment flag of the main information storage means P180 (for example, big hit data "55H", small hit data "33H", miss data "00H"), and is used in subsequent processing, and then cleared when the special symbol stops fluctuating. The special symbol hit/miss judgment means P141 holds a special symbol hit/miss lottery table that is referenced when this hit/miss judgment is made.

Here, FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of a special symbol winning/losing lottery table. FIG. 47(A) is referred to in a game state (low probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is not activated, and FIG. 47(B) is referred to in a game state (high probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated. In the special symbol winning/losing lottery table, the random number range of the special symbol winning random number and the result of the special symbol winning/losing judgment (jackpot, loss) are associated. As shown in FIG. 47, in the winning/losing judgment of the special symbol, in a game state (low probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is not activated, a jackpot is determined when the special symbol winning random number falls within the range of "0 to 204", and in a game state (high probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, a jackpot is determined when the special symbol winning random number falls within the range of "0 to 1506". In other words, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability of winning the jackpot varies from a low probability of "1/319.69" to a high probability of "1/43.49". In this way, the probability of winning the jackpot varies depending on the game state, but the probability of winning the jackpot is set equal for the first special symbol hit/miss judgment and the second special symbol hit/miss judgment. In this embodiment, a "small hit" is not set as a result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol, but a "small hit" may be set as a result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol. The probability of winning the small hit is set to the same probability regardless of the game state (low probability state, high probability state).

The special symbol stop symbol determination means P142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the result of the winning/losing lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 48, the special symbol stop symbol determination means P142 has a first special symbol jackpot symbol table and a second special symbol jackpot symbol table that are referenced when determining the jackpot symbol (jackpot type) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this embodiment, a "specific jackpot" refers to a jackpot (variable jackpot) that triggers the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends, and a "normal jackpot" refers to a jackpot (non-variable jackpot) that does not trigger the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends.

In this embodiment, the normal game state, the time-saving game state, and the probability change game state are set as multiple types of game states. As the types of game states, (1) a game state in which the probability change function of the special symbol, the time-saving function of the special symbol, and the electric chute support function are activated is called a "probability change state" or a "probability change game state", (2) a game state in which the probability change function of the special symbol is not activated and the time-saving function of the special symbol and the electric chute support function are activated is called a "time-saving state" or a "time-saving game state", and (3) a state in which all functions are not activated is called a "normal state" or a "normal game state". Here, the "probability change game state" and the "time-saving game state" can be said to be game states that are more advantageous for the player than the "normal game state". Therefore, in the following, the probability change game state and the time-saving game state are also called "advantageous game states" as game states that are more advantageous for the player than the normal game state.

In addition, each game state can be expressed as (1) a high probability high base state for a high probability game state, (2) a time-saving game state as a low probability high base state, and (3) a normal game state as a low probability low base state, depending on the combination of the operation state of the probability fluctuation function of the special pattern (high probability state/low probability state) and the operation state of the electric chute support function (high base state/low base state). In addition, a game state in which the operation state of the probability fluctuation function is a high probability state while the operation state of the electric chute support function is a low base state (one of the game states that is more advantageous to the player than the "normal game state") may be provided, and such a game state may be called a potential probability game state, and this potential probability game state may be expressed as a "high probability low base state". This potential probability game state ("high probability low base state") is a game state that is suitable for playing games mainly based on small wins, and details will be described later. Unless otherwise specified, these states (combination states of low probability/high probability and low base/high base) refer to the game state (state in which hit/miss judgment and variable display are possible) in a state other than a big win or a small win, but during a big win, it is a low probability low base state, and during a small win, it is the same game state as the game state when a small win is won. At this time, the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function means that the fluctuation time of at least the special symbol that is the main subject of the game in that game state, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, is shortened. That is, in this embodiment, when the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is activated, in a game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is the main subject of the game (normal game state), at least the first special symbol fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) is shortened, and in a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main subject of the game (probability game state, potential game state, time-saving game state), at least the second special symbol fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) is shortened.

In this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game ends is determined according to (1) the type of jackpot (type of symbol group) and (2) the game state at the time of the jackpot win. The number of times each game state continues (the number of times the special symbol changes) is set according to the number of times the probability change function of the special symbol is activated (referred to as the "probability change number"), the number of times the change time reduction function of the special symbol is activated (referred to as the "change time reduction number"), and the number of times the electric chute support function is activated (referred to as the "electric support number"). In this embodiment, the change time reduction function of the special symbol and the electric chute support function start and end their operation at the same time, so the "change time reduction number" and the "electric support number" are the same number (for this reason, in FIG. 48, the "change time reduction number" and the "electric support operation number" are written in the same column).

Figure 48 (A) is a diagram showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, the symbol group, jackpot type, number of probability fluctuations, number of fluctuation time reductions (number of electric support), number of specified rounds of jackpot play, and opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize winning port P54 for each round are associated with the special symbol winning symbol random number value (in this example, for convenience, the description of the stopped symbols is omitted). In the first special symbol jackpot table, two types of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, the two types of jackpot types (symbol groups) are divided into 4R specific jackpot (symbol group A) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group B).

(4R specific jackpot: pattern group A)
When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the probability fluctuation count "10,000 times", the fluctuation time shortening count "10,000 times", and the electric support count "10,000 times" are set, and the probability variable game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This probability variable game state is set to a huge number of times "10,000 times" as the continuation count (probability fluctuation count, fluctuation time shortening count, electric support count) and it is probabilistically impossible (about 1/44 win) not to win a jackpot until the continuation count is reached, so it will continue until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the large prize winning port P54 in one round game is "29 seconds".

(4R normal jackpot: pattern group B)
When the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won, the probability fluctuation count is set to "0 times", the fluctuation time shortening count is set to "100 times", and the electric support count is set to "100 times", and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 100 times, or until the next jackpot occurs within these 100 times. If the time-saving game state ends when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 100 times, the game transitions to the normal game state from the next special symbol change display. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the large prize winning port P54 in one round game is "29 seconds".

Figure 48 (B) is a diagram showing the second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, the symbol group, jackpot type, probability fluctuation number of times, fluctuation time shortening number of times (electric support number of times), specified number of rounds of jackpot play, and opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize winning port P54 for each round are respectively associated with the special symbol winning symbol random number value (in this example, for convenience, the description of the stopped symbols is omitted). In the second special symbol jackpot table, three types of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, the three types of jackpot types (symbol groups) are divided into 16R specific jackpot (symbol group C), 4R specific jackpot (symbol group D), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group E).

(16R specific jackpot: pattern group C)
If the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" is won, the probability fluctuation count is set to "10,000 times", the fluctuation time shortening count is set to "10,000 times", and the electric support count is set to "10,000 times", and the game state after the jackpot game ends is set to a probability variable game state. As mentioned above, this probability variable game state is set to a huge number of times of "10,000 times" as the continuation count, and will continue until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, if the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the large prize winning port P54 in one round game is "29 seconds". In addition, this 16R special jackpot may also be designed to be won by the first special symbol, in which case it is preferable to make it harder to win than the second special symbol (for example, 5% of all jackpot symbols, and for the first special symbol, 16R special jackpots are 5%, 4R special jackpots are 60%, and 4R regular jackpots are 35%).

(4R specific jackpot: pattern group D)
If the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group D)" is won, the probability fluctuation count is set to "10,000 times", the fluctuation time reduction count is set to "10,000 times", and the electric support count is set to "10,000 times", and the game state after the jackpot game ends is set to a probability variable game state. As mentioned above, this probability variable game state is set to a huge number of times of "10,000 times" as the continuation count, and will continue until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, if the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group D)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the large prize winning port P54 in one round game is "29 seconds".

(4R normal jackpot: pattern group E)
If the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group E)" is won, the probability fluctuation count is set to "0 times", the fluctuation time shortening count is set to "100 times", and the electric support count is set to "100 times", and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 100 times, or until the next jackpot occurs within these 100 times. If the time-saving game state ends when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 100 times, the game transitions to the normal game state from the next special symbol change display. In addition, if the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group E)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the large prize winning port P54 in one round game is "29 seconds".

Here, in this embodiment, three types of jackpots are provided: 16R specific jackpot (symbol group C), 4R specific jackpot (symbol group A, D), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group B, E). The expected value of winning balls in the special game (referred to as the "expected value of winning balls") is 16R specific jackpot > 4R specific jackpot = 4R normal jackpot. Here, the actual number of rounds of the special game when the first special symbol wins a jackpot is "4 rounds", whereas the actual number of rounds of the special game when the second special symbol wins a jackpot is "16 rounds". Therefore, when the second special symbol wins a jackpot, the player is more likely to move to a special game with a larger number of rounds than when the first special symbol wins a jackpot, which is advantageous for the player in that more balls can be won. The actual number of rounds of this special game corresponds to the number of times the "long open round game" set for that special game is performed. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of each round of the jackpot game is a fixed time of 29 seconds (although all rounds are "long opening round games"), but a "short opening round game" may be provided in which the maximum opening time of the large prize winning hole P54 is shortened to 2 seconds in a predetermined round or all rounds during the same jackpot game, so that even if the number of rounds of the jackpot game is the same, a configuration may be adopted in which there are jackpots with different numbers of rounds in which balls can be effectively won (jackpots with different actual numbers of rounds). The long opening round game is a round game in which the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize winning hole P54 is set so that a specified count number (full count = 10 balls) of game balls can be entered into the large prize winning hole P54 or is set so that it is easy to enter the balls. The short opening round game is a round game in which the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize winning hole P54 is set so that a specified count number (full count = 10 balls) of game balls cannot be entered into the large prize winning hole P54 or is set so that it is difficult to enter the balls.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern determination means P143 determines the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value. Here, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination means P143 holds multiple types of fluctuation pattern tables that are referenced when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. The special symbol fluctuation pattern determination means P143 selects one of the multiple types of fluctuation pattern tables based on the current fluctuation pattern selection state. The relationship between the fluctuation pattern selection state and the fluctuation pattern table will be described later. Multiple types of fluctuation patterns are specified in each fluctuation pattern table. In each figure, for convenience of explanation, the "selection rate" is written, but in reality, a judgment value (range of random number value) for determining the fluctuation pattern is set according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value, and the fluctuation pattern is determined based on which judgment value the fluctuation pattern random number value belongs to. For each type of fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation time is associated with each fluctuation pattern as the end condition of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and it is assumed that the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is also executed at that fluctuation time.

Here, the variation pattern selection state will be explained. The variation pattern selection state is one of the selection conditions that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation pattern table). In this example, a "normal selection state", a "time-saving selection state", and a "probable variation selection state" are set as multiple types of variation pattern selection states. The normal selection state is a variation pattern selection state that is set in response to a game state (normal game state) in which the probability variation function of the special pattern, the variation time shortening function, and the electric chute support function are not operating. The time-saving selection state is a variation pattern selection state that is set in response to a game state (time-saving game state) in which the probability variation function of the special pattern is not operating, but the variation time shortening function of the special pattern and the electric chute support function are operating. The probable variation selection state is a variation pattern selection state that is set in response to a game state (probable variation game state) in which the probability variation function of the special pattern, the variation time shortening function, and the electric chute support function are all operating.

As shown in Figures 49 to 51, the special symbol variation pattern table has different columns for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that different variation patterns can be selected even if the same special symbol variation pattern random number value is obtained. Here, the number of operation reserved balls described in each figure ("0 reserved", "1 to 2 reserved", "3 reserved") means the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of operation reserved balls after the reserved balls are consumed) in the case of the first special symbol variation pattern lottery, and means the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of operation reserved balls after the reserved balls are consumed) in the case of the second special symbol variation pattern lottery. This number of operation reserved balls is the number of operation reserved balls that exist at the time of the lottery of the variation pattern (at the start of the variation display/after the reserved balls are consumed) (not including the operation reserved balls consumed by the variation display). In addition, as a modified example, the total number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

The decorative pattern change presentation that is performed in conjunction with the special pattern change display is determined based on the type of special pattern change pattern (change time), etc. Figures 49 to 51 also show, for reference, the content of the change presentation that is set for each change pattern (change time). In the figures, "ultra-shortened change", "shortened change", and "normal change" are presentations in which three rows of decorative patterns change and the display stops without ever going through a reach state, resulting in a so-called "miss" with a spread. Below, ultra-shortened change, shortened change, and normal change are collectively referred to as "non-reach miss". These non-reach miss types differ from each other in the change manner in that the change display stops in a shorter time for shortened change than for normal change, and for ultra-shortened change than for shortened change.

"N Reach (Normal Reach)" is a state in which the same decorative pattern stops in two of the three rows (usually the left and right rows) (reach state), and if a different decorative pattern stops in the remaining row (usually the middle row), it is a "miss", and if the same decorative pattern stops in the remaining row (usually the middle row), it is a "jackpot".

"SP Reach (Super Reach)" is a reach effect that has a relatively higher chance of winning than the above-mentioned N Reach, and is an effect that develops from N Reach after a reach is established, and displays still images or videos such as animation or live action. In this embodiment, multiple types of SP Reach are prepared as types of SP Reach: A to C. SP Reach A is a reach effect that is executed when the currently executed game state is a normal state. SP Reach B is a reach effect that is executed when the currently executed game state is a time-saving game state. SP Reach C is a reach effect that is executed when the currently executed game state is a probability variable game state. In this embodiment, the variation pattern types are set so that the chance of winning increases in the order of "non-reach" < "N reach" < "SP reach". As a modified example, the content of the SP reach presentation may be the same in the normal state and the time-saving play state (SP reach A), and a different SP reach (SP reach C) may be used in the high probability play state. As another modified example, a variation pattern including a pseudo-consecutive may be prepared. A pseudo-consecutive is a presentation (pseudo-consecutive presentation, pseudo-variation presentation, pseudo-continuous variation presentation, re-variation presentation) that makes it look as if multiple variations have been performed by temporarily stopping (pseudo-stop, temporary stop) and re-variation displaying the decorative pattern during one variation display of the decorative pattern. In other words, a pseudo-consecutive is a presentation in which all three rows of decorative patterns start to vary or vary again, and then a pseudo-variation is temporarily or definitively stopped multiple times. The more the number of pseudo-consecutives (number of pseudo-variations), the higher the possibility of developing into an SP reach with a high probability of winning.

(Fluctuation pattern table 1)
FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing the fluctuation pattern table 1. The fluctuation pattern table 1 is a fluctuation pattern table that is set when the current fluctuation pattern selection state is the normal selection state. The fluctuation pattern table 1 is designed so that the table contents are different depending on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern (jackpot, miss).

In the fluctuation pattern table 1 for misses, the fluctuation patterns PH1-1 (shortened fluctuation), PH1-2 (normal fluctuation), PH1-3 (N reach), and PH1-4 (SP reach A) are set. Here, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special pattern is "miss", the fluctuation patterns PH1-1 (shortened fluctuation), PH1-2 (normal fluctuation), PH1-3 (N reach), and PH1
-4 (SP Reach A) is selected. In this embodiment, when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol is "miss", the reference table contents are set to be different depending on the number of reserved balls (0/1-2/3) for the first special symbol, so that even if the acquired special symbol change pattern random number value is the same, different change patterns can be selected. Specifically, the more the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is, the more likely it is that a change pattern in which the change time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively short is selected, and the less the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is, the more likely it is that a change pattern in which the change time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively long is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol is "miss", a change pattern PH1-1 (shortened change) or PH1-2 (normal change) in which the change time is set to be relatively short is selected, regardless of the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol (0/1-2/3). As a modified example, if the result of the judgment on whether the second special pattern is a hit or miss is a miss, the configuration may be such that only the main fluctuation pattern PH1-2 of the shortened fluctuation is selected, regardless of the number of balls reserved for activation of the second special pattern, or the fluctuation pattern PH1-2 of the shortened fluctuation is most likely to be selected (it is preferable that the selection ratio be the same, regardless of the number of balls reserved for activation of the second special pattern).

The fluctuation pattern table 1 for jackpots has fluctuation patterns PA1-1 (N reach) and PA1-2 (SP reach A) set. Here, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol is a jackpot, fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach A) is selected regardless of the type of jackpot. Similarly, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol is a jackpot, fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach A) is selected regardless of the type of jackpot.

(Variation pattern table 2)
50 is a schematic diagram showing the fluctuation pattern table 2. The fluctuation pattern table 2 is a fluctuation pattern table that is set when the current fluctuation pattern selection state is the time-saving selection state. The fluctuation pattern table 2 is designed so that the table contents are different depending on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern (jackpot, miss).

In the variation pattern table 2 for misses, the variation patterns PH2-1 (ultra-shortened variation), PH2-2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), and PH2-4 (SP reach B) are set. Here, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special pattern is a miss, one of the variation patterns PH2-2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), and PH2-4 (SP reach A) is selected, regardless of the number of activated balls reserved for the first special pattern (0/1-2/3). In other words, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special pattern is a miss, the variation pattern PH2-1 (ultra-shortened variation) is not selected, regardless of how many activated balls of the first special pattern are present. On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol is "miss," one of the fluctuation patterns PH2-1 (super shortened fluctuation), PH2-2 (normal fluctuation), PH2-3 (N reach), and PH2-4 (SP reach B) is selected. In this embodiment, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol is "miss," the reference table contents are set to be different depending on the number of activation reserved balls of the second special symbol (0/1-2/3), so that even if the acquired special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value is the same, a different fluctuation pattern can be selected. Specifically, if there is no activation reserved ball of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (super shortened fluctuation) is not selected, and if there is an activation reserved ball of the second special symbol, the more activation reserved balls of the second special symbol there are, the more likely the fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (super shortened fluctuation) is to be selected.

In the fluctuation pattern table 2 for the jackpot, the fluctuation patterns PA2-1 (N reach) and PA2-2 (SP reach B) are set. Here, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special pattern is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (N reach) or PA2-2 (SP reach B) is selected regardless of the jackpot type. Similarly, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special pattern is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (N reach) or PA2-2 (SP reach B) is selected regardless of the jackpot type.

(Variation Pattern Table 3)
FIG. 51 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 3. The variation pattern table 3 is a variation pattern table that is set when the current variation pattern selection state is the probability variation selection state. The variation pattern table 3 is designed to have different table contents depending on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern (jackpot, miss).

In the variation pattern table 3 for misses, the variation patterns PH3-1 (ultra-shortened variation), PH3-2 (normal variation), and PH3-3 (SP reach C) are set. Here, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special pattern is "miss," the variation pattern PH3-2 (normal variation) or PH3-3 (SP reach C) is selected regardless of the number of activated reserved balls of the first special pattern (0/1-2/3). In other words, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special pattern is miss, the variation pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortened variation) is not selected no matter how many activated reserved balls of the first special pattern are present. On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special pattern is miss, one of the variation patterns PH3-1 (ultra-shortened variation), PH3-2 (normal variation), and PH3-3 (SP reach C) is selected. At this time, if the result of the judgment of the second special pattern is a miss, the reference table contents are set to be different depending on the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern (specifically, depending on the presence or absence of reserved balls for the second special pattern), so that even if the acquired random number value of the special pattern change pattern is the same, a different change pattern can be selected. Specifically, if there is no reserved ball for the second special pattern, the change pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortened change) will not be selected, and the change pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortened change) can be selected only if there is a reserved ball for the second special pattern, so that a change pattern with a relatively short change time tends to be selected more easily when there is a reserved ball for the second special pattern than when there is no reserved ball for the second special pattern.

The fluctuation pattern table 3 for jackpots has a fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) set. Here, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special pattern is a jackpot, fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is selected regardless of the jackpot type (4R specific jackpot, 4R normal jackpot). Similarly, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special pattern is a jackpot, fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is selected regardless of the jackpot type (16R specific jackpot, 4R specific jackpot, 4R normal jackpot).

As described above, the variation time of the special symbol is specified for each variation pattern in the variation pattern tables 1 to 3, but no matter which variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the special symbol is set to "0.5 seconds". The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the special symbol is the time when the special symbol is fixedly displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is maintained). In this embodiment, the variable time and fixed stop time of the decorative symbol are also set in correspondence with the variable time and fixed stop time of the special symbol. In addition, in the variation pattern tables 1 to 3, the performance content and the variable time can be the same as those in the case of a big win and a loss, but it is preferable to make the final performance content different between the case of a big win and a loss. In other words, even if it is the same N reach, the decorative pattern will be a repeat number (e.g., "7, 7, 7") when it is a jackpot, but the decorative pattern will be a reach-miss number (e.g., "7, 8, 7") when it is a miss, or even if it is the same SP reach A to C, the final performance content will be a performance content indicating success and the decorative pattern will be a repeat number (e.g., an ally character wins against an enemy character, and then "7, 7, 7" is displayed), while the final performance content will be a performance content indicating failure and the decorative pattern will be a reach-miss number (e.g., an ally character is defeated by an enemy character, and then "7, 8, 7" is displayed). Also, it is preferable that the change time (performance time) is longer when it is a jackpot compared to when it is a miss, even if the performance content is the same (when it develops into the same SP reach), and as an example, it is preferable that the change time (performance time) of SP reach A to C when it is a jackpot is 10 seconds longer than that of SP reach A to C when it is a miss.

After selecting the special symbol fluctuation pattern, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination means P143 generates a performance control command (communication check command) to check whether communication with the performance control board P200 is normal, a performance control command (fluctuation additional information designation command) including a special symbol fluctuation additional pattern (information for adding or subtracting fluctuation time), a performance control command (fluctuation pattern designation command) including special symbol fluctuation pattern information, and a performance control command (pattern designation command) including information on the character performance number (pattern group and game state) in order to instruct the performance control board P200 to start fluctuating the decorative symbols (hereinafter, these commands are collectively referred to as "fluctuation start commands") and stores them in the command storage area of the main information storage means P180.

The normal pattern lottery processing means P145 has a normal pattern hit/miss determination means P146, a normal pattern stop pattern determination means P147, and a normal pattern change pattern determination means P148. When the normal pattern change start condition is satisfied, the normal pattern lottery processing means P145 reads out the normal pattern hit random number value and the normal pattern change pattern random number value stored in the most recent memory area in the normal pattern reserved storage area, and stores them in the normal pattern hit/miss determination area and the normal pattern change pattern determination area of the main information storage means P180, respectively. Here, the "normal pattern change start condition" is (1) that the normal pattern is waiting to change, and (2) that a normal pattern operation reserved ball exists. When all of these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the normal pattern is in a state where it can start changing (a state in which the change start condition is satisfied).

The normal symbol hit/miss determination means P146 reads out the normal symbol hit random number value from the normal symbol hit/miss determination area of the main information storage means P180, executes a hit/miss determination for the normal symbol, and determines whether the determination result corresponds to a "hit" or a "miss". The result of this normal symbol hit/miss determination is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage means P180, and is used in subsequent processing, and is cleared when the normal symbol stops changing. The normal symbol hit/miss determination means P146 holds a normal symbol hit/miss lottery table (not shown) that is referenced when determining whether the normal symbol is hit or miss. The hit probability of the normal symbol is set to "1/3001" when the electric chute support function (normal symbol probability change function) is not activated, and is set to "2999/3001" when the electric chute support function (normal symbol probability change function) is activated.

The normal symbol stop symbol determination means P147 refers to a normal symbol stop symbol table (not shown) and selects a predetermined winning symbol (a stopping symbol that triggers the operation of the normal electric device P522) when the result of the normal symbol hit/miss determination is a hit, and selects a predetermined losing symbol (a stopping symbol that does not trigger the operation of the normal electric device P522) when the result of the normal symbol hit/miss determination is a miss. In this embodiment, the means assigns symbols A and B as winning symbols for normal symbols, and assigns symbol C as a losing symbol for normal symbols.

The normal symbol variation pattern determination means P148 reads out the normal symbol variation pattern random number value from the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means P180, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern (variation time) by referring to a normal symbol variation pattern table (not shown). The normal symbol variation time is set to "0.6 seconds" when the electric chute support function (normal symbol variation time shortening function) is not activated, and is set to "0.2 seconds" when the electric chute support function (normal symbol variation time shortening function) is activated. Regardless of which normal symbol variation pattern is selected, the normal symbol fixed stop time (fixed display time) is set to "0.1 seconds". The normal symbol fixed stop time (fixed display time) is the time when the normal symbol is fixedly displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is maintained). In addition, in controlling the normal patterns, in order to reduce the processing load on the main control board P100, when the electric chute support function is not operating, it is also possible to adopt a specification in which the probability of a win for the normal pattern is set to "0" and the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is made constant.

The normal symbol lottery processing means P145 also determines the opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric device P522 depending on the result of the normal symbol hit/miss judgment, etc. The normal symbol lottery processing means P145 holds a normal electric device opening pattern table that is referenced when determining the opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric device P522. The opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric device P522 is set to "0.2 seconds" when the electric chute support function (opening extension function) is not activated, and is set to "5.8 seconds" when the electric chute support function (opening extension function) is activated. The opening pattern of the normal electric device P522 may be different depending on the type of winning normal symbol. For example, as the opening pattern of the normal electric role P522, when the electric chute support function (opening extension function) is activated, if the winning normal pattern is pattern A, it will be "3 second opening x 1 time → 2.8 second opening x 1 time (total opening time 5.8 seconds)", and if the winning normal pattern is pattern B, it will be "2.8 second opening x 1 time → 3 second opening x 1 time (total opening time 5.8 seconds)".

When the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is a hit, the special game control means P150 determines the execution time (demo time) of the hit start demo and the hit end demo, and the execution time (round time) of the round game according to the hit type (symbol group) determined. Then, the special game control means P150 generates a performance control command (referred to as a "hit start demo command") that instructs the performance control board P200 to execute a hit start demo performance, and a performance control command (referred to as a "hit end demo command") that instructs the performance control board P200 to execute a hit end demo performance, and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means P180. The hit start demo command also serves as an opportunity to determine the contents of a series of hit during performances (hit start demo performance, round performance, hit end demo performance) that are developed during a hit game on the performance control board P200 side. In addition, the special game control means P150 generates a performance control command (referred to as a "round performance designation command") for instructing the start of a round performance corresponding to each round game during each round game during a jackpot game, and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means P180. This round performance designation command includes information on the current round number and information on the opening and closing of the jackpot winning port P54. As will be described later in FIG. 53, in this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is set to 5 seconds and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to 20 seconds, but the execution time (demo time) of the jackpot start demo and the jackpot end demo may be different even for the same jackpot type (pattern group) depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, not only on the jackpot type (pattern group). For example, assuming that the first special symbol is also capable of winning a 16R specific jackpot, for a 4R normal jackpot, if the jackpot occurs in a low probability low base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (executing the performance A-1, which displays "normal jackpot start" as the jackpot start demo performance), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 15 seconds (executing the performance B-1, which displays "entering time-saving mode" as the jackpot end demo performance, and the performance C, which alerts the player about forgetting to take out a prepaid card (a storage medium that stores information about the amount of money required to borrow game balls for playing) as the jackpot end demo performance). On the other hand, if the jackpot occurs in a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (executing the performance A-1 as the jackpot start demo performance), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 10 seconds (executing the performance B-2, which displays "entering time-saving mode" as the jackpot end demo performance). As the end demo effect, effect B-1 is executed, and effect C is not executed), and for a 16R specific jackpot and a 4R specific jackpot, if a jackpot occurs in a low probability low base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (the execution of effect A-2, which displays "Probable jackpot start," is executed as the jackpot start demo effect), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 20 seconds (the execution of effect B-2 and effect C, which display "Entering probable jackpot mode," are executed as the jackpot end demo effect), whereas, if a jackpot occurs in a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (the execution of effect A-2 as the jackpot start demo effect), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 10 seconds (the execution of effect B-3, which displays "Probable jackpot mode continues," is executed as the jackpot end demo effect, and effect C is not executed). In addition, assuming that the 16R special jackpot is won even with the first special symbol, if the jackpot is won with the first special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (5 seconds for all 16R special jackpot, 4R special jackpot, and 4R normal jackpot, and as the jackpot start demo performance, performance A-1 or performance A-2 is executed), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 30 seconds (30 seconds for 16R special jackpot and 4R special jackpot, and as the jackpot end demo performance, performance B-2 and performance C are executed, but for 4R normal jackpot, it is 15 seconds, and as the jackpot end demo performance, performance B-1 and performance On the other hand, if the jackpot is a jackpot with the second special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot, the execution time of the jackpot start demo may be 5 seconds (5 seconds for any of the 16R specific jackpot, 4R specific jackpot, and 4R normal jackpot, and as the jackpot start demo performance, performance A-1 or A-2 is executed), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo may be 20 seconds (20 seconds for the 16R specific jackpot and 4R specific jackpot, and as the jackpot end demo performance, performance B-3 is executed and performance C is not executed, but for the 4R normal jackpot, it may be 10 seconds, and as the jackpot end demo performance, performance B-1 is executed and performance C is not executed). This relationship of time values is one example, and as long as the relationship of the magnitude of each demo time in each situation is the same as above, it is not limited to this time value. In addition, in any of the above specifications, if a jackpot occurs in a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, effect C will not occur. However, if a power outage occurs during a fluctuation related to the jackpot or during jackpot play (during special play) and the power is restored during that fluctuation or jackpot play, effect C may be generated as an exception.

The symbol display control means P155 includes a special symbol display control means P156 and a normal symbol display control means P157. The special symbol display control means P156 causes the first special symbol to be displayed variably on the first special symbol display device P71 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and causes the first special symbol to be displayed as a fixed symbol after the variation display. The special symbol display control means P156 also causes the second special symbol to be displayed variably on the second special symbol display device P72 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and causes the second special symbol to be displayed as a fixed symbol after the variation display. The special symbol display control means P156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating status of the first special symbol display device P71 and the second special symbol display device P72 is monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means P180. The special symbol display control means P156 generates a performance control command (called a "change stop command") to request the performance control board P200 to display the decorative symbol when the special symbol stops changing (i.e., when the value of the special symbol game timer becomes "0"). The normal symbol display control means P157 causes the normal symbol display device P75 to change and display the normal symbol according to the normal symbol change pattern (change time), and causes the normal symbol to be displayed as a fixed symbol after the change. The normal symbol display control means P157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (change time, fixed display time) related to the display of the normal symbol. The operating state of the normal symbol display device P75 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means P180.

In addition, when the game interruption state continues for a predetermined time or more, the special symbol display control means P156 generates an effect control command (called a "standby demo command") that triggers the execution of a standby demo effect (a demo effect waiting for customers), and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means P180. "The game interruption state continues for a predetermined time or more" means that there is no special symbol activation reserved ball, and the period during which the special symbol variable display is not performed continues for a predetermined time or more. Note that the game interruption state may continue for a predetermined time or more when the period during which the game ball is not shot continues for a predetermined time or more, or when the period during which the game ball does not enter all the winning slots continues for a predetermined time or more.

When the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, the electric device control means P160 outputs a control signal to the special electric device solenoid P543 as a jackpot game process after the special symbol is confirmed and displayed, and controls the opening and closing of the special electric device P542 according to a predetermined operation pattern. In a jackpot game, one opening and closing operation of the special electric device P542 is considered as one round game (unit game), and the round game is executed continuously for a specified number of rounds. The electric device control means P160 holds a jackpot opening counter for storing the number of times the special electric device P542 has been operated (i.e., the number of rounds being executed). Here, the condition for ending the operation of the special electric device P542 in a jackpot game (the condition for ending a unit game) is that a specified number of game balls ("10" in this embodiment) have entered the jackpot winning hole P54, or that the opening time of the jackpot winning hole P54 has reached the maximum opening time ("29 seconds" in this embodiment).

In addition, when the result of the normal symbol hit/miss judgment corresponds to a hit, the electric device control means P160 outputs a control signal to the normal electric device solenoid P523 to control the opening and closing of the normal electric device P522 (second start hole P52) for a predetermined opening time. Here, as described above, the electric device control means P160 opens the normal electric device P522 for 0.2 seconds in the low base state in which the electric chute support function (open extension function) is not activated, whereas it opens the normal electric device P522 for 5.8 seconds in the high base state in which the electric chute support function (open extension function) is activated. Here, the operation end condition of the normal electric device P522 is that a predetermined number of game balls (in this embodiment, "10 balls") have entered the second start hole P52, or the opening time of the second start hole P52 has reached the maximum opening time (in this embodiment, "0.2 seconds" or "5.8 seconds").

When the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a hit, the game state control means P165 determines the game state after the end of the hit game based on the type of hit (type of symbol group) and the game state at the time of the hit, and switches the game state after the end of the hit game. In this embodiment, as described above, multiple types of game states are set, including a normal game state (low probability, low base state), a time-saving game state (low probability, low base state), and a special game state (high probability, high base state), and one of the multiple types of game states is set alternatively. Note that each game state has already been described in detail, so repeated explanations will be omitted here.

When a jackpot game is played, the game state control means P165 determines the variation pattern selection state after the jackpot game ends based on the jackpot type (type of pattern group), and switches the variation pattern selection state after the jackpot game ends. In this embodiment, a normal selection state, a time-saving selection state, and a probability variation selection state are set as multiple variation pattern selection states, and one of the multiple variation pattern selection states is alternatively set depending on the determined game state, jackpot type, the number of times the special pattern is displayed, etc. Note that each variation pattern selection state has already been described in detail, so a duplicate explanation will be omitted here.

The game state control means P165 also generates a presentation control command (called a "game state designation command") that includes the current game state information and variation pattern selection state information, and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means P180.

The error monitoring control means P170 monitors the input information of the I/O port circuit P104, and checks the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, the door/frame opening signal, etc. to determine whether the gaming machine is in an error state. If it is in an error state, it requests a performance control command ("error performance designation command") including the error information to instruct the performance control board P200 to perform an error state performance. Although not shown in FIG. 46, etc., the door opening switch is a detection means for detecting whether the glass frame P5 is open, the frame opening switch is a detection means for detecting whether the front frame P2 is open, and the back set opening switch is a detection means for detecting whether the back set board P30 is open. The magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting so-called illegal gaming.

The main information storage means P180 is configured to temporarily store random number information acquired in special and normal symbol games, information on the operation reserve balls of special and normal symbols, information on the game status (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time reduction function, electric chute support function) related to special and normal symbol games, information on the fluctuation pattern selection status, information on the result of the hit/miss judgment of special and normal symbols (jackpot, miss), information on the stop symbols (including symbol groups) related to special and normal symbols, information on the fluctuation patterns (including additional variable patterns) of special and normal symbols, information on the jackpot game (number of rounds, opening time, opening mode (number of times opened per round of play), etc.), status information indicating the operating status of the special symbol display devices P71, 72, status information indicating the operating status of the special electric device P542, information on the performance control command data, etc., and has a predetermined memory area for storing each information.

When a command transmission request is received, the command transmission/reception means P190 is configured to transmit various performance control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means P180 to the performance control board P200 using a parallel transmission method. Each performance control command is a two-byte structure containing one byte of MODE data and one byte of EVENT data. To distinguish between MODE and EVENT, bit 7 of the MODE data is set to "1" and bit 7 of the EVENT data is set to "0". When this information is transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output at the transmission timing of each of the MODE and EVENT. In principle, the performance control commands generated in each process are transmitted one command per interrupt period according to the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage means P180.

As shown in FIG. 46, the performance control board P200 includes a performance lottery random number generating means P210, a performance generalizing means P220, a lamp control means P230, a role control means P240, an error performance control means P250, a sub-main information storage means P260, and a command transmission/reception means P270. Each of the above-mentioned means in the performance control board P200 is a functional representation of the hardware such as the sub-main CPU P201, ROM P202, RAM P203, and electronic circuits arranged on the performance control board P200, and software such as a control program stored in ROM P202.

The random number generating means P210 for effect selection has a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (random number for effect selection) by the program processing of the sub-main CPU P201. These random number counters serve as a random number generating means for generating random numbers in a software manner. These software random numbers include pre-reading random number used for selecting pre-reading effects, decorative pattern random number used for selecting stop patterns of decorative patterns, variable performance pattern random number used for selecting variable performance patterns of decorative patterns, advance lottery random number used for selecting advance performance, jackpot performance pattern random number used for selecting jackpot performance pattern, and stage lottery random number used for selecting transition lottery of performance stage. These random numbers are updated by using the remaining time when command analysis is not performed in the main processing on the performance control side described later (when no performance control command is received from the main control board P100).

The performance control means P220 includes a performance mode control means P221, a hold information display control means P222, a look-ahead notice control means P223, a variable performance control means P224, a decorative pattern control means P225, a notice performance control means P226, and a special game performance control means P227.

The presentation mode control means P221 controls the presentation mode (also referred to as the "game presentation mode") in a manner consistent with the game state and the variation pattern selection state managed by the main control board P100 based on the game state designation command from the main control board P100. In this embodiment, the "normal presentation mode", the "time-saving presentation mode", and the "probability variation presentation mode" are set as multiple types of presentation modes, and one of the multiple types of presentation modes is selectively set according to the game state (or the variation pattern selection state) managed by the main control board P100 and the number of times the special pattern is displayed, and the variation presentation according to the set presentation mode is executed. In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal game state, the "normal presentation mode" is set, when the game state is the time-saving game state, the "time-saving presentation mode" is set, and when the game state is the probability variation game state, the "probability variation presentation mode" is set. When one of the presentation modes is set, a background image dedicated to that presentation mode (a background image that displays the decorative pattern behind it) is displayed on the screen as a presentation (variable presentation) indicating that the presentation mode is in question, and BGM dedicated to that presentation mode is output from speaker P11. Because the background image and BGM are set to be different for each presentation mode, the player can recognize which presentation mode they are currently in from the type of background image or BGM.

The reserved information display control means P222 has a first reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls of the first special pattern, and a second reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls of the second special pattern. When the reserved information display control means P222 receives a pattern memory number command from the main control board P100, it updates (adds) the value of the corresponding counter based on the information on the number of activated reserved balls contained in this command. On the other hand, when the reserved information display control means P222 receives a fluctuation start command from the main control board P100, that is, when the activated reserved balls are consumed, it updates (subtracts) the value of the corresponding counter. In addition, the reserved information display control means P222 controls the display of reserved images in the number corresponding to the number of activated reserved balls of the first special pattern and reserved images in the number corresponding to the number of activated reserved balls of the second special pattern on the reserved image display unit 710 of the performance display device P70 based on the values of the first reserved ball number counter and the second reserved ball number counter. In addition, the pending information display control means P222 controls the display of a changing image in the changing image display area P720 of the performance display device P70, which switches to the pending image corresponding to the activated pending ball (the first activated pending ball) of the first special pattern or the second special pattern when the activated pending ball is consumed. In this embodiment, unless explicitly stated, the reserved image of the first special pattern and the reserved image of the second special pattern may be referred to simply as "reserved image" without distinction, and the changing image of the first special pattern and the changing image of the second special pattern may be referred to simply as "changing image" without distinction.

The pre-reading notice control means P223 executes a pre-reading judgment (referred to as a "pre-reading lottery") for the operation reserved ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice performance. The pre-reading notice performance is generated as one form of a so-called continuous notice performance that predicts the possibility of a big win or a high expectation performance (for example, a reach performance) occurring over one or more variable displays before the operation reserved ball that is the target of the pre-reading is consumed. At this time, the pre-reading lottery is performed based on the information of the pre-judgment result included in the pre-judgment command from the main control board P100. Here, when the pre-reading notice control means P223 receives a pre-judgment command from the main control board P100, it distinguishes between the information of the pre-judgment result of the first special pattern and the information of the pre-judgment result of the second special pattern, and temporarily stores up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) of each in the pre-reading information storage area of the sub-main information storage means P260 in a form combined with the ball entry order of the operation reserved ball. This pre-reading information storage area has the same configuration as the reserved memory area of the main control board P100, and reserved 1 memory area (first reserved memory area), reserved 2 memory area (second reserved memory area), reserved 3 memory area (third reserved memory area), and reserved 4 memory area (fourth reserved memory area) are provided in the order of balls entering each starting port 51, 52. Each reserved memory area can store information on the result of the preliminary judgment of whether or not the ball is a hit, information on the result of the preliminary judgment of the pattern, and information on the result of the preliminary judgment of the variable pattern as a set. The information on the preliminary judgment result is stored in the order of the reserved 1 memory area, the reserved 2 memory area, the reserved 3 memory area, and the reserved 4 memory area, while it is consumed in the order of the reserved 1 memory area, the reserved 2 memory area, the reserved 3 memory area, and the reserved 4 memory area (first in, first out principle). In addition, when the information on the preliminary judgment result in the reserved 1 memory area is consumed, the information on the preliminary judgment result stored in the reserved 2 memory area, the reserved 3 memory area, and the reserved 4 memory area is shifted to the memory area with the lower number, and the contents of the reserved 4 memory area are cleared to zero.

The variable performance control means P224 determines by lottery a variable performance pattern that specifies the variable process (performance process) from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the stop of the variable display based on information (variation pattern information, variable additional information, etc.) included in the variable start command from the main control board P100. The variable performance control means P224 holds multiple types of variable performance pattern tables that are referenced when selecting the variable performance pattern of the decorative pattern, and a variable performance pattern table corresponding to the variable pattern (variation time) of the special pattern is selected from these multiple types of variable performance pattern tables. Here, the main control board P100 determines the main variable pattern of the special pattern (for example, "SP Reach A" or "SP Reach B"), while the performance control board P200 determines the sub-variation pattern of the decorative pattern (for example, "SP Reach A1, A2..." or "SP Reach A2, A3...") that specifies the scenario of the performance display process in detail based on the main variable pattern. The decorative pattern variation presentation pattern defines the variation display mode of the decorative pattern, i.e., the scenario of a series of presentation display processes from the start to the end of the decorative pattern variation, and the timing of the occurrence of the preview presentation at each stage in the display process is also specified as a time schedule. Furthermore, for this decorative pattern variation presentation pattern, even if the special pattern variation pattern is the same (even if the same information of the variation start command is received), if the current presentation mode is different, a variation presentation pattern with different presentation contents can be selected. In other words, a variation presentation pattern table is prepared for each current presentation mode.

In addition, when the variable performance control means P224 receives a standby demo command from the main control board P100, it executes a standby demo performance (customer waiting demo performance) in which, for example, a demonstration video is played during the customer waiting period from when the standby demo command is received until the variable display of the special pattern starts (until the next variable start command is received).

The decorative symbol control means P225 determines the final combination of decorative symbols (left, middle, and right symbols) by lottery based on the information (stop symbol information, game state information) included in the variable start command from the main control board P100 and the variable performance pattern determined by the variable performance control means P224. In this example, three symbol rows including multiple types of decorative symbols are configured, and the decorative symbols are formed by identification elements such as numbers. In addition, the decorative symbol control means P225 holds multiple types of stop symbol pattern tables that are referenced when determining the combination of decorative symbols (also called "stop symbol patterns") by lottery. The multiple types of tables include a stop symbol pattern table for a big win, a stop symbol pattern table for a reach miss, and a stop symbol pattern table for a non-reach miss. The stop patterns of the decorative patterns are formed as a combination of three patterns, and include "stop patterns indicating a jackpot (jackpot pattern)" and "stop patterns indicating a miss (miss pattern)". The jackpot pattern indicating a specific jackpot (variable jackpot) is a combination of stop patterns in which three of the same odd-numbered patterns are lined up (for example, "7, 7, 7"). The jackpot pattern indicating a normal jackpot (non-variable jackpot) is a combination of stop patterns in which three of the same even-numbered patterns are lined up (for example, "2, 2, 2"). The miss pattern is a combination of stop patterns in which at least one of the three patterns is a number pattern different from the other numbers (for example, "1, 3, 8"). Here, the reach miss pattern among the miss patterns is a combination of stop patterns in which the left pattern and the right pattern are aligned and only the center pattern is shifted forward and backward by several frames (for example, "3, 1, 3"). In addition, in the case of a small winning pattern or a 2R winning pattern, for example, a combination of a predetermined stop mode such as "3, 5, 7" may be selected. In addition, when the lottery result is a non-reach miss, a specific result called a "chance number" (for example, "1, 2, 3" or "5, 6, 7" as a regular number, and "2, 2, 3" or "5, 5, 6" as a deviation number) may be selected. Furthermore, in the pseudo-sequence performance described above, when a performance is performed in which a provisional stop display and a re-variable display are performed before the final stop pattern is displayed, a special pattern (pseudo-sequence pattern) is selected as a provisional stop pattern suggesting the occurrence of a pseudo-sequence. When a provisional stop pattern suggesting the occurrence of a pseudo-sequence is displayed, at least one of the stop patterns (typically the middle pattern) of the three rows of decorative patterns may be replaced with a special pattern (pseudo-sequence pattern) that displays characters such as "NEXT" (for example, "2, NEXT, 3"). The stopping order for stopping the decorative symbols is predetermined for each of the following variation performance patterns, and in this embodiment, the symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol → right symbol → center symbol as a rule. However, in the case of a shortened variation performance pattern in which the variation time is set to be extremely short, the left symbol, center symbol, and right symbol are stopped almost simultaneously, and in the case of a special variation performance pattern, the symbols can be stopped in the order of right symbol → center symbol → left symbol, in which case the probability of winning tends to be relatively high. In addition, regardless of the stopping order, it is desirable that the left symbol, right symbol, and center symbol start varying simultaneously at the start of the variation. However, as a special variation performance pattern, the variation may also start in the order of left symbol, right symbol, and center symbol.

Here, FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern attributes of the decorative pattern in this embodiment. The decorative pattern is formed by a combination of an identification element consisting of a number and a color (display color) attached to the identification element. In this embodiment, a total of nine types of numbers from "1" to "9" are set as identification elements (i.e., there are a total of nine types of decorative patterns). Each decorative pattern is arranged in the order of "1" to "9" according to the arrangement of the pattern row, and on the performance display device P70, it is displayed in a circular or scroll manner in the order of "1" to "9" (or in the order of "9" to "1") in each display area Z1, Z2, Z3, and after "9" it returns to "1" again (or after "1" it returns to "9" again). This specification is similar in other embodiments. The pattern attribute of each decorative pattern is determined by the type of color attached to the identification element. In other words, even if multiple decorative patterns are composed of different identification elements, they are grouped into the same pattern attribute by being given the same color. In this example, three types of colors of the decorative patterns are set: "blue", "red", and "gold". In the drawings, the display modes of the three types of decorative patterns, "blue", "red", and "gold", are expressed by "white", "diagonal lines", and "filled in". Specifically, the decorative patterns "2", "4", "6", and "8" are classified as blue pattern attributes (blue attribute), the decorative patterns "1", "3", "5", and "9" are classified as red pattern attributes (red attribute), and the decorative pattern "7" is classified as gold pattern attributes (gold attribute). In this embodiment, the expected degree of winning balls and the expected degree of transition to a certain probability increase by one step in the order of the pattern attributes of the decorative patterns, "blue" < "red" < "gold". In the following, for convenience, the decorative pattern with the blue attribute is also called "blue pattern", the decorative pattern with the red attribute is also called "red pattern", and the decorative pattern with the gold attribute is also called "gold pattern".

The notice performance control means P226 determines a notice performance pattern by lottery, which specifies the contents of the notice performance executed at each stage of the decorative pattern change process according to the scenario of the change performance pattern determined by the change performance control means P224. The notice performance pattern includes a performance pattern in which a specific character image, animation, etc. is temporarily or gradually displayed as an image, a performance pattern in which a specific sound is output, a performance pattern in which a movable role is operated, etc. The notice performance is executed in parallel with the change display of the decorative pattern, and indicates in a notice manner that the pattern change stops in a jackpot state and has a high probability of winning. The notice performance includes a notice performance executed before a reach state occurs (including when the reach occurs) in the change display process of the decorative pattern, and a notice performance executed after the reach state occurs. The notice performances have different jackpot reliability, and basically, the notice performance displayed after the reach occurs has a relatively higher jackpot expectation than the notice performance displayed before the reach occurs. The preview performance control means P226 holds a preview lottery table for each type of preview performance to be referred to when selecting a preview performance pattern, and selects a preview lottery table according to the type of preview performance that occurs according to the scenario of the variable performance pattern. Specific types of preview performance include, for example, comment preview performance, background preview performance, SU (step-up) preview performance, logo preview performance, mini character preview performance, group preview performance, and role preview performance. This preview performance is basically performed by combining the display of one or more preview performances with the variable display of the decorative pattern on the performance display device P70. Therefore, even if the decorative pattern is variable displayed according to the same variable performance pattern, it is possible to generate a variety of performance modes by combining it with one or more preview performances.

The special game presentation control means P227 determines the content of the jackpot presentation (jackpot presentation pattern) that notifies the player that a jackpot game is in progress. The jackpot presentation includes a jackpot start demo presentation that notifies the player that a jackpot game is in progress, a round presentation that notifies the player that a round game is in progress, and a jackpot end demo presentation that notifies the player that a jackpot game is in progress. When the special game presentation control means P227 receives a jackpot start demo command from the main control board P100, the special game presentation control means P227 determines the jackpot presentation pattern (jackpot start demo presentation pattern, round presentation pattern, jackpot end demo presentation pattern) based on the jackpot type information stored in the sub-main information storage means P260. In this jackpot presentation pattern, the jackpot start demo presentation time, the round presentation time (presentation time according to the opening pattern of the large prize winning port P54), and the jackpot end demo presentation time are set, and a series of presentation contents are set along the time axis. In addition, the special game presentation control means P227 executes the jackpot start demo presentation triggered by receiving a jackpot start demo command from the main control board P100 according to the jackpot presentation pattern, executes each round presentation triggered by receiving a round presentation designation command, and executes the jackpot end demo presentation triggered by receiving a jackpot end demo command. In the jackpot start demo presentation, for example, the words "jackpot start" are displayed on the screen to announce the start of the jackpot game. In the round presentation, for example, the number of currently being executed rounds and the number of winning balls are displayed on the screen, and various images (such as animation images) that liven up the jackpot game are displayed. In the jackpot end demo presentation, for example, the words "jackpot end" are displayed on the screen to announce the end of the jackpot game, and a presentation indicating the game state (mode) to be transitioned to is displayed.

The performance control means P220 generates image control commands related to images and sounds based on the determined performance content (pre-reading performance pattern, variable performance pattern, advance notice performance pattern, stopping pattern pattern, jackpot performance pattern, etc.) and stores them in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means P260.

The lamp control means P230 controls the lighting and light color of the performance lamps according to the performance content set by the performance management means P220. The lamp control means P230 holds multiple types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for controlling the lighting of the performance lamps LP (frame lamp P10, board lamp P25), reads out the lamp data corresponding to the determined performance pattern, and transmits this lamp control signal (lamp data) to the lamp connection board P91.

The prop control means P240 controls the operation of each movable prop P24 according to the performance content set by the performance management means P220. The prop control means P240 holds multiple types of drive data for controlling the operation of the movable props P24, and transmits drive control signals (drive data) corresponding to the determined performance pattern to the motor driver P92.

The error presentation control means P250 is configured to determine an error presentation pattern when it receives an error presentation designation command from the main control board P100, and to notify the user that an error state has occurred in the gaming machine according to that error presentation pattern.

The sub-main information storage means P260 is configured to temporarily store decorative pattern information, variable performance pattern information, preview performance pattern information, control command information, etc., and is provided with a specified storage area for storing each piece of information. For example, the command storage area includes a performance control command buffer for storing performance control commands from the main control board P100, an image control command buffer for storing image control commands to the image control board P300, and an ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from the image control board P300. Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer, and is capable of storing a specified number of performance control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

The command transmission/reception means P270 is configured to receive performance control commands transmitted from the main control board P100 and store these performance control commands in a performance control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means P260. The command transmission/reception means P270 generates an interrupt based on the input of the aforementioned strobe signal from the main control board P100 to execute a performance control command reception interrupt process (described in detail below), and acquires various performance control commands during this interrupt process. Note that when the command transmission/reception means P270 receives a strobe signal, it prioritizes this performance control command reception interrupt process over other interrupt processes (interrupt processes with a priority level lower than 7, described below).

In addition, the command transmission/reception means P270 transmits image control commands stored in the sub-main information storage means P260 to the image control board P300 by serial communication to instruct the execution of the performance contents (variable performance pattern information, advance notice performance pattern information, decorative pattern information, etc.) set by the performance supervision means P220. In principle, the image control commands are transmitted at a predetermined interval (500 μs in this example) according to the order set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means P260. As a result, the image control board P300 analyzes the various image control commands transmitted from the performance control board P200, and displays the performance images including the decorative patterns on the performance display device P70 according to the scenario of the variable performance pattern, and displays the advance notice performance by superimposing it on the performance of the pattern change at each stage of the variable display process. Furthermore, the command transmission/reception means P270 receives the ACK command transmitted from the image control board P300 and stores this ACK command in the ACK command buffer of the sub-main information storage means P260.

[Various performances]
As described above, the pachinko game machine PM having such a configuration is configured so that various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board P200 and the image control board P300 according to the progress of the game, etc. In the following, the contents of the big win effect among the various game effects will be described. In addition, in the following, "restricting execution" or "regulating execution" is used as a concept including, for example, not executing all, not executing part, relatively lowering the priority of display or output, etc. In addition, in the following, "overlapping execution (overlapping execution)" means that one execution period (or execution timing) overlaps with the other execution period (or execution timing), and is used as a concept including the case where the entire execution period (or execution timing) of both overlap and the case where a part of the execution period (or execution timing) of both overlap.

[Performance during big win]
As described above, the performance during the jackpot includes a jackpot start demo performance, a round performance, and a jackpot end demo performance. FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the jackpot type (type of pattern group), the jackpot pattern combination (combination of decorative patterns at the time of the jackpot occurrence), and the performance pattern during the jackpot. (A) in the figure is referred to when the game state at the time of the jackpot winning is a normal game state, and (B) in the figure is referred to when the game state at the time of the jackpot winning is a time-saving game state or a probability change game state. As shown in FIG. 53, the type of the jackpot pattern combination and the type of the performance pattern during the jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type (pattern group) selected in the lottery process of the special pattern. In this embodiment, even if the jackpot type is the same, the type of the jackpot pattern combination and the type of the performance pattern during the jackpot are configured to be different depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot winning.

A jackpot symbol combination is composed of a combination of three decorative symbols of the same number (identification element) that stop in a line, called "* * *" (*: decorative symbol of any number). Jackpot symbol combinations are divided into odd-number symbol combinations (red symbol combinations, gold symbol combinations) that indicate a "specific jackpot" such as "1 1 1", "3 3 3", "5 5 5", "7 7 7", and "9 9 9" (red symbol combinations, gold symbol combinations), and even-number symbol combinations (blue symbol combinations) that indicate a "specific jackpot" or a "normal jackpot" such as "2 2 2", "4 4 4", "6 6 6", and "8 8 8" (blue symbol combinations). In other words, odd number symbol combinations (gold symbol combinations, red symbol combinations) are jackpot symbol combinations that are guaranteed to result in a "specific jackpot", while even number symbol combinations (blue symbol combinations) are jackpot symbol combinations where it is uncertain whether they result in a "specific jackpot" or a "regular jackpot".

The gold symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that notifies that the actual number of rounds is "16 rounds" and that the player has won a "special jackpot" that triggers a transition to a high probability game state. In other words, the gold symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that definitely notifies that the player has won the most advantageous jackpot (16R special jackpot) among multiple types of jackpots, which is the most advantageous for the player. The red symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that notifies that the actual number of rounds is uncertain, whether it is "16 rounds" or "4 rounds", but that the player has won a "special jackpot" that triggers a transition to a high probability game state. The blue symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that notifies that the actual number of rounds is certain, but that it is uncertain, whether the player has won a "special jackpot" that triggers a transition to a high probability game state or a "normal jackpot" that triggers a transition to a "time-saving game state". Here, even if the combination is blue, the actual number of rounds may be "16 rounds" (i.e., even if the actual number of rounds is a "16 round" jackpot, the blue combination may be selected), but it is preferable that the red combination is more likely to result in "16 rounds". In this case, as one of the "happy jackpot effects" described later, a "happy jackpot C effect" that promotes the jackpot and rounds may be provided.

In this embodiment, the multiple types of jackpot performance patterns are set as "Super Longevity jackpot performance", "Longevity jackpot A performance", "Longevity jackpot B performance", "Happy jackpot A performance", and "Happy jackpot B performance". The Super Longevity jackpot performance is a jackpot performance pattern type that is set in response to the jackpot symbol combination being a "gold symbol combination". The Longevity jackpot A performance and the Longevity jackpot B performance are jackpot performance pattern types that are set in response to the jackpot symbol combination being a "red symbol combination". The Happy jackpot A performance and the Happy jackpot B performance are jackpot performance pattern types that are set in response to the jackpot symbol combination being a "blue symbol combination". In other words, the jackpot performance pattern type is set according to the symbol attribute (gold symbol, red symbol, blue symbol) of the jackpot symbol combination.

Here, referring to FIG. 53(A), the jackpot symbol combination and the performance pattern during the jackpot selected when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal game state will be described. First, when the "4R specific jackpot" of the first special symbol is won, the "red symbol combination" or the "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, the red symbol combination is selected as the jackpot symbol combination with a probability of 80%, and the blue symbol combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, when the "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, the "ju jackpot A performance" is selected as the corresponding performance pattern during the jackpot, and when the "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, the "joy jackpot B performance" is selected as the corresponding performance pattern during the jackpot. Also, when the "4R normal jackpot" of the first special symbol is won, the "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and the "joy jackpot A performance" is selected as the corresponding performance pattern during the jackpot. In addition, if the second special symbol is a "16R specific jackpot", a "gold symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and a "Super Longevity jackpot effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern. In addition, if the second special symbol is a "4R specific jackpot", a "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, and a "Longevity jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern. In addition, if the second special symbol is a "4R normal jackpot", a "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and a "Joy jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 53(B), the jackpot symbol combination and the performance pattern during the jackpot selected when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving game state or the probability change game state will be described. When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won, the "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, and the "ju jackpot A performance" is selected as the corresponding performance pattern during the jackpot. When the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot" is won, the "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, and the "joy jackpot A performance" is selected as the corresponding performance pattern during the jackpot. When the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot" is won, the "gold symbol combination" or "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, the gold symbol combination is selected as the jackpot symbol combination with a probability of 80%, and the red symbol combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, when the "gold pattern combination" is selected as the jackpot pattern combination, the "choju jackpot performance" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern, and when the "red pattern combination" is selected as the jackpot pattern combination, the "ju jackpot B performance" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern. When the "4R specific jackpot" of the second special pattern is won, the "red pattern combination" or the "blue pattern combination" is selected as the jackpot pattern combination. For example, the red pattern combination is selected as the jackpot pattern combination with a probability of 80%, and the blue pattern combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, when the "red pattern combination" is selected as the jackpot pattern combination, the "ju jackpot A performance" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern, and when the "blue pattern combination" is selected as the jackpot pattern combination, the "joy jackpot B performance" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern. In addition, if the second special symbol is selected as a "4R normal jackpot", a "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and the corresponding jackpot performance pattern is the "Joy jackpot A performance".

The Choju jackpot presentation is a jackpot presentation pattern that definitely notifies the player that they have won the most advantageous jackpot (16R specific jackpot) among multiple jackpot types.

The Kotobuki jackpot A and Kotobuki jackpot B effects are determined to have won the "specific jackpot" type, which is the trigger for transitioning to a certain probability game state, but until the specified number of rounds (4 rounds) is reached, it is unclear whether the actual number of rounds is "16 rounds" or "4 rounds", and the effects progress in this jackpot performance pattern. Here, even if the Kotobuki jackpot A performance reaches the specified number of rounds (4 rounds), no promotion performance (round promotion performance) is performed, and it is determined that the specified number of rounds for this jackpot game is "4 rounds". On the other hand, when the Kotobuki jackpot B performance reaches the specified number of rounds (4 rounds), a promotion performance (round promotion performance) occurs, and it is determined that the specified number of rounds for this jackpot game is "16 rounds" (the specified number of rounds has been promoted to "16 rounds").

The actual number of rounds in the Happy Big Hit A and Happy Big Hit B performances is determined to be "4 rounds", but until the big hit end demo is reached, the "
This is a jackpot performance pattern in which the performance progresses while it is uncertain whether the player has won a "specific jackpot" or a "normal jackpot" that triggers a transition to a time-saving game state. Here, even if the joy jackpot A performance reaches the jackpot end demo, the promotion performance (probability promotion performance) is not performed, and it is determined that the current jackpot type is a "normal jackpot" (the game will transition to a time-saving game state after the current jackpot game ends). On the other hand, when the joy jackpot B performance reaches the jackpot end demo, a promotion performance (probability promotion performance) occurs, and it is determined that the current jackpot type is a "specific jackpot" (the game will transition to a probability game state after the current jackpot game ends). In addition, in FIG. 53, the correspondence between the jackpot type and the jackpot performance pattern is made different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, but the correspondence as shown in FIG. 53 (B) may be used regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. In addition, the first special symbol may also have a 16R specific jackpot, and in that case, even when the first special symbol is hit, the super longevity jackpot performance or the longevity jackpot B performance may be executed. The details of the promotion performance (round promotion performance, probability change promotion performance) will be described later.

Next, the contents of each big win performance pattern will be explained. Figures 54 to 58 are schematic diagrams showing the contents of the big win performance patterns. In the figures, the correspondence between the type of individual performance that occurs during a big win game and the timing of occurrence is determined for each big win performance pattern. In addition, in the figures, the opening mode of the big win opening P54 is added to make the explanation easier to understand. However, in this embodiment, as the opening mode of the big win opening P54, only a "long opening" is prepared in which the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big win opening P54 is set to an opening time that allows or makes it easy to enter a specified count number (full count) of game balls, but this configuration is not limited to this, and a "short opening" may be prepared in which the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big win opening P54 is set to an opening time that does not allow or makes it difficult to enter a specified count number (full count) of game balls.

First, while the jackpot start demo is running, a screen is displayed indicating the type of jackpot effect (Super Longevity jackpot effect, Longevity jackpot effect, Happy jackpot effect) and the player is informed of which jackpot effect will start. In this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is set to "5 seconds" for all jackpots.

During each round of play, a round performance screen is displayed according to the type of performance during the jackpot (Choju jackpot performance, Kotobuki jackpot performance, Ki jackpot performance). That is, if the performance pattern during the jackpot is Choju jackpot performance, the Choju jackpot round screen is displayed; if it is Kotobuki jackpot A performance or Kotobuki jackpot B performance, the Kotobuki jackpot round screen is displayed; if it is Ki jackpot A performance or Ki jackpot B performance, the Ki jackpot round screen is displayed. However, if a round promotion performance, which will be described later, occurs during a specified round of play, the type of performance during the jackpot is promoted, and the round performance screen of a lower rank type is switched to a round performance screen of a higher rank type.

After each round play ends, an interval period is set, which is the pause time (the closing time of the big prize opening P54) from when the end of each round play is set until the setting of the next round play or the big win end demo begins. Therefore, the special game is played in the following order: "Big win start demo" → "round play" → "interval period" → "round play" → "interval period" → ... → "round play" → "interval period" → "Big win end demo". In this embodiment, the interval time (interval period) is set to "2 seconds" for all big wins. Details of this interval time will be described later.

During the execution of the jackpot end demo, the contents of the performance mode (game state) to be transferred to after the end of the currently executed jackpot game are suggested, and the player is suggested which performance mode will be entered or continued. In addition, during this jackpot end demo period, the later-described probability change promotion performance or reserved consecutive suggestion performance may be performed. Note that the reserved consecutive suggestion performance performed during this jackpot end demo period does not include the reserved consecutive suggestion performance (the performance combined with the over winning performance or the bonus winning performance) that is performed in response to the occurrence of the over winning or the bonus winning in the modified example described later. In other words, the reserved consecutive suggestion performance related to the modified example described later is not a performance performed during the jackpot end demo period, but a performance performed during the interval period. Note that the details of the probability change promotion performance and reserved consecutive suggestion performance of this embodiment will be described later. In this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "20 seconds" in common to all jackpots. As described above, the jackpot start demo and the jackpot end demo may be configured so that each demo time is different depending on whether it is a jackpot game at the time of the first hit (i.e., a jackpot from a low probability low base state) or a jackpot game during a consecutive win (i.e., a jackpot from a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state). Specifically, in the case of a jackpot game during a consecutive win, each demo time may be set to a relatively short time in order to quickly proceed with the processing of the game before and after the jackpot (to quickly proceed with the game during the consecutive win) compared to the case of a jackpot game at the time of the first hit. Also, as described above, when a performance is performed to call attention to the forgetting of the prepaid card in a jackpot game at the time of the first hit, it is preferable to perform it within the jackpot end demo period set to a relatively long time, and when a performance is performed to call attention to the forgetting of the prepaid card in a jackpot game during a consecutive win, it is preferable to perform it during the execution period of the round game, not during the jackpot end demo period set to a relatively short time. In addition, for the reserved consecutive suggestion performance, in the case of a first jackpot game (i.e., a jackpot from a low probability low base state), it is preferable not to execute or to lower the execution probability even if there is a reserved jackpot in the reserve, and in the case of a jackpot game during a consecutive jackpot game (i.e., a jackpot from a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state), it is preferable not to execute or to increase the execution probability even if there is a reserved jackpot in the reserve. Furthermore, it is preferable that the reserved consecutive suggestion performance is performed during the execution of a special game corresponding to a 16R specific jackpot, and it is preferable to execute it when the reserved jackpot is a jackpot reserve corresponding to a 16R specific jackpot (in other words, it is preferable that the jackpot for which the reserved consecutive suggestion performance is displayed and the reserved jackpot reserve in the reserve that triggers the execution of the reserved consecutive suggestion performance are only for the 16R specific jackpot, and not for the 4R specific/normal jackpot).

Here, Figure 59 is a schematic diagram showing the basic screen (round presentation screen) during a round of play. Although not shown, in the central area of the screen, various images (animation images, etc.) are displayed according to the type of presentation pattern during a jackpot to liven up the jackpot game.

The round display area P730 on the screen displays the round number (the third round in the illustrated example) indicating which round game is currently being played. For example, if the currently playing round game is the first round game (first round), "ROUND1" is displayed in the round display area, if the currently playing round game is the second round game (second round), "ROUND2" is displayed in the round display area, and thereafter, "ROUND3," "ROUND4," ... are displayed in the round display area P730 each time a round game is played.

In the right-hit display area P731 of the screen, a right-hit image (also called a "hit instruction" effect) is displayed, which prompts the player to hit the game ball toward the right-side area PA2 (hit to the right). In addition, in the case where the game ball flows down the left-side area PA1 and enters the general winning port P61-P63, or enters the first starting port P51, that is, when the game ball is shot toward the left-side area PA1, a performance (attention notification effect) may be executed to alert the player not to hit to the left. In the attention notification effect, a message instructing the player to hit to the right is displayed on the screen, or the performance lamp LP is lit in a special light-emitting manner (for example, flashes quickly or momentarily with high brightness), thereby notifying the player that the game ball should be shot toward the right-side area PA2 (hit to the right). In addition, as the attention notification effect, for example, a sound (right-hit instruction sound) saying "Please hit to the right" may be output from the speaker P11. It is preferable that this warning effect be in a prominent position (for example, in the central display area) and of a large size (for example, occupying most of the display area of the effect display device P70) so that it can be clearly seen by the player, and that it be configured so that it can be displayed even in a situation where the right-hit image, the display contents in the prize ball acquisition display area P732 described later, the display contents in the cumulative prize ball count display area P733, the emphasis effect, and the display contents in the round display area P730 are displayed. However, since the right-hit image is also information that should be clearly conveyed to the player (information about the appropriate launch position), it is appropriate to display the right-hit image and the warning effect in different display areas so that they are not superimposed. On the other hand, in order not to impede the visibility of the warning effect, it is preferable to configure it so that it has a higher display priority than the display contents in the prize ball acquisition display area P732 described later, the display contents in the cumulative prize ball count display area P733, the emphasis effect, and the display contents in the round display area P730 (that is, while they can be superimposed, in that case the warning effect is displayed in front). The launch instruction effect is displayed as a display condition when the ball enters the general winning port P61-P63 during a jackpot or when the ball enters the first starting port P51, but the display time is set to 10 seconds. However, if the display condition is met again before the 10-second display time has elapsed, 10 seconds will be set as the display time again (that is, the display time will be extended). In addition, it is preferable to display the right-hit image and the warning effect not only during a jackpot, but also in a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, and it is preferable to configure the right-hit image to be displayed continuously from the jackpot to the high base state, and the warning effect to be displayed continuously from the jackpot to the high base state when it is displayed less than 10 seconds until the end of the jackpot (for example, 5 seconds before the end of the jackpot end demo).

In the prize ball acquisition display area P732 of the screen, when a predetermined winning event (over winning or bonus winning event described below) occurs, the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) awarded based on the winning event is displayed to notify the occurrence of the winning event. This prize ball acquisition display area P732 includes a first prize ball acquisition display area P732A in which the number of prize balls acquired by the over winning event (unit prize ball number acquired when one game ball enters the large winning port P54) is displayed when an over winning event occurs, and a second prize ball acquisition display area P732B in which the number of prize balls acquired by the bonus winning event (unit prize ball number acquired when one game ball enters the general winning port P64) is displayed when a bonus winning event occurs. For example, if an over-winning occurs, "+15pt" corresponding to the unit number of prize balls (15 balls) of the large winning port P54 is displayed, and if a bonus winning occurs, "+3pt" corresponding to the unit number of prize balls (3 balls) of the general winning port P64 is displayed. As a variant, the first prize ball acquisition display area P732A and the second prize ball acquisition display area P732B may be positioned apart.

The cumulative number of prize balls display area P733 of the screen displays the cumulative number of prize balls acquired up to the present time based on the balls entering the large prize entry port P54 or the general prize entry port P64 during the consecutive jackpot games. The "consecutive jackpots" refers to a state in which the specific game state continues without returning to the non-specific game state after the occurrence of the first jackpot, which is the trigger for transition from the non-specific game state to the specific game state (a state in which jackpots occur consecutively in the specific game state starting from the first jackpot). The "specific game state" refers to a game state in which the probability of transitioning to the special game is higher than that of the normal game state (low probability low base state), and refers to a state in which at least one of the following functions is activated: the probability variation function of the special symbol, the variation time reduction function of the special symbol, and the electric chute support function (at least one of the high probability high base state, the low probability high base state, and the high probability low base state). In this embodiment, the game state (high base state) in which at least the electric chute support function is activated corresponds to the "specific game state". The cumulative number of prize balls includes the number of prize balls acquired by the entry of game balls into the large prize winning port P54 or the general prize winning port P64 in the special game when the first win occurs. The cumulative number of prize balls may include the number of prize balls awarded by the over prize winning described below, or may not include the number of prize balls awarded by the over prize winning. The cumulative number of prize balls may include the number of prize balls awarded by the bonus prize winning described below, or may not include the number of prize balls awarded by the bonus prize winning. The over prize winning performance described below is executed during a jackpot (it can be executed because the large prize winning port P54 is openable and balls can be entered), but the general prize winning port P64 can be entered regardless of whether or not a jackpot is being won. However, the bonus prize winning performance described below is also configured to be executed only during a jackpot. Regarding the bonus win, if there is a jackpot, a bonus win effect is executed, but if the state is in a low probability, low base state, a special effect different from the bonus win is executed (for example, a special effect in which the dialogue "Don't put it in here now!" and a sound are displayed, however, this may also be executed when three balls are entered within a specified time (for example, within five seconds) rather than just one ball), and if the state is in a high probability, high base state or a low probability, high base state, neither the bonus win effect nor the special effect is executed (in that case, it is not necessary to execute anything, but as another effect, an effect such as a red flame appearing for a moment around the frame of the effect display device P70 may be executed).

In addition to this cumulative number of prize balls, or instead of the cumulative number of prize balls, the cumulative number of prize balls acquired up to the present time based on game balls entering the large prize entry port P54 or the general prize entry port P64 in one currently active jackpot game may be displayed (referred to as the "number of prize balls during a jackpot"). The number of prize balls during a jackpot is the number of prize balls that the player was actually able to acquire during one jackpot game, so basically, it may be less than the number of prize balls that can be acquired (theoretical expected number of prize balls) set according to the type of jackpot, but it will never exceed the number of prize balls that can be acquired. However, if an over-entry occurs as described below, the number of prize balls during a jackpot may exceed the number of prize balls that can be acquired (theoretical expected number of prize balls) set according to the type of jackpot.

Also, although not shown, during a streak, the number of consecutive jackpots in a specific game state, or the number of consecutive jackpots including the first jackpot (plus one), may be displayed. For example, if there are three jackpots in a specific game state after the first jackpot, a display such as "3rd consecutive jackpot" or "4th consecutive jackpot" may be displayed during the jackpot. Also, during each round of a special game, a pseudo decorative pattern (hereinafter referred to as a "pseudo decorative pattern") may be displayed in a variable and stationary manner (provisional stop display, fixed stop display). It is preferable that this pseudo decorative pattern be a pattern (a pattern exclusively for a jackpot) that is different from the normal decorative pattern that is displayed in a variable manner during a non-special game. Specifically, if the decorative pattern displayed during non-special play is composed of a picture (character) and a number, during special play it becomes a decorative pattern of only numbers, and its size is also reduced, or if the decorative pattern displayed during non-special play is composed of only numbers, during special play it becomes a decorative pattern of only numbers, but its size is also reduced. Furthermore, when a repeat number such as "7-7-7" is lined up at the time of a jackpot, it is sufficient to recognize which decorative pattern caused the jackpot, so "7-7-7" is not displayed during special play, and only "7" (only one decorative pattern, not a decorative pattern combination of three decorative patterns) is displayed. In addition, during the execution of the jackpot game (round game), a "winning-related effect", which is a characteristic effect of this embodiment, is executed.

[Winning Performances]
Next, the winning-related effects of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 18 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of the winning-related effects of this embodiment. The winning-related effects are effects that are executed based on the game ball entering a specific winning hole (large winning hole P54 or general winning hole P64) during the execution of a big win game. This winning-related effect includes (A) the large winning hole winning effect and (B) the general winning hole winning effect.

<A. Grand prize winning performance>
The large prize winning performance is a performance that is executed when a game ball enters the large prize winning port P54 during the execution of a special game. The large prize winning performance includes a large prize winning normal performance, a large prize winning over performance, and a large prize winning port count up performance. In the following, except in special cases, (a) a game ball enters the large prize winning port P54, (b) a game ball enters the large prize winning port P54, (c) a game ball is detected by the large prize winning port switch P541, and (d) a large prize winning port entry command is received from the main control board P100.

≪A-1. Regular winning performance at the big prize entrance≫
The large prize opening normal winning performance is a performance that notifies the player that a game ball has won the large prize opening P54, with the target being the winning of a game ball within a specified count number into the large prize opening P54. In other words, the large prize opening normal winning performance is a performance that is performed every time a game ball wins into the large prize opening P54 until the number of winning game balls into the large prize opening P54 in one round of play reaches the specified count number. In this embodiment, a specific example of the large prize opening normal winning performance is not specifically shown, but the large prize opening normal winning performance is performed using at least one of a plurality of performance means such as the performance display device P70, the speaker P11, the performance lamp LP, and the movable role P24. Examples include (1) a presentation on the presentation display device P70 that displays an object corresponding to a specified count number in one unit game (for example, a treasure chest display is displayed for a specified count number in one unit game), and the object is deleted every time a game ball enters the large prize opening P54, (2) a presentation on the speaker P11 that outputs a "clink" sound every time a game ball enters the large prize opening P54, and (3) a presentation on the presentation lamp LP that flashes twice every time a game ball enters the large prize opening P54. Note that, as a modified example of this embodiment, it may be configured so that, without providing a normal large prize opening presentation, only the large prize opening count-up presentation described below is performed for the entry of game balls into the large prize opening P54 up to the specified count number.

≪A-2. Winning over the big prize entrance≫
The large prize opening over-entry effect (also referred to as "over-entry effect") is an effect that suggests or notifies that a game ball has entered the large prize opening P54, targeting the entry of a game ball that exceeds the specified count number into the large prize opening P54 (over-entry). "Over-entry" refers to the detection by the large prize opening switch P541 of a game ball that exceeds the specified count number during the execution of one round of play (in this embodiment, the 11th or subsequent game balls). In this embodiment, the effective detection period of the big prize opening switch P541 is the detection grace period after each round of play ends (this period is the same as the interval period in this embodiment, but the interval period and the detection grace period may be different periods. As an example, when the interval period, which is the waiting time set between each round of play or between the final round of play and the big prize end demo, and is the period during which the big prize opening P54 is kept closed from the start of the closing operation, is set to 2 seconds, the detection grace period is set to 2 seconds. The detection grace period is a period set between each round of play or between the final round of play and the jackpot end demo, and is a period during which it is possible to detect the entry of a game ball after the large prize winning port P54 has started its closing operation (such as the entry of a game ball that has exceeded a specified count number).The detection grace period overlaps at least partially with the interval period, and is set to extend from the start of the closing operation of the large prize winning port P54 until 1 second, or 3 seconds, has elapsed, and an over-winning can occur within this interval period (within the detection grace period). As an example of an over-entry, if the game ball at the 10th count enters the large prize opening P54 and is detected by the large prize opening switch P541, initiating the closing operation of the large prize opening P54, and if a subsequent game ball (a game ball at the 11th count or later) enters the large prize opening P54 before the large prize opening P54 is closed, then an over-entry will occur when this subsequent game ball (a game ball at the 11th count or later) is detected by the large prize opening switch P541 within the interval period (within the detection grace period).

The types of over winning effects include an over winning image display effect and an over winning sound output effect. FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the over winning effect of this embodiment. It is preferable that the over winning effect is different from the effect of the large winning port normal winning effect described above. In addition, as a modified example, the effect related to the over winning may be equipped with only the over winning image (without the over winning sound), or may be equipped with only the over winning sound (without the over winning image).

The over win image display effect is an effect that displays an image (called an "over win image") that suggests that an over win has occurred. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, an over win image with the text "+15pt" is displayed in the prize ball acquisition display area P732 on the screen, suggesting that "15" prize balls have been acquired based on the occurrence of an over win. This allows the player to intuitively understand that an over win has occurred.

The over-winning sound output effect is an effect in which a sound ("over-winning sound") indicating that an over-winning has occurred is output from speaker P11. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, a sound effect (character's voice) saying "Good job" is output from speaker P11 to indicate that an over-winning has occurred.

As a modified example of this embodiment, multiple patterns of over winning effects may be provided. In other words, multiple types of over winning images or multiple types of over winning sounds may be prepared, and one of the over winning images and over winning sounds may be selected by a lottery when an over winning occurs. In this case, depending on the type of over winning image or over winning sound, a pending consecutive suggestion, a probability variation suggestion, a round number suggestion, etc. may be performed. As an example, while there is only one type of over winning image, "+15pt", the over winning sound includes "Nice", "Keep it up", and "Congratulations" in addition to "Yay", and among them, when the over winning sound "Congratulations" occurs, (1) the effect may also serve as a pending consecutive suggestion, (2) the effect may also serve as a suggestion that the currently executed jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, or (3) the effect may also serve as a suggestion that the currently executed jackpot is a 16R jackpot rather than a 4R jackpot.

More specifically, as a modified example of this embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple types of over winning sounds are set, and in addition to the occurrence of an over winning, a configuration may be adopted in which a possibility of a consecutive winning in the reserved ball is suggested according to the type of over winning sound (i.e., the over winning effect and the reserved ball consecutive suggestion effect are used together). Here, "consecutive winning in the reserved ball" refers to a case in which, when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol performed by the consumption of a certain preceding activated reserved ball is a jackpot, one or more subsequent activated reserved balls that exist at a predetermined timing from the time when the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol related to the preceding activated reserved ball is permitted to the time when the special game that is executed as a result of the jackpot is ended, which is a jackpot, include an activated reserved ball (also called "jackpot reserved"). In this modified example, as multiple types of over winning sounds, an over winning sound A (a sound saying "You did it") and an over winning sound B (a sound saying "Congratulations") are prepared. And, when there is no reserved jackpot when the over win occurs (when consecutive wins in the reserved jackpot are not established), the selection rate of the over win sound A is "100%", and the selection rate of the over win sound B is "0%". On the other hand, when there is a reserved jackpot when the over win occurs (when consecutive wins in the reserved jackpot are established), the selection rate of the over win sound A is "0%", and the selection rate of the over win sound B is "100%". In other words, the over win sound A is a normal sound that suggests that an over win has occurred and consecutive wins in the reserved jackpot have not been established. The over win sound B is a special sound that suggests that an over win has occurred and consecutive wins in the reserved jackpot have been established. The selection rates of the over win sounds A and B may be set appropriately. For example, when there is a reserved jackpot when the over win occurs (when consecutive wins in the reserved jackpot are established), the selection rate of the over win sound A may be "80%", and the selection rate of the over win sound B may be "20%".
In the above modified example, the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect was applied to the over winning sound output effect, but the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect may be applied to the over winning image display effect (for example, when "+15pt" is displayed in black letters as the over winning image display effect, the reserved consecutive win has not been achieved or is unlikely to be achieved, but when it is displayed in gold letters, the reserved consecutive win has been achieved or is likely to be achieved). In addition, in the above modified example, the over winning sound B was described as a reserved consecutive win suggestion, but the over winning sound B may be designed to have the role of a probability variable suggestion or a round number suggestion, and in that case, the selection rate of the over winning sounds A and B is set according to whether the currently executed jackpot is a normal jackpot or a specific jackpot (probability variable jackpot), so that in the case of a normal jackpot, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "100%" and the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "0%, while in the case of a specific jackpot (probability variable jackpot), the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "10%". The selection rates of over winning sounds A and B may be set depending on whether the currently executing jackpot is a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot, so that in the case of a 4R jackpot, the selection rate of over winning sound A is "100%" and the selection rate of over winning sound B is "0%", while in the case of a 16R jackpot, the selection rate of over winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of over winning sound B is "100%, " or the selection rate of over winning sound A is "80%" and the selection rate of over winning sound B is "20%.

In addition, in this embodiment, a "special pattern 2 priority consumption method" is adopted in which the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern is consumed preferentially over the activated reserved ball of the first special pattern, and only the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern may be targeted as the activated reserved ball that is the target of consecutive wins in the reserved. In addition, if the game state at the time of the occurrence of a jackpot that triggers the execution of a special game is a specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the end of the special game is also a specific game state (high base state), the reserved consecutive win suggestion performance may be executed in response to an over win that occurs during the execution of the special game. In addition, assuming that the preceding activated reserved ball is a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot), if a specific reserve that is a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot) is included in the subsequent activated reserved balls as the first specific reserve, the reserved consecutive win suggestion performance may be executed in response to an over win that occurs during the execution of the special game. In other words, even if there is a jackpot reservation in the subsequent active reservation, if the jackpot type related to the jackpot reservation (the earliest jackpot reservation in the case of multiple jackpot reservations) is a low-profit jackpot, the reserved lottery suggestion effect may not be executed. In other words, if a reserved lottery consecutive suggestion effect occurs during the execution of a special game, it is certain that a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot) will result in consecutive lots in the reservation.

In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, the over winning effect may suggest the possibility of winning a special jackpot in addition to the occurrence of an over winning. In other words, the over winning effect and the special jackpot suggestion effect may be used together. The special jackpot suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the currently active special game is a specific jackpot (special jackpot), that is, that the game will transition to a special jackpot state after the special game ends. In this modified example, for example, multiple types of over winning sounds A to C are set, and if the type of jackpot won this time is a normal jackpot, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "70%", the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "30%, and the selection rate of the over winning sound C is "0%". In addition, if the type of jackpot won this time is a special jackpot, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "10%, the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "30%, and the selection rate of the over winning sound C is "60%". In other words, the probability of winning (the probability of transitioning to the probability of winning game state) increases by one step in the order of "Over Winning Sound A" < "Over Winning Sound B" < "Over Winning Sound C". As a further modification, the over winning sound may be configured to indicate the number of electric supports that will be awarded after the special game ends, rather than the probability of winning.

≪A-3. Big prize slot count-up performance≫
The large prize opening count-up effect is an effect in which, when a game ball enters the large prize opening P54 during the execution of a special game during a consecutive win, the value of the cumulative prize ball count displayed in the cumulative prize ball count display area P733 is added to the value of the prize ball count (unit prize ball count) paid out based on the game ball entering the large prize opening. In this embodiment, since the specification is such that "15" prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the large prize opening P54 (the unit prize ball count of the large prize opening P54 is 15), when a game ball enters the large prize opening P54, the value of the cumulative prize ball count displayed in the cumulative prize ball count display area P733 is updated in units of "15". The special game presentation control means P227 is also provided with an accumulated prize ball counter for counting the accumulated number of prize balls, and each time a game ball enters the large prize opening P54 (each time a large prize opening entry command is received from the main control board P100), the count value of the accumulated prize ball counter is increased by "15", which is the unit prize ball number for the large prize opening P54, and accordingly, a large prize opening count-up presentation is performed in which "15" is added to the value of the accumulated prize ball number displayed in the accumulated prize ball number display area P733. This large prize opening count-up presentation is performed regardless of whether the game balls entering the large prize opening P54 are within the specified count number or exceed the specified count number.

Figure 62 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the consecutive appearance of the large prize opening count-up effect. As shown in Figure 62, the large prize opening count-up effect is an effect in which, when a game ball enters the large prize opening P54, the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 is added to the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 in a count-up manner by "1". In the illustrated example, the cumulative prize ball number is counted up one by one, such as "7000" → "7001" → ... → "7014" → "7015". Note that Figure 62 shows the flow of the large prize opening count-up effect when an over-winning effect occurs, and after the over-winning effect is performed at (A) in the figure, the large prize opening count-up effect is performed at (B) to (E) in the figure. 62 shows the large prize winning port count-up performance when the over winning performance is performed, but the large prize winning port count-up performance is performed not only when the over winning performance is performed but also when the game ball enters within the specified count number. Also, when the over winning performance occurs while the large prize winning port count-up performance corresponding to the game ball entering within the specified count number (especially the large prize winning port count-up performance corresponding to the 10th count, which is the specified count number) is being performed and the count-up of 15 balls has not yet been completed, it is desirable to configure it so that the large prize winning port count-up performance corresponding to the over winning performance is started after the count-up of the large prize winning port count-up performance that has not yet been completed for 15 balls is completed (after the count-up of 15 balls is completed). Here, if the over-winning is detected just before the end of the interval period (detection grace period), the large winning slot count-up performance corresponding to the over-winning will overlap with the execution period of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed). However, even if a ball enters the large winning slot P54 during the execution of the large winning slot count-up performance corresponding to the over-winning that is executed during the execution of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed), if the ball enters while the large winning slot count-up performance corresponding to the over-winning is being executed and the count-up of 15 balls has not yet been completed, it is desirable to configure the large winning slot count-up performance corresponding to the winning of the large winning slot P54 in the next round to start after the count-up of the large winning slot count-up performance that has not yet completed the count-up of 15 balls has been completed (after the count-up of 15 balls has been completed).

As a variation of this embodiment, when an over-winning occurs during the execution of a special game, the over-winning effect may be executed, but the number of prize balls awarded based on the over-winning may not be added to the cumulative number of prize balls. In other words, the cumulative number of prize balls may be configured to include the number of prize balls awarded based on game balls entering the large prize opening P54 within a specified count number, but not to include the number of prize balls awarded based on game balls entering the large prize opening P54 that exceed the specified count number.

In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, during the execution of a special game that is executed when the first hit occurs (the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol in the normal game state is a jackpot), even if an over-winning that exceeds the specified count occurs, the over-winning effect may not be executed. Also, there may be high-profit special games (e.g., 16R special games) and low-profit special games (e.g., 4R special games) as types of special games, and during the execution of a high-profit special game, an over-winning effect is executed when an over-winning that exceeds the specified count occurs, and during the execution of a low-profit special game, an over-winning effect is not executed even if an over-winning that exceeds the specified count occurs. In addition, the types of round games include a long open round game in which the maximum opening time of the large winning port P54 is set to an opening time (e.g., 29 seconds) at which a game ball of a specified count number (full count) can enter or is easy to enter, and a short open round game in which the maximum opening time of the large winning port P54 is set to an opening time (e.g., 2 seconds) at which a game ball of a specified count number (full count) can enter or is easy to enter, and during the execution of the long open round game, an over winning performance is executed when an over winning that exceeds the specified count occurs, and during the execution of the short open round game, an over winning performance is not executed even if an over winning that exceeds the specified count occurs. Also, during the execution of a special game that is executed when a specific jackpot (variable jackpot) is won, an over winning performance is executed when an over winning that exceeds the specified count occurs, and during the execution of a special game that is executed when a normal jackpot (non-variable jackpot) is won, an over winning performance is not executed even if an over winning that exceeds the specified count occurs.

<B. General prize winning performance>
The general prize-winning port winning effect is an effect that is executed when a gaming ball wins in the general prize-winning port P64. The general prize-winning port winning effect includes a general prize-winning port normal winning effect and a general prize-winning port count-up effect.

≪B-1. General prize winning entrance normal prize winning performance≫
The normal winning effect for the general winning port (also referred to as the "bonus winning effect") is an effect that suggests or notifies that a game ball has won the general winning port P64. In the following, the winning of a game ball into the general winning port P64 during the execution of a special game is also referred to as the "bonus winning", but the winning of a game ball into the general winning port P64 other than during the execution of a special game (non-special game state) may also be referred to as the "bonus winning".

The types of bonus winning effects include a bonus winning image display effect and a bonus winning sound output effect. FIG. 63 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the bonus winning effect of this embodiment. As a variation, the bonus winning effect may only include a bonus winning image (without a bonus winning sound), or only include a bonus winning sound (without a bonus winning image). This bonus winning effect is configured to be executed even during a round of play or while the big winning port P54 is closed during a jackpot (during an interval period), and is configured to be executed simultaneously with the over winning effect if the big winning port P54 is closed during a jackpot (during an interval period).

The bonus prize image display effect is an effect that displays an image (called a "bonus prize image") that suggests that a bonus prize has occurred. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, a bonus prize image with the letters "+3pt" is displayed in the prize ball acquisition display area P732 on the screen as a bonus prize image, suggesting that "3" prize balls have been acquired based on the occurrence of a bonus prize. This allows the player to intuitively understand that a bonus prize has occurred.

The bonus winning sound output effect is an effect in which a sound ("bonus winning sound") indicating that a bonus winning has occurred is output from the speaker P11. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, a "beep" sound effect is output from the speaker P11 to indicate that a bonus winning has occurred.

As a modified example of this embodiment, multiple presentation patterns for the bonus winning presentation may be provided. In other words, multiple types of bonus winning images or multiple types of bonus winning sounds may be prepared, and one of the bonus winning images and bonus winning sounds may be selected by a presentation lottery when a bonus winning occurs. In that case, depending on the type of bonus winning image or bonus winning sound, a hold consecutive suggestion, a probability variation suggestion, a number of rounds suggestion, etc. may be performed. As an example, while there is only one bonus winning image, "+3pt," the bonus winning sounds include "beep," "clack," "ding," and "boom," and when the bonus winning sound "boom" occurs, (1) the effect also serves to suggest a series of reserved wins, (2) it also serves to suggest that the currently occurring jackpot is a sure-win jackpot, and (3) it may also serve to suggest that the currently occurring jackpot is a 16R jackpot rather than a 4R jackpot.

More specifically, as a modified example of this embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple types of bonus winning sounds are set, and in addition to the occurrence of a bonus winning, a configuration may be adopted in which a bonus winning consecutive win in the reserved ball is suggested according to the type of bonus winning sound (i.e., a bonus winning performance and a reserved consecutive win suggestion performance are used together). In this modified example, as multiple types of bonus winning sounds, bonus winning sound A (a "beep" sound effect) and bonus winning sound B (a "boom" sound effect) are prepared. Then, if there is no jackpot reserved when a bonus winning occurs (if a consecutive win in the reserved ball is not established), the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "100%" and the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "0%". On the other hand, if there is a jackpot reserved when a bonus winning occurs (if a consecutive win in the reserved ball is established), the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "100%". That is, the bonus winning sound A is a sound of a normal mode suggesting that a bonus winning has occurred and that consecutive wins in the reserved state have not been established. The bonus winning sound B is a sound of a special mode suggesting that a bonus winning has occurred and that consecutive wins in the reserved state have been established. In addition, if a jackpot is reserved when a bonus winning occurs (if consecutive wins in the reserved state have been established), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A may be "80%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B may be "20%". In the modified example, the case where the consecutive wins suggestion performance is applied to the bonus winning sound output performance has been exemplified, but the consecutive wins suggestion performance may be applied to the bonus winning image display performance (for example, if "+3pt" is displayed in black letters as the bonus winning image display performance, the possibility that consecutive wins in the reserved state have not been established or are established is low, but if it is displayed in gold letters, the specification may be such that consecutive wins in the reserved state have been established or are established with a high possibility). In addition, in the above modified example, the bonus winning sound B was described as a reserve consecutive indication, but the bonus winning sound B may be specified to have the role of a probability variation indication or a round number indication. In that case, depending on whether the currently executed jackpot is a normal jackpot or a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot), the selection rate of the bonus winning sounds A and B is set as follows: in the case of a normal jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "100%" and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "0%", while in the case of a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "10%". Depending on whether the currently executed jackpot is a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot, the selection rates of bonus winning sounds A and B may be set as follows: in the case of a 4R jackpot, the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "100%" and the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "0%", while in the case of a 16R jackpot, the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "100%", or the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "80%" and the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "20%".

In addition, in this embodiment, a "special pattern 2 priority consumption method" is adopted in which the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern is consumed preferentially over the activated reserved ball of the first special pattern, and only the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern may be targeted as the activated reserved ball that is the target of the consecutive wins in the reserved ball. In addition, when the game state at the time of the occurrence of a jackpot that triggers the execution of a special game is a specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the end of the special game is also a specific game state (high base state), a reserved consecutive win suggestion performance may be executed with a bonus winning that occurred during the execution of the special game as a trigger. In addition, assuming that the preceding activated reserved ball is a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot), when a specific reserve that is a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot) is included in the subsequent activated reserved ball as the first specific reserve, a reserved consecutive win suggestion performance may be executed with a bonus winning that occurred during the execution of the special game as a trigger. In other words, even if there is a jackpot reservation in the subsequent operation reservation, if the jackpot type related to the jackpot reservation (the first jackpot reservation in the case of multiple jackpot reservations) is a low-profit jackpot, the reserved lottery suggestion performance may not be executed. In other words, if a reserved lottery consecutive suggestion performance occurs during the execution of a special game, it is certain that the reserved lottery will be consecutive with a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot).

In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, the bonus winning effect may suggest the possibility of winning a special jackpot in addition to the occurrence of a bonus winning. In other words, the bonus winning effect and the special jackpot suggestion effect may be used together. The special jackpot suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the currently active special game is a specific jackpot (special jackpot), that is, that the game will transition to a special jackpot state after the special game ends. In this modified example, for example, multiple types of bonus winning sounds A to C are set, and if the type of jackpot won this time is a normal jackpot, the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "70%", the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "30%, and the selection rate of bonus winning sound C is "0%". Also, if the type of jackpot won this time is a specific jackpot, the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "10%", the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "30%, and the selection rate of bonus winning sound C is "60%". In other words, the probability of a special winning sound (probability of transition to a special winning game state) increases by one step in the order of "bonus winning sound A" < "bonus winning sound B" < "bonus winning sound C". As a further modification, the bonus winning sound may be configured to indicate the number of electric supports to be granted after the special game ends, rather than the probability of a special winning sound.

<General prize entry count-up performance>
The general winning port count-up effect is an effect in which, when a game ball enters the general winning port P64 during the execution of a special game during a consecutive win, the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 is added to the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) paid out based on the game ball entering the general winning port P64. In this embodiment, since the specification is such that "3" prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the general winning port P64 (the unit number of prize balls for the general winning port P64 is 3), when a game ball enters the general winning port P64, the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 is updated in units of "3". In addition, as mentioned above, the special game presentation control means P227 is equipped with a cumulative prize ball counter for counting the cumulative number of prize balls, and each time a game ball enters the general prize opening P64 (each time a general prize opening entry command is received from the main control board P100), "3", which corresponds to the unit prize ball number of the general prize opening P64, is added to the count value of the cumulative prize ball counter, and accordingly, a general prize opening count-up presentation is performed in which "3" is added to the value of the cumulative prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball display area P733.

Here, FIG. 64 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a continuous general winning port count-up effect. As shown in FIG. 64, the general winning port count-up effect is an effect in which, when a gaming ball enters a general winning port 54, the value of the unit prize ball number awarded based on the entry of a gaming ball into the general winning port P64 is added in a count-up format by "1" to the current value of the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733. In the illustrated example, the value of the cumulative prize ball number is counted up one by one, such as "8000" → "8001" → "8002" → "8003".

The general prize winning performance (bonus prize winning performance, general prize winning performance) is performed during the execution of the special game when a game ball enters the general prize winning performance P64 located in the right area PA2 among the multiple general prize winning performances P61-P64. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the general prize winning performance P61-P63 located in the left area PA1 among the multiple general prize winning performances P61-P64 during the execution of the special game, the general prize winning performance will not be performed. However, when a game ball enters one of the general prize winning performances P61-P64 during the execution of the special game, regardless of the type of general prize winning performance P61-P64 (regardless of whether the general prize winning performance is executed), the prize balls (3 balls) based on the game ball entering the general prize winning performance P61-P64 are paid out.

In this embodiment, each time a bonus win occurs, the number of prize balls (unit prize balls) awarded for that bonus win is added to the cumulative prize ball count, but this is not limited to the configuration. The number of prize balls based on all bonus wins that occur during one round of play (unit prize balls x number of bonus wins during one round of play) may be configured to be added to the cumulative prize ball count at the end of that round of play, or the number of prize balls based on all bonus wins that occur during one special game (unit prize balls x number of bonus wins during one special game) may be configured to be added to the cumulative prize ball count at the end of the final round of play or at the end of that special game.

In addition, in this embodiment, a board configuration is adopted in which the general prize opening P64 is located upstream of the second starting opening 51, but this configuration is not limited to this, and a board configuration in which the general prize opening P64 is located downstream of the second starting opening 51 may also be adopted. In that case, the general prize opening P64 may be located upstream of the large prize opening P54, or the general prize opening P64 may be located downstream of the large prize opening P54.

As a variation of this embodiment, the general winning port P64 may also serve as the operating port (operating gate P53) that triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery. In other words, when a game ball enters the general winning port P64, a normal symbol lottery is performed to determine whether the second start port P52 is opened, and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 1 or 2) are paid out.

As described above, the general prize winning port winning effects (bonus prize winning effects, general prize winning port count-up effects) are effects that are triggered by a game ball entering the general prize winning port P64 when the currently active game state is a special game state, so even if a game ball enters the general prize winning port P64 when the currently active game state is a non-special game state, the general prize winning port winning effects (bonus prize winning effects, general prize winning port count-up effects) will not be performed. In other words, even if the currently active game state is a game state in which the main focus of the game is the variable display of the first special pattern (non-electric support state), or even if the currently active game state is a game state in which the main focus of the game is the variable display of the second special pattern (electric support state), the general prize winning port winning effects (bonus prize winning effects, general prize winning port count-up effects) will not be performed in response to a game ball entering the general prize winning port P64. In addition, when the currently active game state is a game state (electric support state) in which the main part of the game is the variable display of the second special symbol, the cumulative number of prize balls acquired in the special game during the consecutive wins (the cumulative number of prize balls at the end of the most recent special game) is displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 on the screen, assuming that the consecutive wins state is still continuing. However, in this electric support state, only the cumulative number of prize balls acquired in the special game during the consecutive wins is displayed, and even if a game ball enters the general winning hole P64, the number of prize balls is not added to the cumulative number of prize balls (the general winning hole count-up performance is not performed), and the value of the cumulative number of prize balls does not change (the cumulative number of prize balls at the end of the most recent special game is maintained).

Also, during the execution of a special game that is executed when the first hit occurs (the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol in the normal game state is a big hit), even if a game ball enters the general winning port P64, the bonus winning performance may not be executed. Also, the types of special games include a high-profit special game (e.g., 16R special game) and a low-profit special game (e.g., 4R special game), and during the execution of a high-profit special game, the bonus winning performance is executed by a game ball entering the general winning port P64, and during the execution of a low-profit special game, the bonus winning performance is not executed even if a game ball enters the general winning port P64. In addition, the types of round games include a long-open round game in which the maximum opening time of the large prize opening P54 is set to an opening time (e.g., 29 seconds) at which a specified count number (full count) of game balls can enter or is easy to enter, and a short-open round game in which the maximum opening time of the large prize opening P54 is set to an opening time (e.g., 2 seconds) at which a specified count number (full count) of game balls can enter or is easy to enter, and the game may be configured such that a bonus prize winning performance is executed when a game ball enters the general prize opening P64 during the long-open round game, and that no bonus prize winning performance is executed even if a game ball enters the general prize opening P64 during the short-open round game. In addition, during the execution of a special game that is played when a specific jackpot (a special jackpot) is won, a bonus winning performance is executed by a game ball entering the general winning port P64, and during the execution of a special game that is played when a normal jackpot (a non-special jackpot) is won, the bonus winning performance may not be executed even if a game ball enters the general winning port P64.

<Other features of the winning performance>
Next, other features of the large prize winning slot winning performance and the general prize winning slot winning performance of this embodiment will be described. Note that since the large prize winning slot count-up performance and the general prize winning slot count-up performance are performances for the same display object (the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative number of prize balls display area P733), hereinafter, the large prize winning slot count-up performance and the general prize winning slot count-up performance may be collectively referred to simply as "count-up performance."

≪Count-up performance time≫
In this embodiment, the time required to count up one prize ball (the time required to count up from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 seconds". In other words, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative number of prize balls display area P733 is counted up in increments of "0.03 seconds". Therefore, the execution time of the large prize opening count-up performance is derived by multiplying the time value required to count up one prize ball by the value of the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) awarded when one game ball enters the large prize opening P54, and the execution time of the large prize opening count-up performance is "15 (unit number of prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds". Similarly, the general winning port count-up performance is derived by multiplying the time value required to count up one prize ball by the value of the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) awarded when one game ball enters the general winning port P64, and the execution time of the general winning port count-up performance is "3 (unit number of prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.09 seconds." For convenience, the execution time of the large winning port count-up performance (the time value from the start to the end of one large winning port count-up performance) will be abbreviated below as "count-up performance time A," and the execution time of the general winning port count-up performance (the time value from the start to the end of one general winning port count-up performance) will be abbreviated below as "count-up performance time B." Here, the regular big prize winning performance, the over prize winning performance, and the bonus prize winning performance are configured not to be executed during the big prize start demo and the big prize end demo even when a special game is being played, and therefore, the big prize winning performance and the regular prize winning performance are also configured not to be executed during the big prize start demo and the big prize end demo even when a special game is being played.

(Relationship 1 of count-up performance time A)
The count-up performance time A is set shorter than the interval time (also called the "interval period") set after the end of each round game. The interval time is a waiting time set between each round game or between the final round game and the big win end demo, and is a round game waiting time (unit game waiting time) or end demo waiting time, which is a period during which the big prize winning port P54 is kept closed from the start of the closing operation. In this embodiment, the interval time is set to "2 seconds" in common for all round games. In this embodiment, the count-up performance time A (0.45 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), so that even if a big prize winning port count-up performance is performed based on a game ball entering the big prize winning port P54 just before the end of a certain round game, the big prize winning port count-up performance will be completed within the interval time after the end of the round game. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the big prize entry port count-up performance will extend beyond the interval period and continue until the next round of play or the big prize end demo (if an over-winning occurs, there is a possibility that the interval period will be exceeded), and makes it possible to clearly define the division between each round of play or the division between the final round of play and the big prize end demo.

(Relationship 2 of count-up performance time A)
The count-up performance time A is set shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. As described above, the count-up performance time A is set to "0.45 seconds", and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "20 seconds" for all jackpot types (jackpot performances). The execution time of the jackpot end demo is the waiting time from when the interval time after the end of the final round of play in the special game has elapsed until the special game ends. In other words, the execution time of the jackpot end demo does not include the interval time set after the end of the final round of play. In other words, the interval time after the end of the final round of play is set as the remaining time (grace time) of that round of play during which it is possible that a game ball has entered the large prize opening P54 and is validly detected (i.e., detected as a target for a prize ball payout, not judged as an illegal entry), but the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set as the preparation time for the game (presentation mode) after the end of the special game that is separated from that round of play and during which it is not possible that a game ball has entered the large prize opening P54 and is validly detected. In this embodiment, the count-up performance time A (0.45 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demo, so that even if the jackpot entry port count-up performance is performed based on the game ball entering the jackpot entry port P54 just before the end of the final round game, or even if an over-entry occurs in the final round game, or even if the jackpot entry port P54 is closed after the final round game (even during the jackpot end demo period), the jackpot entry port count-up performance is completed within the jackpot end demo period. Therefore, the jackpot entry port count-up performance is not performed beyond the jackpot end demo period and before the variable display after the special game ends, and the division between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display of the first rotation can be clearly defined. As a modified example, the entry of a game ball into the jackpot entry port P54 may be effectively detected within at least a portion of the execution time of the jackpot end demo.

(Relationship 3 of count-up performance time A)
In this embodiment, when a specified number of game balls enter the big prize winning hole P54 in one round of play, the total time of the count-up performance time A for the specified number of game balls in this one round of play (the big prize winning hole count-up performance for the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one round of play) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the big prize end demo. Specifically, the total time of the count-up performance time A for the specified number of game balls is "0.45 seconds (count-up performance time A) x 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds". On the other hand, the execution time of the big prize end demo is set to "20 seconds" in common to all big prize types (big prize during performance) as described above. In this embodiment, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up performance time A for the specified count number is configured to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demo, so that even if a plurality of game balls enter the jackpot entry port P54 in succession just before the end of the final round of play, and even if the jackpot entry port count-up performance is performed after the jackpot entry port P54 is closed after the final round of play (even during the jackpot end demo period), the jackpot entry port count-up performance will be completed within the jackpot end demo period. Therefore, the jackpot entry port count-up performance will not be performed beyond the jackpot end demo period and before the variable display after the special game ends, and the division between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display of the first rotation can be clearly defined.

In addition, even if the game balls enter the large prize winning port P54 in a single round of play in excess of the specified count number (if an over-winning occurs), it is preferable that the total time of the count-up performance time A for the cumulative count number (specified count number + over-winning number) in this single round of play be set shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. In other words, the total time of the count-up performance time A for the specified count number in one round of play plus the total time of the count-up performance time A for the over-winning number is set shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo after the end of that round of play. In the case where the large prize winning port count-up performance is performed even after the closing of the large prize winning port P54 after the final round of play (even during the jackpot end demo period), it is preferable that even if an over-winning occurs, the large prize winning port count-up performance is ended within the execution time of the jackpot end demo to clearly separate the end of the special play and the start of the variable display. The number of over wins is indefinite because it depends on the progress of the game (how the game balls are launched and how they flow down), but even if we assume that there are 10 balls, which is the same number as the specified count number, it is desirable to satisfy the above relationship (in that case, the total time of count-up performance time A for the specified count number in one round of play plus the total time of count-up performance time A for the number of over wins will be 4.5 seconds + 4.5 seconds, which is 9 seconds, which is shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo of 20 seconds), and it is configured in this way.

(Relationship 4 of count-up performance time A)
As a modified example of this embodiment, when a specified number of game balls enter the large prize opening P54 in one round game, the total time of the count-up performance time A for the specified number of balls in this one round game may be configured to be shorter than the interval time after the end of the round game. In this modified example, the total time of the count-up performance time A for the specified number of balls is "0.45 seconds (count-up performance time A) x 10 balls (specified number of balls) = 4.5 seconds". On the other hand, the interval time after the end of each round game is longer than the interval time (2 seconds) in the above embodiment, and is set to "6 seconds" in common to all round games. In this modified example, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up performance time A for the specified count number is configured to be shorter than the interval time (6 seconds), so that even if multiple game balls enter the big prize 54 in succession just before the end of a certain round game, causing multiple big prize port count-up performances to be performed in succession, the big prize port count-up performance will be completed within the interval time after the end of the round game. Therefore, the big prize port count-up performance will not be performed beyond the interval period and will straddle the next round game or the big prize end demo, making it possible to clearly indicate the division between each round game or the division between the final round game and the big prize end demo.

In addition, even when only one game ball enters the large prize winning port P54 in a single round game (when only one over-winning ball occurs), it is preferable that the total time of the count-up performance time A for the cumulative count number (prescribed count number + one over-winning ball) in this single round game is set shorter than the interval time after the end of the round game. In other words, the total time of the count-up performance time A for the prescribed count number in one round game plus the count-up performance time A for one over-winning ball (4.5 seconds + 0.45 seconds = 4.95 seconds) is set shorter than the interval time (6 seconds) after the end of the round game, so that even when an over-winning ball occurs, the large prize winning port count-up performance is ended within the interval period, and the division between round games is made clear.

(Relationship 5 of count-up performance time A)
As a modified example of this embodiment, when a specified number of game balls (full count) enter the large prize winning port P54 in all round games of one special game, the total time of the count-up performance time A for the full count number (specified round number x specified count number) occurring during the execution of this special game may be configured to be shorter than the execution time of the large prize winning end demo. In this modified example, when the specified number of rounds of one special game is the maximum number of rounds (16 rounds), if the game balls enter the large prize winning port by the specified number of counts (10 balls) in all round games, a total of 160 large prize winning port count-up performances are executed. Therefore, the total time of the count-up performance time A for the total number of counts is "0.45 seconds (count-up performance time A) x 10 balls (specified count number) x 16 rounds (specified round number) = 72 seconds". On the other hand, in this modified example, the execution time of the large prize winning end demo is set to "120 seconds" in common to all large prize types (large prize during performance). In this modified example, the total time (72 seconds) of the count-up performance time A for all counts in one special game is configured to be shorter than the execution time (120 seconds) of the jackpot end demo. Therefore, if the large prize opening count-up performance is performed even after the large prize opening P54 is closed after the final round of play (even during the jackpot end demo period), even if the execution of the large prize opening count-up performance is delayed during the round of play or during the interval period due to consecutive entries of game balls into the large prize opening P54, it is guaranteed that all large prize opening count-up performances will be completed at least by the end of the jackpot end demo, making it possible to smoothly proceed with the performance during the jackpot.

<Priority of the first and second big prize slot count-up performance>
FIG. 65 is a time chart for explaining the priority of the large prize opening count-up performance. As shown in FIG. 65, when a plurality of game balls (two game balls in the illustrated example) enter the large prize opening P54 consecutively during the execution of a certain round game, two large prize opening count-up performances based on the consecutive winnings are executed. Specifically, when the execution condition of the large prize opening count-up performance is established by the first game ball entering the large prize opening P54, the previous large prize opening count-up performance is executed. Similarly, when the execution condition of the large prize opening count-up performance is established by the second game ball entering the large prize opening P54, the subsequent large prize opening count-up performance is executed. The execution condition of the large prize opening count-up performance is a condition for starting the execution of the large prize opening count-up performance, and is established when a game ball enters the large prize opening P54 during the execution of a special game (entry of a game ball is detected by the large prize opening switch P541). At this time, if the execution condition of the later large prize winning port count-up performance is satisfied during the execution of the earlier large prize winning port count-up performance, the execution of the later large prize winning port count-up performance is started after the execution of the earlier large prize winning port count-up performance is completed, without interrupting the execution of the earlier large prize winning port count-up performance. That is, in this embodiment, the priority of the earlier large prize winning port count-up performance is set higher than the priority of the later large prize winning port count-up performance among the two earlier and later large prize winning port count-up performances, and the execution of the later large prize winning port count-up performance is not started before the execution of the earlier large prize winning port count-up performance is completed, and the execution of the later large prize winning port count-up performance is started after the execution of the earlier large prize winning port count-up performance is completed. Note that, when the execution of the later large prize winning port count-up performance is started after the execution of the earlier large prize winning port count-up performance is completed, it is preferable to continuously (seamlessly) connect the earlier large prize winning port count-up performance and the later large prize winning port count-up performance to perform two large prize winning port count-ups continuously. However, as a modified example, after the execution of the first large prize winning port count-up performance is completed, the execution of the second large prize winning port count-up performance may be started after a predetermined time (infinite time) has elapsed, so that a clear division is made between the first large prize winning port count-up performance and the second large prize winning port count-up performance. Here, the large prize winning port count-up performance has been described, but the general prize winning port count-up performance may have the same specifications, and if the execution condition of the second general prize winning port count-up performance is satisfied during the execution of the first general prize winning port count-up performance, it is preferable to configure the execution of the second general prize winning port count-up performance to start after the execution of the first general prize winning port count-up performance is completed, without terminating the execution of the first general prize winning port count-up performance. Also, if the execution condition of the second general prize winning port count-up performance is satisfied during the execution of the first large prize winning port count-up performance, it is preferable to configure the execution of the second general prize winning port count-up performance to start after the execution of the first large prize winning port count-up performance is completed, without terminating the execution of the first large prize winning port count-up performance. Furthermore, if the conditions for executing the subsequent large prize slot count-up performance are met during the execution of the previous general prize slot count-up performance, it is preferable to configure the execution of the subsequent large prize slot count-up performance to begin after the execution of the previous general prize slot count-up performance has finished, without interrupting the execution of the previous general prize slot count-up performance.

As a modified example of this embodiment, if the execution conditions of the later large prize entry port count-up performance are satisfied during the execution of the earlier large prize entry port count-up performance, the execution of the earlier large prize entry port count-up performance may be interrupted and the execution of the next large prize entry port count-up performance may be started. In other words, the priority of the later large prize entry port count-up performance is set higher than the priority of the earlier large prize entry port count-up performance. In that case, it is preferable to forcibly switch the count value to the final value of the earlier large prize entry port count-up performance or the initial value of the later large prize entry port count-up performance at the time when the execution of the earlier large prize entry port count-up performance is interrupted, and start the later large prize entry port count-up performance from that point. In this modified example, the large prize entry port count-up performance has been described, but the general prize entry port count-up performance may also have the same specifications, and if the execution conditions of the later general prize entry port count-up performance are satisfied during the execution of the earlier general prize entry port count-up performance, the execution of the earlier general prize entry port count-up performance may be interrupted and the execution of the next general prize entry port count-up performance may be started. Also, if the execution conditions for the subsequent general winning slot count-up performance are satisfied during the execution of the previous large winning slot count-up performance, the execution of the previous large winning slot count-up performance may be interrupted and the execution of the next general winning slot count-up performance may be started. Also, if the execution conditions for the subsequent large winning slot count-up performance are satisfied during the execution of the previous general winning slot count-up performance, the execution of the previous general winning slot count-up performance may be interrupted and the execution of the next large winning slot count-up performance may be started.

(Emphasis on cumulative winning balls)
FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram for explaining the highlighting effect of this embodiment. (A) in the figure shows a case where an over winning effect is executed during the execution of the highlighting effect, and (B) in the figure shows a case where a bonus winning effect is executed during the execution of the highlighting effect. In this embodiment, when the value of the cumulative number of prize balls during the consecutive wins reaches a predetermined specific value, triggered by the entry of a game ball into the large winning port P54 or the general winning port P64 during the execution of the special game, a highlighting effect is executed to notify that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached the specific value. Note that the specific value is a multiple value of the predetermined number of prize balls (10,000). In other words, each time the current value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a multiple value of the predetermined number of prize balls (10,000, 20,000, 30,000, ...), a highlighting effect is executed. Therefore, the highlighting effect may be called a specific value reaching effect, and the highlighting display may be called a specific value corresponding display. In this embodiment, even if the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value as a result of an over winning or bonus winning, an emphasis effect is executed, and in that case, the emphasis effect and the over winning effect or bonus winning effect are executed in conjunction with each other.

The types of emphasis effects include an emphasis display effect in which a specific value reached by the cumulative number of winning balls (in the illustrated example, "20,000 pts") is enlarged and displayed in an emphasis display area P735 in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 66, and an emphasis sound output effect in which a special sound (in the illustrated example, the sound "In top form") is output from the speaker P11.

The highlighting of the specific value continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and even if the cumulative prize ball count display is updated (added) during that time due to the entry of a game ball into the large prize winning port P54 or the general prize winning port P64, the highlighting is not updated (added). At this time, the display priority of each layer increases in the order of "cumulative prize ball count display" < "highlighting" < "round display". "Layer" refers to each layer of the hierarchical structure that specifies the display priority of each image that composes the entire image. The higher the display priority of each layer, the higher the layer (the closer to the front as seen by the player), and the lower the display priority of each layer, the lower the layer (the closer to the back as seen by the player). In FIG. 66, the highlighting and the cumulative prize ball count display are shown without overlapping, but the display area may be enlarged and overlapping to further emphasize the highlighting. In that case, the highlighting may be configured to be displayed in front of the cumulative prize ball count display according to the above priority (the highlighting may cover part or all of the cumulative prize ball count display).

As shown in FIG. 66, the prize ball acquisition display area P732 and the highlight display area P735 are provided as separate and independent display areas, and when an over prize or bonus prize occurs during the highlight display, the highlight image and the over prize image or bonus prize image are displayed simultaneously in parallel. When the highlight image and the over prize image or bonus prize image are displayed simultaneously, the highlight image may be given a higher priority than the over prize image or bonus prize image, or the over prize image or bonus prize image may be given a higher priority than the highlight image. In FIG. 66, the highlight and the over prize image/bonus prize image are shown without being superimposed, but the display area may be enlarged and superimposed to further emphasize the highlight. In that case, the highlight may be displayed in front of the over prize image/bonus prize image according to the above priority (the highlight may be displayed covering part or all of the over prize image/bonus prize image).

In addition, if an over-winning occurs while a special sound is being output, the over-winning sound or bonus winning sound is output overlapping with the special sound. When a special sound and an over-winning sound or bonus winning sound overlap, the volume of the over-winning sound or bonus winning sound may be set to a lower volume compared to the volume of the special sound with a higher priority, and vice versa, the volume of the special sound may be set to a lower volume compared to the volume of the over-winning sound or bonus winning sound with a higher priority. In this case, the volume of the sound with the lower priority (the lower volume) may be set to essentially "0".

<Over-winning effect/bonus winning effect when an error occurs>
In this embodiment, when various errors occur in the gaming machine, the possibility of executing the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect is controlled according to the type of error. FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram for explaining the types of errors in the gaming machine. In this embodiment, the types of errors that occur in the gaming machine are set as "door/frame open error", "magnetic sensor error", "radio wave sensor error", "disconnection/short circuit power supply error", "excessive winning error", "payout error", etc. Note that the above error types are only examples, and various error types may be provided according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

The door/frame open error occurs when the glass frame P5, front frame P2, or back set board P30 is open relative to the outer frame 1, or when a break or malfunction occurs in the door open switch that detects the opening of the glass frame P5, the frame open switch that detects the opening of the front frame P2, or the back set open switch that detects the opening of the back set board P30. This door/frame open error is cleared by checking whether there is anything wrong with the gaming machine and closing the glass frame P5, the front frame P2, and the back set board P30.

Magnetic sensor errors and radio wave sensor errors occur when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism, when the radio wave sensor detects radio waves, or when the magnetic sensor or radio wave sensor is broken, short-circuited, or broken. Magnetic sensor errors and radio wave sensor errors are cleared by checking for abnormalities in the gaming machine and turning the power back on.

A power supply error occurs when the radio wave sensor and the various switches on the game board are broken, short-circuited, or malfunction. A power supply error is cleared by checking that there are no abnormalities in the game machine and then turning the power back on.

An excessive winning error is an error that occurs when an excessive number of game balls enter the various winning ports. The excessive winning error is cleared by checking whether there are any abnormalities in the gaming machine and turning the power back on. Here, the excessive winning error includes an excessive winning error in the large winning port P54 (also referred to as an "excessive winning error in the large winning port") and an excessive winning error in the general winning ports P61 to P64 (also referred to as an "excessive winning error in the general winning port"). For example, an excessive winning error in the large winning port is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 30 balls) enter the large winning port P54 during the execution of one round of play. The general prize opening excess winning error is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 30 balls) enter the general prize openings P61 to P63 per unit time (e.g., 30 seconds), or when a specific number of game balls (e.g., 60 balls) enter the general prize opening P64 per unit time (e.g., 30 seconds). The general prize opening P64 is arranged in such a way that game balls can enter it more easily than the general prize openings P61 to P63, so the error determination value (the number of game balls that is determined to be an error) based on the number of balls entering per unit time for the general prize opening P64 is a more generous value. In this embodiment, if a large prize winning port excess winning error occurs, or if a ball enters the large prize winning port P54 when the large prize winning port P54 is not open (during non-special play), that is, if an abnormal winning is detected for the large prize winning port P54 (determined to be an abnormal winning), the external information terminal board P600 outputs an external information signal (security signal) indicating that an error has occurred. On the other hand, if a general prize winning port excess winning error occurs, that is, if an abnormal winning is detected for the general prize winning ports P61 to P64 (determined to be an abnormal winning), the external information terminal board P600 does not output an external information signal (security signal) indicating that an error has occurred. The external information signal (outer end signal) output by the external information terminal board P600 will be described later.

A payout error is an error that occurs when there is a problem with the payout of prize balls. This payout error includes a full tank error in which the lower ball tray P9 is full of game balls (full tank switch is on), a ball jam/ball jam error in the prize ball payout unit P34, and a no-ball error in which game balls are not replenished from the game island. When a full tank error occurs, the notification level is divided into two stages. Notification level 1 is the level when the full tank switch remains on for 30 seconds after it is turned on. In notification level 1, only the audio notification "Please remove the balls" is executed. In this notification level 1, even if a ball enters the large prize opening P54 or the general prize openings P61 to P64, the payout of prize balls is not restricted (the payout of prize balls is not stopped). If the on state exceeds 30 seconds, the notification level changes to 2, and not only is there a voice notification of "Please remove the balls," but also an image notification is displayed on the performance display device P70, displaying an image of "an image encouraging the player to remove the balls from the lower ball tray." Furthermore, even if a ball enters the large prize opening P54 or the general prize openings P61 to P64, the payout of prize balls is limited (payout of prize balls is stopped). As a variation, only image notification may be performed at notification level 1, and both image and voice notification may be performed at notification level 2. For ball jamming/ball jamming errors in the prize ball payout unit P34 and ball shortage errors due to inability to replenish game balls from the game island, payout of prize balls is limited (payout of prize balls is stopped) even if a ball enters the large prize opening P54 or the general prize openings P61 to P64.

As shown in FIG. 67, the various errors are classified into "first error," "second error," and "third error" according to the priority (importance) of the error. A first error is an error type in which the priority (importance) of the error is set to a medium level, which prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing. The first errors include a "door/frame open error." A second error is an error type in which the priority (importance) of the error is set to a high level, which prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing. The second errors include a "magnetic sensor error," "radio wave sensor error," "break/short circuit power supply error," and "excessive winning error." A third error is an error type in which the priority (importance) of the error is set to a low level, which prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing. The third errors include a "payout error."

If the above-mentioned error occurs in the gaming machine, various types of error notifications are made using image effects, audio effects, etc. Specifically, the content of the error is displayed on the screen of the effect display device P70, and an error notification sound is output from the speaker P11 at an error volume. Note that, as a variation of the error notification, the effect lamp LP may be configured to flash at an error brightness.

In this embodiment, when the gaming machine has a first error (door/frame open error), even if an over win or bonus win occurs, a part of the over win effect or a part of the bonus win effect is not performed. That is, when the first error occurs in the gaming machine, among the over win effect and bonus win effect, the over win image display effect and the bonus win image display effect are allowed to be executed, but the over win sound output effect and the bonus win sound output effect are restricted to be executed. Even if an over win or bonus win occurs during the first error, the over win effect and the bonus win effect are not executed, so that the gaming machine does not miss the first error state. In this case, the count-up effect (the large win port count-up effect and the general win port count-up effect) is allowed to be executed. Specifically, when the first error occurs, an error image indicating that it is the first error is displayed to notify that it has become the first error, but it is not displayed on the entire screen, but is displayed using only a part of the display area. The display priority of the error image is higher than that of the over winning image or the bonus winning image, but they can all be displayed at the same time, and the count-up effect can also be displayed at the same time. However, while the error notification sound is being output to notify that a first error has occurred, the over winning sound or the bonus winning sound is not output (or is low in volume). Note that if an over winning or bonus winning occurs when the gaming machine is in the first error state, the payout of prize balls based on this over winning or bonus winning will be performed.

In addition, when the gaming machine has a second error (magnetic sensor error, radio wave sensor error, disconnection short circuit power supply error, excess winning error), even if an over winning or bonus winning occurs, the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not performed. That is, when the gaming machine has a second error, the execution of both the over winning image display effect and the over winning sound output effect as the over winning effect is restricted, and the execution of both the bonus winning image display effect and the bonus winning sound output effect as the bonus winning effect is restricted. Even if an over winning occurs during the second error, the over winning effect and the like are not performed, so that the gaming machine does not miss the second error state. In this case, the execution of the count-up effect (the large winning port count-up effect and the general winning port count-up effect) is also restricted. Specifically, when the second error occurs, an error image indicating the second error is displayed on the full screen to notify the user that the second error has occurred, so that the over winning image, the bonus winning image, and the count-up effect are not displayed. In addition, while the error notification sound is being output to notify the player of the second error, the over-winning sound or bonus winning sound is not output. If the game machine is in the second error state and an over-winning or bonus winning occurs, the prize balls based on the over-winning or bonus winning are paid out.

In addition, even if the gaming machine experiences a third error (payout error) and is unable to pay out prize balls, the over prize or bonus prize presentation is executed if an over prize or bonus prize occurs. In other words, if a payout error occurs in the gaming machine, there is no risk of any particular problems occurring if the player continues playing, and there is also no risk of the player suffering any disadvantages. Therefore, if the over prize or bonus prize presentation is restricted by an error notification, there is a possibility that it will actually reduce the interest in the game. In this case, the count-up presentation (the large prize slot count-up presentation and the general prize slot count-up presentation) is also executed. However, if an over prize or bonus prize occurs when the gaming machine is in the third error state, prize balls will not be paid out based on the over prize or bonus prize.

In this embodiment, when an over win or bonus win occurs while the gaming machine is in a "specific error", some or all of the over win effects are restricted according to the type of error that has occurred, and some or all of the bonus win effects are restricted. In other words, when the first error among the specific errors occurs, the execution of one or some of the element effects (over win sound output effect) of the over win effects is restricted, and when the second error occurs, the execution of multiple or all of the element effects (over win sound output effect, over win image display effect, etc.) of the over win effects is restricted. This is because, in this embodiment, among the specific errors, the second error is an error type that has a relatively higher priority (importance) than the first error. The specific error may be an error type that prohibits the progress of the game. The specific error may also be an error type that occurs when an abnormality suspected of cheating (cheating) is detected. The specific error may also be an error type that is resolved by cutting off and re-turning the power.

In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, by setting the priority of the error notification effect higher than the over winning effect, for example, the error notification sound may be output preferentially over the over winning sound (for example, the sound level of the error notification sound may be set higher than that of the over winning sound), and the error notification image may be displayed preferentially over the over winning image (for example, the layer priority of the error notification image may be set higher than that of the over winning image).

<Over-winning performance at the end of the jackpot>
FIG. 68 is a time chart for explaining whether or not the over winning performance is performed at the end of the big win. A detection effective period (big winning port effective period) in which the detection of the game ball by the big winning port switch P541 is effective is set for each round game. This detection effective period is set in consideration of the time required for the game ball that entered just before the big winning port P54 is closed to reach the big winning port switch P541. In this embodiment, the detection effective period of the big winning port switch P541 is set across the entire period from the start to the end of each round game (from the opening to the closing of the big winning port P54) and the interval period from the end of the round game to the passage of a predetermined time (from the closing of the big winning port P54). By setting this detection valid period from the round period to the interval period, even if a game ball is detected by the large prize opening switch P541 during the interval period after the round period ends, the entry of the game ball into the large prize opening P54 is treated as valid (the game ball is subject to payout). In other words, the "round game execution period (large prize opening opening period)" and the above-mentioned "detection grace period (interval period)" are set as a continuous detection valid period. Also, as described above, the interval period and the detection grace period may be different periods.

In this embodiment, the period within the interval is set as an over prize performance allowable period during which execution of the over prize performance is permitted when the execution timing of the over prize performance arrives. On the other hand, the period outside the interval is set as an over prize performance prohibited period during which execution of the over prize performance is prohibited even if the execution timing of the over prize performance arrives.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(A), if the large prize opening switch P541 detects a game ball that exceeds the specified count number (in the illustrated example, the 11th game ball) during the interval period after the end of the final round of play, when the timing for executing the over prize production arrives during this interval period, the over prize production is permitted to be executed during this interval period. However, if the performance time of the over prize production (for example, 0.5 seconds) is longer than the time from the start timing of the execution of the over prize production to the end timing of the interval period, it is not possible to execute all of the over prize production by the end of the interval period, so it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the over prize production at the end timing of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. However, if the over prize production includes an over prize image and an over prize sound, the over prize image may be interrupted (not displayed or erased halfway through), and the over prize sound may be output without interruption. Also, like the over-winning effect, the large winning slot count-up effect may be executed in response to an over-winning within the interval period. In that case, if the time from the start of the large winning slot count-up effect execution to the end of the interval period is longer than the time from the end of the interval period, it is not possible to execute all of the large winning slot count-up effect by the end of the interval period, so it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the large winning slot count-up effect at the end of the interval period based on the end of the interval period.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 68(B), even if the big prize opening switch P541 detects a game ball that exceeds the specified count number (the 11th game ball in the illustrated example) within the interval period after the end of the final round of play, when the timing for executing the over prize effect arrives within the big prize end demo period after the lapse of this interval period, the execution of the over prize effect during this big prize end demo period is prohibited. However, during the big prize end demo period, only the execution of the over prize effect is prohibited, and prize balls based on this over prize are still paid out. Also, in the above case, the execution of the big prize opening count-up effect may also be prohibited, just like the over prize effect.

As a modified example of this embodiment, the jackpot end demo period may be set as an over-winning performance allowable period in which the execution of the over-winning performance is permitted, and the over-winning performance may be executed during the execution of the jackpot end demo. In this case, it is desirable to set only the first predetermined time of the jackpot end demo period as the over-winning performance allowable period. As an example, only the first 5 seconds of the 20 seconds of the jackpot end demo period may be set as the over-winning performance allowable period, and the following 15 seconds may be set as the over-winning performance prohibited period. As a further modified example, the over-winning performance allowable period and the over-winning performance prohibited period may be set within the interval period after the final round. For example, the first 1.5 seconds of the 2 seconds interval period may be set as the over-winning performance allowable period, and the following 0.5 seconds may be set as the over-winning performance prohibited period, and the following jackpot end demo period may also be set as the over-winning performance prohibited period. In addition, as a further modified example, considering that the timing when the big prize opening switch P541 detects a game ball exceeding the specified count number and the timing when the over prize effect is executed are synchronized, if the big prize opening switch P541 detects a game ball exceeding the specified count number within the interval period after the end of the final round of play, the over prize effect is always executed (excluding balls entering at the end of the interval period), and when it is executed, as described above, if the performance time of the over prize effect is longer than the time from the start of the execution of the over prize effect to the end of the interval period, the over prize effect is forcibly interrupted at the end of the interval period based on the end of the interval period (however, if the over prize effect includes an over prize image and an over prize sound, the over prize image may be interrupted (not displayed or erased halfway through), and the over prize sound may be output without interruption), and the over prize effect may be forcibly interrupted at the end of the big win end demo period. During the jackpot end demo period, if a game ball is detected in the large prize opening P54 (if a game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected by the large prize opening switch P541), the over-entry effect may be configured not to be executed. In this case, the large prize opening count-up effect is also executed whenever a game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected by the large prize opening switch P541 within the interval period after the end of the final round of play (excluding balls entering at the end of the interval period). When the large prize opening count-up effect is executed, as described above, if the performance time of the large prize opening count-up effect is longer than the time from the start of the execution of the large prize opening count-up effect to the end of the interval period, the large prize opening count-up effect may be forcibly interrupted at the end of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. If a game ball is detected in the large prize opening P54 during the jackpot end demo period (if a game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected by the large prize opening switch P541), the large prize opening count-up effect may be configured not to be executed.

<<Bonus prize performance at the end of the big win>>
69 is a time chart for explaining whether or not bonus winning performance is performed at the end of the big win. In this embodiment, the period of the round period and the period of the interval period are set as bonus winning performance allowable periods in which the bonus winning performance is allowed to be performed when the bonus winning performance execution timing arrives. On the other hand, the period of the demo period at the end of the big win is set as a bonus winning performance prohibition period in which the bonus winning performance is prohibited from being performed even if the bonus winning performance execution timing arrives.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69(A), when a game ball is detected by the right general winning port switch P641 during the interval period after the end of the final round of play, if the timing for executing the bonus winning performance arrives during this interval period, the bonus winning performance is permitted to be executed during this interval period. However, if the performance time of the bonus winning performance (for example, 0.5 seconds) is longer than the time from the start timing of the bonus winning performance to the end timing of the interval period, it is not possible to execute all of the bonus winning performance by the end of the interval period, so it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the bonus winning performance at the end timing of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. However, if the bonus winning performance includes a bonus winning image and a bonus winning sound, the bonus winning image may be interrupted (not displayed or erased halfway through), and the bonus winning sound may be output without interruption. Also, like the bonus prize winning effect, the large prize winning port count-up effect may be executed in response to a bonus prize winning within the interval period. In that case, if the time from the start of the large prize winning port count-up effect execution to the end of the interval period is longer than the time from the end of the interval period, it is not possible to execute all of the large prize winning port count-up effect by the end of the interval period, so it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the large prize winning port count-up effect at the end of the interval period based on the end of the interval period.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69(B), even if a game ball is detected by the right general prize opening switch P641 within the interval period after the end of the final round of play, if the timing for executing the bonus prize winning effect arrives within the jackpot end demo period after the interval period has elapsed, the execution of the bonus prize winning effect during this jackpot end demo period will be prohibited. However, during the jackpot end demo period, only the execution of the bonus prize winning effect is prohibited, and prize balls based on this bonus prize will still be paid out. Also, in the above case, the execution of the bonus prize winning effect may also be prohibited, just like the bonus prize winning effect.

As a modified example of this embodiment, the jackpot end demo period may be set as a bonus winning performance allowable period in which the bonus winning performance is allowed, and the bonus winning performance may be executed during the jackpot end demo. In that case, it is desirable to set only the first predetermined time of the jackpot end demo period as the bonus winning performance allowable period. As an example, only the first 5 seconds of the 20 seconds of the jackpot end demo period may be set as the bonus winning performance allowable period, and the following 15 seconds may be set as the bonus winning performance prohibited period. As a further modified example, a bonus winning performance allowable period and a bonus winning performance prohibited period may be set within the interval period after the final round. For example, the first 1.5 seconds of the 2 second interval period may be set as the bonus winning performance allowable period, and the following 0.5 seconds may be set as the bonus winning performance prohibited period, and the following jackpot end demo period may also be set as the bonus winning performance prohibited period. In addition, as a further modified example, considering that the timing when the game ball is detected by the right general winning port switch P641 is synchronized with the timing when the bonus winning effect is executed, if a game ball is detected by the right general winning port switch P641 within the interval period after the end of the final round of play, the bonus winning effect is always executed (excluding balls entering at the end of the interval period), and when it is executed, as described above, if the performance time of the bonus winning effect is longer than the time from the start of the bonus winning effect to the end of the interval period, the bonus winning effect is forcibly interrupted at the end of the interval period based on the end of the interval period (however, if the bonus winning effect includes a bonus winning image and a bonus winning sound, the bonus winning image may be interrupted (not displayed or erased halfway through), and the bonus winning sound may be output without interruption), and the right winning effect may be forcibly interrupted at the end of the jackpot end demo period. If a game ball is detected in the general winning port P64 (if a game ball is detected by the right general winning port switch P641), the bonus winning effect may be configured not to be executed. In this case, the general winning port count-up effect is also executed whenever a game ball is detected by the right general winning port switch P641 within the interval period after the end of the final round of play (excluding balls entering at the end of the interval period). When executing the general winning port count-up effect, as described above, if the time from the start of the execution of the general winning port count-up effect to the end of the interval period is longer than the performance time of the general winning port count-up effect, the general winning port count-up effect may be forcibly interrupted at the end of the interval period based on the end of the interval period, and if a game ball is detected in the right general winning port P64 during the jackpot end demo period (if a game ball is detected by the right general winning port switch P641), it may be configured not to be executed.

On the other hand, during the jackpot start demo period, theoretically, the game ball will not enter the large prize entry port P54 (because over entry will not occur), so the large prize entry port entry performance (over entry performance) will not be executed during the jackpot start demo period. Even during the jackpot start demo period, it is possible for a ball to enter the general prize entry port P64, but even if a ball enters the general prize entry port P64, the general prize entry port entry performance (bonus prize entry performance) will not be executed during the jackpot start demo period. Furthermore, if the ball enters during the jackpot start demo period, no matter when the ball enters (especially if the ball enters at the end of the jackpot start demo period), the general prize entry port entry performance (bonus prize entry performance) corresponding to that ball will not be executed in the first round of play after the jackpot start demo ends, and furthermore, the prize ball (number of prize balls) corresponding to that ball is not subject to accumulation in the cumulative prize ball number display.

(Launch handle detection)
A game using this gaming machine PM is executed on the premise that a player rotates the launch handle P12 to launch a game ball toward the game area PA. The launch handle P12 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) that detects that the player is touching the launch handle P12. The touch sensor is composed of a proximity switch or the like that detects a change in capacitance caused by the player touching the launch handle P12. When the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the launch handle P12, it outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 300 to permit the energization of the launch solenoid. In addition, the main control board P100 monitors the touch state of the launch handle based on the detection signal from the touch sensor, and periodically transmits a presentation control command (handle state presentation command) to the presentation control board P200. As a result, the presentation control board P200 identifies whether the player is touching the launch handle P12 (whether the launch handle P12 is being operated).

Figure 70 is a time chart showing the relationship between the detection state of the touch sensor and the over winning effect and the general winning effect. Even if the touch sensor does not detect that the player is touching the launch handle P12 (when the launch of the game ball is stopped), the performance control means P220 executes the over winning effect when a game ball that was previously launched enters the large winning port P54 and a game ball that exceeds the specified count number (the 11th game ball in the illustrated example) is detected (when an over winning occurs). Similarly, even if the touch sensor does not detect that the player is touching the launch handle P12 (when the launch of the game ball is stopped), the performance control means P220 executes the bonus winning effect when a game ball that was previously launched enters the general winning port P64 and a game ball is detected by the right general winning port switch P641 (when a bonus winning occurs). In other words, the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed regardless of the detection result of the touch sensor at the timing of the over winning and the bonus winning. Therefore, even if the player's firing of game balls is stopped by closing the large prize opening P54 (ending the round of play), if an over prize or bonus prize occurs within that interval period, an over prize or bonus prize presentation will be generated, preventing the player from feeling dissatisfied or distrustful that no prize presentation is generated even though the game ball actually entered the large prize opening P54 or general prize opening P64.

(Game start preparation performance)
In this embodiment, when the currently executed game state is a normal game state (non-special game state), a standby demo performance (a demo performance waiting for customers) is executed when the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or more. "The game is interrupted for a predetermined time or more" means, for example, a period in which there are no special symbol activation reserved balls for a predetermined time or more, a period in which the special symbol variable display is not performed for a predetermined time or more, a period in which the game ball does not enter or pass through a specific winning hole for a predetermined time or more, a period in which the game ball is not shot for a predetermined time or more, etc. The end condition of this standby demo performance is when the interruption state of the game is released (when the game is started or resumed), and corresponds to, for example, when the touch sensor detects that the player touches the launch handle P12 (operates the launch handle P12) or when a ball enters a specific winning hole, the first starting hole P51 or the second starting hole P52, but does not correspond to the passage of a game ball through the operation gate P53 or the entry of a ball into the general winning holes P61 to P64 (the standby demo performance does not end even if a game ball passes through the operation gate P53 or enters the general winning holes P61 to P64). Also, during the standby demo performance, the volume is zero, that is, the sound is muted, or the sound volume is lower than when the standby demo performance is not in progress (when the game is in progress), but it is possible to display a volume adjustment screen described later, and the standby demo performance is configured not to end even if the volume is adjusted. In other words, since there is no need to perform more effects than necessary when gameplay is interrupted, the sound is muted or the volume is reduced, but even in this state, the standby demo performance is maintained (indicating that gameplay is interrupted), and the volume related to the performance after the standby demo performance ends (while gameplay is in progress, i.e., while the patterns are changing) is visualized and can be adjusted even during the standby demo performance.

71 is a time chart showing the relationship between the game state in which the game start preparation performance is executed and the game state in which the over winning performance and the bonus winning performance are executed. The performance control means P220 ends the execution of the standby demo performance when the touch sensor detects the touch of the player during the execution of the standby demo performance (when the handle state performance command is received from the main control board P100), and starts the execution of the game start preparation performance (launch detection performance). The game start preparation performance is, for example, a performance that gives the feeling that the game has started or resumed by displaying the word "Come on" on the screen or outputting the sound "Come on" from the speaker P11 (performance that welcomes the game). This game start preparation performance is a performance that is performed immediately after the standby demo performance is finished, and is performed when the game state is a normal game state (non-special game state) like this standby demo performance.

In this embodiment, in a game state where a game start preparation effect can be performed (non-special game state), an over prize effect or bonus prize effect is not executed, and in a game state where an over prize effect or bonus prize effect can be performed (special game state), a game start preparation effect is not executed. In other words, a game start preparation effect and an over prize effect or bonus prize effect are not executed in the same game state, and naturally, they are not executed at the same time.

(Sound notification when power is restored after a power outage)
In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs during the execution of a special game, a power recovery notification effect is executed to notify the fact that the power has been restored from the power outage when the power is restored from the power outage. This power outage recovery notification effect is, for example, an effect in which an image (power recovery notification image) indicating that the power has been restored is displayed, and a sound (power recovery notification sound) indicating that the power has been restored is output from the speaker P11. The image indicating that the power has been restored is referred to as a power recovery notification image, a power outage recovery image, or a power outage recovery screen, and the sound indicating that the power has been restored from the speaker P11 is referred to as a power recovery notification sound or a power outage recovery sound. In this embodiment, the execution time of the power recovery effect (output time of the power recovery notification sound) is set to "30 seconds", which is longer than the maximum time of "29 seconds" for one round game (long open round game). For example, if a power outage occurs during a predetermined round of play and the power is restored in the middle of the predetermined round of play (if the game is resumed in the middle of the predetermined round of play), the power outage recovery sound is output at least for the remaining time of the round of play, so that the player can be sure that the round of play has been resumed. Here, if the power outage recovery sound and the big win performance sound compete with each other, it is preferable to prioritize the power outage recovery sound over the big win performance sound (for example, output the power outage recovery sound at a louder sound level than the big win performance sound, or stop outputting the big win performance sound). In addition, when the power outage recovery sound is output, even if an over win occurs in the restarted round of play, the power outage recovery sound may be configured to be prioritized over the over win sound (for example, output the power outage recovery sound at a louder sound level than the over win sound, or stop outputting the over win sound). Also, in order to make it possible to recognize that a jackpot is occurring, it is desirable to configure the display time of the image (power return notification image) indicating that the power has been restored to be shorter than the output time of the sound (power return notification sound) indicating that the power has been restored, and for example, it is desirable to set the display time of the image (power return notification image) indicating that the power has been restored to 15 seconds and the output time of the sound (power return notification sound) indicating that the power has been restored to 30 seconds. Also, when the image (power return notification image) indicating that the power has been restored is displayed, the effects during a jackpot are not displayed, so the cumulative number of winning balls display, highlight display, over winning image, and bonus winning image are not displayed. In addition, when the power is restored after a power outage, the presentation information regarding the cumulative prize ball value that was held before the power outage is erased, so when the display of the image indicating that power has been restored when the power was restored (power return notification image) ends and the presentation during the jackpot is displayed, the cumulative prize ball count display will start again from zero ("0"), and the display conditions for the highlighting (the conditions for reaching a specific value) will be reset. Therefore, even if the cumulative prize ball count display before the power outage was in a situation where a specific value would be reached with one more ball entering the large prize slot P54 (for example, 9999 just short of 10,000), during a jackpot after a power outage and subsequent restoration of the power, the cumulative prize ball count display will be zero, so even if one ball enters the large prize slot P54 in this situation, the highlighting will not be displayed. In addition, when the display of the image (power return notification image) indicating that the power has been restored after a power outage ends and the effects during a jackpot are displayed, if a ball enters the large prize winning port P54 or the general prize winning port P64 while the image (power return notification image) indicating that the power has been restored is being displayed, the prize balls corresponding to the ball that entered will be paid out. However, while the image (power return notification image) indicating that the power has been restored is being displayed, the over prize winning image, the bonus prize winning image, the cumulative number of prize balls, and the count-up effect (large prize winning port count-up effect, general prize winning port count-up effect) will not be displayed. etc., are not performed, and in this case, (1) even when the display of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) has ended and the jackpot performance has been restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display may start from zero, or (2) when the display of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) has ended and the jackpot performance has been restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display may be a cumulative number of prize balls display added with the numerical value for the prize balls paid out corresponding to balls entering the large prize opening P54 and the general prize opening P64 while the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is being displayed. In addition, if a power outage occurs when a count-up effect (big prize opening count-up effect, general prize opening count-up effect) is being performed before the power outage and has not yet ended, and the payout of prize balls corresponding to the count-up effect is also being performed and has not yet been completed (for example, when the count-up effect and payout of 300 prize balls is in the middle of being performed), the remaining count-up effect that was being performed before the power outage will not be performed after the power is restored, but the prize balls that have not yet been paid out will be paid out. Note that the above-mentioned power outage recovery (power recovery) is a power outage recovery that does not involve RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch), and when the power outage recovery involves RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch), the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability low base state) and returns to a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed stopped in the combination "331".

(Right hit notification image)
During the execution of the special game, as shown in FIG. 59 above, a right-hit notification image is displayed in the right-hit display area P731 of the screen, which urges the player to hit the ball to the right (to fire the game ball at the right-side area PA2). In addition, an over-winning image is displayed in the first prize ball acquisition display area P732A of the screen when an over-winning occurs. The right-hit display area P731 and the first prize ball acquisition display area P732A are provided as different display areas, and the right-hit notification image and the over-winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. In addition, during the execution of the special game, a bonus winning image is displayed in the second prize ball acquisition display area P732B of the screen when a bonus winning occurs. The right-hit display area P731 and the second prize ball acquisition display area P732B are provided as different display areas, and the right-hit notification image and the bonus winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Therefore, if an over win or bonus win occurs during the execution of a special game, the over win image or bonus win image will not overlap with the right-hit notification image, and one piece of information will not obscure the other.

(Volume adjustment screen)
FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram showing a volume adjustment screen of this embodiment. In this embodiment, when the player simultaneously operates the left and right keys of the cross key during the execution of a special game, volume adjustment images showing multiple volume levels are displayed side by side in the volume adjustment image display area P736 of the screen. The volume adjustment image shows the current volume level, and in the illustrated example, the display mode is adjusted to the third volume level corresponding to the current volume level. Then, by the player operating the left or right key, it becomes possible to adjust the output level (volume level) of sounds such as BGM and sound effects output from the speaker P11. Specifically, while the volume adjustment image is displayed, operating the right key increases the volume level, and operating the left key decreases the volume level.

In this embodiment, the player can adjust the volume of the speaker P11 by operating the left and right keys regardless of whether a special game is being played or not, and more specifically, whether an over-winning performance is being played (a situation in which an over-winning sound is being output) or a bonus winning performance is being played (a situation in which a bonus winning sound is being output). Therefore, if the player adjusts the volume during the over-winning performance (a situation in which an over-winning sound is being output) or during the bonus winning performance (a situation in which a bonus winning sound is being output), the adjusted volume level will change in real time as the volume level of the over-winning sound or bonus winning sound currently being output. In other words, by performing a volume adjustment operation by the player, the volume of the over-winning sound or bonus winning sound is changed midway, making it possible to make the volume of the over-winning sound or bonus winning sound different before and after the volume adjustment operation. In addition, the audio image display area P736 and the first prize ball acquisition display area P732A are provided as different display areas, and the audio adjustment image and the over winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Similarly, the audio image display area P736 and the second prize ball acquisition display area P732B are provided as different display areas, and the audio adjustment image and the bonus winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Therefore, if an over winning or a bonus winning occurs during the execution of a special game, the over winning image or the bonus winning image does not overlap with the volume adjustment image, and one information does not hide the other information. The highlighting and the volume adjustment screen are displayed superimposed when executed simultaneously, but the volume adjustment screen has a higher display priority, and when they are displayed superimposed, the volume adjustment screen is displayed in front of the highlighting (part or all of the highlighting is displayed hidden by the volume adjustment screen).

<Conditions for excess winning errors at general winning slots>
The "error occurrence condition" is a condition for determining that an error has occurred in the gaming machine. In this embodiment, when the main control board P100 determines that a predetermined error occurrence condition has been established, the main control board P100 transmits a predetermined performance control command (error performance designation command) to the performance control board P200, and the performance control board P200 performs an error notification performance.

Below, the excessive winning error occurrence condition for the general prize winning ports P61 to P64 will be described as one of the multiple error occurrence conditions. In this embodiment, among the multiple general prize winning ports P61 to P64, the excessive winning error occurrence condition for the general prize winning ports P61 to P63 and the excessive winning error occurrence condition for the general prize winning port P64 are set to different conditions.

The condition for an excessive winning error occurring at the general winning ports P61 to P63 is met when the number of game balls entering the general winning ports P61 to P63 within a unit time (30 seconds) (the number of game balls detected by the left general winning port switch P611) reaches a first specified number. The first specified number is set to "30 balls", for example. In other words, when 30 game balls enter the general winning ports P61 to P63 within 30 seconds, the condition for an excessive winning error occurring at the general winning ports P61 to P63 is met.

The condition for an excessive winning error at the general winning port P64 is met when the number of winning balls entering the general winning port P64 within a unit time (30 seconds) (the number of winning balls detected by the right general winning port switch P641) reaches a second specified number. The second specified number is set to "60 balls", for example. In other words, when 60 game balls enter the general winning port P64 within 30 seconds, the condition for an excessive winning error at the general winning port P64 is met.

As a modification of this embodiment, the excess winning error occurrence condition of the general winning openings P61 to P64 may be set according to the type of game state currently being executed. For example, in a game state (normal game state) in which the variable display of the first special symbol is the main focus of the game, the ball entry frequency per unit time should be relatively higher in the general winning openings P61 to P63 than in the general winning opening P64, so the excess winning error occurrence condition of the general winning openings P61 to P63 is set to have a higher threshold value for the condition establishment than the excess winning error occurrence condition of the general winning opening P64. In that case, even if a game ball enters the general winning openings P61 to P63 under a predetermined condition (a predetermined ball entry frequency), the excess winning error condition is not established, but if a game ball enters the general winning opening P64 under a predetermined condition (a predetermined ball entry frequency), an excess winning error will occur. On the other hand, in a game state (probability game state, time-saving game state) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main focus, the ball entry frequency per unit time should be relatively higher in the general winning port P64 than in the general winning port P61 to P63, so the threshold for the condition establishment is set to be higher for the excess winning error occurrence condition of the general winning port P64 than for the excess winning error occurrence condition of the general winning port P61 to P63. In that case, even if a game ball enters the general winning port P64 under specific conditions (specific ball entry frequency), an excess winning error does not occur, but if a game ball enters the general winning port P61 to P64 under specific conditions (specific ball entry frequency), an excess winning error will occur.

Even if the excess winning error occurrence condition for the general winning slots P61-P63 and the excess winning error occurrence condition for the general winning slot P64 are set to different conditions, it is preferable to set the excess winning error release condition for the general winning slots P61-P63 and the excess winning error release condition for the right general winning slot P64 to the same condition. Examples of error release conditions include conditions under which the error notification presentation ends (for example, 30 seconds have passed since the error notification screen was displayed/error notification sound began), conditions under which the on output of the outer end signal related to the excess winning error is stopped (conditions under which the output becomes off, for example, 300 seconds have passed since the output began), and power is turned off and then restored.

<Overlap and bonus prizes>
FIG. 73 is a time chart for explaining the overlapping execution of the over prize production and the bonus prize production. In this embodiment, when the over prize production and the bonus prize production occur at approximately the same timing, the over prize production and the bonus prize production are configured to be overlappingly executed. The overlapping execution of the over prize production and the bonus prize production means that the execution period (or execution timing) of the over prize production and the execution period (or execution timing) of the bonus prize production overlap, and includes the case where the execution periods of both productions overlap in their entirety and the case where the execution periods of both productions overlap in part. The illustrated example shows a case where the execution period of the over prize production and the execution period of the bonus prize production overlap in part. In addition, when the over prize winning effect and the bonus prize winning effect are executed in a overlapping manner, the first prize ball acquisition display area P732A in which the over prize winning image is displayed and the second prize ball acquisition display area P732B in which the bonus prize winning image is displayed are provided as separate and independent display areas, so that the over prize winning image and the bonus prize winning image are not displayed one behind the other. On the other hand, the over prize winning sound and the bonus prize winning sound may be output in an overlapping manner, or only one of them may be output. If the specification is such that only one of the sounds is output, the earlier winning may be given priority (i.e., if the earlier winning is a winning at the large prize port P54 and the later winning is a winning at the general prize port P64, the over winning sound is given priority, and if the earlier winning is a winning at the general prize port P64 and the later winning is a winning at the large prize port P54, the bonus winning sound is given priority), or the later winning may be given priority (i.e., if the earlier winning is a winning at the large prize port P54 and the later winning is a winning at the general prize port P64, the bonus winning sound is given priority, and if the earlier winning is a winning at the general prize port P64 and the later winning is a winning at the large prize port P54, the over winning sound is given priority). When the earlier win is given priority, for example, if a later win occurs while the winning sound for the earlier win is being output, the winning sound for the later win may be output after the winning sound for the earlier win is completely output, or the winning sound for the later win may not be output at all. When the later win is given priority, for example, if a later win occurs while the winning sound for the earlier win is being output, the winning sound for the earlier win may be interrupted at the opportunity of the later win, and the winning sound for the later win may then be output.

As a variation of this embodiment, if an over prize and a bonus prize occur at approximately the same time, the over prize image and the bonus prize image may be configured not to overlap. In other words, if an over prize and a bonus prize occur at approximately the same time, the display period (or display timing) of the over prize image and the display period (or display timing) of the bonus prize image may not overlap. In this case, this includes cases where the display periods of both images do not overlap in their entirety and cases where only a portion of the display periods of both images do not overlap.

When the over winning image and the bonus winning image are not displayed overlapping, the bonus winning image or the over winning image that won first (the image in which the ball was detected entering first) may be displayed preferentially. Alternatively, in the opposite configuration, when the over winning image and the bonus winning image are not displayed overlapping, the bonus winning image or the over winning image that won last (the image in which the ball was detected entering last) may be displayed preferentially.

(Multiple Over Wins)
FIG. 74 is a time chart in the case where over winning and bonus winning occur multiple times within a predetermined period. In this embodiment, when over winning occurs multiple times within a predetermined period (interval period in the illustrated example), the over winning performance is performed for the first over winning (the winning of the 11th game ball), but the over winning performance is not performed for the second or subsequent over winning (the winning of the 12th or subsequent game ball). In other words, when over winning occurs multiple times within a predetermined period, only the first over winning performance is allowed, and the second or subsequent over winning performance is restricted (regulated). However, the prize ball payout due to over winning is performed twice, and the large winning port count-up performance due to over winning is also performed twice (the first large winning port count-up performance is performed twice without interrupting). On the other hand, in this embodiment, if multiple bonus wins occur within a predetermined period (interval period in the illustrated example), a bonus win performance is performed for each bonus win, two bonus wins are awarded, and the general win slot count-up performance is performed twice (two performances are performed without interrupting the first general win slot count-up performance). In other words, if multiple bonus wins occur within a predetermined period, the execution of all multiple bonus win performances is permitted. As a modified example, when multiple over-winnings occur within a predetermined period, the over-winning performance is performed for the first over-winning (the winning of the 11th game ball), and the over-winning performance is also performed for the second and subsequent over-winnings (the winning of the 12th and subsequent game balls). On the other hand, when a second over-winning occurs during the execution of the first over-winning performance, (1) the execution of the second over-winning performance is started after the first over-winning performance is finished (completed), or (2) even if the first over-winning performance is in the middle, it may be interrupted by the second over-winning, and then the execution of the second over-winning performance may be started. In that case, in either case of (1) or (2), it is preferable that the prize ball payout due to the over-winning is performed twice, and the large winning port count-up performance due to the over-winning is also performed twice (the large winning port count-up performance is performed twice without interrupting the first large winning port count-up performance). Furthermore, when multiple bonus prizes are won within a predetermined period, the bonus prize performance is performed for the first bonus prize, and the bonus prize performance is performed for the second and subsequent bonus prizes. On the other hand, when the second and subsequent bonus prizes are won during the execution of the first bonus prize performance, (3) the execution of the second bonus prize performance is started after the first bonus prize performance is finished (after it is completely completed), or (4) even if the first bonus prize performance is in the middle, it may be interrupted by the second bonus prize, and then the execution of the second bonus prize performance may be started. In that case, in either case of (3) or (4), it is preferable that the prize ball payout due to the bonus prize is performed twice, and the general prize winning port count-up performance due to the bonus prize is also performed twice (the first general prize winning port count-up performance is performed twice without interrupting it).

<External information signal>
In this embodiment, the external information signals (outer end signals) that the external information terminal board P600 outputs as external information to an external device outside the machine include, for example, a winning ball signal, a jackpot signal, a winning streak signal, a pattern confirmation signal, a door frame opening signal, a security signal, a disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormal sensor detection signal (abnormal ball entry passing time, etc.) and the like.

Here, the external devices installed outside the gaming machine PM include a data display and a hall computer. The data display is installed on the top of the gaming machine PM and displays data (game information) related to the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on external information signals output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on this data display is useful information for the player when selecting a gaming machine. The hall computer is a device that compiles the operating state of each gaming machine (including this gaming machine PM) based on external information signals output from each gaming machine installed in the hall of the gaming establishment, and manages the operating status of each gaming machine. This hall computer may be electrically connected to this gaming machine PM via a data display, or may be electrically connected to this gaming machine PM without via a data display.

(Winning ball signal)
The prize ball signal is an external information signal that is output for a predetermined time each time a predetermined number of game balls ("10" in this embodiment) are paid out from the gaming machine. That is, in this embodiment, the prize ball signal is output continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) each time 10 prize balls are paid out. In this embodiment, a prize ball number counter that counts the number of game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit P34 is provided, and "1" is added to the prize ball number counter each time one game ball is detected by the payout detection switch provided in the prize ball payout unit P34. Then, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number "10", a prize ball signal is output from the external information terminal board P600. Note that when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number "10", the count value returns to the initial value "0" (i.e., it is counted from the initial value "0").

Figure 75 is a time chart of the prize ball signal when a game ball enters the general winning port P64. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) awarded based on one game ball entering the general winning port P64 is "3". Therefore, when the right general winning port switch P641 detects the entry of a game ball, three game balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit P34, and "3" is added to the value of the prize ball number counter. At this time, as shown in (A) in the figure, if the value of the prize ball number counter before the addition is in the range of "0" to "6" (corresponding to "0" in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition will not reach the specified number, and the prize ball signal will not be output. On the other hand, as shown in (B) in the figure, when the value of the prize ball counter before the increment is in the range of "7" to "9" (corresponding to "7" in the illustrated example), the prize ball signal is output once when the value of the prize ball counter after the increment reaches the predetermined number once. Therefore, in this embodiment, when one game ball enters the general winning port P64 (when the general winning port normal winning performance is executed once), there are cases where the prize ball signal is not output once, and cases where the prize ball signal is output once. Note that in the above explanation, the general winning port P64 is used as an example out of the multiple general winning ports P61 to P64, but the same can be said for the general winning ports P61 to P63.

FIG. 76 is a time chart of the prize ball signal when a game ball enters the large prize opening P54. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) awarded based on one game ball entering the large prize opening P54 is "15". Therefore, when the large prize opening switch P541 detects the entry of a game ball, 15 game balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit P34, and "15" is added to the value of the prize ball number counter. At this time, if the value of the prize ball number counter before the addition is in the range of "0" to "4" (corresponding to "0" in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition reaches a predetermined number once, and a prize ball signal is output once. On the other hand, if the value of the prize ball number counter before the addition is in the range of "5" to "9" (corresponding to "5" in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition reaches a predetermined number twice, and a prize ball signal is output twice. Therefore, in this embodiment, when one game ball enters the large prize opening P54 (when a normal large prize opening winning performance or a large prize opening over winning performance is executed once), a prize ball signal may be output once or a prize ball signal may be output twice.

<Relationship with other big win effects>
Next, the relationship between the winning-related effects (big winning hole winning effects, general winning hole winning effects) and other big win effects will be explained. Below, (C) reserved consecutive suggestion effects, (D) promotion effects, and (E) special effects will be exemplified as other big win effects.

≪C. Hold consecutive suggestion performance≫
The reserved consecutive winning indication effect is an effect that indicates that a consecutive winning streak has been established in the reserved ball during the execution of the special game (there is a jackpot reserved ball). As described above, the "reserved consecutive winning streak" refers to a case where, when a result of a hit/miss judgment of a special symbol performed by consuming a certain preceding activated reserved ball is a jackpot, one or more subsequent activated reserved balls that exist at a predetermined timing between the time when the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol related to the activated reserved ball is permitted and the time when the special game executed as a trigger of the hit is ended, the activated reserved ball (also called a "jackpot reserved ball") that is expected to be a jackpot is included. In this embodiment, when the game state at the time of the occurrence of a jackpot that triggers the execution of the currently executed special game is a specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the end of the special game is also a specific game state (high base state), that is, when a consecutive winning streak is continuing, if there is a jackpot reserved ball in the reserved ball, the reserved consecutive winning indication effect is executed in the currently executed special game. Conversely, if the game state at the time of the occurrence of a jackpot that triggers the execution of the currently running special game is a normal game state (low base state), even if there is a jackpot reserved in the reserve, the reserved consecutive suggestion performance will not be executed in the currently running special game. In addition, it is preferable that the currently running special game is based on the hit/miss judgment result related to the second special symbol, and further, it is preferable that the reserved jackpot in the reserve is also a reserve related to the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the timing for executing the reserved consecutive suggestion effect is set to the jackpot end demo period, as shown in Figures 54 and 56. Whether or not to execute the reserved consecutive suggestion effect is determined at the start of special game execution, and is determined by lottery if the reserved consecutive suggestion effect execution conditions are met at the start of special game execution. As a variation, the reserved consecutive suggestion effect may be executed if the execution lottery held in response to the reserved consecutive suggestion effect execution conditions being met immediately before or at the start of the jackpot end demo is won.

The condition for executing the reserved consecutive indication effect is established when the type of reserved jackpot that triggered the execution of the currently executing special game is a high profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot), and the activated reserved ball of one or more special patterns contains a reserved jackpot that is a high profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot). In other words, even if a reserved jackpot exists in the activated reserved ball of a special pattern, if the type of reserved jackpot related to that reserved jackpot is not a high profit jackpot (if it is a 4R specific jackpot or a 4R normal jackpot), the reserved consecutive indication effect will not be executed. Furthermore, in a situation where there are multiple reserved jackpots in the activated reserved ball of a special pattern, if the type of reserved jackpot related to the first reserved jackpot is a low profit jackpot and the type of reserved jackpot related to the second reserved jackpot is a high profit jackpot,
The reserved consecutive suggestion effect is not executed in the currently executed special game. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the reserved consecutive suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the special game, not only is it certain that a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) will occur in the variable display within a predetermined number of times (4 spins) after the end of the special game, but it is also certain that the next special game after the reserved consecutive suggestion effect is not a low profit jackpot (4R specific jackpot or 4R normal jackpot). In addition, in this embodiment, a "special pattern 2 priority consumption method" is adopted in which the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern is consumed preferentially over the activated reserved ball of the first special pattern, and the activated reserved ball that is the target of the reserved consecutive ball is limited to the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern.

The reserved consecutive suggestion effect is executed during the demo period at the end of the jackpot, and is an effect in which a special image that does not appear in any other scene is displayed. Examples of this special image include an effect image made up of a still image, an effect image made up of a video, and an effect image made up of both a still image and a video.

In this embodiment, the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect can be executed only when the currently executed special game is a high-profit special game (16R special game). In other words, the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect can be executed only in the Choju jackpot effect as a performance pattern during a jackpot. On the other hand, the over prize winning effect and the bonus prize winning effect can be executed whether the currently executed special game is a high-profit special game (16R special game) or a low-profit special game (4R special game). In other words, the over prize winning effect and the bonus prize winning effect can be executed as a performance pattern during a jackpot in any of the Choju jackpot effect, the Kotobuki jackpot A effect, the Kotobuki jackpot B effect, the Ki jackpot A effect, and the Ki jackpot B effect.

In this embodiment, the over winning effect or bonus winning effect is not executed while the reserved consecutive winning suggestion effect is being executed. In other words, the execution period (execution timing) of the reserved consecutive winning suggestion effect does not overlap with the execution period (execution timing) of the over winning effect or bonus winning effect. In other words, the reserved consecutive winning suggestion effect is executed during the jackpot end demo period, whereas the over winning effect and bonus winning effect are not executed during the jackpot end demo period, but are executed during the interval period. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, the reserved consecutive winning suggestion effect and the over winning effect are not executed in an overlapping manner, and the reserved consecutive winning suggestion effect and the bonus winning effect are not executed in an overlapping manner, and the reserved consecutive winning suggestion effect and the over winning effect or bonus winning effect are executed independently. As a variation, the system may be configured to execute a reserved consecutive win suggestion effect during a round of play, in which case the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect and the over winning effect may be executed in overlap, or the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect and the bonus winning effect may be executed in overlap. In such a configuration, the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect may have a higher display priority (the over winning image or the bonus winning image may be displayed in the background or may not be displayed), and if a special sound effect occurs during the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect, this special sound effect may be output with priority (the volume of the over winning sound or the bonus winning sound may be reduced or not output).

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution time of the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect is set to be longer than the execution time of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect. Since the reserved consecutive win is a reward that is more profitable for the player than the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect, the execution time of the reserved consecutive win effect is set relatively long so that the player does not miss it.

In this embodiment, the reserved consecutive win performance is executed only as a "true performance" that definitely notifies the establishment of the reserved consecutive win, but as a modified example, it may include a "fake performance" in which the reserved consecutive win is not actually established. In this example, one of the execution conditions of the reserved consecutive win performance is that the preceding operation reserved ball is a jackpot reservation of a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot), but this is not limited to this, and the preceding operation reserved ball may be a jackpot reservation other than a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot), that is, a jackpot reservation corresponding to a low-profit jackpot (4R jackpot).

The display mode of the cumulative prize ball count display may be changed from a normal display mode (e.g., white display) to a special display mode (gold display) to suggest that consecutive wins have been achieved within the reserved balls. A consecutive win suggestion effect may also be performed at the timing of the execution of an emphasis effect (emphasis display) that is performed when the cumulative prize ball count value reaches a specific value. In that case, it is preferable to suggest that consecutive wins have been achieved within the reserved balls by the display mode of the emphasis effect.

<D. Promotion Production>
The promotion effect is an effect in which, when a jackpot occurs in the variable display of a special symbol, the profit mode related to the jackpot (for convenience, referred to as a "temporary profit mode") is suggested or notified before or at the start of the special game, and then whether the actual profit mode related to the jackpot during the execution of the special game is more profitable than the provisional profit mode. In other words, it is an effect that suggests whether the profit mode of the jackpot suggested before or at the start of the special game is true (the profit mode as it is) or false (high profit mode), and shows whether the profit mode of the jackpot will be promoted (changed) through this series of processes.

The types of promotion effects are broadly divided into round promotion effects and probability variable promotion effects. Round promotion effects are effects that suggest the possibility of round play continuing after the provisional number of rounds in a state in which it is uncertain whether the specified number of rounds (provisional specified number of rounds) of the special game suggested or notified at the time of the jackpot occurrence is the true number of rounds or the false number of rounds. These round promotion effects include those that simply suggest that rounds have been promoted, and those that suggest not only round promotion but also the true specified number of rounds or the long open round number. Probability variable promotion effects are effects that suggest the possibility of transitioning to a probability variable game state after the end of special play in a state in which it is uncertain whether the jackpot type (provisional jackpot type) suggested or notified at the time of the jackpot occurrence is the true jackpot type or the false jackpot type (state in which it is uncertain whether it is a specific jackpot or not). In this embodiment, when a promotion effect (round promotion effect, probability variable promotion effect) occurs during the execution of the special game, it is certain that promotion will be successful.

As shown in Figures 53 and 58, the probability change promotion effect is executed when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won in normal play mode, or when the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won in time-saving play mode or probability change play mode, and the "Happy jackpot B effect" is selected as the jackpot performance pattern. The execution timing of this probability change promotion effect is set during the jackpot end demo period. This probability change promotion effect is performed by dropping and moving the movable role P24 so that it overlaps with the screen, and then moving the movable role P24 upward again to display the title "Longevity jackpot" on the exposed screen, making it look as if the "Longevity jackpot effect" has been promoted to the "Longevity jackpot effect" (the jackpot type has been promoted from a 4R normal jackpot to a 4R specific jackpot).

As shown in Figures 53 and 56, the round promotion effect is executed when the "16 specific jackpot" of the second special pattern is won in the time-saving play state or the probability change play state, and the "Juju jackpot B effect" is selected as the jackpot effect pattern. The execution timing of this round promotion effect is set from the 4th round to the interval period of the 4th round. This round promotion effect displays the words "Final Round" (a fake display) on the screen once to make it look as if the currently executed round play is the final round play, then displays a cut-in image of the message "That can't be!" spoken by the main character of this machine, and then displays the title "Super Juju jackpot", making it look as if the "Juju jackpot effect" has been promoted to the "Super Juju jackpot effect" (the jackpot type has been promoted from a 4R specific jackpot to a 16R specific jackpot).

In this embodiment, the round promotion effect can only be executed when the currently executed special game is a "16R special game (high profit special game)," but the over prize effect and bonus prize effect can be executed when the currently executed special game is either a "16R special game (high profit special game)" or a "4R special game (low profit special game)."

In addition, in this embodiment, the over winning effect or bonus winning effect is not executed during the execution of the probability variable promotion effect. In other words, the execution period (execution timing) of the probability variable promotion effect and the execution period (execution timing) of the over winning effect or bonus winning effect do not overlap. In other words, the probability variable promotion effect is executed during the jackpot end demo period, whereas the over winning effect and bonus winning effect are not executed during the jackpot end demo period, but are executed during the interval period. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, the probability variable promotion effect and the over winning effect are not executed in an overlapping manner, and the probability variable promotion effect and the bonus winning effect are not executed in an overlapping manner, and the probability variable promotion effect and the over winning effect or bonus winning effect are executed independently. As a variant, it may be configured to execute a special bonus promotion effect during a round of play, in which case the special bonus promotion effect and the over prize effect may be executed in overlap, or the special bonus promotion effect and the bonus bonus effect may be executed in overlap. In such a configuration, the special bonus promotion effect may have a higher display priority (the over prize image or the bonus bonus image may be displayed in the background or may not be displayed), and if a special sound effect occurs during the special bonus promotion effect, this special sound effect may be output with priority (the volume of the over prize sound or the bonus bonus sound may be reduced or not output).

In addition, in this embodiment, the over prize winning effect or the bonus prize winning effect can be executed in overlap during the execution of the round promotion effect. In other words, since the round promotion effect is executed from the fourth round to the interval period of the fourth round, if an over prize winning or bonus prize winning occurs within the interval period, the execution period (execution timing) of the round promotion effect and the execution period (execution timing) of the over prize winning effect or the bonus prize winning effect can overlap. In addition, the round promotion effect can be configured to have a higher display priority (the over prize winning image or the bonus prize winning image is displayed in the background or is not displayed), and if a dedicated sound effect occurs during the round promotion effect, this dedicated sound effect is output preferentially (the volume of the over prize winning sound or the bonus prize winning sound is reduced or not output).

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution time of the round promotion effect is set to "31 seconds" from the start of the fourth round to the end of the interval period, and the execution time of the special rate promotion effect is set to "20 seconds" from the start of the jackpot end demo to its end. On the other hand, the execution times of the over prize winning effect and the bonus prize winning effect are each set to "0.5 seconds." Therefore, the execution time of the round promotion effect is set to be longer than the execution times of the over prize winning effect and the bonus prize winning effect. Also, the execution time of the special rate promotion effect is set to be longer than the execution times of the over prize winning effect and the bonus prize winning effect.

<E. Special Performance≫
The special effect is a rare effect that is executed when a predetermined consecutive win condition is met. The "predetermined consecutive win condition" refers to a specified number of consecutive wins (20 in this embodiment). ) and the type of the jackpot at least the specified number of times (the 20th in this embodiment) is the highest profit jackpot (16R special jackpot). This special effect appears during the special game (16R special game) that is triggered by the occurrence of the 20th big win. However, this special effect ends with the final round (16th round). However, the demo period after that is not included (however, it may include the interval period of the final round or may not include the interval period of the final round). In addition, this special performance is based on the rarity of this model. It is made up of a special movie in which highly premium characters are displayed in sequence, one cut at a time.

In addition, as a predetermined consecutive winning condition, in addition to the specified number of consecutive winnings, for example, the cumulative number of 16R specific jackpots in the consecutive winning state reaches a specified number (the 16R specific jackpots of the second special pattern are consecutively won a specified number of times), or the total number of rounds won or the cumulative number of winning balls in the consecutive winning state reaches a specified number, etc. may be added. Here, as described above, "consecutive winnings (consecutive winning state)" refers to a state in which, as a game state during a non-special game state, after the occurrence of the first win that triggers the transition from the non-special game state to the specific game state, the specific game state continues without returning to the non-special game state (a state in which jackpots occur consecutively in the specific game state from the first win). A "specific game state" is a game state in which the probability of transitioning to a special game is higher than in a normal game state, and in a broad sense, it is a game state in which any of the following functions is activated: the probability fluctuation function of the special pattern, the time reduction function of the special pattern, and the electric chute support function. In this embodiment, a specific game state refers to a game state in which at least the electric chute support function is activated, that is, a game state in which the main focus of the game is the changing display of the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the special effects can be executed only when the currently executed special game is a high-profit special game (16R special game). On the other hand, the over prize effect and the bonus prize effect can be executed whether the currently executed special game is a high-profit special game (16R special game) or a low-profit special game (4R special game).

In this embodiment, even if an over win or bonus win occurs while a special effect is being executed, the over win or bonus win effect is not executed. In other words, the execution period (execution timing) of the special effect and the execution period (execution timing) of the over win or bonus win effect do not overlap. The reason for this is that when a special effect competes with an over win or bonus win effect, prioritizing the execution of the rare special effect (display of a premium character that can only be seen in a special effect) results in a more satisfying result for the player.

As a modified example of this embodiment, if an over-winning or bonus winning occurs during the execution of a special effect, the over-winning or bonus winning effect may be configured to be executed in a duplicated manner. When a special effect and an over-winning or bonus winning effect are executed in a duplicated manner, it is preferable that the display priority (layer priority) of the special effect is set higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the over-winning or bonus winning effect. However, since the special effect is displayed large across the entire screen, whereas the over-winning and bonus winning effects are displayed small toward the edge of the screen, the display priority (layer priority) of the over-winning or bonus winning effect may be set higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the special effect.

In this embodiment, the execution time of the special effects is set to "499 seconds" from the start of the jackpot start demo to the end of the final round of play (16th round). On the other hand, the execution times of the over prize winning effects and the bonus prize winning effects are each set to "0.5 seconds." Therefore, the execution time of the special effects is set to be longer than the execution times of the over prize winning effects and the bonus prize winning effects.

In addition, if a power outage occurs during the execution of a special game (for example, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off due to a power outage, etc.), if an over prize or bonus prize occurs after the power is restored, the over prize or bonus prize performance will be executed after the power is restored. This is because the decision to execute the over prize or bonus prize performance is triggered by the over prize or bonus prize, that is, by an event after the power is restored from the power outage, and therefore it is possible to execute it. On the other hand, the power interruption recovery presentation control command sent from the main control board P100 after the power is restored does not include data for restoring the reserved consecutive suggestion presentation, promotion presentation, and special presentation, and since the RAMP203 of the presentation control board P200 does not have a power backup, if a power interruption occurs during the execution of a special game, even if the execution conditions of each presentation are met or an execution opportunity arrives at the time of the power interruption, the reserved consecutive suggestion presentation, promotion presentation, and special presentation, which determine whether or not to execute them at the start of the special game, will not be executed after the power is restored because there is no data regarding whether or not to execute those presentations after the power is restored. Note that the above-mentioned power interruption recovery (power restoration) is a power interruption recovery without RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), and in the case of a power interruption recovery with RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability low base state) and is restored in a state where the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the combination of "331".

<Processing on the main control board>
Next, the procedure of the operation processing in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 77 to 90. The processing on the main control board 100 side includes main control side main processing and main control side timer interrupt processing.

<Main control side main processing>
77 to 78 are flow charts showing the main control side main processing of the main control board 100. In this main control side main processing, after a security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by resetting when the power is turned on, the program starts and processing from S1 onwards commences.

First, as the initial settings required when powering on, the top address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S1), and access to RAM 103 is permitted (S2). Next, a vector table is set that stores the top address of the program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs (S3), and initial values are set in the built-in registers of main CPU 101 (S4).

Next, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is on or not (S5). If the RAM clear switch is on (S5: YES), the entire area of RAM 103 is cleared to zero in S9, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not on (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag is read to determine whether information on normal power-off is stored (S6).

Here, if the information of normal power off is stored (S6: YES), a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area of RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (S8). Note that the checksum calculated here at the time of power on contains the complement of the checksum calculated in the power off process described later, so if the backup is normal, the checksum at the time of power on will be "0". In this way, it is determined at the time of power on whether or not the information stored in RAM 103 before the power off is backed up correctly. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12 described later to return to the state before the power off. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, the initialization data at the time of power on is set in RAM 103 (S10). Next, a performance control command ("performance initial command") is requested from the performance control board 200 to initialize the performance display device 70, the performance lamp LP, etc. (S11).

Next, in the power failure recovery setting process, the normal power-on information is set in RAM 103, various error settings are initialized, and communication with the payout control board 400 is initialized (S12). Here, the normal power-on information is set by storing normal power-on data in the power failure information flag to confirm that the power was turned on correctly, and turning off the power failure confirmation flag to initialize the information on the occurrence of a power failure. Next, the data transfer source address, data transfer destination address, and number of transferred bytes are set, and data equal to the number of transferred bytes is transferred (S13). Then, the value of the special symbol game status at the time of the power failure is read, and power failure recovery processing related to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

Next, a request is made to send a performance control command ("power failure recovery command") for when the main control board 100 and the performance control board 200 are restored from the power failure (S15). This power failure recovery command contains information regarding the inspection of the communication lines, the operation status of the special symbols, the number of probability changes, the number of time-saving times, the number of times the ball is easily scored, the change pattern selection status, and the error status. Any command requests that have not been sent before the power failure are cleared. Next, in the symbol memory number command request process, information on the number of activated balls reserved for the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the time of the power failure is read, and a performance control command including this information on the number of activated balls reserved is requested (S16).

Next, a return setting is performed to return the normal electric role 522 to the state before the power was cut off (for example, the second start port 52 is open) (S17). Furthermore, a return setting is performed to return the special electric role 542 to the state before the power was cut off (for example, the large prize port 54 is open) (S18). Next, the value of the probability change flag is read, and the operation state of the probability change function of the special pattern at the time of power cut is set (S19). The probability change flag is a flag for setting the operation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special pattern game (a flag indicating that the probability change function of the special pattern is in operation). Next, in order to start the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as the initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and a timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Next, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the timer interrupt process (S21). Then, clear word 1 ("55H") is set in preparation for restarting the watchdog timer (S22).

Next, to determine whether a power outage has occurred, the value of the power outage confirmation flag is read to determine whether a power outage has occurred (S23). If a power outage has not occurred, an initial value random number update process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the value of each counter is incremented by 1, and if the value exceeds the maximum value, it is reset to the minimum value of "0."

Next, interrupt permission is set to allow timer interrupt processing to occur (S25), and the process returns to the above-mentioned interrupt prohibition process (S21), and the loop process of S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, timer interrupt processing is executed periodically at a predetermined cycle, and the process of S21 to S25 is repeated using the remaining time between the completion of the previous interrupt processing and the occurrence of the next interrupt processing. Then, if an interrupt request occurs in the interrupt prohibited state, the timer interrupt processing will be started when interrupt is permitted in S25. On the other hand, if the power cut confirmation flag is on in S23, that is, if a power cut has occurred, the process proceeds to S26, and the power cut processing described below is executed.

Next, as the power-off process (S26 to S32), first, clear word 2 ("AAH") is set to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether the contents of the power-off information flag are normal power-on data (S27). If the contents are normal power-on data (S27: Yes), normal power-off data is set to the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, if the contents are not normal power-on data (S27: No), abnormal power-off data is set to the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

Next, a checksum is calculated for a specified area of RAM 103 (excluding the checksum area) (S30). Then, the complement of the checksum data is calculated, and the resulting value of this complement is set in the checksum area of RAM 103 (S31). Next, access to RAM 103 is prohibited (S32), and the process loops until the power is turned off.

<<Main control side timer interrupt processing>>
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 will be described. Fig. 79 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. This timer interrupt processing is started by a clock pulse at regular intervals (for example, 4 ms) from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110, and is executed by interrupting the above-mentioned main control side main processing.

First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the main CPU 101 are saved to the stack area of the RAM 103, and then the interrupt operation conditions are set (S51).

Next, clear word 2 ("AAH") is set to restart the watchdog timer (S52). At this time, clear word 1 and clear word 2 are written in sequence to the WDT clear register of CPU 101 within a preset timeout period, thereby clearing and restarting the watchdog timer. In other words, when main CPU 101 is executing a program normally, clear words 1 and 2 are set periodically, so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before it times out. On the other hand, if the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Next, input processing is executed (S53). In this input processing, information on the various switches connected to the main control board 100, other than the RAM clear switch, is read. That is, input information such as the first start port switch 511, the second start port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the large prize port switch 541, the general prize port switches 611, 641, the door opening switch, the frame opening switch, the back set opening switch, the magnetic sensor, the radio wave sensor, etc. is read, and their state is judged and then the detection information is stored. Note that the signal is read from the input port five times per interrupt processing (read at 5 μs intervals). If the five read values match, the matching value (1 or 0) is stored in RAM as the level data of the current interrupt processing, and if they do not match, the level data of the previous interrupt processing is retained as it is as the level data of the current interrupt processing. Furthermore, the exclusive OR of the current level data and the previous level data is taken, and the logical AND of the result of the exclusive OR and the current level data is taken to create rising data (for example, a winning signal meaning that a game ball has been detected in the first start port 51). Also, the input port may be checked by interrupt processing in 4 ms units, and rising edge data may be created if there is an input change due to multiple interrupt processing (if the consecutive data from multiple interrupt processing matches, that state is considered to be the normal port state). For example, if the level data from the previous interrupt processing is "0", and in the two subsequent interrupt processing, the signal is read from the input port five times for each interrupt processing, and these five read values match the value "1", rising edge data (for example, a winning signal meaning that a game ball has been detected entering the first starting hole 51) may be created.

Next, various random number updating processes are executed (S54). In the various random number updating processes, the normal pattern variation pattern random number, the special pattern variation pattern random number, and the special pattern variation additional pattern random number are updated. For the normal pattern variation pattern random number, the value of the random number counter is incremented by 1, and if the value exceeds the maximum value, it is reset to the minimum value of "0". On the other hand, for the special pattern variation pattern random number and the special pattern variation additional pattern random number, a predetermined value (e.g., 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the result of the subtraction is less than 0, a predetermined value (e.g., 50000) is added to the result of the subtraction.

Next, an initial value update type random number update process is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number update process, the normal symbol random number, the special symbol soft random number, and the special symbol symbol random number are updated. Specifically, the value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and if the value exceeds the maximum value, it is reset to the minimum value of "0". In addition, if the counter value has gone around once, the value of the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

Next, an initial value random number update process is executed (S56). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and if the value exceeds the maximum value, it is reset to the minimum value of "0."

Next, a timer subtraction process is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used to control the game operation of the pachinko game machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the values of various timers are subtracted at the interrupt period (4 ms in this example). The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the variable display and stop display by the special symbol display devices 71, 72. A specified variable time is set in the special symbol game timer at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the timer is subtracted as the time passes. In addition, if a small win game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed while the variable display of the other special symbol is being executed, the timing of the variable display of one special symbol is suspended during the execution of the small win game.

Next, the second start port valid period setting process is executed (S58). In this second start port valid period setting process, the winning valid period and winning invalid period of the second start port 51 are determined, and the valid period data or invalid period data of the second start port 51 is set as the result of this determination.

Next, a winning monitoring process is executed (S59). In this winning monitoring process, a switch passing inspection of the game ball is performed based on the detection information of the first start port switch 511, the second start port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the large winning port switch 541, and the general winning port switches 611 and 641 in the input process (S53). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through each switch, information indicating that the game ball has passed through each switch is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and a request is made to send a performance control command including information indicating that the game ball has passed through each switch. Details of this winning monitoring process (S59) will be described later using FIG. 67.

Next, the prize ball control process is executed (S60). In this prize ball control process, based on the detection results of the winning monitoring process described above, a payout control command is sent to the payout control board 400 to indicate the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning, and a communication test with the payout control board 400 is performed by monitoring the data received from the payout control board 400.

Next, a normal symbol activation gate monitoring process is executed (S61). In this normal symbol activation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball through the activation gate 53 is monitored, and if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the activation gate 53, a random number related to the normal symbol lottery is obtained as activation reserved ball information, the number of activation reserved balls is updated up to a maximum of four, and the random number related to the normal symbol lottery is stored.

Next, a normal symbol control process is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control process, in order to perform a series of processes related to the normal symbol display device 75 or the normal electric role 522, a normal symbol changing process, a normal symbol stop pattern display process, a normal electric role operation process, a normal electric role operation end demo process, etc. are executed according to the value of the normal symbol game status. In addition, in the normal symbol changing process, display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) in order to display the normal symbol changing or fixed.

Next, a normal symbol change start monitoring process is executed (S63). In this normal symbol change start monitoring process, the operation state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol change start condition is met, one of the reserved normal symbol operation balls is consumed, and the following is performed in order: whether the normal symbol is a hit or miss, the symbol is determined, the change pattern is determined, and the change time is set.

Next, the start port monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this start port monitoring control process, the entry of a game ball into the first start port 51 and the second start port 52 is monitored, and if a game ball enters, the number of reserved balls is updated, a random number related to the special symbol lottery is stored, a look-ahead preview performance is determined, and a command request for the number of symbols stored is made in sequence.

Next, a special symbol control process is executed (S65). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 71, 72, a special symbol change start process (S420), a special symbol change process (S430), a special symbol stop symbol display process (S440), and the like are executed according to the value of the special symbol game status, which will be described in detail later.

Next, the special electric device control process is executed (S66). In this process, if the lottery result for the special symbol is a "big win" or a "small win," the operation process related to the special electric device 542 is executed in the following order: setting the start and end of operation of the special electric device 542, updating the opening time and number of times the big prize opening 54 is opened, setting the start of operation of the probability fluctuation function, setting the start of operation of the fluctuation time reduction function, setting the fluctuation pattern selection state, etc.

Next, the large prize opening valid period setting process is executed (S67). In this large prize opening valid period setting process, the large prize opening 54's valid prize period and invalid prize period are determined, and the valid period data or invalid period data of the large prize opening 54 is set as the result of this determination.

Next, the special symbol change start monitoring and control process is executed (S68). In this special symbol change start monitoring and control process, if there is a reserved activation ball for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, one reserved ball is consumed, and the following steps are performed in order: command request for the number of symbols stored, determination of whether the special symbol is a hit or miss, determination of the symbol of the special symbol, determination of the probability change function, determination of the time reduction function, setting of the activation pattern of the special electric role, setting of the demo performance time, etc.

Next, an abnormality detection process is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the input process (S53), the magnetic detection signal from the magnetic sensor, the disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor, the door/frame open signal, etc. are sequentially inspected to determine whether or not the gaming machine is in an error state. If an error state is detected, a presentation control command including the error information (an "error presentation designation command") is generated to request the presentation control board 200 to display an error.

Next, the ball passing time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In this ball passing time abnormality detection process, if the on signal of the winning detection switch is detected continuously for a predetermined period of time or longer, a ball passing time abnormality is set, and a request is made for a performance control command ("error performance designation command") that includes the error information, and a request is made to output a security signal to be output to an external terminal.

Next, a game status display process is executed (S71). In this game status display process, display data such as the number of times the special electric device 542 is activated in succession (prescribed number of rounds), the number of activated balls for normal symbols and special symbols, etc. are created. In addition, display data is created for displaying information on the error state detected in the abnormality detection process on the status indicator lamp of the main control board 100.

Next, LED output processing is executed (S72). In this LED output processing, the display data created in the special symbol control processing (S65), abnormality detection processing (S69), game status display processing (S71), etc., is output to each special symbol display device 71, 72, normal symbol display device 75, each special symbol reserved lamp 73, 74, normal symbol reserved lamp 76, status indicator lamp of main control board 100, etc., in order to display special symbols and normal symbols, the number of reserved balls, the number of times the special electric role device has been activated in succession, and errors, and the like, and the display on these various display devices is initialized.

Next, a launch control signal output process is executed (S73). In this launch control signal output process, if no communication abnormality or disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality with the payout control board 400 is detected, a launch permission signal is output to the payout control board 400, and the launch of the game ball is permitted. On the other hand, if a communication abnormality or disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality with the payout control board 400 is detected, a launch prohibition signal is output to the payout control board 400, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

Next, solenoid output processing is executed (S74). In this solenoid output processing, excitation signals are output to each electric role solenoid 623, 643 based on the control data acquired in the normal symbol control processing (S62) and the special electric role control processing (S66) to operate each electric role 542.

Next, a performance control command transmission process is executed (S75). In this performance control command transmission process, the performance control command specified by the pointer is read from the performance control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage means 180 in the above process, and this performance control command is transmitted to the performance control board 200.

Next, an external information output process is executed (S76). In this external information output process, game information related to this gaming machine PM is output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external information terminal board 600. Examples of such external information signals include a winning ball signal, a door frame opening signal, a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormal sensor detection signal (abnormal ball entry passing time, etc.), a jackpot signal, a winning streak signal, a pattern confirmation signal, etc.

Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main CPU 101 is set to an interrupt-enabled state (S77). This ends the main control timer interrupt process, and the main control returns to the main control main process, where the main control main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

If the main control board 100 detects a power outage (a drop in the supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold) during the main control main processing or interrupt processing, it generates a non-maskable interrupt and turns on the power outage confirmation flag. Then, it returns to the original processing and performs the above-mentioned power outage processing (S
26 to S32) will be executed.

<Winning monitoring process>
Next, the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described. Fig. 80 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning monitoring process (S59).

First, the first start port switch input process is executed (S101). In the first start port switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start port switch 511. If a detection signal has been input from the first start port switch 511, first start port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the first start port 51 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and a first start port winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if a detection signal has not been input from the first start port switch 511, the process proceeds directly to the next step.

Next, the second start port switch input process is executed (S102). In the second start port switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the second start port switch 521. If a detection signal has been input from the second start port switch 521, second start port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the second start port 52 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and a second start port winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if no detection signal has been input from the second start port switch 521, the process proceeds directly to the next step.

Next, an activation gate switch input process is executed (S103). In the activation gate switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the activation gate switch 531. If a detection signal has been input from the activation gate switch 531, activation gate winning data indicating that the gaming ball has passed through the activation gate 53 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and an activation gate winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if no detection signal has been input from the activation gate switch 531, the process proceeds directly to the next step.

Next, the large prize opening switch input process is executed (S104). In the large prize opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the large prize opening switch 541. If a detection signal has been input from the large prize opening switch 541, large prize opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the large prize opening 54 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and a large prize opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if no detection signal has been input from the large prize opening switch 541, the process proceeds directly to the next step.

Next, the left general winning port switch process is executed (S105). In the left general winning port switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the left general winning port switch 611. If a detection signal has been input from the left general winning port switch 611, left general winning port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered one of the general winning ports 61 to 63 is temporarily stored in the winning data storage area of the main information storage means 180, and a left general winning port winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if no detection signal has been input from the left general winning port switch 611, the current winning monitoring process is terminated.

Next, right general winning port switch processing is executed (S106). In the right general winning port switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the right general winning port switch 641. If a detection signal has been input from the right general winning port switch 641, right general winning port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the general winning port 64 is temporarily stored in the winning data storage area of the main information storage means 180, and a right general winning port winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if no detection signal has been input from the right general winning port switch 641, the current winning monitoring processing is terminated.

<Special symbol game processing>
Next, a series of processes related to the special symbol game in the timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described. The processes related to the special symbol game include the above-mentioned start gate monitoring control process (S64), special symbol control process (S65), special electric role control process (S66), and special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S67).
8), etc.

(Start port monitoring and control process)
First, the start port monitoring control process (S64) will be described. Fig. 81 is a flowchart showing the details of the start port monitoring control process (S64).

First, it is determined whether or not a winning combination has been detected in the first starting hole 51 (S201). If a winning combination has been detected in the first starting hole 51 (S201: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of activated balls for the first special symbol is less than the upper limit of four (S202).

If the number of activated balls for the first special symbol is less than four (S202: YES), the random number value for the special symbol, the random number value for the symbol for the special symbol, and the random number value for the special symbol change pattern are obtained as the lottery random number values for the first special symbol game, and each random number value is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area (reserved n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the ball entry order (S203). Then, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter is incremented by 1 to update the number of activated balls for the first special symbol (S204), and the winning check for the first starting hole 51 is completed.

Then, it is determined whether or not a winning play has been detected in the second starting hole 52 (S205). If a winning play in the second starting hole 52 has been detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of activated reserved balls of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit of 4 (S206). If the number of activated reserved balls of the second special symbol is less than 4 (S206: YES), the random number value for the special symbol, the pattern random number value for the special symbol, and the random number value for the special symbol change pattern are obtained as the lottery random number value related to the second special symbol game, and each random number value is stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area (reserved n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the ball entry order (S207). Then, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter is incremented by 1 to update the number of activated reserved balls of the second special symbol (S208), and the winning check for the second starting hole 52 is completed.

Next, it is determined whether the number of pending activation balls for the first special pattern or the second special pattern has been updated, i.e., whether the number of pending activation balls for the first special pattern or the second special pattern has been increased in S204 or S208 (S209). If the number of pending activation balls has been updated (S209: YES), a symbol memory number command including information on the number of pending activation balls for the first special pattern and the second special pattern is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S210).

Then, the state of the gaming machine is checked to determine whether it is time for a pre-determination (S211). If it is time for a pre-determination (S211: YES), a random number value for a special symbol win is read from a win random number buffer (such as a reserved n memory area or a register) to generate pre-reading determination information based on the various random numbers acquired when the starting port is won, and a pre-determination of whether it will be a win or a loss is made (S212). Then, a pre-determination command for whether it will be a win or a loss, including information on the pre-determination result (pre-determination number for whether it will be a win or a loss), is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S213).

The random number value of the special winning pattern is read from the winning pattern random number buffer, and a pattern pre-determination is performed (S214). A pattern pre-determination command including information on the pre-determination result (pattern pre-determination number) is then generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S215). A random number value of the special pattern fluctuation pattern is read from the fluctuation pattern random number buffer, and a fluctuation pattern pre-determination is performed (S216). A fluctuation pattern pre-determination command including information on the pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern pre-determination number) is then generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S217).

(Special symbol variation start monitoring control process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring and control process (S68) will be described. Fig. 82 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol variation start monitoring and control process (S68).

In this special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68), the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) described below is executed for the special symbol side of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that satisfies the change start condition. Note that if both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the change start condition, the process for the second special symbol side is executed preferentially, as described above.

First, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is occurring (S301). Next, it is determined whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting to change, i.e., whether the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are both "00H (waiting to change)" (S302).

Next, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is "0" (S303), and if the number of reserved balls is not "0" (S303: NO), it is deemed that the condition for starting the change of the second special symbol is met, and the address of the second special symbol change start monitoring table (the address of various tables used in the subsequent processes and the address of the RAM storage area) is set (S304), and the process proceeds to the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) for the second special symbol. In other words, in this embodiment, when there is a reserved ball for the second special symbol, the reserved ball for the second special symbol is consumed preferentially, regardless of whether there is a reserved ball for the first special symbol. The details of this special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) will be described later using FIG. 110.

On the other hand, if the number of balls reserved for activation of the second special symbol is "0" (S303: YES), it is determined whether the number of balls reserved for activation of the first special symbol is "0" (S305). If the number of balls reserved is not "0" (S305: NO), it is assumed that the condition for starting the change of the first special symbol is met, and the address of the first special symbol change start monitoring table (the address of various tables used in the subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) is set (S306), and the process proceeds to the special symbol change start monitoring process for the first special symbol (S310).

If the conditions for starting the change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not met (S301: YES, S302: NO, S305: YES), the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) is skipped.

(Special symbol variation start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309) will be described. Fig. 83 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309).

In this special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309), the first special symbol change start monitoring table or the second special symbol change start monitoring table set in S304 or S308 described above is referenced to execute processing on the special symbol side that is the subject of this change start, but because the processing method is the same for the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except in special cases, the processing will be described together without distinguishing between the processing on the first special symbol side and the processing on the second special symbol side.

First, the number of reserved balls on the special symbol side that is the target of this change is subtracted by 1 (S311). Then, a symbol memory number command including the information on the number of reserved balls on the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S312). Next, the special symbol reserved storage area on the special symbol side that is the target of this change is accessed, and the random number value for the special symbol, the random number value for the pattern for the special symbol, and the random number value for the special symbol change pattern stored in the first reserved storage area (reserved 1 storage area) are read in order, and these random number values are transferred to the special symbol hit/miss judgment area, the special symbol pattern judgment area, the special symbol change pattern judgment area, and the special symbol change additional pattern judgment area of the main information storage means 180 for use in the special symbol hit/miss judgment process (S320), the pattern judgment process (S330), and the change pattern selection process (S423) described later (S313). In addition, to update the reserved memory area, the reserved ball information stored in the reserved 2 memory area to the reserved 4 memory area is shifted to a lower reserved memory area, and the reserved 4 memory area is cleared to zero (S314).

Next, the special symbol hit/miss determination process is executed (S320). In the special symbol hit/miss determination process (S320), first, a special symbol hit/miss lottery table is obtained. At this time, if the game state is a special symbol high probability hit/miss lottery table is obtained, and if the game state is a normal state, a low probability hit/miss lottery table is obtained. Next, a special symbol hit random number value is read from the special symbol hit/miss determination area of the main information storage means 180. Then, by referring to the special symbol hit/miss lottery table, a hit/miss determination of the special symbol is executed based on the hit random number value. In addition, a value corresponding to this hit/miss determination result (big hit data "55H", small hit data "33H", miss data "00H") is stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180.

Next, a pattern determination process is executed (S330). In the pattern determination process (S330), the stopping pattern of the special pattern and the character effect number (variable additional pattern information) are determined according to the result of the hit/miss determination. The currently determined stopping pattern (pattern group) and character effect number of the special pattern are stored in the pattern storage area of the main information storage means 180. The character effect number is determined based on a combination of the determined type of stopping pattern (pattern group) and the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special pattern and normal pattern (four patterns: special pattern probability variable on/special pattern probability variable off/normal pattern probability variable on/normal pattern probability variable off). If the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, the character effect number "0" is determined.

Then, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol hit/miss determination corresponds to a jackpot (S342). If the result of the special symbol hit/miss determination corresponds to a miss (S342: NO), the process proceeds to S351.

If the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is a jackpot (S342: YES), the probability fluctuation count is determined as the number of times the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol will operate after the jackpot game ends based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in S330 above and the game state at the time of the jackpot win (S345). Also, based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in S330 above and the game state at the time of the jackpot win, the fluctuation time reduction count is determined as the number of times the fluctuation time reduction function of the special symbol will operate after the jackpot game ends (S346). Furthermore, based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in S330 above and the game state at the time of the jackpot win, the electric support count is determined as the number of times the electric chute support function will operate after the jackpot game ends (S347). The results of this determination (probability fluctuation count, fluctuation time shortening count, electric support count) are stored in the time shortening count storage area and electric support count storage area of the main information storage means 180. Next, based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in S330, the operation pattern of the special electric device 542 during the jackpot game (round game) is set (S348). Specifically, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, the opening pattern (maximum opening time) of the large prize opening 54 in each round, etc. are set as the operation pattern of the special electric device 542.

Next, based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330 and the current game state, a variation pattern selection state after the end of the big win game or after the end of the small win game is set (S349).
Based on the type of the symbol group determined in 30, the demo presentation time (hit start demo time and hit end demo time) of the special game (big win game or small win game) is set (S350). Next, the special symbol hit/miss judgment area and the special symbol symbol judgment area of the main information storage means 180 used in the above-mentioned special symbol hit/miss judgment process (S320) and symbol judgment process (S330) are cleared (S351). Then, the special symbol game status of the special symbol side that is the subject of this change is transitioned from "00H (standby)" to "01H (change start)" (S352).

(Special symbol control process)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. Fig. 84 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control process (S65).

First, it is determined whether the special electric role 542 is not in operation, i.e., whether the special electric role play status is "00H (waiting for win)" (S401). Next, if the special electric role 542 is not in operation (S401: YES), it is determined whether the second special symbol play status is not "00H (waiting)" (S402).

If the second special symbol game status is not "00H (waiting)" (S402: YES), the second special symbol control table (addresses of various tables used in subsequent processes and address of RAM storage area) is set (S403) to execute processing related to the second special symbol, and the process proceeds to general special symbol control processing (S410). On the other hand, if the second special symbol game status is "00H (waiting)" (S402: NO), the first special symbol control table (addresses of various tables used in subsequent processes and address of RAM storage area) is set (S404) to execute processing related to the first special symbol, and the process proceeds to general special symbol control processing (S410).

In the general special symbol control process (S410) described below, the first or second special symbol control table set in S403 or S404 above is used to process the special symbol that is the subject of this change, but since the processing method is the same for the first and second special symbols, they will be described together without distinguishing between the processing for the first or second special symbol, except in special cases. Details of this general special symbol control process (S410) will be described later using Figure 85.

(Special symbol control general-purpose processing)
Next, a general-purpose special symbol control process is executed (S404, S407). Here, Fig. 85 is a flow chart showing the details of the general-purpose special symbol control process (S404, S407).

In this special symbol control general-purpose process (S404, S407), a branch process (S411 to S414) is executed to move to a process according to the value of the special symbol game status ("01H", "02H", "03H"). First, it is determined whether the special symbol game status of the special symbol to be changed this time is not 0 (S411). If the special symbol game status is not "00H" (S411: YES), it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "01H (change start)" (S412). If the special symbol game status is "01H" (S412: YES), it is shifted to the special symbol change start process (S420). Details of this special symbol change start process (S420) will be described later with reference to FIG. 86. On the other hand, if the result of S412 is NO, it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "02H (changing)" (S413). If the special symbol game status is "02H" (S413: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol changing process (S430). Details of this special symbol changing process (S430) will be described later with reference to FIG. 87. If the result is NO in S413, it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "03H (stopped symbol is displayed)" (S414). If the special symbol game status is "03H" (S414: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol stopped symbol display process (S440). Details of this special symbol stopped symbol display process (S440) will be described later with reference to FIG. 88.

(Special pattern variation start processing)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described. Fig. 86 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start process (S420).

First, a special symbol variation pattern table is obtained based on the result of the winning/losing lottery and the variation pattern selection state, etc. (S421). Next, a special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S422). Then, referring to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of multiple variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random number value (S423).

Next, a change time corresponding to the change pattern selected this time is set (S424). Then, as the setting for starting the change of the special symbol, the change time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S425), and a change start command is generated for the performance control board 200 (S426). As the change start command, a communication check command, a change additional symbol information designation command, a change pattern designation command, and a symbol designation command are generated in this order to start the symbol change performance in the performance display device 70, and these are stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

Next, the contents of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 used to determine the fluctuation pattern are cleared (S427). Then, the special symbol game status is transitioned from "01H (fluctuation start)" to "02H (fluctuation in progress)" (S428).

(Special pattern change processing)
Next, the special symbol variation process (S430) will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation process (S430).

First, in order to display the special symbols in a variable manner, a special symbol display pattern number switching process is executed (S431). In this display pattern number switching process (S431), display pattern number data for the special symbols is generated at each predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in an LED output process (S73) in order to display the special symbols in a variable manner or a fixed manner.

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)", i.e., whether the special symbol variation time has ended (S432). If the special symbol variation time has ended (S432: YES), a stop symbol of the special symbol to be confirmed and displayed is set on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 (S433). Next, a variation stop command is generated to instruct the performance control board 200 to confirm and display the decorative symbol, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S434).

Next, "500 (ms)" is stored in the special symbol game timer as the confirmed display time (S435). Note that the "confirmed display time" is the time required for the stopped symbol to be displayed definitively when the special symbol stops changing. Then, the special symbol game status is transitioned from "02H (changing)" to "03H (stopped symbol displayed)" (S436).

(Special pattern stop pattern display processing)
Next, the special symbol stop symbol display process (S440) will be described. Fig. 88 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol stop symbol display process (S440).

First, it is determined whether the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)", i.e., whether the fixed display time of the special symbol (stopped symbol) has ended (S441). If the fixed display time of the special symbol has ended (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is transitioned from "03H (stopped symbol is being displayed)" to "00H (standby)" (S442).

Next, it is determined whether the hit/miss determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 is jackpot data "55H" (S443). If the hit/miss determination data is jackpot data (S443: YES), the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is stopped (S444), the operation of the fluctuation time reduction function of the special symbol is stopped (S445), and the operation of the electric chute support function is stopped (S446). Specifically, the probability fluctuation flag is set to "00H (off)", and the probability fluctuation count counter, the fluctuation time reduction count counter, and the easy-to-score state count counter are set to "00H" and cleared to zero.

Next, as a start demo setting process for the special game, the start demo display time is set, and a presentation control command (jackpot start demo command) that instructs the start of the start demo presentation is generated (S447). Next, the number of times the variable pattern selection state is executed (variation pattern selection state number counter) is cleared to zero (S448). In addition, the special electric role play status is transitioned from "00H (waiting for win state)" to "01H (special game)" (S449). Then, in order to clear the contents of the win/loss determination flag, "00H" is set (S450).

On the other hand, if the hit/miss determination data is not a hit data (S443: NO), it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is in operation (S451). If the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is in operation (S451: YES), the probability fluctuation counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 to represent the number of times the special symbol has fluctuated this time (step S452). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation counter is zero (step S453). If the probability fluctuation counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is stopped (S454). If the probability fluctuation counter after the decrement is not zero (S453: NO), S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to S455.

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is in operation (S455). If the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is in operation (S455: YES), the time shortening counter in the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 to represent the number of times the special symbol has fluctuated this time (step S456). Next, it is determined whether the fluctuation time shortening counter is zero (step S457). If the fluctuation time shortening counter is zero (S457: YES), it is determined that the number of times the special symbol time shortening state has ended has been reached, and the operation of the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is stopped (S458). If the fluctuation time shortening counter after the decrement is not zero (S457: NO), S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S459.

Next, it is determined whether the electric chute support function is operating (S459). If the electric chute support function is operating (S459: YES), the electric support count counter in the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 to represent the number of times the special symbol has changed this time (step S460). Next, it is determined whether the electric support count counter is zero (step S461). If the electric support count counter is zero (S461: YES), it is determined that the number of times the easy-to-score state has ended has been reached, and the operation of the electric chute support function is stopped (S462). If the electric support count counter after the decrement is not zero (S461: NO), S462 is skipped and the process moves to S463.

Next, the variation pattern selection state count counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 (S463). Then, the variation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, the variation pattern selection state count counter of the main information storage means 180 is referenced to determine whether the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached a preset end count, and if the end count has been reached, the next variation pattern selection state is switched to. On the other hand, if the end count has not been reached, the current variation pattern selection state is maintained.

Next, a presentation control command (game state designation command) is generated that includes the current game state information and variation pattern selection state information updated in the above-mentioned S451 to S464, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S465). Note that the presentation control board 200 sets and updates the presentation mode based on the information of this game state designation command.

(Special electric device control processing)
Next, the special electric role control process (S66) will be described. Figures 89 and 90 are flowcharts showing the details of the electric role control process (S66).

First, it is determined whether the special electric role play status is "01H (special play)" (S501). If the special electric role play status is "01H" (S501: YES), special game processing is executed in the following processing. In this special game processing, it is first determined whether the special electric role 542 is in operation (S502). If the special electric role 542 is not in operation (S502: NO), it is determined whether it is the time to start operating the special electric role 542 (S503). The operation start time of the special electric role 542 is the timing at which the operation of the special electric role 542 starts in each round of play.

If it is time to start operating the special electric device 542 (S503: YES), a control command (round performance designation command) is generated to start the round performance, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S504). The performance control board 200 executes a round performance corresponding to each round play during the special game based on the information in the round performance designation command (information such as the current number of rounds). Then, the operation of the special electric device 542 is started (S505), and the processes of S506 to S510 are executed as the process during the operation of the special electric device 542.

As a process during the operation of the special electric device 542, it is determined whether or not the game balls have entered the large winning opening 54 a specified number of times (maximum number of winnings) (S506), and it is also determined whether or not the operation time (open time) of the special electric device 542 has elapsed (S507). At this time, if the game balls have entered the large winning opening 54 a specified number of times (maximum number of winnings) (S506: YES) or if the operation time of the special electric device 542 has elapsed (S507: YES), the operation of the special electric device 542 is stopped (S508). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of consecutive operations of the special electric device 542 has reached a predetermined specified number of rounds (S509). If the number of consecutive operations has not reached the specified number of rounds (S509: NO), the number of consecutive operations of the special electric device 542 is incremented by one (S510).

On the other hand, if the number of consecutive operations of the special electric device 542 has reached the specified number of rounds (S509: YES), the process proceeds to S511, where the special game hit end demo setting process sets the end demo display time and generates a presentation control command (jackpot end demo command) that instructs the start of the end demo presentation (S511).

Next, the variable time reduction count information set in S346 above is stored in the variable time reduction count counter (S512). Also, the electric support count information set in S347 above is stored in the electric support count counter (S513).

Next, by referring to the contents of the probability fluctuation determination flag set in S343 above, it is determined whether the operation of the condition device is due to a specific symbol (so-called probability variable symbol) (S514). If the condition device is due to a specific symbol (S514: YES), the probability fluctuation count (operation data) set in S345 above is stored in the probability fluctuation count counter of the main information storage means 180, and the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is started (S515). On the other hand, if the condition device is not due to a specific symbol (S514: NO), the non-operation data "00H" is stored in the probability fluctuation count counter, and S515 is skipped.

Next, it is determined whether the variable time reduction count information stored in the time reduction count counter is variable time reduction function activation data (data other than "00H") (S516). If it is variable time reduction function activation data (S516: YES), operation of the variable time reduction function for the special pattern is started (S517). On the other hand, if it is not variable time reduction function activation data (S516: NO), S517 is skipped.

Next, it is determined whether the electric support count information stored in the electric support count counter is electric chute support function activation data (data other than "00H") (S518). If it is electric chute support function activation data (S518: YES), the operation of the electric chute support function is started (S519 to S521). That is, the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is started (S519), the fluctuation time reduction function of the normal symbol is started (S520), and the opening extension function of the normal electric role 522 is started (S521) are executed in that order. On the other hand, if it is not electric chute support function activation data, S519 to S521 are skipped.

Then, the state is switched to the variation pattern selection state determined in S347 (S522). Next, a presentation control command (game state designation command) is generated including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in S512 to S522 described above, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S523). The presentation control board 200 sets the presentation mode after the special game based on the information in this game state designation command. Then, the special electric role play status is transitioned from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting for win state)" (S524).

<Processing on the performance control board>
Next, the procedure of the operation processing in the performance control board 200 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 91 to 97. The processing on the performance control board 200 side includes a reset start processing (including the performance control side main processing) that is executed when the sub-main CPU 201 is reset after power-on, etc., a performance control side timer interrupt processing that is started at regular intervals, a reception interrupt processing of a performance control command that is started due to a strobe signal from the main control board 100, a lamp performance interrupt processing that is started in response to the arrival of a predetermined occurrence time specified in the time schedule of the variable performance pattern, and a transmission interrupt processing of an image control command that is started at regular intervals.

Each interrupt process (exception process) is set with a priority level indicating the priority when multiple interrupt processes occur. In this example, the priority levels are set in the following order: "Reset start process by power reset: highest priority", "Reset start process by various abnormalities: highest priority" → "Performance control command reception interrupt process: level 7" → "WDT (runaway detection) reset start process: level 3" → "Image control command transmission interrupt process: level 2" → "Performance control side timer interrupt process: level 1". Note that the "reset start process by various abnormalities" is activated, for example, when the sub-main CPU 201 executes an illegal command, when the sub-main CPU 201 attempts to access an illegal area or by an illegal method, or when an error occurs during DMA (Direct Memory Access) transfer. In this embodiment, the above multiple types of interrupt processes are exemplified, but in reality, other interrupt processes also exist.

In the main processing on the performance control side, basically, all interrupts are prohibited or interrupts other than the performance control command reception interrupt are prohibited before processing proceeds. Then, when the main processing on the performance control side is in an interrupt permitted state, each interrupt processing is started by suspending the main processing. In each interrupt processing, when a request for another interrupt processing is made during the execution of the interrupt processing (multiple interrupts have occurred), the interrupt request is permitted in principle if it is an interrupt processing with a higher priority level than the interrupt processing being executed, while the interrupt request is prohibited if it is an interrupt processing with a lower priority level than the interrupt processing being executed or with the same priority level. In other words, each interrupt processing proceeds with other interrupts with the same or lower priority level prohibited. Then, each interrupt processing returns to the main processing on the performance control side in a state where all interrupts are permitted. The priority level (priority level) of such interrupt causes is specified by the register settings of the performance control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<<Reset start process>>
First, the reset start process of the performance control board 200 will be described. Figure 91 is a flowchart showing the reset start process of the performance control board 200. In this reset start process, the program is started by resetting when the power is turned on, resetting due to various abnormalities, or resetting due to WDT (when a runaway is detected), and after a security check of the sub-main CPU 201 is performed, the program starts and processing from S601 onwards begins.

First, as an initial setting required when powering on, the top address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S601). Then, all interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S602).

Next, as basic settings related to the hardware, initial values are set in the built-in registers provided in the sub-main CPU 201, and the I/O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Furthermore, the memory area in the RAM 203 of the performance control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, initial values are set for variables with initial values, and variables without initial values are initialized by clearing them to 0. In addition, the sub-main CPU 201 appropriately expands the control program stored in the ROM 202 into the RAM 203.

Next, interrupts other than interrupt processing for receiving performance control commands are prohibited (S605). Next, a process is performed to set the type of error that should be enabled for that model from among the various errors that have been set in advance for each model (S606). Furthermore, a request to turn off all of the performance lamps LP (frame lamp 10, board lamp 80) is made (S607). Then, a watchdog timer is started to monitor for runaway of the sub-main CPU 201 (S608).

Next, the main processing on the presentation control side is executed as the main processing of the game presentation (S609). Details of this main processing on the presentation control side (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. 81. Note that when transitioning to the main processing on the presentation control side in S609, it is normally not possible to return from the main processing to the reset start processing. However, in the unlikely event that a return to this processing occurs due to the occurrence of a program bug or the like, a transition to a low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which power consumption is reduced compared to normal operation will occur.

<<Main processing on the performance control side>>
Next, a description will be given of the main processing (S609) on the performance control side of the performance control board 200. Fig. 92 is a flowchart showing the main processing (S609) on the performance control side.

First, the main processing on the performance control side obtains an address (the start address where the program is expanded) to start checking whether the control program is correctly expanded in RAM 203 (S611). Next, all interrupts are permitted (permits the start of various interrupt processes) (S612).

Next, the device initialization operation is performed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is performed only once when the power of the pachinko game machine PM is turned on (when resetting begins), and is performed for the purpose of confirming the position information required to control the operation of the movable role 24 by devices such as motors and solenoids. Note that when the initialization operation is completed, the movable role 24 returns to the preset initial position (reference position).

Then, in order to restart the watchdog timer, the watchdog timer is cleared (S614). At this time, if the sub-main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, a predetermined clear word is written to the WDT clear register of the sub-main CPU 201 within a preset timeout period, and the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted. On the other hand, if the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Next, input port check processing is executed (S615). In this input port check processing, the reading of the I/O port circuit 204 (input port) in the port input/output processing S912 in the timer interrupt processing described below is monitored every time an interrupt occurs, and if the input port state is all "1" after multiple monitoring (e.g., four times), the signal level is set to "1 (H level)", if it is all "0", the signal level is set to "0 (L level)", and otherwise the signal level is not changed (this determines the input signal).

Next, an error presentation management process is executed (S616). In this error presentation management process, error presentations are started by various devices based on the error presentation pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S622). Furthermore, in the error presentation management process, an initial value (error presentation time) is set in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error presentation. This error management timer is updated by subtracting it every 16 ms in the error management timer update process (S920) of the presentation control timer interrupt process. Then, if the error management timer times out, the error presentation is terminated.

Next, the effect button monitoring and control process is executed (S617). In this effect button monitoring and control process, when a button preview effect is incorporated during the pattern fluctuation, the input state of the effect button 15 is monitored within a specified effective operation time, and information regarding the input state of the effect button 15 is retained.

Next, a notice lottery management process is executed (S618). In this notice lottery management process, a notice performance pattern that defines the contents of the notice performance that occurs at each stage of the decorative pattern fluctuation process is determined by lottery according to the scenario of the fluctuation performance pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S620). The notice performance pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the notice performance pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. In addition, an image control command for specifying this notice performance pattern number to the image control board 300 side is generated and set in the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260. At this time, if a role notice performance pattern is selected as the notice performance pattern, a role request is generated, and the driving pattern of the movable role 24 is specified in the subsequent device management process (S619). Note that in this example, all of the multiple types of notice performances (notice performance patterns) that occur within one fluctuation of the decorative pattern are not drawn in one main loop process, but in order to improve the efficiency of the main loop process, the occurrence time of the notice performance (for example, the fluctuation start stage, the reach occurrence stage, the fluctuation stop stage) is determined.
The lottery is drawn over multiple main loop processes, divided into each stage. In this case, the preview performance that occurs at the start of the decorative pattern change needs to be synchronized with the start of the decorative pattern change (the image control command needs to be sent immediately), so the lottery is drawn within the first main loop process.

Next, the device management process is executed (S619). In this device management process, when there is a request for operation of various devices (lamp request, prop request) in the command analysis process (S620) described later, the pattern data corresponding to the performance number (lamp performance number, prop advance performance number) is identified from among the multiple types of pattern data (lamp pattern, drive pattern) stored in the ROM 203, and control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the performance lamp LP, lamp data corresponding to each frame time (time required to update an image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In this example, one frame time corresponds to the time required for drawing processing of one frame when drawing, etc. at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps) in the performance display device 70. Similarly, in the drive pattern data of the movable prop 24, drive data corresponding to each interrupt period (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, in the performance control timer interrupt process described below, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals, and the target device begins to operate. On the other hand, in the performance control timer interrupt process described below, when the output of the entire series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is complete, the performance lamp LP is turned off or the operation of the movable prop 24 is stopped, and control of the target device ends.

Next, a command analysis process (S620) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not a performance control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if a performance control command is stored, the command is read out and a performance control process corresponding to the type of the read out performance control command is executed. Details of this command analysis process (S620) will be described later using FIG. 93.

Then, during this loop processing, it is determined whether command analysis (analysis of performance control command) has been performed (S621). If command analysis has been performed immediately (S621: YES), the process returns to S614 and proceeds to the next loop processing. On the other hand, if command analysis has not been performed (S621: NO), that is, if the command buffer is empty, the performance selection random number update process is performed until a predetermined time has elapsed (S622). Note that in this embodiment, the predetermined time is set to "16 ms", which is half the minimum unit of lamp LP switching control (32 ms). In this performance selection random number update process, various performance selection random numbers such as pre-reading notice selection random numbers, decorative pattern random numbers, variable performance pattern random numbers, and notice performance pattern random numbers are updated. Specifically, the value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and if the value exceeds the maximum value, it is reset to the minimum value.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the command analysis process (S622) will be described. Fig. 93 is a flow chart showing the details of the command analysis process (S622). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not a performance control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and a performance control process corresponding to the type of the stored performance control command is executed.

First, it is determined whether or not a game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S631). If a game state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process proceeds to a presentation state transition process (S632). In the presentation state transition process (S632), a process of transitioning the presentation mode is executed based on the game state information and the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command.

Next, it is determined whether or not a pending command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S633). Here, the pending command includes a symbol memory number command and a pre-determination command. If this pending command is stored (S633: YES), the process proceeds to pending information management processing (S634). In this pending information management processing (S634), the symbol memory number command or pre-determination command is read from the sub-main information storage means 260, and a pre-reading determination is performed based on the information of the pre-determination result, and processing is performed to update the number of pending images displayed and the display mode (display color, etc.) displayed on the pending image display unit 710 of the performance display device 70.

Next, it is determined whether or not a pattern change related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the pattern change related command includes a change start command and a change stop command. If a pattern change related command is stored (step S635: YES), the process proceeds to a change performance content determination process (S636). In this change performance content determination process (S636), if the received pattern change related command is a change start command, a process is executed to start the decorative pattern change performance, and if the received pattern change related command is a change stop command, a process is executed to end the decorative pattern change performance.

Next, it is determined whether or not a jackpot performance related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S637). Here, the jackpot performance related command includes a jackpot start demo performance command, a round performance designation command, and a jackpot end demo performance command. If a jackpot performance related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process proceeds to a jackpot performance content determination process (S638). In this jackpot performance content determination process (S638), processing is performed to execute the start demo performance, round performance, and end demo performance.

Next, it is determined whether or not a small win effect related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S639). Here, the small win effect related command includes a small win start demo effect command and a small win end demo effect command. If a small win effect related command is stored (step S639: YES), the process proceeds to a small win effect content determination process (S640). In this small win effect content determination process (S640), processing is performed to execute the small win start demo effect and the small win end demo effect.

Next, it is determined whether or not a winning port winning-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S641). Here, the winning port winning-related commands include the first start port winning command, the second start port winning command, the operating gate winning command, the large winning port winning command, the left general winning port winning command, and the right general winning port winning command. If a winning port winning-related command is stored (S641: YES), the process proceeds to the winning presentation content determination process (S642). Details of this winning presentation content determination process (S642) will be described later using FIG. 94.

Next, it is determined whether or not an error performance designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-information storage means 280 (S643). If this error performance designation command is stored (S643: YES), the process proceeds to an error performance content determination process (S644). In this error performance content determination process (S644), the error performance designation command is read from the sub-information storage means 280, and an error performance pattern for notifying an error state by, for example, displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 70, lighting the performance lamp LP, or playing a sound from the speaker 11 is determined.

If no performance control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-information storage means 280 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO, S641: NO, S643: NO), the command analysis process ends without doing anything.

(Winning Presentation Content Determination Process)
Next, the prize presentation content determination process (S642) will be described. Fig. 94 is a flow chart showing the details of the prize presentation content determination process (S642).

First, the first start hole winning presentation control process is executed (S701). In this first start hole winning presentation control process (S701), it is determined whether or not a first start hole winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. If the first start hole winning command is stored, a first start hole winning presentation is executed to notify the player that the game ball has entered the first start hole 51, provided that a predetermined presentation execution condition is met.

Next, the second start hole winning presentation control process is executed (S702). In this second start hole winning presentation control process (S702), it is determined whether or not a second start hole winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the second start hole winning command is stored, a second start hole winning presentation is executed to notify the player that the game ball has entered the second start hole 52, provided that a predetermined presentation execution condition is met.

Next, the activation gate winning effect control process is executed (S703). In this activation gate winning effect control process (S703), it is determined whether or not an activation gate winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if an activation gate winning command is stored, an activation gate winning effect is executed to notify the player that the game ball has passed through the activation gate 53, provided that a predetermined effect execution condition is met.

Next, a process for controlling the large prize opening winning effect is executed (S704). In this process for controlling the large prize opening winning effect (S704), it is determined whether or not a large prize opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. If the command is stored, a large prize opening winning effect is executed to notify the player that the game ball has entered the large prize opening 54, provided that a predetermined effect execution condition is met.

Next, the left general prize slot winning presentation control process is executed (S705). In this left general prize slot winning presentation control process (S705), it is determined whether or not a left general prize slot winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if a left general prize slot winning command is stored, a left general prize slot winning presentation is executed to notify the player that a game ball has entered one of the general prize slots 61 to 63, provided that a predetermined presentation execution condition is met.

Next, the right general prize opening winning presentation control process is executed (S706). In this right general prize opening winning presentation control process (S706), it is determined whether or not a right general prize opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the right general prize opening winning command is stored, a right general prize opening winning presentation is executed to notify the player that the game ball has entered the general prize opening 64, provided that a predetermined presentation execution condition is met.

<<Performance control command reception interrupt processing>>
Next, the reception interrupt process of the performance control command will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt process of the performance control command. As described above, the reception interrupt process of the performance control command is started by an interrupt occurring based on the input of a strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various performance control commands are acquired in this interrupt process. Note that the performance control command is configured to include one byte of MODE data and one byte of EVENT data, and is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200 in the order of MODE data and EVENT data. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the MODE data is also referred to as the "first command" and the EVENT data is also referred to as the "second command".

First, when an interrupt occurs based on a strobe signal from the main control board 100, it is determined whether the input value of the performance control command has been confirmed (S901). Specifically, the command data is read up to five times, and the input value is confirmed when the same value is read twice in a row. This is because there is a risk that the reading of the performance control command may fail due to noise, etc., and the input value is not confirmed until the same value is read twice in a row.

Next, it is determined whether the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether it is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S902). If the command received this time is the first command (S902: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in a temporary area (S903). Then, the effect lottery random number is obtained from the effect lottery random number generating means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S904). The reason why the effect lottery random number is obtained when the effect control command is received is that the effect control command is transmitted at physically irregular timing such as when the game ball starts winning or when the special pattern starts to change, so that the acquisition timing is not periodic by using that as a trigger. By making the acquisition timing of the effect lottery random number irregular in this way, it is less likely that the same effect will be selected repeatedly in various effect lotteries.

On the other hand, if the command received this time is the second command (S902: NO), it is determined whether the first command has already been received (S905). In other words, it is determined whether the performance control commands were received in the order of the first command (MODE) → the second command (EVENT), and whether there is any inconsistency in the combination of performance control commands. If there is no inconsistency in the combination of performance control commands (S905: YES), the address indicated by the write pointer (pointer for writing) is obtained (S906). Next, the first command and the second command are stored in the performance control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub-main information storage means 260 according to the address indicated by the write pointer (S907). The stored command data is read out by the command analysis process (S620) in the main process, and the performance control process corresponding to the type of performance control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S908). Furthermore, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in the above-mentioned S903 is cleared (S909). The performance control command reception interrupt process then ends, and the process returns to the original state before the interrupt.

<<Performance control side timer interrupt processing>>
Next, the timer interrupt process on the performance control side will be described. Fig. 96 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process on the performance control side. This timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse at regular intervals and is executed by interrupting the main process on the performance control side described above.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the sub-main CPU 201 are saved to the stack area of the RAM 203, and then the processes from S911 onwards are executed in sequence. During this timer interrupt process, interrupts with priority level 2 or higher, such as a performance control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100 and a watchdog timer interrupt, are permitted (S911).

Next, a port input/output process is executed (S912). In this port input/output process, input and output processes of port data are performed in the I/O port circuit 204. In the input process,
The various signals input to the I/O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 are read and output from the I/O port circuit 204 (output port).

Next, device control data output processing is executed (S913). In this device control data output processing, drive data for a predetermined time is read from the drive pattern data identified in the device management processing (S619) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. The drive data set in this processing is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt period. When the drive data is set in this processing, the drive data is output from the I/O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt processing. Therefore, in this device control data output processing, the drive data is switched every interrupt period (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

Next, a performance timer update process is executed (S914). In this performance timer update process, the values of various performance timers used for performance operation control are updated by subtracting them at an interrupt period (1 ms in this embodiment). The performance timers include a timer for managing the variable time of the decorative pattern and a timer for managing the timing of the preview performance. The performance timers manage the time schedule for the variable performance pattern, and manage the time on this time axis for the drive timing of the movable role object 24 and the lighting timing of the performance lamp LP. The performance timers are also used in the device control data output process (S913) and lamp data update process (S917) within this performance control timer interrupt process.

Next, a button control timer update process is executed (S915). The value of the valid time management timer for managing the operation valid time of the effect button 15 is updated by subtracting it at the interrupt period (1 ms in this embodiment). Note that the operation valid time is the time during which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid.

Next, a task control counter update process is executed (S916). In this task control counter update process, the task counter value ("0" to "15") is updated at each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the task counter value is "0" to "14", it is incremented by 1, and if the task counter value becomes "15", it is returned to "0". In other words, this task counter can have a cyclic period of 16 ms. Various tasks (task processes) are assigned corresponding to the currently updated task counter value, and each process such as a lamp control task (lamp data update process in S917), a runaway monitoring task (image CPU runaway monitoring process in S9189), and an error management task (error management timer update process in S919) is executed according to the task counter value. In this example, of the task counter values ("0" to "15"), one value is assigned to the lamp control task, the other two values (values that are 8 ms apart from each other) are assigned to the runaway monitoring task, and the other value is assigned to the error management task (description of the other tasks is omitted). As mentioned above, the task counter's cycle period is set to 16 ms to match the minimum unit (16 ms) of switching control of the performance lamp LP. This minimum unit (16 ms) of switching control of the performance lamp LP corresponds to one frame time of an image frame, realizing synchronization between the image performance and the lamp performance.

Next, a lamp data update process is executed (S917). In this lamp data update process, lamp data for a predetermined time is read and set from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S621) or the like. The lamp data set in this process is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the minimum unit of switching control of the performance lamp LP. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer from the output port (serial port). This lamp data output process is configured as a serial communication interrupt process, and is realized by sequentially writing the lamp data to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts the lamp data in the transmission buffer in units of 1 byte, and outputs it to the lamp connection board 91 for each bit in a form synchronized with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer is empty, and all the lamp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in this lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and this lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer.

Next, image CPU runaway monitoring processing is executed (S918). In this image CPU runaway monitoring processing, the toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and if the toggle signal does not change continuously for 1600 ms (approximately 50 to 100 frames), it is determined that the sub-sub CPU 301 of the image control board 300 is running away, and a reset signal is sent from the performance control board 200 to the image control board 300. As a result, the image control board 300 side executes a specified reset processing due to the occurrence of the reset state of the sub-sub CPU 301. Note that a toggle signal is a signal with a waveform in which H level and L level are alternately repeated every frame time.

Next, error management timer processing is executed (S919). In this error management timer processing, the value of the error presentation timer for managing the error presentation time set in the error presentation management processing (S616) is subtracted and updated. Then, all interrupts are permitted, and the contents of the saved register are restored, after which the presentation control side timer interrupt processing is terminated and the original processing before the interrupt occurred is resumed.

<<Image control command transmission interrupt processing>>
Next, the transmission interrupt process of the image control command will be described. Fig. 97 is a flow chart showing the transmission interrupt process of the image control command. This transmission interrupt process of the image control command occurs at a constant interval (500 µs) set in advance.

In this image control command transmission interrupt process, first, the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 is checked (S931). Next, a read pointer is obtained in the image control command buffer (S932). Next, it is determined whether or not an image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (S933). Whether or not an image control command is stored can be confirmed, for example, by the read pointer and the write pointer. If the read pointer and the write pointer match, the image control command is not stored. If an image control command is stored (S933: YES), the image control command is read from the area pointed to by the read pointer (S934). This read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit specified as the output destination (S935). As a result, the image control command is serially transmitted from the serial port to the image control board 300. Next, the command data (the command data transmitted in the above S935) is cleared (S936). Next, the read pointer is incremented by one and updated (S937). Then, the transmission interrupt process for the image control command ends and the system returns to the original process before the interrupt.

The main advantages achieved by the second embodiment can be summarized as follows:

First, according to the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the large prize port P54 in excess of the specified count number during the execution of a special game, an over-winning effect is executed, thereby clearly informing the player that an over-winning has occurred and increasing the player's sense of satisfaction and elation at having been able to enjoy a special benefit that he or she would not have been able to obtain otherwise, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the second embodiment, when a special game is being played, a large prize winning performance (over prize winning performance) is triggered when a game ball enters the large prize winning performance port P54, and when a game ball enters the general prize winning performance port P64, a general prize winning performance (bonus prize winning performance) is triggered. This creates a gap between the large prize winning performance and the general prize winning performance port during the special game, eliminating the monotony of the performance during a jackpot, and as a result, it becomes possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the general prize opening P64 during the execution of a special game, a general prize opening winning performance (bonus prize winning performance) is performed, which prevents the player from being solely interested in playing the game with the aim of aiming for the big prize opening P54, and allows the player to enjoy the fun of aiming for the general prize opening P64. It is expected that the player will have more opportunities to actively get the game ball to enter the general prize opening P64, which will increase the player's sense of gambling and make the game even more interesting, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the second embodiment, by appropriately setting the execution time of the large prize entry port count-up performance in relation to the jackpot end demo period and the interval period, regardless of the timing of the large prize entry port count-up performance or the number of consecutive large prize entry port count-up performances, the large prize entry port count-up performance can be completed appropriately without being unnecessarily prolonged, so that the division between the previous and next round games, and the division between the special game and the variable display after the end of the special game can be clearly set, and it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the current game situation, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, by configuring the total execution time of the large prize entry port count-up performance for the specified count number to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo, even if multiple large prize entry port count-up performances are performed consecutively based on multiple game balls entering the large prize entry port in succession just before the end of the final round game, the large prize entry port count-up performance will be completed within the jackpot end demo period. This means that the big prize slot count-up effect will not extend beyond the jackpot end demo period and into the variable display after the special game ends, making it possible to clearly separate the end of the special game and the start of the variable display for the first spin.

In addition, according to the second embodiment, if the conditions for executing a later large prize slot count-up performance are met while a previous large prize slot count-up performance is being executed, the execution of the later large prize slot count-up performance is started after the execution of the previous large prize slot count-up performance is completed, thereby preventing the processing of the count-up performance from becoming cumbersome. Also, by clearly separating the two large prize slot count-up performances, the count-up display of the cumulative number of prize balls is not difficult for the player to see, and the player can watch with satisfaction the cumulative number of prize balls increase one after another at a good pace on the screen, which results in an increased interest in the game.

In addition, according to the second embodiment, when an over-winning occurs and the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value, an emphasis effect is performed, or when an over-winning occurs while an emphasis effect is being performed, the emphasis effect and the over-winning effect are executed in overlapping fashion, so that the player can be clearly informed by the appearance of both effects that a rare and special situation occurs in which the irregular timing of the cumulative number of winning balls reaching a specific number coincides with the irregular timing of an over-winning, thereby further enhancing the player's sense of elation and accomplishment, and as a result, making the game more entertaining.

According to the second embodiment, when an over win or bonus win occurs in a situation where a specific error with a relatively high priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing occurs, the execution of the over win or bonus win effect is restricted so that the occurrence of a serious error in the gaming machine is not overlooked. On the other hand, when an over win or bonus win occurs in a situation where a non-specific error with a relatively low priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing occurs, there is no particular harm caused by allowing the execution of the over win effect and the bonus win effect, and if the over win effect is hindered by the error notification effect, the player's motivation to play may be reduced, so the over win effect is executed. In this way, by appropriately notifying the occurrence of the error and the over win according to the type of error that occurs in the gaming machine, the player's motivation to play can be maintained without excessively hindering the occurrence of the over win effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the second embodiment, when a streak continues, the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed not only while the special game is being played, but also in the electric support state after the special game ends. This is expected to encourage the player to play in hopes of further increasing the cumulative number of winning balls during the streak, which can further increase the player's desire to hit a jackpot and improve the operating rate of the gaming machine, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the second embodiment, when a special game is being played, a bonus prize presentation is executed when a game ball enters the general prize opening P64 located in the right area PA2, while a bonus prize presentation is not executed even if a game ball enters the general prize openings P61-P63 located in the left area PA1. This prevents the bonus prize presentation from being generated randomly and becoming monotonous (repetitive). It also increases the joy of an incidental prize in the general prize opening P64 that occurs as a result of shooting a game ball with the aim of winning the large prize opening P54, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the second embodiment, when an over win and a bonus win occur substantially simultaneously during the execution of a special game, the over win effect and the bonus win effect are executed in overlapping fashion, so that the player can be clearly notified of both the over win and the bonus win that occur incidentally as a result of playing a game aiming for the game ball to enter the big win port P54. This makes the special game more interesting and prevents the effects during the big win from becoming monotonous, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the second embodiment, while restricting the execution of the over prize winning effect or bonus prize winning effect during the jackpot end demo period, it allows the execution of the over prize winning effect or bonus prize winning effect during the interval period immediately after the final round of play. This makes it possible to prevent the overall game presentation from lacking consistency due to an interruption of one of the winning effects (over prize winning effect or bonus prize winning effect) even though the end of the special game is announced during the jackpot end demo, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the second embodiment, if multiple bonus wins occur within a specified period during special play, the execution of the multiple bonus win effects is permitted, while if multiple over wins occur within a specified period during special play, only the over win effect corresponding to the first of the multiple over wins is executed, thereby preventing the over win effects from occurring excessively and becoming monotonous (stale), thereby making it possible to improve the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, according to the second embodiment, a prize ball signal can be output once when one gaming ball enters the general winning port P64, but by configuring the system so that a prize ball signal can be output twice when one gaming ball enters the large winning port P54, the operating status of the gaming machine can be properly managed by the hall computer, and the true operating status of the gaming machine can be notified to the player by the data display, allowing the player to use it as information for selecting a gaming machine or as reference information for playing, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the second embodiment, the cumulative number of winning balls is notified by numerical information (e.g., "1000pt"), but this is not limited to the configuration, and the cumulative number of winning balls may be notified by image information such as an icon or meter.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the count-up effect for the cumulative number of winning balls during a winning streak (big prize opening count-up effect, general prize opening count-up effect) was described as an example, but this is not limited to this configuration, and the same effect can be achieved by applying the above characteristic configuration to the count-up effect (big prize opening count-up effect, general prize opening count-up effect) for the cumulative number of winning balls (number of winning balls during a jackpot) during the execution of one jackpot game.

[Third embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment described above, and the following description will be given to the same parts with the same reference numerals and will omit the description, and will mainly describe the different parts. In other words, in the following description, except in special cases, it is possible to apply the configuration common to the second embodiment.

The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment will be explained below in order. Note that the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment employs a small win rush in which "small wins" occur frequently as a result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol when the gaming state is a latent probability change gaming state. The playability of this small win rush will be described later.

The special symbol hit/miss judgment of the third embodiment will be explained. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of a special symbol hit/miss lottery table of the third embodiment. In the figure, (A) is referred to in a game state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated, and (B) is referred to in a game state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated. In this special symbol hit/miss lottery table, the random number range of the special symbol hit random number value and the hit/miss judgment result (jackpot, small hit, miss) are associated. As shown in FIG. 98, in the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol, in the game state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated, the hit is determined when the special symbol hit random number value falls within the range of "0 to 204", and in the game state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the hit is determined when the special symbol hit random number value falls within the range of "0 to 818". In other words, when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability of winning a jackpot changes from a low probability of "1/320" to a high probability of "1/80". In this way, the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the game state, but the probability of winning a jackpot is designed to be equal for the first special symbol hit/miss judgment and the second special symbol hit/miss judgment. Here, even if the result of the hit/miss judgment does not correspond to a jackpot, the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol has a relatively high probability of "1/1.1" to win a small jackpot. The probability of winning a small jackpot is designed to be the same regardless of the game state (low probability state, high probability state). In this third embodiment, a small jackpot is set only for the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol, but for example, a small jackpot may also be set for the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol, and the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol may have a higher probability of winning a small jackpot than the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol.

In the third embodiment, if the result of the hit/miss judgment for one of the first and second special symbols is a jackpot, and the hit/miss judgment for the other special symbol is executed while the variable display of that special symbol is in progress (during the variable display of a jackpot), the hit/miss judgment result for the other special symbol is prohibited from deriving a jackpot, and only a minor hit or miss is derived. If the result of the hit/miss judgment for the other special symbol corresponds to a jackpot, the result of the hit/miss judgment is forcibly changed from a jackpot to a miss. In other words, in the above special symbol winning/losing lottery table, when the game state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated, if the random number value of the special symbol winning falls within the range of "0 to 204", the result of the winning/losing judgment is forcibly made a miss (a big win is replaced with a miss), and when the game state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, if the random number value of the special symbol winning falls within the range of "0 to 818", the result of the winning/losing judgment is forcibly made a miss (a big win is replaced with a miss). As a modified example, in addition to the above special symbol winning/losing lottery table, a table for no big win lottery that does not include a big win judgment value (random number range) as a result of the winning/losing judgment of the special symbol may be prepared, and during the jackpot fluctuation display of one special symbol, a method may be adopted in which a small win lottery is performed in which the result of the winning/losing judgment is only a small win or a miss by referring to a table dedicated to the no big win lottery processing instead of the above special symbol winning/losing lottery table. In addition, in this modified example, if the specifications do not include a small win as a result of the hit/miss determination, a method may be adopted in which a miss is immediately determined without performing a hit/miss determination.

Next, the jackpot type (jackpot breakdown) of the third embodiment will be explained. In this third embodiment, if the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is a "jackpot," the jackpot type (jackpot pattern, pattern group) is determined by referring to the special pattern jackpot pattern table shown in FIG. 99.

Figure 99 (A) is a diagram showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, the symbol group, jackpot type, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize winning port P54 for each round are associated with the special symbol winning symbol random number value (in this example, for convenience, the description of the stop symbol is omitted). In the first special symbol jackpot table, four types of jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, they are divided into 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D). For the 10R special jackpot (symbol group A), the specified number of rounds for the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize winning port P54 in one round of play is 28 seconds. For the 4R special jackpot 1 (symbol group B), 4R special jackpot 2 (symbol group C), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D), the specified number of rounds for the jackpot game is 4 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize winning port P54 in one round of play is 28 seconds.

FIG. 99(B) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, the symbol group, the jackpot type, the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize winning port P54 in each round are respectively associated with the special symbol winning symbol random number value (in this example, for convenience, the description of the stop symbol is omitted). In the second special symbol jackpot table, five types of jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, they are divided into 10R specific jackpot (symbol group E), 6R specific jackpot (symbol group F), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H), and 2R normal jackpot (symbol group I). For a 10R special jackpot (symbol group E), the prescribed number of rounds for the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize winning port P54 in one round game is 28 seconds. For a 6R special jackpot (symbol group F), the prescribed number of rounds for the jackpot game is 6 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize winning port P54 in one round game is 28 seconds. For a 4R special jackpot 1 (symbol group G) and a 4R special jackpot 2 (symbol group H), the prescribed number of rounds for the jackpot game is 4 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large prize winning port P54 in one round game is 28 seconds. For a 2R normal jackpot (
For the symbol group I), the prescribed number of rounds for the big win game is two rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big win port P54 in one round of play is two seconds.

Of the various types of jackpots, each jackpot except for the 2R normal jackpot is a jackpot that triggers the execution of a long-open round game in which the large prize winning port P54 is open for a long time (28 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. On the other hand, the 2R normal jackpot is a jackpot that triggers the execution of a short-open round game in which the large prize winning port P54 is open for a short time (2 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. In this embodiment, the long-open round game is a round game in which the opening time of the large prize winning port P54 is set so that a specified number of game balls (full count: 15 balls) can or can be easily inserted into the large prize winning port P54. The short-open round game is a round game in which the opening time of the large prize winning port P54 is set so that a specified number of game balls (full count: 15 balls) cannot or cannot be easily inserted into the large prize winning port P54.

Although not shown, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a small win, one small win symbol (symbol group) is selected from a plurality of small win symbols (symbol groups), and when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the selected small win symbol (symbol group) is displayed stationary. The opening and closing pattern (opening time, number of openings) of the large prize opening P54 in the small win game may be configured to differ depending on the type of small win symbol.

Next, the game states of the third embodiment will be described. Figure 100 is a transition diagram of the game states and presentation modes in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, multiple game states are set, including a "normal game state," a "time-saving game state," a "latent probability game state," and a "probability change game state." The types of game states are as follows: (1) a game state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol, and the electric chute support function are activated is called a "probability variation state" or "probability variation game state", (2) a game state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated but the electric chute support function is not activated is called a "latent probability variation game state (latent probability variation game state)" or "latent probability variation state", (3) a game state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is not activated but the variation time shortening function of the special symbol and the electric chute support function are activated is called a "time shortening state" or "time shortening game state", and (4) a state in which all functions are not activated is called a "normal state" or "normal game state". Here, the "probability variation game state", the "latent probability variation game state", and the "time shortening game state" can all be said to be game states that are more advantageous to the player than the "normal game state". In addition, each game state can be expressed as (1) a high probability high base state for a high probability game state, (2) a low probability low base state for a low probability game state, (3) a low probability high base state for a time-saving game state, and (4) a low probability low base state for a normal game state, depending on the combination of the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol (high probability state/low probability state) and the operating state of the electric chute support function (high base state/low base state). Here, with regard to the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol, it is sufficient that at least the fluctuation time of the special symbol that is the main focus of the game in that game state, between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, is shortened. In other words, the special symbol change time reduction function can be said to be operating if the change time of the first special symbol is reduced in a game state where the change display of the first special symbol is the main focus of the game (normal game state), and if the change time of the second special symbol is reduced in a game state where the change display of the second special symbol is the main focus of the game (time-saving game state, potential probability game state, probability variable game state).

FIG. 101 is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table in the third embodiment. In the game state setting table, for each jackpot type (type of pattern group), a game state to which the game will transition after the jackpot game ends is set. In this embodiment, when the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game ends is set according to (A) the jackpot type (type of pattern group) and (B) the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The number of times each game state continues (the number of times the special pattern is displayed) is set based on the number of probability changes (the number of times the probability change is activated) when the probability change function of the special pattern is activated, the number of time reductions (the number of time reductions) when the time reduction function of the special pattern is activated, and the number of electric support times (the number of electric support times) when the electric chute support function is activated. Note that "ST" is a period (abbreviation for special time) during which the probability of a jackpot is set to a high probability up to a specified number of times of variable display. In other words, a machine that maintains a probability variable state (probability variable game state) until a specified number of times of variable display, but transitions to a normal state (normal game state) if no jackpot occurs within the specified number of times of variable display, is called an "ST machine." In this sense, the specified number of times of variable display is also called "specified ST number of times" or "ST number of times" below.

When the first special symbol wins a "10R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" or "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B)", the game state after the jackpot game ends will be set to a potential game state, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot win. When the game transitions to a potential game state after the jackpot game ends, the number of probability fluctuations is set to "100", the number of fluctuation time reductions is set to "100", and the number of electric support times is set to "0". This potential game state will continue until the number of times the special symbol fluctuations are displayed reaches the specified ST number (100), or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100). When the potential game state ends because the number of times the special symbol fluctuations are displayed reaches the specified ST number (100), the game will transition to the normal game state from the next special symbol fluctuation display.

If the first special symbol wins "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C)", regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot win, the game state after the jackpot play ends will be set to the special jackpot play state. If the game transitions to the special jackpot play state after the jackpot play ends, the number of probability changes will be set to "100 times", the number of time reductions will be set to "100 times", and the number of electric support times will be set to "100 times". This special jackpot play state will continue until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the specified number of ST times (100 times), or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified number of ST times (100 times). If the special symbol changes reach the specified number of ST times (100 times) and the special symbol changes ends the special jackpot play state, the game will transition to the normal play state from the next special symbol change display.

If a "4R normal jackpot (symbol group D)" is won with the first special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot win, the time-saving game state will be set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. If the time-saving game state is entered after the end of the jackpot game, the probability fluctuation count is set to "0 times", the fluctuation time reduction count is set to "70 times", and the electric support count is set to "70 times". This time-saving game state will continue until the number of times the special symbol fluctuation display reaches a specific number (70 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specific number (70 times). If the time-saving game state ends because the number of times the special symbol fluctuation display reaches a specific number (70 times), the game will enter the normal game state from the next special symbol fluctuation display.

In the case where the second special symbol is a "10R specific jackpot (symbol group E)", "6R specific jackpot (symbol group F)", or "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G)", the game state set after the end of the jackpot game differs depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot winning. Specifically, if the game state at the time of the jackpot winning is a normal game state, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to a high probability game state, and if the game state at the time of the jackpot winning is a time-saving game state, a high probability game state, or a low probability game state, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to a low probability game state. When the game moves to the probability change game state after the end of the jackpot game, the probability change number of times "100 times", the change time shortening number of times "100 times", and the electric support number of times "100 times" are set, and when the game moves to the potential probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, the probability change number of times "100 times", the change time shortening number of times "100 times", and the electric support number of times "0 times" are set. Therefore, the probability change game state continues until the number of times the special pattern changes and displays reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). When the probability change game state ends because the number of times the special pattern changes and displays reaches the specified ST number (100 times), the game moves to the normal game state from the next special pattern change display. Similarly, the potential probability game state continues until the number of times the special pattern changes and displays reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). When the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner reaches a prescribed number of ST times (100 times) and the potential game state ends, the game state transitions to a normal game state from the next time the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

If the "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H)" is won with the second special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot win, the game state after the jackpot play ends will be set to the special jackpot play state. If the game transitions to the special jackpot play state after the jackpot play ends, the number of probability changes will be set to "100 times", the number of time reductions will be set to "100 times", and the number of electric support times will be set to "100 times". This special jackpot play state will continue until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the specified number of ST times (100 times), or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified number of ST times (100 times). If the special symbol changes reach the specified number of ST times (100 times) and the special symbol changes ends the special jackpot play state, the game will transition to the normal play state from the next special symbol change display.

If a "2R normal jackpot (symbol group I)" is won with the second special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot win, the time-saving game state will be set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. If the time-saving game state is entered after the end of the jackpot game, the probability fluctuation count is set to "0 times", the fluctuation time reduction count is set to "70 times", and the electric support count is set to "70 times". This time-saving game state will continue until the number of times the special symbol fluctuation display reaches a specific number (70 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specific number (70 times). If the time-saving game state ends because the number of times the special symbol fluctuation display reaches a specific number (70 times), the game will enter the normal game state from the next special symbol fluctuation display.

As mentioned above, the occurrence of a big win can trigger a transition in the game state, but the occurrence of a small win does not trigger a transition in the game state. In other words, if the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is a small win, the game state at the time of the small win will continue as it is, except for the final variable display that is the end condition of that game state (for example, the variable display at the 100th spin of the probability game state and the potential game state, and the variable display at the 70th spin of the time-limited game state), and the transition control of the game state is not performed in response to the small win. In other words, if the game state before the small hit occurs is a normal game state, the game state during and after the small hit will also be a normal game state; if the game state before the small hit occurs is a time-limited game state, the game state during and after the small hit will also be a time-limited game state; if the game state before the small hit occurs is a probability variable game state, the game state during and after the small hit will also be a probability variable game state; if the game state before the small hit occurs is a potential probability game state, the game state during and after the small hit will also be a potential probability game state.

Next, the presentation modes of the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, multiple presentation modes are set, including a normal mode, a time-saving mode, a potential mode, and a probability mode. Depending on the game state (or the variable pattern selection state), one of the multiple presentation modes is selectively set, and a variable presentation corresponding to the set presentation mode is executed.

Basically, when the game state is the normal game state, the "normal mode" is set, when the game state is the time-saving game state, the "time-saving mode" is set, when the game state is the potential probability game state, the "potential probability mode" is set, and when the game state is the probability probability game state, the "probability probability mode" is set. However, when transitioning to the normal state based on the end of a non-normal game state (time-saving game state, potential probability game state, probability probability game state), the special presentation mode is set for the predetermined number of variable displays immediately after the game state transitions to the normal game state, and the normal presentation mode is set when the predetermined number of variable displays is completed. The predetermined number is "4 times" as the number of times the variable displays of the special symbol are made. This means that the cumulative number of times the variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are made is "4 times". In other words, when the number of times the variable displays of the special symbol reach the predetermined number,
It means that the total number of times of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol has reached "4 times". In addition, as a modified example, the special mode may be ended (or the normal mode may be shifted to) when only the variable display of the first special symbol has reached a predetermined number (4 times), or when only the variable display of the second special symbol has reached a predetermined number (4 times). Then, when any of the presentation modes is set, a background image (background image that is the back display of the decorative symbol) dedicated to the presentation mode is displayed on the screen as a presentation (variable presentation) that suggests that the presentation mode is in progress, and BGM dedicated to the presentation mode is output from the speaker P11. In this way, the background image and BGM are set to be different from each other for each presentation mode, so that the player can recognize which presentation mode is currently in progress from the type of background image or BGM.

Next, the change time (change pattern) of the special symbol in the third embodiment will be explained. Figure 102 is a comparison table of the change time of the special symbol in the third embodiment. Note that in this third embodiment, the change pattern table of the special symbol is not illustrated, but in reality, as in the second embodiment, the change time (change pattern) of the special symbol is selected by referring to the change pattern table of the special symbol.

In the figure, (A) shows the change time of the special symbols when the game is in the normal game state. The change time of the first special symbol is set to "3 to 60 seconds" if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss, and is set to "30 to 90 seconds" if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a jackpot. The change time of the second special symbol is set to "1000 seconds" if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a minor hit or a miss, and is set to "30 to 90 seconds" if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a jackpot. In other words, the change time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely long change time (1000 seconds) compared to the other change times, except when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a jackpot.

In the figure, (B) shows the change time of the special symbols when the game state is the time-saving game state, the sure-win game state, or the potential sure-win game state. The change time of the first special symbol is set to "1 second to 60 seconds" if the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, and is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds" if the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot. The change time of the second special symbol is set to "1 second to 3 seconds" if the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, is set to "0.5 seconds" if the result of the hit/miss determination is a minor hit, and is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds" if the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot.

Next, the normal symbol lottery in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 103 is a schematic diagram for explaining the normal symbol lottery in the third embodiment. In the figure, (A) shows the normal symbol win/lose lottery table, (B) shows the normal symbol variation pattern table, and (C) shows the normal electric role opening pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 103(A), the probability of winning with a normal symbol is set to "1/1.02" when the electric chute support function (normal symbol probability variation function) is not activated, and is set to "1/1.01" when the electric chute support function (normal symbol probability variation function) is activated. Therefore, in the third embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is a low base state or a high base state, the specification is such that a win is derived with an extremely high probability in the hit/miss determination of a normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 103(B), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to "0.5 seconds" when the electric chute support function (normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function) is not activated, and is set to "0.2 seconds" when the electric chute support function (normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function) is activated. In other words, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is in a low base state or a high base state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to an extremely short time. In addition, regardless of which normal symbol fluctuation pattern is selected, the normal symbol fixed stop time (fixed display time) is set to "0.1 seconds". In addition, the normal symbol fixed stop time (fixed display time) is the time when the normal symbol is fixedly displayed as stopped (the time when the completely stopped state is maintained).

As shown in FIG. 103(C), the opening pattern of the normal electric role P522 is set to "1 second open → 2 seconds closed → 1 second open → 2 seconds closed → 1 second open" when the electric chute support function (open extension function) is not activated, and is set to "5.9 seconds open" when the electric chute support function (open extension function) is activated. In other words, the opening pattern of the normal electric role P522 is that in the low base state, a 1 second opening action is performed three times, so the total opening time is "3 seconds," and in the high base state, a 5.9 second opening action is performed only once, so the total opening time is "5.9 seconds."

Next, the simultaneous change processing (change interruption processing, change forced stop processing) of the first special pattern and the second special pattern will be described. FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram for explaining the simultaneous change processing (change interruption processing, change forced stop processing) in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the first special pattern change start condition judgment and the second special pattern change start condition judgment are performed separately and independently, so that the first special pattern change display by the first special pattern display device P71 and the second special pattern change display by the second special pattern display device P72 are simultaneously performed in parallel (so-called parallel machine specifications). In other words, the operation reserved ball of the first special pattern and the operation reserved ball of the second special pattern are consumed separately and independently, so that the first special pattern and the second special pattern are configured to perform the corresponding winning/losing lottery and change display in parallel. Therefore, even if the display of one of the first and second special symbols is performed for a long time, the display of the other special symbol is performed in parallel with the display of the other special symbol, so that the display of the other special symbol does not stop while the display of the other special symbol is being performed. Note that, hereinafter, regarding the display of the first or second special symbol, the display of the big win is referred to as the "big win display," the display of the small win is referred to as the "small win display," and the display of the lose is referred to as the "lose display."

(Fluctuation interruption processing)
Here, when the display of one of the first and second special symbols is a big win display, a small win display, or a miss display, and the display of the other special symbol is a small win display, and the display of the one special symbol and the display of the small win display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, if the display of the small win display of the other special symbol ends before the display of the one special symbol ends, the display of the one special symbol is interrupted (the measurement of the time of the display of the one special symbol is interrupted) from the time when the display of the small win display of the other special symbol ends until the small win game ends. Note that the interruption of the display ... Then, when the small win game of the other special symbol ends, measurement of the fluctuation time related to the variable display of one of the special symbols is resumed, and when the combined time of the measured fluctuation time before the restart and the measured fluctuation time after the restart reaches a preset specified fluctuation time (the fluctuation time according to the design value), the variable display of one of the special symbols ends.

(Fluctuation forced stop processing)
On the other hand, when the variation display of one of the first and second special symbols is a big win variation display and the variation display of the other special symbol is a small win variation display or a miss variation display, in a situation where the big win variation display of one special symbol and the small win variation display or the miss variation display of the other special symbol are being executed in parallel, if the big win variation display of one special symbol ends before the small win variation display or the miss variation display of the other special symbol ends,
Even if the measurement time of the small win or miss variation display of the other special symbol reaches the preset specified variation time (variation time according to the design value), when the big win variation display of one special symbol ends, the small win or miss variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly ended in conjunction with or synchronized with it. In addition, when the small win variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly ended, the pattern (confirmed display pattern) stopped and displayed at the end of the small win variation display is replaced with a miss pattern from the small win pattern. In other words, the small win variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with a miss variation display (resulting in the small win game being canceled). This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the special game (big win game) of one special symbol and the special game (small win game) of the other special symbol compete with each other. In addition, when the display of one of the first and second special symbols starts as a jackpot display, the display of the other special symbol that starts to change after that should be a display of something other than a jackpot display (i.e., a miss display or a small win display, and if the win/loss random number corresponds to a jackpot in the win/loss determination process, the win/loss determination result is forcibly replaced with a miss and a miss display is displayed). Also, when the display of one special symbol starts as a jackpot display, the display of the other special symbol that starts to change after that may be a miss display (if the win/loss random number corresponds to a jackpot or a small win in the win/loss determination process, the win/loss determination result is forcibly replaced with a miss and a miss display is displayed).

<Small Hit RUSH Gameplay>
Next, the gameplay of the small win RUSH (latent mode) will be described. The small win RUSH (latent mode) is a gameplay that aims to generate small wins continuously and intensively until a big win is won by making small wins occur frequently in the hit/miss judgment of the second special pattern by making the game ball enter the second starting hole P52.

When the game state is a potential game state, when the game ball passes through the operation gate P53, a hit is derived in the hit/miss judgment of the normal pattern with an extremely high probability (1/1.02). In this potential game state (low base state), when the hit/miss judgment of the normal pattern is won, the normal electric role P522 performs an opening operation three times for one second. Therefore, if the right hit is made aiming at the second start hole P52, it is possible or easy to make the game ball enter the second start hole P52 while the normal electric role P522 is in the open state. In addition, in this potential game state, the winning probability of a small hit in the hit/miss judgment of the second special pattern is set to an extremely high probability (about 1/1.1), and the change time of the second special pattern when a small hit is won is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), so there is a high possibility that small hits will occur frequently based on the game ball entering the second start hole P52.

At this time, if a game ball enters the second starting hole P52 and wins a small win while the normal electric role P522 is performing three one-second opening operations, the variable display of the second special symbol ends in an extremely short time, and the small win game starts immediately. Here, the normal electric role P522 performs a two-second closing operation immediately after performing a one-second opening operation (excluding the third opening operation). Therefore, after the small win game starts, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 is likely to pass through the upper surface of the closed normal electric role P522 (movable member P524) and reach the large winning hole P54 while the normal electric role P522 is performing a two-second closing operation. Therefore, during the execution of the small win game, the game ball flowing down the right area PA2 passes through the upper surface of the movable member P524 without entering the normal electric role P522, and flows down toward the large prize winning hole P54 arranged diagonally below it, so that it can enter the large prize winning hole P54. Therefore, when the game state is a latent probability change game state, the game ball is made to enter the second start hole P52, the second special pattern is displayed with high frequency, and the small win game is executed with high frequency until the next big win occurs. As a result, by making about 2 to 3 game balls enter the large prize winning hole P54 every time a small win game is executed, and winning about 20 to 30 prize balls in succession each time, the player can proceed with the game while increasing the number of balls he has.

On the other hand, even when the game state is the time-saving game state or the probability of winning, the probability of a small win is extremely high when determining whether the second special symbol is a hit or not, and the fluctuation time of a small win is set to be extremely short, so small wins tend to occur frequently. However, in order to limit the playability of the small win rush to the potential probability game state only, and for game states other than the potential probability game state, the following measures have been taken to suppress the increase in balls held due to the small win game.

Specifically, when the game state is a time-saving game state or a probability-change game state, when the game ball passes through the operation gate P53, a win is derived with an extremely high probability (1/1.01) in the hit/miss judgment of the normal pattern. In this game state (high base state), when the hit/miss judgment of the normal pattern is won, the normal electric device P522 performs a single opening operation for 5.9 seconds. Therefore, if a right shot is made aiming at the second start hole P52, it is extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the second start hole P52 while the normal electric device P522 is in the open state. Furthermore, even in this time-saving game state or the probability of winning a small win in the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol, the probability is set to be extremely high (approximately 1/1.1), and the time for which the second special symbol changes when a small win is won is set to be extremely short (0.5 seconds), so there is a high possibility that small wins will occur frequently based on the game ball entering the second starting hole P52.

Here, if a game ball enters the second start port P52 while the normal electric device P522 is performing the opening operation for 5.9 seconds and wins a small win, the variable display of the second special pattern will end in an extremely short time, and the small win game will start immediately. At this time, if a small win game is executed while the normal electric device P522 continues to open (while the second start port P52 is in the open state), the game ball flowing down the right area PA2 is very likely to enter the normal electric device P522 that is open, and the possibility of it reaching the large win port P54 will be significantly reduced. On the other hand, when a small win game is executed after the normal electric role P522 is closed (after the second start port P52 is closed), the time from when the subsequent game ball passes through the operation gate P53 until the normal electric role P522 is opened is set to a very short time (variation time 0.2 seconds + stop time 0.1 seconds), so that the game ball is easy to enter the immediately opened normal electric role P522. In other words, during the execution of a small win game, the normal electric role P522 (second start port P52) is almost always open, and the game ball flowing down the right area PA2 is very easy to enter the open normal electric role P522 (second start port P52), and it is very difficult to enter the large prize port P54 located downstream. Therefore, when the game state is a time-saving game state or a sure-win game state (high base state), even if small wins occur frequently in the judgment of whether the second special symbol is a hit or not, the probability of the game ball reaching the large prize hole P54 is extremely low, and it is extremely difficult to increase the number of balls by playing with small wins.

Also, even when the game state is the normal game state, the winning probability of the small win in the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (about 1/1.1), but since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely long time (10 minutes or more), even if the player puts the game ball into the second starting hole P52 and plays a game aiming for a small win, the efficiency of consumption of the second special symbol is very poor, and small win games cannot be frequently generated. In addition, in the predetermined number of fluctuation displays immediately after the transition to the normal game state, the limited frequency selection state is set as the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is set relatively high (the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is not extremely long). In other words, in the predetermined number of fluctuation displays immediately after the transition to the normal game state (fluctuation display within 4 rotations), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (average fluctuation time) is shortened compared to the fluctuation display after the predetermined number of fluctuation displays has ended (fluctuation display after the 5th rotation), and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is set to be high.

Here, in the third embodiment, during the execution of the small win RUSH (latent mode), the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed in the cumulative prize ball display area P733 of the screen, and the cumulative number of prize balls can be notified to the player. When the game ball enters the general prize opening P64 during the execution of this small win RUSH (latent mode), the bonus prize performance is not performed, but the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed (general prize opening count-up performance). Also, during the execution of this small win RUSH (latent mode), when the game ball enters the large prize opening P54 in the small win game that is performed when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special pattern is a small hit, it is preferable that the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed (large prize opening count-up performance). As a variant, even if a game ball enters the general prize winning port P64 during the execution of the small win rush (latent mode), the bonus prize winning effect is not performed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is not added up (general prize winning port count-up effect).

In addition, by applying the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment described above, the third embodiment can also achieve the same effects as the second embodiment described above, thereby making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.

As a modified example of the third embodiment, the second starting hole P52 may be configured as a winning hole that is always open. In other words, in this modified example, the first starting hole P51 and the second starting hole P52 are configured as non-variable starting holes (starting holes that are always open), and no normal electric device is installed. FIG. 105 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to a modified example of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 105, the second starting hole P52 is arranged in the area to the right of the center ornament P21 (right area PA2), and the large winning hole P54 is arranged diagonally below to the left. The second starting hole P52 is provided as a starting winning hole corresponding to the second special symbol game, and is equipped with a second starting hole switch P521 for detecting the entry of a game ball. This second starting hole P52 is a winning hole that is always open and opens upward, and is mainly capable of receiving game balls (game balls hit to the right) that flow down the right area PA2. In other words, the second start port P52 also serves as the general winning port P64 into which the game balls flowing down the right area PA2 can always enter, and is configured to always be able to enter whether in a special game state or a non-special game state. In this modified example, when a game ball enters the second start port P52 (general winning port P64) during the execution of a special game, a bonus winning performance and a cumulative winning ball count addition display (general winning port count-up performance) are performed. Note that when a game ball enters the second start port P52 (general winning port P64) during the execution of a special game, only the cumulative winning ball count addition display (general winning port count-up performance) may be performed, and the bonus winning performance may not be performed. Also, even if a game ball enters the second starting hole P52 (general winning hole P64) during the execution of the small win RUSH (latent mode), the bonus winning effect is not performed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is not added (general winning hole count-up effect).

[Fourth embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment described above, and in the following, the same reference numerals will be used to designate the parts having the same configuration, and the description will be omitted, and the differences will be mainly described. In other words, in the following description, except in special cases, the configuration common to the second embodiment can be applied.

[Main control display device]
Fig. 106 is a schematic diagram showing the main control display device P27 of the fourth embodiment. The main control display device P27 is an LED display device that is controlled to be turned on by the main control board P100, and is disposed at a predetermined position on the front side of the game board P20. As shown in Fig. 106, the main control display device P27 is provided with various display means such as a first special symbol display device P71, a second special symbol display device P72, a first special symbol reserved lamp P73, a second special symbol reserved lamp P74, a normal symbol display device P75, a normal symbol reserved lamp P76, a round indicator lamp P77, a status indicator lamp P78, a right hit indicator lamp P79, and an error indicator lamp Er.

The first special pattern display device P71 is composed of eight LED segments G to N, and the changing display of the first special pattern is displayed according to the blinking pattern of the LED segments. The first special pattern is confirmed and displayed when the LED segments stop blinking and switch to a lit display. More specifically, the first special symbol is displayed in a state where only LED segments M and N are blinking and the other LED segments are off, and the first special symbol is displayed in a state where only LED segments M and N are on and the other LED segments are off if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss, and the combination of lighting and extinguishing of LED segments LED segments G to N differs depending on the type of special game to be executed if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit (for example, in the case of a 4R jackpot, the LED segments G to N are turned on/on/on/off/off/on/on/on or off/on/off/on/on/on/on/on, and in the case of a 16R jackpot, the LED segments G to N are turned on/on/on/on/on/on/on/on/on or off/on/on/off/on/off/on/on). Each LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The second special pattern display device P72 is composed of eight LED segments Q to X, and the changing display of the second special pattern is displayed according to the blinking pattern of the LED segments. The second special pattern is confirmed and displayed when the LED segments stop blinking and switch to a lit display. More specifically, the variable display of the second special symbol is a state in which only the LED segments W and X are flashing and the other LED segments are off, and the confirmed display of the first special symbol is a state in which only the LED segments W and X are on and the other LED segments are off if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss, and the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the LED segments LED segments Q to X differs depending on the type of special game being executed if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit (for example, in the case of a 4R jackpot, the LED segments Q to X are turned on/off/off/on/on/on/on or off/on/on/on/on/on/on/off/off, and in the case of a 16R jackpot, the LED segments Q to X are turned off/on/on/on/on/on/on/on/on/off or on/off/on/off/on/off/on/on/off). Each LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The first special symbol reserved lamp P73 is composed of two LED segments O and P, and displays the number of reserved balls (maximum 4) of the first special symbol by the lighting, blinking, and off display of the LED segments. Similarly, the second special symbol reserved lamp P74 is composed of two LED segments Y and Z, and displays the number of reserved balls (maximum 4) of the second special symbol by the lighting, blinking, and off display of the LED segments. More specifically, when one LED segment is off, it indicates 0 balls, when it is blinking, it indicates 1 ball, and when it is on, it indicates 2 balls, and a combination of two of each display expresses a maximum of 4 (for example, when LED segment O is on and LED segment P is on, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 4, and when LED segment O is blinking and LED segment P is off, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 1). Each LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The normal symbol display device P75 is composed of one LED segment C, and performs normal symbol variation display and confirmation display. More specifically, the normal symbol variation display is a state in which the LED segment C is flashing, and the normal symbol confirmation display is a state in which the LED segment C is off when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss, and a state in which the LED segment C is lit when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit. This LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The normal symbol reserved lamp P76 is composed of two LED segments A and B, and indicates the number of reserved normal symbols (maximum 4) by the lighting/flashing of the LED segments. More specifically, when an LED segment is off, it indicates 0, when it is flashing, it indicates 1, and when it is on, it indicates 2, and a combination of two of each indication expresses a maximum of 4 (for example, when LED segment A is on and LED segment B is on, it indicates that the number of reserved normal symbols is 4, and when LED segment A is flashing and LED segment B is off, it indicates that the number of reserved normal symbols is 1). Each LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The round indicator light P77 is composed of a left indicator light 67a and a right indicator light 67b, and indicates the number of times that rounds are played in a special game (prescribed number of rounds: the number of times the special electric device operates in succession). The left indicator light 67a is composed of two LED segments, and the right indicator light 67b is composed of seven LED segments, and the prescribed number of rounds of the special game is displayed by the combination of the lighting of each LED segment (for example, when only the central LED segment of the seven LED segments of the right indicator light 67b is turned off and the other LED segments are turned on, that is, when the six LED segments at the top, upper left, lower left, upper right, lower right, and bottom are turned on, a combination indicating "0" is displayed). For example, when the number "10" is lit on the round indicator light P77 (that is, when the left indicator light 77a, which is the indicator light showing the second digit of the round number, is lit in a combination showing the number "1" and the right indicator light 77b, which is the indicator light showing the first digit of the round number, is lit in a combination showing the number "0"), this indicates that the specified number of rounds for the special game is 10 times (10 rounds). Each LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp or simply as a lamp.

The status indicator light P78 is composed of two LED segments D and E, and indicates the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol by lighting up the LED segments. Each LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The right hit indicator light P79 is composed of one LED segment F, and the lighting of this LED segment indicates whether the game state is such that the game ball should be shot toward the right side of the game area PA (game state where the ball should be shot to the right). More specifically, if the game state is such as a high base state or a special game state, where the game ball should be shot toward the right side of the game area PA (game state where the ball should be shot to the right), the LED segment F lights up, and if the game state is such as a low base state (non-special game state), where the game ball should be shot toward the left side of the game area PA (game state where the ball should be shot to the left), the LED segment F is turned off. This LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp or simply as a lamp.

The error indicator lamp Er is composed of one LED segment Er, and notifies the occurrence of an error in the gaming machine PM (whether an error has occurred or not) by lighting up the LED segment Er. More specifically, when an error has occurred, the LED segment Er lights up, and when no error has occurred, the LED segment Er goes out. However, when a specific error has occurred, the LED segment Er may be turned off (for example, when the first error or the second error described above has occurred, the LED segment Er lights up, but when the third error described above or an error related to the setting function described later (an error that occurs when the setting value is out of range or when the setting change state is terminated without confirming the setting change) has occurred, the LED segment Er goes out). Note that this LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

[Winning Performances]
Next, the winning-related performance of the fourth embodiment will be described. The winning-related performance is a performance that is executed based on the game ball entering the big prize opening P54 or the general prize opening P64 during the execution of the big win game. This winning-related performance includes the big prize opening winning performance and the general prize opening winning performance, as in the second embodiment (see FIG. 60, etc.).

<Grand Prize Winner Production>
The large prize winning performance is a performance that is executed when a game ball enters the large prize winning port P54 during the execution of a big win game. As shown in FIG. 60, the large prize winning performance includes a large prize winning port normal winning performance, a large prize winning port over winning performance, and a large prize count-up performance. The contents of the large prize winning port winning performance (large prize winning port normal winning performance, large prize winning port over winning performance, and large prize count-up performance) have already been described in detail in the second embodiment, so a basic explanation will be omitted. In the following, as an execution condition of the large prize winning port over winning performance (over winning performance), the game balls that exceed the specified count number during the execution of one round game (in this embodiment, the 11th game ball or later) enter the large prize winning port P54 and the excess game balls are effectively detected by the large prize winning port switch P541 (i.e., an over winning occurs), which is also referred to as an "over winning performance execution condition". As described above, the big prize count-up effect is an effect display in which the number of prize balls awarded based on the entry of a game ball into the big prize opening P54 is counted up in order, but this big prize opening count-up effect is not limited to counting up the number of prize balls one by one, and may be a count-up display of the number of prize balls in multiples of two or more (for example, if the number of prize balls for one entry into the big prize opening P54 is 15, a count-up display of 15 balls at a time, such as 0 balls → 15 balls, may be displayed). Alternatively, the count-up display may be for each number obtained by dividing 15 by a predetermined number (here, "5"), such as 0 → 3 → 6 → 9 → 12 → 15), or it may be a count-up display of random numbers (for example, if the number of winning balls for one ball entering the large prize port P54 is 15, then the order would be 0 → 23 → 45 → 11 → 64 → 32 → 15, and the display is intended to show that the numbers are changing except for the first 0 and the last 15) (the same is true for the second and third embodiments described above). In addition, in the following, unless otherwise specified, the following terms are used synonymously: (a) the game ball entering the large prize opening P54, (b) the game ball entering the large prize opening P54, (c) the game ball being detected by the large prize opening switch P541, (d) the main control board P100 sending a large prize opening entry command, and (e) the performance control board P200 receiving the large prize opening entry command.

＜General prize winning performance＞
The general winning port winning performance is a performance that is executed when a game ball wins the general winning port P64. As shown in FIG. 60, the general winning port winning performance includes a general winning port normal winning performance and a general winning count-up performance. The contents of this general winning port winning performance (general winning port normal winning performance, general winning count-up performance) have already been described in detail in the second embodiment, so a basic explanation will be omitted. In the following, except in special cases, (a) a game ball wins the general winning port P64, (b) a game ball enters the general winning port P64, (c) a game ball is detected by the right general winning port switch P641, (d) the main control board P100 transmits a right general winning port winning command, and (e) the performance control board P200 receives the right general winning port winning command, are used synonymously.

<Characteristics of the winning performance>
Next, the features of the winning-related effects (big winning hole winning effect, general winning hole winning effect) of the fourth embodiment will be described. Note that the components of the winning-related effects of the fourth embodiment and the components of the winning-related effects of the second embodiment described above may be combined as appropriate, and when combining these, it is also possible to omit, replace, or change some or all of the components.

<Emphasis on cumulative winning balls>
First, the highlighting effect (highlighting) of the cumulative number of winning balls in the fourth embodiment will be described. As described above, the highlighting effect is an effect that notifies the player that the value of the cumulative number of winning balls has reached a predetermined specific value by a game ball entering the big winning hole P54 or the general winning hole P64 during the execution of a big winning game.

Figure 107 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display of an emphasis effect. As shown in Figure 107, the emphasis effect (emphasis display) is an effect in which an emphasis display image (in the illustrated example, "2500pt achieved") indicating that the value of the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a specific value is displayed in the emphasis display area P735 in the center of the screen. The emphasis display image "2500pt achieved" in the illustrated example is an image that combines the characters "2500pt", which are a display corresponding to the specific value (2500) that the value of the cumulative number of prize balls has reached, and the character "achieved", which is a display indicating that this specific value has been reached. This emphasis display image can be displayed separately and independently from the cumulative number of prize balls display (cumulative number of prize balls display image) displayed in the cumulative number of prize balls display area P733 of the screen, and while this emphasis display image is displayed, the emphasis display image and the cumulative number of prize balls display (cumulative number of prize balls display image) coexist. In this embodiment, the execution time of the highlighting effect (display time of the highlight image) is set to "3 seconds," as described in detail below, so that when the highlight image appears on the screen, the highlight image and the cumulative prize ball count display (cumulative prize ball count display image) are displayed simultaneously for only 3 seconds.

The emphasis effect is executed when a specific execution condition (called the "emphasis effect execution condition") is met during the jackpot game. This emphasis effect execution condition is met when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter mentioned above reaches a specific, predetermined value. This specific value is a number that corresponds to a multiple of the specified number of prize balls (2,500). In other words, the emphasis effect execution condition is met every time the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple of the specified number of prize balls (2,500, 5,000, 7,500, 10,000...), and the emphasis effect is performed based on the fact that this emphasis effect execution condition is met.

FIG. 108 is a schematic diagram showing an emphasis effect pattern table. This emphasis effect pattern table is referred to when selecting an emphasis effect pattern (display pattern of an emphasis image) to be displayed on the screen. In this emphasis effect pattern table, as shown in FIG. 108, the value (specific value) of the cumulative prize ball counter, the emphasis effect pattern to be determined, and the display content are associated with each other. In this embodiment, when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches "2500", an emphasis effect pattern PK1 is executed in which an emphasis display image showing the characters "2500pt achieved" is enlarged on the screen, when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches "5000", an emphasis effect pattern PK2 is executed in which an emphasis display image showing the characters "5000pt achieved" is enlarged on the screen, when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches "7500", an emphasis effect pattern PK3 is executed in which an emphasis display image showing the characters "7500pt achieved" is enlarged on the screen, When the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches "10,000", emphasis effect pattern PK4 is executed in which an emphasis display image showing the words "10,000 pts achieved" is enlarged on the screen, when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches "12,500", emphasis effect pattern PK5 is executed in which an emphasis display image showing the words "12,500 pts achieved" is enlarged on the screen, and when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches "15,000", emphasis effect pattern PK6 is executed in which an emphasis display image showing the words "15,000 pts achieved" is enlarged on the screen.
108 shows only six types of emphasis effect patterns PK1 to PK6, but even after emphasis effect pattern PK6 is executed, each time the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple value of the predetermined prize ball number (17500, 20000, 22500, ...), the emphasis effect pattern corresponding to that multiple value is executed. Note that, as emphasis effect patterns, each emphasis effect pattern corresponding to a multiple value of 2500 exists until the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple value of the predetermined prize ball number (97500), but after that, even if the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple value of the predetermined prize ball number (for example, 100000 or 102500), the emphasis effect pattern may not be executed. Furthermore, after the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple value of the predetermined prize ball number (97500), a special emphasis effect pattern such as "99999pt achieved" is displayed only once when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a value (99999) different from the multiple value of the predetermined prize ball number, and the emphasis effect pattern is not executed even if the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple value of the predetermined prize ball number (for example, 100000 or 102500). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of types of emphasis effect patterns (in other words, to configure so as not to prepare an unlimited number of types of emphasis effect patterns), while always being able to execute the emphasis effect until the prize ball acquisition value during the consecutive wins described later is significantly higher (for example, 10 times).

Here, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned multiple types of emphasis performance patterns are configured so that two consecutive emphasis performance patterns are not executed in an overlapping manner. In other words, the execution period or execution timing of one of the two consecutive emphasis performance patterns (e.g., emphasis performance pattern PK1) and the execution period or execution timing of the other emphasis performance pattern (e.g., emphasis performance pattern PK2) are not overlapped with each other (including the case where the entire execution period of both does not overlap and the case where a part of the execution period of both does not overlap). Here, if, during the execution of one of the two consecutive emphasis performance patterns (e.g., emphasis performance pattern PK1), the execution condition of the other emphasis performance pattern (e.g., emphasis performance pattern PK2) is satisfied (e.g., the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches 5000), even if the execution condition is satisfied, the other emphasis performance pattern may be configured not to be executed so that the display content does not become complicated. As a variant, if, of two consecutive emphasis patterns, one of the emphasis patterns (e.g. emphasis pattern PK1) is being executed while the other emphasis pattern (e.g. emphasis pattern PK2) is executing and the conditions for executing the other emphasis pattern are met (e.g. the value of the cumulative winning ball counter reaches 5000), the execution of one of the emphasis patterns may be forcibly terminated and the other emphasis pattern executed instead to avoid cluttering the display content.

The display size of the highlight image (highlight effect display) on the screen may be changed as appropriate according to the type of each highlight effect pattern. In other words, the display size of the highlight image (highlight effect display) may be configured to differ according to the type of each highlight effect pattern. For example, in order to prevent the highlight image (enlarged image) from going beyond the screen due to an increase in the number of digits of the cumulative prize ball number indicated by the highlight image, the size of the highlight image may be reduced when the number of digits of the cumulative prize ball number that has reached a specific number becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined number. As a modified example, for the highlight effect pattern when the value of the cumulative prize ball number counter reaches a multiple value (10000, 20000, 30000, etc.) of a specific prize ball number (e.g., 10000) in order to strengthen the degree of blessing for the player (to make the player feel even more blessed) than other highlight effect patterns, the display size of the highlight image (highlight effect display) may be increased or the execution time of the highlight effect may be lengthened (e.g., 5 seconds instead of 3 seconds).

<Special effects for emphasis>
Next, the special effect that accompanies the occurrence of the highlighting effect will be described. In this embodiment, when the highlighting effect is executed during the execution of a big win game, a special effect display (also simply called "special effect", or simply called "additional effect" or "additional display") is performed to apply a specific special effect to the highlighting image (add a specific effect) at the start and end of the highlighting effect, and a specific sound effect is output to auditorily notify the start and end of the highlighting effect.

Special effect displays include special effect displays in which the highlighted image itself is transformed (enlarged or reduced, inverted, moved, etc.) or changed (color tone change, brightness change, color/black and white switching, etc.) to produce special effects, and special effect displays in which an image different from the highlighted image imparts a visual effect to the highlighted image. In this embodiment, the special effect displays include fade-in displays in which the highlighted image gradually appears, fade-out displays in which the highlighted image gradually disappears, and effect displays in which a specific effect image (for example, countless small star images or electrified images) is displayed around the highlighted image. Mainly, effect displays and fade-in displays are performed when the highlighted image appears, and fade-out displays are performed when the highlighted image is erased (effect displays are not performed when the highlighted image is erased). As a modified example of this embodiment, a configuration may be made in which a special effect display is applied only at the start or end of the highlighting performance. In addition, as a special effect display, a concealment display in which a blurred image or a mosaic image is superimposed on the front side of the highlighted image may be performed.

The specific sound effect is a specific sound effect output at the start and end of the emphasis performance. The specific sound effect includes a specific sound effect A (e.g., a "bang" sound) that is output at approximately the same time as the start of the emphasis performance, and a specific sound effect B (e.g., a "pico" sound) that is output at approximately the same time as the end of the emphasis performance. As a modified example, the specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) may be output at the start of the emphasis performance, and the specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) may not be output at the end of the emphasis performance. Conversely, the specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) may be output at the end of the emphasis performance, and the specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) may not be output at the start of the emphasis performance. As another modified example, the specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) output at the start of the emphasis performance and the specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) output at the end of the emphasis performance may be configured with the same sound. In addition, when the specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) output at the start of the emphasis effect and the specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) output at the end of the emphasis effect are the same sound, the output levels (audio levels) of both sounds may be the same or different (for example, the output level of specific sound effect A may be higher than the output level of specific sound effect B, or the output level of specific sound effect B may be higher than the output level of specific sound effect A). In addition, it is preferable to configure the specific sound effects A and B to fade out (gradually reduce the volume) toward the end of output, which can enhance the impact when the specific sound effects start. In such a configuration, the specific sound effects A and B can be configured to fade in (gradually increase the volume) immediately after the output starts, which can further enhance the impact. In such a configuration, it is more effective to make the fade-out period (for example, 1 second) longer than the fade-in period (for example, 0.3 seconds) (it is possible to have a speed and swiftness of increasing the volume to the maximum volume and then gradually decreasing the volume).

Next, we will explain the timing of highlighting, special effect display, and output of specific sound effects during a jackpot game. Figure 109 is a time chart showing the timing of highlighting, special effect display, and output of specific sound effects during a jackpot game.

First, after the big win game is started, at timing T1, the execution period of the big win start demo ends, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls starts. Next, at timing T2, the execution of the highlighting effect starts when the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value. At the start of this highlighting effect, a special effect display (in the illustrated example, an effect display) is performed to apply a special effect to the appearance of the highlighting image, and a specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) is output to notify the start of the highlighting effect. Next, at timing T3, the execution of the highlighting effect ends. At the end of this highlighting effect, a special effect display (in the illustrated example, a fade-out display) is performed to apply a special effect to the disappearance of the highlighting image, and a specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) is output to notify the end of the highlighting effect. Then, at timing T4, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls ends, and then the current big win game ends. As shown in FIG. 109, at the start (timing T1) and end (timing T4) of the cumulative prize ball display, no special effect display is performed to apply a special effect to the cumulative prize ball display, and no special effect sound is output to notify the start and end of the cumulative prize ball display. In this time chart, the output period of the specific sound effect and the execution period of the special effect display at timings T2 and T3 are shown as being approximately the same period, but the output period of the specific sound effect may be longer than the execution period of the special effect display. By configuring in this way, the visibility of the highlighting effect (the visibility of the display related to the number of prize balls acquired) is not unnecessarily hindered by the special effect display, while the output of the specific sound effect that is not involved in the visibility is continued even after the execution of the special effect display is completed, so that the auditory blessing period for the player is long, and the synergistic effect of the visual blessing and the auditory blessing can be further expected. In addition, in this time chart, the output period of the specific sound effect at timing T2 is shown as being shorter than the execution period of the highlighting effect, but it may be the same (or approximately the same) as the execution period of the highlighting effect or longer than the execution period of the highlighting effect. In addition, in this time chart, the start timing of the specific sound effect and the start timing of the special effect display at timing T2 are shown as timings earlier than the start timing of the emphasis performance, but they may be the same timing (or approximately the same timing). Also, in this time chart, the end timing of the specific sound effect and the end timing of the special effect display at timing T3 are shown as timings later than the end timing of the emphasis performance, but they may be the same timing (or approximately the same timing).

<Execution time of emphasis effect>
Next, the execution time of the emphasis effect will be described. Fig. 110 is a time chart showing the relationship between the execution time of the emphasis effect and the execution time of the big win end demo.

The execution time of the emphasis effect is the time from when the display of the highlight image (enlarged display image) of the cumulative number of winning balls starts to when it ends. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, the execution time of the emphasis effect is set to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. Specifically, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "20 seconds" in common to all jackpot types (jackpot games) as in the second embodiment, and the execution time of the emphasis effect is set to "3 seconds", which is shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. In this embodiment, even if the emphasis effect is executed by any of the emphasis effect patterns among the multiple emphasis effect patterns (in the illustrated example of FIG. 108, the emphasis effect patterns PK1 to PK6), the execution time of the emphasis effect is set to "3 seconds". As a modified example, the execution time of the emphasis effect may be different depending on the type of emphasis effect pattern. For example, the execution time of the emphasis effect may be set to be longer as the value of the cumulative number of winning balls that is the target of this emphasis effect display (enlarged display) becomes larger (the emphasis effect may tend to be longer). As mentioned above, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is the waiting time from when the interval time (interval period) set after the end of the final round game of the jackpot game has elapsed until the end of the jackpot game. In other words, the execution time of the jackpot end demo does not include the interval time (interval period) set after the end of the final round game. It should be noted that this interval time (interval period) is set to "2 seconds" and is not set only after the end of the final round game of the jackpot game, but also the interval time (interval period) between each round game (for example, the period during which the large prize winning hole P54 is closed between the first and second rounds or between the fifth and sixth rounds). The interval time after the end of the final round game is set as the remaining time (grace time) of the final round game during which the entry of a game ball into the large prize winning hole P54 may be effectively detected within that interval time. On the other hand, the execution time of the big win end demo is set as a preparation period for the game after the end of the big win game separated from the final round of play, during which there is no possibility of validly detecting the entry of a game ball into the big win port P54.

In this embodiment, the execution time of the highlight effect (3 seconds) is set shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo (20 seconds), so that even if the highlight effect is executed in response to the cumulative number of winning balls reaching a specific value just before the end of the final round of play, the highlight effect is configured to be completed by the time the jackpot end demo ends. As a result, even if the highlight effect is executed just before the end of the final round of play, the highlight effect will not extend beyond the end of the jackpot game and extend to the variable display after the end of the jackpot game, and the division between the end of the jackpot game and the start of the variable display for the first rotation after the end of the jackpot game can be clearly defined. In addition, for example, if the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the large winning port P54 at the specified count number (here, the 10th count) in the final round of the jackpot game, the final round of the game ends and a 2-second interval period starts in order to satisfy the end condition of the final round of the game at approximately the same time as the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied. During this 2-second interval period, at least a part of the emphasis effect is executed. With regard to this "at least a part," the "achievement of 2500 points" in the emphasis effect is executed. (More specifically, when the emphasis effect starts, a special effect display is executed and then a display related to the number of prize balls such as "2500 points achieved" is displayed, but when the emphasis effect is executed during an interval period triggered by the ball entering the large prize entry port P54 at the specified count number in the final round of the jackpot game, the display related to the number of prize balls after the special effect display is executed during that interval period can be seen; in other words, the display of the number of prize balls can be seen before the jackpot end demo starts.) By configuring it in this way, it is possible to confirm which pattern the emphasis effect was (which number of prize balls was achieved) before the jackpot end demo period in which the performance related to the end of the jackpot game is executed starts, and a flow of performance that does not feel strange in line with the progress of the jackpot game can be realized.

The execution time of the emphasis effect may be set to be longer than the interval time between each round or between the final round play and the jackpot end demo. Also, if the emphasis effect is not completed by the end of the round play, the emphasis effect may be configured to be forcibly ended at the end of the round play, at the start of the interval period after the end of the round play, or at the start of the end demo.

<<Timing of highlighting effects, lighting effects, and special effects>>
Next, the execution timing of the highlighting effect, the light emitting effect, and the special effect will be described. Fig. 111 is a time chart showing the execution timing of the highlighting effect, the light emitting effect, and the special effect.

During the execution of the highlighting effect, the frame lamp P10 is lit or flashes in a special light-emitting mode. Examples of the special light-emitting mode include a mode in which the frame lamp P10 is lit in a special light-emitting color such as rainbow colors, or a mode in which the frame lamp P10 is lit in this special light-emitting color and flashes at a predetermined flashing interval (normal flashing interval). As a modified example of the special light-emitting mode, a mode in which the frame lamp P10 is lit in a predetermined light-emitting color such as blue and flashes at a flashing interval shorter than the predetermined flashing interval (normal flashing interval) may be adopted. In addition, during the execution of the highlighting effect, the board lamp P25 provided on the game board P20 (center decoration P21) may be configured to be lit or flashed in a special light-emitting mode. In addition, during the execution of the highlighting effect, the frame lamp P10 may be lit or flashed in a special light-emitting mode, and the board lamp P25 may be lit or flashed in a special light-emitting mode. In other words, during the execution of the highlighting effect, the frame lamp P10 may be lit or blinking in a special light-emitting mode and the board lamp P25 may be lit or blinking in a special light-emitting mode at substantially the same time (in parallel) (including the case where the light-emitting periods of both lamps P10 and P25 entirely overlap, and the case where the light-emitting periods of both lamps P10 and P25 partially overlap). Also, even when the highlighting effect is executed, some of the frame lamps P10 may not be lit or blinking in a special light-emitting mode. Specifically, when the frame lamp P10 is configured to have a frame lamp A (e.g., a top lamp), a frame lamp B (e.g., a side lamp), and a frame lamp C (e.g., a ball lamp), when an emphasis performance is performed in a situation where these frame lamps A to C are lit or flashing in a normal light-emitting mode, during the execution of this emphasis performance, some of the frame lamps A to C are lit or flashing in a special light-emitting mode (the light-emitting mode switches from the normal light-emitting mode to the special light-emitting mode), while the other lamps are lit or flashing in a normal light-emitting mode (the light-emitting mode is maintained in the normal light-emitting mode). In that case, it is preferable that the lamp (the effect button lamp) mounted on the effect button P15 is also lit or flashing in a normal light-emitting mode regardless of whether or not the emphasis performance is performed (the light-emitting mode is maintained in the normal light-emitting mode). Similarly, even when an emphasis performance is performed, some of the lamps of the board lamp P25 may be configured not to be lit or flashing in a special light-emitting mode. Specifically, if the panel lamp P25 is configured to have a panel lamp A and a panel lamp B, when an emphasis effect is executed in a situation where these panel lamps A and B are lit or flashing in a normal light-emitting mode, during the execution of this emphasis effect, one of the panel lamps A and B may be lit or flashing in a special light-emitting mode (the light-emitting mode switches from the normal light-emitting mode to the special light-emitting mode), while the other lamp is lit or flashing in the normal light-emitting mode (the light-emitting mode is maintained in the normal light-emitting mode).

While the highlighting effect is being performed, the reel lamp (the LED lamp provided on the movable reel P24) described below lights up or flashes in a predetermined light emission mode. Examples of this predetermined light emission mode include lighting up a predetermined light color such as blue, or flashing this predetermined light color at a predetermined flashing interval (normal flashing interval).

When an error occurs in the gaming machine, the frame lamp P10 and the accessory lamp described below are lit or flashing in an error light emission mode. An example of this error light emission mode is a mode in which a specific light emission color such as red is lit or flashing. When the frame lamp P10 and the accessory lamp described below are flashed in a specific light emission color, they may be flashed at a specified flash interval (normal flash interval), or at a flash interval shorter than this specified interval. In this way, when an error occurs in the gaming machine, the frame lamp P10 and the accessory lamp described below are lit or flashed in an error light emission mode different from the specified light emission mode and the special light emission mode, thereby accurately notifying the user that an error is occurring in the gaming machine.

During the execution of the highlighting effect, a special movable part P24 is driven in a predetermined operating mode to perform a special effect. As shown in FIG. 1, the movable part P24 is a logo part formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape using a translucent resin material. The front side of the movable part P24 is provided with a logo-shaped decorative part that depicts, for example, the title of the game machine. Inside the movable part P24, a special part lamp is mounted to illuminate the decorative part formed on the front side. The special part lamp is composed of, for example, a plurality of light-emitting elements arranged in a matrix. As the light-emitting element, a full-color LED having light-emitting elements capable of emitting R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is preferably used. This movable part P24 is designed so that the entire decorative part on the front side is illuminated when the special part lamp emits light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern.

The reel performance of this embodiment can be performed by combining the performance operation of the movable reel P24 and the light display of the reel lamp. In other words, the reel performance is configured as a performance in which the performance operation of the movable reel P24 (reel movement performance) and the light display of the reel lamp (reel light display) can be performed in a composite manner.

The movable reel performance is a performance in which the movable reel P24 executes a performance operation according to a predetermined performance operation pattern. This movable reel performance is performed mainly for the purpose of exerting a visual performance effect by operating the movable reel P24 (including holding or stopping at a predetermined position) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern or during the execution of the jackpot game, assuming that the initialization operation at the time of power-on has been completed. This movable reel performance is a performance that includes, for example, a lowering operation that lowers the movable reel P24 from the initial position to a predetermined movable position, a holding operation that stops and holds the movable reel P24 at the predetermined movable position (for example, the front position of the screen, which is the position after the lowering operation) for a predetermined time, and an raising operation that raises the movable reel P24 from the predetermined movable position to the initial position.

The role light emission performance is a performance in which the role lamp of the movable role P24 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern. In this embodiment, the light emission patterns (light emission modes) of the role lamp are set to light emission pattern 1 (white light emission), light emission pattern 2 (blue light emission), light emission pattern 3 (yellow light emission), and light emission pattern 4 (rainbow light emission, that is, multiple color gradation light emission), and one light emission pattern is selected from the multiple light emission patterns 1 to 4 (all of these light emission patterns are flashing modes). As described above, when the role lamp emits light during the execution of the highlight performance, light emission pattern 2 is selected. In other words, the predetermined light emission mode of the role lamp corresponds to light emission pattern 2 (blue light emission). Here, the light emission pattern of the role lamp is related to the level of the jackpot expectation, and when the role lamp emits light during the variable display of the special pattern, the jackpot expectation is set to increase by one step in the order of light emission pattern 1 (white light emission) < light emission pattern 2 (blue light emission) < light emission pattern 3 (yellow light emission) < light emission pattern 4 (rainbow light emission). Note that the light emission pattern of the special feature lamp is merely an example, and it may be configured to emit light in multiple colors in one light emission pattern, light emission patterns with different blinking times may be prepared, or the number of types of light emission patterns may be changed. Similarly to the special feature lamp, the frame lamp P10 may also be configured to be able to adopt light emission modes of light emission patterns 1 to 4. Similarly to the frame lamp P10, when an error occurs in the gaming machine, the special feature lamp may also be lit or blinking in a specific light color such as red as an error light emission mode.

Next, with reference to Figure 111, we will explain the specific execution timing of highlighting effects, light emission effects, and special effects during jackpot play.

First, at timing T1, the big win game starts. At this time, the movable role P24 waits in the initial position which is the starting point of the operation, and the role lamp is in a non-illuminating state (off state). Note that the role lamp may be configured to emit light in illumination pattern 1 (white light emission) instead of in a non-illuminating state (in that case, it should be noted that "illumination" in this time chart becomes "blue light emission" and "non-illumination" is replaced with "white light emission").

Next, at timing T2, the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific number (for example, 5,000), which triggers the execution of the highlighting effect to be met and the execution of the highlighting effect to begin. Also at this timing T2, the performance operation of the movable part P24 begins, and the light display of the part lamp (or the change from white light to blue light) begins. In other words, in this embodiment, the display of the highlighting effect, the performance operation of the movable part P24, and the light display of the part lamp (or the change from white light to blue light) begin at approximately the same time (these performances begin synchronously).

Next, at timing T3, the execution of the highlighting effect ends. Also at this timing T3, the performance operation of the movable part ends, and the light display of the part lamp (or the change from white light to blue light) ends. In other words, in this embodiment, the display of the highlighting effect, the performance operation of the movable part P24, and the light display of the part lamp (or the change from white light to blue light) end at approximately the same time (these effects end synchronously).

In this embodiment, the timing of the start and end of the highlighting effect, the timing of the start and end of the operation of the movable role P24, and the timing of the start and end of the operation of the role lamp (or the start of the change from white light emission to blue light emission) and the end of the light emission (or the start of the change from blue light emission to white light emission) are approximately simultaneous, so that these effects become a cohesive effect (a performance with a sense of unity), and the flow of each effect becomes easy for the player to understand. In addition, when executing the highlighting effect, instead of ending with the highlighting display (enlarged display) of the effect display device P70, the movable role P24 is operated and the role lamp is illuminated (or changes from white light emission to blue light emission), which further enhances the player's sense of satisfaction and superiority, and also makes it possible to appeal to surrounding players about the cumulative number of winning balls that is highlighted. In addition, the frame lamp P10 may also be configured to have the same configuration as the role lamp (i.e., to start/end the light emission display at each timing in the same way as the role lamp, or to start/end the change from white light emission to blue light in the same way as the role lamp).

In addition, as a modified example, the highlighting effect may be started after the performance operation of the movable role P24 and the light display of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) are started. In this way, the player has the expectation that the highlighting effect will be executed after the performance operation of the movable role P24 and the light display of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) are started, respectively, and the player's satisfaction and excitement at the fact that the highlighting effect has actually been executed can be increased. In addition, at that time, by starting the performance operation of the movable role P24 after the light display of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) is started, each performance can be progressed at a good tempo, such as the light emission of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) → the operation of the movable role P24 → the display of the highlighting effect. In addition, conversely, the light display of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) may be started after the performance operation of the movable role P24 is started. Even in this case, each performance can be performed at a good tempo, such as the operation of the movable role P24 → the illumination of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) → the display of the highlight performance. Note that the thing that is executed before the highlight performance may be either the operation of the movable role P24 or the illumination of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission), and the rest may be executed approximately simultaneously with the highlight performance. Note that the frame lamp P10 may also be configured to have the same configuration as the role lamp (i.e., to start/end the illumination display at each timing like the role lamp, or to start/end the change from white light emission to blue light like the role lamp at each timing).

In addition, after the execution of the highlighting effect is started, the performance operation of the movable role P24 and the light display of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) may be started. According to this configuration, the highlighting effect starts suddenly before the performance operation of the movable role P24 and the light display of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) are performed, so that it is possible to give surprise and unexpectedness to the player and to prevent the player from finding out that the highlighting effect is occurring. Note that what is executed after the highlighting effect may be either the operation of the movable role P24 or the light emission of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission), and the other may be executed approximately simultaneously with the highlighting effect. Note that the frame lamp P10 may also be configured to adopt the same configuration as the role lamp (i.e., start/end the light display at each timing like the role lamp, or start/end the change from white light emission to blue light like the role lamp at each timing).

Similarly, the highlighting effect may be configured to end after the performance operation of the movable role P24 and the light display of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) are completed. The one that ends before the highlighting effect may be either the operation of the movable role P24 or the light emission of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission), and the other may end approximately simultaneously with the highlighting effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to move to the next performance development immediately after the highlighting effect ends (without waiting for the end of the operation of the movable role P24 and the end of the light emission of the role lamp), making it possible to proceed with the game at a good tempo. The performance operation of the movable role P24 and the light display of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) may be configured to end after the execution of the highlighting effect. The one that ends after the highlighting effect may be either the operation of the movable role P24 or the light emission of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission), and the other may end approximately simultaneously with the highlighting effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the emphasis effect from being drawn out more than necessary, and by shifting the execution timing (end timing) of each, it is possible to create a sharp effect. The frame lamp P10 may also be configured to have the same configuration as the special lamp (i.e., to start/end the light emission display at each timing like the special lamp, or to start/end the change from white light emission to blue light like the special lamp at each timing).

During a jackpot game, the accessory lamp and frame lamp P10 emit light in a manner that corresponds to the progress of the jackpot game. Specifically, the jackpot performance that progresses during a jackpot game is a performance in which a moving image indicating that a jackpot is occurring (a moving image in which a character is introduced or a moving image in which characters fight each other) is played, and a song with or without lyrics is played. Depending on the progress of the jackpot performance, the accessory lamp and frame lamp P10 are configured to change and loop their emission modes in a chronological order, for example, from white light on → white flashing → yellow light on → yellow flashing → white light on → ... In this way, the predetermined light emission mode is changed according to the progress of the performance during the big win. As a further modified example, the highlighting performance is executed, and the light emission in the predetermined light emission mode is interrupted, and the role lamp and the frame lamp P10 may be configured to change to blue light emission. In such a configuration, the blue light emission of the role lamp and the frame lamp P10 may be terminated and the light emission in the predetermined light emission mode may be restored with the end of the highlighting performance (for example, if the highlighting performance is executed while the light emission mode of the role lamp and the frame lamp P10 is yellow, this yellow light emission is forcibly terminated and the light emission becomes blue, and when the highlighting performance is finished, the blue light emission is terminated and the light emission returns to yellow light, or the time during which the blue light emission has been performed has passed, and the predetermined light emission mode switching timing is crossed, and the light emission returns to yellow flashing instead of yellow light). In addition, the start timing of the blue light emission of the role lamp and the frame lamp P10 in such a configuration may be approximately simultaneous with, later, or earlier than the start timing of the execution of the highlighting performance, and may be approximately simultaneous with, later, or earlier than the start timing of the operation of the movable role lamp P24. In addition, when configured in this way, the timing at which the blue light emission of the reel lamp and frame lamp P10 ends may be approximately simultaneous with, later than, or earlier than the timing at which the execution of the highlighting effect ends, and may also be approximately simultaneous with, later than, or earlier than the timing at which the operation of the movable reel P24 ends (it should be noted that the aforementioned effects that are applied will differ depending on which timing is selected).

In addition to the role lamp and frame lamp P10, many other lamps are provided. Some of them include, for example, a start port lamp attached to the first start port P51 (usually lit or unlit in white, but when the reserved ball that is generated by winning in the first start port P51 is a reserved ball with a high probability of winning, a lamp that lights up in one of the following light emission modes in the order of the probability of winning: blue → green → red → rainbow) and an effect button lamp attached to the effect button (a lamp that lights up or unlit in white when it is not within the valid operation time, but lights up in blue when it is within the valid operation time). The start port lamp and effect button lamp also emit white light (lights up in white) during a jackpot game (during a jackpot performance), but unlike the role lamp and frame lamp P10, they emit white light (
It is configured to maintain a white light). In addition, in the case of any of the role lamp, frame lamp P10, starter lamp, and effect button lamp, when an error occurs in the gaming machine, regardless of the previous light emission mode (even if the light emission mode corresponds to the execution of the highlight effect or the light emission mode corresponds to the effect during the big win), the error light emission mode is always configured to be lit or flashed in a specific light emission color such as red.

<Relationship between the role production during fluctuation and the role production during the big win>
In this embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned specific movable role (movable role P24) performing a predetermined action and emitting light (also referred to as the "first role performance"), a specific movable role (a movable role other than the movable role P24) performing a predetermined action and emitting light (also referred to as the "second role performance") is prepared as various role performances. Although detailed illustration is omitted, for example, a door role (left and right door members) provided at the central opening of the center decoration P21 is exemplified as the specific movable role. The door role (left and right door members) is configured to be reciprocated in the left and right direction between an initial position (open position) and a movable position (closed position) in front of the screen of the performance display device P70. When the door role (left and right door members) is in the initial position (open position), the door role (left and right door members) is hidden on the back side of the game board P20, and almost the entire screen (display area) of the performance display device P70 is visible. On the other hand, when the door role (left and right door members) are in the movable position (closed position), the door role (left and right door members) overlap the front of the screen of the performance display device P70 (the left and right door members are adjacent to each other and completed), and the screen (display area) of the performance display device P70 becomes invisible or only a part of the display area is visible (at least the visible display area becomes smaller than the state in the initial position). In addition, this door role (left and right door members) also has a role lamp (light-emitting body) for illuminating the door member (left and right door members) like the above-mentioned movable role (logo role) 24. In this embodiment, the second role performance can be performed not only during the execution of a jackpot game (during the display of a highlighted image) but also during the variable display of the pattern. In other words, this second role performance is roughly divided into a variable role performance performed during the execution of the variable display of the pattern and a jackpot role performance performed during the execution of a jackpot game. In the following explanation, the "during-variation" role performance means a role performance in which a predetermined movable role (door role) performs a predetermined action and emits light while the variable display of the pattern is being executed, and the "during-jackpot" role performance means a role performance in which a predetermined movable role (door role) performs a predetermined action and emits light while the jackpot game is being executed. Also, the illumination of the role lamp in the "during-variation" role performance means that the role lamp of the predetermined movable role (door role) emits light while the variable display of the pattern is being executed, and the illumination of the role lamp in the "during-jackpot" role performance means that the role lamp of the predetermined movable role (door role) emits light while the jackpot game is being executed.

The during-variation role performance is performed, for example, when the decorative pattern is changing and before the SP reach develops (after the reach is established and before the SP reach develops), to suggest that the N reach will develop into an SP reach (for example, it is configured so that the development into an SP reach is confirmed by the execution of the during-variation role performance during an N reach), or when it notifies of a jackpot win at the win/lose branching point after the SP reach develops (the branching point where the final result of the SP reach will indicate either a jackpot or a miss) (for example, it is configured so that the execution of the during-variation role performance at the end of the SP reach confirms a jackpot, and not executing the during-variation role performance at the end of the SP reach makes the possibility of a miss very high). On the other hand, during a jackpot, the special effects are also used, for example, when an ally character launches a preemptive attack during the first jackpot gameplay in a battle scene with an enemy character (a jackpot promotion teasing effect), resulting in a promotion to a jackpot, i.e., when a jackpot promotion effect is executed; or when the provisional number of rounds announced when a jackpot occurs (when the jackpot pattern stops and is displayed) is a false number of rounds, and the true number of rounds (a number greater than the provisional number of rounds) is announced during the jackpot gameplay, resulting in a round promotion, i.e., when a round promotion effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the number of times that the variable feature performance is performed during one variable display and the number of times that the jackpot feature performance is performed during one jackpot game are configured to be different. In detail, the variable feature performance may occur only once or multiple times during the execution of the variable display (naturally, it may not occur even once). The case where it occurs only once is exemplified by the above example, where the first variable feature performance that suggests that the variable display will develop into an SP reach is performed before the SP reach development of the variable display, and then the second variable feature performance is not performed because the variable display is confirmed to be a miss. The case where it occurs multiple times is exemplified by the above example, where the first variable feature performance that suggests that the variable display will develop into an SP reach is performed before the SP reach development of the variable display, and then the second variable feature performance that notifies the jackpot win at the win/lose branch after the SP reach development is performed. Note that the variable feature performance may be performed three or more times during the execution of the variable display.

On the other hand, the jackpot role effect does not occur multiple times during the jackpot game, but always occurs only once (naturally, there are cases where it does not occur even once). In other words, as explained in the above example, during the jackpot game, only one of the jackpot role effect performed at the time of the probability variable promotion (during the execution of the probability variable promotion effect) and the jackpot role effect performed at the time of the round promotion (during the execution of the round promotion effect) can be performed. Here, in this embodiment, during the jackpot game, the role effect (first role effect) performed at the time of the emphasis effect and the emphasis effect is not performed during the execution of the probability variable promotion effect, and the role effect (first role effect) performed at the time of the emphasis effect and the emphasis effect is not performed during the execution of the round promotion effect. On the other hand, during the jackpot game, after the execution of the probability variable promotion effect is finished or before the execution of the probability variable promotion effect is started, the role effect (first role effect) performed at the time of the emphasis effect and the emphasis effect during the same jackpot game can be performed. Similarly, during the execution of a jackpot game, after the execution of the round promotion effect is completed, or before the execution of the round promotion effect is started, the highlight effect and the role effect (first role effect) performed at the time of the occurrence of the highlight effect during the same jackpot game are configured to be executable. In either case, it is preferable that the promotion effect (probability promotion effect or round promotion effect) and the role effect (first role effect) performed at the time of the occurrence of the highlight effect are not executed overlappingly (including the case where the entire execution period of both effects does not overlap, and the case where a part of the execution period of both effects does not overlap). In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, the promotion effect (probability promotion effect or round promotion effect) and the highlight effect are executed overlappingly, but the promotion effect (probability promotion effect or round promotion effect) and the role effect (first role effect) performed at the time of the occurrence of the highlight effect may be configured not to be executed overlappingly (including the case where the entire execution period of both effects does not overlap, and the case where a part of the execution period of both effects does not overlap). In addition, as a further modified example, during the execution of a jackpot game, only one of the role effect (first role effect) performed when an emphasis effect occurs, the role effect (second role effect) performed when a probability variable is promoted, and the role effect (second role effect) performed when a round is promoted may be performed. In other words, the emphasis effect, the probability variable promotion effect, and the round promotion effect are configured not to be performed simultaneously during one jackpot game. In other words, the emphasis effect may not be performed in a jackpot game in which a probability variable promotion effect is performed, and the emphasis effect may not be performed in a jackpot game in which a round promotion effect is performed. Note that the probability variable promotion effect and the round promotion effect may be configured to be equipped with only one of them. Also, the general effects that ultimately notify the player that a jackpot game is actually a high-profit jackpot game, such as the probability variable promotion effect and the round promotion effect, are referred to as "promotion effects". In addition, as a further modification, during the execution of a jackpot game, the emphasis effect and the role effect (first role effect) performed when the emphasis effect occurs are not executed during the execution of the aforementioned reserved consecutive win suggestion effect (reserved consecutive win effect), while the emphasis effect and the role effect (first role effect) performed when the emphasis effect occurs during the same jackpot game can be executed after the execution of the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect (reserved consecutive win effect) ends, or before the execution of the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect (reserved consecutive win effect) starts. In other words, during the execution of a jackpot game, it is preferable that the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect (reserved consecutive win effect) and the role effect (first role effect) performed when the emphasis effect occurs do not overlap (including the case where the execution periods of both effects do not overlap in whole and the case where the execution periods of both effects do not overlap in part). When configured in this manner, the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect (reserved consecutive win effect) and the emphasis effect are executed in an overlapping manner, but the reserved consecutive win suggestion effect (reserved consecutive win effect) and the role effect (first role effect) that is executed when the emphasis effect occurs may be configured not to be executed in an overlapping manner (including cases where the entire execution period of both effects does not overlap and cases where only part of the execution period of both effects does not overlap).

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, the number of times that the during-variation device performances performed during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation display (jackpot fluctuation display) (the during-variation device performances that can be executed during one jackpot fluctuation) may differ from the number of times that the during-variation device performances performed during the execution of the jackpot game after the fluctuation display stops (the during-jackpot device performances that can be executed during one jackpot game). In this way, by configuring the game so that the during-variation device performances can be executed multiple times during the execution of the fluctuation display, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and unexpectedness, and to increase the player's interest in the occurrence of the device performances (the during-variation device performances). In addition, when a during-variation role performance is executed while the jackpot variation display is being executed, and a jackpot role performance is executed during the execution of a jackpot game that is performed after the end of the jackpot variation display, the light emitted by the role lamp in the during-jackpot role performance is more likely to be a specific mode of light emission (rainbow light emission) than the light emitted by the role lamp in the during-variation role performance, or, it is preferable that the type of light emitted by the role lamp in the during-variation role performance also includes light emission in modes other than the specific mode of light emission (including blue light emission in addition to rainbow light emission), while the light emitted by the role lamp in the during-jackpot role performance only includes light emission in a specific mode (only rainbow light emission). More specifically, the illumination color of the role lamp during the role performance during a jackpot is only rainbow regardless of whether an emphasis performance or a promotion performance is performed, but the illumination color of the role performance during change that indicates the development from N reach to SP reach before the development of the SP reach (after the reach is established and before the development of the SP reach) is blue, and the illumination color of the role performance during change that notifies of a jackpot win at the win/loss branch scene after the development of the SP reach (the branch scene where the final result of the SP reach indicates either a jackpot or a loss) is rainbow. In this embodiment, the number of times that the variable feature performance performed during the execution of the jackpot variable display is different from the number of times that the jackpot feature performance performed during the execution of the jackpot game after the jackpot variable display has stopped is illustrated as being different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times that the variable feature performance performed during the execution of a certain jackpot variable display is different from the number of times that the jackpot feature performance performed during the execution of a certain jackpot game (a jackpot game performed after the jackpot variable display different from the certain jackpot variable display has stopped) may be different. In other words, regardless of whether or not there is a relationship between the jackpot variable display and the jackpot game that are triggered by the same one jackpot, the number of times that the variable feature performance performed during the execution of one jackpot variable display is different from the number of times that the jackpot feature performance performed during the execution of one jackpot game may be different. In addition, in this embodiment, the light color of the role lamp in the variable role performance performed during the execution of the jackpot variable display and the light color of the role lamp in the jackpot role performance performed during the execution of the jackpot game after the jackpot variable display has stopped can be different light colors, but this is not limited to this, and the light color of the role lamp in the variable role performance performed during the execution of a certain jackpot variable display and the light color of the role lamp in the jackpot role performance performed during the execution of a certain jackpot game (a jackpot game performed after the jackpot variable display different from the certain jackpot variable display has stopped) can be different light colors. In other words, regardless of whether there is a relationship between the jackpot variable display and the jackpot game triggered by the same one jackpot, the light color of the role lamp in the variable role performance performed during the execution of one jackpot variable display and the light color of the role lamp in the jackpot role performance performed during the execution of one jackpot game can be different light colors.

Here, the execution time of the variable feature performance and the big win feature performance will be described.
FIG. 112(A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the role presentation during fluctuation, and FIG. 112(B) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the role presentation during a jackpot.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the operation time TD1 of the door role in the variable role performance and the operation time TD2 of the door role in the big win role performance are configured to be different. Here, the operation times TD1 and TD2 of the door role are basically the time from when the door role (left and right door members) start their operation with the initial position as the starting point of the operation to when they return to the initial position and end their operation. In addition, these operation times TD1 and TD2 include not only the movement time when the door role is actually moving, but also the holding time (post-movement position holding time) when the door role is stopped and held at a predetermined movable position. In this embodiment, this holding time (post-movement position holding time) is the time when the door role is held in an integrated state (the door role is completed state) by the left and right door members being adjacently arranged at their respective movable positions. In this embodiment, the holding time (post-movement position holding time) of the door role in the jackpot role performance is longer than the holding time (post-movement position holding time) of the door role in the variable role performance, so that the respective operation times TD1 and TD2 are different. In other words, when comparing the execution time TD1 of the variable role performance with the execution time TD2 of the jackpot role performance, the closing direction movement time during which the door role (left and right door members) move in the closing direction from the initial position to the movable position is equal to the opening direction movement time during which the door role (left and right door members) move in the opening direction from the movable position to the initial position, but the holding time (post-movement position holding time) during which the door role (left and right door members) are held at a predetermined movable position is different, so that the operation time TD2 of the movable role in the jackpot role performance is longer than the operation time TD1 of the movable role in the variable role performance. According to this configuration, even when the during-changing device performance is executed while the jackpot changing display is being executed, and the jackpot device performance is executed during the jackpot game that is played after the jackpot changing display has ended, that is, even when multiple device performances are performed between the start of the jackpot changing display and the end of the jackpot game, since the operation times of the door device (left and right door members) are different, it is possible to give the player a different impression even if the operation sequence of the door device (left and right door members) is the same, thereby making it possible to further enrich the variety of device performances. In this embodiment, the operation time TD1 of the door role in the variable role performance performed during the execution of the jackpot variable display is different from the operation time TD2 of the door role in the jackpot game after the jackpot variable display is stopped, but this is not limited to this, and the operation time TD1 of the door role in the variable role performance performed during a certain jackpot variable display and the operation time TD2 of the door role in the jackpot game during the execution of a certain jackpot game (a jackpot game performed after the jackpot variable display different from the certain jackpot variable display is stopped) may be different. In other words, regardless of whether there is a relationship between the jackpot variable display and the jackpot game triggered by the same one jackpot, the operation time TD1 of the door role in the variable role performance performed during the execution of one jackpot variable display and the operation time TD2 of the door role in the jackpot game during the execution of one jackpot game may be different. According to this, as in the above-mentioned effect, even if the same door role is used in the role performance (second role performance), it is possible to give a different impression to the player, and the variety of the role performance can be further enriched. Also, regarding the operation time TD1 of the door role in the variable role performance, the operation time of the variable role performance that notifies the winning of the jackpot at the scene of the win/loss branch after the SP reach development (the branching scene of whether the final result of the SP reach is a content indicating a jackpot or a content indicating a loss) is longer than the operation time of the variable role performance that suggests the development from N reach to SP reach before the SP reach development (after the reach is established to before the SP reach development), so that the variation of the role performance within one big win change (within one big win change display) can be further enriched. Here, as a modified example, the operation time TD1 of the door device in the variable device performance may be configured to be longer than the operation time TD2 of the door device in the jackpot device performance. By configuring it in this way, even during a jackpot game, which has a limited execution period (the end of the execution period may be brought forward depending on the ball entry status into the large winning port P54), the jackpot device performance can be completed as much as possible within that execution period, and the variable device performance executed during the predetermined variable time can further heighten the player's sense of anticipation by having a long execution time.

As a modified example, when a predetermined movable part (door part) or a specific movable part (movable part P24) is held at a predetermined movable position, the movable part may be transformed into another form or combined with another movable part to form a completed body. In addition, the closing direction movement time and the opening direction movement time of the door part in the variable part performance may be made different from the closing direction movement time and the opening direction movement time of the door part in the jackpot part performance, so that the operation time TD1 of the door part in the variable part performance and the operation time TD2 of the door part in the jackpot part performance may be made different. In addition, as described above, the operation time TD2 of the door part in the jackpot part performance may be configured to be shorter than the operation time TD1 of the door part in the variable part performance, or the operation time TD1 of the door part in the variable part performance and the operation time TD2 of the door part in the jackpot part performance may be configured to be the same time. In addition, when the variable role performance is executed multiple times during the display of the changing pattern, as described above, for example, the execution time of the variable role performance (variable role performance that notifies the confirmation of a jackpot) performed at the scene of the winning/losing branch after the SP reach development may be longer than the execution time of the variable role performance performed before the SP reach development, or conversely, the execution time of the variable role performance (variable role performance that notifies the confirmation of a jackpot) performed at the scene of the winning/losing branch after the SP reach development may be shorter than the execution time of the variable role performance performed before the SP reach development. Also, the operation pattern (operation distance, operation sequence, operation speed, etc.) of the door role in the variable role performance may be different from the operation pattern (operation distance, operation sequence, operation speed, etc.) of the door role in the jackpot role performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the light emission mode of the role lamp in the variable role performance and the light emission mode of the role lamp in the jackpot role performance are configured to be different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(A), during the execution of the variable role performance (for example, the variable role performance before the SP reach development), the role lamp emits light in a predetermined light emission color (blue). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 112(B), during the execution of the jackpot role performance, the role lamp emits light in a specific light emission color (rainbow color). By making the light emission color of the role lamp different between the variable role performance and the jackpot role performance in this way, the player's interest can be attracted not only to the operation of the door role but also to the light emission color of the role lamp from the start of the variable display to the end of the jackpot game, and the performance effect of the role performance can be enhanced. In addition, in the time chart shown in FIG. 112, the door function lamp may be configured to emit white light rather than being in a non-illuminating state (in that case, it should be noted that "non-illuminating" in this time chart is replaced with "white light emission").

In addition, in the variable role performance at the time of the win/lose branch after the development of the SP reach, the role lamp of the door role may be configured to emit a specific light color (rainbow color). In this way, even if two variable role performances are performed during one variable display, the light colors of the role lamps are different, so even if the operation of the door role is the same, it is possible to give the player a different impression, and the variety of role performances can be further enriched.

<<Execution Restrictions on Emphasis Effects and Over Winning Effects>>
Next, the execution restriction when the execution conditions of the highlight effect and the over winning effect are satisfied will be described. Fig. 113(A) is a time chart when the execution restriction of the highlight effect is performed, and Fig. 113(B) is a time chart when the execution restriction of the over winning effect is performed.

As described above, the highlighting effect can be executed when the highlighting effect execution condition is satisfied during the execution of a big win game, and the over winning effect can be executed when the over winning effect execution condition is satisfied during the execution of a big win game (one round game). However, even if the highlighting effect execution condition and/or the over winning effect execution condition are satisfied, if a special effect described below is being executed or is scheduled to be executed, the execution of the special effect and/or the over winning effect is restricted. In other words, if the special effect is being executed when the highlighting effect execution condition and/or the over winning effect execution condition are satisfied, or if the special effect is scheduled to be executed when the highlighting effect execution condition and/or the over winning effect execution condition are satisfied (if it is determined that the special effect will be executed by lottery), the execution of the highlighting effect and/or the over winning effect is restricted (cancelled) even if the highlighting effect execution condition and/or the over winning effect execution condition are satisfied. In addition, the time chart in FIG. 113 shows the case where the emphasis performance execution condition is satisfied during the execution of the special performance or the over-winning performance execution condition is satisfied, but if the emphasis performance execution condition is satisfied before the execution of the special performance (when the special performance is not being executed) or the over-winning performance execution condition is satisfied, when the timing to start the execution of the special performance arrives while the emphasis performance or over-winning performance is being executed, the emphasis performance or over-winning performance being executed is stopped midway. As a modified example, if the emphasis performance execution condition is satisfied before the execution of the special performance (when the special performance is not being executed) or the over-winning performance execution condition is satisfied, when the timing to start the execution of the special performance arrives while the emphasis performance or over-winning performance is being executed, unlike the case where the emphasis performance execution condition is satisfied during the execution of the special performance or the over-winning performance execution condition is satisfied, the emphasis performance or over-winning performance being executed may be configured to be executed to the end without being stopped midway. By configuring in this way, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity that the emphasis performance or over-winning performance ends midway.

Here, the special effects in this embodiment are predetermined effects that can be performed during the execution of a special game (a big win game or a small win game), and examples of such effects include the following:

(1) Reserve consecutive winning indication performance Reserve consecutive winning indication performance (also called reserved consecutive winning performance) is an indication that reserved consecutive winning has occurred, as described above. In addition, "reserved consecutive winning" refers to the fact that when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern performed by the consumption of a certain preceding operating reserved ball is a jackpot, one or more subsequent operating reserved balls that exist at a predetermined timing from the time when the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern related to the preceding operating reserved ball is permitted to the time when the jackpot game that is executed as a trigger of the jackpot is ended, which includes an operating reserved ball (also called "jackpot reservation") that is expected to become a jackpot. Here, the reason for restricting the execution of the highlighting effect and the over winning effect when the reserved consecutive winning indication performance is being executed or is scheduled to be executed is that if the highlighting effect or the over winning effect is executed in overlap with the reserved consecutive winning indication performance, the notification contents of both effects will be difficult for the player to recognize, and the effect of both effects may be reduced. Furthermore, for a player, the information that the next jackpot is guaranteed (that a consecutive win in the reserved lottery has occurred) is more useful than the fact that the cumulative number of winning balls has reached a specific value or that an over-winning has occurred, and since it is possible to know that the cumulative number of winning balls has reached a specific value by checking the cumulative number of winning balls display, prioritizing the execution of the reserved lottery suggestion effect over the execution of an emphasis effect or an over-winning effect increases the enjoyment of the game.

(2) Promotion performance Promotion performance is a performance that suggests or informs the player of the profit mode (for convenience, referred to as "temporary profit mode") related to the jackpot when a jackpot occurs in the variable display of a special pattern, before or at the start of the jackpot game, and then suggests or informs the player that the actual profit mode related to the jackpot during the jackpot game is more profitable than the provisional profit mode. In other words, it suggests whether the profit mode of the jackpot suggested before or at the start of the special game is true (the profit mode as it is) or false (high profit mode), and shows whether the profit mode of the jackpot will be promoted through this series of processes (as mentioned above, it is a performance that finally informs the player that the jackpot game is actually a high profit jackpot game while appearing to be a low profit jackpot game). There are two types of promotion performance: the probability promotion performance and the round promotion performance. The contents of the probability promotion performance and the round promotion performance have been described above, so repeated explanations will be omitted. Here, the reason for restricting the execution of the highlighting effect and the over-winning effect when the promotion effect is being executed or is scheduled to be executed is that if the highlighting effect or the over-winning effect is executed in overlap with the promotion effect, the notification contents of both effects may be difficult for the player to recognize, and the effect of both effects may be reduced. Also, for the player, the information that the profit state of the jackpot is promoted (promoted to a certain jackpot or the jackpot game is rounded up) is more useful than the fact that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a specific number or that an over-winning has occurred, and furthermore, the fact that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a specific value can be understood by checking the cumulative number of prize balls display, so that the interest of the game is increased by prioritizing the execution of the promotion effect over the execution of the highlighting effect or the over-winning effect.

(3) Low-profit jackpot performance When the jackpot performance performed during a jackpot game is a so-called low-profit jackpot performance, even if the emphasis performance execution condition and/or over-winning performance execution condition are satisfied during the execution of the low-profit jackpot performance, the emphasis performance and/or over-winning performance will not be executed. Note that the "low-profit jackpot" refers to, for example, a jackpot type (low round jackpot) in which the specified number of rounds is set to a relatively small number of rounds, a jackpot type (short opening jackpot) in which the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot entry port of each round is set to a relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds), and a jackpot type (normal jackpot) that is an opportunity to transition to a normal game state (low probability low base state) or a time-saving game state (low probability high base state) after the end of the jackpot game. The reason for restricting the execution of the highlighting effect and the over winning effect when the low-profit jackpot effect is being executed or is scheduled to be executed is that when such a low-profit jackpot is won, even if the highlighting effect or the over winning effect is executed in the jackpot game (even if a congratulatory effect is executed because the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value or an over winning occurs), it is not possible to evoke a sense of satisfaction or superiority in the player, and a sufficient performance effect cannot be expected. In addition, when a short-open jackpot is won, the cumulative number of winning balls is not displayed during the short round game, so that even if the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value (the value of the cumulative number of winning balls counter reaches a multiple of the predetermined number of winning balls) or an over winning occurs, the highlighting effect or the over winning effect that is performed in conjunction with the cumulative number of winning balls display is not executed.

The jackpot types can be broadly divided into high-profit jackpots, which are set to be relatively advantageous to the player, and low-profit jackpots, which are set to be relatively advantageous to the player, and the system can be configured so that an emphasis effect is executed when an emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot effect that is executed when a high-profit jackpot is won, but an emphasis effect is not executed when an emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot effect that is executed when a low-profit jackpot is won.

(4) Big Win End Demo Performance In this embodiment, the emphasis performance execution condition and/or over prize performance execution condition are not satisfied during the execution of the big win end demo performance, and the emphasis performance and/or over prize performance are not executed as a result of the emphasis performance execution condition and/or over prize performance execution condition being satisfied during the execution of the big win end demo performance. Specifically, in this embodiment, as described above, the entry of a game ball into the big prize winning hole P54 is not effectively detected during the execution time of the big win end demo performance, and the emphasis performance execution condition and/or over prize performance execution condition are not satisfied during the execution time of this big win end demo performance. In other words, in this embodiment, the game ball that enters the large prize port P54 during the execution of the final round of play is designed not to be detected after the jackpot end demo has started beyond the interval period (in other words, the game ball entering the large prize port P54 in the final round of play is structured to be detected always during the execution of the final round of play or within the interval period immediately thereafter), so the emphasis effect execution condition and/or over prize effect execution condition will not be satisfied during the execution of this jackpot end demo effect, and the emphasis effect and/or over prize effect will not be executed in duplicate. In the unlikely event that, due to some factor (for example, game balls exceeding the specified count number become stuck in front of the winning detection sensor inside the large prize opening P54), a ball enters the large prize opening P54 before the start of the jackpot end demo (at this point, the ball is not detected as it has not passed the ball entry detection sensor inside the large prize opening P54), but even if the ball passes the ball entry detection sensor inside the large prize opening P54 during the jackpot end demo, no prize ball will be generated as a result of the passage, and the emphasis effect execution condition and/or over prize effect execution condition will not be satisfied during the jackpot end demo performance.

In addition, if a game ball enters the big prize opening P54 just before the end of the final round of play (especially if the game balls enter in excess of the specified count number), the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening P54 is designed to be effectively detected before the end of the final round of play or the interval period, so if the emphasis effect execution condition and/or the over prize effect execution condition are met before the interval period has elapsed, the execution of the emphasis effect and/or the over prize effect will be started in response to the execution condition being met. In that case, the emphasis effect may continue even during the execution of the jackpot end demo effect beyond the final round of play and the interval period, but as mentioned above, the execution time of the emphasis effect (3 seconds) is set to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo effect (20 seconds), so the emphasis effect is completed before the jackpot end demo effect ends (before the variable display after the jackpot end game begins) (the over prize effect may be configured in the same way as the emphasis effect). As a modified example of this embodiment, for example, when the emphasis effect execution condition and/or over prize effect execution condition are satisfied by the game ball entering the big prize winning port P54 just before the end of the final round of play, and the emphasis effect and/or over prize effect that is triggered by the satisfaction of the emphasis effect execution condition and/or over prize effect execution condition is not completed by the end of the interval period, the emphasis effect and/or over prize effect may be forcibly terminated when the big win end demo effect (big win end demo period) starts (even if the emphasis effect and/or over prize effect execution time remains at the start of the big win end demo effect, it may be forcibly terminated). As a further modified example, the execution time of the emphasis effect and/or over prize effect may be set to be shorter than the interval time (interval period), so that the emphasis effect and/or over prize effect that is started at least by the end of the final round of play is not executed beyond the interval period (i.e., the emphasis effect and/or over prize effect and the big win end demo effect may not be executed overlappingly).

(5) First round presentation in small win game As a variation of this embodiment, when a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed type gaming machine (a model generally referred to as a small win V) that combines the first type of playability and the second type of playability is applied, the machine may be configured so that the emphasis presentation and/or over winning presentation are not executed even if the emphasis presentation execution condition and/or over winning presentation execution condition are satisfied during the first round (initial round presentation) of the small win game.

Specifically, this type of gaming machine called "small win V" has a first type of gameplay in which a big win game is executed by stopping the special symbol as a big win symbol, and a second type of gameplay in which a big win game is executed by a game ball that enters the big win port P54, which is opened by stopping the special symbol as a small win symbol, passing through a specific area (V area). Therefore, if a game ball that enters the big win port P54 passes through the specific area during the execution of the small win game, the right to develop into a big win game is granted after the small win game ends. As a result, the first round of the small win game becomes an important round game that encourages the player to enter the game ball into the big win port P54 and pass through the specific area (called "V entry"). Therefore, in the first round of the small win game, the execution of the V winning instruction effect, which instructs the game ball to enter a specific area by displaying a message image showing the characters "Aim for a V win!", is prioritized over the execution of the emphasis effect and/or over winning effect indicating that the cumulative number of winning balls has reached a specific number. In other words, even if the emphasis effect execution condition and/or over winning effect is satisfied by the ball entering in the first round of the small win game, the emphasis effect and/or over winning effect is not executed. However, for the second round and subsequent rounds that are executed by passing through the specific area (V area) in the first round and becoming a big win game, the emphasis effect and/or over winning effect are executed by satisfying the emphasis effect execution condition and/or over winning effect.

In addition, if a V entry occurs in which the game ball passes through a specific area in the first round of this small win game, a special effect (round number suggestion effect) is played for the game ball entering the large prize entry port P54 that occurs after the V entry in this first round (for example, if a V entry occurs with the first ball entering the large prize entry port P54, then the second or subsequent balls enter the large prize entry port P54), and in this special effect, the display mode (display color) of a specific object image is changed each time the game ball enters the large prize entry port P54, and the number of rounds of the subsequent large prize game is suggested depending on the display mode (display color) after the change. More specifically, the special effect (round number suggestion effect) is an effect in which the word "Congratulations!" is displayed when a V win occurs, and the color of the "Congratulations!" word can change with each subsequent ball that enters the large winning port P54 (until the specified count is reached), and the more rounds there are, the higher the likelihood of the number of rounds (examples of the number of rounds include 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, and 10 rounds, and the more rainbow-colored the number is, the more likely it is that the number of rounds will be the highest). Even in this case, it is preferable to prioritize the execution of the special effect (round number suggestion effect) that is performed after a V win, and to limit the execution of the emphasis effect and/or over winning effect even if the emphasis effect execution condition and/or over winning effect execution condition are met.

In the above embodiment, if the emphasis effect and/or over prize effect execution condition is satisfied while a special effect is being executed or scheduled to be executed, the execution of the emphasis effect and/or over prize effect is restricted (stopped). In addition, if a special effect is executed while an emphasis effect and/or over prize effect is being executed, the execution of the emphasis effect and/or over prize effect may be forcibly terminated or temporarily suspended when the execution of the special effect begins. If the execution of the emphasis effect and/or over prize effect is temporarily suspended when the execution of the special effect begins, it is preferable to resume the execution of the emphasis effect and/or over prize effect when the execution of the special effect ends.

<Recovery after power failure while displaying the jackpot type>
Next, a case where a power outage occurs during the execution of a jackpot game and the first specific performance (jackpot type display) that indicates the specified number of rounds of the currently executed jackpot game is being performed will be described. Figure 114 is a time chart when a power outage occurs during the execution of the jackpot type display.

In this embodiment, during the execution of the jackpot start demo, a jackpot type display (choju jackpot display, ju jackpot display, ki jackpot display) is displayed on the screen of the performance display device P70, suggesting the type of jackpot that will trigger the execution of the jackpot game, and the player is suggested or informed of the number of rounds of the jackpot game currently being executed. Specifically, the "choju jackpot display" displays the text "choju jackpot!!!" during the execution of the jackpot start demo and has a rainbow background, the "ju jackpot display" displays the text "ju jackpot!" during the execution of the jackpot start demo and has a red background, and the "ki jackpot display" displays the text "ki jackpot" during the execution of the jackpot start demo and has a blue background. During the execution of a jackpot game (jackpot start demo), if the Choju jackpot display is performed as the jackpot type display, it is suggested or notified that the currently executed jackpot game is a 16-round game (it is suggested or notified that the Choju jackpot has been won), and if the Ju jackpot display or Ki jackpot display is performed as the jackpot type display, it is suggested or notified that the currently executed jackpot game is a 4-round jackpot game (it is suggested or notified that the Ju jackpot or Ki jackpot has been won). And, if a power outage occurs during the execution of this jackpot game (jackpot start demo) and the jackpot game (jackpot start demo) is resumed when the power outage is restored, the jackpot type display that was interrupted by the power outage is not restored, and after the jackpot game (jackpot start demo) is resumed, a power outage recovery image (power outage recovery screen) showing the words "Recovering" is displayed during the jackpot game (jackpot start demo). In this embodiment, when a power failure occurs during a jackpot game (a jackpot start demo) and the jackpot game (a jackpot start demo) is resumed by recovering from the power failure, the display by the performance display device P70 is restored before the display by the main control display device P27 (a round display to be described later) is restored (that is, after the power failure is restored, the display of the main control display device P27 is restored after the display of the performance display device P70 is restored, that is, the lighting display of the round display lamp P77 is restored after the display of the performance display device P70 is restored). Then, when the power failure is restored and the jackpot game (a jackpot start demo) is resumed, the jackpot type display is not displayed on the screen of the performance display device P70 when the display by the performance display device P70 is restored, and the above-mentioned power failure recovery image (power failure recovery screen) is displayed. This power failure recovery image is continuously displayed until the end of the jackpot game (the end of the final round or the end of the jackpot end demo). In this way, when the power is restored and the big win game is resumed, the notification of the power recovery is prioritized over the execution of the big win type display interrupted by the power failure, so that the player can be promptly notified that the power has been restored and the big win game can be resumed. Furthermore, after the power is restored, the notification of the power recovery is prioritized over the execution of the round display interrupted by the power failure, so that the player can be promptly notified that the power has been restored and the big win game can be resumed. Note that the above-mentioned power failure recovery (power recovery) is a power failure recovery that does not involve RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), and in the case of a power failure recovery that involves RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), the game transitions to a normal game state (low probability low base state) and is restored in a state in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of "331".

In addition, as a variant example, if a power outage occurs while the jackpot start demo is being executed and the power outage recovery image is displayed as the power is restored, the system may be configured to return to the normal jackpot presentation (for example, the above-mentioned Super Longevity jackpot presentation, Longevity jackpot presentation, or Happy jackpot presentation) after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 5 seconds have elapsed since the power outage recovery image was displayed) or when the jackpot start demo ends (in other words, the system may return to the normal round presentation after a predetermined time has elapsed or from the start of the first round). In addition, a round performance screen according to the type of the performance during the big win (Choju big win performance, Kotobuki big win performance, Ki big win performance) is displayed; that is, when the performance pattern during the big win is Choju big win performance, a Choju big win round screen (for example, a performance screen in which five characters are introduced on a rainbow background), when the performance pattern during the big win is Kotobuki big win performance, a Kotobuki big win round screen (for example, a performance screen in which two characters are introduced on a red background), when the performance pattern during the big win is Ki big win performance, a Ki big win round screen (for example, a performance screen in which one character is introduced on a blue background) is displayed. In addition, as another modified example, after a power outage occurs during the execution of the big win start demo and a power outage recovery image is displayed with the power outage recovery, a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, five seconds have elapsed since the power outage recovery image was displayed) or the big win start demo has ended, the screen may be configured to return to a big win screen dedicated to after power outage recovery (a round screen dedicated to after power outage recovery) (that is, it may return to a normal round performance after a predetermined time has elapsed or from the start of the first round). It should be noted that the above-mentioned power outage recovery (power restoration) refers to a power outage recovery that does not involve RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), and in the case of a power outage recovery that involves RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability, low base state) and returns to a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed stopped in the combination "331."

<Recovery after power loss while displaying the round>
Next, a case where a power failure occurs during a second specific effect (round display) that indicates the number of rounds in a currently-running round game during a jackpot game will be described. Fig. 115 is a time chart showing a power failure that occurs during the execution of the round display.

In this embodiment, during the execution of a round game of a jackpot game, a round display is displayed on the screen of the performance display device P70 to suggest or inform the player of which round the currently executed round game is, and the number of rounds of the currently executed round game is suggested or informed to the player. This round display corresponds to the display content of the round display area P730 described above, but even during a jackpot game, it is not displayed during the jackpot start demo and the jackpot end demo, but is displayed during the round game (it may also be displayed during the interval period, but in such a configuration, it is preferable to display the round corresponding to the certain round game during the interval period after the end of a certain round game). In addition, during the execution of a jackpot game, the round indicator light P77 is lit and displayed on the main control display device P27 to inform the player of the specified number of rounds of the currently executed jackpot game. The lighting display of the round indicator lamp P77 is configured to be lit not only during the round play during the jackpot game, but also during the jackpot start demo, the jackpot end demo, and during the interval period. In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs during the execution of the jackpot game (round play) and the jackpot game (round play) is resumed by recovering the power outage, the display by the performance display device P70 is restored before the display by the main control display device P27 is restored (after the power outage is restored, the display of the performance display device P70 is restored after the display of the performance display device P70 is restored, that is, the lighting display of the round indicator lamp P77 is restored after the display of the performance display device P70 is restored). Then, when the power outage is restored and the jackpot game (round play) is resumed, the round display is not displayed on the screen of the performance display device P70 when the display by the performance display device P70 is restored, and the above-mentioned power outage recovery image (power outage recovery screen) is displayed. This power failure recovery image continues to be displayed until the end of the jackpot game (the end of the final round game or the end of the jackpot end demo). In other words, after the power is restored, the notification of the power failure recovery is prioritized over the execution of the round display that was interrupted by the power failure, so that the player can be promptly notified that the power has been restored and the jackpot game can be resumed. Note that the power failure recovery (power restoration) described above is a power failure recovery that does not involve RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), and in the case of a power failure recovery that involves RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability low base state), and the game returns to a state in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the combination "331", and the round indicator lamp P77 returns to an off state.

On the other hand, after the power failure is restored, the main control display device P27 displays the round indicator light P77 and displays the specified number of rounds of the resumed jackpot game. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, the player can first check the power failure restoration image on the performance display device P70, and then check the round indicator light P77 on the main control display device P27. In this way, the display on the performance display device P70 is restored first, and the player is quickly informed that the power failure is being restored, which can reassure the player. Subsequently, the display on the main control display device P27 is restored and the round indicator light P77 is lit, which can inform the player of the type of jackpot game that was interrupted due to the power failure (the player can earn the profit for the specified number of rounds displayed by the round indicator light P77), thereby giving the player an even greater sense of security. It should be noted that the above-mentioned recovery from a power outage (recovery of power) refers to a recovery from a power outage that does not involve clearing the RAM (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), and in the case of a recovery from a power outage that involves clearing the RAM (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability, low base state), and the game returns to a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed stopped in the combination "331", and the round indicator light P77 returns to an off state.

Also, as mentioned above, if the jackpot game is resumed due to the power being restored after a power outage, the cumulative number of prize balls will not be displayed during the resumed jackpot game, and even if a game ball enters the large prize winning port P54, the cumulative number of prize balls display will not be updated, the count-up effect will not be displayed, and the highlighting effect (enlarged display) will not be displayed. Also, even if more game balls than the specified number enter the large prize winning port P54 (over-winning) during the resumed jackpot game, the over-winning effect will not be displayed. Similarly, even if a game ball enters the general prize winning port P64 during the resumed jackpot game, the cumulative number of prize balls display will not be updated, the count-up effect will not be displayed, and the bonus winning effect will not be displayed. In this embodiment, from when the jackpot game is resumed due to the power supply being restored until the jackpot game is finished, the power supply recovery image is continuously displayed on the performance display device P70, and the jackpot type display, round display, cumulative prize ball number display, large prize port winning performance (over winning performance), and general prize port winning performance (bonus winning performance) are not executed. As a modified example, when the jackpot game is resumed due to the power supply being restored, the cumulative prize ball number display (updated display) is displayed, but the highlighting performance may not be executed even if the highlighting performance execution condition is satisfied. Also, when the jackpot game is resumed due to the power supply being restored, the cumulative prize ball number display (updated display) is displayed, but the over winning performance may not be executed even if the over winning performance execution condition is satisfied. Note that the above-mentioned power outage recovery (power restoration) refers to a power outage recovery that does not involve clearing the RAM (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), and in the case of a power outage recovery that involves clearing the RAM (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability, low base state) and returns to a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed frozen in the "331" combination.

In addition, as a variant, after a power outage occurs during the execution of a certain round of play and the power recovery image is displayed as the power is restored, the normal jackpot presentation (for example, the above-mentioned Super Longevity jackpot presentation, Longevity jackpot presentation, and Happy jackpot presentation) may be restored after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 5 seconds have elapsed since the power outage recovery image was displayed) or when the certain round of play ends (in other words, if the power is cut off and then restored during, for example, the third round of play, the normal round presentation may be restored from the start of the fourth round of play). As described above, the round performance screen according to the type of performance during the jackpot (Choju jackpot performance, Kotobuki jackpot performance, Ki jackpot performance) is displayed. That is, when the performance pattern during the jackpot is Choju jackpot performance, the Choju jackpot round screen (for example, a performance screen in which five characters are introduced on a rainbow background) is displayed, when the performance pattern during the jackpot is Kotobuki jackpot performance, the Kotobuki jackpot round screen (for example, a performance screen in which two characters are introduced on a red background) is displayed, and when the performance pattern is Ki jackpot performance, the Ki jackpot round screen (for example, a performance screen in which one character is introduced on a blue background) is displayed. In this case, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed during the jackpot game after the restarted round game, but it starts from "0" instead of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed before the power failure, and the cumulative number of prize balls counter is also cleared to "0" and starts. However, even if the game starts from "0", the cumulative number of winning balls display is updated, a count-up effect, a highlight effect (enlarged display), etc. are executed when a game ball enters the big winning port P54, and further, when a game ball that exceeds the specified number enters the big winning port P54 (over-winning) during the execution of the resumed big win game, an over-winning effect is executed. Similarly, when a game ball enters the general winning port P64 during the execution of the resumed big win game, an update of the cumulative number of winning balls display, a count-up effect, and a bonus winning effect are executed. Note that the above-mentioned power outage recovery (power recovery) is a power outage recovery without RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), and when a power outage recovery is accompanied by RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability low base state), and the game returns to a state in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of "331".

In another variant, if a power outage occurs during a round of play and the power recovery image is displayed as the power is restored, the game may be configured to return to a special jackpot screen (a round screen dedicated to after power recovery) after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., 5 seconds have elapsed since the power recovery image was displayed) or when the round of play ends (i.e., the game may return to the normal round presentation after a predetermined time has elapsed, or, for example, if the power is lost and restored during the third round of round play, from the start of the fourth round of round play). When configured in this way, the cumulative number of winning balls will not be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game after the resumed round play, and even if a game ball enters the large prize winning port P54, the cumulative number of winning balls display will not be updated, a count-up effect will not be executed, an emphasis effect (enlarged display) will not be executed, and further, even if more game balls than the specified number enter the large prize winning port P54 (over-winning) during the resumed jackpot game, the over-winning effect will not be executed, and similarly, even if a game ball enters the general prize winning port P64 during the resumed jackpot game, the cumulative number of winning balls display will not be updated, a count-up effect will not be executed, and a bonus prize winning effect will not be executed. Note that the above-mentioned power outage recovery (power restoration) refers to a power outage recovery that does not involve clearing the RAM (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), and in the case of a power outage recovery that involves clearing the RAM (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability, low base state) and returns to a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed frozen in the "331" combination.

The main advantages achieved by the fourth embodiment can be summarized as follows:

First, according to the fourth embodiment, by performing a special effect display in which a predetermined special effect is applied when the highlighting display, which is displayed when the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value, appears and/or disappears, the degree of highlighting by this highlighting display can be dramatically improved, so that it is possible to make an even greater impression on the player that the cumulative number of winning balls has reached a specific value, and by clarifying the start and end of the highlighting display (i.e., by clarifying the time before and after the division when the highlighting display during a jackpot game is considered as a division of the jackpot game), it is possible to add variety to the game during the jackpot game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the fourth embodiment, the rarity of the highlighting effect display can be increased by preventing multiple display patterns of the highlighting effect display from being displayed overlapping at the same time. Furthermore, by configuring the execution time of the highlighting effect display to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo, even if the highlighting effect execution condition is met and the highlighting effect display is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the big prize winning port P54 just before the end of the final round of play, the highlighting effect display is completed within the jackpot end demo period, so the highlighting effect display does not extend beyond the jackpot end demo period and does not extend beyond the variable display after the end of the jackpot game (the end of the jackpot game and the start of the variable display for the first rotation can be clearly separated), and it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the current game situation, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the fourth embodiment, when a rare effect (special effect) or an effect (special effect) that is important to the player is executed during a jackpot game, the execution of the highlight effect display is restricted even if the condition for executing the highlight effect is met when the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value, thereby reliably guaranteeing the execution of this high priority special effect, and preventing a decline in the player's expectations and interest in the occurrence of the special effect, thereby making it possible to improve the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, according to the fourth embodiment, when executing a rare effect (special effect) or an effect (special effect) that is important to the player during a jackpot game, the execution of the over-winning effect is restricted even if a game ball enters the jackpot port P54 in excess of the specified count number, thereby reliably guaranteeing the execution of this high priority special effect, and preventing the player's expectations and interest in the occurrence of a special effect from decreasing, thereby making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, according to the fourth embodiment, if a power outage occurs during a jackpot game, the restoration of the performance display device P70, which is the area that the player pays the most attention to, is prioritized when the power is restored, and the player is quickly notified that the jackpot game that was interrupted due to the power outage can be resumed. When the display of the main control display device P27 is restored, information indicating the specified number of rounds for the jackpot game is displayed, allowing the player to clearly determine the type of jackpot game currently being played (number of rounds won). This makes it possible to appropriately realize various notifications and performance displays performed when the power is restored without complicating them, and it becomes possible to smoothly proceed with the jackpot game that is resumed when the power is restored, thereby improving the reliability of the gaming machine and the entertainment value of the game.

[Fifth embodiment]
Next, the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment and/or the fourth embodiment described above, and the following description will be given to the same parts with the same reference numerals and will omit the description, and will mainly describe the different parts. In other words, in the following description, except in special cases, it is possible to apply the configuration common to the second embodiment and/or the fourth embodiment.

The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment will be explained below in order. The pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a setting function that allows the user to set the probability of winning the special symbol hit determination, and a performance information display function that displays the performance information of the game.

<Board configuration>
First, the board configuration of the gaming machine 20 of the fifth embodiment will be briefly described. In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1 (similar to the second embodiment), the game balls flowing down the left area PA1 can mainly enter any of the first start port P51 and the general winning ports P61 to P63 arranged below the center ornament P21. On the other hand, the game balls flowing down the right area PA2 can mainly enter any of the operation gate P53, the general winning port P64, the second start port P52, and the large winning port P54 arranged to the right of the center ornament P21. The game balls that enter each winning port are detected by each winning port switch and are discharged to the back side of the game board P20. In addition, at the bottom end of the game area PA, an out port P29 is provided to discharge the game balls that flow down without entering each winning port to the back side of the game board P20. In this embodiment, the number of game balls that have been shot into the game area PA and used for play, that is, the number of game balls (played balls) that have entered each winning hole or outlet P29 of the game area PA and been discharged to the back side of the game board P20, is counted by a played ball detection switch P891 described later. Note that, among the game areas PA equipped with various winning holes, a hitting method in which the game balls are shot so that they flow down to the left side area PA1 is called a "left hit," and a hitting method in which the game balls are shot so that they flow down to the right side area PA2 is called a "right hit."

<Electrical configuration of gaming machine>
Next, the electrical configuration of the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 116 is a control block diagram showing the control configuration of the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. In this fifth embodiment, the main control board P100 is equipped with a setting key switch P810, a RAM clear switch P820, a performance display monitor P830, etc., which will be described in detail later. In addition, the main control board P100 is electrically connected to a played ball detection switch P891 that detects a game ball discharged from the game area PA, a frame opening switch P892 that detects whether the front frame P2 is opened relative to the outer frame 1, etc. These played ball detection switch P891 and frame opening switch P892 output their respective detection signals to the main CPU P101 via the I/O port circuit P104. Also in this fifth embodiment, the main control display device P27 (see FIG. 106) is provided with various display means such as a first special symbol display device P71, a second special symbol display device P72, a first special symbol reserved lamp P73, a second special symbol reserved lamp P74, a normal symbol display device P75, a normal symbol reserved lamp P76, a round indicator lamp P77, a status indicator lamp P78, a right hit indicator lamp P79, an error indicator lamp Er, etc. The other configurations are basically the same as those in the second embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

<Major functional configuration of gaming machine>
Next, various functions of the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment (mainly the main control board P100/performance control board P200) will be described. Fig. 117 is a functional block diagram of the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment (mainly the main control board P100/performance control board P200), and Fig. 118 is a functional block diagram showing the power-on transition mode control means P175 and performance information management means P176 of Fig. 117. As shown in Figs. 117 and 118, the main control board P100 of the fifth embodiment is provided with a power-on transition mode control means P175 and a performance information management means P176 as a difference from the second embodiment.

The power-on transition mode control means P175 controls four modes (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM clear mode, and game mode described below) to which the game mode is transitioned in response to a selection operation performed when the game machine is powered on. As shown in FIG. 118, this power-on control means P175 includes setting change processing means P175A, setting confirmation processing means P175B, and RAM clear processing means P175C. The setting change processing means P175A executes setting change processing when the setting change mode is selected when the game machine is powered on. The setting confirmation processing means P175B executes setting confirmation processing when the setting confirmation mode is selected when the game machine is powered on. The RAM clear processing means P175C executes RAM clear processing when the RAM clear mode is selected when the game machine is powered on. Note that these setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, and RAM clear processing are executed by the main control side main processing (see FIG. 77) performed when the game machine is powered on. On the other hand, when a game mode (a mode that allows play) is selected when the game machine is powered on, the means P110 to P190 provided on the main control board P100 executes processing related to the progress of the game (including processing when the power is turned off). In other words, in this embodiment, the means P110 to P190 provided on the main control board P100 are game mode processing means that execute processing of the game mode (processing related to the progress of the game (including processing when the power is turned off)) when a game mode is selected when the game machine is powered on. In addition, the game mode in this embodiment means a state that allows the progress of a series of games, such as a special/normal symbol win/loss determination process, a variable display process, and a special game execution process (a state that allows the game to be executed). Therefore, at least the processing performed after the main control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 79) is started is included in the processing in the game mode. The contents of the transition modes at the time of powering on (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM clear mode, game mode) will be described later.

The performance information management means P176 executes processing related to the measurement and display of game performance information as processing for managing game performance information. As shown in FIG. 118, this performance information management means P176 is equipped with a performance information measurement control means P176A and a performance information display control means P176B. The performance information measurement control means P176A executes processing for measuring game performance information. The performance information display control means P176B executes processing for displaying game performance information. This processing for measuring and displaying game performance information is repeatedly executed at a predetermined interrupt period (4 ms) by the main control side timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 79). However, part of the processing for measuring and displaying game performance information may be executed by the main control side main processing (see FIG. 77) that is executed when the gaming machine is powered on. The contents related to the measurement and display of game performance information will be described later.

Next, the main control board unit P100U of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 119 is a front view showing the main control board unit P100U of the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 119 is a schematic diagram showing the performance display monitor P830 mounted on the main control board P100.

As shown in FIG. 119, the main control board unit P100U is composed of a main control board P100 and a main control board case P100A that houses the main control board P100.

The main control board case P100A is comprised of a bottom case P100B that covers the solder side of the main control board P100, and a top case P100C that covers the component mounting side of the main control board P100, such as the electronic and electrical components, and a so-called crimping mechanism P100D is provided at the case end that is aligned front to back when the top case P100C is attached to the bottom case P100B and closed. Both the bottom case P100B and the top case P100C are formed by a molding method such as injection molding using a colorless and transparent resin material (such as polycarbonate), and are configured so that the inside of the main control board case P100A (main control board P100) can be seen from the outside.

The main control board P100 is configured as a rectangular printed wiring board, and is equipped on its component mounting surface with the main control microcomputer P110 (see FIG. 116), multiple connectors PCN1 to PCN5, a setting key switch P810, a RAM clear switch P820, and a performance display monitor P830. The main control board P100 is fixed to the inner surface of the main control board case P100A (top case P100B) using multiple screws.

The setting key switch P810 is a key switch mechanism that can be switched between the ON and OFF states by turning a setting change key (a dedicated key managed by an arcade staff member, etc.) inserted into the keyhole.

As described in the second embodiment, etc., the RAM clear switch P820 is an operation button that is operated to clear the RAM when the gaming machine is turned on. This RAM clear switch P820 is an operation switch that can be pressed, and is in the ON state when operated and in the OFF state when not operated. The RAM clear switch P820, details of which will be described later, also serves as a setting change switch that cooperates with the setting key switch to set (change) the setting value of the probability of winning a jackpot (the probability of winning a jackpot when the special pattern is judged to be a hit or miss). In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch P820 is mounted on the main control board P100, but the RAM clear switch P820 may also be mounted on the power supply board P500 as in the second embodiment described above.

The setting key switch P810 and the RAM clear switch P820 are covered by a small door P100E that is freely swingable on the top case P100C, and by swinging this small door P100E upward, the setting key switch P810 and the RAM clear switch P820 can be exposed (i.e., they can be operated).

As shown in FIG. 120, the performance display monitor P830 is configured with four-digit display units P831-834. Specifically, the performance display monitor P830 is configured with, from left to right, a first display unit P831, a second display unit P832, a third display unit P833, and a fourth display unit P834. Each digit display unit P831-P834 is configured with seven LED segments SG1-SG7 arranged in a figure of eight and one LED segment SG8 formed in a dot point shape. In this way, each digit display unit P831-P834 is configured with eight LED segments SG1-SG8. Therefore, each digit display unit P831-P834 can display information such as numbers from 0 to 9, letters, and symbols by selectively lighting up the eight LED segments SG1-SG8. In the following, in order to distinguish between the LED segments SG1 to SG8, the seven LED segments SG1 to SG7 constituting the so-called seven segments are also referred to as "seven-segment SG1 to SG7," and the single LED segment SG8 constituting the dot point is also referred to as "dot-segment SG8." In this embodiment, the four display sections P831 to P834 are switched to the lighting target sequentially every interrupt (every 4 ms) by dynamic lighting control, such as the first display section P831 → the second display section P832 → the third display section P833 → the fourth display section P834 → the first display section P831 → ..., and the afterimage phenomenon is utilized to make it appear to the naked eye that all four display areas P831 to P834 are emitting light (continuously lighting). Each LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp or simply as a lamp.

The display units P831 and P832 of the top two digits of the performance display monitor P830 constitute an identification display unit (identification segment) 830a that displays an identifier (identification symbol) for identifying the performance information of the game and the type of error, etc., as will be described later. The display units P833 and P834 of the bottom two digits of the performance display monitor P830 constitute a ratio display unit (ratio segment) 830b that displays a numerical value (base value) indicating the performance information of the game. In this embodiment, the set value of the jackpot probability (six set values from "1" to "6" in this embodiment) is displayed on the fourth display unit P834. In this way, various information displayed on the performance display monitor P830 can be seen from the outside through the transparent main control board case P100A. As a modified example of this embodiment, instead of displaying the set value of the jackpot probability on the performance information display monitor P830, a dedicated display device for displaying the set value may be provided.

Next, the basic game specifications of the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment will be described. Figure 121 shows the basic game specifications of the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment.

<Setting value>
First, the setting value of the jackpot probability will be described with reference to FIG. 121. In this embodiment, the winning probability (jackpot probability) of the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern is determined by six setting values. In this embodiment, the six setting values are "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". In the following, the setting value of 1 is called "setting value 1", the setting value of 2 is called "setting value 2", the setting value of 3 is called "setting value 3", the setting value of 4 is called "setting value 4", the setting value of 5 is called "setting value 5", and the setting value of 6 is called "setting value 6". In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, only one setting value that determines the winning probability (jackpot probability) of the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern may be set (i.e., a gaming machine with one setting having only one setting value (setting value 1) may be adopted). As a result, in this gaming machine with one stage setting, in the setting confirmation mode, only "1" is displayed as the current setting value, and in the setting change mode, processing is performed so that the setting value is not changed from "1" (for example, even if an operation to change the setting value is performed, the setting value is not changed from "1" to another number, such as "1" → "1" → "1" → "1" → ...), making it possible to design a gaming machine with a software configuration and hardware configuration that are substantially equivalent to a gaming machine equipped with a setting change function (a gaming machine with multiple setting values).

In this embodiment, the jackpot probability for each setting value increases by one step in the order of setting value 1 < setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. Specifically, when the game state is a low probability state, the jackpot probability for setting value 1 is 1/320, the jackpot probability for setting value 2 is 1/301, the jackpot probability for setting value 3 is 1/280, the jackpot probability for setting value 4 is 1/260, the jackpot probability for setting value 5 is 1/240, and the jackpot probability for setting value 6 is 1/220. Also, when the game state is a high probability state, the jackpot probability when the setting value is 1 is "1/102", when the setting value is 2 is "1/95", when the setting value is 3 is "1/89", when the setting value is 4 is "1/82", when the setting value is 5 is "1/76", and when the setting value is 6 is "1/70". In addition, in each of the setting values 1 to 6, the ratio between the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is set to be the same ratio (in this embodiment, the denominator of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the denominator of the jackpot probability in the high probability state are rounded off to the first decimal place). In other words, no matter which of the setting values 1 to 6 is selected, the ratio between the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state (the change rate of the jackpot probability) is the same. As mentioned above, these six setting values are displayed in the fourth display area P834 of the performance display monitor P830.

<Judgment of the special design>
Next, the judgment of the special symbol in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a schematic diagram showing the special symbol winning/losing lottery table in the fifth embodiment. In this embodiment, a special symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to each set value 1 to 6 is provided, and the special symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the currently set set value is selected to execute the winning/losing judgment process of the special symbol. Here, FIG. 122(A) is a special symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the set value 1, FIG. 122(B) is a special symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the set value 2, FIG. 122(C) is a special symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the set value 3, FIG. 122(D) is a special symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the set value 4, FIG. 122(E) is a special symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the set value 5, and FIG. 122(F) is a special symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the set value 6.

As in the second embodiment, each special symbol hit/miss lottery table includes a table that is referenced in a game state where the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated (low probability state), and a table that is referenced in a game state where the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated (high probability state). In addition, each special symbol hit/miss lottery table is associated with a random number range for the special symbol hit random number value and the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment (jackpot, miss). Note that Figure 122 also includes the jackpot probability as a reference value.

As shown in FIG. 122(A), when the setting value is 1, in the low probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 204", and in the high probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 643". In other words, as mentioned above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/320", and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/102".

As shown in FIG. 122(B), when the setting value is 2, in the low probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 217", and in the high probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 686". In other words, as mentioned above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/301", and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/95".

As shown in FIG. 122(C), when the setting value is 3, in the low probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 233," and in the high probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 735." In other words, as mentioned above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/280," and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/89."

As shown in FIG. 122(D), when the setting value is 4, in the low probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 251," and in the high probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 791." In other words, as mentioned above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/260," and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/82."

As shown in FIG. 122(E), when the setting value is 5, in the low probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 272," and in the high probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 857." In other words, as mentioned above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/240," and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/76."

As shown in FIG. 122(F), when the setting value is 6, in the low probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 297," and in the high probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number value for the special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 935." In other words, as mentioned above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/220," and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/7."

＜Jackpot type＞
Next, the jackpot type (jackpot breakdown) of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol is "jackpot", the jackpot type (jackpot symbol, symbol group) is determined by referring to the special symbol jackpot symbol table shown in FIG. 123. As described above, the "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probability jackpot) that triggers the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game, and the "normal jackpot" means a jackpot (non-probability jackpot) that does not trigger the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game. Details will be described later, but when a specific jackpot is won, the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated after the end of the jackpot game, and continues until the number of times the special symbol is displayed as a variable ST reaches the specified number of times (100 times) from the end of the jackpot game, or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified number of times (100 times). In addition, regardless of whether a "specific jackpot" or a "normal jackpot" is won, the special symbol change time shortening function and the electric chute support function are activated after the jackpot game ends, and continue until the number of times the special symbol changes from the end of the jackpot game reaches a predetermined number (100 times). In this embodiment, the special symbol change time shortening function and the electric chute support function start and end operation at the same time, so the "number of times change time shortened" and the "number of times electric support is activated" are the same number (for this reason, in Figure 123, the "number of times change time shortened" and the "number of times electric support is activated" are listed in the same column).

Figure 123 (A) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, the special symbol jackpot symbol random number value is associated with a symbol group (stop symbol), jackpot type, number of probability fluctuations, number of fluctuation time reductions (number of electric support times), specified number of rounds of jackpot play, and opening time of the large prize winning port P54 for each round. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, two types of jackpot types (symbol groups) are set: 4R specific jackpot (symbol group A) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group B).

When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot entrance P54 in one round game is set to "29 seconds", a long opening time that is expected to have a sufficient possibility of the number of game balls entering the jackpot entrance P54 reaching the specified number (specified count number: 10 balls). In addition, when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the probability change number of times, the change time shortening number of times, and the electric support number of times are set to "100 times", regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot winning, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to a probability change game state. This probability change game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes and displays reaches the specified ST number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). If the special symbol variation display count reaches the set number of ST times (100 times) and the special symbol variation state ends, the game will transition to normal play from the next special symbol variation display.

When the "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" of the first special symbol is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot entrance P54 in one round of play is set to "29 seconds", a long opening time that is expected to have a sufficient possibility of the number of game balls entering the jackpot entrance P54 reaching the specified number (specified count number: 10 balls). In addition, when the "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won with the first special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot win, the probability fluctuation number is set to "0 times", the fluctuation time reduction number is set to "100 times", and the electric support number is set to "100 times", and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol's fluctuation display reaches the specified number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified number (100 times). If the time-saving game mode ends when the number of times the special symbol changes is reached a predetermined number (100 times), the game will transition to normal game mode from the next time the special symbol changes.

Figure 123 (B) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, the special symbol jackpot symbol random number value is associated with a symbol group (stop symbol), jackpot type, number of probability fluctuations, number of fluctuation time reductions (number of electric support times), specified number of rounds of jackpot play, and opening time of the large prize opening P54 for each round. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, two types of jackpot types (symbol groups) are set: 8R specific jackpot (symbol group C) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D).

When the "8R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" of the second special symbol is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "8 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot entrance P54 in one round of play is set to "29 seconds", a long opening time that is expected to have a sufficient possibility of the number of game balls entering the jackpot entrance P54 reaching the specified number (specified count number: 10 balls). In addition, when the "8R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" of the second special symbol is won, the probability fluctuation number of times is set to "100 times", the fluctuation time shortening number of times is set to "100 times", and the electric support number of times is set to "100 times", regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot winning, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to a probability variable game state. This probability variable game state continues until the number of times the special symbol's fluctuation display reaches the specified ST number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). If the special symbol variation display count reaches the set number of ST times (100 times) and the special symbol variation state ends, the game will transition to normal play from the next special symbol variation display.

When the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group D)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot opening P54 in one round game is set to "29 seconds", a long opening time that is expected to have a sufficient possibility that the number of game balls entering the jackpot opening P54 will reach the specified number (specified count number: 10). In addition, when the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group D)" is won, the probability fluctuation number "0 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "100 times", and the electric support number "100 times" are set regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot winning, and a time-saving game state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol's variable display reaches the specified number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified number (100 times). When the time-saving game state ends when the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner reaches a predetermined number (100 times), the game state transitions to a normal game state from the next time the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Here, whether the number of times the special symbol has been displayed has reached the specified ST number or a predetermined number is determined based on whether the combined number of times the first special symbol has been displayed and the number of times the second special symbol has been displayed has reached the specified ST number or a predetermined number. As a variation, the determination may be based on whether the number of times the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been displayed, whichever is the main focus of the game, has reached the specified ST number or a predetermined number.

As shown in FIG. 121, the normal symbol game in the fifth embodiment (probability of winning a normal symbol, opening time of the normal electric device P522, etc.) is the same as the normal symbol game in the second embodiment (probability of winning a normal symbol, opening time of the normal electric device P522, etc.), so a description is omitted.

＜Number of prize balls＞
Next, the number of prize balls in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121, the number of prize balls set for each winning port (the unit number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of one game ball) is set to "4" for the first starting port P51, "1" for the second starting port P52, "3" for the general winning ports P61 to P64, and "15" for the large winning port P54. The unit number of prize balls is not limited to the one exemplified in the fifth embodiment, and other unit numbers of prize balls may be applied.

<Transition mode when power is turned on>
Next, the transition modes when the gaming machine is powered on will be described. Fig. 124 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation when the power is turned on and the transition modes. In the fifth embodiment, as shown in Fig. 124, a setting change mode, a setting confirmation mode, a RAM clear mode, and a game mode are provided as four transition modes to which the gaming machine can be transitioned when the gaming machine is powered on (when the power is restored after being turned off). In other words, in this embodiment, by performing a predetermined operation shown in Fig. 124 at the same time as the gaming machine is powered on, the transition mode to which the gaming machine is transitioned when the gaming machine is powered on can be selected.

As shown in FIG. 124, the operations performed when the gaming machine is powered on include the operation of the setting key switch P810, the operation of the RAM clear switch P820, the opening and closing operation of the front frame P2, the operation of the power switch, etc. Whether the front frame P2 is open relative to the outer frame 1 is determined by the detection information of the above-mentioned frame opening switch P892. This frame opening switch P892 is ON when the front frame P2 is open relative to the outer frame 1, and is OFF when the front frame P2 is closed relative to the outer frame 1. In this embodiment, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is switched on at the time of powering on, the condition is that the front frame P2 is open relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch P892 is ON when the open state of the front frame P2 is detected), but when the RAM clear mode or the gaming mode is switched on at the time of powering on, the condition is not that the front frame P2 is open relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch P892 is ON when the open state of the front frame P2 is detected). In other words, when switching to the RAM clear mode or the game mode upon power-on, it is possible to switch to either the state where the front frame P2 is open relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch P892 is in the ON state when it detects the open state of the front frame P2) or the state where the front frame P2 is closed relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch P892 is in the OFF state when it detects the closed state of the front frame P2) by performing a predetermined operation (described later) upon power-on. Note that, as a modified example, even when switching to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode upon power-on, it is not required that the front frame P2 is open relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch P892 is in the ON state when it detects the open state of the front frame P2); that is, it is possible to switch to the setting change mode or the game mode by performing a predetermined operation (described later) upon power-on, even if the front frame P2 is open relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch P892 is in the ON state when it detects the open state of the front frame P2).
The mode may be configured to be able to be changed by performing a predetermined operation (described later) when the power is turned on, even if the mode is in the OFF state (OFF state) or the front frame P2 is closed relative to the outer frame 1 (OFF state in which the frame opening switch P892 detects the closed state of the front frame P2). Also, even if the mode is changed to any of the modes (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM clear mode, and game mode), a power interruption recovery image is displayed on the performance display device P70.

The setting change mode is a mode that is entered when the power is turned on (the power switch is turned on) with the front frame P2 open relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame open switch P892 is in the ON state when it detects the open state of the front frame P2), the setting key switch P810 is turned on, and the RAM clear switch P820 is turned on. When entering this setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the fourth display section P834 of the performance display monitor P830 first displays the current setting value that was set before the power was turned on (at the time of the most recent power outage). In other words, when entering the setting change mode, the current setting value (the setting value that was already set before entering the setting change mode) can first be confirmed. As a modified example, a predetermined setting value (for example, "1") may be always displayed regardless of the setting value that was already set before entering the setting change mode. In addition, during the execution of this setting change mode, the setting value can be changed by pressing the RAM clear switch P820. Specifically, each time the RAM clear switch P820 is pressed, the display of the setting value is switched in the following order: "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "1" → .... If the setting key switch P810 is switched to OFF while the desired setting value is displayed, the setting value (desired setting value) is confirmed and the setting change mode is terminated. Then, when the setting change mode is terminated, the game moves to a game mode in which play is possible, and the information displayed on the performance display monitor P830 is switched from setting value information to performance information. When the setting change mode is terminated and the information displayed on the performance display monitor P830 is switched from setting value information to performance information, an initial display (all blinking display) is performed in which all display sections P831 to P834 of the performance display monitor P830 blink for a predetermined period of time (described in detail later). As a modified example, in addition to the case where the power is turned on (the power switch is turned on) with the setting key switch P810 turned on and the RAM clear switch P820 turned on when the front frame P2 is open relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch P892 is in the ON state when it has detected the open state of the front frame P2), the power may also be turned on (the power switch is turned on) with the setting key switch P810 turned off and the RAM clear switch P820 turned on when the front frame P2 is open relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch P892 is in the ON state when it has detected the open state of the front frame P2), and even if the setting key switch P810 is switched from OFF to ON while the display of the performance display device P70 is subsequently recovering (particularly, for one second after the display has recovered), specifically, while the power-off recovery image (power-off recovery screen) is being displayed (particularly, for the first one second of the three seconds during which the power-off recovery image is displayed), the configuration may also be such that the setting change mode is entered. By configuring in this way, even if an operation to switch to the RAM clear mode is mistakenly performed when the power is turned on, it is possible to switch to the setting change mode by changing the state of the setting key after the power is turned on. Note that even when configured in this way, as described above, it is not required that the front frame P2 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch P892 is in an ON state when it detects that the front frame P2 is open), that is, even if the front frame P2 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch P892 is in an ON state when it detects that the front frame P2 is open) or in a closed state relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch P892 is in an OFF state when it detects that the front frame P2 is closed), it is possible to configure the switch to be possible by performing a predetermined operation (described later) when the power is turned on.

The setting confirmation mode is a mode to which the device is switched when the power is turned on (the power switch is turned on) with the front frame P2 open relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch P892 is in the ON state when it detects the open state of the front frame P2), the setting key switch P810 is turned on, and the RAM clear switch P820 is turned off. When the device is switched to this setting confirmation mode, as shown in FIG. 125(B), the fourth display section P834 of the performance display monitor P830 displays the current setting value that was set before the power was turned on (when the power was turned off) with a dot. This allows the current setting value to be confirmed when the device is switched to the setting change mode. The reason why the setting value is displayed with a dot in this setting confirmation mode is to distinguish it from the display of the setting value when the device is switched to the setting change mode (display without a dot). When the setting key switch P810 is switched to OFF, the setting confirmation mode ends. When the setting check mode ends, the game moves to a game mode in which play is possible, and the information displayed on the performance display monitor P830 is switched from the setting value information to the performance information. When the setting check mode ends and the information displayed on the performance display monitor P830 is switched from the setting value information to the performance information, an initial display (all blinking display) is performed in which all display sections P831 to P834 on the performance display monitor P830 blink for a predetermined period of time (described in detail later). As a modified example, in addition to the case where the power is turned on (the power switch is turned on) with the setting key switch P810 turned on and the RAM clear switch P820 turned off when the front frame P2 is open relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch P892 is in the ON state when it has detected the open state of the front frame P2), the power may also be turned on (the power switch is turned on) with the setting key switch P810 turned off and the RAM clear switch P820 turned off when the front frame P2 is open relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch P892 is in the ON state when it has detected the open state of the front frame P2), and even if the power is turned on (the power switch is turned on) while the display of the performance display device P70 is subsequently restored (particularly, for one second after the display has been restored), specifically, while the power-off recovery image (power-off recovery screen) is being displayed (particularly, for the first one second of the three seconds during which the power-off recovery image is displayed), the setting confirmation mode may also be entered even if the setting key switch P810 is switched from OFF to ON. By configuring in this way, even if an operation to shift to the game mode is performed by mistake when the power is turned on, it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode by changing the state of the setting key after the power is turned on. Note that, even when configured in this way, as in the above, it is not required that the front frame P2 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch P892 is in an ON state in which the open state of the front frame P2 is detected), that is, even when the front frame P2 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch P892 is in an ON state in which the open state of the front frame P2 is detected), or when the front frame P2 is in a closed state relative to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch P892 is in an OFF state in which the closed state of the front frame P2 is detected), it may be configured to be able to shift by performing a predetermined operation (described later) when the power is turned on.

The RAM clear mode is a mode that is entered when the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned ON) with the setting key switch P810 turned OFF and the RAM clear switch P820 pressed (turned ON). When entering this RAM clear mode, a predetermined storage area of the RAM P103 mounted on the main control microcomputer P110 is initialized (so-called RAM clear processing is performed). This RAM clear mode ends automatically after the RAM clear processing is executed. When the RAM clear mode ends, the game moves to a play mode in which play is possible, and the information displayed on the performance display monitor P830 is switched from setting value information to performance information. When the information displayed on the performance display monitor P830 is switched from setting value information to performance information upon the end of the RAM clear mode, an initial display (all blinking display) is performed in which all display sections P831 to P834 of the performance display monitor P830 blink for a predetermined period of time (described in detail later).

The game mode is a mode to which the game mode is entered when the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned ON) with the setting key switch P810 turned OFF and the RAM clear switch P820 turned OFF. This game mode is entered after the backup data saved in the RAMP103 at the time of the previous power outage is restored. In addition, when the game mode is entered after the setting change mode, the game mode is entered after the setting change is completed and the backup data saved in the RAMP103 is erased, when the game mode is entered after the setting check mode, the game mode is entered after the setting check is completed and the backup data saved in the RAMP103 is restored, and when the game mode is entered after the RAM clear mode, the game mode is entered after the backup data saved in the RAMP103 is erased. When the game mode is entered, the game becomes available for play, and an initial display (all blinking display) is performed in which all display sections P831 to P834 of the performance display monitor P830 blink for a predetermined period of time (details will be described later).

<Processing during setting change mode>
Next, the process in the setting change mode when the power is turned on will be described.

(Notifications during setting changes)
First, the contents of notifications from the performance display monitor P830, the main control display device P27, the external information terminal board P600, the speaker P11, the frame lamp P10, and the performance display device P70 when the transition mode at power-on is the setting change mode will be described. Figure 126 (A) is a diagram showing the contents of notifications during the setting change mode.

When the setting change mode is entered at power-on, the fourth display section P834 of the performance display monitor P830 displays the set value of the jackpot probability. As mentioned above, while this setting change mode is in progress, the display of the set value changes in the following order each time the RAM clear switch P820 is pressed: "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "1" → ... In this setting change mode, a number indicating the set value (for example, the number "1" when the set value is "1") is displayed in the seven segments SG1 to SG7 of the fourth display section P834, but no dot is displayed in the dot segment SG8 of the fourth display section P834 (the dot segment SG8 is turned off).

When the setting change mode is entered, the error indicator light Er of the main control display device P27 is turned on. The error indicator light Er remains on from the start of the setting change mode until it is ended. The other indicator lights P71 to P79 of the main control display device P27 are turned off from the start of the setting change mode until it is ended. As a variation, all of the other indicator lights P71 to P79 or some of the indicator lights may be turned on or flashing. In that case, it is preferable to turn on all of the multiple LED segments that make up each indicator light on or flashing. As another variation, all of the indicator lights of the main control display device P27, including the error indicator light Er of the main control display device P27, may be turned off.

When the machine transitions to the setting change mode, a security signal is output from the external information terminal board P600 to an external device (such as a data display or hall computer) installed outside the gaming machine. This security signal starts to be output when the setting change mode starts, and stops being output a predetermined time (128 ms) after the setting change mode ends.

When the setting change mode is entered, the speaker P11 outputs a voice message saying "Settings are being changed." This voice message "Settings are being changed" is output repeatedly from when the setting change mode is entered until it is ended.

In addition, when the setting change mode is entered, a setting change image showing the words "setting change in progress" is displayed on the screen of the performance display device P70. This setting change image is displayed continuously from the start of the setting change mode until it is ended.

(Payout of prize balls during setting changes)
Next, the payout of prize balls when the transition mode at the time of power-on is the setting change mode will be described. First, when the setting change mode is entered at the time of power-on, the payout of all prize balls is restricted until the setting change mode is ended, and prize balls are not paid out from the prize ball payout unit P34. In other words, during the execution of the setting change mode, the payout of prize balls based on the game balls entering each winning port including the large winning port P54 and the general winning port P64 is restricted. In this embodiment, the payout of prize balls is permitted when the setting change mode is ended and the game mode is started. When the setting change mode is ended, the RAM clear mode may be started instead of the game mode (the game mode may be started by ending the RAM clear mode).

Here, the processing in the case where a power outage occurs during the payout of prize balls and the setting change mode is entered when the power is restored will be described. Specifically, if a power outage occurs while the prize ball payout unit P34 is paying out prize balls, the power is cut off with the information on the remaining number of prize balls that have not yet been paid out backed up in the memory area of RAMP103. Here, if a normal power-on operation (power-on operation without turning on the RAM clear switch P820) is performed when the power is restored, the information on the number of prize balls that have not yet been paid out is stored in the memory area of RAMP103, so that the number of prize balls that have not yet been paid out will be paid out after the power is restored. On the other hand, if a transition operation to the setting change mode (power-on operation with the setting key switch P810 turned on and the RAM clear switch P820 turned on) is performed when the power is restored, the information related to the game stored in the memory area of RAMP103 is erased, and the information on the number of prize balls that have not yet been paid out that was backed up at the time of the power outage is also erased, so that the prize balls that have not yet been paid out will not be paid out when the power is restored. Furthermore, the information on the number of unpaid prize balls that was backed up when the power was turned off is not erased when the setting change mode is started, but is erased when the setting change mode is ended.

In addition, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, even if a game ball enters one of the winning ports between the time the power is turned on and the time the setting change mode is ended (for example, an input signal is input to the input port of the I/O port circuit P104 of the main control board P100 by making a game ball enter the general winning port P64, forcibly opening the large winning port P54 to allow a game ball to enter, or forcibly turning on each winning port switch), the setting change mode does not end and the game mode is not entered (the main control side timer interrupt process is started and input process (S53), winning monitoring process (S59), prize ball control process (S60), etc. are not executed), so the main CPUP101 does not access the input port of the I/O port circuit P104, and information that a game ball has entered each winning port is not stored in the memory area of the RAMP103, and prize balls are not paid out while the setting change mode is being executed.

(Other processes during configuration changes)
Next, other processing when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on will be described. During the setting change mode, even if the launch handle P12 is touched and rotated, the operation of the launch handle P12 is determined to be invalid, or the touch and rotation of the launch handle P12 are not detected (the launch detection is restricted). In other words, even if the launch handle P12 is touched and rotated, the launch of the game ball is not possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the launch of an unexpected game ball (use of a game ball) or an unexpected ball entry in advance by accidentally touching the launch handle P12 and rotating it during the setting change mode. In addition, even if the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or more during the setting change mode, the waiting demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) is not displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being mistakenly recognized as having ended despite being in the setting change mode. In addition, during the setting change mode, the display of the special pattern change is not started (special pattern change start condition is not satisfied), and during the setting change mode, the display of the normal pattern change is not started (normal pattern change start condition is not satisfied). By configuring in this way, even if there is an unexpected ball entry (such as a game ball that has been staying in the game area PA), it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding whether the currently set mode is the setting change mode or the game mode by not making an unintended hit/miss judgment and a change display based on it. Furthermore, even during the setting change mode, while it is possible to detect certain errors (for example, a door/frame opening error or a magnetic sensor error), it is configured not to display an error notification regarding the specific error, and it is configured to be possible to detect and notify certain errors (for example, a setting value abnormality error or a setting change abnormality error, which will be described later). By configuring in this manner, during the setting change mode, unlike the game mode, error notifications for specific errors are restricted and notifications of predetermined errors (errors related to settings) are prioritized, making it possible to provide an error notification format suitable for the setting change mode, and unlike specifications that restrict launch detection, display of the standby demo screen, and the variable display of special and normal patterns during the setting change mode, there is no restriction on the detection of specific errors, allowing the player himself to properly grasp the current situation.

As a variation of the transition to the setting change mode, during the setting change mode, touching and rotating the launch handle P12 may be enabled (touching and rotating the launch handle P12 makes it possible to launch a game ball). Also, during the setting change mode, a standby demo screen (a customer waiting demo screen) may be displayed when the game is suspended for a predetermined period of time or more. Also, during the setting change mode, if an error is detected, an error notification image may be displayed. In that case, the error notification image is set in a layer higher or lower than the layer of the above-mentioned "Setting value changing" image.

(Processing when returning from changing settings)
Next, the process when returning from the setting change mode to the game mode will be described. Even if the launch handle P12 is continuously held (even if the hand is touched and the rotation operation is continued, or even if the hand is continued to touch) during the setting change mode until the game mode to which the transition is made after the setting change mode ends (a specific time has passed since the start of the game mode), the touch effect is not executed (the touch operation is invalidated). Note that the touch effect is an effect that is executed under the condition that the player touches the launch handle P12 and performs a rotation operation (or simply touches the launch handle P12) during a standby demo effect (a demo effect waiting for customers), and specifically, when the player touches the launch handle P12 and performs a rotation operation (or simply touches the launch handle P12) during the standby demo effect (a demo effect waiting for customers), a voice message "Start playing!" is output and a specific character is displayed on the effect display device P70. In addition, when returning from the setting change mode to the game mode, the standby demo performance (customer waiting demo performance) is configured to be performed immediately after returning or when a state where no game is being played (a game interruption state) continues for a predetermined time or more after returning. In other words, even if the launch handle P12 is continuously held (even if the hand is touched and the rotation operation is continued, or even if the hand is continued to touch) during the standby demo performance (customer waiting standby demo performance) from during the setting change mode to during the game mode to which the transition is made after the setting change mode ends (the standby demo performance (customer waiting demo performance) executed after the game mode starts), the touch performance is not performed. In addition, even if the volume button (left key or right key) is continuously pressed from during the setting change mode to during the game mode to which the transition is made after the setting change mode ends, the volume level is configured not to change during the game mode (the volume operation is disabled). Furthermore, even if the pressing operation is released during the game mode, the volume level is configured not to change (the volume operation is disabled). Since the volume adjustment can be performed even during the variable display in the game mode, this configuration does not assume that the standby demo performance (customer waiting demo performance) in the game mode is in progress. In addition, when the game mode is returned to, the volume level is set to the initial setting (for example, regardless of the light level set before the transition to the setting change mode (before the power is turned off), the volume level is always set to "3" out of the light level levels "1" to "5"). In addition, even if the light level button (up key or down key) is continuously pressed from the setting change mode to the game mode to which the transition is made after the setting change mode ends, the light level does not change during the game mode (light level operation is invalid). Furthermore, even if the pressing operation is released during the game mode, the light level does not change (light level operation is invalid). Since the light level adjustment can be performed even during the variable display in the game mode, this configuration does not assume that the standby demo performance (customer waiting demo performance) in the game mode is in progress. In addition, when returning to the game mode, the light level is set to the initial setting (for example, regardless of the light level that was set before switching to the setting change mode (before the power was turned off), the light level is always set to "3" out of the light levels "1" to "5").

In addition, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, low priority error notifications (abnormal notifications) may not be executed, while high priority error notifications (abnormal notifications) may be executed. In this way, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, low priority errors are ignored, so that the processing during the setting change mode is not hindered, and the processing load due to the error notifications can be prevented from increasing. Here, a high priority error is an error type (first type error) in which the priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing is set to a high level. The first type errors include magnetic sensor errors, radio wave sensor errors, disconnection/short circuit power supply errors, excessive winning errors, door/frame opening errors, setting value abnormal errors, setting change abnormal errors, etc. A low priority error is an error type in which the priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing is set to a low level. The second type errors include payout errors (prize ball errors), such as ball tray full errors, ball jamming/ball jamming errors, and no ball errors. The setting value abnormal error is an error that occurs when a value that should not be set (for example, a value that is not within the range of 1 to 6) is set as the setting value, and the setting change abnormal error is an error that occurs when a power outage occurs during the setting change state and an operation to switch to a mode other than the setting change mode is performed, that is, when an operation to switch to a mode other than the setting change mode is performed even though the setting value (desired setting value) has not been confirmed, and an abnormal operation is deemed to have been performed. The contents of other errors are explained in the second embodiment, so they will not be explained here. In addition, when the setting change mode is switched to when the power is turned on, the launch of the game balls may be restricted (the launch handle P12 is disabled) regardless of whether a first type error or a second type error occurs.

<Processing during setting confirmation mode>
Next, the process in the setting check mode when the power is turned on will be described.

(Notifications during setting confirmation)
First, the contents of the notification on the performance display monitor P830, the main control display device P27, the external information terminal board P600, the speaker P11, the frame lamp P10, and the performance display device P70 when the transition mode at the time of power-on is the setting confirmation mode will be described. Figure 126 (B) is a diagram showing the notification contents during the setting confirmation mode.

When the setting check mode is entered when the power is turned on, the fourth display unit P834 of the performance display monitor P830 displays the current setting value that was set before the power was turned on (at the most recent power off). When the setting check mode is entered, a numerical value indicating the setting value (for example, the number "1" when the setting value is "1") is displayed on the seven-segment SG1 to SG7 of the fourth display unit P834, and a dot is displayed on the dot segment SG8 of the fourth display unit P834. In other words, the current setting value and a dot are displayed as a pair on the fourth display unit P834. When the setting check mode is entered, the reason why the current setting value is displayed with a dot on the fourth display unit P834 is to distinguish it from the display of the setting value when the setting change mode is entered (display without a dot). In this way, when the setting check mode is entered when the power is turned on, the current setting value can be confirmed.

When the setting check mode is entered, the error indicator light Er of the main control display device P27 is turned on. The error indicator light Er remains on from the start of the setting check mode until it ends. The other indicator lights P71-79 of the main control display device P27 are turned off from the start of the setting check mode until it ends. As a variation, all of the other indicator lights P71-79 or some of the indicator lights may be turned on or flashing. In that case, it is preferable to turn on all of the multiple LED segments that make up each indicator light on or flashing. As another variation, all of the indicator lights of the main control display device P27, including the error indicator light Er of the main control display device P27, may be turned off.

When the setting check mode is entered, a security signal is output from the external information terminal board P600 to an external device (such as a data display or hall computer) installed outside the gaming machine. Note that the security signal starts to be output when the setting check mode is started, and stops being output a predetermined time (128 ms) after the setting check mode is ended.

When the setting confirmation mode is entered, the speaker P11 outputs a voice message saying "Checking setting values." This voice message "Checking setting values" is output repeatedly from the start of the setting confirmation mode until it ends.

In addition, when the setting confirmation mode is entered, a setting confirmation image showing the words "Settings Confirming" is displayed on the screen of the performance display device P70. This setting confirmation image is displayed continuously from the start of the setting confirmation mode until it ends.

(Paying out prize balls while checking settings)
Next, the payout of prize balls when the transition mode upon power-on is the setting confirmation mode will be explained.

Here, we will explain the process when a power outage occurs during the payout of prize balls and the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is restored. Specifically, if a power outage occurs while prize balls are being paid out in the prize ball payout unit P34, the power is cut off with information on the remaining number of prize balls that have not yet been paid out backed up in the memory area of RAMP103. When the power is restored, if an operation to enter the setting confirmation mode is performed (turning the setting key switch P810 ON while leaving the RAM clear switch P820 OFF to turn on the power), information on the number of prize balls that have not yet been paid out is stored in the memory area of RAMP103, but the payout of prize balls is temporarily suspended until the setting confirmation mode ends and the game mode is entered. The reason for temporarily suspending the payout of prize balls until the setting confirmation mode ends is that when switching to this setting confirmation mode, a game store employee or the like must open the front frame P2 and operate the setting key switch P810 or the like from the back side of the front frame P2, and with the front frame P2 open, the supply of game balls from the ball supply device on the game store side to the gaming machine cannot be performed normally, and there is a risk that the prize balls will not be paid out correctly. Therefore, the payout of prize balls is temporarily suspended until the setting confirmation mode ends, and the payout of prize balls is resumed after switching to the gaming mode.

Furthermore, in the case where the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, even if a game ball enters any of the winning ports between the time the power is turned on and the time the setting confirmation mode is ended (for example, an input signal is input to the input port of the I/O port circuit P104 of the main control board P100 by allowing a game ball to enter the general winning port P64, forcibly opening the large winning port P54 to allow a game ball to enter, or forcibly turning on each winning port switch), the setting confirmation mode does not end and the game mode is not entered (the main control side timer interrupt process is started and input process (S53), winning monitoring process (S59), prize ball control process (S60), etc. are not executed), so the main CPU P101 does not access the input port of the I/O port circuit P104. Therefore, information that a game ball has entered each of the winning ports is not stored in the memory area of the RAM P103, and prize balls are not paid out while the setting confirmation mode is being executed.

In addition, when the setting confirmation mode ends and the game mode starts, and the jackpot game that was interrupted due to the occurrence of a power outage is resumed, during the execution of the resumed jackpot game, the payout of prize balls based on the game ball entering the large prize opening P54 during the aforementioned setting confirmation mode is not performed, and the display (including update display) of the cumulative number of prize balls based on the game ball entering the large prize opening P54 during the aforementioned setting confirmation mode and the count-up performance are not performed. On the other hand, if a game ball enters the large prize opening P54 during the execution of the resumed jackpot game (for example, during the execution of a round game immediately after returning), the payout of prize balls based on the game ball entering the large prize opening P54 is performed, but the display (update display) of the cumulative number of prize balls based on the game ball entering the large prize opening P54 and the count-up performance are not performed. The reason for limiting the display (update display) of the cumulative number of winning balls and the execution of the count-up effect after the jackpot game is resumed in this way is that after the power is restored or after the setting confirmation mode is ended and the game mode is started, a predetermined power-off recovery image (power-off recovery screen) or a jackpot screen dedicated to after the power is restored (round screen dedicated to after the power is restored) is displayed, and the notification of the power recovery is prioritized over the notification of information related to winning or the number of winning balls. In addition, as a modified example, when the jackpot game is resumed due to the power being restored or the setting confirmation mode being ended and the game mode being started, a predetermined power-off recovery image (power-off recovery screen) is displayed in the round game at the time of the restart, and the round game at the time of the restart is switched to a normal round effect (jackpot effect) from the start of the next round game of the round game at the time of the restart (for example, the sixth round game if the round game is resumed from the fifth round), and the display (update display) of the cumulative number of winning balls based on the entry of game balls into the big prize opening P54 and the count-up effect are executed.

As a further variant, a certain round of jackpot play that was interrupted due to a power outage may be resumed when the setting check mode ends and the game mode starts, and after a power outage recovery image is displayed as the power is restored during the execution of that certain round of play (or the setting check mode ends and the game mode starts), a normal jackpot presentation (for example, the above-mentioned Super Longevity jackpot presentation, Longevity jackpot presentation, and Happy jackpot presentation) may be restored after a predetermined time has passed (for example, 5 seconds have passed since the power outage recovery image was displayed) or when that certain round of play ends (in other words, if the power is cut off and then restored during, for example, the third round of round play (or the setting check mode ends and the game mode starts), the normal round presentation may be restored from the start of the fourth round of round play). As described above, a round presentation screen according to the type of presentation during the jackpot (Super Longevity jackpot presentation, Longevity jackpot presentation, Happy jackpot presentation) is displayed. In other words, if the presentation pattern during the jackpot is the Super Longevity jackpot presentation, a Super Longevity jackpot round screen (for example, a presentation screen in which five characters are introduced on a rainbow background) is displayed. If the presentation pattern during the jackpot is the Longevity jackpot presentation, a Longevity jackpot round screen (for example, a presentation screen in which two characters are introduced on a red background) is displayed. If the presentation pattern during the jackpot is the Happy jackpot presentation, a Happy jackpot round screen (for example, a presentation screen in which one character is introduced on a blue background) is displayed. In this configuration, the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed during the jackpot game after the restarted round game, but it starts from "0" instead of the cumulative number of winning balls displayed before the power failure, and the cumulative number of winning balls counter is also cleared to "0". However, even if it starts from "0", the cumulative number of winning balls display is updated and a count-up presentation and an emphasis presentation (
Further, if more game balls than the specified number enter the large prize port P54 (over-entry) during the restarted jackpot game, the over-entry effect is executed, and similarly, if a game ball enters the general prize port P64 during the restarted jackpot game, the cumulative prize ball count display is updated, a count-up effect is executed, and a bonus prize effect is executed.

In addition, as a further variant, a certain round of jackpot play that was interrupted due to a power outage may be resumed when the setting confirmation mode ends and the game mode starts, and after a power outage recovery image is displayed as the power is restored during the execution of that certain round of play (or the setting confirmation mode ends and the game mode starts), the screen may be configured to return to a jackpot screen dedicated to after power recovery (a round screen dedicated to after power recovery) upon the passage of a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds after the power outage recovery image is displayed) or upon the end of the round of play (i.e., after the passage of a predetermined time, or, for example, when the power is cut and restored during the third round of play (or when the setting confirmation mode ends and the game mode starts), the screen may be configured to return to a jackpot screen dedicated to after power recovery) upon the passage of a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds after the power outage recovery image is displayed) or upon the end of the round of play (i.e., When the game mode is started), the normal round presentation may be resumed from the start of the fourth round of round play. If configured in this way, the cumulative number of winning balls will not be displayed during the jackpot game after the restarted round play, and even if a game ball enters the big prize winning port P54, the cumulative number of winning balls display will not be updated, the count-up presentation will not be performed, and the highlighting presentation (enlarged display) will not be performed. Furthermore, even if more game balls than the specified number enter the big prize winning port P54 (over-winning) during the restarted jackpot game, the over-winning presentation will not be performed. Similarly, even if a game ball enters the general prize winning port P64 during the restarted jackpot game, the cumulative number of winning balls display will not be updated, the count-up presentation will not be performed, and the bonus winning presentation will not be performed.

(Other processes during configuration check)
Next, other processing when the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on will be described. During the setting confirmation mode, even if the launch handle P12 is touched and rotated, the operation of the launch handle P12 is determined to be invalid, or the touch and rotation of the launch handle P12 are not detected (the launch detection is restricted). In other words, even if the launch handle P12 is touched and rotated, the launch of the game ball is not possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the launch of an unexpected game ball (use of a game ball) or an unexpected ball entry in advance by accidentally touching the launch handle P12 and rotating it during the setting confirmation mode. In addition, even if the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or more during the setting confirmation mode, the waiting demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) is not displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting confirmation mode from being mistakenly recognized as having ended despite being in the setting confirmation mode. In addition, during the setting confirmation mode, the display of the special pattern change is not started (special pattern change start condition is not satisfied), and during the setting confirmation mode, the display of the normal pattern change is not started (normal pattern change start condition is not satisfied). By configuring in this way, even if there is an unexpected ball entry (such as a game ball that has been staying in the game area PA), it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding whether the currently set mode is the setting confirmation mode or the game mode by not making an unintended hit/miss judgment and a change display based on it. Furthermore, even during the setting confirmation mode, while it is possible to detect specific errors (for example, door/frame opening errors and magnetic sensor errors), it is configured not to display an error notification regarding the specific error, and it is configured to be possible to detect and notify certain errors (for example, setting value abnormality errors and setting change abnormality errors). By configuring in this manner, during the setting check mode, unlike the game mode, error notifications for specific errors are restricted and notifications of predetermined errors (errors related to settings) are prioritized, making it possible to provide an error notification format suitable for the setting check mode, and unlike specifications that restrict launch detection, display of the standby demo screen, and variable display of special and normal patterns during the setting check mode, there is no restriction on the detection of specific errors, allowing the player himself to properly grasp the current situation.

As a variation of the case where the setting check mode is entered, during the setting check mode, touching and rotating the launch handle P12 may be enabled (touching and rotating the launch handle P12 makes it possible to launch a game ball). Also, during the setting check mode, a standby demo screen (a customer waiting demo screen) may be displayed when the game is suspended for a predetermined period of time or more. Also, during the setting check mode, if an error is detected, an error notification image may be displayed. In that case, the error notification image is set in a layer higher or lower than the layer of the above-mentioned "Checking setting values" image.

(Processing when returning from checking settings)
Next, the process when returning from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode will be described. Even if the launch handle P12 is continuously held (even if the hand is touched and the rotation operation is continued, or even if the hand is continued to touch) during the setting confirmation mode until the game mode to which the game mode is transferred after the setting confirmation mode ends (a specific time has passed since the start of the game mode), the touch effect is not executed (the touch operation is invalidated). Note that the touch effect is an effect that is executed under the condition that the player touches the launch handle P12 and performs a rotation operation (or simply touches the launch handle P12) during a standby demo effect (a demo effect waiting for customers), and specifically, when the player touches the launch handle P12 and performs a rotation operation (or simply touches the launch handle P12) during the standby demo effect (a demo effect waiting for customers), a voice message "Start playing!" is output and a specific character is displayed on the effect display device P70. In addition, when returning from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode, the standby demo performance (customer waiting demo performance) is configured to be transitioned to immediately after the return or when a state where no game is being played (a game interruption state) continues for a predetermined time or more after the return. In other words, even if the launch handle P12 is continuously held (even if the hand is touched and the rotation operation is continued, or even if the hand is continued to touch) from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode to which the transition is made after the end of the setting confirmation mode (the standby demo performance (customer waiting demo performance) executed after the start of the game mode), the touch performance is not executed during the standby demo performance (customer waiting standby demo performance). In addition, even if the volume button (left key or right key) is continuously pressed from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode to which the transition is made after the end of the setting confirmation mode, the volume level is configured not to change during the game mode (the volume operation is disabled). Furthermore, even if the pressing operation is released during the game mode, the volume level is configured not to change (the volume operation is disabled). Since the volume adjustment can be performed even during the variable display in the game mode, this configuration does not assume that the standby demo performance (customer waiting demo performance) in the game mode is in progress. In addition, when returning to the game mode, the volume level is set to the initial setting (for example, regardless of the light amount set before the transition to the setting confirmation mode (before the power is turned off), the volume level is always set to "3" out of the light amount levels "1" to "5"). In addition, even if the light amount button (up key or down key) is continuously pressed from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode to which the transition is made after the setting confirmation mode ends, the light amount level does not change during the game mode (light amount operation is invalid). Furthermore, even if the pressing operation is released during the game mode, the light amount level does not change (light amount operation is invalid). Since the light amount adjustment can be performed even during the variable display in the game mode, this configuration does not assume that the standby demo performance (customer waiting demo performance) in the game mode is in progress. In addition, when returning to the game mode, the light level is set to the initial setting (for example, regardless of the light level that was set before switching to the setting confirmation mode (before the power was turned off), the light level is always set to "3" out of the light levels "1" to "5").

<Performance information>
Next, the base value, which is the performance information of the game, will be explained. In a broad sense, the base value is the ratio of the number of prize balls acquired by the player to the number of game balls launched by the player (the number of game balls that reach the game area PA). However, the base value applied in this embodiment, which will be described in detail later, means the ratio of the number of prize balls acquired by the player to the number of game balls launched by the player (the number of game balls that reach the game area PA) when the game state currently being executed is the normal game state.

In this embodiment, data related to game performance information (such as the base value, total number of outs, number of outs under normal conditions, and number of winning balls under normal conditions, which will be described later) is stored in the performance information storage area P103C of the RAMP103 provided on the main control board P100.

Here, FIG. 127(A) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the memory area of the RAMP103 of the main control board P100. The RAMP103 is provided with a game control information memory area P103A, a setting value information memory area P103B, a performance information memory area P103C, and the like. The game information memory area P103A stores information for controlling the progress of the game (information on the variable display of special and normal symbols, information on the jackpot game, information on the game state, information on the payout of prize balls, etc.). The setting value information memory area P103B stores setting value information for specifying the winning probability (jackpot probability) at which the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol is a jackpot. The performance information memory area P103C stores information for specifying the performance information (base value) of the game. Note that the performance information memory area P103C may store information used in the process for performing the test specified by the game rules. In this embodiment, even if the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the information stored in the setting value information storage area P103B and the performance information storage area P103C is not erased.

Figure 127 (B) is a schematic diagram showing the performance information storage area P103C of RAMP103. The performance information storage area P103A includes a total out counter P1030, a normal out counter P1031, a normal prize ball counter P1032, a base information storage area P1033, a base information switching counter P1034, a base information output data area P1035, an output display switching timer P1036, and a new start flag P1037.

The total out counter P1030 is a counter for counting the total number of outs. The "total number of outs" is the number (total number) of game balls discharged from the game area PA in all game states. All game states include a special game state in which a special game is being played, and a non-special game state in which a special game is not being played. The non-special game states also include a normal game state, a time-saving game state, and a probability game state. In the case of a gaming machine that employs a small hit rush mode, as in the third embodiment described above, the non-special game states include a normal game state, a time-saving game state, a probability game state, and a potential probability game state. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that does not have a probability fluctuation function (for example, a small win V model that has a fluctuation time shortening function), the non-special gaming state includes the normal gaming state and the time-shortened gaming state, and in the case of a gaming machine that does not have either a probability fluctuation function or a fluctuation time shortening function (for example, a small win V model that does not have a fluctuation time shortening function), the non-special gaming state includes only the normal gaming state.

The normal out count counter P1031 is a counter for counting the normal out count. The "normal out count" is the number (total number) of game balls discharged from the game area PA when the game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state).

The total number of outs and the number of outs under normal conditions are calculated based on detection information from a played ball detection sensor P891 that detects game balls discharged from the back side of the game board P20 (played balls that have entered each winning hole or the out hole P29 and finished playing). As another method for counting the total number of outs and the number of outs under normal conditions, for example, the total number of outs (total number of shot balls) and the number of outs under normal conditions (number of shot balls under normal conditions) may be calculated based on detection information from a shot ball detection sensor that detects the number of game balls shot toward the game area PA (number of shot balls). In that case, it is preferable to use a value obtained by subtracting the number of game balls (foul balls) that returned without reaching the game area PA from the number of game balls shot toward the game area PA.

The normal prize ball counter P1032 is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in normal play. The "normal prize ball number" is the number (total number) of prize balls paid out to a player when the game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state). In other words, the normal prize ball number does not include the number of prize balls paid out in the game state (special game state) when a jackpot game is being played in the low probability low base state, but only includes the number of prize balls paid out in the game state (normal game state) when a jackpot game is not being played in the low probability low base state. Therefore, this normal prize ball number is the cumulative number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of game balls into the first start port P51, the second start port P52, and the general prize ports P61 to P64 in the normal game state. In this embodiment, each time a game ball enters a prize hole (a prize hole excluding the large prize hole P54) that is eligible for prize ball payout during normal gameplay, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize hole into which the ball entered is cumulatively added to the normal prize ball number counter P1032 (the main CPU P101 performs a process of adding the number to the normal prize ball number counter P1032 of the RAMP103). As another method for counting the number of prize balls during normal play, the number of prize balls during normal play may be counted based on detection information from a prize ball count sensor that counts the number of prize balls actually paid out from the prize ball payout unit P34.

The base information storage area P1033 is an area that stores base values that indicate the performance information of the game. The "base value" is the ratio of the number of prize balls in normal times to the number of outs in normal times. In other words, the base value is the ratio of the number of prize balls (total number) paid out to the player to the number of game balls (total number) discharged from the game area PA when the currently active game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state), and is a value calculated by the formula "number of prize balls in normal times ÷ number of outs in normal times × 100". Therefore, the base value in this example is the base value measured in the normal game state, and does not mean the base value in a specific game state (time-saving game state, special game state) or the base value in a special game state.

This base value, which will be described in detail later, is calculated for each pre-set management interval (basically for each interval until the value of the total out counter P1030 reaches "60,000"). The base values calculated for each management interval are stored sequentially in the base information storage area P1033. This base information memory area P1033 consists of a current base value memory area P1033a which stores the base value (current base value) calculated in real time in the currently executed section, a previous base value memory area P1033b which stores the base value (previous base value) calculated when the total number of outs reached 60,000 in the previous section (the section previous to the currently executed section), a second previous base value memory area P1033c which stores the base value (second previous base value) calculated when the total number of outs reached 60,000 in the second previous section (the section second to the currently executed section), and a third previous base value memory area P1033d which stores the base value (third previous base value) calculated when the total number of outs reached 60,000 in the third previous section (the section third to the currently executed section). Although details will be described later, in the section where the total number of outs is less than 299 from the time the gaming machine is first turned on (when it is newly started up) (section A described below), the base value is not calculated.

The base information switching counter P1034 is a counter for switching the base value displayed on the performance display monitor P830. When the value of the base information switching counter P1034 is "0", the base value of the current interval is displayed on the performance display monitor P830, when the value of the base information switching counter is "1", the base value of the previous interval is displayed on the performance display monitor P830, when the value of the base information switching counter is "2", the base value of the second interval before is displayed on the performance display monitor P830, and when the value of the base information switching counter P1034 is "3", the base value of the third interval before is displayed on the performance display monitor P830.

The base information output data area P1035 is an area that stores the display data of the four display sections P831 to P834 in the performance display monitor P830. Although not shown, the base information output data area P1035 has a first output data area that stores the display data of the first display section P831, a second output data area that stores the display data of the second display section P832, a third output data area that stores the display data of the third display section P833, and a fourth output data area that stores the display data of the fourth display section P834.

The output display switching timer P1036 is a timer for switching the display data stored in the base information output data area P1035. In this embodiment, the display data stored in the base information output data area P1035 is switched at a predetermined cycle based on the time value of the output display switching timer P1036.

The new start-up flag P1037 is a flag that indicates whether or not the gaming machine is being powered on for the first time (new start-up). In other words, if the new start-up flag P1037 is ON, it indicates that the gaming machine is being powered on for the first time, and if the new start-up flag P1037 is OFF, it indicates that the gaming machine is not being powered on for the first time. Note that this new start-up flag P1037 is turned OFF immediately after the gaming machine is powered on for the first time (immediately after a new start-up) (it is preferable that it is turned OFF at least while the power is being turned on for the first time). Note that, as a modified example, the new start-up flag P1037 may be configured to be turned OFF when the total number of outs counter P1030 starts counting when the gaming machine is powered on for the first time.

<<Display of base value>>
Next, the display of the base value will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 120, the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor P830. As described above, the performance display monitor P830 has an identification display section (identification segment) P830a consisting of a first display section P831 and a second display section P832 of the upper two digits, and a ratio display section (ratio segment) P830b consisting of a third display section P833 and a fourth display section P834 of the lower two digits. In this specification, the term "illumination" is used as a concept including both continuous illumination and blinking illumination, but in order to distinguish between them as necessary, continuous illumination may be simply referred to as "illumination" or "illumination display", and blinking illumination may be simply referred to as "blinking" or "blinking display".

The identification segment P830a displays an identifier for identifying the type of base value (the section for which the base value is managed). That is, the identification segment P830a can display "bL.", which indicates that it is the base value for the current section, "b1.", which indicates that it is the base value for the previous section, "b2.", which indicates that it is the base value for the section two sections ago, and "bL3.", which indicates that it is the base value for the third section (the base value three times ago) (details will be described later).

The ratio segment P830b displays the calculation result of the base value corresponding to the identifier (measurement section) displayed in the identification segment P830a. That is, the ratio segment P830b can display the base value (real-time value) of the current section, the base value (final result value) of the previous section, the base value (final result value) of the second previous section, and the base value (final result value) of the third previous section (details will be described later). In this embodiment, "displaying the base value" means displaying both the identification segment P830a and the ratio segment P830b, except in special cases.

Here, FIG. 128 is a schematic diagram showing a display example of the base value for each section. As described above, the base value is measured for each predetermined management section (each of sections A, B, C, D, etc. described below). The performance display monitor P830 switches between the display of the base value for the current section (FIG. 128(B)), the display of the base value for the section one section back (FIG. 128(C)), the display of the base value for the section two sections back (FIG. 128(D)), and the display of the base value for the section three sections back (FIG. 128(E)) at specific times (predetermined display switching time). In this embodiment, "4.8 seconds" is set as the display switching time for the base value. The base value display switching process is performed based on the value of the base information switching counter P1034 described above.

First, in the display of the base value of the current section, as shown in FIG. 128(B), the identification segment P830a displays "bL." in a lit or flashing manner, and the ratio segment P830b displays the real-time base value currently being measured (the base value stored in the current base value storage area P1033a) in a lit manner. In addition, in the display of the base value of the previous section, as shown in FIG. 128(C), the identification segment P830a displays "b1." in a lit or flashing manner, and the ratio segment P830b displays the base value at the end of the previous section (the base value stored in the previous base value storage area P1033b) in a lit manner. In addition, in the display of the base value of the section two sections ago, as shown in FIG. 128(D), the identification segment P830a displays "b2." in a lit or flashing manner, and the ratio segment P830b displays the base value at the end of the section two sections ago (the base value stored in the second previous base value storage area P1033c) in a lit manner. Furthermore, when displaying the base value of the third previous interval, as shown in FIG. 128(E), "b3." is displayed lit or flashing in the identification segment P830a, and the base value at the end of the third previous interval (the base value stored in the third previous base value memory area P1033d) is displayed lit in the ratio segment P830b.

The ratio segment P830b displays the integer portion (integer value) of the base value measurement result after rounding off the first decimal place. For example, if the base value measurement result is 35.49, "35" is displayed in the ratio segment P830b, and if the base value measurement result is 35.50, "36" is displayed in the ratio segment P830b. If the rounded base value measurement result is less than 10, a "0" is displayed in the tens digit of the ratio segment P830b (for example, "00" to "09"). If the rounded base value measurement result is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the ratio segment P830b. That is, if the rounded number is 99, "99" is displayed in the ratio segment P830b, and if the rounded number is 100 or more, "99." is displayed (a dot is displayed) in the ratio segment P830b. This is because the ratio segment P830b of the performance display monitor P830 can only display the base value as a two-digit number, so "99." is displayed (a dot is displayed after 99) to notify that the base value exceeds 100%. As a modified example, the measurement result of the base value may be configured to truncate to one decimal place and display only the integer portion (integer value). Even in this configuration, if the rounded number after truncation is 99, "99" is displayed in the ratio segment P830b, and if the rounded number is 100 or more, "99." is displayed (a dot is displayed) in the ratio segment P830b.

When the gaming machine is turned on (when the power is restored after being turned off), as shown in FIG. 128(A), all display parts P831 to P834 of the performance display monitor P830 are displayed in a full blinking display (also called "initial display") in which all display parts P831 to P834 are switched between a full on state and a full off state for a predetermined time (4.8 seconds) at a predetermined interval (predetermined cycle). In this embodiment, this predetermined interval (predetermined cycle) is 0.6 seconds, and "lighting for 0.3 seconds -> blinking for 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets. In other words, the initial display (full blinking display) of the performance display monitor P830 is displayed in a full blinking display in which all LED segments SG1 to SG8 (a total of 32 LED segments) of the four display parts P831 to P834 of the performance display monitor P830 are displayed in a full blinking display when the gaming machine is turned on. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128(A) to (E), after the initial display (full blinking display) of the performance display monitor P830 ends, the display of the base value (switching of the display of the base value) is performed. During the initial display period of this performance display monitor P830 (the full blinking display period), the main control side timer interrupt processing is activated, and game mode processing such as special electric device control processing (processing to return the large prize opening P54 to the open state before the power was cut off, etc.), prize ball control processing (processing to pay out unpaid prize balls before the power was cut off, etc.), LED output processing (processing to control the lighting of the main control display device P27, etc.), and special pattern control processing are executed.

Here, in this embodiment, the timing at which the display of the base value starts can differ depending on the transition mode at the time of power-on. For example, when the gaming machine is switched to the gaming mode when the power is turned on, the display of the base value starts after the initial display (full blinking display) of 830 on the performance display monitor is executed for a predetermined time (4.8 seconds). On the other hand, when the gaming machine is switched to the RAM clear mode, setting change mode, or setting check mode when the power is turned on, the display of the base value starts after the RAM clear mode, setting change mode, or setting check mode ends and the initial display (full blinking display) of the performance display monitor P830 is executed for a predetermined time (4.8 seconds). Note that the predetermined time (initial display time, full blinking display time) is not limited to the aforementioned 4.8 seconds, but is preferably set to, for example, a time between 4.5 seconds and 5.5 seconds (5 seconds ±10%).

<<Base value measurement procedure>>
Next, the flow of measuring the base value from the first power-on of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing the display contents displayed in the identification segment P830a and the ratio segment P830b for each management section (measurement section). Note that "first power-on of the gaming machine" refers to the first power-on of the gaming machine. In this embodiment, whether or not it is the first power-on of the gaming machine is determined based on the state of the new start-up flag P1037 provided in the performance information storage area P103C. That is, if the new start-up flag is ON, it indicates that it is the first power-on of the gaming machine, and if the new start-up flag is OFF, it indicates that it is not the first power-on of the gaming machine. In this embodiment, when the new start-up flag P1037 is ON, counting is started in the section A (the period in which the identifier is displayed in the identification segment P830b in a blinking manner and the ratio segment P830b is displayed in a lit state "--"). When the power of this gaming machine is turned on for the first time, all values of the total out counter P1030, the normal out counter P1031, the normal prize ball counter P1032, the base information storage area P1033, etc. are set to the initial value "0." Also, when the currently executed section ends, the total out counter P1030, the normal out counter P1031, and the normal prize ball counter P1032 are cleared. In addition, when the currently executed section (excluding section A described later) ends and moves to the next section, the base values of the past sections stored in the 1-time-ago base value storage area P1033b and the 2-time-ago base value storage area P1033c are shifted to the base value storage area of the previous section (2-time-ago base value storage area P1033c and 3-time-ago base value storage area P1033d), respectively, and the final value of the base value of the current section stored in the current base value storage area P1033a (the base value when the total number of outs reaches 60,000) is shifted to the 1-time-ago base value storage area P1033b, and this current base value storage area P1033a is cleared. Note that the base value stored in the 3-time-ago base value storage area P1033d is erased by shifting and overwriting the base value stored in the 2-time-ago base value storage area P1033c.

First, in the section (referred to as "section A") in which the value of the total out counter P1030 is less than 299 from the time the power is first turned on, this section is a test section in which game balls are shot and prizes are won for the purpose of inspecting the gaming machine and test-running (adjusting) at the gaming parlor, and an accurate base value cannot be obtained, so it is excluded from the calculation of the base value. In other words, this section A is set as a section in which the counting of the normal out counter P1031 and the normal prize ball counter P1032 is not performed (a section in which the base value is not calculated). However, even during the execution of this section A, the counting of the total out counter P1030 is performed to determine the switching of the section (to determine the switching to the next section).

When displaying the base value of the currently executing section A, "bL." is displayed flashing in the identification segment P830a, and "--" is displayed lit in the ratio segment P830b. In other words, the flashing display of "bL." in the identification segment P830a and the lit display of "--" in the ratio segment P830b indicate that the base value of the currently executing section A cannot be displayed. Also, since the previous section (the section from one section back to three sections back) does not exist, when displaying the base value of the previous section (the section from one section back to three sections back), "--" is displayed lit in the ratio segment P830b. Specifically, when displaying the base value of the previous section, "b1." is displayed flashing in the identification segment P830a, and "--" is displayed lit in the ratio segment P830b. The flashing display of "b1." in the identification segment P830a and the lit display of "--" in the ratio segment P830b indicate that the base value of the previous section cannot yet be displayed. When displaying the base value of the section two sections back, "b2." is flashed in the identification segment P830a and "--" is lit in the ratio segment P830b. The flashing display of "b2." in the identification segment P830a and the lit display of "--" in the ratio segment P830b indicate that the base value of the section two sections back is not yet able to be displayed. When displaying the base value of the section three sections back, "b3." is flashed in the identification segment P830a and "--" is lit in the ratio segment P830b. The flashing display of "b3." in the identification segment P830a and the lit display of "--" in the ratio segment P830b indicate that the base value of the section three sections back is not yet able to be displayed. In this embodiment, these blinking displays are performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), with eight sets of "lighting for 0.3 seconds -> blinking for 0.3 seconds" repeated.

Then, when the value of the total outs counter P1030 since the first power-on reaches 299, the currently running section A ends and a new section (called "section B") begins. When the currently running section A ends, as described above, the total outs counter P1030, the normal outs counter P1031, and the normal prize balls P counter P1032 are reset (cleared to zero). Also, the values stored in each of the base value memory areas P1033a to P1033d are shifted to the previous memory area.

Section B ends when the value of the total out counter P1030 reaches 60,000, counting from the end of the previous section A. In section B, the current base value is calculated in real time, and this real-time value is stored sequentially in the current base value storage area P1033a of RAMP103. When displaying the base value of the currently running section B, if the value of the normal out counter P1031 is less than 6,000 (0 to 5,999), "bL." is displayed in a blinking manner in the identification segment P830a, and the base value (real-time value) of the current section B, that is, the base value (real-time value) stored in the current base value storage area P1033a, is displayed in a lit manner in the ratio segment P830b. Here, the reason for displaying the identification segment P830a in a blinking manner when the value of the normal out counter P1031 is less than 6,000 is to inform the user that the base value is not stable because the number of samples is too small to calculate the base value of the current section with less than 6,000 measurement results. On the other hand, if the value of the normal out counter P1031 is 6000 or more, "bL." is displayed in the identification segment P830a and the base value (real time value) of the current section B, i.e., the base value stored in the current base value storage area P1033a, is displayed in the ratio segment P830b. In this embodiment, this blinking display is performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and "lighting for 0.3 seconds → blinking for 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

In addition, in this section B, when displaying the base value of the previous section (section A), "b1." is displayed in a flashing manner in the identification segment P830a, and "--" is displayed in a lit manner in the ratio segment P830b. This is because the base value has not been calculated in the previous section (section A), so the flashing display of "b1." in the identification segment P830a and the lit display of "--" in the ratio segment P830b indicate that the base value of the previous section cannot be displayed. In addition, when displaying the base value of the section two sections ago, "b2." is displayed in a flashing manner in the identification segment P830a, and "--" is displayed in a lit manner in the ratio segment P830b. This is because the section two sections ago does not exist, so the flashing display of "b2." in the identification segment P830a and the lit display of "--" in the ratio segment P830b indicate that the base value of the section two sections ago cannot be displayed yet. Furthermore, when displaying the base value of the third previous interval, "b3." is displayed flashing in the identification segment P830a, and "--" is displayed lit in the ratio segment P830b. Since there is no interval three times ago, the flashing display of "b3." in the identification segment P830a and the lit display of "--" in the ratio segment P830b indicate that the base value of the third previous interval cannot yet be displayed. In this embodiment, these flashing displays are performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and the "lighting 0.3 seconds → flashing 0.3 seconds" is repeated for eight sets.

Then, when the value of the total outs counter P1030 reaches 60,000, the currently executing section B ends and a new section (called "section C") begins. When the currently executing section B ends, as described above, the total outs counter P1030, the normal outs counter P1031, and the normal prize balls counter P1032 are cleared. Also, the values stored in each of the base value memory areas P1033a to 1033d are shifted to the previous memory area.

Section C ends when the value of the total out counter P1030 reaches 60,000, counting from the end of the previous section B. In section C, as in the previous section B, the current base value is calculated in real time, and this real-time value is stored sequentially in the current base value memory area P1033a of RAMP103. When displaying the base value of this currently running section C, if the value of the normal out counter P1031 is less than 6,000 (0 to 5,999), "bL." is displayed flashing in the identification segment P830a, and the base value (real-time value) of the current section C, i.e., the base value (real-time value) stored in the current base value memory area P1033a, is displayed lit in the ratio segment P830b. On the other hand, if the value of the normal out counter P1031 is 6000 or more, "bL." is displayed in the identification segment P830a and the base value (real time value) of the current section C, i.e., the base value stored in the current base value storage area P1033a, is displayed in the ratio segment P830b. In this embodiment, this blinking display is performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and "lighting for 0.3 seconds → blinking for 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

In addition, in this section C, when displaying the base value of the previous section (section B), the identification segment P830a displays "b1." in a lit state, and the ratio segment P830b displays the final value of the base value of the previous section (section B), that is, the base value stored in the previous base value storage area P1033b in a lit state. In addition, when displaying the base value of the section two sections ago, the identification segment P830a displays "b2." in a blinking state, and the ratio segment P830b displays "--". This is because the base value was not calculated in the section two sections ago (section A), so the blinking display of "b2." in the identification segment P830a and the lit display of "--" in the ratio segment P830b indicate that the base value of the section two sections ago cannot be displayed. In addition, when displaying the base value of the section three sections ago, the identification segment P830a displays "b3." in a blinking state, and the ratio segment P830b displays "--". Since there is no section three times before this, the flashing display of "b3." in the identification segment P830a and the lit display of "--" in the ratio segment P830b indicate that the base value of the section three times before cannot yet be displayed. Note that in this embodiment, these flashing displays are performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and the "lighting for 0.3 seconds → flashing for 0.3 seconds" is repeated for eight sets.

Then, when the value of the total outs counter P1030 reaches 60,000, the currently executing section C ends and a new section (referred to as "section D") begins. When the currently executing section C ends, as described above, the total outs counter P1030, the normal outs counter P1031, and the normal prize balls counter P1032 are cleared. Also, the values stored in each of the base value memory areas P1033a to 1033d are shifted to the previous memory area.

Section D ends when the value of the total out counter reaches 60,000, counting from the end of the previous section C. In section D, as in the previous section C, the current base value is calculated in real time, and this real-time value is stored sequentially in the current base value memory area P1033a of RAMP103. When displaying the base value of this currently running section D, if the value of the normal out counter P1031 is less than 6,000 (0 to 5,999), "bL." is displayed flashing in the identification segment P830a, and the base value (real-time value) of the current section D, i.e., the base value (real-time value) stored in the current base value memory area P1033a, is displayed lit in the ratio segment P830b. On the other hand, if the value of the normal out counter P1031 is 6000 or more, "bL." is displayed in the identification segment P830a and the base value (real time value) of the current section D, i.e., the base value stored in the current base value storage area P1033a, is displayed in the ratio segment P830b. In this embodiment, this blinking display is performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and "lighting for 0.3 seconds → blinking for 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

In addition, in this section D, when displaying the base value of the previous section (section C), the identification segment P830a lights up "b1." and the ratio segment P830b lights up the final value of the base value of the previous section (section C), i.e., the base value stored in the previous base value storage area P1033b. When displaying the base value of the section two sections ago (section B), the identification segment P830a lights up "b2." and the ratio segment P830b lights up the final value of the base value of the section two sections ago (section B), i.e., the base value stored in the two sections ago base value storage area P1033c. When displaying the base value of the section three sections ago (section A), the identification segment P830a flashes "b3." and the ratio segment P830b lights up "--". Since the base value was not calculated in the section three times before (section A), the blinking display of "b3." in the identification segment P830a and the lighting display of "--" in the ratio segment P830b indicate that the base value for the section three times before cannot be displayed. Note that in this embodiment, this blinking display occurs at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and the cycle of "illuminated for 0.3 seconds → blinking for 0.3 seconds" is repeated for eight sets.

Then, when the value of the total outs counter P1030 reaches 60,000, the currently executing section D ends and a new section (called "section E") begins. When the currently executing section D ends, as described above, the total outs counter P1030, the normal outs counter P1031, and the normal prize balls counter P1032 are cleared. Also, the values stored in each of the base value memory areas P1033a to 1033d are shifted to the previous memory area.

After that, each time the total out counter reaches 60,000 after the start of each section, that section ends and a new section begins. In other words, due to space limitations, Figure 129 shows sections A through D, but when section D ends, a new section E begins, and when section E ends, a new section F begins, and so on, with each section starting and ending when the total out counter reaches 60,000.

<Relationship between performance indication and expected value of winning ball>
Next, the relationship between the performance display and the expected value of winning balls will be described. FIG. 130 is a time chart when the first hit occurs during the execution of the section A. In this embodiment, the identification segment P830a (identifier) of the performance display monitor P830 is displayed in a blinking manner until a predetermined period has elapsed since the power of the gaming machine was turned on. Specifically, as described above, when the currently executed measurement section is section A, that is, when the total number of outs is less than a predetermined number X1 (299 pieces) counting from the time the power of the gaming machine was first turned on, the identification segment P830a of the performance display monitor P830 is displayed in a blinking manner. Also, in the next section B after the end of this section A, that is, in the section B counting from the end of section A until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 pieces, when the number of outs in normal times is less than a predetermined number X2 (6,000 pieces) counting from the start of the section B, the identification segment P830a of the performance display monitor P830 is displayed in a blinking manner. As a modified example, in the next section B after the end of section A, that is, in section B from the end of section A until the total number of outs reaches 60,000, if the number of outs under normal conditions is less than a predetermined number X2 (6,000) from the time the power is first turned on, the identification segment P830a of the performance display monitor P830 may be configured to flash. If the identifier flashing on the identification segment P830a is the identifier (bL) indicating the current section, the real-time value of the base value measured in the current section is displayed in a lit state in the ratio segment P830b. In this embodiment, these flashing displays are performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycles), and the "lighting 0.3 seconds → flashing 0.3 seconds" is repeated for eight sets.

In contrast, the expected value of winning balls (theoretical number of winning balls) paid out during the execution of a jackpot game, which is performed when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol in the normal game state is a jackpot, is set to the above-mentioned predetermined number X1 (299 balls). In other words, the expected value of winning balls (theoretical number of winning balls) at the time of the first hit is set to the predetermined number X1 (299 balls) that triggers the end of section A. Specifically, there are "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" and "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" for the jackpot type of the first special symbol, but the specified number of rounds for the jackpot game is set to 4 rounds for both jackpot types, and all of the round games are long-time open round games (long-open round games), so the expected value of winning balls at the time of the first hit for both jackpot types is 600 balls (4 rounds x 10 counts x 15 winning balls = 600 balls). In this embodiment, the expected value of winning prize balls at the time of the first hit (600 balls) is set as the total number of outs to be reached, so that it is equal to or greater than the predetermined number X1 (299 balls) that triggers the end of the section A. In other words, if the first hit is drawn while staying in the section A, it is possible to win a larger number of prize balls (maximum 600 balls) than the predetermined number X1 (299 balls) that triggers the end of the section A. Therefore, if the first hit can be drawn while staying in the section A, while the number of prize balls (maximum 600 balls) acquired at the first hit is shot out as one's own balls toward the play area PA, the game balls discharged from the play area PA, i.e., the total number of outs, are likely to reach the predetermined number X1 (299 balls), and it is expected that the transition from section A to section B will be triggered by the total number of outs reaching the predetermined number X1 (299 balls). As a result, while the base value is hidden in section A (display of "--" in identification segment P830b), the base value is displayed in real time by moving to section B. As a result, in this embodiment, if the first hit is hit early after the game machine is first turned on, section A (test section) can be ended and the next section B can be moved to, causing the performance display to function (the base value of the current section can be displayed in real time) before the number of winning balls (600 balls) acquired in the big hit game triggered by the first hit is used up, making it possible to detect fraudulent behavior (whether there are any abnormalities in the ball output performance) at an early stage.

In this embodiment, the expected value of winning balls during the consecutive wins including the first win (i.e., the expected value of winning balls paid out in the jackpot games played from the first win to the end of the consecutive win state) is set to a predetermined number X2 (6000 balls) or less. In other words, in this embodiment, the probability of entering the special mode (65%), the ST continuation rate (set value 1 = 63% to set value 6 = 76%), the theoretical number of winning balls for each jackpot game (4R jackpot = 600 balls, 8R jackpot = 1200 balls), etc. are set so that the expected value of winning balls during the consecutive wins including the first win is the predetermined number X2 (6000 balls) or less. According to this configuration, by making it difficult to obtain the number of balls required to stop the blinking of the performance display monitor P830 (the number of balls required to reach 6000 in normal times) in one initial hit (i.e., by requiring multiple initial hits), even if the initial hit occurs immediately and the normal shot is continued with the game balls obtained (even if the game is continued until the balls run out), the blinking of the performance display monitor P830 will not be stopped unless more game balls are shot, and the base value can be managed more accurately. Note that the expected value of winning balls during this consecutive win is preferably the expected value of winning balls that can be obtained before returning to the normal game state (low probability, low base state) based on the type of jackpot at the time of the initial hit and its selection rate.

In this embodiment, the shortest time required for the jackpot game at the time of the first hit and the shortest time required for the electric support state to be transitioned to after the end of the jackpot game are set in relation to the expected value of winning balls (theoretical number of winning balls) at the time of the first hit. Here, the launch speed of the game balls is set to a maximum of 100 balls per minute, and it takes 6 minutes to shoot out all the prize balls paid out at the time of the first hit (expected value of winning balls: 600 balls). Therefore, in this embodiment, the total time of the shortest time required for the jackpot game to be played at the time of the first hit (the time required when the game balls are constantly shot during the execution of the jackpot game) and the shortest time required for the electric support state to be transitioned to after the end of the jackpot game (the time required when the game balls are constantly shot during the execution of the electric support state 100 times without interrupting the reserved balls) is configured to be 6 minutes or more. As a result, all of the winning balls (theoretical number of winning balls) acquired at the time of the first hit will be shot out by the time the electric support state ends, provided that the game balls continue to be fired.

In addition, in this embodiment, the condition for satisfying the highlighting effect execution condition for executing the above-mentioned highlighting effect (enlarged display) is that the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls), and this predetermined number of prize balls (the minimum value of the specific value) corresponds to a value equal to or greater than a predetermined number X1 (299 balls) and equal to or less than a predetermined number X2 (6000 balls). In other words, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, the highlighting effect (enlarged display) is performed every time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (2500 balls), and at least one highlighting effect (enlarged display) is performed between the cumulative number of prize balls reaching the predetermined number X1 (299 balls) or more and the predetermined number X2 (6000 balls) (in this embodiment, between the cumulative number of prize balls reaching the predetermined number X1 (299 balls) or more and the predetermined number X2 (6000 balls), the highlighting effect is performed twice, when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches 2500 balls and when it reaches 5000 balls). In this way, by making the conditions for executing the emphasis effect less stringent than the conditions for canceling the blinking display of the identification segment P830a, the likelihood that the conditions for executing the emphasis effect will be met is increased even in a situation where the blinking display has not been canceled at the start of play, and the emphasis effect can be generated at an early stage, increasing the player's motivation to play.

<<Updating the base value during the initial display period when the power is turned on>>
Next, the update process of the base value during the initial display period will be described. Fig. 131(A) is a time chart showing the initial display period when the game state when the power is restored after a power outage is a special game state, and Fig. 131(B) is a time chart showing the initial display period when the game state when the power is restored after a power outage is a normal game state.

In this embodiment, as described above, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (when the power is restored after being turned off), all display parts P831 to P834 of the performance display monitor P830 are turned on and off for a predetermined time (4.8 seconds), and a full flashing display (initial display) is performed in which the display part P831 to P834 repeats a lighting display state and an off state every 0.3 seconds. Here, as shown in FIG. 131 (A), if the game state at the time of power restoration is a low base state (special game state) during a big win game, during the initial display period of the performance display monitor P830 at the time of powering on, the counting of the total out number counter P1030 is performed, and a judgment process (section switching process) for switching to the next section is executed, but the counting of the normal out number counter P1031 and the normal prize ball number counter P1032 is not performed, and a calculation process (base value update process) for updating the base value is not executed. In other words, when the performance display monitor P830 detects balls entering the first starting port P51 or the general winning ports P61-P64 during the initial display period when the power is turned on, and detects balls entering the first starting port P51 or the general winning ports P61-P64 and the like, and detects balls entering the first starting port P51 or the general winning ports P61-P64 and the like, during the initial display period, a judgment process (section switching process) for switching to the next section is executed during the initial display period, but a calculation process (base value update process) for updating the base value is not executed. Therefore, after the end of the initial display period, the section may have switched to a section different from the section before the power was turned off, but the base value before the power was turned off is not changed (if the section has not switched to a section different from the section before the power was turned off, the base value in the current section "bL." is not updated, and if the section has switched to a section different from the section before the power was turned off, the base value in the section "bL." before the power was turned off before the switch is not updated and is the same as the base value in the section "b1." after the power was turned off and after the initial display period ends). Note that this base value update process starts after the end of the initial display period. As a modified example, when the special game state continues even after the initial display period ends, the base value update process may be configured not to be executed at least until the special game state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state (more specifically, until the high base state that transitions after the special game state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 131 (B), when the game state at the time of power off recovery is a low base state (normal game state) during non-jackpot play, the total out counter P1030, the normal out counter P1031, and the normal prize ball counter P1032 are counted during the initial display period of the performance display monitor P830 when the power is turned on, and a judgment process (zone switching process) for switching to the next zone and a calculation process (base value update process) for updating the base value are respectively executed. In other words, when a ball is detected entering the first starting port P51 or the general winning ports P61-P64, etc., during the initial display period of the performance display monitor P830 when the power is turned on, and an out related to the ball is detected, a judgment process (portion switching process) for switching to the next port and a calculation process (base value update process) for updating the base value are each executed during the initial display period, so that after the initial display period ends, the port may have switched to a port different from the port before the power was cut off, and the base value before the power was cut off may have been changed (if the port has not switched to a port different from the port before the power was cut off, the base value in the current port, "bL.", is updated, and if the port has switched to a port different from the port before the power was cut off, the base value in the port before the power was cut off, "bL.", and the base value in the port after the power was restored and after the initial display period ends after the switch, may be updated and may be different). As a result, in this embodiment, even if the game state at the time of power off recovery (power on) is the same low base state, whether the base value is calculated during the initial display period at the time of power off recovery (power on) is switched depending on whether it is a low base state during a jackpot game (special game state) or a low base state during a non-jackpot game (normal game state), so that the performance of the gaming machine can be appropriately evaluated. In addition, whether it is a low base state during a jackpot game or a low base state during a non-jackpot game, the total number of outs counter P1030 is counted during the initial display at the time of power off recovery (power on), so that the intervals (intervals A, B, C, D, ...) of each time can be appropriately switched. Note that the above-mentioned power off recovery (power recovery) is a power off recovery without RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), and if the power off recovery is accompanied by RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), the game machine transitions to a normal game state (low probability low base state).

When this initial display period ends, the base information switching counter P1034 starts counting from "0". Therefore, after the initial display period ends, the performance display monitor P830 first starts by displaying the base value of the current section. Then, after this base value of the current section is displayed for 4.8 seconds, as described above, the base value of the previous section, the base value of the second section before, and the base value of the third section before are displayed in turn for 4.8 seconds each, and then the base value of the current section is displayed again.

As a modified example, the base information switching counter P1034 may start counting at the start of the initial display period, and the count value of the base information switching counter P1034 may be switched every 4.8 seconds even during the initial display period (internal switching between each section is performed every 4.8 seconds), and at the end of the initial display period, the base value of the section corresponding to the timing of the end of the initial display period may be displayed.

<Updating the base value when a prize ball error occurs>
Next, the update of the base value when an error (a prize ball error) occurs regarding the payout of the prize ball during the execution of the big win game will be described. Figure 132 is a time chart when a prize ball error occurs during the execution of the big win game. Note that this prize ball error means the same error as the payout error described in the second embodiment.

In this embodiment, if a prize ball error (payout error) occurs during the execution of a jackpot game, the payout of prize balls is temporarily suspended from the time the prize ball error occurs until the prize ball error is released. Therefore, if a prize ball error occurs while prize balls are being paid out in response to the entry of a game ball into the large prize winning port P54 during the execution of a jackpot game, the payout of prize balls that were not paid out until the prize ball error occurred among the prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize winning port P54 is stopped until the prize ball error is released. Also, if a game ball enters the large prize winning port P54 after the prize ball error occurs even during the execution of the jackpot game, the payout of prize balls based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize winning port P54 is stopped until the prize ball error is released. Here, after the end of the jackpot game, if the game moves to a high probability game state (high base state) or a time-saving game state (low base state), and the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches 100 times in this high base state (i.e., if the jackpot is not won within 100 spins), the game will fall into a normal game state (low probability low base state) after the end of these 100 spins. However, if the above-mentioned prize ball error is released in this normal game state (low probability low base state), the payout of prize balls will be resumed in the normal game state (low probability low base state). In other words, the prize balls that would have been paid out during the execution of the jackpot game (prize balls that were not paid out during the execution of the jackpot game due to the occurrence of a prize ball error) will be paid out in the normal game state to which the game moved via the high base state after the end of the jackpot game. Here, the normal prize ball counter P1032 counts the number of prize balls paid out in the normal game state, but this is a counting target of the number of prize balls paid out in the normal game state when a game ball enters any winning port (excluding the large winning port P54) during the execution of the normal game state. Therefore, if a prize ball that would have been paid out during the execution of a jackpot game (a prize ball based on the game ball entering the large winning port P54) is paid out in the subsequent normal game state, it is excluded from the counting target of the normal prize ball counter P1032. In other words, if a prize ball that was not paid out during the execution of a jackpot game due to the occurrence of a prize ball error is paid out in the subsequent normal game state based on the release of the prize ball error, the number of prize balls is not counted by the normal prize ball counter P1032 and is excluded from the calculation of the base value, so that the base value is properly managed.

As mentioned above, if a prize ball error occurs during the execution of a jackpot game, the prize balls based on the game balls entering the large prize opening P54 that were not paid out during the execution of the jackpot game are not counted by the prize ball count counter P1032 under normal circumstances and are not subject to updating of the base value. However, the number of game balls that entered the large prize opening P54 (number of winning balls) is counted by the total out counter P1030 as valid game balls used in the game (game balls discharged from the game area PA) and is treated as a valid count value for switching the base value interval.

In addition, if the prize balls are not paid out due to the occurrence of a prize ball error during the execution of the jackpot game, not only the prize balls based on the entry of the game balls into the big prize winning port P54, but also the prize balls based on the entry of the game balls into other prize winning ports such as bonus winning ports (first start port P51, second start port P52, general prize winning ports P61 to P64) are not counted by the normal prize ball counter P1032 and are not subject to updating of the base value. In addition, the number of game balls (number of winning balls) that entered the other prize winning ports (first start port P51, second start port P52, general prize winning ports P61 to P64) during the execution of the jackpot game should also be counted as the number of valid outs (number of shots) used in the game in the game area PA, so they are subject to updating of the total outs counter P1030.

In addition, if a prize ball error occurs during the execution of a jackpot game, that is, as described above, a prize ball error occurs while prize balls are being paid out as a result of a game ball entering the large prize entry port P54 during the execution of a jackpot game, and the prize ball error continues until the normal game state to which the game is transitioned after the end of the jackpot game via the special probability game state, and then the prize ball error is resolved in the normal game state, during the execution of the jackpot game and after the prize ball error occurs, even if there are prize balls that were not paid out during the execution of the jackpot game due to the occurrence of the prize ball error (even if the payout of prize balls is limited), the entry of a game ball into the large prize entry port P54 (the entry of a game ball into the large prize entry port P54 that triggered the generation of the prize balls that were not paid out until the prize ball error was resolved) is triggered (the value of the cumulative prize ball counter is incremented), and the cumulative prize ball display is updated and a count-up effect is executed. Furthermore, even after the occurrence of the prize ball error, an emphasis effect (enlarged display) is executed when the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied (when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple of the specified number of prize balls) based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize winning port P54 (the entry of a game ball into the large prize winning port P54 that triggered the generation of the prize balls that had not been paid out until the prize ball error was resolved), and an over prize winning effect is executed when the over prize winning effect execution condition is satisfied.

<Base value display update cycle>
Next, the update cycle when updating the display of the base value will be described. In this embodiment, in each section (measurement section) except for the first section A, until the normal out number counter P1031 reaches 6000, when displaying the base value of the currently executed section, "bL." is displayed in a flashing manner in the identification segment P830a, and the real-time value of the base value is displayed in a lighting manner in the ratio segment P830b. At this time, the flashing display of the identification segment P830a (flashing display of "bL.") is performed in a manner that alternates between lighting for 0.3 seconds and turning off for 0.3 seconds. That is, in this embodiment, the flashing cycle of the identification segment P830a is set to 0.6 seconds (lighting 0.3 seconds + turning off 0.3 seconds). The switching between lighting and turning off in the flashing display of this identification segment P830a is performed based on the time value of the output display switching timer P1036 of the RAMP103. In this embodiment, the timer value of the output display switching timer P1036 is incremented by "1" for each interruption (every 4 ms) of the main control timer interrupt process, and when the timer value of the output display switching timer P1036 reaches a multiple of "75", that is, when 0.3 seconds (4 ms x 75 = 300 ms) have elapsed, the identification segment P830a is switched between on and off. In other words, each time the timer value of the output display switching timer P1036 reaches a multiple of "75", a process of setting identifier on data and a process of setting identifier off data are alternately switched in the first output data area and the second output data area of the base information output data area P1035.

On the other hand, when displaying the base value of the currently executed section in the ratio segment P830a, display data corresponding to the base value of the current section is set in the third output data area and the fourth output data area of the base information output data area P1035. Here, in the currently executed section, the base value (real-time value) is calculated for each interruption of the timer interrupt process, and this real-time value is sequentially stored in the current base value storage area P1033a of the RAMP103. At this time, display data corresponding to the base value stored in the current base value storage area P1033a is set in the third output data area and the fourth output data area of the base information output data area P1035. However, the update period of this display data is the same as the blinking period of the ratio segment P830a described above. In other words, the update period of the display data is not every period (4 ms corresponding to one interruption) in which the base value is calculated, but every 0.6 seconds (600 ms) corresponding to the blinking period of the ratio segment P830a. Therefore, each time the count value of the output display switching timer P1036 reaches a multiple value of "150", a process is performed to set the display data of the ratio segment P830b in the third output data area and the fourth output data area of the base information output data area P1035. Therefore, if one blinking display (unit display) is defined as the ratio segment being lit for 0.3 seconds followed by being turned off for 0.3 seconds, the display data of the ratio segment P830a will be updated at the start of this unit display (when the 0.3 second lit display starts). As a result, when the display data of the ratio segment P830b is updated at the start of one blinking display of the identification segment P830a, even if the base value (current base value) stored in the current base value storage area P1033a is updated during the period of the one blinking display, the display data of the ratio segment P830b is not updated (the base value displayed as lit in the ratio segment P830b is not changed), and the base value corresponding to the display data updated at the start of the one blinking display continues to be displayed as lit until the end of the one blinking display. Then, when the one blinking display ends and the next blinking display starts, the display data of the ratio segment P830b is updated to new display data corresponding to the current base value (the current base value stored in the current base value storage area P1033a), and the base value displayed in the ratio segment P830b is also switched to the current base value (real-time value) corresponding to the new display data. In this way, by synchronizing the blinking period of the identifier displayed in the identifier segment P830a with the update period of the base value (real-time value) displayed in the ratio segment P830b, the visibility of the base value can be improved, making it possible to accurately and easily check the performance of the game.

In this embodiment, all or part of the display of the performance display monitor P830 may be displayed in a blinking manner, for example, when all display sections P831-P834 are displayed in a blinking manner in the initial display of the performance display monitor P830 when the power is turned on, or when the identification segment P830a (first display section P831 and second display section P832) is displayed in a blinking manner until the value of the normal out counter reaches 6000 in each section (excluding section A). In this case, the blinking period (0.6 seconds as mentioned above) of each display section P831-834 is set to the same period as the blinking period of the initial display when the power is turned on and the blinking period of the identification segment P830a until the value of the normal out counter reaches 6000 in each section (excluding section A). This blinking period (0.6 seconds) is set to a longer period than the count-up display time (the execution time of the count-up performance) of 15 prize balls paid out based on the entry of one game ball into the large prize opening P54. In this embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the count-up display time for one prize ball (the time required for the count-up display from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 seconds", and the count-up display time for the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) awarded when one game ball enters the large prize opening P54 (the time required for the count-up display from "N" to "N+15") is "15 (unit number of prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up display time for one ball) = 0.45 seconds", so the blinking period (0.6 seconds) of each display unit P831-834 is longer. The reason for setting the blinking cycle of each display unit P831-P834 longer than the count-up display time of the cumulative prize ball count is that the display time of the count-up display of the cumulative prize ball count is set on the assumption that the average player will be able to recognize that a count-up display is being displayed, and if this count-up display time is considered as a guide for switching the display, setting the blinking cycle longer than this count-up display time means that it can be reliably recognized that each display unit P831-P834 is being displayed blinking.

In the above embodiment, the update period for the display data (on data, off data) of the identification segment P830a is every 0.3 seconds, and the update period for the display data of the ratio segment P830b is every 0.6 seconds, but this update period can be set appropriately, and the update period for the display data of the ratio segment P830b may be set to the same as the update period for the display data of the identification segment P830a.

<Relationship between base value display switching time and game ball launch time>
In this embodiment, the display of the base value in the performance display monitor P830 is switched every predetermined display switching time (4.8 seconds), such as display of the base value of the current section → display of the base value of the previous section → display of the base value of the second previous section → display of the base value of the third previous section, but this display switching time of the base value (4.8 seconds) is set to be shorter than the time required to launch the game balls of the specified count number (10 counts) in one round of play. Specifically, the launch speed of the game balls is set to a maximum of 100 shots per minute, and the launch time of the game balls of the specified count number (10 counts) is "6 seconds (10 counts x 60 seconds ÷ 100 shots)". As a result, the display switching time of the base value (4.8 seconds) is shorter than the launch time of the game balls of the specified count number (6 seconds). According to this configuration, during the execution of a jackpot game, the display of the base value can be switched before one round of play is completed. Therefore, even if the value of the total number of outs counter reaches 60,000 during the execution of one round of play (even if the current measurement period ends and the next measurement period begins), the switching status can be recognized during the execution of one round of play.

In this embodiment, the effect button P15 is configured so that its internal mechanism can cause the effect button itself to vibrate and the movable object inside the effect button P15 to rotate. In this way, the effect button P15 is configured so that not only can the effect content displayed on the effect display device P70 be changed by the player's operation, but also so that the operation of the effect button P15 itself can suggest or notify the player of the likelihood of a jackpot. Such an operation of the effect button P15 is referred to as effect button operation.

This effect button operation can be performed during the variable display or during jackpot play; during the variable display, it is executed to suggest or notify that the likelihood of a jackpot is very high (for example, it is executed in association with the execution of a specific preview effect executed by the effect display device P70, or it is executed suddenly regardless of the execution of such a specific preview effect), and during jackpot play, it is executed in association with the execution of the promotion effect or consecutive win effect in the reserved state, as described above.

More specifically, during the variable display, the effect button operation is executed simultaneously when the next notice effect (a notice effect with a high probability of a big win that suggests or notifies future performance development) is executed in the middle of the variable display (before the reach is established in the middle), and when the variable during role effect that notifies the winning of a big win is executed at the aforementioned win/lose branching scene (a branching scene where the final result of the SP reach is a content that indicates a big win or a content that indicates a loss) executed in the middle of the variable display (after the reach is established in the final stage) (the effect button operation associated with the notice effect). Note that, in one variation (big win variation), both the next notice effect and the variable during role effect that notifies the winning of a big win are configured to be executed, but the execution time of the effect button operation is configured to be longer when the variable during role effect that notifies the winning of a big win is executed. In addition, a specific preview performance other than a specific preview performance (for example, a comment preview performance, etc.) is configured so that the performance button operation is not associated with it and executed, but the execution timing overlaps with the performance button operation at the start of the fluctuation as a look-ahead, which will be described later, and may be executed at the same time by chance. In addition, as a look-ahead preview performance, if a performance button operation (a performance button operation at the start of the fluctuation as a look-ahead) is executed as a look-ahead preview, which suddenly executes a performance button operation immediately after the start of the fluctuation display related to the operating reserved ball that is consumed before the target of the look-ahead preview performance (for example, the above-mentioned next preview performance or the high expectation fluctuation that may be executed during the fluctuation to notify the winning of the jackpot), even at the start of the fluctuation display related to the target of the look-ahead preview performance that has arrived via the look-ahead preview performance, the performance button operation is executed as a preview performance that suggests or notifies the expectation of the jackpot of the fluctuation, not as a look-ahead preview (performance button operation at the start of the fluctuation via look-ahead). In addition, the performance button operation at the start of the fluctuation as a look-ahead and the performance button operation at the start of the fluctuation via look-ahead are configured to be executed in a shorter time than the performance button operation associated with the above-mentioned preview performance. In addition, the effect button operation is completed during one variable display, and is not continued across two or more variable displays (for example, the vibration of the effect button P15 is not configured to continue from the end of a certain variable display to the beginning of the next variable display after the certain variable display). In addition, during a jackpot game, it is executed in association with the execution of a promotion effect or a consecutive win effect in a reserved state, and is executed in association with the execution of the above-mentioned jackpot during role effect (effect button operation during a jackpot). In addition, the effect button operation during a jackpot is configured to be executable across multiple rounds of play (for example, the vibration of the effect button P15 is configured to be continued from the end of a certain number of rounds of play to the beginning of the next number of rounds of play after the certain number of rounds of play).

Here, the effect button actions are broadly divided into those that are executed based on the player's operation of the effect button P15 and those that are not executed based on the player's operation of the effect button P15. In other words, they are broadly divided into those that are executed immediately when the player operates the effect button P15 and those that do not even require the player to operate the effect button P15. The aforementioned effect button action during a jackpot and the effect button action associated with the during-variation device effect that notifies the player of a jackpot win are instantly executed when the player operates the effect button P15 (in other words, when the player operates the effect button P15, a promotion effect, a consecutive win in reserved play effect, or a during-variation device effect that notifies the player of a jackpot win is executed), and the aforementioned effect button action at the start of variation as a pre-read, the effect button action at the start of variation via pre-read, and the effect button action associated with the next preview effect are executed without the player having to operate the effect button P15 in the first place (in other words, the effect button action at the start of variation, the effect button action at the start of variation via pre-read, and the next preview effect are executed without the player having to operate the effect button P15). Here, as a variant, even if the player operates the performance button P15 despite the jackpot change display, there may be cases where the during-change gimmick performance that notifies the jackpot win is not executed and the corresponding performance button operation is not executed (when the win/lose branch scene indicates a miss), and in such a case, the word "Revival!" may be displayed in the same change display at a timing after the timing when the win/lose branch scene indicates a miss to indicate or notify the jackpot win. When configured in this way, the performance button operation is executed even during the performance in which the word "Revival!" is displayed (also called the resurrection performance or reversal performance), and this performance button operation is configured to be executed without the player having to operate the performance button P15 in the first place.

When the effect button operation is performed, the frame lamp P10 and the aforementioned role lamp are configured to emit light in a specific manner. The light emission manner (light emission color) is configured to differ depending on the performance situation when the effect button operation is performed. Specifically, when a promotion performance, consecutive wins in reserved play performance, a role performance during change that notifies a jackpot win, or a revival performance is performed, the light is emitted in rainbow colors, and when a performance button operation at the start of change, a performance button operation at the start of change via pre-reading, or a next preview performance is performed, the light is emitted in blue. However, in any case, if an error state occurs while the rainbow or blue light is emitted by the effect button operation, the light is always configured to switch to red light.

In addition, when a selection operation to switch to the RAM clear mode or the game mode is performed when the gaming machine is powered on, the button operation is executed after the power is turned on as an operation check, not as an operation. In this case, the button operation is executed in a relatively short time (it is executed in a shorter time than the button operation associated with the variable role effect that notifies the winning of a prize), and the frame lamp P10 and the role lamp described above also emit red light. In addition, when the variable display starts during the button operation, a button image that prompts the player to operate the button may be displayed, but even during this button operation, it is possible to change the display on the performance display device P70 by operating the button (for example, by operating the button, the button image is erased and a comment notice performance is displayed). In addition, when a selection operation to switch to the setting change mode or the setting check mode is performed when the gaming machine is powered on, the button operation as an operation check is not performed after the power is turned on. This makes it possible to omit the button operation as an operation check. In addition, as a modified example, the button operation as an operation check may be performed by terminating the setting change mode or the setting check mode.

The main advantages achieved by the fifth embodiment can be summarized as follows:

First, according to the fifth embodiment, if the first hit occurs at an early stage (section A where the total number of outs is less than 299) after the gaming machine is first turned on, it is possible to win a predetermined number (299 balls) or more of prize balls during the jackpot game, and while the acquired game balls are being shot out (until the game balls in hand are used up), the game can move to the next section (section B) and the base value display (real-time display) can be activated, so that fraudulent behavior (whether there are any abnormalities in the ball output performance) can be detected early and appropriate evaluation of the game performance can be achieved.

In addition, according to the fifth embodiment, even if the game state is the same low base state, the situation of whether or not measurement is required can be appropriately determined depending on whether or not the game state is one in which special play is granted, and calculations for updating the base value can be performed from the initial display period after power-on (full blinking display period). This makes it possible to appropriately manage the base value from an early stage after power-on, thereby enabling appropriate evaluation of game performance.

In addition, according to the fifth embodiment, if prize balls that were not paid out during a jackpot game due to a prize ball error occur and are paid out in the subsequent normal game state based on the release of the prize ball error, the number of prize balls can be excluded from the base value update target, thereby enabling proper management of the base value and realizing an appropriate evaluation of game performance.

In addition, according to the fifth embodiment, the payout of prize balls is restricted for unexpected winnings during the setting check mode, and for winnings in a jackpot game that is resumed after the setting check mode has ended, the payout of prize balls is prioritized to allow the player to obtain actual profits, while the display of effects triggered by the payout of prize balls is restricted, making it possible to reduce the processing burden of the gaming machine while not causing any disadvantage to the player.

In addition, according to the fifth embodiment, if a power outage occurs while prize balls are being paid out during a jackpot game, appropriate prize ball payout restriction measures are implemented that are appropriate for the transition mode when the power is restored, depending on whether the transition mode is a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode. If the mode transitions to the setting confirmation mode, the prize ball payout restriction measures are lifted when the jackpot game is resumed, and the performance display triggered by the payout of the prize balls continues to be restricted, making it possible to reduce the processing burden on the gaming machine while not causing any disadvantage to the player.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment and/or the fourth embodiment and/or the fifth embodiment described above, and in the following, the same reference numerals are used to designate the parts having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and the different parts are mainly described. In other words, in the following description, except in special cases, it is possible to apply the configuration common to the second embodiment and/or the fourth embodiment and/or the fifth embodiment described above.

The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment will be explained below.

First, the board configuration of the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment will be described. Figure 133 is a front view of the game board P20 of the sixth embodiment. An outer rail P41, an inner rail P42, and a rail ornament P43 are attached to this game board P20, and a substantially circular game area PA is defined and formed inside surrounded by the outer rail P41, the inner rail P42, and the rail ornament P43. The game area PA is defined based on the center ornament P21 located approximately in the center into a left area PA1, which is the area to the left of the center ornament P21, and a right area PA2, which is the area to the right of the center ornament P21.

In this sixth embodiment, as in the second embodiment, etc., the game balls flowing down the left area PA1 can mainly enter either the first starting gate P51 or the general winning gates P61 to P63 located below the center ornament P21. On the other hand, the game balls flowing down the right area PA2 can mainly enter either the operation gate P53, the second starting gate P52, or the large winning gate P54 located to the right of the center ornament P21. On the other hand, at the bottom end of the game area PA, an outlet P29 is provided to discharge game balls that flow down without entering each winning gate to the back side of the game board P20. Among the game areas PA equipped with various winning gates, the hitting method of shooting the game balls so that they flow down the left area PA1 is called "left hitting", and the hitting method of shooting the game balls so that they flow down the right area PA2 is called "right hitting".

Mounted on the game board P20 are multiple movable parts P651, 652 that perform presentation actions according to the game's development status. Note that FIG. 133 shows the movable parts P651, P652 in a state where they have returned to their initial positions (a state where they are located in their initial positions).

The first movable role P651 is attached to the center ornament P21 so as to be freely slidable in the vertical direction across both the left and right ends of the center ornament P21. A drive mechanism (consisting of a stepping motor, a gear mechanism, etc.) for driving the first movable role P651 is also attached to the center ornament P21. The first movable role P651 is a logo role having a logo-shaped decorative part that designs characters, patterns, designs, etc., such as the title name of the gaming machine PM, and is configured to be illuminated by the first role lamp (LED board) P651a arranged inside. The first role lamp P651a has multiple light-emitting elements. As this light-emitting element, a full-color LED having a light-emitting element that can emit R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is preferably used. This first movable prop P651 is configured to be able to slide (move back and forth) up and down between an initial position (also called the "first initial position" to distinguish it from the other initial positions) located at the upper end of the center ornament P21, and a movable position (also called the "second movable position" to distinguish it from the other movable positions) located at the lower end of the center ornament P21.

The second movable part P652 is attached to the center ornament P21 so as to be swingable in the left-right direction with the lower right part of the center ornament P21 as a fulcrum. In addition, a drive mechanism (comprised of a stepping motor, a gear mechanism, etc.) for driving the second movable part P652 is attached to the center ornament P21. The second movable part P652 is formed in a shape imitating a pistol, and is configured to be able to emit light by the second part lamp (LED board) P652a arranged inside. The second part lamp 652a has multiple light emitters. As this light emitter, a full-color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is preferably used. The second movable prop P652 is configured to be capable of swinging between an initial position (also referred to as the "second initial position" to distinguish it from the other initial positions) in which it swings to the right around the fulcrum and retreats behind the center ornament 80, and a movable position (also referred to as the "second movable position" to distinguish it from the other movable positions) in which it swings to the left around the fulcrum and appears in front of the screen of the performance display device P70.

In addition, a performance display device (liquid crystal display device) 70 that displays performance images is attached approximately in the center of the game board P20. The performance display device P70 is a liquid crystal display device with an image display section (display area) on the front side, and the image display section (display area) can be seen from the front side of the game machine PM through the opening in the center decoration P21.

The display area of the performance display device P70 includes a decorative pattern display area P700, a reserved image display area P710, a changing image display area P720, a small pattern display area P730, and a reserved number display area P740.

As described above, the decorative pattern display area P700 is a display area for displaying the decorative patterns in a variable and stopped state (determined stop display, temporary stop display). The decorative pattern display area P700 has three display areas (left pattern display area Z1, middle pattern display area Z2, right pattern display area Z3) that are variable display areas for the decorative patterns, and the left pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the left pattern display area Z1, the middle pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the middle pattern display area Z2, and the right pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the right pattern display area Z3 are displayed in a stopped state. The decorative patterns in this embodiment are, for example, composed of patterns (number patterns) having identification elements consisting of numbers. For example, nine types of numbers from "1" to "9" are set as the identification elements of the decorative patterns (i.e., there are nine types of decorative patterns in total). Each decorative pattern is arranged in the order of "1" to "9" according to the arrangement of the pattern row, and on the performance display device P70, they are displayed in a circular or scrolling manner in the order of "1" to "9" (or "9" to "1") in each display area Z1, Z2, Z3, returning to "1" after "9" (or returning to "9" after "1").

In this embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot (also called a "jackpot symbol combination" or "jackpot eye") is composed of a stop pattern combination of "* * *" in which three decorative symbols of the same number (identification element) are lined up (*: decorative symbol of any number). In other words, this jackpot symbol combination (jackpot eye) is a stop pattern combination in which all decorative symbols of the same number (identification element) are lined up, such as "1-1-1", "2-2-2", "3-3-3", "4-4-4", "5-5-5", "6-6-6", "7-7-7", "8-8-8", and "9-9-9".

A combination of decorative symbols that indicates a loss (also called a "loss symbol combination" or "loss mark") is a combination of stopping patterns in which at least one of the three decorative symbols is a decorative symbol with a number different from the other numbers (for example, "1, 3, 8" or "5, 6, 7"). Here, among the losing symbol combinations, stopping pattern combinations in which the left and right decorative symbols match and only the center symbol differs (for example, shifted by a few frames forward or backward) (for example, "2, 4, 2" or "7, 8, 7") are also called "reach loss combinations" or "reach loss marks".

Note that when the decorative patterns are being displayed in a changing state, the combination of decorative patterns when the left and right patterns of the three decorative patterns match and are temporarily stopped while the remaining middle pattern is displayed in a scrolling state (i.e., the combination of decorative patterns when a reach is achieved) is also called a "reach eye."

The reserved image display area P710 is a display area for displaying reserved images (reserved icons) corresponding to the activated reserved balls of the special patterns. In the game state (normal game state) in which the variable display of the first special pattern is the main focus of the game, this reserved image display area P710 displays reserved images (reserved icons) corresponding to the activated reserved balls of the first special pattern, and in the game state (time-saving game state, probability change game state) in which the variable display of the second special pattern is the main focus of the game, a reserved image (reserved icon) corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern is displayed. In this reserved image display area P710, a maximum of four reserved images of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (four corresponding to the maximum number of activated reserved balls stored for each special pattern) can be displayed. The reserved images of the first special symbols are displayed in order according to the order in which the activated reserved balls of the first special symbols occur (ball-entering order), and the reserved images of the second special symbols are displayed in order according to the order in which the activated reserved balls of the second special symbols occur (ball-entering order). Details of the reserved images will be described later.

The changing image display area P720 is a display area for displaying a changing image (changing icon) corresponding to the currently executing changing display. In the game state (normal game state) in which the changing display of the first special symbol is the main focus of the game, this changing image display area P720 displays a changing image (changing icon) corresponding to the changing display of the first special symbol, and in the game state (time-saving game state, probability change game state) in which the changing display of the second special symbol is the main focus of the game, a changing image (changing icon) corresponding to the changing display of the second special symbol is displayed. Details of the changing image will be described later. In addition, the pending image and the changing image are display contents that suggest that a change is scheduled or is currently occurring, so both may be collectively referred to as a "changing suggestion display", the pending image may be referred to as a "changing suggestion display before the change start condition is satisfied", and the changing image may be referred to as a "changing suggestion display after the change start condition is satisfied".

The small symbol display area P730 is a display area for displaying small symbols (also called "simple symbols") in a variable display and a stop display (determined stop display). A small symbol is the fourth symbol following a special symbol, a normal symbol, and a decorative symbol. That is, in this embodiment, a variable display of a small symbol is displayed small on the screen as a variable display of a performance symbol that shows the variable display of a special symbol in a dramatic way, in addition to the variable display of a decorative symbol. This small symbol is composed of three symbols corresponding to the left, middle, and right symbols of the decorative symbol, respectively, and is composed of nine types of numerical identification elements, for example, "1" to "9", just like the decorative symbol. The decorative symbol may be called the "main decorative symbol" or the "first decorative symbol", and the small symbol may be called the "sub decorative symbol" or the "second decorative symbol".

This small symbol display area P730 is formed in a relatively smaller display area than the decorative symbol display area P700. Although detailed illustration is omitted in this small symbol display area P730, three display areas (left small symbol display area, medium and small symbol display area, right small symbol display area) that are variable display areas of small symbols are provided, and the left symbol of the small symbol (referred to as the "left small symbol") corresponding to the left small symbol display area, the middle symbol of the small symbol (referred to as the "medium and small symbol") corresponding to the medium and small symbol display area, and the right symbol of the small symbol corresponding to the right small symbol display area are stopped and displayed. Of the three symbols that make up this small symbol, the left small symbol corresponds to the left symbol of the decorative symbol, the medium and small symbol corresponds to the middle symbol of the decorative symbol, and the right small symbol corresponds to the middle symbol of the decorative symbol. The small symbol changes display in sync with the special symbol and decorative symbol changes, and the small symbol stops displaying in sync with the special symbol and decorative symbol stops displaying.

In this embodiment, the decorative symbols display a definite stop and a tentative stop, whereas the small symbols display a definite stop but do not display a tentative stop. In other words, even if the decorative symbols (at least one of the left symbol, symbol, and right symbol) display a tentative stop, the small symbols continue to display in a variable manner without displaying a tentative stop.

The display of the small patterns may be in the same manner as the display of the decorative patterns, where the numbers "1" to "9" are scrolled (for example, vertically or horizontally), but unlike the display of the decorative patterns, a display mode in which a predetermined combination of numbers is switched and displayed at predetermined intervals is preferable. As an example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which "1, 3, 5", "4, 6, 8", "7, 9, 2" and the like are used as combinations of three patterns (combinations of specific numbers) that make up the small patterns, and to repeatedly display specific numbers, such as "1, 3, 5" → "4, 6, 8" → "7, 9, 2" → "1, 3, 5" → "4, 6, 8" → "7, 9, 2" → .... This configuration simplifies the control of the display of the small patterns.

The small symbols only need to enable the player to recognize that the special symbols are being displayed as varying and as fixed stops, and do not necessarily have to be a combination of three symbols to display the varying and fixed stops as in the case of decorative symbols; they may be a combination of two symbols or only one symbol to display the varying and fixed stops (or other simplified symbols, colors, or other identifying elements may be used).

In addition, during the execution of the Super Reach performance, the decorative pattern may be displayed small (alternative pattern may be displayed) for at least a part of the period, or the decorative pattern may be hidden (alternative pattern may not be displayed either), but in such a situation, the small pattern is always displayed in a variable manner. This small pattern is displayed in a variable manner while the special pattern is changing, and is displayed in a stationary manner while the special pattern is stopped, and like the decorative pattern, the three patterns are displayed in a variable manner and stationary manner. By providing this small pattern, even in a situation where you want to make the decorative pattern small or hidden (for example, when executing the Super Reach performance, when the performance is performed by the first movable role object P651 or the second movable role object P652 and the center of the performance display device P70 is hidden), it is possible to notify that the pattern is changing (in other words, the result of winning or losing has not been determined). In other words, this small pattern can be said to be a pattern for display guarantee (to compensate for the display state of the decorative pattern).

As mentioned above, when the small symbols are displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable that the display continues to change from the start of the special symbol's change until the special symbol stops. In other words, even if the decorative symbol stops temporarily in the middle (for example, when a special decorative symbol that displays characters such as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped when executing a pseudo consecutive performance), it is preferable that the small symbols are configured not to stop temporarily in the middle (for this reason, a special symbol that displays characters such as "NEXT" is not provided for the small symbols, and the small symbols are fixed and stopped). Furthermore, in order to prevent a misconception that a miss is a jackpot, and in order to prevent a jackpot from being detected in advance in the case of a jackpot, it is preferable to display the fluctuation while maintaining the symbol combination that indicates a miss to the player, whether it is a miss or a jackpot (for example, as described above, if the types of small symbols are "1" to "9", the fluctuation is displayed as follows: "1, 3, 5" → "4, 6, 8" → "7, 9, 2" → "1, 3, 5" → "4, 6, 8" → "7, 9, 2" → ...). Furthermore, when the decorative pattern and small pattern start to change from a fixed state, the starting pattern combination (the pattern combination to which the pattern combination immediately before the change starts is switched from the pattern combination immediately before the change starts, and the pattern combination to which the patterns of each pattern row immediately before the change starts is the first to be switched immediately after the change starts) is a pattern combination that is one step forward from the pattern combination at the fixed state, but when the small pattern starts to change from a fixed state, the starting pattern combination is a predetermined pattern combination regardless of the combination at the fixed state. For example, if the decorative and small patterns start to change when both the number combinations for the decorative and small patterns are fixed and stopped at "2, 4, 3," the pattern combination from which the decorative patterns start will be "3, 5, 4," but the pattern combination from which the small patterns start will be fixed at "1, 3, 5." Conversely, if the decorative and small patterns start to change when both the number combinations for the decorative and small patterns are fixed and stopped at "3, 3, 3," the pattern combination from which the decorative patterns start will be "4, 4, 4," but the pattern combination from which the small patterns start will be fixed at "1, 3, 5."

The decorative pattern display area P700, which is easier for the player to recognize, is larger than the small pattern display area P730, which is used to guarantee the display (to compensate for the display state of the decorative patterns). This is preferable not only for situations where the decorative patterns and small patterns are fixed and stopped, or when the decorative patterns are immediately after forming a reach state (a reach state before developing into a super reach performance) and the small patterns are being displayed in a variable manner, but also for situations where the decorative patterns are small patterns during a super reach performance, etc., and the small patterns are being displayed in a variable manner.

By setting the display position of the decorative pattern to a different display position depending on whether it is the first presentation mode (e.g., normal presentation mode, or stage A in the normal presentation mode) or the second presentation mode (e.g., special bonus presentation mode, or stage B in the normal presentation mode), it is possible to realize a diversity of presentations with the decorative pattern depending on the presentation mode. On the other hand, since it is sufficient for the small pattern to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative pattern, it is preferable to avoid unnecessary development and design by displaying it in the same position regardless of whether it is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode. Details of the presentation modes will be described later.

By changing the display mode of the decorative symbols depending on whether it is the first presentation mode (for example, the normal presentation mode, or stage A in the normal presentation mode) or the second presentation mode (for example, the special bonus presentation mode, or stage B in the normal presentation mode), it is possible to realize a variety of presentations with the decorative symbols depending on the presentation mode. For example, in the first presentation mode, the decorative symbols are composed only of the decorative symbols of numbers (decorative symbols such as "1", "2", ..., "7"), and in the second presentation mode, the decorative symbols are composed by combining the decorative symbols of numbers with the decorative symbols of friendly characters (decorative symbols such as "1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + "character g"). On the other hand, since it is sufficient for the small symbols to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbols, it is preferable to configure the small symbols only with the same display mode, for example, only with the decorative symbols of numbers, regardless of whether it is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design.

The decorative pattern display area P700 can be varied (moved or made into a small pattern) depending on the changing situation (for example, whether or not a normal reach is in progress, whether or not a super reach is in progress, etc.), thereby adding variety to the presentation of the decorative patterns. On the other hand, since the small patterns only need to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative patterns, it is preferable to keep the small pattern display area P730 unchanged (not moved, not made into a small pattern) to avoid unnecessary development and design.

The decorative patterns can be made to vary in speed from slow, medium, fast, or super fast depending on the changing situation (e.g., whether the change has just begun, is in the middle of changing, or is about to end), which allows for greater variety in the presentation of the decorative patterns. On the other hand, since the small patterns only need to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative patterns, it is preferable not to make the speed of change of the small patterns variable, or to reduce the number of stages in which it is variable (for example, only slow and fast), thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design. In terms of the direction of change, it is also preferable that the decorative patterns can change not only from top to bottom, but also from bottom to top (allowing for change in multiple directions), while the small patterns can only change from top to bottom.

The decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped while the special symbols are changing, with slight fluctuations) before they are definitively stopped (stopped at the timing when the special symbols stop), and at that time, a specific symbol that is a decorative symbol other than a number (for example, a decorative symbol with the word "Super" written on it, which predicts the development to a Super Reach performance) is temporarily stopped, thereby making it possible to correlate the performance of the decorative symbols with other performances. On the other hand, since the small symbols only need to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbols, it is preferable not to temporarily stop the small symbols or to temporarily stop the specific symbols, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design.

The decorative pattern overlaps with the display area of other preview performances (e.g., comment preview performances, step-up preview performances, etc.), that is, it is displayed in a superimposed manner. This superimposed display is permitted in order to use as much of the area on the performance display device P70 as possible to create a powerful performance, but for small patterns, since they play a role in compensating for the display state of the decorative pattern, it is desirable to design the small pattern display area P730 so that it does not overlap (does not display in a superimposed manner) with the display area of the other preview performances. However, in relation to special preview performances that inevitably overlap (e.g., group preview performances, background preview performances, etc. displayed across the entire performance display device P70), it is preferable to set the display priority of the small pattern higher than the display priority of the special preview performance (set so that the small pattern is displayed in front of the special preview performance). In addition, it is desirable to ensure that the right-hit notification image (different from the image displayed during special play, the right-hit notification image for the high base state that is displayed during the high base state, but it may be an image common to the image during special play) is always visible to the player, so it is desirable to design it so that the small pattern display area P730 and the display area of the right-hit notification image do not overlap (do not display in a superimposed manner). However, when the decorative pattern display area P700 is moved or enlarged, the decorative pattern display area P700 and the display area of the right-hit notification image may overlap (display in a superimposed manner), and in that case, it is preferable to set the display priority of the decorative pattern lower than the display priority of the right-hit notification image (set so that the decorative pattern is displayed behind the right-hit notification image).

During a special game, the decorative symbols may be displayed only one at a time, not in combination. For example, if a special game is executed after "7-7-7" is fixed, "7" is displayed during the special game, and if a special game is executed after "2-2-2" is fixed, "2" is displayed during the special game. This allows the player to recognize which decorative symbol was the jackpot during the special game. As a variant, only decorative symbols corresponding to jackpots with a high degree of advantage (for example, "3-3-3", "5-5-5", "7-7-7", etc., which indicate a jackpot of 7R or more or a jackpot of 10R) may be displayed during the special game. It is desirable that the display area displaying one decorative symbol displayed during the special game in this way does not overlap with the other display areas during the special game, that is, the round display area, the right hit display area, the prize ball acquisition display area, and the cumulative prize ball count display area, i.e., does not overlap with the highlighted display area (however, the highlighted display area may overlap with the highlighted display area, in which case the highlighted display area has a higher display priority). Additionally, it is preferable to hide the small symbols during special play (because no variable display occurs during special play), but they may be displayed during special play. If configured in this way, it is preferable that they do not overlap with the other display areas during special play, such as the round display area, right hit display area, prize ball acquisition display area, and cumulative prize ball count display area, i.e., they are not displayed in a superimposed manner, and it is also preferable that they are not displayed in a superimposed manner with the highlighted display.

In addition to changing (for example, scrolling from top to bottom), the decorative symbols may be displayed with a specified action when they start changing, immediately after a provisional stop, after a reach is reached, during a provisional stop, etc. (the actions in each situation may be called a change start action, a provisional stop action, a reach establishment action, and a swinging action). For example, in the case of a non-reach (when the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed as "624" at the time of the final stop), at the start of the change, the left, middle, and right symbols in the decorative symbols all expand, and then the change begins, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, a bouncing action is performed, and then the "6" temporarily stops, and then the swinging action continues, and then when the right symbol temporarily stops, a bouncing action is performed, and then the "4" temporarily stops, and then the swinging action continues, and then when the middle symbol temporarily stops, a bouncing action is performed, and then the "2" temporarily stops, and then the swinging action is performed a little, and then at the final stop timing, all the actions of the left, middle, and right symbols are terminated. In this case, the small symbols do not perform any of the actions.

Also, in the case of a normal reach (when the decorative and small symbols are displayed as "212" at the time of the final stop), when the change starts, the left, middle, and right symbols in the decorative symbols all expand and then start changing, then when the left symbol temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion and the "2" temporarily stops and then continues to swing, then when the right symbol temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion and the "2" temporarily stops and then continues to swing, then the left and right symbols rotate to notify that it is a reach and continue to swing again, then when the middle symbol temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion and the "1" temporarily stops and swings a little, then at the final stop timing, all the movements of the left, middle, and right symbols end (the middle symbol does not rotate). In this case, the small symbol does not perform any of its movements.

In addition, if it develops into a Super Reach performance (when the decorative and small symbols are displayed as "232" at the time of the final stop), when the change begins, the left, middle, and right symbols in the decorative symbols all expand and then start to change, then when the left symbol temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion and then the "2" temporarily stops and then continues to swing, then when the right symbol temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion and then the "2" temporarily stops and then continues to swing, then the left and right symbols rotate to notify that it is a reach and then continue to swing again, then the left and right symbols start to swing During this process, the middle symbol changes (at this time, the middle symbol changes from top to bottom while enlarged, and the left and right symbols that did not overlap or had a small overlap ratio before now overlap or overlap at a high ratio), and then the normal background changes to the reach background to execute the Super Reach performance, and when the Super Reach performance announces that it is a miss, the reach background changes to the normal background, and after the transition, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol continue to swing for a predetermined period of time, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol movements end (the middle symbol does not bounce or rotate). In this case, the small symbol does not perform any movements. This configuration allows for diversity in the performance of the decorative symbols, while the small symbol only needs to play a role in compensating for the display state of the decorative symbols, so it is preferable to configure the small symbol not to perform any particular movement and to avoid unnecessary development and design.

In addition, even if the variation stops and the standby demo performance is displayed, the decorative pattern may perform a swinging motion after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 10 seconds) after the variation stops, but even in this situation, it is preferable that the small pattern does not perform any motion. By configuring in this way, even during game standby (pattern stopped), it is possible to stimulate the desire to play, and the small pattern does not perform a swinging motion, so that the notification that the game is on standby can be guaranteed. Note that "on standby" is a variable standby state (non-variable state) in which neither the first special pattern activation reserved ball nor the second special pattern activation reserved ball exists. In addition, when the standby demo performance is displayed, the decorative pattern is not displayed, but the small pattern is preferably continued to be displayed. In this way, it is possible to ensure the display of what pattern is stopped while emphasizing the display of the standby demo performance screen. However, if the standby demo performance is on, the small pattern may also be hidden because no game is being played. In addition, for certain decorative symbols (for example, the middle symbol "7"), a predetermined action may not be performed or the probability of performing it may be lower than for other symbols. This predetermined action may be, for example, the provisional stop action (a bouncing action) described above (particularly for the middle symbol "7" after a reach is achieved). By configuring in this way, the rarity of the action for a certain symbol can be increased. Note that decorative symbols are formed by combining number decorative symbols with ally character decorative symbols (for example, "1"
In the case of decorative patterns such as "decorative patterns such as '1' + 'character a', '2' + 'character b', ..., '7' + 'character g'), both the decorative patterns of the numbers and the decorative patterns of the ally characters will perform a swinging motion, but the swing range (the swing distance; for example, if swinging up and down, the distance between the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed at the top and the state in which it is displayed at the bottom during the swinging motion) may be made different to achieve a swinging motion that gives a sense of dynamism. In such a configuration, the swing range of the decorative patterns of the numbers may be made smaller than the swing range of the decorative patterns of the ally characters, or the decorative patterns of the numbers may not perform a swinging motion, and only the decorative patterns of the ally characters may perform a swinging motion.

The reserved number display area P740 is a display area for displaying the number of activated reserved balls of the special pattern. This reserved number display area P740 includes a first reserved number display area P741 that displays the number of activated reserved balls of the first special pattern, and a second reserved number display area P742 that displays the number of activated reserved balls of the second special pattern.

The game board P20 is also provided with a main control display device P27 that is controlled by the main control board P100, and a sub-control display device P28 that is controlled by the performance control board P200. Note that the main control display device P27 is described in detail in the fourth embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

Figure 134 is a schematic diagram showing the sub-control display device P28. The sub-control display device P28 is an LED display device whose lighting is controlled by the performance control board P200, and is disposed at a predetermined position on the front side of the game board P20. This sub-control display device P28 auxiliary displays some of the various information displayed by the main control display device P27 described above.

As shown in FIG. 134, the sub-control display device P28 is provided with various display means such as a first change state auxiliary display section P801, a second change state auxiliary display section P802, a first reserved number auxiliary display section P803, and a second reserved number auxiliary display section P804.

The first variable state auxiliary display unit P801 is composed of one LED lamp (LED segment). In this first variable state auxiliary display unit P801, the variable display of the first special pattern is displayed according to the blinking pattern of the LED lamp, and the first special pattern is confirmed and displayed when the LED lamp stops blinking and switches to a lit display or an off display. Specifically, when the first special pattern is displaying a variable display, the blinking display is repeated, when the first special pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating a jackpot, the display is lit, and when the first special pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating a miss, the display is off.

The second variable state auxiliary display unit P802 is composed of one LED lamp (LED segment). In this second variable state auxiliary display unit P802, the variable display of the second special pattern is displayed according to the blinking pattern of the LED lamp, and the second special pattern is confirmed and displayed when the LED lamp stops blinking and switches to a lit display or an off display. Specifically, when the second special pattern is displaying a variable display, the blinking display is repeated, when the second special pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating a jackpot, the display is lit, and when the second special pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating a miss, the display is off.

The first reserved number auxiliary display P803 is composed of two LED lamps (LED segments). This first reserved number auxiliary display displays the number of reserved balls (maximum 4) of the first special pattern by the lighting, blinking, and off display of the two LED lamps. Specifically, when the two LED lamps of the first reserved number auxiliary display P803 are off, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is "0", when one of the two LED lamps is blinking and the other LED lamp is off, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is "1", when the two LED lamps are blinking, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is "2", when one of the two LED lamps is on and the other LED lamp is blinking, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is "3", and when the two LED lamps are on, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is "4".

The second reserved number auxiliary display P804 is composed of two LED lamps (LED segments). This second reserved number auxiliary display P804 displays the number of reserved balls (maximum 4) for the second special pattern by displaying the two LED lamps as lit, blinking, or off. Specifically, when the two LED lamps of the second reserved number auxiliary display P804 are off, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is "0", when one of the two LED lamps is blinking and the other LED lamp is off, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is "1", when the two LED lamps are blinking, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is "2", when one of the two LED lamps is lit and the other LED lamp is blinking, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is "3", and when the two LED lamps are lit, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is "4".

Furthermore, like the gaming machines of the above embodiments, the gaming machine of this embodiment is provided with an effect button P15 and a cross key P16 as input devices that can be operated by the player. Here, FIG. 135 is a perspective view showing the effect button P15 and the cross key P16. The effect button P15 is also referred to as the "operation means."

The performance button P15 has a built-in performance button lamp (LED board) 15a that can emit light. This performance button lamp 15a is equipped with multiple surface-mounted LEDs as light emitters for illuminating the performance button P15. As this light emitter (LED), a full-color LED having light-emitting elements that can emit R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is preferably used. In addition, the performance button P15 has a performance button detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the performance button P15 has been operated. The detection signal of this operation detection sensor is input to the performance control board P200. In addition, the performance button P15 has a built-in vibration motor (not shown) that can generate vibration. This vibration motor is configured to be able to impart (transmit) vibration to the performance button P15 under the control of the performance control board P200.

The cross key P16 is configured with four keys P16a-16d arranged in a cross shape, one above, one below, one to the left, and one to the right. This cross key P16 is equipped with a cross key detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the cross key P16 has been operated (which of the directional keys P16a-16d has been operated). The detection signal of this cross key sensor is input to the performance control board P200. Each of the four keys P16a-16d is an independent key, and a detection sensor is provided for each.

[Various performances]
In the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, as described above, various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board P200 and the image control board P300 according to the progress of the game, etc. In the sixth embodiment, as in the second embodiment, as a plurality of effect modes, when the game state is a normal game state, a "normal effect mode" is set, when the game state is a time-saving game state, a "time-saving effect mode" is set, and when the game state is a probability variable game state, a "probability variable effect mode" is set. Depending on the game state (or the variable pattern selection state) managed on the main control board P100 side and the number of times the special pattern is displayed, one of the plurality of effect modes is alternatively set, and a variable effect according to the set effect mode is executed. When any of the effect modes is set, a background image (background image that displays the back of the decorative pattern) dedicated to the effect mode is displayed on the screen as an effect (variable effect) that suggests that the effect mode is being stayed in, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker P11. Since the background image and BGM are set to be different for each presentation mode, the player can recognize which presentation mode he or she is currently in from the type of background image or BGM.

More specifically, the "normal presentation mode" has four stages: "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and the "look-ahead stage". After 20 or more changes have passed or the SP reach is missed, the player will move from "Stage A" to "Stage B", from "Stage B" to "Stage C", and from "Stage C" to "Stage A". If the look-ahead preview performance judgement results in the execution (transition) of the "look-ahead stage", the player will move from the current stage to the "look-ahead stage" (the execution of the SP reach is confirmed at the time of moving to the "look-ahead stage", and if a jackpot is hit, a double number will be displayed in the "look-ahead stage", and if a miss occurs, a number other than a double number will be displayed in the "look-ahead stage", and the player will return to the stage before the move to the "look-ahead stage" at the next change). The BGM (stage BGM) is different for each of "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C" and "Prediction Stage" (it is different from the stage BGM of "Time-saving Presentation Mode" and the stage BGM of "Probable Variation Presentation Mode"), but in "Stage A", the stage BGM is interrupted (ended) when the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) when the chance is not reached and the stage BGM starts from the beginning when the next fluctuation starts, and in "Stage B", "Stage C" and "Prediction Stage", the stage BGM is not interrupted (ended) even when the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) when the chance is not reached and the stage BGM is output continuously for the next fluctuation (the "Time-saving Presentation Mode" and "Probable Variation Presentation Mode" are configured to output continuously in the same way).

Here, pseudo consecutive performances can be executed in any of "Stage A," "Stage B," "Stage C," and the "Pre-reading Stage," but in any stage, when the pseudo consecutive performance is temporarily stopped (when a specified pseudo consecutive pattern (for example, a pattern of the letters "NEXT") is displayed changing and changing near a specified temporary stop position as the middle pattern and then temporarily stopped), the stage BGM is not output (interrupted), and the re-changing display triggers the stage BGM to start from the beginning, or it switches to a specific BGM different from the one before the re-changing display. Thereafter, when the SP reach develops in "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C" or "Pre-reading Stage", the background image of each stage (the stage you were on) will change to the background image of the SP reach performance (and also change to BGM dedicated to the SP reach), and while the SP reach is being executed, the stage BGM will not be output, and when a performance indicating a miss is displayed in the SP reach, the background image of each stage will change again within the changing display in which the SP reach was executed (the background image of the stage displayed before the SP reach developed); in that situation, even if the background image of the stage is displayed until the next changing display begins, the stage BGM will not be output, and the BGM dedicated to the SP reach will not be output either (it will be silent, or a specific BGM different from both the stage BGM and the BGM dedicated to the SP reach will be output). Therefore, even if the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) without a reach, the stage BGM will not be interrupted (end), and even if it is "Stage B," "Stage C," or "Prediction Stage" where the stage BGM continues to be output for the next fluctuation (or "Stage A" where it is not), if it is a miss via an SP reach, the stage BGM will be interrupted before the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop), and the stage BGM will start from the beginning when the next fluctuation begins.

In addition, in the "time-saving performance mode" and the "probability change performance mode", the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed. Here, a special performance that suggests that the pseudo consecutive performance will be executed (for example, a continuation dialogue notice, "It will continue!", which confirms the execution of the subsequent pseudo consecutive performance, and "Maybe it will continue?", which does not confirm the execution of the subsequent pseudo consecutive performance) is executed, suggesting that the pseudo consecutive performance (re-change display) will be executed later, but this special performance is displayed only in "Stage A" and "Stage C", and is not displayed in "Stage B" and "Prediction Stage". In other words, by preparing both a stage where the possibility of the pseudo consecutive performance being executed can be sensed in advance and a stage where it cannot be sensed, and repeating the stage transition between the stages, a performance that does not make the player bored is realized. In addition, in "Stage A", a special performance with a character A as a motif is executed, but in "Stage B", a special performance with a character B as a motif is executed. In addition, a pseudo consecutive confirmation effect is provided, which is different from the special effect and determines that a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed thereafter simply by its occurrence (for example, when character C appears, the dialogue "Continuation confirmed!" is always displayed). Furthermore, a development confirmation effect is provided, which is different from both the special effect and the pseudo consecutive performance and determines that a pseudo consecutive performance will not be performed thereafter and will develop into an SP reach simply by its occurrence (for example, when character D appears, the dialogue "Development confirmed!" is always displayed). This pseudo confirmation effect and development confirmation effect can be performed in any of "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Pre-reading stage". In this way, when a pseudo consecutive performance is performed and when a pseudo consecutive performance is not performed, one or more combinations of special effects, pseudo consecutive performances, and development confirmation effects are displayed to diversify the expectation of the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance and the expectation of the development into an SP reach. In addition, during one re-change display, all of the special effects, pseudo consecutive change confirmation effects, and development confirmation effects may be executed, and in this case, during a certain re-change display (for example, the pseudo 2-change display or pseudo 3-change display described below), there may be a pattern in which a special effect is executed, a pattern in which a pseudo consecutive change confirmation effect is executed, and a pattern in which a development confirmation effect is executed.Here, in a pattern in which a special effect is executed during a certain re-change display (for example, the pseudo 2-change display or pseudo 3-change display described below), after a special effect is executed during that certain re-change display, a pseudo consecutive change confirmation effect may further be executed during that certain re-change display.

Next, we will explain the various game effects, such as "button operation effects (button effects)," "button vibration effects," "left hit notification effects," "hold change effects," and "hold change suggestion effects (action effects)."

[Button operation effects]
The button operation effect (hereinafter referred to as "button effect") of this embodiment will be described. Fig. 136 is a schematic diagram for explaining the flow of the button effect. The button effect is a notice effect that suggests or notifies the player of the probability of a big win based on the operation of the effect button P15 by the player.

As shown in FIG. 136, the button effects include an operation prompt selection and an operation trigger effect (also called an "operation result effect"). The button effects are also called "operation effects."

The operation promotion effect is an effect that is executed during the valid operation period of the effect button P15, and is an effect that encourages the player to operate the effect button P15. The valid operation period is the period during which, when the effect button P15 is operated, this operation is validly accepted (the operation acceptance period during which the operation of the effect button P15 is validly accepted on the effect control board P200). This operation promotion effect can also be said to be an effect that notifies the player that the valid operation period is in progress. The operation promotion effect is also called an "operation means promotion effect" or an "operation means promotion image".

While the operation promotion effect is being executed (during the valid operation period), a button image imitating the effect button P15 (also referred to as the "effect button image" or "operation means image") and an indicator image (also referred to as the "meter image" or "valid operation period suggestion image") visually showing the remaining period of the valid operation period are displayed on the screen, and a notification is given that operation of the effect button P15 is valid or to encourage operation of the effect button P15.

In addition, while the operation promotion effect is being executed (during the valid operation period), the effect button lamp 15a is illuminated in a specific notification mode (continuously lit in red light) along with the display of the button image and indicator image. In this embodiment, during the non-valid operation period (excluding the initialization operation of the effect button P15), the effect button lamp 15a is illuminated in a predetermined notification mode (for example, continuously lit in white light), while during the valid operation period, the effect button lamp 15a is illuminated in a specific notification mode (for example, continuously lit in red light). That is, in this embodiment, when the effective operation period of the performance button P15 starts, the notification mode of the performance button lamp 15a is controlled to be switched from a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is continuously lit in a white light color) to a specific notification mode (a mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is continuously lit in a red light color). When the effective operation period of the performance button P15 ends or when the performance button P15 is operated during the effective operation period, the notification mode of the performance button lamp 15a is controlled to be switched from a specific notification mode (a mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is continuously lit in a red light color) to a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is continuously lit in a white light color), or the notification mode of the performance button lamp 15a is controlled to be switched from a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is continuously lit in a red light color) to a special notification mode (a mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is continuously lit in a rainbow light color). Details will be described later, but during the initialization operation of the performance button P15, the performance button lamp 15a is illuminated in a special notification mode (a mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is illuminated in a flashing red light color).

Here, in this embodiment, the "alert mode of the performance button lamp 15a" includes the alert mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is lit and the alert mode in which it is turned off, and further, the alert mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is lit includes the alert mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is continuously lit (also simply referred to as "lit") and the alert mode in which it is flashing (also simply referred to as "flashing"). And, as necessary, the alert mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is continuously lit (lit), the alert mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is flashing (flashing), and the alert mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is turned off (not lit) are used to distinguish between them. In the following description, the "alert mode of the performance button lamp 15a" may be appropriately rephrased as the "light emission mode of the performance button lamp 15a", "light emission mode of the performance button lamp 15a", "light emission mode of the performance button P15", "light emission mode of the performance button P15", "light emission mode of the performance button P15", etc.

As a modified example of this embodiment, during the non-operation effective period (excluding the initialization operation of the effect button P15), the effect button lamp 15a may be configured to be in a non-illuminated or turned off notification mode, while during the operation effective period, the effect button lamp 15a may be configured to be in a predetermined notification mode (an alarm mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in white) or a specific notification mode (an alarm mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in red).

The operation trigger performance is a performance that is executed when the performance button P15 is operated. This operation trigger performance is a performance mode (such as a role action, image display, sound output, lamp light emission, button vibration, etc.) that corresponds to the type of button performance. In this embodiment, "executed when the performance button P15 is operated" includes (1) the meaning that it is executed only when the performance button P15 is operated within the operation effective period, and (2) the meaning that it is executed when the performance button P15 is operated within the operation effective period or when the operation effective period ends without the performance button P15 being operated within the operation effective period. Therefore, the execution condition of the operation trigger performance includes (a) a case where it is established only when the performance button P15 is operated within the operation effective period, and (b) a case where it is established not only when the performance button P15 is operated within the operation effective period, but also when the operation effective period ends without the performance button P15 being operated within the operation effective period. That is, in the above execution condition (a), if the effect button P15 is operated during the execution of the operation prompting effect (operation valid period), the operation trigger effect will start after the operation prompting effect ends with the operation of the effect button P15, but if the effect button P15 is not operated during the execution of the operation prompting effect (operation valid period), the button effect (operation prompting effect) ends with the trigger of the operation valid period without the operation prompting effect being executed. On the other hand, in the above execution condition (b), if the effect button P15 is operated during the execution of the operation prompting effect (operation valid period), the operation trigger effect will start after the operation prompting effect ends with the operation of the effect button P15, and if the effect button P15 is not operated during the execution of the operation prompting effect (operation valid period), the operation trigger effect will start after the operation prompting effect ends with the passage of the operation valid period. In this embodiment, the expectation of a big win is set higher when the button effect B based on the above execution condition (b) is executed than when the button effect based on the above execution condition (a) is executed. The execution conditions (whether it belongs to a or b) of the operation trigger effect in each of the button effects A to D described later will be explained in the specific examples of each of the button effects A to D. Also, although details will be described later, the button vibration effect of this embodiment can be "executed triggered by the operation of the effect button P15" or "executed without being triggered by the operation of the effect button P15". This "executed without being triggered by the operation of the effect button P15" means that it is executed regardless of the operation or the operation valid period of the effect button P15, that is, it is executed regardless of the button effect (in the first place, the button image is not displayed, and it is actively executed without the need to operate the effect button P15). The button vibration effect is also called "effect button action" or "effect button action effect".

Figure 137 is a schematic diagram showing the types of button effects in this embodiment. As shown in this figure, the button effects in this embodiment include button effect A, button effect B, button effect C, and button effect D.

Button performance A is a button performance that is executed when the variable display starts. In this button performance A, if the performance button P15 is operated within the valid operation period, or if the valid operation period ends without the performance button P15 being operated within the valid operation period, execution condition A of the operation trigger performance is met. If execution condition A is met, a role performance in which the first movable role object P651 falls to the front of the screen (moves to a movable position) is executed as the operation trigger performance of button performance A.

Button performance B is a button performance that is executed when the variable display starts or while the variable display is being executed (before a reach is established). In this button performance B, if performance button P15 is operated within the operation valid period, execution condition B of the operation trigger performance is established. If this execution condition B is established, a line preview performance (also called a "comment preview performance") in which a specified character image speaks a line is executed as the operation trigger performance of button performance B.

Button effect C is a button effect that is executed while the variable display is being executed (after a reach is established and before the development of an SP reach). In this button effect C, if effect button P15 is operated within the valid operation period, or if effect button P15 is not operated within the valid operation period and the valid operation period ends, execution condition C of the operation trigger effect is established. If execution condition C is established, an SP reach development effect that suggests the development to an SP reach (for example, the display of a dedicated background image that confirms the development to an SP reach) and a button vibration effect (first button vibration effect β) described below are executed as the operation trigger effect of button effect C. Note that button effect C may be a button effect that is executed while the variable display is being executed (after the development of an SP reach and before the win/lose branch).

The button vibration effect D is a button effect that is executed during the execution of the SP reach (at the time of the winning/losing branch). In this button effect D, if the effect button P15 is operated within the operation valid period, or if the operation valid period ends without the effect button P15 being operated within the operation valid period, the execution condition D of the operation trigger effect is established. If this execution condition D is established, as the operation trigger effect of the button effect D, a role effect in which the first movable role object P651 falls to the front of the screen and a button vibration effect (second button vibration effect) described later are executed.

As mentioned above, button effects C and D are performed in conjunction with the button vibration effect described below (because the button vibration effect is executed as part of these button effects C and D (operation trigger effect)), so these two button effects C and D will be explained again in the button vibration effect section described below.

[Button vibration effect]
Next, the button vibration effect (vibration effect of the effect button P15) will be described. The gaming machine of this embodiment is configured to be able to execute the button vibration effect during the execution of the variable display. This button vibration effect is a notice effect that suggests or notifies the expectation of a big win by vibrating the effect button P15. In addition to the button vibration effect, a button rotation effect, which is a notice effect that suggests or notifies the expectation of a big win by rotating a movable object inside the effect button P15 by the internal mechanism of the effect button, may be provided. The button vibration effect and the button rotation effect may be collectively referred to as "effect button operation" or "effect button operation effect". In the explanation of the button vibration effect, it is noted that the "button vibration effect" can be read as "button rotation effect" (or "effect button operation" or "effect button operation effect").

The button vibration effect can be executed at a predetermined timing between the start and end of the display of the decorative pattern. In this embodiment, when the display of the decorative pattern is a SP reach display, the button vibration effect can be executed regardless of whether the display is a jackpot or a miss display in order to suggest or inform the jackpot expectation of the display. In addition, even if the display is not a SP reach display, if the display is a N reach display that is a jackpot, the button vibration effect can be executed to suggest or inform the jackpot expectation of the display. In other words, in a display that is not a reach and does not result in a jackpot, the button vibration effect is not executed to suggest or inform the jackpot expectation of the display. However, when the button vibration effect is executed as a look-ahead effect, the button vibration effect can be executed even in a display that is not a reach and does not result in a jackpot in order to suggest or inform the jackpot expectation of the display that is scheduled after the display, not the display. The button vibration effect in this case is the same as the first button vibration effect α described below, and is a type of button vibration effect that is executed without being triggered by the operation of effect button P15.

As a modified example of this embodiment, as described above, even if the change display of the decorative pattern is a change display of a non-reach or a change display of an N-reach, the button vibration effect may be configured to be executable. Also, as a modified example of this embodiment, the button vibration effect may be configured to be executed only in the change display of a specific SP reach among the multiple types of SP reaches. For example, when there are SP reach A, SP reach C, and SP reach C as multiple types of SP reaches (SP reach A<SP reach B<SP reach C in order of the highest expectation of a jackpot), the button vibration effect may be executed in the change display in which at least SP reach C is executed. At this time, the SP reach A and SP reach B may be SP reaches that develop from normal reaches, and the SP reach C may be SP reaches that develop from N-reach or SP reaches A and B, and a change pattern X that develops from N-reach to SP reach C and a change pattern Y that develops to SP reach C via SP reach A or SP reach B may be provided. When the former variation pattern X is selected, a button vibration effect may be executed during the execution of N reach (before it develops into SP reach), and the execution of this button vibration effect may be configured to suggest that it will develop into SP reach C. In addition, in the case of the latter variation pattern Y, a button vibration effect may be executed during the execution of SP reach A or SP reach B (before it develops into SP reach), and the execution of this button vibration effect may be configured to suggest that it will develop into SP reach C. In addition, in the case of a variation display that results in a jackpot, even if it is a variation display that develops into SP reach A and SP reach B (not developing into SP reach C), a button vibration effect may be executed. In addition, when a button vibration effect is executed in a variation display that develops into SP reach A and SP reach B (not developing into SP reach C), a jackpot is confirmed (even if a button vibration effect is executed in a variation display that develops into SP reach C, a jackpot is not confirmed).

Figure 138 is a schematic diagram for explaining the execution timing of the button vibration effect of this embodiment. In the figure, the basic flow of the SP reach variable display is shown in chronological order from left to right on the page. Note that Figure 138 conceptually shows the execution timing of the button vibration effect, and the actual execution timing may be slightly earlier or later than the timing shown in the figure, as long as it does not deviate from the description of this embodiment. In addition, the first button vibration effect α and the first button vibration effect β may or may not be executed in both the variable display that is a jackpot and the variable display that is a miss, and the second button vibration effect and the third button vibration effect are executed in the variable display that is a jackpot but not in the variable display that is a miss, and only either the second button vibration effect or the third button vibration effect is executed when the variable display is a jackpot.

The SP reach of this embodiment is configured as a battle presentation (battle reach presentation) in which, for example, an ally character fights an enemy character. SP reach A is a battle presentation in which an ally character fights an enemy character A (10% chance of winning), SP reach B is a battle presentation in which an enemy character fights an enemy character B (20% chance of winning), and SP reach C is a battle presentation in which an enemy character fights an enemy character C (60% chance of winning). In this embodiment, multiple presentation routes 1 to 3 are set as presentation routes for the variable display of this SP reach, and the result of the variable display (the outcome of the battle presentation) is derived through a different presentation process for each presentation route. To explain this briefly, presentation route 1 is a "big hit" route in which the result of the SP reach (battle presentation) is a victory, presentation route 2 is a "miss" route in which the result of the SP reach (battle presentation) is a defeat, and presentation route 3 is a "big hit" route in which the result of the SP reach (battle presentation) appears to be a defeat, and then a comeback victory is achieved.

As shown in FIG. 138, the button vibration effects in this embodiment include a first button vibration effect that is executed between the start of the variable display and the development of a specific effect (SP reach), a second button vibration effect that is executed while the specific effect (SP reach) is being executed, and a third button vibration effect that is executed after the specific effect (SP reach) ends.

The first button vibration effect is executed as a high expectation effect that suggests or notifies that there is a high expectation that the result of the currently executing variable display will be a jackpot. This first button vibration effect is a high expectation effect (super hot effect), but it is not a jackpot guaranteed effect, so even if the first button vibration effect is executed, the result of the variable display may be a "miss." There are two types of first button vibration effects: first button vibration effect α, which is performed when the variable display starts, and first button vibration effect β, which is performed while the N reach of the variable display is being executed (after the reach is established and before the development of the SP reach). Examples of first button vibration effect α and first button vibration effect β will be described later.

The second button vibration effect is executed as a jackpot confirmation effect that suggests or notifies that the currently executing variable display is a jackpot. This second button vibration effect is performed immediately after the win/lose branch at the end of the SP reach in the variable display. In other words, this second button vibration effect is an effect (jackpot confirmation effect) that is executed when notifying that a jackpot has been won immediately after the win/lose branch. An example of this second button vibration effect will be described later.

The third button vibration effect is executed as a revival effect that suggests or notifies the player that the result of the currently executing variable display is a miss, and then the true result is a jackpot. An example of this third button vibration effect will be described later.

During each button vibration performance, the button lamp 15a emits light. During the first button vibration performance α, the button lamp 15a emits light in a predetermined notification mode (continuously lit in white). During the first button vibration performance β, the button lamp 15a emits light in a predetermined notification mode (continuously lit in white) or in a specific notification mode (continuously lit in red). During the second button vibration performance, the button lamp 15a emits light in a special notification mode (continuously lit in rainbow colors). During the third button vibration performance, the button lamp 15a emits light in a special notification mode (continuously lit in rainbow colors). The notification mode of the effect button lamp 15a during this button vibration performance is related to the jackpot expectation degree, and is set so that the jackpot expectation degree increases by one step in the order of a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in white light emission color) < a specific notification mode (a mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in red light emission color) < a special notification mode (a mode in which the lamp is continuously lit in rainbow light emission color). The special notification mode (rainbow light emission) is a notification mode for a confirmed jackpot win, and is therefore selected only when the second button vibration performance or the third button vibration performance is executed. In addition, when each button vibration performance is executed, the vibration level of the effect button P15 and the operation time of the effect button P15 (the time during which the effect button P15 vibrates) may be executed in different modes. For example, the higher the vibration level of the effect button P15, the higher the jackpot expectation degree, or the longer the operation time of the effect button P15 (the time during which the effect button P15 vibrates), the higher the jackpot expectation degree. Also, during the first button vibration performance α, the performance button lamp 15a may be configured to emit light in a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which the button lamp 15a is continuously lit in white light) or a specific notification mode (a mode in which the button lamp 15a is continuously lit in red light), and during the first button vibration performance β, the performance button lamp 15a may be configured to emit light in a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which the button lamp 15a is continuously lit in white light). Furthermore, in either or both of the first button vibration performance α and the first button vibration performance β, the performance button lamp 15a may be configured to emit light in a special notification mode (a mode in which the button lamp 15a is continuously lit in rainbow light), and in that case, it is preferable to configure the performance button lamp 15a so that the probability of the performance button lamp 15a being emitted in the special notification mode (a mode in which the button lamp 15a is continuously lit in rainbow light) is lower than in the second button vibration performance or the third button vibration performance.

In addition, various button vibration effects are classified into a type of button vibration effect that is executed triggered by the operation of the effect button P15 (i.e., a type of button vibration effect executed as an operation trigger effect) and a type of button vibration effect that is executed without being triggered by the operation of the effect button P15 (i.e., a type of button vibration effect executed independently of the button effect). Specifically, the first button vibration effect includes a type of button vibration effect that is executed triggered by the operation of the effect button P15 (first button vibration effect β) and a type of button vibration effect that is executed without being triggered by the operation of the effect button P15 (first button vibration effect α). On the other hand, the second button vibration effect belongs to a type of button vibration effect that is executed triggered by the operation of the effect button P15. In addition, the third button vibration effect belongs to a type of button vibration effect that is executed without being triggered by the operation of the effect button P15. The meaning of "executed with the operation of the effect button P15 as a trigger" here is the same as the meaning of "executed with the operation of the effect button P15 as a trigger" in the button effect described above. In addition, the first button vibration effect β and the second button vibration effect are effects that are executed when the operation promotion effect is executed first, and the effect button P15 is operated within the operation effective period during the execution of the operation promotion effect, or when the effect button P15 is not operated within the operation effective period and the operation effective period ends. In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, a button vibration effect (for convenience, referred to as a "button vibration effect γ") may be executed as an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button P15 (there may be a button vibration effect that is executed when the operation promotion effect is being executed and the effect button P15 is not operated). In other words, when a predetermined button effect is executed, an operation promotion image such as a button image or an indicator image may be displayed on the screen as the operation promotion effect, and an effect (button vibration effect γ) that vibrates the effect button P15 while the operation promotion image is being displayed may be executed. In this case, when the effect button P15 is operated within the operation valid period, or when the operation valid period ends without the effect button P15 being operated within the operation valid period, it is preferable to make the operation prompt image invisible and terminate the execution of the button vibration effect γ. In addition, when the button vibration effect γ is configured as the operation prompt effect, a button vibration effect may be further executed as an operation trigger effect corresponding to the operation prompt effect. In addition, when the button vibration effect γ is configured as the operation prompt effect, the button vibration effect may not be executed again as an operation trigger effect corresponding to the operation prompt effect. In addition, when the button vibration effect γ is configured as the operation prompt effect, the button effect accompanied by the button vibration effect γ may be configured to have a relatively higher jackpot expectation rate than when the button effect without the button vibration effect γ is executed. Specifically, when a button vibration effect is being executed (button vibration effect γ is being executed) while an operation prompting image corresponding to a button operation that may trigger the execution of the second button vibration effect is being displayed, the second button vibration effect is always executed, or the probability of the second button vibration effect being executed is higher than when a button vibration effect is not being executed (button vibration effect γ is not being executed) while an operation prompting image corresponding to a button operation that may trigger the execution of the second button vibration effect is being displayed. In addition, when a button vibration effect is being executed (button vibration effect γ is being executed) while an operation prompting image that is displayed after a reach corresponding to a button operation that may be a trigger for the execution of the first button vibration effect β is being displayed, the first button vibration effect β is always executed, or the probability of the first button vibration effect β being executed may be higher than when a button vibration effect is not being executed (button vibration effect γ is not being executed) while an operation prompting image that is displayed after a reach corresponding to a button operation that may be a trigger for the execution of the first button vibration effect β (the premise is that, in addition to the first button vibration effect β, a preview effect that has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the first button vibration effect β and is not a button vibration effect may be executed as an operation trigger effect when a button operation is performed while an operation prompting image that is displayed after a reach corresponding to a button operation that may be a trigger for the execution of the first button vibration effect β is being displayed).

Next, an example of the first button vibration effect α will be described. FIG. 139 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the first button vibration effect α. First, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), the previous variable display ends and the decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop. Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (B), the start condition for the current variable display (variation start condition) is met and the variable display of the decorative pattern begins. At the start of this variable display, the first button vibration effect α is executed, in which the effect button P15 vibrates, suggesting that there is a high expectation of winning a jackpot in the variable display. Then, as shown in FIG. 139 (C), when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the current variable display began, the first button vibration effect ends.

Next, an example of the first button performance β will be described. FIG. 140 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the first button vibration performance β. First, as shown in FIG. 140 (A), the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), among the three rows of decorative symbols, the left symbol is temporarily stopped and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, so that a reach is established in the variable display. Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (C), during the execution of the N reach, the button performance (operation promotion performance as the button performance C) is started, and an operation promotion image such as a button image or an indicator image is displayed on the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 140 (D), by operating the performance button P15 during the operation effective period, a dedicated background image that determines that the game will develop into an SP reach is displayed on the screen as the operation trigger performance, and a button vibration performance β in which the performance button P15 vibrates is executed. The occurrence of this operation trigger performance suggests to the player that the game will develop into an SP reach (there is a high expectation of a big win). Then, although not shown in the figure, when the game progresses to the SP reach, for example, a battle performance in which a friendly character fights an enemy character starts. In addition, as the operation trigger performance in this case, in addition to the first button vibration performance β, a notice performance that has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the first button vibration performance β and is not a button vibration performance may be executed.

Next, an example of the second button vibration effect will be described. Figures 141 to 142 are schematic diagrams showing an example of the second button vibration effect. First, as shown in (A) in the figure, the variable display of the decorative patterns begins. Next, as shown in (B) in the figure, of the three rows of decorative patterns, a "6" is displayed provisionally as the left pattern, and a "6" is displayed provisionally as the right pattern, resulting in a reach in the variable display. Next, as in FIG. 140(D), although not shown, during the execution of N Reach, a button performance (operation promotion performance as button performance C) is started, and an operation promotion image such as a button image or an indicator image is displayed on the screen. As shown in FIG. 140(D), when the performance button P15 is operated within the operation effective period, a dedicated background image that determines that the game will develop into an SP Reach is displayed on the screen as the operation trigger performance, and a button vibration performance β in which the performance button P15 vibrates is executed. As a result of the occurrence of this operation trigger performance, it is suggested to the player that the game will develop into an SP Reach (there is a high expectation of a big win). Then, as shown in FIG. 140(D), a battle performance is started as a performance during the SP Reach. Then, as shown in FIG. 140(E), the SP Reach approaches its final stage, and at the time of the win/lose branch, a button performance (operation promotion performance as button performance D) is generated. Next, as shown in (F) in the figure, when the effect button P15 is operated within the operation effective period, the first movable role P651 falls forward of the screen (moves to a movable position) as an operation trigger effect, and the second button vibration effect in which the effect button P15 vibrates is executed, suggesting that a jackpot has been won in the variable display. In addition, in this button effect D, as described above, even if the effect button P15 is not operated within the operation effective period, the same operation trigger effect (role effect, second button vibration effect) as above will be executed when the operation effective period ends. Next, as shown in (G) in the figure, the ally character wins against the enemy character, and the decorative pattern is displayed as a provisional stop with a combination of "6, 6, 6" (a jackpot) indicating a jackpot. In addition, the second button vibration effect continues even during the provisional stop of the decorative pattern. As a modified example, the second button vibration effect may be temporarily suspended for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) between (F) and (G) in the figure and then resumed. Next, as shown in (H), the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern ends, and the decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop in the combination of "6-6-6" (a jackpot), which indicates a jackpot. Note that the second button vibration effect ends before the decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop. Then, as shown in (I), the game moves to a jackpot game. Note that during the jackpot game, the decorative pattern, small pattern, reserved image, and changing image are not displayed, but the number of reserved balls for the special pattern (reserved ball number information displayed in the reserved number display area P740) continues to be displayed (in the illustrated example, "2" is displayed as the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern, and "0" is displayed as the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern). As a modified example, the small pattern (e.g., "6-6-6") may also be displayed continuously during the jackpot game.

Next, an example of the third button vibration effect will be described. Fig. 143 to Fig. 144 are schematic diagrams showing an example of the third button vibration effect. First, as shown in (A) in the figure, the variable display of the decorative symbols starts. Next, as shown in (B) in the figure, of the three rows of decorative symbols, a "6" is temporarily displayed on the left symbol, and a "6" is temporarily displayed on the right symbol, and a reach is established in the variable display. Next, as in FIG. 140(D), although not shown, during the execution of N Reach, a button performance (operation promotion performance as button performance C) is started, and an operation promotion image such as a button image or an indicator image is displayed on the screen, and then, as shown in FIG. 140(D), the performance button P15 is operated within the operation effective period, and as the operation trigger performance, a dedicated background image that determines that the game will develop into an SP Reach is displayed on the screen, and a button vibration performance β in which the performance button P15 vibrates is executed, and the occurrence of this operation trigger performance suggests to the player that the game will develop into an SP Reach (there is a high expectation of a big win). Next, as shown in FIG. 140(C), the game develops from N Reach to an SP Reach. Next, as shown in FIG. 140(D), a battle performance is started as a performance during the SP Reach. Next, as shown in FIG. 140(E), at the time of the win/loss branch at the end of the SP Reach, a performance in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is displayed. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at "6" as a temporary stop display of the decorative symbols, and the center decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at "7", so that the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed as a combination of "6, 7, 6" (a miss). Next, as shown in FIG. (F), in a state in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed as a miss, a text image (a revival suggestion effect or a revival teasing effect) that suggests or encourages a revival effect, such as "The battle is just beginning", is displayed on the screen. Next, as shown in FIG. (G), a revival effect is executed in which the first movable role object P651 falls forward of the screen (moves to a movable position), and a third button vibration effect is executed in which the effect button P15 vibrates. As a modified example, the resurrection performance may not include a performance in which the first movable role P651 falls to the front of the screen (moves to a movable position), but instead includes a performance in which the second movable role P652 slides to the front of the screen (moves to a movable position), and a third button vibration performance in which the performance button P15 vibrates may be executed. As a further modified example, the resurrection performance may include a performance in which the ally character is covered in a rainbow-colored aura on the screen without operating either the first movable role P651 or the second movable role P651 (moves to a movable position), and a third button vibration performance in which the performance button P15 vibrates. Next, as shown in (H) in the figure, immediately after the performance (resurrection performance) in which the ally character wins a comeback victory over the enemy character is displayed on the screen, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed with the combination of "6, 6, 6" (jackpot) indicating a jackpot. In addition, the second button vibration effect continues even during the temporary stop of the decorative pattern. As a modified example, the second button vibration effect may be temporarily suspended for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) between (G) and (H) in the figure and then resumed. Then, as shown in (I), the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern ends, and the decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop with a combination of "6-6-6" (a jackpot), which indicates a jackpot. Before this decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop, the third button vibration effect ends. Then, as shown in (J), the game moves to a jackpot game. In addition, during the execution of this jackpot game, the decorative pattern, the small pattern, the reserved image, and the changing image are not displayed, but the number of reserved balls for the special pattern (reserved ball number information displayed in the reserved number display area P740) continues to be displayed (in the illustrated example, "2" is displayed as the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern, and "0" is displayed as the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern). As a modified example, the small symbols (for example, "6-6-6") may also be continuously displayed during the execution of a jackpot game.

Next, the execution patterns when various button vibration effects are executed will be described. FIG. 145 is a schematic diagram showing an execution pattern table of the button vibration effect. In this embodiment, when the variable performance pattern of the decorative pattern is a variable performance pattern accompanied by a specific performance (SP reach), the execution pattern of the button vibration effect is selected by lottery with reference to this execution pattern table. Specifically, as the execution pattern of the button vibration effect, the execution pattern PB0 is an execution pattern in which none of the button vibration effects are performed during the variable display. The execution pattern PB1 is an execution pattern in which only the first button vibration effect α is performed during the variable display. The execution pattern PB2 is an execution pattern in which only the first button vibration effect β is performed during the variable display. The execution pattern PB3 is an execution pattern in which only the second button vibration effect is performed during the variable display. The execution pattern PB4 is an execution pattern in which only the third button vibration effect is performed during the variable display. In other words, the execution patterns PB1 to PB4 are execution patterns in which one button vibration effect is performed during the variable display. Moreover, the execution pattern PB5 is an execution pattern in which the first button vibration performance α and the second button vibration performance are performed (an execution pattern in which the first button vibration performance α is performed and then the second button vibration performance is performed). The execution pattern PB6 is an execution pattern in which the first button vibration performance α and the third button vibration performance are performed (an execution pattern in which the first button vibration performance α is performed and then the third button vibration performance is performed). The execution pattern PB7 is an execution pattern in which the first button vibration performance β and the second button vibration performance are performed (an execution pattern in which the first button vibration performance β is performed and then the second button vibration performance is performed). The execution pattern PB8 is an execution pattern in which the first button vibration performance β and the third button vibration performance are performed (an execution pattern in which the first button vibration performance β is performed and then the third button vibration performance is performed). Thus, in this embodiment, there are cases in which the button vibration performance is not performed once during the execution of one variable display, cases in which the button vibration performance is performed only once during the execution of one variable display, and cases in which the button vibration performance is performed multiple times during the execution of one variable display. Also, although not shown, there are an execution pattern PB9 in which the first button vibration performance α and the first button vibration performance β are performed, an execution pattern PB10 in which the first button vibration performance α, the first button vibration performance β, and the second button vibration performance are performed, and an execution pattern PB11 in which the first button vibration performance α, the first button vibration performance β, and the third button vibration performance are performed. In this embodiment, the probability of a big win is relatively higher when the button vibration performance is performed only once during the execution of the variable display than when the button vibration performance is not performed even once during the execution of the variable display, and the probability of a big win is relatively higher when the button vibration performance is performed multiple times during the execution of the variable display than when the button vibration performance is performed only once during the execution of the variable display. Also, it is easier to execute the second button vibration performance or the third button vibration performance when either the first button vibration performance α or the first button vibration performance β is executed than when neither the first button vibration performance α nor the first button vibration performance β is executed. Furthermore, the second button vibration effect or the third button vibration effect is more likely to be executed when both the first button vibration effect α and the first button vibration effect β are executed than when either the first button vibration effect α or the first button vibration effect β is executed. However, in any execution pattern, the third button vibration effect is less likely to be executed than the second button vibration effect (for example, execution pattern 6 is less likely to be selected than execution pattern 5).

<Initialization of moving body>
Next, the initialization operation of the movable body when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart of the initialization operation process of the movable body. The initialization operation of the movable body is a confirmation operation executed when the gaming machine PM is turned on (when the power is restored), and is performed for the purpose of confirming whether the movable body operates normally. In this embodiment, the first movable role P651, the second movable role P652, and the performance button P15 are also collectively referred to as "movable body". In addition, in the following description, except in special cases, "power on" or "recovery from power off" refers to power on or power off recovery without the above-mentioned setting change operation and setting confirmation operation (operation of the setting key switch P810) (that is, power on or power off recovery when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is not entered when the power is turned on or the power is restored).

In the initialization operation process of the movable body, as shown in Fig. 146, the initialization operation process (S941) of the first movable role P651, the initialization operation process (S942) of the performance button P15, and the initialization operation process (S943) of the second movable role P652 are performed. In this embodiment, the process is executed in the order of the initialization operation process (S941) of the first movable role P651 → the initialization operation process (S942) of the performance button P15 → the initialization operation process (S943) of the second movable role P652, but is not limited to this. For example, the process may be executed in the order of initialization operation process of the first movable role P651 → initialization operation process of the second movable role P652 → initialization operation process of the performance button P15 (processing that prioritizes the initialization operation process of the movable role P651, 652), or the process may be executed in the order of initialization operation process of the performance button P15 → initialization operation process of the first movable role P651 → initialization operation process of the second movable role P652 (processing that prioritizes the initialization operation process of the performance button P15). In addition, the initialization operation process of the first movable role P651 and the initialization operation process of the performance button P15 may be configured to be executed simultaneously in parallel. Alternatively, the initialization operation process of the second movable role P652 and the initialization operation process of the performance button P15 may be configured to be executed simultaneously in parallel. Alternatively, the initialization operation process of the first movable role P651, the initialization operation process of the second movable role P652, and the initialization operation process of the performance button P15 may be configured to be executed simultaneously in parallel.

In the initialization operation process (S941) of the first movable role P651, control is performed to return the first movable role P651 to the initial position and control is performed to confirm the operation of the first movable role P651. Specifically, although not shown in the figure, each operation is performed in the order of (1-1) returning the first movable role P651 to the initial position, (1-2) confirming the detection signal (on signal) of the first initial position sensor, (1-3) moving the first movable role P651 downward, (1-4) confirming the detection signal (on signal) of the first movable position sensor, (1-5) moving the first movable role P651 upward, and (1-6) confirming the detection signal (on signal) of the first initial position sensor, and the initialization operation of the first movable role P651 is completed. Note that, if the first movable role P651 is in the initial position at the start of the initialization operation, the process of (1-1) is skipped and the process is performed from the process of (1-2). That is, in this initialization operation, different operations can be executed depending on the position of the first movable role P651 at the start of the initialization operation (depending on whether the first movable role P651 is in the initial position or not). Here, the first initial position sensor is a detection means for detecting whether the first movable role P651 is in the initial position (first initial position), and the first movable position sensor is a detection means for detecting whether the first movable role P651 is in the movable position (first movable position). During the initialization operation of the first movable role P651, the light emission control of the first role lamp P651a is also performed at the same time. In this embodiment, in the initialization operation process of the first movable role P651, the first movable role lamp P651a starts to emit light, and then the initialization operation of the first movable role P651 starts. In addition, after the initialization operation of the first movable role P651 ends, the light emission of the first role lamp P651a ends (at this time, the first movable role P651 is not in the performance operation). In addition, the notification mode of the first reel lamp P651a of the first movable reel P651 is different between the notification mode during the initialization operation (for example, a notification mode in which the reel flashes with a white light color) and the notification mode during the performance operation (for example, a mode in which the reel is continuously lit with a red light color). Note that the emission of the first reel lamp P651a does not have to end after the initialization operation of the first movable reel P651 is completed, and if configured in this way, the notification mode of the first reel lamp P651a of the first movable reel P651 may be different before and after the initialization operation of the first movable reel P651 is completed (for example, the notification mode may be a mode in which the reel flashes with a white light color before the initialization operation is completed, and a mode in which the reel is continuously lit with a white light color after the initialization operation is completed).

In the initialization operation (S942) of the performance button P15, in order to confirm the operation of vibrating the performance button P15, the vibration motor is driven to vibrate the performance button P15 for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds). During the initialization operation of the performance button P15, the illumination control of the performance button lamp 15a is also performed at the same time. In this embodiment, in the initialization operation process of the performance button P15, after the illumination of the performance button lamp 15a starts, the initialization operation of the performance button P15 starts. In this embodiment, during the initialization operation of the performance button P15, the performance button lamp 15a emits light in a special notification mode (announcement mode in which the performance button lamp 15a flashes with a red emission color). Then, after the initialization operation of the performance button P15 is completed, the notification mode of the performance button lamp 15a is switched to a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is continuously lit with a white emission color). Here, as the initialization operation of the performance button P15, first, the performance button lamp 15a emits light in a special notification mode (announcement mode in which the light is flashed in red) for a specific time (for example, 5 seconds), and then, while continuing the emission of the special notification mode (announcement mode in which the light is flashed in red), the vibration motor is driven to vibrate the performance button P15 for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds), and then, even if the vibration is stopped, the emission of the special notification mode (announcement mode in which the light is flashed in red) is continued for a specified time (for example, 5 seconds), thereby completing the initialization operation of the performance button P15. Here, the emission start timing of the notification mode during the initialization operation of the performance button lamp 15a may be approximately the same as the emission start timing of the notification mode during the initialization operation of the first role lamp P651a, and the emission end timing of the notification mode during the initialization operation of the performance button lamp 15a may be approximately the same as the emission end timing of the notification mode during the initialization operation of the first role lamp P651a. In addition, in the case where the internal mechanism of the effect button is equipped with a button rotation effect, which is a preview effect that suggests or notifies the likelihood of a jackpot by rotating a movable object inside the effect button P15, the initialization operation of the effect button P15 involves controlling the rotation motor to rotate the movable object inside the effect button P15 for a predetermined period of time in order to confirm the rotation of the movable object inside the effect button P15, and during the initialization operation of the effect button P15, control of the illumination of the effect button lamp 15a is also performed at the same time, and in the initialization operation process of the effect button P15, after the illumination of the effect button lamp 15a begins, the initialization operation of the effect button P15 is started, and during the initialization operation of the effect button P15, the effect button lamp 15a illuminates in a special notification mode (an alarm mode in which it flashes in red light), and after the initialization operation of the effect button P15 is completed, the alarm mode of the effect button lamp 15a switches to a predetermined alarm mode (a mode in which it is continuously lit in white light).

In the initialization operation (S943) of the second movable role P652, control is performed to return the second movable role P652 to its initial position and control is performed to confirm the operation of the second movable role P652. Specifically, although not shown in the figure, each operation is performed in the order of (2-1) returning the second movable role P652 to its initial position, (2-2) confirming the detection signal (on signal) of the second initial position sensor, (2-3) swinging the second movable role P652 to the left when viewed from the front, (2-4) confirming the detection signal (on signal) of the second movable position sensor, (2-5) swinging the second movable role P652 to the right when viewed from the front, and (2-6) confirming the detection signal (on signal) of the second initial position sensor, and the initialization operation of the second movable role P652 is completed. Note that, if the second movable role P652 is in the initial position at the start of the initialization operation, the process of (2-1) is skipped and the process is performed from (2-2). That is, in this initialization operation, different operations can be executed depending on the position of the second movable role P652 at the start of the initialization operation (depending on whether the second movable role P652 is in the initial position or not). Here, the second initial position sensor is a detection means for detecting whether the second movable role P652 is in the initial position (first initial position), and the second movable position sensor is a detection means for detecting whether the second movable role P652 is in the movable position (first movable position). During the initialization operation of the second movable role P652, the light emission control of the second role lamp P652a is also performed at the same time. In this embodiment, in the initialization operation process of the second movable role P652, the second movable role lamp P652a starts to emit light, and then the initialization operation of the second movable role P651 starts. In addition, after the initialization operation of the second movable role P652 ends, the light emission of the second role lamp P652a ends (at this time, the second movable role P652 is not in the performance operation). Here, the light emission start timing of the notification mode during the initialization operation of the second role lamp P652a may be approximately the same as the light emission start timing of the notification mode during the initialization operation of the first role lamp P651a, and the light emission end timing of the notification mode during the initialization operation of the second role lamp P652a may be approximately the same as the light emission end timing of the notification mode during the initialization operation of the first role lamp P651a. Also, the notification mode of the second role lamp P652a of the second movable role P652 is different between the notification mode during the initialization operation (for example, the notification mode in which the white light is flashed) and the notification mode during the performance operation (for example, the mode in which the red light is continuously lit). In addition, the second reel lamp P652a does not have to stop emitting light after the initialization operation of the second movable reel P652 is completed. If configured in this way, the notification mode of the second reel lamp P652a of the second movable reel P651 may be different before and after the initialization operation of the second movable reel P652 is completed (for example, the notification mode may be a flashing white light before the initialization operation is completed, and a continuous white light after the initialization operation is completed).

Here, the timing of the initialization operation process of the movable body will be described. Fig. 147 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the display screen displayed on the performance display device P70 after the game machine is powered on. In this embodiment, when the game machine is powered on (when the power is restored after being turned off), the initialization operation process of the movable body is started at the same time or approximately at the same time when the display screen of the performance display device P70 returns to the normal screen described later.

First, as shown in FIG. 147(A), when the gaming machine is in a power-off state, nothing is displayed on the screen of the performance display device P70. As shown in FIG. 147(B), when the gaming machine is powered on and recovers from the power-off state, nothing is displayed on the screen of the performance display device P70 for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), but after the predetermined time has elapsed, the performance display device P70 displays a recovery screen (in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, this is called a power recovery notification image, a power-off recovery image, or a power-off recovery screen) including a text image "Recovering" (an image indicating that the gaming machine or the performance display device is in a recovery state). Then, as shown in FIG. 147(C), after the recovery screen is displayed on the performance display device P70 for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), it switches to a normal screen (standby screen). On this normal screen, an initial combination of decorative patterns and a predetermined background image are displayed as a predetermined default display, regardless of the performance state before the power-off. In the illustrated example, the combination of "3, 3, 1" indicating a predetermined predetermined miss is displayed as the initial combination of the decorative pattern. Also, in the illustrated example, a background image (for example, the background image of stage A in the normal presentation mode) corresponding to a predetermined default presentation mode (presentation stage) is displayed as the predetermined background image. In this embodiment, the initialization operation process of the movable body is started almost at the same time as the display of this initial screen starts. After this initial screen is displayed, the performance display device P70 is in a state where the decorative pattern can be displayed (the performance display by the performance display device P70 is completely restored). In other words, after returning to the initial screen, the performance display device P70 is able to display the decorative pattern corresponding to the performance control command when a performance control command is sent from the main control board P100 to the performance control board P200 (for example, the performance display of the decorative pattern starts when a change start command is sent from the main control board P100 to the performance control board P200). For example, when the power is restored after being turned off, if the state is a standby state (non-varying state) in which no variable display is being performed and there are no reserved balls for the first special pattern or the second special pattern (before the power is turned off in the standby state), the display of the initial screen is displayed, and even while the initialization operation process of the movable body is being performed, the game ball enters the first starting hole P51, so that the variable display of the first special pattern can be started, and at the same time, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be started in the performance display device P70. As a modified example of this embodiment, the initialization operation of the movable body may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal screen was displayed. Also, the initialization operation of the movable body may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the recovery screen was displayed (before the normal screen is displayed). Furthermore, the initialization operation of the movable body may be started when a predetermined performance control command is received from the main control board P100. In the following, "initialization operation of the movable body" does not refer to each of the initialization operation of the first movable role P651, the initialization operation of the performance button P15, and the initialization operation of the second movable role P652, but rather to all of the initialization operations of the first movable role P651, the initialization operation of the performance button P15, and the initialization operation of the second movable role P652 (until all of these multiple initialization operations have been started and all have been completed).

<<Button vibration during initialization>>
Next, the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the button vibration performance will be described. FIG. 148 is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the button vibration performance. Here, for the time chart of the button vibration performance at the bottom, the vibration for a predetermined time in the initialization operation of the performance button P15 is not treated as "execution". In addition, in FIG. 148, due to the space of the paper, a simplified screen display (a screen display that omits some displays such as small patterns and reserved images) is shown.

First, at time t1, a power outage occurs in the gaming machine in a variable standby state (non-variable state). At time t2, the gaming machine is powered on and recovers from the power outage. At time t3, at a predetermined timing after the gaming machine is powered on, a recovery screen is displayed on the performance display device P70. At time t4, the display screen of the performance display device P70 switches from the recovery screen to the normal screen (standby screen). Also, at this time t4, an initialization operation process for the movable bodies is started, and the initialization operation of the first movable role P651, the initialization operation of the performance button P15, and the initialization operation of the second movable role P652 are performed in that order.

At time t5, while the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed, the game ball enters the first starting hole P51, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started. In addition, a variable start command is sent from the main control board P100 to the performance control board P200, and the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the small symbol are started. In addition, at this time t5, a performance lottery is performed at the start of the variable display, and the execution of the execution pattern PB5 (execution of the first button vibration performance α and execution of the second button vibration performance) is determined as the execution pattern of the button vibration performance. Therefore, originally, the first button vibration performance α should be executed at the start of the variable display (i.e., time t5), but since the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed, the execution of the first button vibration performance α is prohibited in order to prioritize the initialization operation of the movable body. Here, in this embodiment, as the initialization operation of the movable body, (1) even if the initialization operation of the movable role P651, 652 is being executed and the initialization operation of the performance button P15 is not being executed, or (2) even if the initialization operation of the movable role P651, 652 is not being executed and the initialization operation of the performance button P15 is being executed, the execution of the first button vibration performance α is restricted during the initialization operation of the movable body. In other words, if the execution timing of the first button vibration performance α overlaps with the execution period of the initialization operation of the movable body, whether it is the initialization operation of the movable role P651, 652 or the initialization operation of the button performance 15, the execution of the first button vibration performance α is restricted (the execution of the first button vibration performance α is canceled). In addition, if the timing for executing the first button vibration performance α arrives just before the initialization operation of the movable body is completed, not only is the execution of the first button vibration performance α prohibited until the initialization operation of the movable body is completed, but the remaining part of the first button vibration performance α (the first button vibration performance for the execution period that does not overlap with the execution period of the initialization operation of the movable body out of the execution period of the first button vibration performance α) will not be executed after the initialization operation of the movable body is completed. Note that, as a modified example of this embodiment, even if the initialization operation of the movable role objects P651, 652 is being executed at the start timing of the execution of the first button vibration performance α, if the vibration for a predetermined time, which is the initialization operation of the performance button P15, is completed (or is in a non-executing state), the initialization operation of the performance button P15 (vibration operation for operation confirmation) and the performance operation (vibration operation for performance) do not conflict, so the first button vibration performance α may be executable.

At time t6, the initialization operation of the performance button P15, which is one of the initialization operations of the movable body, is started. The start of the initialization operation of this performance button P15 triggers the performance button lamp 15a to emit light in a special notification mode (flashing red light) (switching from an off state to a flashing red state). At time t7, the initialization operation of the performance button P15 ends. The end of the initialization operation of this performance button P15 triggers the notification mode of the performance button lamp 15a to switch from the special notification mode (flashing red light) to a predetermined notification mode (continuously lit white light). At the same time, the vibration for the predetermined time also ends.

Next, at time t8, the initialization operation of the movable body is completed; that is, the initialization operation of the first movable part P651, the initialization operation of the performance button P15, and the initialization operation of the second movable part P652 are all completed. Note that at this time t8, the variable display continues.

Next, at time t9, a button effect D (operation prompt effect) is started as a winning/losing branch effect, and an operation prompt image such as a button image appears on the screen. When this operation prompt effect starts, the notification mode of the effect button lamp 15a is switched from a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which the white light is continuously lit) to a specific notification mode (a mode in which the red light is continuously lit).

At time t10, the effect button P15 is operated (or the effective operation period has elapsed without the effect button P15 being operated), and a feature effect in which the first movable feature P651 falls (moves to a movable position) and a second button vibration effect in which the effect button P15 vibrates are both executed, indicating that the variable display is a jackpot. While the effect button P15 is vibrating, the effect button lamp 15a lights up in a special notification mode (a mode in which it lights up continuously in rainbow colors).

At time t11, the decorative symbols are provisionally displayed in a combination (a jackpot) that indicates a jackpot. Then, at time t12, the provisional display of the decorative symbols ends, and the decorative symbols are definitively displayed in a combination (a jackpot) that indicates a jackpot.

In this embodiment, if the first button vibration effect α and the second button vibration effect are scheduled to be executed in the variable display that is performed by winning the start-up prize while the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed (if the execution of both button vibration effects is won in the effect lottery), the first button vibration effect α scheduled to be executed at the start of the variable display is restricted in order to prioritize the initialization operation of the movable body, while the second button vibration effect scheduled to be executed at the end of the variable display is allowed to be executed since there is no risk of it being executed at the same time as the initialization operation of the movable body.

As a modified example of this embodiment, a button vibration simultaneous display effect (button vibration linked display effect) that displays a predetermined display image (for example, a dialogue image saying "It's your chance") before or during the execution of the first button vibration effect α may be configured as an effect that can be executed simultaneously (in conjunction with) the first button vibration effect α. In that case, in the application of the above FIG. 148, since the initialization operation of the movable body is prioritized, it is preferable that the execution of the first button vibration effect α is restricted, while the execution of the display of the predetermined effect image, which is the button vibration simultaneous display effect (button vibration linked display effect), is permitted. In this way, even if the execution of the first button vibration effect α is restricted, the button vibration simultaneous display effect (button vibration linked display effect) is executed, so that the player can be made aware that the situation is such that the first button vibration effect α should have been executed (there is a high probability of a jackpot).

<<Button effect A during initialization>>
Next, the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the button performance A will be described. FIG. 149 is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the first button performance. Here, for the time chart of the button vibration performance at the bottom, the vibration for a predetermined time in the initialization operation of the performance button P15 is not treated as "execution". Note that, in FIG. 149, due to space limitations, a simplified screen display (a screen display in which some displays such as small patterns and reserved images are omitted) is shown.

First, time points t21 to t24 are the same as time points t1 to t4 described above, so a repeated explanation will be omitted. At time t25, the initialization operation of the performance button P15, which is one of the initialization operations of the movable body, begins. When the initialization operation of this performance button P15 begins, the performance button lamp 15a lights up in a special notification mode (a mode in which it flashes in red) (it switches from an off state to a flashing red state).

Subsequently, at time t26, during the initialization operation of the movable body, the game ball enters the first starting hole P
When the ball enters 51, the display of the first special symbol begins. In addition, a change start command is sent from the main control board P100 to the performance control board P200, and the display of the decorative symbol and the small symbol begins. In addition, at this time t26, a performance lottery is held at the start of the display of the change, and the execution of the button performance A and the execution of the second button vibration performance are determined. Therefore, at this time t26 (the start of the display of the change), the execution of the button performance A (operation promotion performance) begins, and an operation promotion image such as a button image or an indicator image appears on the screen.

Next, at time t27, the effect button P15 is operated within the operation valid period. However, even if the effect button P15 is operated within this operation valid period, while the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed, that is, while the effect button lamp 15a is emitting light in a special light-emitting mode (a mode in which it flashes red), the notification mode of the effect button lamp 15a does not change and continues to be in the special notification mode in response to the operation of the effect button P15. Also, at this time 27, if the effect button P15 is operated within the operation valid period, a role performance in which the first movable role P651 falls (moves to a movable position) should be executed as the operation trigger performance, but since the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed, the execution of the role performance is prohibited in order to prioritize the initialization operation of the movable body. Here, in this embodiment, as the initialization operation of the movable body, (1) even if the initialization operation of the movable role P651, 652 is being executed and the initialization operation of the performance button P15 is not being executed, or (2) even if the initialization operation of the movable role P651, 652 is not being executed and the initialization operation of the performance button P15 is being executed, the execution of the role performance is restricted during the execution of the initialization operation of the movable body. In other words, if the execution timing of the button vibration performance overlaps with the execution period of the initialization operation of the movable body, whether it is the initialization operation of the movable role P651, 652 or the initialization operation of the performance button P15, the execution of the role performance is restricted (the execution of the role performance is canceled). As a modified example of this embodiment, even if the initialization operation of the performance button P15 is in progress at the time when the performance of the reel performance by the button performance A starts, if the initialization operation of the movable reels P651, 652 is completed (or is not in execution), the initialization operation of the movable reels P651, 652 (reel operation for operation confirmation) and the performance operation (reel operation for performance) do not conflict, so the reel performance may be executed.

At time t28, the initialization operation of the performance button P15, which is one of the initialization operations of the movable body, ends. When the initialization operation of this performance button P15 ends, the notification mode of the performance button lamp 15a switches from a special notification mode (flashing red light) to a predetermined notification mode (continuously lit white light). At the same time, the vibration for the predetermined period of time also ends.

At time t29, the initialization operation of the movable body is completed; that is, the initialization operation of the first movable part P651, the initialization operation of the performance button P15, and the initialization operation of the second movable part P652 are all completed. Note that at this time t29, the variable display is still continuing.

At time t30, button effect D (operation prompt effect) starts as a win/lose branching effect, and an operation prompt image such as a button image appears on the screen. At time t31, triggered by the operation of effect button P15 (or the expiration of the effective operation period without the effect button P15 being operated), a function effect in which the first movable part P651 falls (moves to a movable position) and a second button vibration effect in which the effect button P15 vibrates are executed, respectively, suggesting that the variable display is a jackpot.

At time t32, the decorative symbols are provisionally displayed in a combination (jackpot) that indicates a jackpot. Then, at time t33, the provisional display of the decorative symbols ends, and the decorative symbols are definitively displayed in a combination (jackpot) that indicates a jackpot.

In this embodiment, when the execution of button performance A and the execution of the second button vibration performance are scheduled in the variable display that is performed by winning the start-up during the initialization operation of the movable body (when the execution of button performance A and the second button vibration performance is won in the performance lottery), the notification mode of the performance button lamp 15a during the initialization operation of the movable body and during the effective operation period of the button performance A that is performed at the start of the variable display is a special notification mode (a mode in which the performance button lamp 15a flashes with a red light color), whereas the notification mode of the performance button lamp 15a during the effective operation period of the second button vibration performance that is performed at the end of the variable display is a specific notification mode (a mode in which the performance button lamp 15a is continuously lit with a red light color), and thus the notification modes of the two are different.

As a variation of this embodiment, a special effect effect (effect collection effect) may be executed by utilizing the time before the button effect is executed, i.e., the time before the button image (operation prompt image) appears on the screen. This special effect effect (effect collection effect) is configured as a button appearance suggestion effect (a button appearance teasing effect that teases whether or not the effect button will appear) that suggests that a button effect will occur, i.e., that an effect in which a button image appears on the screen (sometimes referred to as a "button appearance effect") will be executed.

Here, FIG. 150 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a special effect effect (effect collection effect). As shown in FIG. 150(A), this special effect effect displays a special effect image that depicts the four effect buttons P15 semi-transparently, and these special effect images are gathered in one place and synthesized to form one complete button image (non-transparent button image), as shown in FIG. 150(B). Note that in this embodiment, the relationship between the special effect effect and the effective operation period can be determined so that the special effect effect is performed until the effective operation period begins, and the effective button operation period begins when the button image is completed.

Here, we will explain the case where this special effect presentation (effect collection presentation) is applied to the button appearance suggestion presentation (button appearance teaser presentation) of the above-mentioned button presentation A. Figure 151 is a time chart showing a modified example of Figure 149. Note that Figure 151 differs from the above-mentioned Figure 149 only in the example screen at time t30, and therefore explanations of other parts will be omitted unless there are special circumstances.

In this embodiment, the button appearance effect patterns include a first button appearance effect pattern in which a button image is displayed with a special effect effect (a button appearance suggestion effect or a button appearance teasing effect), and a second button appearance effect pattern in which a button image is displayed without a special effect effect (a button appearance suggestion effect or a button appearance teasing effect). In the button effects of this embodiment, in the button effect A performed at the start of the fluctuation, the second button appearance effect pattern in which a button image is displayed without a special effect effect is executed. On the other hand, in the button effect D performed at the time of the winning/losing branch, the first button appearance effect pattern in which a button image is displayed with a special effect effect is executed. Therefore, when the execution of the button effect A starts at time t26 in FIG. 151, the second button appearance effect pattern is executed, so that the button image is displayed without a special effect effect. On the other hand, when the execution of the button effect D starts at time t30 in FIG. 151, the first button appearance effect pattern is executed, so that the special effect effect is executed first and then the button image appears.

In this modified example, when the execution of button effect A and the execution of the second button vibration effect are scheduled in the variable display that is performed by winning the start-up prize while the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed (when the execution of button effect A and the second button vibration effect is won in the effect lottery), a special effect effect is not executed when a button image appears in button effect A that is executed during the initialization operation of the movable body and at the start of the variable display, but a special effect effect is executed when a button image appears in button effect D that is executed at the end of the variable display. By doing so, the initialization operation is prioritized in button effect A during the initialization operation of the movable body, preventing a cumbersome game progress, and the player's expectations can be heightened by the occurrence of a special effect effect in button effect D after the initialization operation of the movable body is completed, and appropriate game progress processing can be performed according to the game situation.

As a modified example of this embodiment, the button performance A performed at the start of the fluctuation may be configured to execute the first button appearance performance pattern that displays the button image accompanied by a special effect performance. In that case, it is preferable that the probability of the first button appearance performance pattern that displays the button image accompanied by a special effect performance is relatively lower when the button performance A is executed than when the button performance D is executed (i.e., the first button appearance performance pattern is less likely to be executed in the button performance A than in the button performance D). Also, the button performance B performed at the start of the fluctuation may be configured to execute the second button appearance performance pattern that displays the button image without a special effect performance. In that case, it is preferable that the probability of the second button appearance performance pattern that displays the button image without a special effect performance is relatively lower when the button performance D is executed than when the button performance A is executed (i.e., the second button appearance performance pattern is less likely to be executed in the button performance D than in the button performance A).

This special effect effect may have multiple display modes, and in such a configuration, for example, a special effect effect with a red effect may be configured to have a higher expectation of a jackpot than a special effect effect with a blue effect, or multiple types of button images may be provided (such as a blue button image and a red button image, where a high expectation preview effect is more likely to be executed with a red button image than with a blue button image, for example, a red comment preview effect is more likely to be executed than a blue comment preview effect), and a specific button image (for example, a red button image) may be displayed for a special effect effect with a red effect than for a special effect effect with a blue effect.

Also, a long-term (e.g., 4 seconds) special effect effect may be configured to have a higher expectation of a jackpot than a short-term (e.g., 2 seconds) special effect effect, or a long-term (e.g., 4 seconds) special effect effect may be configured to have a specific button image (e.g., a red button image) than a short-term (e.g., 2 seconds) special effect effect. Also, when a plurality of types of display modes of the special effect effect are provided, it may be configured so that a special effect effect with a higher expectation is more likely to be executed in the latter half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach, for example, the timing of execution of button effect D) than in the first half of the variable display (a specific timing before the reach, for example, the timing of execution of button effect B). Also, a special effect effect may not be executed in the first half of the variable display (a specific timing before the reach), and only the latter half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach) may be configured to be executed.

In addition, the possibility of executing the special effect effect may be determined by lottery, and the probability of winning in the variable display may be relatively higher when the special effect effect is executed than when the special effect effect is not executed. In addition, the longer the execution time of the special effect effect (the display time of the special effect image) is, the higher the probability of winning in the variable display may be, or a highly accurate performance indicating whether or not a win has occurred may be generated by the button operation. In this case, when the special effect effect is executed at the timing of the win/loss branch (a specific timing after the reach that is the latter half of the variable display described above, for example, the execution timing of the button performance D), it is preferable that the performance time of the special effect effect (the display time of the special effect image) is set to a longer time than the effective operation period of the performance button P15. In addition, the opposite to this configuration, the performance time of the special effect effect (the display time of the special effect image) may be set to a shorter time than the effective operation period of the performance button P15. As another modification, a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image, a red button image, a rainbow button image, a large button image, a small button image, etc.) may be prepared as the display mode of the button image. In that case, the possibility of executing a special effect and the duration of the effect when executed may be varied according to the display mode of the button image to be executed thereafter.

As a further variation, a comment preview effect can be executed (a button image can be displayed) even during one or more variable display times before the pending activation ball that is the pre-reading target is consumed (a pre-reading variable display that is a variable before the target), and the possibility of a special effect effect being executed can be lower during the execution of the pre-reading variable display than during the execution of the variable display when the pending activation ball that is the pre-reading target is consumed (the relevant variable display), and the possibility of a high-expectation special effect effect (such as a special effect effect with a red effect as described above or a long-lasting special effect effect (for example, 4 seconds)) being executed can be lower during the execution of the pre-reading variable display than during the execution of the variable display when the pending activation ball that is the pre-reading target is consumed (the relevant variable display).

As another variation, in the case where a special effect effect is not executed in the first half of the variable display (a predetermined timing before the reach, for example, the timing of executing button effect B) (or a special effect effect with low expectation is executed instead of a special effect effect with high expectation), and a special effect effect is executed in the second half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach, for example, the timing of executing button effect D) (or a special effect effect with high expectation is executed instead of a special effect effect with low expectation), the longer the period between the predetermined timing before the reach, which is the first half of the variable display, and the specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the variable display (for example, 90 seconds rather than 60 seconds), the higher the expectation of a jackpot may be, or the button image at the specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the variable display, may be configured to be an image with high expectation (for example, a red button image rather than a blue button image).

<<Button effect during initialization B>>
Next, the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the button performance B will be described. FIG. 152 is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the second button performance. Here, for the time chart of the button vibration performance at the bottom, the vibration for a predetermined time in the initialization operation of the performance button P15 is not treated as "execution". Note that, in FIG. 149, due to space limitations, a simplified screen display (a screen display that omits some displays such as small patterns and reserved images) is shown.

First, time points t41 to t44 are the same as time points t1 to t4 described above, so a duplicate explanation will be omitted. At time point 55, the initialization operation of the performance button P15, which is one of the initialization operations of the movable body, begins. When the initialization operation of this performance button P15 begins, the performance button lamp 15a lights up in a special notification mode (a mode in which it flashes in red) (it switches from an off state to a flashing red state).

Next, at time t46, while the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed, the game ball enters the first starting hole P51, thereby starting the variable display of the first special symbol. Also, a variable start command is sent from the main control board P100 to the performance control board P200, thereby starting the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the small symbol. Also, at this time t46, a performance lottery is held at the start of the variable display, and it is determined whether to execute the button performance B or the second button vibration performance. Therefore, at this time t46 (the start of the variable display),
Button effect B (operation prompting effect) is started, and operation prompting images such as button images and indicator images appear on the screen.

Next, at time t47, the effect button P15 is operated within the effective operation period. However, even if the effect button P15 is operated within this effective operation period, while the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed, that is, while the effect button lamp 15a is emitting light in a special light-emitting mode (a mode in which it flashes red), even if the effect button P15 is operated, the notification mode of the effect button lamp 15a does not change and the special notification mode continues. Also, at this time t47, by operating the effect button P15 within the effective operation period, a dialogue effect (also called a "comment preview effect") is executed in which a dialogue image saying "Chance!!" is displayed on the screen as an operation trigger effect. However, as mentioned above, the operation trigger effect (dialogue preview effect) of this button effect B is executed on the condition that effect button P15 is operated within the valid operation period, so if the valid operation period ends without effect button P15 being operated within that period, the button effect B will end without this operation trigger effect (dialogue effect) being executed.

At time t48, the initialization operation of the performance button P15, which is one of the initialization operations of the movable body, ends. When the initialization operation of this performance button P15 ends, the notification mode of the performance button lamp 15a switches from a special notification mode (flashing red light) to a predetermined notification mode (continuously lit white light). At the same time, the vibration for the predetermined period of time also ends.

At time t49, the initialization operation of the movable body is completed; that is, the initialization operation of the first movable part P651, the initialization operation of the performance button P15, and the initialization operation of the second movable part P652 are all completed. Note that at this time t49, the variable display continues.

At time t50, button effect D (operation prompt effect) starts as a win/lose branching effect, and an operation prompt image such as a button image appears on the screen. At time t51, the effect button P15 is operated (operation trigger effect), and a function effect in which the first movable role object P651 falls (moves to a movable position) and a second button vibration effect in which the effect button P15 vibrates are each executed, suggesting that the variable display is a jackpot. Note that this button effect D differs from the previously executed button effect B in that even if the effect button P15 is not operated within the operation valid period, the operation trigger effect (role object effect, second button vibration effect) will be executed when the operation valid period ends.

At time t52, the decorative symbols are provisionally displayed in a combination (jackpot) that indicates a jackpot. Then, at time t53, the provisional display of the decorative symbols ends, and the decorative symbols are definitively displayed in a combination (jackpot) that indicates a jackpot.

In this embodiment, even if the variable display starts during the initialization operation of the effect button performed immediately after power-on, the button effect B that can be performed at the start or first half of the variable display (a button effect that is relatively likely to be executed in overlap with the initialization operation) is a type of button effect that executes the operation trigger effect only when the effect button P15 is actually operated within the operation effective period (a button effect that has only button operation as the execution condition for the operation trigger effect), so that the processing load when the initialization operation of the movable body and the button effect B are executed in overlap can be reduced. Note that, as a modified example, the button effect B that can be performed at the start or first half of the variable display may be configured to be executed not only when the effect button P15 is operated within the operation effective period, but also when the operation effective period ends without the effect button P15 being operated within the operation effective period, similar to the button effect D that can be performed in the middle (after the establishment of a pseudo-link or a reach) or the latter half (after the development of an SP reach) of the variable display (a button effect that is relatively unlikely to be executed in overlap). However, in this case, it is preferable that the probability of the operation trigger effect being executed when the effect button is not operated within the valid operation period is relatively lower when button effect B is executed than when button effect D is executed (in other words, the operation trigger effect is less likely to be executed when the effect button P15 is not operated within the valid operation period when button effect B is executed than when button effect D).

<Other effects of button vibration effects>
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the button vibration effect (e.g., the first button vibration effect α, the first button vibration effect β, the second button vibration effect, the third button vibration effect, etc.) is not executed across multiple variable displays (e.g., between the current variable display and the next variable display). In other words, the button vibration effect of this embodiment is not executed when the fixed stop display of the pattern is displayed (it is not executed across the display before and after the fixed stop display), and is always completed during the execution of one variable display (before the variable display is displayed as a fixed stop).

On the other hand, when a button vibration effect (for example, the fourth button vibration effect, which is a button vibration effect executed in conjunction with the execution of a promotion effect or a consecutive win effect in a reserved game) is executed during the execution of a jackpot game, this button vibration effect is configured to be executable across multiple rounds of play (for example, between the current round of play and the next round of play). In other words, the end condition of one round of play is when the maximum opening time of the big prize winning opening P54 has elapsed, or when the entry of a specified count number of game balls is detected before this maximum opening time has elapsed, and the execution time of this one round of play is not always a fixed time value, and if the round of play ends at an early stage before the maximum opening time is reached depending on the progress of the round of play (the state of game balls entering the big prize winning opening P54), the button vibration effect can be executed across multiple rounds of play. However, this button vibration effect is not executed continuously from the first round of the jackpot game (first round) to the final round of the jackpot game (last round). Also, this button vibration effect is executed for a time shorter than the maximum opening time of the jackpot opening P54.

In addition, during the display of the decorative pattern changes, the button vibration effect is not executed during the execution (at least at the start of execution) of the aforementioned temporary stop operation and reach establishment operation in order to draw attention to the display mode (reach mode) of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern. However, during the execution (at least at the start of execution) of the change start operation, the first button vibration effect α can be executed to further liven up the change start operation, and during the shaking operation (at least at the start of execution), the first button vibration effect β, the second button vibration effect, and the third button vibration effect can be executed to prevent the shaking operation from becoming monotonous. However, the button vibration effect is not executed during the execution of the shaking operation, which may be executed between the stop of the change and the display of the standby demo effect.

In addition, even if the light amount is adjusted during the execution of the button vibration performance, the light amount of the specific notification mode (continuous lighting in red light color) or special notification mode (continuous lighting in rainbow light color) of the performance button lamp 15a accompanying the execution of the button vibration performance does not change (is not adjusted), but the light amount of the board lamp P25 provided on the game board P20 (center decoration P21) accompanying the execution of the button vibration performance that continuously lights up in red or rainbow light color changes (adjusts). Note that, as a modified example, when the light amount is adjusted during the execution of the button vibration performance, the light amount of the specific notification mode (continuous lighting in red light color) or special notification mode (continuous lighting in rainbow light color) of the performance button lamp 15a accompanying the execution of the button vibration performance and the light amount of the board lamp P25 provided on the game board P20 (center decoration P21) accompanying the execution of the button vibration performance that continuously lights up in red or rainbow light color may also be changed (adjusted). However, when adjusting the light intensity during the initialization operation (vibration) of the effect button P15, the light intensity of the special notification mode (flashing red light) of the effect button lamp 15a accompanying the initialization operation (vibration) of the effect button P15 does not change (is not adjusted).

In addition, if the button image when button effect D during a jackpot fluctuation is executed is the aforementioned blue button image, the second button vibration effect may be executed or the third button vibration effect may be executed, whereas if it is a red button image or a rainbow button image, which have a higher jackpot expectation than a blue button image, only the second button vibration effect is executed (or, the second button vibration effect is more likely to be executed and the third button vibration effect is less likely to be executed than when the button image is a blue button image).

<Initialization operation according to the transition mode when power is turned on>
In addition, the gaming machine of this embodiment is configured so that the timing of executing the initialization operation of the movable bodies (movable gimmicks and effect buttons) can differ depending on the transition mode when the power is turned on.

First, when the transition mode when the gaming machine is turned on is the game mode (see the fifth embodiment), that is, when the power is turned on (the power switch is turned ON) with the setting key switch P810 turned OFF and the RAM clear switch P820 turned OFF, the initialization operation of the movable body is executed at approximately the same time that the display of the performance display device P70 switches from the recovery screen to the normal screen.

When the transition mode when the gaming machine is turned on is the setting change mode (see the fifth embodiment), that is, when the power is turned on (the power switch is turned ON) with the setting key switch P810 turned ON and the RAM clear switch P820 turned ON, the initialization operation of the movable body is not executed while the setting change mode is being executed. In other words, while the setting change mode is being executed, a setting change screen is displayed on the performance display device P70 to notify the user that a setting change is being executed, and the initialization operation of the movable body is not executed so as not to impair the visibility of the setting change screen. Then, after the setting change mode is ended by switching the setting key switch P810 OFF, the initialization operation of the movable body is executed.

When the transition mode when the gaming machine is turned on is the setting check mode (see the fifth embodiment), that is, when the power is turned on (the power switch is turned ON) with the setting key switch P810 ON and the RAM clear switch P820 OFF, the initialization operation of the movable body is not executed while the setting check mode is being executed. In other words, while the setting check mode is being executed, a setting check screen is displayed on the performance display device P70 to notify the player that the setting check is being executed, and the initialization operation of the movable body is not executed so as not to impair the visibility of the setting check screen. Then, after the setting key switch P810 is switched OFF and the setting check mode is ended, the initialization operation of the movable body is executed.

When the transition mode when the gaming machine is turned on is the RAM clear mode (see the fifth embodiment), that is, when the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned on) with the setting key switch P810 turned off and the RAM clear switch P820 pressed (turned on), the RAM clear process (the process of initializing a predetermined storage area of the RAM P103 mounted on the main control microcomputer P110) is executed, and the initialization operation of the movable body is executed at approximately the same time as the display of the performance display device switches from the recovery screen to the normal screen. Note that in this embodiment, even if the transition operation to the RAM clear mode is performed, if the setting key switch P810 is switched to ON within a predetermined grace period (for example, within one second) from the time of power-on or the transition to the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode is transitioned to. During the execution of this setting confirmation mode, as described above, a setting confirmation screen is displayed on the performance display device P70 to prompt the user that the setting is being confirmed, and the initialization operation of the movable body is not executed in order not to impair the visibility of the setting confirmation screen. Then, the setting key switch P810 is switched to OFF, and the setting change mode is terminated, and the initialization operation of the movable body is executed. The "predetermined grace period" is the time from when the power is turned on to when the process for checking the operation state (ON/OFF) of the setting change switch P810 is executed. For example, the period during which the recovery screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on may be set within the predetermined grace period, so that the setting change mode can be entered by turning on the setting key switch P810 while the recovery screen is displayed. In that case, it is preferable that the setting change mode is not entered even if the setting key switch P810 is turned on after the predetermined grace period ends when the recovery screen is switched to the normal screen. In addition, it is preferable to set the end of the predetermined grace period before the start of the initialization operation of the movable body, and this can prevent a malfunction in which the setting change mode is entered after the initialization operation is started (a situation in which the initialization operation of the movable body is performed during the execution of the setting change mode).

[Left-handed hit notification]
Next, the left hit notification effect will be described. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a left hit game in which the player advances the game by aiming at the left area PA1, and a right hit game in which the player advances the game by aiming at the right area PA2 are configured to be executable according to the currently executed game state. At this time, if the currently executed game state is a low base state (excluding the special game state), that is, if the game state is a game state in which the variable display of the first special pattern is the main focus of the game (a game state in which left hitting is advantageous), the left hit notification effect can be executed. This left hit notification effect is an effect that displays a left hit notification image that encourages the game ball to be launched toward the left area PA1. Note that, in this embodiment, if the currently executed game state is a high base state, that is, if the game state is a game state in which the variable display of the second special pattern is the main focus of the game (a game state in which right hitting is advantageous), the right hit notification effect can be executed. In addition, even during execution of the special game state, the right hit notification effect can be executed. This right-hit notification effect is an effect that displays a right-hit notification image that encourages the player to launch the game ball toward the right-side area PA2.

Figure 153 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display of a left-hit notification image. In the illustrated example, the display screen transitions in the following order: (A) immediately before the end of the high base state (final fluctuation display of the high base state) → (B) start of the low base state (while the pattern is stopped after the end of the final fluctuation display of the high base state and before the start of the first rotation fluctuation display of the low base state) → (C) first rotation fluctuation display in the low base state. As shown in (C) in this figure, the left-hit notification image (left-hit notification display) is composed of a combination image of, for example, a text image (text display) saying "Please hit left" and a left-pointing arrow image (arrow display). During the execution of this left-hit notification performance, in addition to the display of the left-hit notification image, a left-hit notification sound (for example, a voice saying "Please hit left") may be output from the speaker to encourage the player to hit left.

In this embodiment, when the game state is a low base state (low base state during non-jackpot), the display of the left hit notification image and the display of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern during variable display, decorative pattern during temporary stop display, decorative pattern during fixed stop display) can be overlapped during the execution of the left hit notification performance. When the display of the left hit notification image and the display of the decorative pattern are overlapped, in order to increase the effectiveness of the left hit notification for the player (to ensure the visibility of the left hit notification image), the priority (layer priority) of the display of the left hit notification image is set to a higher priority (higher priority) than the priority (layer priority) of the display of the decorative pattern. Note that "overlapping display" means that the display of one image and the display of the other image are overlapped and displayed. When the display priority of the other image is higher than the display of the one image, at least a part of the display of the one image is invisible or the visibility is reduced due to the presence of the display of the other image, and when the display priority of the other image is lower than the display of the one image, at least a part of the display of the other image is invisible or the visibility is reduced due to the presence of the display of the one image. In addition, in order to ensure the visibility of the decorative pattern, the left-hit notification image may be formed using a semi-transparent image.

Meanwhile, while this left-hit notification performance is being executed, the display of the left-hit notification image, the display of the small pattern, the reserved image and the changing image, and the display of the number of reserved balls in operation for each special pattern are configured not to overlap. As a result, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern is obstructed by the left-hit notification image, the visibility of the small pattern, the reserved image, the changing image, and the display of the number of reserved balls in operation for each special pattern is ensured, so the player can properly recognize the current game situation (changing display, stopped display, number of reserved balls in operation, etc.).

When this gaming machine is viewed from the front, the display area of the left-hit notification image overlaps at least partially with the operating area (operating range) of the initialization operation of the first movable role P651, but while the initialization operation of this first movable role P651 is being performed, the execution of the left-hit notification performance (display of the left-hit notification image) is regulated (the initialization operation of the movable body is prioritized). For example, when the final variable display of the high base state ends and the remaining operation reserved balls of the first special pattern are consumed, the variable display of the first rotation of the low base state begins, and a power outage occurs immediately after the execution of the left-hit notification performance (display of the left-hit notification image) begins, and when the power is restored and the initialization operation of the movable body is performed, the execution of the left-hit notification performance (display of the left-hit notification image) is interrupted. Or, during a waiting state (non-changing state) where no change display is being performed and there are no activated reserved balls of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, a game ball enters the first starting hole P51, starting the display of the first special pattern change, and a power outage occurs while the left-hit notification effect is being executed (display of a left-hit notification image), and when the power is restored and the initialization operation of the movable body is executed, the execution of the left-hit notification effect (display of a left-hit notification image) is interrupted. However, if the timing for executing the left-hit notification effect (the timing for executing the display of the change display for the first rotation in the low base state) arrives during the execution of the initialization operation of the first movable role P651, the left-hit notification effect (display of a left-hit notification image) may be configured to be executed. For example, if a power outage occurs during the final variable display in the high base state, and while the power is restored and the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed, the final variable display in the high base state ends, and the remaining activation reserved balls of the first special pattern are consumed, starting the variable display for the first rotation in the low base state, the execution of the left-hit notification performance (display of a left-hit notification image) may be performed simultaneously in parallel with the initialization operation of the movable body.

Next, the timing of execution of the left-hand hit notification effect will be described. FIG. 154 is a time chart for explaining the timing of execution of the left-hand hit notification effect. In the following description, the case where the game state transitions from a high base state to a low base state includes the case where the game state transitions from a time-saving game state (low probability high base state) to a normal game state (low probability low base state) and the case where the game state transitions from a probability-changing game state (high probability high base state) to a normal game state (low probability low base state). In addition, the case where the game state transitions from a time-saving game state (low probability high base state) or a probability-changing game state (high probability high base state) to a normal game state (low probability low base state) is the case where the number of variable displays (the total number of variable displays of the first special pattern and the second special pattern) in the time-saving game state (low probability high base state) or the probability-changing game state (high probability high base state) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). That is, when the total number of times the first special symbol changes and the second special symbol changes in the display reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 100 times) in the time-saving game state (low probability, high base state) or the guaranteed bonus game state (high probability, high base state), the game state ends and transitions to the normal game state (low probability, low base state).

In addition, in this embodiment, the high base state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state) is exemplified as a game state in which right-hand play is performed, but in addition to the high base state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), the game state in which right-hand play is performed also includes a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) is being performed. The configuration of the left-hand hit notification effect of this embodiment can also be applied to the case where the special game state is transitioned to the normal game state. However, since this special game state belongs to the low base state, when transitioning from the special game state to the normal game state, it is different from the transition from the high base state to the low base state in that the transition is from a low base state during a jackpot to a low base state during a non-jackpot (the transition is between low base states).

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 154, when a game state (high base state) in which the main focus of the game is the changing display of the second special pattern is transitioned to a game state (low base state) in which the main focus of the game is the changing display of the first special pattern, the left-hit notification display is configured to be able to be executed from the start of the changing display of the first spin in this low base state. The first rotation of the low base state is represented as follows: (a) if only the first special symbol activation ball remains at the end of the high base state before the transition, the first special symbol activation ball (the first special symbol activation ball) is consumed, resulting in a "first special symbol activation display"; (b) if only the second special symbol activation ball remains at the end of the high base state before the transition, the second special symbol activation ball (the first special symbol activation ball) is consumed, resulting in a "second special symbol activation display"; (c) if both the first special symbol activation ball and the second special symbol activation ball remain at the end of the high base state before the transition, the second special symbol activation ball (the first special symbol activation ball) is consumed under the special symbol 2 priority consumption. The illustrated example in FIG. 154 illustrates a case where only the first special symbol activation ball remains at the end of the high base state. On the other hand, if there are no pending activated balls of the first special pattern or the second special pattern remaining at the end of the high base state before the transition (if both pending activated balls are zero), the left-hand hit notification effect will be executed for a predetermined time from the start of the high base state (i.e., the left-hand hit notification effect will start in the change waiting state (non-changing state) where there are zero pending activated balls of each special pattern).

This left-hit notification effect ends when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first rotation change display (or the start of the low base state). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 seconds, which is set to a relatively shorter time than the change time of the non-reach type (change time of the shortened change, 7 seconds, and the normal change, 12 seconds, described later). Here, when the game state is in the low base state, the lottery process for the special symbol change pattern is set to select a change pattern with a relatively short change time of the special symbol (change pattern of shortened change, change pattern of normal change) more easily than a change pattern with a relatively long change time of the special symbol (change pattern of N reach, change pattern of SP reach) (for example, as in the second embodiment described above, the selection rate of the change pattern of shortened change and normal change is set to a high probability of 80%), and the left-hit notification effect is configured to be able to be executed over multiple change displays (the possibility of the left-hit notification effect being executed over multiple change displays is extremely high).

In this embodiment, even if the first rotation of the low base state is a specific variable display, the left hit notification effect is not executed in the second rotation and subsequent rotations. In other words, when the first rotation of the low base state is a specific variable display, the left hit notification effect is executed until the middle of the first rotation of the variable display (from the start of the variable display to the arrival of the above-mentioned predetermined time), but is not executed over multiple variable displays. This specific variable display is a variable display in which the variable time of the special pattern is set to a relatively long time, that is, a variable display in which the variable time of the special pattern is set to be longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, and examples of such a variable display include a super long variable display and a variable display of an SP reach. In addition, the specific variable display can also include a variable display of a jackpot. In other words, when the first rotation of the low base state is a variable display of a jackpot, the game will move to a jackpot game after the first rotation of the variable display ends, and no variable display will occur in the second rotation and subsequent rotations that are consecutive to the first rotation in the currently executed low base state. In addition, after the jackpot fluctuation display ends, the game transitions to a jackpot game that is mainly played by hitting to the right, and after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a high base state, and the first spin's fluctuation display after the jackpot game ends may also be in a situation where a right-hit is required (because there is little need to perform a left-hit notification performance in the first place).

Next, a case where a power outage occurs during the execution of the left-hit notification effect will be described. FIG. 155 is a time chart when a power outage occurs during the execution of the left-hit notification effect. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 155, when the game state is in a low base state, the left-hit notification image can be displayed from the start of the variable display of the first rotation, but if a power outage occurs during the execution of the variable display of the first rotation, the left-hit notification effect is not resumed in the variable display performed after the power outage is restored (the left-hit notification image is not displayed). In other words, even if the variable display of the first rotation (the variable display of the first rotation interrupted by the power outage) is resumed after the power outage is restored, the left-hit notification effect is not resumed in the variable display of the resumed first rotation, and even if the variable display of the second rotation or later is performed, the left-hit notification effect is not executed. The reason for this is that after the power is restored after a power outage, it is appropriate to treat the game as being in a low base state from the beginning, without displaying any effects indicating a transition from a high base state to a low base state (such as a "Start normal mode" display) (for example, if the hall operator turns off the power when closing and restores the power when the hall opens the next business day, there is no need to take into account the game state immediately before the power outage).

On the other hand, if a power outage occurs during the final display of the high base state, and the display of the final display resumes after the power outage is restored, resulting in a transition from the high base state to the low base state, the left-hit notification effect can be executed from the start of the first rotation of the display of the low base state (the left-hit notification effect can be executed over multiple display cycles). This is because, if a power outage occurs during the final display of the high base state and the power outage is restored, it is certain that the high base state is still continuing, so in the final display of the resumed high base state, the display of the right-hit notification image is resumed to inform the player of information regarding the appropriate launch position, and then, by informing the player that the high base state has ended and the appropriate launch position has been switched, the game progress (change in situation) can be appropriately notified even if a power outage occurs.

As a modified example of this embodiment, if a power outage occurs during the execution of the final fluctuation display in the high base state, and the final fluctuation display resumes after the power outage is restored and ends, resulting in a transition from the high base state to the low base state, the left-hit notification display is not executed during the execution of the first rotation fluctuation display in the low base state, but the left-hit notification display may be executed at the start of the fluctuation display for a specified rotation in the low base state (for example, the second rotation fluctuation display), or when a specific time has elapsed since the transition to the low base state. Furthermore, when a power failure occurs during the execution of the final display of the high base state, the possibility of executing the left-hit notification in the low base state or the execution timing may be changed according to the remaining time of the final display of the fluctuation (the remaining time of the final display of the fluctuation that has not yet been executed at the time of the power failure). For example, when the remaining time of the final display of the fluctuation is a specified time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) or more, the left-hit notification effect may be executed from the first rotation of the fluctuation display in the low base state, and when the remaining time of the final display of the fluctuation is less than the specified time, the left-hit notification effect may not be executed from the first rotation of the fluctuation display in the low base state, and the left-hit notification effect may be executed from the second rotation of the fluctuation display. Also, for example, when the remaining time of the final display of the fluctuation is a specified time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) or more, the left-hit notification effect may be executed from the first rotation of the fluctuation display in the low base state, and when the remaining time of the final display of the fluctuation is less than the specified time, the left-hit notification effect may not be executed while staying in the low base state. In addition, if a power outage occurs during the execution of the final variable display in the high base state, even if there is a transition from this high base state to a low base state, the left-hit notification display may not be executed while remaining in the low base state.

In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, when the game state transitions from a high base state to a low base state, if there are still any activated reserved balls of the second special pattern stored at the end of the high base state remaining, the left-hit notification effect may be made executable on the condition that all activated reserved balls of the second special pattern have been consumed after the transition to the low base state.

In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, when a transition is made from a high base state to a low base state, a left-hit notification effect may be executed for a certain period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) from the start of each variable display for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 4 times) starting from the start of this low base state. In other words, the left-hit notification effect may be executed only for the first few rotations of the variable display in the low base state, for a few seconds from the start of the variable display. With this configuration, the left-hit notification effect can be executed in units of the number of variable displays rather than in units of time, making it possible to execute a more effective notification effect for the player.

<<Prediction after the electric support ends>>
Next, the look-ahead performance after transitioning from the high base state to the low base state will be described. FIG. 156 is a time chart for explaining the look-ahead performance after transitioning to the low base state. In the following description, the activation reserved ball that triggers the execution of the look-ahead performance is also called the "target activation reserved ball", and the activation reserved ball consumed before the target activation reserved ball is also called the "target activation reserved ball". In addition, the reserved image corresponding to the target activation reserved ball is also called the "target reserved image", and the reserved image corresponding to the target activation reserved ball is also called the "target reserved image". In addition, the changing image displayed when the target activation reserved ball is consumed is also called the "target changing image", and the changing image displayed when the target activation reserved ball is consumed is also called the "target changing image". In addition, the changing display executed when the target activation reserved ball is consumed is also called the "target changing display", and the changing display executed when the target activation reserved ball is consumed is also called the "target changing display".

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the game state in the currently executing variable display is a low base state (when the variable display of the first special pattern is the game state that is the main focus of the game), a look-ahead performance can be executed during the variable display of the activated reserved ball of the first special pattern, but a look-ahead performance is not executed during the variable display of the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern. On the other hand, when the game state in the currently executing variable display is a high base state (when the variable display of the second special pattern is the game state that is the main focus of the game), a look-ahead performance can be executed during the variable display of the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern, but a look-ahead performance is not executed during the variable display of the activated reserved ball of the first special pattern.

Here, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 156, when the game state transitions from the high base state to the low base state, if the first special symbol activation reserved ball is stored at the start of the first rotation variable display in this low base state (i.e., the start of the left hit notification performance), the reserved change performance, which is at least a specific pre-reading performance, is configured not to be executed until all the first special symbol activation reserved balls are consumed (referred to as the "specific period"). When the first special symbol activation reserved ball is stored at the start of the first rotation variable display in this low base state (the start of the left hit notification performance), it is typically when the first special symbol activation reserved ball remains at the end of the high base state before the transition. And even after transitioning to the low base state, the specific pre-reading performance is not executed for the period (specific period) from the high base state until all the first special symbol activation reserved balls remaining are consumed. In addition, FIG. 156 illustrates a case where "three" activation reserved balls of the first special pattern remain at the start of the low base state (at the start of the left hit notification performance), and the specific pre-reading performance will not be executed until all three activation reserved balls of the first special pattern are consumed (specific period). In addition, if both the activation reserved ball of the first special pattern and the activation reserved ball of the second special pattern are stored at the end of the high base state before the transition, the period until all the activation reserved balls of the second special pattern are consumed under the above-mentioned special pattern 2 priority consumption and all the activation reserved balls of the first special pattern are consumed corresponds to the specific period. In addition, the specific period may be the period until all the activation reserved balls of the first special pattern remaining from the high base state are consumed and all the variable displays executed due to the consumption are terminated (stopped display).

On the other hand, after the specific period of the low base state has ended (after all remaining activated balls of the first special pattern at the start of the left-hand hit notification performance have been consumed), it becomes possible to execute a specific look-ahead performance with the activated ball of the first special pattern (i.e., the activated ball of the first special pattern newly generated during the execution of this low base state) as the target activated ball. The look-ahead judgment to determine whether or not to execute this specific look-ahead performance is performed on the performance control board P200 side based on the advance judgment result from the main control board P100 side, as described above.

The reason why a specific pre-reading effect is not executed during a specific period in a low base state is as follows. First, when the variable display of the first rotation of the low base state starts, the case where the activation pending ball of the first special symbol is stored includes, for example, (A) the case where the activation pending ball of the first special symbol that occurred during the execution of the high base state in which the player was present before the transition to the low base state was not consumed by the end of this high base state, and (B) the case where the player was present in the low base state (the previous low base state) before the transition to the high base state, and the activation pending ball of the first special symbol that occurred during the execution of this low base state (the previous low base state) was not consumed thereafter and transitioned to the high base state, and was not consumed by the end of this high base state.

In the former case (A), even if an activated ball of the first special pattern is generated during the execution of the high base state (a game state in which the variable display of the second special pattern is the main focus of the game), the activated ball of the first special pattern is not subject to pre-judgment, and a pre-judgment command corresponding to the activated ball of the first special pattern is not sent from the main control board P100 to the performance control board P200. Therefore, there is no pre-judgment result for the activated ball of the first special pattern in the first place, and the pre-reading performance cannot be executed with the activated ball of the first special pattern as the target activated ball. In addition, when the high base state ends and the low base state begins, no pre-judgment is performed on the activated ball of the first special pattern obtained during the execution of the high base state after the low base state begins (to prevent an increase in the processing load).

In the latter case (B), even if an activated ball with the first special pattern was obtained in the previous low base state, when the previous low base state is transitioned to a high base state, all pre-determination results for the activated ball with the first special pattern remaining from the previous low base state are cleared, so even if the current low base state is subsequently transitioned to, there will be no pre-determination results for the activated ball with the first special pattern, and the pre-reading performance cannot be executed with the activated ball with the first special pattern as the target activated ball.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a new first special symbol activation reserved ball is generated by a game ball entering the first starting hole P51 during a specific period immediately after the transition to the low base state, a pre-determination result is obtained for this new first special symbol activation reserved ball, but during the specific period, the execution of a specific pre-reading performance based on this pre-determination result (pre-determination result of the new first special symbol activation reserved ball) is also restricted. The reason for this is that in both the former (A) and the latter (B) cases, pre-determination is not performed for the first special symbol activation reserved ball (also referred to as "first special symbol remaining reserved") that remains when the high base state ends and the low base state begins (remains at the end of the high base state), so even if the change display executed by the first special symbol remaining reserved being consumed is a jackpot change or a change that develops into an SP reach, it is a situation in which it cannot be notified in advance as a specific pre-reading performance. Therefore, even if the change display executed by the first special symbol remaining reserved being consumed is a jackpot change or a change that develops into an SP reach, the change display executed by the first special symbol remaining reserved being consumed is not notified in advance as a specific pre-reading performance. If the display is a jackpot fluctuation or a fluctuation that develops into an SP reach, even if a specific pre-reading performance is executed targeting the new activated reserved ball of the first special pattern that is generated when the game ball enters the first starting hole P51 during the specific period immediately after the transition to the low base state, a jackpot or SP reach occurs in the fluctuation display before the activated reserved ball of the new first special pattern is consumed (the fluctuation display executed when the remaining reserved first special pattern is consumed), so it is not possible to execute an appropriate pre-reading performance (it is unclear which activated reserved ball is the target activated reserved ball). In addition, the lottery for determining whether or not an action effect (hold change suggestion effect) described below can be executed is executed on the condition that the pre-determination results of the activated pending balls in front of the target are all non-reach type (shortened change or normal change) change patterns. However, if the first special pattern remaining hold is an activated pending ball in front of the target, there are no pre-determination results of those activated pending balls, so the conditions for executing the hold change suggestion effect are not met (it is unclear whether the pre-determination results of the activated pending balls in front of the target are all non-reach type (shortened change or normal change) change patterns), and the action effect (hold change suggestion effect) cannot be executed.

As a variation of this embodiment, even during a specific period immediately after transitioning to a low base state, if a new activated reserved ball of the first special pattern is generated during this specific period, a specific look-ahead performance may be executed with the new activated reserved ball of the first special pattern as the target activated reserved ball during this specific period. Also, in this embodiment, the execution of a specific look-ahead performance (reserved change performance) among multiple types of look-ahead performances is prohibited, but this is not limited to the configuration, and the execution of all look-ahead performances may be prohibited.

Next, we will explain the content of the specific look-ahead effect mentioned above. This specific look-ahead effect includes a hold change effect (hold change look-ahead effect) that changes the display mode of the hold image or the changing image, and a hold change suggestion effect that suggests that this hold change effect (hold change look-ahead effect) will be executed.

[Hold change effect]
First, the reserved change performance of this embodiment will be described. This reserved change performance is a pre-reading performance that suggests or notifies the possibility of a jackpot occurring in the change display (target change display) when the target reserved ball is consumed by changing the display mode of the reserved image or the changing image corresponding to the operating reserved ball (target operating reserved ball) that was the subject of the pre-reading lottery to a different display mode. In this embodiment, the reserved change performance includes a reserved image change performance that changes the reserved image displayed in the reserved image display area P710, and a changing image change performance that changes the changing image displayed in the changing image display area P720. In the following, the two are simply called reserved change performance without distinguishing between them, but the reserved change performance that changes the reserved image may be called reserved image change performance as described above, and the reserved change performance that changes the changing image may be called changing image change performance as described above. The pending image and the changing image are display contents that suggest that a change is scheduled or is currently occurring, so both may be collectively referred to as the "change suggestion display," the pending image may be referred to as the "change suggestion display before the change start condition is satisfied," and the changing image may be referred to as the "change suggestion display after the change start condition is satisfied." In addition, both the pending image change effect and the changing image change effect may be collectively referred to as the "change suggestion effect."

Figure 157 is a schematic diagram for explaining the reserved image display area P710 and the changing image display area P720 of this embodiment. As described above, the lower area of the display screen of the performance display device P70 is provided with a reserved image display area P710 for displaying reserved images corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the special pattern. In the reserved image display area P710, a reserved image corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the special pattern that is the main subject of the game in the currently executed game state, out of the activated reserved balls of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, is displayed. In other words, when the currently executed game state is a low base state (normal game state), the variable display of the first special pattern is the main subject of the game, so that the reserved image corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the first special pattern is displayed (the reserved image corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern is not displayed). On the other hand, if the currently active game state is a high base state (time-saving game state or probability change game state), the main focus of the game is the display of the second special symbol's variable movement, so a reserved image corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the second special symbol is displayed (a reserved image corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the first special symbol is not displayed). However, whether in a low base state or a high base state, the number of activated reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of activated reserved balls of the second special symbol can be displayed simultaneously in the reserved number display area P740. Note that each reserved image is displayed in order according to the order in which the activated reserved balls of the special symbols occur (ball entry order).

The reserved image display area P710 has four individual reserved image display areas P711 to P714 corresponding to the maximum number of activated reserved balls for each special pattern. The individual reserved image display area P711 corresponds to the reserved image of Reserve 1 (first reserved ball), the individual reserved image display area P712 corresponds to the reserved image of Reserve 2 (second reserved ball), the individual reserved image display area P713 corresponds to the reserved image of Reserve 3 (third reserved ball), and the individual reserved image display area P714 corresponds to the reserved image of Reserve 4 (fourth reserved ball). The individual reserved image display areas P711 to P714 are each configured as display areas of the same size, and each is capable of displaying one reserved image.

On the left side of the reserved image display area P710, a changing image display area P720 is provided for displaying a changing image corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the special pattern consumed in the changing display. In the changing image display area P720, a changing image corresponding to the changing display of the special pattern that is the main subject of the game in the currently executed game state out of the changing display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is displayed. In other words, when the currently executed game state is a low base state (normal game state), the changing display of the first special pattern is the main subject of the game, so a changing image corresponding to the changing display of the first special pattern is displayed. On the other hand, when the currently executed game state is a low base state (time-saving game state or probability change game state), the changing display of the second special pattern is the main subject of the game, so a changing image corresponding to the changing display of the second special pattern is displayed. This changing image display area P720 is configured as a display area of a size larger than the individual reserved image display areas P711 to P714. In other words, the image display size of the changing image is larger than that of the pending image.

In the reserved image display area P710, each time an activated reserved ball of a special pattern is stored, a reserved image is additionally displayed one by one in sequence from the individual reserved image display area P711 on the left. Also, each time an activated reserved ball of a special pattern is consumed, the image in the changing image display area P720 disappears, and the reserved images displayed in the individual reserved image display areas P711 to P714 move one by one to the image display area on the left. Here, the reserved images displayed in the individual reserved image display areas P711 to P714 are consumed in order from the left, and when the first reserved image (reserved image of reserved 1) displayed in the individual reserved image display area P711 is consumed, the reserved image moves to the changing image display area P720 and is displayed as a changing image corresponding to the variable display, and continues to be displayed until the variable display ends. However, after the development of a specific performance such as SP reach during the execution of the variable display, the reserved image and the changing image may be hidden, and in that case, the end of the specific performance is triggered (the background performance (background image) before the development of SP reach, as an example, the return to the background performance (background image) corresponding to the normal mode if the player is in normal mode), and the reserved image and the changing image are displayed again, and the display of the changing image is terminated as a result of the end of the variable display, while the reserved image continues to be displayed (shifted to the left) even after the variable display ends. Also, as a modified example, the reserved image and the changing image may be continuously displayed even in a situation where a specific performance is occurring, such as after the development of SP reach, and in that case, the display of the changing image is terminated as a result of the end of the variable display, while the reserved image continues to be displayed (shifted to the left) even after the variable display ends. As another variation, when a specific effect is occurring, such as after the development into an SP reach, the pending image may be hidden, while the changing image may continue to be displayed. In that case, the pending image may be displayed again upon the end of the specific effect (the background effect (background image) before the development into an SP reach; as an example, if in normal mode, upon a return to the background effect (background image) corresponding to the normal mode), and the display of the changing image may be terminated upon the end of the changing display, while the pending image may continue to be displayed (shifted to the left) even after the changing display has ended.

<<Pending image/changing image>>
158(A) is a schematic diagram for explaining the reserved image and the changing image. The reserved image and the changing image of this embodiment are composed of a ball icon imitating a spherical shape such as a planet such as the earth or a ball for a ball game. In addition, a "normal display mode" and a "special display mode" are set as the display mode of the reserved image and the changing image.

(Normal display mode)
The normal display mode is a display mode in which the display color of the ball icon is white.

(Special display mode)
Special display mode 1 is a display mode in which the display color of the ball icon is blue. Special display mode 2 is a display mode in which the display color of the ball icon is green. Special display mode 3 is a display mode in which the display color of the ball icon is red. Special display mode 4 is a display mode in which the display color of the ball icon is rainbow.

In this embodiment, five display modes are set for the pending image and the changing image: normal display mode, special display mode 1, special display mode 2, special display mode 3, and special display mode 4. For ease of explanation, the normal display mode will be referred to as the "white icon," special display mode 1 as the "blue icon," special display mode 2 as the "green icon," special display mode 3 as the "red icon," and special display mode 4 as the "rainbow icon." In the drawings, the five display modes of "white," "blue," "green," "red," and "rainbow" are represented by adding the names of the colors within the pending image or the changing image. That is, on the drawings, the word "white" is used to represent the reserved image and changing image of a white icon, the word "blue" is used to represent the reserved image and changing image of a blue icon, the word "green" is used to represent the reserved image and changing image of a green icon, the word "red" is used to represent the reserved image and changing image of a red icon, and the word "rainbow" is used to represent the reserved image and changing image of a rainbow icon.

Here, the display mode of the reserved image and the changing image is related to the expectation that the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation), and is set so that the jackpot expectation increases by one step in the order of "white icon"<"blueicon"<"greenicon"<"redicon"<"rainbowicon". In other words, when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern is "jackpot", the reserved image or changing image with a display mode with a high jackpot expectation is more likely to be displayed than when it is "miss". In addition, the "rainbow icon" means a premium display mode in which a jackpot win is certain. Therefore, when a reserved image of the "rainbow icon" appears or changes to a reserved image of "rainbow", it is guaranteed that the jackpot will be won in the changing display corresponding to that reserved image. In addition, the display mode of the reserved image and the changing image may be expressed not by the display color but by, for example, the shape, size, pattern, action (animation), etc.

In addition, this embodiment is configured to be capable of executing an animation effect in which the pending image or the changing image is displayed as a dynamic image (also referred to as a "motion display," "animation display," or "loop display"). Note that the animation effect of the pending image and the changing image does not need to be composed entirely of dynamic images, and part of the animation effect may include static images (still images).

The image control board P300 stores video data for displaying the pending image and the changing image in motion (animation display). The playback time of this video data is, for example, 0.5 seconds, and is composed of video data that records continuous motion from the first image to the last image. By repeatedly playing (loop playback) this 0.5-second video data, an animation performance is performed in which the pending image or the changing image repeats a predetermined motion display (animation display). In other words, the period of the motion display (animation display) of the pending image and the changing image is set to "0.5 seconds" corresponding to the playback time of the video data. In this embodiment, the movement of the pending image between each image display area as the pending image is consumed is called "shift display", and the motion (including deformation) of the pending image or the changing image in each image display area is called "motion display", "animation display", or "loop display". However, the pending image or the changing image may be displayed in motion beyond each image display area, and adjacent pending images, or the pending image and the changing image, may be displayed in motion in a display mode in which at least a part of them are overlapped one on the other.

Figure 158 (B) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the motion display (animation display) of the pending image and the changing image. This animation display is a performance in which the dynamic display of the pending image and the changing image is repeated for one cycle from when the pending image and the changing image start to when they finish a predetermined motion (until a series of movements from the beginning to the end of the predetermined motion is completed). In this embodiment, the animation display of the pending image and the changing image is configured as a rotation display in which the pending image and the changing image rotate around a vertical axis. As described above, the period of the motion display (i.e. the playback time of the video data) is set to "0.5 seconds," and the rotation display (360-degree rotation display) is repeated for one cycle of "0.5 seconds."

The reserved image and the changing image are set with a reference motion posture (first image of the video data) as a starting point for starting the motion display (animation display). When the decorative pattern starts to change, the motion display starts with this reference motion posture as a starting point, and the motion display is repeated (looped) from the reference motion posture every time a predetermined period (0.5 seconds) is reached. On the other hand, the motion display of the reserved image and the changing image is forcibly ended with the end of the decorative pattern change. Then, with the start of the next decorative pattern change, the reserved image and the changing image are switched to the reference motion posture, and the motion display starts with this reference motion posture as a starting point (looped). When a new reserved image is displayed, the motion display starts with the reference motion posture as a starting point, regardless of the motion display of the existing reserved image and the changing image. In other words, except when the existing reserved image and the changing image are set to the reference motion posture, the motion display of the new reserved image and the motion display of the existing reserved image and the changing image are not synchronized with each other, and a deviation occurs in the motion postures of each other. However, the motion display of the new reserved image and the motion display of the existing reserved image and changing image will be synchronized with each other when the next changing display is started. In this modified example, the "synchronization" of the motion display means that the timing at which the motion display of each reserved image and changing image becomes the reference motion posture is the same. In other words, assuming that the motion cycle of each reserved image and changing image is the same, each reserved image and changing image can take the same motion posture at any timing during the motion display. In addition, in this embodiment, the motion display of the reserved image and changing image is started when the decorative pattern changing display is started, and the motion display of the reserved image and changing image is ended (forced stop) when the decorative pattern changing display is ended, but this is not limited to this configuration, and the motion display of the reserved image and changing image may be continuously executed regardless of the start and end of the decorative pattern changing display. In other words, the display of the reserved image and the image being changed may be continued without being terminated (forced to stop) when the display of the decorative pattern is terminated, so that the display of the reserved image and the image being changed is connected continuously (seamlessly) without interruption between the display of the decorative pattern changes. In that case, when a new reserved image is displayed due to a start winning, it is preferable that the display of the new reserved image be started in a form synchronized with the display of the existing reserved image and the image being changed. In addition, when the display of the reserved image and the image being changed is continued regardless of the start and end of the display of the decorative pattern changes, it is preferable to continue the display of the reserved image even when the reserved image shifts to the left as the reserved image is consumed. However, the display of the reserved image may be stopped only while the reserved image shifts to the left as the reserved image is consumed, and the display of the reserved image may be resumed after the reserved image shifts.

<<Hold change indication performance>>
Next, the hold change suggestion effect (also referred to as "change suggestion effect") will be described. In this embodiment, before the execution of the hold change effect is started, a hold change suggestion effect may be executed to suggest that the hold change effect will be executed. This hold change suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the hold change effect will be executed, that is, that the display mode of the hold image will change. The hold change suggestion effect of this embodiment is configured as an action effect in which a specific character throws a ball image (pseudo hold image) that resembles a ball toward the target hold image, and the ball image hits the target hold image, suggesting that the display mode of the target hold image will change.

In this embodiment, there are cases where the hold change suggestion effect (action effect) is performed before the hold change effect is executed (when the display mode of the target's hold image changes), and cases where the hold change effect is executed without the hold change suggestion effect (action effect) being performed (when the display mode of the target's hold image changes). In the following, this hold change suggestion effect is also referred to as an "action effect." In addition, in this embodiment, the hold change suggestion effect (action effect) is performed before the hold change effect is executed (when the display mode of the target's hold image changes) compared to cases where the hold change effect is executed without the hold change suggestion effect (action effect) being performed (when the display mode of the target's hold image changes). It is configured so that the expectation of a jackpot is relatively higher in the change display (change display of the target) performed by the target's hold image being consumed.

Next, we will explain examples of the hold change effect and the hold change suggestion effect. Here, Figure 159 is a schematic diagram showing examples of the hold change suggestion effect and the hold change effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 159(A), the change display starts. In the illustrated example, the changing icon is a white icon, and the two pending icons are also white icons.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(B), at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable display, a character appears holding a round ball (a ball that resembles a red icon) and executes an action presentation (a presentation suggesting a hold change) in which the character throws the ball (a ball that resembles a red icon) toward the first hold image (the earliest hold image).

As shown in FIG. 159(C), when the ball (ball simulating a red icon) thrown by the character hits the first reserved image (the earliest reserved image), a reserved change effect is executed in which the display mode of this first reserved image changes from a white icon to a red icon. In other words, in the action effect (reserved change suggestion effect) of this embodiment, when the ball (red icon) held by the character is displayed, it is suggested that the display mode of one of the reserved images will change from a white icon (normal display mode) to a red icon (special display mode 3).

In this embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, when the currently executed game state is a low base state, the fluctuation time of the first special pattern (the fluctuation time when the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss) is configured to be different depending on the number of activated reserved balls of the first special pattern stored at the time of drawing the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special pattern. Here, in this embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special pattern is selected by referring to the fluctuation pattern table 1 in FIG. 49. However, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the shortened fluctuation (fluctuation pattern PH1-1) is set to "7 seconds", and the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation (fluctuation pattern PH1-2) is set to "12 seconds". At this time, in this embodiment, when the number of activated balls for the first special pattern stored at the time of drawing the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special pattern is three, the selection rate of the shortened fluctuation pattern PH1-1 (7 seconds) is relatively high, and when the number of activated balls for the first special pattern stored at the time of drawing the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special pattern is two, the selection rate of the normal fluctuation pattern PH1-2 (12 seconds) is relatively high. Therefore, in the following description, when the number of activated balls for the first special pattern stored at the time of drawing the change time (change pattern) of the first special pattern is three, a change display of "7 seconds" (this change display will be referred to as "change display A") is executed as the change time (change pattern) of the first special pattern, and when the number of activated balls for the first special pattern stored at the time of drawing the change time (change pattern) of the first special pattern is two, a change display of "12 seconds" (this change display will be referred to as "change display B") is executed as the change time (change pattern) of the first special pattern. In addition, if the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol stored at the time of drawing the change time (change pattern) of the first special symbol is three, the normal change pattern PH1-2 (12 seconds) may not be selected, and if the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol stored at the time of drawing the change time (change pattern) of the first special symbol is two, the shortened change pattern PH1-1 (7 seconds) may not be selected.

Here, FIG. 160 is a time chart when the aforementioned change displays A and B are executed as the change display of the first special pattern. In the following explanation, for convenience, the hold change suggestion display (action display) and the hold change display may be collectively referred to as the "hold-related display". In other words, the series of displays from the start of the hold change suggestion display (action display) to the end of the hold change display is also referred to as the "hold-related display". In the following explanation, the action display for one cycle of the hold image and the changing image (action display per cycle) is also referred to as the "unit action display".

As shown in FIG. 160, when the variable display A is executed as the variable display of the first special pattern, the unit action display of the reserved image and the variable image is repeated 14 times (1 cycle x 14 times) between the start and end of the variable display A (before the next variable display is started). In other words, the number of unit action displays (loop number) of the reserved image and the variable image performed during the execution of the variable display A is 14 times. On the other hand, when the variable display B is executed as the variable display of the first special pattern, the unit action display of the reserved image and the variable image is repeated 24 times (1 cycle x 24 times) between the start and end of the variable display B (before the next variable display is started). In other words, the number of unit action displays (loop number) of the reserved image and the variable image performed during the execution of the variable display B is 24 times. Thus, in this embodiment, when the game state is a low base state, even if the variable display of the first special pattern is either variable display A or B, it is possible to execute the unit action display of the reserved image and the variable image multiple times (1 cycle x multiple times) during the execution of the variable display. In other words, even if the shortest change time (change time of change display A), "7 seconds", is selected as the change time of the first special pattern, the unit action display of the pending image and the changing image is executed multiple times during the execution of the change display.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a hold change effect is executed during the execution of the first special pattern change display, whether the first special pattern change display is change display A or change display B, a predetermined hold-related effect (hold change suggestion effect and hold change effect) can be executed in the change display. Here, the execution time of the predetermined hold-related effect (the execution time from the start of the predetermined hold change suggestion effect to the end of the hold change effect) is always set to a constant execution time TB (TB = 4 seconds) regardless of the change time when these effects are executed. Here, a specific hold-related effect different from the predetermined hold-related effect can also be executed, but the execution time may be 8 seconds, and it should be noted that the specific hold-related effect is not executed in the change time of change display A, which is 7 seconds (because it cannot be executed within one change), but is executed in the change time of change display B, which is 12 seconds. In this embodiment, the execution time of the hold change effect overlaps with a part of the execution time of the hold change suggestion effect, the start of the hold change suggestion effect is earlier than the start of the hold change effect, and the end of the hold change suggestion effect and the end of the hold change effect are set to be substantially the same time (the end of the hold change effect may be set to be later than the end of the hold change suggestion effect). In addition, the execution start timing and execution end timing of the predetermined hold related effect (hold change effect and hold change effect) are always set based on the stop of the corresponding change display, without depending on the change time during which the predetermined hold related effect is executed, the execution end timing of the predetermined hold related effect is a predetermined time TC (TC = 1 second) before the end of the corresponding change display, and the execution start timing of the predetermined hold related effect is set to the sum of the execution time TB and the predetermined time TC (TB + TC = 5 seconds) before the end of the corresponding change display. Therefore, regardless of the length of the change time of the change display, the time from the end of the predetermined hold-related performance to the end of the change display is always constant, but the time from the start of the change display to the start of the predetermined hold-related performance can vary depending on the length of the change display. In other words, the shorter the change time of the change display, the earlier the execution timing of the predetermined hold-related performance, and the longer the change time of the change display, the later the execution timing of the predetermined hold-related performance. Specifically, when the change display of the first special pattern is the change display A, the predetermined hold-related performance is executed after the first time TA1 (TA1 = 2 seconds) from the start of the change display A, and when the change display of the first special pattern is the change display B, the predetermined hold-related performance is executed after the second time TA2 (TA2 = 7 seconds) from the start of the change display B. At this time, during the execution of either the change display A or the change display B, the unit action display (one cycle of animation display) of the reserved image and the changing image is executed multiple times (one cycle x multiple times) before and after the predetermined hold-related performance (hold change suggestion performance and hold change performance). Specifically, for the change display A, within the first time TA1 (2 seconds) that is the time from the start of this change display A to the start of the predetermined hold-related performance, the unit action display of the reserved image and the changing image is executed four times (0.5 seconds x 4 times), and within the predetermined time TC (1 second) that is the time from the end of the predetermined hold-related performance to the end of the change display A, the unit action display of the reserved image and the changing image is executed twice (0.5 seconds x 2 times). In addition, for the changing display B, within the second time TA2 (7 seconds), which is the time from when the changing display B starts until the start of the specified hold-related performance, the unit action display of the pending image and the changing image is performed 14 times (0.5 seconds x 14 times), and within the specified time TC (1 second), which is the time from when the specified hold-related performance ends until the changing display B ends, the unit action display of the pending image and the changing image is performed twice (0.5 seconds x 2 times).

In this embodiment, the time for the first special symbol to fluctuate varies depending on the number of balls in the reserved state.
Regardless of which change display A or B is executed, the hold change suggestion display and the hold change display can be reliably completed within that change time, and by performing one or more cycles of operation displays (animation displays) of the hold image and the changing image before and after the hold-related display, the player can easily recognize the operation displays of the hold image and the changing image, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect of these pre-reading displays (hold change display, hold change suggestion display, animation display).

In addition, in this embodiment, the pending change suggestion performance performed on the pending image of the target may be triggered by the start of the variable display in front of the target, but is not triggered by the generation of the target's activated pending ball. In other words, if the target's activated pending ball is already stored when the variable display starts, the pending change suggestion performance may be performed on the target's reserved image during the execution of the variable display (variable display in front of the target). On the other hand, if a new activated pending ball (target's activated pending ball) is generated during the execution of the variable display, the pending change suggestion performance is not performed on the new reserved image (target's reserved image) during the execution of the variable display. Therefore, for example, when variable display B is being executed as the variable display of the first special pattern and the remaining time of this currently executed variable display B is 7 seconds or more (in other words, when there is the same remaining time as the variable display time of variable display A in which a specified hold-related effect can be executed), even if a new first special pattern activation hold ball (target activation hold ball) is generated, it is possible to execute the specified hold-related effect on the target's reserved image until the variable display B ends, but a hold change suggestion effect is not executed on this newly generated target's reserved image. That is, when a new activation pending ball (target activation pending ball) is generated during the execution of the variable display B, and a pending change performance (so-called winning pending change performance) is scheduled to be performed for this new activation pending ball (target activation pending ball) during the execution of the variable display B, even if there is enough time remaining (remaining variable display time) to execute a pending change suggestion performance when this new activation pending ball is generated, the pending change suggestion performance for the target's pending image will not be executed within this remaining variable display time, and only a pending change performance (winning pending change performance) in which the target's pending image is suddenly displayed in a special display mode (for example, blue icon, green icon, red icon, rainbow icon, etc.) can be executed. In this case, it is preferable that the pending change suggestion performance (and pending change performance) can be executed for the target's pending image during the execution of the next variable display, triggered by the end of the variable display B and the start of the next variable display.

<Relationship between hold change indication effect and button effect>
In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery for whether or not to execute the action performance (reserved change suggestion performance) is executed on the condition that all the pre-determination results of the operating reserved ball in front of the target are non-reach type (shortened change or normal change) change patterns. In addition, in the lottery for whether or not to execute the action performance (reserved change suggestion performance), if the pre-determination result of the target's operating reserved ball is a SP reach change pattern, that is, the higher the jackpot expectation of the target's operating reserved ball (target change display) is, the easier it is to determine the execution of the action performance. In addition, if the target change display is a SP reach change display, it is easier to execute the button performance (for example, a button performance performed as a notice performance at the time of winning or losing) during the change display than if the target change display is a non-reach type change display. Therefore, in this embodiment, when comparing the change display before the target and the change display of the target, the change display performed when an action effect (pending change suggestion effect) is not performed on the pending image of the target (change display before the target = non-reach type change display) is configured so that the probability of a button effect being executed during that change display is relatively higher than the change display when an action effect (pending change suggestion effect) is performed on the pending image of the target (change display before the target = non-reach type change display).

(Variation 1 of Hold-Related Performance)
In this embodiment, the time required for one period of the operation display of the reserved image and the changing image (e.g., 0.5 seconds) may be set longer than the time required for one period (blinking period) of the blinking display of the special pattern reserved lamps P73, 74 provided on the main control display device P27 (e.g., 0.2 seconds = 0.1 seconds on + 0.1 seconds off). Similarly, the time required for one period of the operation display of the reserved image and the changing image (e.g., 0.5 seconds) may be set longer than the time required for one period (blinking period) of the blinking display of the reserved number auxiliary display units 803, 804 provided on the sub-control display device P28 (e.g., 0.2 seconds = 0.1 seconds on + 0.1 seconds off).

(Variation 2 of Hold-Related Effects)
In this embodiment, the display time from when the display of the changing image begins to when it is hidden may be configured so that the display time of the changing image displayed by shifting a pending image in a special display mode is longer than the display time of the changing image displayed by shifting a pending image in a normal display mode.

(Variation 3 of Hold-Related Effects)
In this embodiment, a look-ahead stage (look-ahead only stage background) is provided that is displayed over multiple variable displays in a situation where the target activation reserved ball is stored, and when this look-ahead stage (look-ahead only stage background) is displayed, the reserved change suggestion presentation (action presentation) may be configured to be executed more easily than when a non-look-ahead stage (normal stage background) such as stage A or stage B is displayed. Also, when a probability change stage background is displayed when the game state is in a high probability high base state, the reserved change suggestion presentation (action presentation) may be configured to be executed more easily than when a normal stage background is displayed when the game state is in a low probability low base state.

(Variation 4 of Hold-Related Effects)
In this embodiment, the button vibration effect (e.g., the first button vibration effect α, the first button vibration effect β, the second button vibration effect, the third button vibration effect, etc.) may be more easily executed in the variable display in which the pending image in the special display mode is displayed by shifting the pending image than in the variable display in which the pending image in the normal display mode is displayed by shifting the pending image. Also, the button vibration effect may be more easily executed in the variable display in which the pending image in the special display mode is displayed by shifting the pending image than in the variable display in which the pending image in the normal display mode is displayed by shifting the pending image.

<Volume adjustment during initialization>
Next, the volume adjustment of the speaker P11 during the initialization operation will be described. In this embodiment, after the game machine is powered on (after the power is restored from a power cut), the display of the recovery screen ends, and the display of the normal screen (standby screen) that displays decorative patterns, background images, etc. begins, the volume of the speaker P11 is adjustable. After the normal screen is restored, the volume can be adjusted in both the variable standby state and the variable display state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, when a predetermined operation is performed by the player (for example, when the left and right keys of the cross key P16 are operated simultaneously), volume adjustment images showing multiple volume levels are displayed side by side in the volume adjustment image display area P736 of the screen. The volume adjustment image shows the current volume level, and in the illustrated example, the display mode is adjusted to the third volume level corresponding to the current volume level. Then, when the player operates the left or right key, it becomes possible to adjust the output level (volume level) of sounds such as BGM and sound effects output from the speaker P11. Specifically, while the volume adjustment image is displayed, the volume level increases when the right key is operated, and decreases when the left key is operated. Then, when the performance button P15 is operated as a volume confirmation operation, or when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the volume adjustment image was displayed without a volume adjustment operation, the display of the volume adjustment image ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, the initialization operation of the movable body is started when the recovery screen switches to the normal screen after the gaming machine is powered on. Therefore, if a volume adjustment image is displayed after the normal screen is restored, the display of this volume adjustment image and the initialization operation of the movable body may be executed at the same time. Below, we will explain a case where the display of the volume adjustment image and the initialization operation of the movable body are executed at the same time after the power is restored from a power outage.

Figure 161 is a time chart showing the case where the display of the sound adjustment image and the initialization operation of the movable body are performed simultaneously after the power is restored after being turned off. Note that due to space limitations, Figure 161 shows a simplified screen display (a screen display that omits some displays such as small patterns and reserved images).

First, at time t61, a power outage occurs in the gaming machine in a variable standby state (non-variable state). At time t62, the gaming machine is powered on and recovers from the power outage. At time t63, at a predetermined timing after the gaming machine is powered on, a recovery screen is displayed on the performance display device P70. At time t64, the display screen of the performance display device P70 switches from the recovery screen to the normal screen (standby screen). At this time t64, an initialization operation process for the movable bodies is started, and the initialization operation of the first movable role P651, the initialization operation of the performance button P15, and the initialization operation of the second movable role P652 are performed in that order.

Next, at time t65, the player performs a specified operation (for example, by operating the left or right key of the cross key P16), which starts the display of the volume adjustment image. As a result, the display of the volume adjustment image and the initialization operation of the movable body are performed simultaneously in parallel.

At time t66, while the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed, the game ball enters the first starting hole P51, thereby starting the variable display of the first special pattern. In addition, a variable start command is sent from the main control board P100 to the performance control board P200, thereby starting the variable display of the decorative pattern and small pattern. Even if the variable display of the special pattern, decorative pattern, and small pattern starts at this time t66, the volume adjustment image continues to be displayed both before and after the start of the variable display.

Next, at time t67, a predetermined time has passed since the volume adjustment image was displayed (a predetermined time without any volume adjustment operation being performed), and the display of the volume adjustment image ends.

Then, at time t68, the initialization operation of the movable bodies is completed; that is, the initialization operation of the first movable part P651, the initialization operation of the performance button P15, and the initialization operation of the second movable part P652 are all completed.

(Variation 1 regarding volume adjustment)
In this embodiment, when a volume adjustment image is displayed on the screen of the performance display device P70 and a reel performance is executed as a button operation trigger performance, the volume adjustment image may be configured to be continuously displayed before and after the execution of the reel performance, without the display of the volume adjustment image being interrupted by the execution of the reel performance.

(Variation 2 regarding volume adjustment)
Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if a volume adjustment image is displayed during the initialization operation of the movable body when the power is turned on and the volume adjustment operation is performed, the volume of the initialization notification sound (e.g., a sound such as "Initialization completed" or "Initialization operation in progress") indicating that the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed (or indicating that the information backed up in RAMP 103 has been initialized) may be configured not to change (to always be output at a constant volume (a predetermined constant volume)).

<Movable props and display devices>
Next, the relationship between the predetermined operation (initialization operation, performance operation) of the movable role objects P651, 652 and the display contents of the performance display device P70 will be described. In the following Figures 162 and 163, in the "decorative pattern display" column, the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed (variable display, temporary stop display, fixed stop display) on the screen of the performance display device P70 is "displayed", and the state in which the decorative pattern is not displayed (variable display, temporary stop display, fixed stop display) on the screen of the performance display device P70 is "hidden". Similarly, the state in which the small pattern is displayed (variable display, fixed stop display) on the screen of the performance display device P70 is "displayed", and the state in which the small pattern is not displayed (variable display, fixed stop display) on the screen of the performance display device P70 is "hidden". In addition, in the "reserved image display/changing image display" column, the state in which at least one of the reserved image and the changing image is displayed on the screen of the performance display device P70 is "displayed", and the state in which both the reserved image and the changing image are not displayed on the screen of the performance display device P70 is "hidden". In addition, in the "Number of reserved balls display" column, a state in which the number of activated reserved balls of each special pattern (including 0) is displayed on the screen of the performance display device P70 (number of reserved balls display area P750) is defined as "displayed," and a state in which the number of activated reserved balls of each special pattern (including 0) is not displayed on the screen of the performance display device P70 (number of reserved balls display area P750) is defined as "hidden."

Figure 162 is a time chart showing the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable props after power is restored from a power outage and the display content of the performance display device P70.

First, at time t71, a power outage occurs in the gaming machine in a change standby state (non-changing state). As described above, the "change standby state" is a non-changing state in which none of the first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol, and small symbol are displaying a change, and in which there are no pending activated balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. At this time t71, the movable parts are not operating and are waiting in their initial positions.

At time t72, the gaming machine is powered on and recovers from the power outage. Then, at time t73, the display screen of the performance display device P70 switches from the recovery screen to the normal screen, and the normal screen begins to be displayed. This normal screen displays the initial combination of decorative symbols ("3, 3, 1"), the initial combination of small symbols ("3, 3, 1"), and the number of balls pending operation for the first special symbol and the second special symbol (both 0). At approximately the same time as the normal screen returns, an initialization operation of the movable parts (first movable part P651, second movable part P652) begins as a check of the operation of the movable bodies.

Next, at time 74, multiple game balls (three in the illustrated example) enter the first starting hole P51 in succession, starting the display of the first special symbol, and in sync with this, the display of the decorative symbol and the small symbol starts. Also, on the screen, reserved images (two reserved images) corresponding to the activated reserved balls of the first special symbol are displayed, and a changing image corresponding to the changing display (changing display of the first special symbol) is displayed. Also, on the screen, "2" is displayed as the number of activated reserved balls of the first special symbol, and "0" is displayed as the number of activated reserved balls of the second special symbol. In other words, in the illustrated example, even during the initialization operation of the movable role objects P651, 652, multiple start winnings occur, and on the screen of the performance display device P70, the display of the decorative symbol (changing display), the display of the small symbol (changing display), the display of the reserved image and the changing image, and the display of the number of activated reserved balls of each special symbol are displayed, respectively.

Next, FIG. 163 is a time chart showing the relationship between the presentation operation (part presentation) of the first movable part P651 and the display contents of the presentation display device P70. FIG. 163 illustrates an example in which the game state is a low base state (normal game state) and the variable display is a SP reach variable display (jackpot variable display).

First, at time t81, the first special symbol variable display starts. Synchronously with this, the decorative symbol variable display and the small symbol variable display start. Also, on the screen, reserved images (two reserved images) corresponding to the first special symbol's activated reserved balls are displayed, and a variable image corresponding to the variable display (first special symbol variable display) is displayed. Also, on the screen, "2" is displayed as the number of currently activated reserved balls for the first special symbol, and "0" is displayed as the number of currently activated reserved balls for the second special symbol. Note that even between the end of the previous variable display and the start of the current variable display, the stop display of the decorative symbol (confirmed stop display), the stop display of the small symbol (confirmed stop display), the display of the reserved image, and the display of the number of reserved balls for the special symbol are being performed, so the "decorative symbol display" column, the "small symbol display" column, the "reserved image display/changing image display" column, and the "reserved ball number display" column in the figure are each set to "display".

At time t82, after a reach is established in the variable display, it develops into an SP reach. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols are displayed as retreated symbols (temporarily stopped symbols) on both ends of the screen while forming what is known as a reach eye. Also, at this time t82, the pending image and the variable image are hidden as a result of the variable display developing into an SP reach. On the other hand, even after the variable display develops into an SP reach, the display of the number of pending balls for the first special symbol and the number of pending balls for the second special symbol continues.

At time t83, button effect D is executed as a win/lose branch effect (effect at the time of win/lose branch), and the operation of effect button P15 triggers the execution of a feature effect in which the first movable feature P651 falls to the front of the screen (moves to a movable position). Although not shown, the second button vibration effect is also executed at this time as an operation-triggered effect. Also, at this time 53, the start of the feature effect triggers the display of the changing decorative patterns (the temporary stop display of the left and right patterns that are displayed in a evacuated state on both ends of the screen) to be hidden.

At time t84, the ending of the role-playing effect triggers the resumption of the display of the decorative symbols, and the decorative symbols are displayed as provisionally stopped in a combination indicating a jackpot (in the illustrated example, "7-7-7"). Then, at time t85, the provisional display of the decorative symbols ends, and the decorative symbols are displayed as definitively stopped in a combination indicating a jackpot (in the illustrated example, "7-7-7").

In this way, in this embodiment, auxiliary displays (such as small symbols and reserved numbers) continue to be displayed regardless of the game situation, while main displays (such as decorative symbols and reserved images) are changed in display mode over time (including non-display) according to the operating mode (initialization operation, presentation operation) of the movable role objects P651, 652, making it possible to notify the player of appropriate game information (information related to the game).

<Relationship between button vibration effect and decorative pattern display/small pattern display>
In addition, in this embodiment, as the display of the decorative pattern, it is possible to execute the display of the change of the decorative pattern, the display of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and the display of the fixed stop of the decorative pattern. On the other hand, as the display of the small pattern, it is possible to execute the display of the change of the small pattern and the display of the fixed stop of the small pattern, but it is not possible to execute the display of the temporary stop of the small pattern.

Here, in a state where the three decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner (scroll display), the player has difficulty recognizing the combination of the decorative symbols (a combination of three decorative symbols or a combination of two of the three decorative symbols). In contrast, the state where the player can easily recognize the combination of the decorative symbols is a state where the combination of three decorative symbols is displayed as a fixed stop, and a state where the combination of three decorative symbols or a combination of two of the three decorative symbols is displayed as a temporary stop. The state where the combination of two decorative symbols is displayed as a temporary stop is, for example, a state where the left and right patterns of the three decorative symbols match in a reach state (reach eye). At this time, when the combination of the decorative symbols is in a state where the combination of three decorative symbols is displayed as a fixed stop, as a state where the combination of the decorative symbols is easily recognized, the button vibration effect is not executed, but when the combination of three decorative symbols or a combination of two of the three decorative symbols is displayed as a temporary stop, the button vibration effect can be executed.

On the other hand, when three small symbols are displayed in a variable manner (scrolling display), it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the combination of these small symbols (a combination of three small symbols or a combination of two of the three small symbols). In contrast, as mentioned above, the small symbols are not displayed as provisionally stopped, so the only state in which the player can easily recognize the combination of small symbols is when the combination of three small symbols is displayed as fixed and stopped. Therefore, when the player can easily recognize the combination of small symbols, that is, when the combination of three small symbols is displayed as fixed and stopped, the button vibration effect is not executed.

In this embodiment, the display of the decorative patterns and the display of the small patterns have a certain correspondence, but while the button vibration effect can be executed when the combination of decorative patterns is easily recognizable (recognizable state), the button vibration effect is not executed when the combination of small patterns is easily recognizable (recognizable state).

<Freeze effect>
Next, a modified example of the button performance of the sixth embodiment will be described. In this modified example, when it is decided to execute the button performance during a specific variable display, an operation promotion performance is executed to prompt the player to operate the performance button P15 with the start of the button performance. In this operation promotion performance, as shown in FIG. 164(a), a button image P671a imitating the performance button P15 is displayed on the performance display device P70. In this modified example, when the operation promotion performance is executed, a performance pattern is selected, and the options here include the first performance and the second performance.

(An example of the first performance)
When the button effect starts, as shown in Fig. 164(a), a button image P671a is displayed and the operation prompting effect starts. In the first effect, when the player performs an operation input on the effect button P15, as shown in Fig. 164(b), the button image P671a is erased and the operation prompting effect ends, and a balloon image P673 is added to an image P672 of a boy character, and a line announcement (also called a "comment announcement effect") that announces a reach or the like is executed, suggesting or informing the probability of a big win (button effect B is executed).

In other words, in the first performance, when the performance button P15 is operated during the operation prompt performance, the button image 671 disappears from the screen, and the display content of the performance display device P70 switches to one that does not include the button image P671a. Here, in this modified example, this first performance is the basic normal switching performance.

Although not shown in the figures, the display manner of the decorative patterns during the first performance may be such that images of all decorative patterns as they change are displayed as semi-transparent images superimposed on the background, or that at least one of the decorative patterns is displayed as a semi-transparent image as it changes, or that none of the decorative patterns are visible, for example, by being superimposed on the background as a transparent image.

(An example of the second performance)
In contrast to the first effect, the second effect is a special switching effect, and the second effect has a first period in which timing starts with the start of the operation prompting effect, a second period in which the effect mode specific to the second effect is executed, and a third period following the second period. In the following, various effect modes of the second effect will be described with examples.

In the second performance, as the operation prompting performance starts, a button image P671a is displayed as shown in FIG. 165(a). In this modified example, the button image P671a displayed here is the same as the image used in the first performance. Furthermore, after a predetermined time has passed, the first special performance is executed, and as shown in FIG. 165(b), it switches to the button image P671b for the second performance. During this first special performance, the performance control board P200 does not allow operation of the performance button P15, and even if the player operates the performance button P15, the operation is not reflected in the performance. Also, in the example of FIG. 165(b), even if the performance button P15 is pressed during the first performance, a performance such as a dialogue preview is not executed, and the same type of performance that is merely an extension of the previous performance, such as the same character setting or the same scene setting, continues, and the button image 671 remains displayed.

In other words, even though the button image P671b is displayed, the effect button P15 cannot be operated, and the button image P671b remains displayed in the center of the screen. This type of first special effect may be referred to as a freeze effect below. The button image P671b is drawn in a manner that fits expressions such as freeze, solidify, freeze, or freeze so that it can be distinguished from the operation button image P671a during the first effect, and in addition, in this embodiment, an image of light that expresses a shine is added. This image of light may be a video.

The probability of occurrence of such a second effect is set lower than the probability of occurrence of the first effect. Furthermore, in this modified example, various correlations are set, such as the correlation of the expectation of a hit (e.g., the expectation of a jackpot) between the first and second effects, and the correlation between the partial configuration of the second effect (e.g., the duration of the freeze effect) and the expectation of a hit. Details will be described later, but to give an example, the expectation of a jackpot is set higher for the second effect than for the first effect. Also, the longer the duration of the freeze effect in the second effect, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

Although not shown, in this modified example, a button image showing a transition state is displayed using a method such as blurring or watermarking during the change from the normal button image P671a shown in FIG. 164(a) to the button image P671b during the freeze effect shown in FIG. 165(b). The transition state here refers to a state in which the button image P671b appears to be frozen in an instant when the button is operated to start the freeze effect, and the degree of freezing gradually increases over a period of, for example, 0.5 seconds. In this modified example, the display state of the button image P671b when the degree of freezing reaches a steady state after the freeze effect starts does not change before and after the operation of the effect button P15, but is not limited to this, and when the effect button P15 is operated, the display state may be such that the button image P671b continues to be displayed but part of it changes.

Furthermore, the display mode of the decorative symbols during the freeze effect may be set to, as in the first effect, a mode in which all or some of the decorative symbols are displayed as semi-transparent images that are changing, or a mode in which none of the decorative symbols are visible, etc. As an example, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which only images such as figures or design drawings that constitute part of the decorative symbols change along with the numbers and letters.

In addition, a display mode in which the background image, which is an image excluding decorative patterns, is in a still frozen state during the freeze effect is adopted. Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt a display mode of limited animation in which only a part of the background image changes. Examples of limited animation display modes include those in which only a part of the scenery, or only image components such as people, vehicles, etc. are changed. Furthermore, during the second period, the effect button P15 may be illuminated, or text may be displayed or audio guidance may be output to encourage the operation of the effect button P15.

When a freeze effect is being performed, the fact that a freeze effect is being performed may be notified by outputting a text or audio message to that effect, or by using effects such as light decorations and sound effects. Note that in this modified example, the button image P671b is different from the button image P671b in the normal case before the freeze effect is performed, but a common image may be used as the button image.

Such freeze effects are controlled based on time, and when a predetermined period (second period) described below has elapsed, the freeze is released as the effect button P15 becomes active. Here, the same button image P671a (see, for example, FIG. 166(a)) as in the first effect is used as the unfrozen effect. Furthermore, if the player operates the effect button P15 while this button image P671a is displayed, the button image P671a disappears from the screen as in the first effect, and the subsequent effect pattern is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 166(b)).

Figure 167 shows the various periods and states set in the second performance in comparison with the first performance. In Figure 167, (a) shows the first performance, and (b) shows the second performance. First, in the first performance, as described above, the operation prompting performance starts during the variable period (timing T1), and as shown by arrow A, if the performance button P15 is operated during the operation prompting performance (T2), the performance pattern after the button operation is then executed.

In contrast, in the second effect, a first period measured by a first period timer (not shown) begins with the start of the operation prompting effect (T1) (see (b1) in the figure). This first period is defined as the control execution period from when the button image P671a is displayed on the screen until it is removed. In this modified example, when the freeze effect starts (T3) and the button image P671b is displayed, a second period is defined during which the display continues while the effect button P15 does not accept operation. This second period is shorter than the first period (see (b2) in the figure) and is measured by a second period timer (not shown).

While the second period continues, the first special effect (see (b3) in the figure), which is a freeze effect, is performed, but when the freeze effect ends, the third period (see (b2) in the figure), which follows the second period, begins. This third period is timed by a third period timer (not shown), and during the third period, button image P671a is displayed and operation of effect button P15 is enabled. The effect performed during the third period is the second special effect (see (b3) in the figure), and the second special effect is executed following the first special effect.

In other words, the timing of occurrence of the first special effect (freeze effect) is any timing between the start and end of the first period, and the operation prompting effect continues during the first period without changing the button image, or while changing it at the start of the second period or the third period. Even if a button operation is performed as shown by the arrow B between the start of the second period (T3) and the start of the third period (T4), the operation button image P671b remains displayed, and if a button operation is performed as shown by the arrow C after the start of the third period when the button image P671a is switched to, the button image P671a is erased and the effect after the button operation is executed.

The time from the start of the first period to the start of the second period (herein referred to as the "delay time") can take various values, for example, 3 seconds, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc. By making this delay time relatively short, it is possible to realize a gameplay that makes the player urgently operate the effect button P15, and conversely, by making the delay time relatively long, it is possible to realize a gameplay that makes the player have ample time to operate the effect button P15.

In addition, when determining the start time of the second period, for example, a plurality of operation promotion presentation patterns Ma to Mz that comprehensively define a series of presentation patterns from the start to the end of the first period (end of the third period) may be set, and the promotion presentation may be performed by appropriately selecting and executing the operation promotion presentation patterns Ma to Mz. In addition, the operation promotion presentation patterns may be subdivided and set, such as operation promotion presentation patterns M1a to M1z related to the first period, operation promotion presentation patterns M2a to M2z related to the second period, and operation promotion presentation patterns M3a to M3z related to the third period, and these may be appropriately combined, for example, as M1a + M2b + M3c or M1e + M2a + M3y, to perform the promotion presentation. Furthermore, it is also possible to determine the delay time of the start of the second period relative to the first period by lottery.

In this modified example, when the first special effect changes to the second special effect, the normal button image P671a is displayed as a freeze release effect to inform the player that the freeze has been released, but a dedicated image for the second special effect (freeze release effect) may also be used. Alternatively, the display mode of the second special effect may be the same as that of the first special effect, making it difficult to distinguish between the two effect modes. In this case, it is possible to realize a game that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the start of the third period. Also, the start of the first period and the second period may be made to coincide, and the freeze effect may be executed from the start of the promotion effect. In this case, it is possible to realize a game that immediately becomes a freeze effect as an operation promotion effect.

Next, the performance pattern associated with the reach in the second performance will be described. In one example of the performance pattern in the second performance, after the freeze performance occurs (see FIG. 165(b)), the left and right decorative patterns stop in a reach combination (including a display mode of a temporary stop such as swinging), and the central decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the freeze performance ends, and as shown in FIG. 168(a), the button image P671a in the unfreezed state is displayed. At this time, the third period begins, the performance button P15 becomes active, and when the performance button P15 is operated, this operation is reflected in the display mode, and as shown in FIG. 168(b), the performance is switched to a performance in which the image of the button image P671a is erased. Then, in the performance display device P70, an image with contents corresponding to the story in the performance thereafter is displayed. Note that, although this is also true in cases where the reach does not occur, in many cases a video is progressing in the background of the button image P671a. For this reason, it is extremely unlikely that the background image when the button image P671a disappears will always be the same, and the background image is usually diverse and different from time to time. Then, by operating the presentation button P15, a new situation different from the previous one will be developed using various presentation patterns. One example of a presentation pattern that represents a new situation is a presentation pattern in which a character starts off silent and speaks a line to suggest or inform the player of the probability of a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 166(b).

169 and 170 show another example of the presentation pattern accompanying the reach. In this presentation example, the freeze is not released just by the occurrence of the reach during the freeze presentation, and the freeze is released when the presentation pattern develops into a super reach. That is, as shown in FIG. 169(a), a freeze presentation occurs together with the reach, and as shown in FIG. 169(b), when a presentation (excitement presentation) is executed to stir up the player's elation with a lightning image 676 when the presentation develops into a super reach, the freeze is released and the presentation button P15 becomes active. Then, when the presentation button P15 is operated, the promotion presentation ends and the image of the button image P671b disappears, and as shown in FIG. 170(a), the button image P671a after the freeze is released is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 170(b), an image of the content corresponding to the story of the presentation thereafter is displayed. In addition, in order to simplify the illustration, Figures 168(a) and 169(b) show a state with no background in which no background image is displayed for the decorative patterns and button images P671a, 671b, but in many cases, an effect is executed behind the decorative patterns and button images P671a, 671b to display some kind of background image.

Furthermore, for the second presentation, a correlation is established between the first or second period and the degree of expectation of various hits, and it is set so that the longer the first or second period is, the higher the degree of expectation of various hits. That is, FIG. 171 shows a schematic diagram of an operation promotion presentation pattern table relating to the operation promotion presentation, and FIG. 171(a) shows a variation pattern used when the hit/miss determination result is a miss. Also, FIG. 171(b) is used when the hit/miss determination result is a jackpot (15R jackpot), and FIG. 171(c) is used when the hit/miss determination result is a jackpot (2R jackpot) or a small hit.

In addition, in each figure, as operation prompting effects, prompting effects L1 and L2 indicate operation prompting effect patterns that take a longer time to execute compared to prompting effects M and S, and further, prompting effect L2 is an operation prompting effect pattern that takes a longer time to execute compared to prompting effect L1. In addition, as for prompting effects M and S, prompting effect M takes a longer time to execute than prompting effect S. Note that the types of lengths of operation prompting effects are not limited to those exemplified here, and may be more or less.

In FIG. 171(a), promotion effect L1 is associated with pattern lottery values 0 to 10, and promotion effect M is associated with pattern lottery values 11 to 40. Promotion effect S is associated with pattern lottery values 41 to 255. In FIG. 171(b), promotion effect L1 is associated with pattern lottery values 0 to 10, promotion effect L1 is associated with pattern lottery values 11 to 230, promotion effect M is associated with pattern lottery values 231 to 250, and promotion effect S is associated with pattern lottery values 251 to 255. Furthermore, in FIG. 171(c), promotion effect L1 is associated with pattern lottery values 0 to 160, and promotion effect M is associated with pattern lottery values 161 to 255.

Although the relationship between the entire operation prompting effect and the reliability of each type of hit has been explained here, the relationship between the freeze effect (first special effect) or freeze release effect (second special effect) and the expected hit probability of each type may be determined, and for example, the longer (or shorter) the freeze effect or freeze release effect, the higher the expected hit probability of each type. Also, for the second effect, the longer the time from the end of the display of button image P671a to the start of the effective operation period for button image P671b, the higher the expected hit probability. It is also possible to allocate pattern selection values so that a relationship is set in which the reliability of each type of hit increases if the freeze effect starts relatively soon after the start of the operation prompting effect.

Furthermore, the continuous notice performance or the pre-read performance, which is a notice performance pattern corresponding to a plurality of start winnings and performed across a plurality of pattern change displays, may be associated with the operation promotion performance. For example, when the reserved lottery result includes a lottery result (target operation reserved ball) that is a 15R jackpot, the promotion performance may be started during the change display (change display before the target) before the change display (target change display) corresponding to the lottery result, and then the freeze performance may be continuously executed across a plurality of pattern change displays, and the freeze release performance may be started when or during the start of the change display (target change display) that is a 15R jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to further diversify the operation promotion performance. In addition, in this case, the first period timer and the second period timer will execute the time measurement across a plurality of change displays.

In addition, in this modified example, as described above, the predetermined button performance has a performance pattern A (in which the button image P671a is erased when the performance button P15 is operated while the normal button image P671a is displayed, and the special button image P671b is not displayed) and a performance pattern B (in which the button image P671a is erased when the performance button P15 is operated while the normal button image P671a is displayed, and the special button image P671b is displayed). Here, during the execution of the variable display before the target in which a specific pre-reading performance is executed, the performance pattern B is not executed, but the performance pattern A is executed. In contrast, during the execution of the variable display of the target, the performance pattern B can be executed, and the performance pattern A can also be executed. In other words, the performance pattern B is configured to be executed more easily during the execution of the variable display of the target, which is executed when the target's operation pending ball is consumed, than during the execution of the variable display before the target, which is executed when the operation pending ball before the target is consumed. Note that the performance pattern B may be configured to be executed with a relatively low probability even during the execution of the variable display before the target. Additionally, it is preferable that the probability of effect pattern B being executed is higher than the probability of effect pattern A being executed while the target is being displayed in a variable manner. Note that the special button image P671b may be a red button image as described above, and the normal button image P671a may be a blue button image as described above.

Also, as a modified example of this embodiment, the button vibration effect may be more easily executed during the execution of the variable display when the effect pattern B is executed during the execution of the variable display than when the effect pattern A is executed during the execution of the variable display. Also, when the effect pattern A is executed during the execution of the variable display, the second button vibration effect (jackpot confirmation effect) is not executed in the variable display, but when the effect pattern B is executed during the execution of the variable display, the second button vibration effect (jackpot confirmation effect) can be executed during the execution of the variable display. Alternatively, the second button vibration effect (jackpot confirmation effect) may be more easily executed during the execution of the variable display when the effect pattern B is executed during the execution of the variable display than when the effect pattern A is executed during the execution of the variable display.

The main effects achieved in the sixth embodiment (including the modified examples) can be summarized as follows:

First, according to the sixth embodiment, in addition to visual effects such as image effects and lamp effects, the probability of winning or losing can be indicated by a tactile effect (button vibration effect) caused by the vibration of the effect button, and as a result of the winning or losing result (whether the fluctuation display is a jackpot fluctuation or a loss fluctuation), the tactile effect can be executed at various times during the fluctuation display, thereby realizing a game presentation that the player will not tire of, and as a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the sixth embodiment, it is possible to check in advance whether the tactile effect (button vibration effect), which is considered to be an important effect for the player because it suggests or notifies that the variable display has high expectations (super hot), is operating normally, and by preventing the overlapping execution of the checking action and the tactile effect of the effect, it is possible to clearly separate the checking action and the effect action and realize appropriate performance progression, which results in increased interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the sixth embodiment, when a situation arises in which a button effect is to be executed while the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed after the power is restored, the initialization operation of the movable body is given priority, but the button effect can be executed in a manner that does not hinder the progress of this initialization operation (a simple manner that does not suggest or encourage the appearance of a button image). This makes it possible to ensure that the presentation does not unnecessarily heighten the player's expectations, and prevents the processing of the game progress immediately after the power is restored from becoming complicated, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the sixth embodiment, when a situation arises in which a button effect is to be executed while the initialization operation of the movable body is being performed after the power is restored after a power outage, the initialization operation of the movable body is prioritized, but the button effect can be executed in a manner that does not impede the progress of this initialization operation (a simple manner in which an operation result effect is not generated if a button operation is not performed). This makes it possible to progress the effect without unnecessarily raising the player's expectations, and to simplify the processing of the effect progress when no button operation is performed, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

According to the sixth embodiment, even if the actual shooting position in the game area changes as a result of a transition in the game state, the notification of the actual shooting position is suppressed from being an excessive notification to the player, thereby preventing the player from feeling distrustful or uncomfortable, and as a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the sixth embodiment, by making it possible to execute a reserve change suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of a reserve change during any change display, regardless of the length of time the pattern change display is taking, it is possible to further increase the player's interest and attention in reserve changes, and also to eliminate the monotony of the effects related to reserve changes, thereby making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, according to the sixth embodiment, auxiliary displays (such as small symbols and reserved numbers) whose role is to ensure display continue to be displayed regardless of the game situation, while main displays (such as decorative symbols and reserved images) whose role is to provide a presentation effect are changed over time (including being hidden) according to the game situation, making it possible to narrow down to some extent the presentation content that the player should pay attention to depending on the game situation, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, according to the sixth embodiment, by differentiating the notification mode of the effect button during the initialization operation from the notification mode of the effect button during the vibration operation, the player can be notified of the correct progress of the game (preventing the player from playing the game with a mistaken understanding), and as a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the sixth embodiment, when the game state transitions, even if pending information is stored at the start of the transitioned game state, the pre-reading performance targeting this pending information is not executed. This reduces the processing burden on the performance control, and prevents a situation in which the performance loses its sharpness due to the occurrence of a pre-reading performance immediately after the transition of the game state, thereby making it possible to improve the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, according to the sixth embodiment, when a specific look-ahead effect is executed based on the pending information of a target, the button effect is made easier to execute during the execution of the target change display, which is performed as the pending information of the target is consumed, than during the execution of the change display before the target where this look-ahead effect is performed. This makes it possible to enhance the effect over multiple change displays from the change display before the target to the change display of the target, and also makes the effect more striking, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the sixth embodiment, when the game state is changed and the actual shooting position in the game area is switched, and a notification display regarding the actual shooting position is displayed to the player, even if the notification display of the actual shooting position and the display of the decorative pattern are overlapped, the notification display of the actual shooting position and the display of the small pattern, the display of the reserved image, etc., and the display of the reserved number are not overlapped. Therefore, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern is obstructed by the notification display of the actual shooting position, the visibility of the display of the small pattern, the reserved image, etc., and the reserved number is ensured, so the player can properly recognize the current game status (changing display, stopped display, number of active reserved balls, etc.), and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Seventh embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine according to one or a combination of two or more of the above-mentioned second to sixth embodiments (including those in which some of the components have been removed or converted using well-known or commonly used technology, etc.), and in the following, the same reference numerals will be used to designate parts having the same configuration, and explanations will be omitted, and mainly differences will be described. In other words, in the following explanation, except in special cases, it is possible to apply the configuration common to the above-mentioned second to sixth embodiments.

The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment will be explained below.

<Board configuration>
First, the board configuration of the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment will be briefly described. In this seventh embodiment, as in the above-mentioned sixth embodiment (see FIG. 133), the game balls flowing down the left side area PA1 can mainly enter either the first start port P51 or the general winning ports P61 to P63 located below the center ornament P21. On the other hand, the game balls flowing down the right side area PA2 can mainly enter either the operation gate P53, the second start port P52, or the large winning port P54 located to the right of the center ornament P21. On the other hand, at the lower end of the game area PA, an outlet P29 is provided to discharge the game balls that flow down without entering each winning port to the back side of the game board P20. Of the game areas PA equipped with various winning ports, the hitting method of shooting the game ball so that it flows down into the left side area PA1 is called a "left hit," and the hitting method of shooting the game ball so that it flows down into the right side area PA2 is called a "right hit."

<Various display devices>
As shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 133, the display area of the performance display device P70 includes a decorative pattern display area P700, a pending image display area P710, a changing image display area P720, a small pattern display area P730, and a pending number display area P740.

As described above, the decorative pattern display area P700 is a display area for displaying the decorative patterns in a variable and stopped state (determined stop display, temporary stop display). The decorative pattern display area P700 has three display areas (left pattern display area Z1, middle pattern display area Z2, right pattern display area Z3) that are variable display areas for the decorative patterns, and the left pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the left pattern display area Z1, the middle pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the middle pattern display area Z2, and the right pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the right pattern display area Z3 are displayed in a stopped state. The decorative patterns in this embodiment are composed of performance patterns having multiple identification information (numbers, characters). The decorative patterns have number information of "1" to "9" set as one of the multiple identification information (i.e., there are a total of nine types of decorative patterns). The decorative patterns are arranged in the order of "1" to "9" according to the arrangement of the pattern rows, and on the performance display device P70, they are displayed in a circular or scrolling manner in the order of "1" to "9" (or "9" to "1") in each display area Z1, Z2, Z3, returning to "1" after "9" (or returning to "9" after "1"). The composition of the decorative patterns will be described later.

The reserved image display area P710 is a display area for displaying reserved images (reserved icons) corresponding to the activated reserved balls of the special patterns. In the game state (normal game state) in which the variable display of the first special pattern is the main focus of the game, this reserved image display area P710 displays reserved images (reserved icons) corresponding to the activated reserved balls of the first special pattern, and in the game state (time-saving game state, probability change game state) in which the variable display of the second special pattern is the main focus of the game, a reserved image (reserved icon) corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern is displayed. In this reserved image display area P710, a maximum of four reserved images of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (four corresponding to the maximum number of activated reserved balls stored for each special pattern) can be displayed. The reserved images of the first special patterns are displayed in order according to the order in which the activated reserved balls of the first special patterns occur (ball-scoring order), and the reserved images of the second special patterns are displayed in order according to the order in which the activated reserved balls of the second special patterns occur (ball-scoring order).

The changing image display area P720 is a display area for displaying a changing image (changing icon) corresponding to the currently executing changing display. When the game state is one in which the changing display of the first special pattern is the main focus of the game (normal game state), this changing image display area P720 displays a changing image (changing icon) corresponding to the changing display of the first special pattern, and when the game state is one in which the changing display of the second special pattern is the main focus of the game (time-saving game state, special bonus game state), a changing image (changing icon) corresponding to the changing display of the second special pattern is displayed.

The small symbol display area P730 is a display area for displaying small symbols (also called "simple symbols") in a variable and stationary state (fixed stop state). A small symbol is the fourth symbol following a special symbol, a normal symbol, and a decorative symbol. That is, in this embodiment, a variable display of a small symbol is displayed small on the screen, separately from the variable display of a decorative symbol, as a variable display of a decorative symbol that shows the variable display of a special symbol in a dramatic way. This small symbol is composed of three symbols corresponding to the left, middle, and right symbols of the decorative symbol, respectively, and is composed of nine kinds of numerical identification elements, for example, "1" to "9", just like the decorative symbol. The decorative symbol may be called the "main decorative symbol" or "first decorative symbol", and the small symbol may be called the "sub decorative symbol" or "second decorative symbol".

This small symbol display area P730 is formed in a relatively smaller display area than the decorative symbol display area P700. Although detailed illustration is omitted in this small symbol display area P730, three display areas (left small symbol display area, medium and small symbol display area, right small symbol display area) that are variable display areas of small symbols are provided, and the left symbol of the small symbol (referred to as the "left small symbol") corresponding to the left small symbol display area, the middle symbol of the small symbol (referred to as the "medium and small symbol") corresponding to the medium and small symbol display area, and the right symbol of the small symbol corresponding to the right small symbol display area are stopped and displayed. Of the three symbols that make up this small symbol, the left small symbol corresponds to the left symbol of the decorative symbol, the medium and small symbol corresponds to the middle symbol of the decorative symbol, and the right small symbol corresponds to the middle symbol of the decorative symbol. The small symbol changes display in sync with the special symbol and decorative symbol changes, and the small symbol stops displaying in sync with the special symbol and decorative symbol stops displaying.

In this embodiment, the decorative symbols display a definite stop and a tentative stop, whereas the small symbols display a definite stop but do not display a tentative stop. In other words, even if the decorative symbols (at least one of the left symbol, symbol, and right symbol) display a tentative stop, the small symbols continue to display in a variable manner without displaying a tentative stop.

In addition, the variable display of the small pattern may be a display mode in which the numbers "1" to "9" are scrolled (for example, vertically or horizontally) in the same manner as the variable display of the decorative pattern, but unlike the variable display of the decorative pattern, a display mode in which a combination of predetermined specific numbers is switched and displayed at predetermined intervals is preferable. As an example, it is possible to apply a configuration in which "1, 3, 5", "4, 6, 8", "7, 9, 2", etc. are adopted as combinations of three patterns (combinations of specific numbers) that constitute the small pattern, and a specific number is repeatedly displayed, such as "1, 3, 5" → "4, 6, 8" → "7, 9, 2" → "1, 3, 5" → "4, 6, 8" → "7, 9, 2" → .... With such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the control of the variable display of the small pattern.

The small symbols only need to enable the player to recognize that the special symbols are being displayed as a variable or fixed stop symbol, and do not necessarily have to be a combination of three symbols to display the variable or fixed stop symbol, as with the decorative symbols; they may be a combination of two symbols, or just one symbol to display the variable or fixed stop symbol (or other simplified symbols, colors, or other identifying elements).

The reserved number display area P740 is a display area for displaying the number of activated reserved balls of the special pattern. This reserved number display area P740 includes a first reserved number display area P741 that displays the number of activated reserved balls of the first special pattern, and a second reserved number display area P742 that displays the number of activated reserved balls of the second special pattern. Note that, below, the number of activated reserved balls of the first special pattern may be referred to as the "first special pattern reserved number," and the number of activated reserved balls of the second special pattern may be referred to as the "second special pattern reserved number."

As shown in FIG. 133, the game board P20 is provided with a main control display device P27 controlled by the main control board P100, and a sub-control display device P28 controlled by the performance control board P200. Note that the main control display device P27 is described in detail in the fourth embodiment, and the sub-control display device P28 is described in detail in the sixth embodiment, so their description will be omitted here.

<Movable parts>
In addition, as shown in FIG. 133, the game board P20 is equipped with a plurality of movable parts P651, 652 that perform performance operations according to the development status of the game. The first movable part P651 is configured to be able to slide (reciprocate) in the up-down direction between an initial position (also called the "first initial position" to distinguish it from other initial positions) located at the upper end side of the center decoration P21 and a movable position (also called the "first movable position" to distinguish it from other movable positions) located at the lower end side of the center decoration P21. The second movable part P652 is configured to be able to swing between an initial position (also called the "second initial position" to distinguish it from other initial positions) in which it swings rightward around the fulcrum and retreats to the rear of the center decoration 80, and a movable position (also called the "second movable position" to distinguish it from other movable positions) in which it swings leftward around the fulcrum and appears in front of the screen of the performance display device P70. In addition, Figure 133 shows the state in which each movable part P651, 652 has returned to its initial position (is located in its initial position).

<Performance button>
In addition, the gaming machine of this embodiment is provided with an effect button P15 and a cross key P16 as input devices that can be operated by the player, similar to the gaming machine of the above embodiment (see FIG. 135, etc.). The effect button P15 has a built-in effect button lamp (LED board) 15a. The effect button lamp 15a is provided with a plurality of surface-mounted LEDs as light emitters for illuminating the effect button P15. As the light emitters (LEDs), full-color LEDs having light-emitting elements capable of emitting R (red), G (green), and B (blue) are preferably used. In addition, the effect button P15 is provided with an effect button detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the effect button P15 has been operated. The detection signal of this operation detection sensor is input to the effect control board P200. In addition, the effect button P15 has a built-in vibration motor (not shown) capable of generating vibrations. This vibration motor is connected to the effect control board P200.
The effect button P15 is configured to be able to apply (transmit) vibration under the control of the effect button P15. The effect button P15 may be referred to as an "operation means."

<Decorative design>
Next, a description will be given of the decorative pattern of the seventh embodiment. Fig. 172 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the decorative pattern of the seventh embodiment.

The decorative pattern is a combination of multiple types of identification information (number information, character information, etc.). In this embodiment, the decorative pattern is composed of a number pattern (number image) and a character pattern (character image). The number pattern is composed of patterns showing nine types of numbers from "1" to "9". The character pattern is composed of patterns showing nine types of characters (characters A to I). These nine types of characters are different characters, and examples include the main character, companion characters, and enemy characters. Regarding the number pattern, "1", "5", and "9" may be green, "3" and "7" may be red, and other numbers may be blue. In such a configuration, it is preferable that "3" and "5" correspond to a 4R jackpot in which a transition to a high probability state and/or a high base state is confirmed by the number of the same number, "7" corresponds to a 10R jackpot in which a transition to a high probability state and/or a high base state is confirmed by the number of the same number, and other numbers correspond to a 4R jackpot in which a transition to a high probability state and/or a high base state is not confirmed by the number of the same number (4R jackpot in which a transition to a high probability state and/or a high base state is confirmed if the promotion performance is successful). In addition, the small pattern is composed of only number patterns (not including character patterns), and the color of the numbers is the same as that of the decorative pattern, but as a modified example, all the numbers in the small pattern may be white. In addition, the shape of the numbers may be different between the decorative pattern and the small pattern (for example, the decorative pattern may be in Mincho font and the small pattern may be in Gothic font). In addition, it is preferable that the display area of the character pattern "Character G" is relatively larger than that of the other characters. The same goes for number designs, where it is desirable for the display area of the number "7" to be relatively larger than that of other numbers.

As shown in FIG. 172, the number designs and character designs correspond in a one-to-one relationship, with the character design of "character A" corresponding to the number design of "1," the character design of "character B" corresponding to the number design of "2," the character design of "character C" corresponding to the number design of "3," the character design of "character D" corresponding to the number design of "4," the character design of "character E" corresponding to the number design of "5," the character design of "character F" corresponding to the number design of "6," the character design of "character G" corresponding to the number design of "7," the character design of "character H" corresponding to the number design of "8," and the character design of "character I" corresponding to the number design of "9." Here, for stages A, B, and C, the character patterns associated with each number pattern may be different; for example, in stage B, "character a" through "character i" (characters different from "character A" through "character I") may be associated with the numbers "1" through "9." Similarly, in the time-saving and probability-changing modes, the character patterns associated with each number pattern may be different from those in stages A, B, and C, but in the time-saving and probability-changing modes, the decorative patterns may be composed of only number patterns without any character patterns. In this way, the display mode (character patterns) of the decorative patterns may be different for each stage, but it is preferable that the display mode (color of the numbers) of the small patterns is the same for all stages.

In this embodiment, as a layer for displaying decorative patterns, a layer for displaying character patterns is arranged lower than a layer for displaying number patterns, and a number image is displayed on the front layer (layer with high priority), and a character image is displayed on the back layer (layer with low priority) (number patterns and character patterns are displayed in the order of superimposition from the front side to the back side). As a result, when the number patterns and the character patterns are displayed superimposed, the character patterns are displayed behind the number patterns. Note that, for convenience, in Figs. 183 to 184 described later, the layer for displaying number patterns and the layer for displaying character patterns are illustrated as one decorative pattern layer LA2. As a modified example, the layer for displaying number patterns and the layer for displaying character patterns may be the same layer, and the number patterns may be designed to be placed in front of the character patterns.

As mentioned above, the correspondence between the number patterns and the character patterns does not have to be one-to-one, and may change depending on the game state (presentation mode/presentation stage) during the game. In addition to the number patterns and character patterns, other decorative pattern components may include character name patterns that indicate the character's name, and background patterns that serve as the background for the number patterns and/or character patterns (background patterns attached to the back of the number patterns and character patterns to make them look more luxurious).

In addition to the normal decorative patterns consisting of number and character patterns, the decorative patterns in this embodiment include special decorative patterns (special patterns) that are different from the normal decorative patterns. These special patterns include pseudo-consecutive patterns such as "NEXT" that are temporary stop patterns that suggest the occurrence of a pseudo-consecutive pattern, and development patterns such as "SP" that are temporary stop patterns that suggest the occurrence of an SP reach. These special patterns are not included in the normal pattern arrangement of decorative patterns, and can be temporarily displayed in the variation performance of a specific variation pattern (pseudo-consecutive variation pattern). Therefore, as will be described in detail later, the only decorative patterns that can be displayed in the variation standby state (variation standby period) are the normal decorative patterns (number and character patterns), and special patterns are not displayed in the variation standby state (variation standby period).

As mentioned above, the pattern attribute of each decorative pattern is determined by the type of color attached to the number pattern. In other words, although multiple decorative patterns are composed of different identification information (numbers, characters), they are grouped into the same pattern attribute by attaching a common color to the number pattern. In this embodiment, three types of colors are set as the decorative patterns (number patterns): "blue", "green", and "red". Specifically, the decorative patterns "2", "4", "6", and "8" are classified as blue pattern attributes (blue attribute), the decorative patterns "1", "5", and "9" are classified as green pattern attributes (green attribute), and the decorative patterns "3" and "7" are classified as red pattern attributes (red attribute). In this embodiment, the pattern attributes of the decorative patterns are in the order of "blue" < "green" < "red", and the expectation of winning balls and the expectation of transition to a certain probability increase by one step each. For the sake of convenience, the decorative patterns with blue attributes will be referred to as "blue patterns," the decorative patterns with green attributes as "green patterns," and the decorative patterns with red attributes as "red patterns." In addition, in the drawings, the display colors "blue," "green," and "red" are all expressed as "white" to clarify the number patterns.

As a modified example, the color of the number pattern may be changed according to the current game state (presentation mode/presentation stage). For example, when the current game state is a low base state, the decorative patterns "2", "4", "6", and "8" may be formed as blue patterns, the decorative patterns "1", "5", and "9" as green patterns, and the decorative patterns "3" and "7" as red patterns. When the current game state is a high base state, the decorative patterns "2", "4", "6", and "8" may be formed as blue patterns, the decorative patterns "1", "5", and "9" as green patterns, the decorative pattern "3" as red patterns, and the decorative pattern "7" as gold patterns. Also, as described above, the character of the character pattern may be changed according to the current game state (presentation mode/presentation stage). When the current game state is a low base state, the nine types of characters may be composed of characters A to I, and when the current game state is a high base state, the nine types of characters may be composed of characters a to i.

In this embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot (also called a "jackpot symbol combination" or "jackpot pattern") is composed of a stop pattern combination of "* * *" in which three decorative symbols with the same identification information (numbers and characters) are lined up (*: decorative symbol of any number). In other words, this jackpot symbol combination (also called a jackpot pattern or double number) is a stop pattern combination in which all decorative symbols with the same identification information (numbers and characters) are lined up, such as "1 1 1", "2 2 2", "3 3 3", "4 4 4", "5 5 5", "6 6 6", "7 7 7", "8 8 8", and "9 9 9".

A combination of decorative symbols that indicates a loss (also called a "loss symbol combination" or "loss mark") is a combination of stopping patterns in which at least one of the three decorative symbols is different from the other decorative symbols (for example, "1, 3, 8" or "5, 6, 7"). Here, among the losing symbol combinations, stopping pattern combinations in which the left and right decorative symbols match and only the center symbol is different (for example, shifted by several frames forward or backward) (for example, "2, 4, 2" or "7, 8, 7") are also called "reach loss combinations" or "reach loss marks".

During the variable display of decorative symbols, the combination of decorative symbols when the left and right symbols of the three decorative symbols are displayed temporarily stopped in a matching state and the remaining middle symbol is displayed scrolling (i.e., the combination of decorative symbols when a reach is established) is also called a "reach state eye". In this embodiment, the decorative symbol combination called a chance eye (same color symbol combination) is set as the decorative symbol combination (combination indicating a miss) that is stopped and displayed in a predetermined look-ahead performance (same color symbol stop look-ahead performance) (described in detail later).

<Background image>
The background image is an image that is superimposed as a background display of a decorative pattern, a small pattern, a reserved image, a changing image, a preview performance image, etc. This background image is composed of moving images or still images related to the anime, games, TV dramas, etc. that are the subject of this gaming machine. The background images in this embodiment include a stage background image and a reach background image. The contents of each background image will be described later.

<BGM: Background Music>
In this embodiment, multiple types of BGM are set as the BGM (background music) output from the speaker. The BGM in this embodiment includes stage BGM and reach BGM. The various BGM are stored in the ROM P302 (audio ROM, etc.) of the image control board P300, and can be read by the sub-sub CPU P301 or the audio IC. The contents of each BGM will be described later.

Next, the contents of the game effects that are characteristic of the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, such as "mode effects (stage effects)", "image action effects", "image transformation effects", and "button effects", will be explained. In the following explanation, for convenience, the activation reserved ball that triggers the execution of the pre-reading effect or pre-reading lottery is also called the "target activation reserved ball", and the activation reserved ball that is consumed before the target activation reserved ball is also called the "pre-target activation reserved ball". In addition, the reserved image corresponding to the target activation reserved ball is also called the "target reserved image", and the reserved image corresponding to the activation reserved ball in front of the target is also called the "pre-target reserved image". In addition, the changing image displayed when the target activation reserved ball is consumed is also called the "target changing image", and the changing image displayed when the activation reserved ball in front of the target is consumed is also called the "pre-target changing image". In addition, the changing display executed when the target activation reserved ball is consumed is also called the "target changing display", and the changing display executed when the activation reserved ball in front of the target is consumed is also called the "target changing display".

[Mode Presentation]
First, the mode presentation (stage presentation) of the seventh embodiment will be described. Note that Fig. 173 is a schematic diagram for explaining the mode presentation (stage presentation) of the seventh embodiment. The mode presentation (stage presentation) of this embodiment is a presentation dependent on the presentation mode (presentation stage) in which a background image and BGM corresponding to the currently present presentation mode (presentation stage) are set.

In the seventh embodiment, as in the second embodiment, when the game state is a normal game state (low probability, low base state), a "normal presentation mode" is set, when the game state is a time-saving game state (low probability, low base state), a "time-saving presentation mode" is set, and when the game state is a probability-changing game state (high probability, high base state), a "probability-changing presentation mode" is set. Depending on the game state (or the variation pattern selection state) and the number of times the special pattern is displayed, which are managed on the main control board P100 side, one of a plurality of presentation modes is selectively set, and a variable presentation according to the set presentation mode is executed. When a presentation mode is set, a background image (referred to as a "stage background image") dedicated to that presentation mode is set as a presentation (variable presentation) that suggests that the presentation mode is in question, and BGM (referred to as a "stage BGM") dedicated to that presentation mode is set. In this way, the stage background image and stage BGM are set to be different for each presentation mode, so the player can tell which presentation mode they are currently in from the type of stage background image or stage BGM.

<Normal performance mode>
When the presentation mode is the normal presentation mode (when the game state is a low probability low base state), a stage background image corresponding to the normal presentation mode (referred to as the "normal background image") is displayed on the screen, and stage BGM corresponding to the normal presentation mode (referred to as the "normal BGM") is output from speaker P11.

In the normal performance mode, four types of performance stages are set: stage A, stage B, stage C, and the look-ahead stage. After a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 spins) of variable display or when the SP reach variable display ends with a "miss", the stage A transitions to stage B, stage B transitions to stage C, or stage C transitions to stage A. If the player wins the execution (transition) of the look-ahead stage in the look-ahead lottery (preview performance judgment), the stage transitions from the currently-present performance stage to the "look-ahead stage" (the execution of the SP reach is confirmed at the time of transition to the "look-ahead stage", and if the player wins, a double number is displayed in the "look-ahead stage", and if the player misses, a number other than a double number is displayed in the "look-ahead stage", and the next change returns to the stage before the "look-ahead stage", or returns to the stage before the "look-ahead stage" after the SP reach misses during the change). As mentioned above, the SP reach is configured as a battle performance (battle reach performance) in which, for example, an ally character fights an enemy character. SP reach A is a battle presentation in which the player faces enemy character A (expected jackpot probability 10%), SP reach B is a battle presentation in which the player faces enemy character B (expected jackpot probability 20%), and SP reach C is a battle presentation in which the player faces enemy character C (expected jackpot probability 60%).Several presentation routes 1 to 3 are set as presentation routes for the variable display of this SP reach, and the result of the variable display (win or lose of the battle presentation) is derived through a different presentation process for each presentation route.Presentation route 1 is a "jackpot" route in which the result of the SP reach (battle presentation) is a victory, presentation route 2 is a "miss" route in which the result of the SP reach (battle presentation) is a defeat, and presentation route 3 is a "jackpot" route in which the result of the SP reach (battle presentation) appears to be a defeat but then a comeback victory. These SP Reach A to C are executed in the normal performance stage, but in the time-saving performance mode, SP Reach D (15% chance of winning) and SP Reach E (50% chance of winning)
are executed in the same presentation mode (a battle presentation in which the player fights an enemy character, and presentation routes 1 to 3 are set), and in the special bonus presentation mode, SP reach F (expected jackpot probability 40%) and SP reach G (expected jackpot probability 70%) are executed in the same presentation mode (a battle presentation in which the player fights an enemy character, and presentation routes 1 to 3 are set).

In this normal presentation mode, multiple different types of stage background images (normal background images) are set according to the type of presentation stage, and there is a stage background image displayed corresponding to stage A (referred to as "normal background image A"), a stage background image displayed corresponding to stage B (referred to as "normal background image B"), a stage background image displayed corresponding to stage C (referred to as "normal background image C"), and a stage background image displayed corresponding to the preview stage (referred to as "normal background image D").

In addition, in normal presentation mode, multiple different types of stage BGM (normal BGM) are set according to the type of presentation stage, with stage BGM (called "normal BGM-A") output corresponding to stage A, stage BGM (normal BGM-B) output corresponding to stage B, stage BGM (normal BGM-C) output corresponding to stage C, and stage BGM (normal BGM-D) output corresponding to the pre-read stage. These normal BGM-A to D are output in synchronization or harmony with the normal background images A to D during normal presentation mode.

Stage A in the normal presentation mode is configured as a default presentation stage that is initialized (initially displayed) when the power is restored after a power outage occurs during a stay in the normal presentation mode (any presentation stage). Therefore, the normal background image A set corresponding to stage A is the default stage background image (normal background image) in the normal presentation mode (low base state) that is set first when the power is restored in the normal presentation mode (any presentation stage). In addition, this normal background image A is also the stage background image that is played first when the presentation mode transitions to the normal presentation mode (when the game state transitions to the low base state). Similarly, the normal BGM-A set corresponding to stage A is the default stage BGM (normal BGM) in the normal presentation mode (low base state) that is set first when the power is restored in the normal presentation mode (any presentation stage). In addition, this normal BGM-A is also the stage BGM that is played first when the presentation mode transitions to the normal presentation mode (when the game state transitions to the low base state). In either game state (low base state/high base state), when the power is restored in RAM clear mode, the normal background image A is set (displayed) first as the stage background image when the power is restored, and the stage BGM-A is set (output) first as the BGM when the power is restored. In this embodiment, the normal background image A, which is the default stage background image in the normal presentation mode (low base state), may be referred to as the "first stage background image", and the normal BGM-A, which is the default stage BGM in the normal presentation mode (in the low base state), may be referred to as the "first stage BGM". As a modified example, in the low base state to which the transition is made when the high base state ends (including the low base state to which the transition is made after the end of a special game performed during the high base state), immediately after the transition to the low base (for example, 10 fluctuations after the transition), the transition may be made to stage C instead of stage A, or to a special stage such as stage D, which is a new stage (a special stage to which stage BGM-D is output).

In addition, in this normal presentation mode, regardless of which presentation stage you are in, if the display change that is being performed is a normal change (non-reach change), the normal background image of the type corresponding to that presentation stage will be displayed continuously from the start to the end (when it stops) of the decorative pattern display change, and the normal BGM of the type corresponding to that presentation stage will be output continuously.

Here, when the currently present performance stage is stage A, if the change display is a normal miss change (not a reach miss) and the next change display is also a normal miss change (not a reach miss), at the end of the change display (when the fixed stop is reached), the normal background image A being displayed and the normal BGM-A being output are displayed or output continuously across the next change display without interruption (without interruption). In other words, if there are multiple consecutive miss normal changes (not a reach miss), the normal background image A will be displayed continuously across these multiple normal changes without interruption, and the normal BGM-A will be output continuously without interruption.

When the currently active performance stage is stage B, stage C, or a look-ahead stage, even if the current display change is a normal miss (not a miss) and the next display change is also a normal miss (not a miss), the end of the current display change (confirmed stop) will cause the normal background images B-D being displayed and the normal BGM-B-D being output to be interrupted (ended), and the start of the next display change will cause the normal background images B-D to be displayed again from the beginning (the start of the moving image) and the normal stage BGM-B-D to be output again from the beginning (the start of the music).

In addition, in normal presentation mode, pseudo consecutive presentations can be executed while the variable display is being executed, regardless of whether the currently present presentation stage is Stage A, Stage B, Stage C, or the look-ahead stage. However, regardless of which presentation stage you are currently on, when the pseudo consecutive presentation is temporarily stopped (when a specific pseudo consecutive pattern (for example, a pattern of the letters "NEXT") is displayed as a middle pattern near a specific temporary stop position and then temporarily stopped), the stage BGM is not output (interrupted), and the re-variation display triggers the stage BGM to start from the beginning, or it switches to a specific BGM different from the one before the re-variation display.

<Time-saving mode>
When the presentation mode is the time-saving presentation mode (when the game state is the low-probability high-base state), a stage background image (referred to as the "time-saving background image") corresponding to the time-saving presentation mode is displayed on the screen, and a stage BGM (referred to as the "time-saving BGM") corresponding to the time-saving presentation mode is output from the speaker. The time-saving background image is a default stage background image set in response to the time-saving presentation mode, that is, a background image (stage background image) that is set first when the power is restored in the time-saving presentation mode. In addition, this time-saving background image is also a stage background image that is displayed first when the presentation mode is shifted to the time-saving presentation mode (when the game state is shifted to the low-probability high-base state). Similarly, the time-saving BGM is a stage BGM set in response to the time-saving presentation mode, that is, a BGM (stage BGM) that is set first when the power is restored in the time-saving presentation mode. This time-saving BGM is also the music that is played first when the presentation mode is switched to the time-saving presentation mode (when the game state is switched to the low-probability, high-base state), or the BGM that is automatically played when the stage BGM is not set by the player's operation before the presentation mode is switched to the time-saving presentation mode (before the game state is switched to the low-probability, high-base state). This time-saving BGM is output in a form that is synchronized or in harmony with the time-saving background image during the time-saving presentation mode.

In this time-saving presentation mode, if the currently executing variable display is a normal variable (non-reach variable), the time-saving background image is continuously displayed and the time-saving BGM is continuously output from the start to the end (confirmed stop) of the decorative pattern variable display. In this time-saving presentation mode, as will be described in detail later, additional stage BGM is set that is unlocked depending on the progress of the game, and the currently output stage BGM (time-saving BGM) can be changed to another stage BGM. In other words, the time-saving presentation mode is a presentation mode in which the stage BGM can be selected. In the time-saving presentation mode, pseudo consecutive presentations are not executed while the variable display is being executed.

Also, when the current presentation mode is the time-saving presentation mode, if the variable display is a normal miss (not a miss) and the next variable display is also a normal miss (not a miss), at the end of the variable display (when the fixed stop is reached), the time-saving background image being displayed and the time-saving BGM being output are displayed or output continuously across the next variable display without interruption (without interruption). In other words, if multiple miss normal variations (not a miss) occur in succession, the time-saving background image is displayed continuously across these multiple normal variations without interruption, and the time-saving BGM is output continuously without interruption.
<Chance special performance mode>

When the presentation mode is the probability variation presentation mode (when the game state is a high probability high base state), a stage background image (referred to as the "probability variation background image") corresponding to the probability variation presentation mode is displayed on the screen, and stage BGM (referred to as the "probability variation BGM") corresponding to the probability variation presentation mode is output from the speaker. The probability variation background image is the default stage background image set in response to the probability variation presentation mode, that is, the background image (stage background image) that is set first when the power is restored in the probability variation presentation mode. In addition, this probability variation background image is also the stage background image that is displayed first when the presentation mode transitions to the probability variation presentation mode (when the game state transitions to a high probability high base state). Similarly, the probability variation BGM is the stage BGM set in response to the probability variation presentation mode, that is, the BGM (stage BGM) that is set first when the power is restored in the probability variation presentation mode. This special BGM is also the first song to be played when the performance mode transitions to the special mode (when the game state transitions to a high probability, high base state), or the BGM that is automatically played if the stage BGM has not been set by the player before the performance mode transitions to the special mode (before the game state transitions to a high probability, high base technique state). This special BGM is output in a form that is synchronized or in harmony with the special mode background image during the special mode.

In this special probability mode, if the currently executing variable display is a normal variable (non-reach variable), the special probability background image is continuously displayed and the special probability BGM is continuously output from the start to the end (fixed stop) of the decorative pattern variable display. In this special probability mode, as will be described in detail later, additional stage BGM is set that is unlocked depending on the progress of the game, and the currently output stage BGM (special probability BGM) can be changed to another stage BGM. In other words, the special probability mode is a display mode in which the stage BGM can be selected. In the special probability mode, pseudo consecutive performances are not executed while the variable display is being executed.

In addition, when the current presentation mode is the probability variation presentation mode, if the relevant variable display is a normal miss (non-miss) and the next variable display is also a normal miss (non-miss), at the end of the relevant variable display (when it stops to be confirmed), the probability variation background image being displayed and the probability variation BGM being output will be displayed or output continuously across the next variable display without interruption (without being interrupted). In other words, if there are multiple consecutive miss normal variations (non-miss), the probability variation background image will be displayed continuously across these multiple normal variations without interruption, and the probability variation BGM will be output continuously across these multiple normal variations.

In this embodiment, as the default stage background image displayed in the high base state, a default stage background image (time-saving background image) displayed in the low probability high base state (time-saving performance mode) and a default stage background image (probability change background image) displayed in the high probability high base state (probability change performance mode) are set, but in the following, when there is no need to particularly distinguish between the two (time-saving background image and probability change background image), the default stage background image displayed in this high base state is also collectively referred to as the "second stage background image". Similarly, in this embodiment, as the default stage BGM output in the high base state, a default stage BGM (time-saving BGM) output in the low probability high base state (time-saving performance mode) and a default stage BGM (probability change BGM) output in the high probability high base state (probability change performance mode) are set, but in the following, when there is no need to particularly distinguish between the two (probability change BGM and time-saving BGM), the default stage BGM output in this high base state is also collectively referred to as the "second stage BGM".

<Reach background image/Reach BGM>
In this embodiment, in each presentation mode (presentation stage), when the variable display being executed is an SP reach variable, from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until it develops into an SP reach (until the reach is established and develops into an SP reach), a stage background image corresponding to the current presentation mode (presentation stage) is continuously displayed, and a stage BGM corresponding to the current presentation mode (presentation stage) is continuously output. When it develops into an SP reach during the execution of this variable display, the background image being displayed is switched from the stage background image to a background image dedicated to the SP reach (referred to as a "reach background image"), and the BGM being output is switched from the stage BGM to a BGM dedicated to the SP reach (referred to as a "reach BGM"). This reach background image and reach BGM are set according to the type of SP reach performance in each presentation mode (presentation stage), and if the type of SP reach performance is different, the reach background image and reach BGM will be different. When the SP reach performance ends in the variable display, the background image being displayed returns from the reach background image to the original stage background image (the stage background image displayed before the development to the SP reach) at the end of or immediately after the end of the SP reach performance. Also, when the reach background image returns to the original stage background image in the variable display, even if the stage background image is displayed until the next variable display starts, the corresponding stage BGM is not output, and the reach BGM is not output either. That is, until the next variable display starts, there is no sound, or a specific BGM different from the stage BGM and the reach BGM is output. Also, if the SP reach performance ends with a "miss", at the start of the next variable display, the stage background image corresponding to the current performance mode (performance stage) is displayed from the beginning (the beginning of the moving image), and the stage BGM corresponding to the current performance mode (performance stage) is output from the beginning (the beginning of the music). In other words, as described above, when the current presentation mode (presentation stage) is stage A of the normal presentation mode, the time-saving presentation mode, or the special chance presentation mode, even if the non-reach variable display ends with a "miss" (definite stop), the stage BGM continues to be output without interruption (ending) through to the next variable display, but even in these presentation modes and presentation stages, if the variable display goes through an SP reach and becomes a "miss", the stage BGM will be interrupted before the variable display ends (definite stop), and the stage BGM will start from the beginning when the next variable display starts.

In this embodiment, if the display change is an SP reach change, the original stage background image is restored at or after the end of the SP reach. However, if the display change is an SP reach change of a jackpot, the reach background image may be continuously displayed until the decorative pattern is displayed as a confirmed stop, and the original stage background image may not be restored. However, if the display change is an SP reach change of a miss, the original stage background image is restored before the decorative pattern is displayed as a confirmed stop. It is preferable that the return from the reach background image to the original stage background image occurs during or immediately before the decorative pattern is displayed as a tentative stop.

Also, as a modified example, when the variable display being executed is an SP reach variable, from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the reach is established, a stage background image corresponding to the current presentation mode (presentation stage) is displayed and stage BGM corresponding to the current presentation mode (presentation stage) is output, from the establishment of the reach until the development of the SP reach, a reach background image dedicated to the N reach (a reach presentation in which the reach is established in the current presentation mode and the reach state continues for a predetermined time, and which may then develop into an SP reach, also referred to as a normal reach as described above) is displayed and reach BGM dedicated to the N reach is output, and from the development of the SP reach (until it returns to the original stage background image), a reach background image dedicated to the SP reach is displayed and reach BGM dedicated to the SP reach may be output. Note that during both the N reach and the SP reach, all of the small patterns (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern) continue to vary (i.e., the reach state is not formed).

<BGM selection performance>
Next, the BGM selection effect performed in the high base state (advantageous gaming state) will be described. Figure 174 is a schematic diagram showing the display screen of the BGM selection effect.

In this embodiment, a BGM selection effect can be executed in which the stage BGM to be output while the high base state is in progress is selected by the player (operation of the effect button P15 and cross key P16). Therefore, while the high base state is in progress, the default stage BGM (second stage BGM) output during this high base state can be changed to another stage BGM (third stage BGM).

The BGM selection performance is executed during a predetermined period during which the player stays in a high base state (referred to as the "BGM selectable period"). This BGM selectable period includes the period during which the player stays in a high base state during normal fluctuations (non-reach miss fluctuations with a fluctuation time of a predetermined time or more) (including the pattern fixed period) and the predetermined period from the start of the reach fluctuation to the establishment of the reach. In addition, for shortened fluctuations (non-reach miss fluctuations with a fluctuation time of less than a predetermined time) that have a shorter fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation, the time width for selecting BGM cannot be secured, so they are excluded from the BGM selectable period, but even this shortened fluctuation may be considered as the BGM selectable period (this is because, considering that BGM can be selected including the pattern fixed period, BGM can be selected over the shortened fluctuation, the pattern fixed period after the shortened fluctuation ends, and the new fluctuation executed after the pattern fixed period ends, even if it is a shortened fluctuation, the BGM selectable period is sufficiently secured when including the subsequent fluctuations). In addition, in the period after the reach is established, the BGM set exclusively for the SP reach (reach BGM synchronized or harmonized with the reach background image, also called SP reach BGM) will be output when the SP reach develops. During this period, as described above, the BGM cannot be selected. As a modified example, the BGM selection performance may be executed in response to the execution of a specific variable display in the high base state. Examples of the specific variable display include the start of the variable display when a predetermined pre-reading performance is started, or during the variable display, and the start of the variable display of the 91st spin when the high base state transitions to a low base state in response to the end of the variable display of 100 spins (assuming that no jackpot is won during the 100 spins). As a further modified example, the BGM selection performance may be executed other than such a specific variable display in the high base state (to be precise, other than during the development of the SP reach in a variable display other than the specific variable display). The symbol fixing period (symbol fixing time) is a period also called a fixed stop period (fixed stop time), and is a period during which the fixed stop state is maintained from when the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol ends and the special symbol or decorative symbol stops to when the next variable starts. By having this symbol fixing period (symbol fixing time), the player can recognize that the special symbol or decorative symbol has stopped being fixed (in other words, that it is in a non-changing state), and can clearly grasp the boundary between the variables. The symbol fixing period (symbol fixing time) is 0.5 seconds in any variable display (non-reach variable or reach variable of the first special symbol, and non-reach variable or reach variable of the variable display of the second special symbol). As a modified example, the symbol fixing period (symbol fixing time) of the first special symbol in the low base state may be 0.5 seconds, and the symbol fixing period (symbol fixing time) of the second special symbol in the high base state may be 0.3 seconds. In the following, when the term "pattern fixing time (pattern fixing period)" is used, it refers to both the pattern fixing time (pattern fixing period) of the special pattern and the pattern fixing time (pattern fixing period) of the decorative pattern, unless otherwise specified.

In this BGM selection performance, additional stage BGM (music) is released that the player can select. In other words, when the BGM selection performance occurs in a high base state, a different type of stage BGM (third stage BGM) from the default stage BGM (second stage BGM) is added as stage BGM that the player can select. Therefore, while the BGM selection performance is being executed, the type of BGM being output can be changed from second stage BGM to third stage BGM by the player's selection operation.

In this embodiment, the number of types of third stage BGM that are additionally opened increases each time a predetermined condition is satisfied in the high base state. As an example, the number of types of third stage BGM that the player can select may be increased according to the number of consecutive wins, so that the range of third stage BGM selection may be expanded with each consecutive win. "Continuous win" refers to the continuation of the specific game state again as the game state after the end of the special game when a predetermined jackpot is won in the specific game state. Here, the specific game state is a state in which the probability of transitioning to the special game is higher than in the normal game state, and at least one of the functions of the probability fluctuation function of the special pattern, the fluctuation time reduction function of the special pattern, and the electric chute support function is activated. As another example, the number of types of third stage BGM that the player can select may be increased when a predetermined jackpot is won in the high base state. The "predetermined jackpot" may be, for example, the most advantageous jackpot for the player among the multiple jackpot types set in this gaming machine, or a jackpot (specific jackpot) that triggers a transition to a certain probability game state. Note that this third stage BGM may already be selectable before the consecutive wins. In other words, if a jackpot occurs in a low probability low base state and then transitions to a low probability high base state or a high probability low base state, not only the second stage BGM but also multiple types of third stage BGM (for example, two types of songs, song 2 and song 3, described below) may be selectable at that point. In addition, all types of third stage BGM may already be selectable before the consecutive wins.

In the BGM selection performance, as shown in FIG. 174, an image showing the names of multiple types of third stage BGM as BGM options, an image of a cross key switch 16 (upper and lower keys P16a, 16b) for selecting BGM, and an image of a performance button P15 for deciding the selected BGM are displayed on the screen (these are also referred to as images related to the BGM selection performance). In the illustrated example, third stage BGM-A (music 2), third stage BGM-B (music 3), and third stage BGM-C (music 4) are set as multiple types of third stage BGM. That is, in FIG. 173, from the top, the name of the default second stage BGM that has been output up to now, "music 1", and the names of three types of third stage BGM that indicate candidates as new options (the name of the third stage BGM-A, "music 2", the name of the third stage BGM-B, "music 3", and the name of the third stage BGM-C, "music 4") are displayed. The additionally released third stage BGM-A to C are each composed of different music pieces. In this way, the desired stage BGM can be selected by operating the up and down keys, and the selected stage BGM can be confirmed by operating the performance button P15. As a modified example, the performance button P15 need not be operated and the selected stage BGM may be confirmed by operating only the above keys. In other words, the selection may be completed by simply aligning the desired music piece name with the cursor location with a right arrow by operating the up and down keys. In the illustrated example, the third stage BGM-A is selected from among a plurality of types of stage BGM. This third stage BGM-A is a music piece with a slower tempo than the first stage BGM-A. Also, the second stage BGM is a music piece with a faster tempo than the first stage BGM-A. As a modified example, the third stage BGM-A may be a music piece with a faster tempo than the first stage BGM-A and a slower tempo than the second stage BGM, or a music piece with a faster tempo than the second stage BGM. As a modified example, the third stage BGM-B to B-C may be a song with a slower tempo than the first stage BGM-A, a song with a faster tempo than the first stage BGM-A and slower tempo than the second stage BGM, or a song with a faster tempo than the second stage BGM. Although not shown, the decorative pattern and the small pattern can be displayed variably even during the execution of the BGM selection performance, and are displayed simultaneously with the image related to the BGM selection performance. The image related to the BGM selection performance and the decorative pattern are displayed superimposed, but the image related to the BGM selection performance is displayed in the foreground (it is the upper layer), while the image related to the BGM selection performance and the small pattern are not displayed superimposed.

<Stage BGM tempo comparison>
Next, the tempo of the stage BGM (hereinafter simply referred to as "tempo") will be explained. Note that the tempo of BGM is the speed (performance speed) of the sound output as BGM (in other words, it specifies the speed of one beat of the music).

In this embodiment, the first stage BGM (normal BGM-A), which is the default stage BGM in the low base state, is output at a relatively slow tempo, while the second stage BGM (time-saving BGM and/or special chance BGM), which is the default stage BGM in the high base state, is output at a relatively fast tempo. In other words, the tempo of normal BGM-A is set to a slower tempo than that of the time-saving BGM and/or special chance BGM. As an example, normal BGM-A is set to a tempo (slow tempo) slower than a predetermined standard tempo, and the time-saving BGM and/or special chance BGM are set to a tempo (fast tempo) faster than the standard tempo. On the other hand, the tempos of normal BGM-B, BGM-C, and BGM-D are set to a tempo (ultra-fast tempo) faster than that of the time-saving BGM and/or special chance BGM. That is, by making the tempo of the default BGM (time-saving BGM and/or probability-changing BGM) in the high base state faster (up-tempo) than that of the default stage BGM (normal BGM-A) in the low base state, the player's sense of elation when transitioning from the low base state (non-advantageous game state) to the high base state (advantageous game state) can be further enhanced. Also, by making the tempo of the other stage BGM (normal BGM-B to D) faster than that of the default stage BGM (normal BGM-A, time-saving BGM, probability-changing BGM), the player can be provided with the enjoyment of switching the performance stage even while staying in the low base state (non-advantageous game state), and it becomes possible to prevent the stage performance in this low base state (non-advantageous game state) from becoming monotonous.

As a modified example, the tempo (slow tempo) of normal BGM-A, BGM-B, BGM-C, and BGM-D may be set to a slower tempo than the tempo (fast tempo) of the time-saving BGM and/or the special BGM. In other words, by setting the tempo of the first stage BGM output in the low base state in general to a slower tempo than the second stage BGM output in the high base state, it becomes possible to develop BGM that is adapted to the fluctuation efficiency of each game state (the fluctuation efficiency is relatively low in the low base state and the fluctuation efficiency is relatively high in the high base state).

In addition, as a modified example, the tempo (slow tempo) of the normal stage BGM-A, BGM-B, and BGM-C may be set to a slower tempo than the tempo (fast tempo) of the second stage BGM, and the tempo (ultra-fast tempo) of the normal BGM-D may be set to a faster tempo than the tempo (fast tempo) of the time-saving BGM and/or the probability change BGM. In other words, by making the normal BGM-D output in the look-ahead stage the fastest tempo, the look-ahead stage becomes the most speedy BGM development, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the look-ahead performance. In addition, if the re-change display is configured to switch to a specific BGM different from the one before the re-change display, the specific BGM may also be set to a tempo faster than the tempo (slow tempo) of the normal stage BGM-A, BGM-B, and BGM-C. Furthermore, the specific BGM may be set to a tempo faster than the tempo (fast tempo) of the time-saving BGM and/or the probability change BGM (as a further modified example, it may be set to a slow tempo). In addition, the tempo of the SP reach BGM may be changed during the first half, middle, and latter half of the SP reach. If configured in this way, the SP reach BGM in the first half of the SP reach may have a slower tempo than the tempo (slow tempo) of the normal stage BGM-A, BGM-B, and BGM-C, the SP reach BGM in the middle of the SP reach may have a faster tempo than the tempo (slow tempo) of the normal stage BGM-A, BGM-B, and BGM-C, and the SP reach BGM in the latter half of the SP reach may have a slower tempo than the tempo (slow tempo) of the normal stage BGM-A, BGM-B, and BGM-C. Furthermore, the SP reach BGM in the first half of the SP reach may have a slower tempo than the time-saving BGM and/or special BGM (fast tempo), the SP reach BGM in the middle of the SP reach may have a faster tempo than the time-saving BGM and/or special BGM (fast tempo) (a further variant is a slower tempo), and the SP reach BGM in the second half of the SP reach may have a slower tempo than the time-saving BGM and/or special BGM (fast tempo).

Furthermore, as a modified example, the tempo (slow tempo) of the normal stage BGM-A and BGM-B may be set to a slower tempo than the tempo (fast tempo) of the time-saving BGM and/or special BGM, and the tempo (ultra-fast tempo) of the normal stage BGM-C and BGM-D may be set to a faster tempo than the tempo (fast tempo) of the time-saving BGM and/or special BGM.

As a variant, the tempo (slow tempo) of the normal stage BGM-A and BGM-D may be set to a slower tempo than the tempo (fast tempo) of the time-saving BGM and/or special BGM, and the tempo (ultra-fast tempo) of the normal stage BGM-B and BGM-C may be set to a faster tempo than the tempo (fast tempo) of the time-saving BGM and/or special BGM.

[Image movement effects]
Next, the image action presentation of the seventh embodiment will be described. The image action presentation includes a standby action presentation (also referred to as the "first presentation") that is executed when the variable display is not being executed (waiting for a change), and a variable action presentation (also referred to as the second presentation) that is executed when the variable display is being executed. The standby action presentation (first presentation) is configured as a presentation in which, in a state in which the first image is stopped, the second image arranged behind the first image is made to perform a first action. The variable action presentation (second presentation) is configured as a presentation in which, in a state in which the first image is operated, the second image arranged behind the first image is made to perform a second action. In this embodiment, as the two images (first image, second image) that are the subject of the action display in the image action presentation, a decorative pattern is applied to the first image, and a background image (stage background image) is applied to the second image. As will be described in detail later, the two images (first image, second image) that are the subject of the action display in the image action presentation may have a decorative number pattern (number image) applied to the first image, and a decorative character pattern (character image) applied to the second image.

[Standby action]
First, the standby operation performance (first performance) of this embodiment will be described. The standby operation performance is a performance in which the stage background image is made to perform the first operation (first operation display) while the decorative pattern is stopped (still displayed). This standby operation performance is executed during the period in which the special pattern and the decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, that is, during the variable standby period (the period during which the player stays in the variable standby state described above). As described above, the "variable standby state" is a state in which the first special pattern, the second special pattern, the decorative pattern, and the small pattern are not performing a variable display and are in a non-variable display state, and also a state in which neither the activation reserved ball of the first special pattern nor the activation reserved ball of the second special pattern is stored.

Here, FIG. 175 is a schematic diagram for explaining the variable waiting period. This variable waiting period includes a first waiting period and a second waiting period. The end condition of the variable waiting period (referred to as the "waiting end condition") is that a game ball enters the first start hole P51 or the second start hole P52,
The variable display of the special symbol is started. In other words, the end condition of this variable waiting period (waiting end condition) is that the variable start condition of the special symbol is satisfied. Then, when the game moves to this variable waiting period, the variable waiting period continues until the waiting end condition is satisfied, and the variable waiting period ends when the waiting end condition is satisfied. The variable waiting period does not end even if a game ball enters the operation gate P53 or the general winning holes P61 to P64. In addition, the waiting end condition may be that the player touches the launch handle P12 (operates the launch handle P12), that is, that the touch sensor detects the player's contact with the launch handle P12.

The first standby period starts when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the fixed stop time (fixed stop period) has elapsed. That is, when the fixed stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first standby period (variable standby period) starts when the number of balls reserved for the special symbol is not stored. In the following, the fixed stop time (fixed stop period) of the special symbol or decorative symbol may be referred to as the "symbol fixing time (symbol fixing period)". During the first standby period, the above-mentioned standby operation performance (first performance) is executed. In this embodiment, the first standby period is set to, for example, "60 seconds" (the timer is timed for 60 seconds after the first standby period starts, and the first standby period ends when 60 seconds have elapsed), and this time scale is used to execute the standby operation performance. This standby operation performance will be described in detail later, but is executed in a manner that continues the performance display that was displayed just before the variable standby period started, that is, when the fixed stop time (symbol fixing time) has elapsed. That is, in this first waiting period, the stopped display of the decorative pattern and the stopped display of the small pattern that were displayed in the immediately previous fixed stop time (pattern fixed time) are maintained, and the playback display (loop display) of the stage background image that was displayed in the immediately previous fixed stop time (pattern fixed time) is maintained. Then, if the next variable display is not started during the first waiting period (the standby end condition is not satisfied during the first waiting period), and this first waiting period ends, the standby operation performance being executed is interrupted (ended), and the second waiting period (standby demo performance) begins. Therefore, this first waiting period can also be said to be a waiting period until the standby demo performance is executed. In addition, as a modified example, the first waiting period may be started at the same time when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the fixed stop time (fixed stop period) begins. In other words, the first waiting period (variable waiting period) may be started when the number of operation reserved balls for the special pattern is not stored at the start of the fixed stop time of the special pattern.

The second waiting period is a period from the end of the first waiting period until a specific time has elapsed. During the second waiting period, the decorative pattern and stage background image displayed in the immediately preceding first waiting period are not displayed, and a waiting demo performance (waiting demo screen) is executed as a customer waiting performance. In this embodiment, the second waiting period is set to, for example, "30 seconds" (a timer is set to count 30 seconds from the start of the second waiting period and the second waiting period is configured to end after 60 seconds), and the waiting demo performance can be executed using this time scale. In this waiting demo performance, a demonstration movie for explaining or introducing the gaming machine is played as a performance that can identify the variable waiting state. Note that during the second waiting period, that is, during the execution of the waiting demo performance, the stop display of the small pattern continues to be executed. Then, if the next variable display is not started during the second waiting period (the waiting end condition is not satisfied during the second waiting period), and the second waiting period ends, the first waiting period is entered again, and the waiting operation performance is executed again. That is, in this embodiment, when the transition to the variable standby period (variable standby state) occurs, the first standby period → second standby period → first standby period → second standby period → ... is repeated until the standby end condition is met (until the next fluctuation begins). Note that, although volume adjustment is possible in either the first standby period or the second standby period, the timer timing of the first standby performance and the second standby performance is not interrupted even if the volume adjustment operation is performed in either the first standby period or the second standby period. In other words, the volume adjustment operation does not become a standby end condition. Therefore, when the volume adjustment operation is performed, a volume adjustment image is displayed in front of the first standby performance and the second standby performance (on the upper layer).

As described above, the standby action presentation is executed in the first standby period of the variable standby period. More specifically, this standby action presentation is executed every time the first standby period arrives in the variable standby state. Here, the decorative pattern displayed in the standby action presentation is maintained as the same decorative pattern as the fixed and stopped decorative pattern displayed in the most recent variable display. In other words, the same decorative pattern as the fixed and stopped decorative pattern displayed at the end of the most recent variable display will continue to be displayed as a stopped decorative pattern in the standby action presentation. Therefore, even if multiple first standby periods (standby action presentations) are executed between the start and end of the variable standby period, the decorative pattern displayed (stopped) in these multiple standby action presentations will be the same as the decorative pattern displayed as a fixed and stopped decorative pattern displayed at the end of the most recent variable display.

In this standby operation performance, as shown in FIG. 175, the display mode during the stopped display of the decorative pattern has a first display mode and a second display mode. In this embodiment, the display mode during the stopped display of the decorative pattern is the first display mode until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the first standby period began, and when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first standby period began, the display mode during the stopped display of the decorative pattern changes from the first display mode to the second display mode (after the predetermined time has elapsed, the display mode during the stopped display of the decorative pattern becomes the second display mode). In addition, if the first standby period occurs multiple times within one variable standby period, the stopped display mode of the decorative pattern switches from the first display mode to the second display mode only in the first first standby period (the first standby period that arrives after the fixed stop period has elapsed) upon the elapse of the predetermined time, and in the second and subsequent first standby periods (the first standby period that arrives after the second standby period has elapsed), the stopped display mode of the decorative pattern is the second display mode from start to finish (the first display mode is not displayed). In addition, during the first waiting period, the period during which the display mode of the decorative pattern during the stopped display is the first display mode may be referred to as the "first waiting period A", and the period during which the display mode of the decorative pattern during the stopped display is the second display mode may be referred to as the "first waiting period B". Therefore, if the first waiting period occurs multiple times within one variable waiting period, the first first waiting period is composed of the first waiting period A and the second waiting period B, and the second and subsequent first waiting periods are composed only of the first waiting period B. Therefore, the waiting action presentation performed during the first waiting period A can be distinguished as the "waiting action presentation A", and the waiting action presentation performed during the first waiting period B can be distinguished as the "waiting action presentation B".

The first display mode is the same as the display mode of the decorative pattern when it was displayed as a fixed stop in the most recent decorative pattern variable display. In other words, as described above, this first display mode maintains the display mode of the decorative pattern that was displayed as a fixed stop at the end of the most recent variable display. Specifically, this first display mode is a display mode in which the display color of the number pattern is the basic display color when the number pattern is stopped (still) and the character pattern is stopped (still). In other words, in this first display mode, when the entire decorative pattern is stopped (still), the number patterns "2", "4", "6", and "8" are displayed in blue, the number patterns "1", "3", "5", and "9" are displayed in green, and the number pattern "7" is displayed in red.

The second display mode is a display mode in which only the display color of the number pattern is different from the first display mode. That is, in the pattern change performance, when the stop display mode of the decorative pattern is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display mode of the character pattern among the components of the decorative pattern is not changed, and only the display color of the number pattern is changed (the number of the number pattern itself does not change). Specifically, like the first display mode, this second display mode is a display mode in which the display color of the number pattern is a display color different from the basic display color (the display color of the first display mode) when the number pattern is stopped (stationary) and the character pattern is stopped (stationary). That is, in this second display mode, when the decorative pattern is stopped (stationary), the number pattern of any of "1" to "9" is a striped pattern (striped pattern) combining two or more different colors. Therefore, the number pattern of this second display mode is a color in which the color of at least a part of the area (or all areas) of the number pattern of the first display mode has changed to another color. In FIG. 175, in order to make the number patterns clearer, the number patterns in the second display mode are shown painted black.

As a variation of this embodiment, the second display mode of the decorative pattern during the stopped display may be a display mode in which the character pattern constituting the decorative pattern swings (for example, the swinging up and down may be performed in a two-second cycle). Even in this case, if the entire decorative pattern is in a stopped display, that is, if the position coordinates of the entire decorative pattern (position coordinates relative to the entire screen) do not move, it can be said that this decorative pattern (character pattern) continues to be in a stationary state. As other variations, the second display mode of the decorative pattern during the stopped display may be such that the number patterns are erased and only the character pattern is displayed, or the character pattern's expression may change every two seconds, such as smiling or getting angry, or the character may light up in a two-second cycle.

In addition, in the standby operation performance, the first operation of the stage background image is executed in conjunction with the stop display of the decorative pattern in the first display mode or the second display mode. The first operation of the stage background image is configured as an operation display in a mode in which the stage background image is looped (looped playback). The stage background image displayed in this standby operation performance is a stage background image set corresponding to the currently staying performance mode (performance stage). In other words, the stage background image displayed in this standby operation performance is a maintenance of the background image (stage background image) displayed in the fixed stop period immediately before the transition to the variable standby state, and the stage background image displayed at the end of the most recent variable display of the decorative pattern will continue to be displayed in operation (loop operation) in the standby operation performance. Therefore, this standby operation performance can be said to be a performance that continues the performance mode (fixed display of the decorative pattern and loop display of the background image) displayed immediately before the first standby period begins (fixed stop period of the most recent decorative pattern).

The stage background images (normal background image, time-saving background image, and special bonus background image) of this embodiment are composed of moving images (moving image data) that record continuous actions from the first image to the last image. Then, by repeatedly playing back these moving images as the stage background image, an action presentation is performed in which the stage background image repeats a predetermined action display (loop display). Thus, while this stage background image changes over time, it becomes a background image in which the same image is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. Note that the loop display of this stage background image does not have to be composed entirely of dynamic images, and static images (still images) may be included as part of this loop display.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the first waiting period (while the waiting action presentation is being executed), if the waiting end condition or the special symbol change start condition is satisfied (a new special symbol activation pending ball is generated) and the new special symbol change display is started, the decorative symbol change display is started while continuing (without interruption) the loop display of the stage background image that was performed during the first waiting period. In other words, when a new change display is started during the execution of the waiting action presentation, the stage background image loop display is continuously executed before and after the start of the decorative symbol change display (straddling the end of the first waiting period and the start of the new change display) without interrupting the stage background image loop display at the end of this waiting action presentation. This allows the stage background image to be seamlessly connected before and after the start of the new change display, allowing the player to start a new game without feeling uncomfortable.

In this embodiment, the standby operation presentation is configured to be executed from the start of the first standby period (after the decorative pattern fixed stop period has elapsed), but is not limited to this configuration. As described above, the standby operation presentation may be configured to be executed from the start of the decorative pattern fixed stop period (the fixed stop immediately after the decorative pattern's provisional stop display ends). That is,
As mentioned above, the display mode of the decorative pattern during the fixed stop display and the display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the first waiting period are substantially the same display mode, so no contradiction arises even if the start time of this waiting operation presentation is set to the start time of the fixed stop period of the decorative pattern (the fixed stop time immediately after the end of the provisional stop display of the decorative pattern).

[Movement during change]
Next, the operation during change performance (second performance) of this embodiment will be described. The operation during change performance is a performance in which the stage background image is made to perform a second operation (second operation display) while the decorative pattern is being changed (operation display). In this embodiment, the stage background image that is the target of the second operation is the same background image as the stage background image that was the target of the first operation described above. That is, the operation during change performance is performed by making the stage background image that was displayed before or from the start of the decorative pattern change perform the second operation during the change display. This operation during change performance is performed during at least a part of the period during which the stage background image is displayed, from the start of the change display to the stop of the change of the decorative pattern. Therefore, the second operation of the stage background image can be performed during the period during which the stage background image is displayed during the change display, from the start of the change display to the development of the SP reach (the period until it is switched to the reach background image), or during the period from the end of the SP reach to the end of the change display (the period during which the stage background image that returned upon the end of the SP reach is displayed).

In this embodiment, the second action of the background image is configured as an action of vibrating the stage background image up and down (vibration display). That is, in the changing action performance, an action performance of vibrating the stage background image in the loop display up and down (an action performance of vibrating the stage background image up and down while looping the image) is performed. As a modified example, the second action of the background image may be configured as an action of changing the displayed stage background image to another background image (changing action). That is, the changing action performance may be configured as a background change performance of changing the stage background image to another background image (changing action). The other background image is a background image other than the stage background image, and for example, a reach background image, a look-ahead background image, a blackout image, etc. Also, when the currently staying performance stage is shifted to another performance stage, an action of switching from the stage background image displayed corresponding to the currently staying performance stage to the stage background image displayed corresponding to the next performance stage may be applied.

Next, examples of the image action presentation (waiting action presentation and waiting during change presentation) of this embodiment will be described. Figures 176 to 177 are schematic diagrams showing examples of waiting action presentation and waiting during change presentation. Note that in the presentation examples of Figures 176 to 177, each change display is assumed to be a normal change (a change display that is not a missed reach).

First, as shown in (A) in the figure, the display of decorative patterns begins in synchronization with the start of the display of special patterns. A stage background image set corresponding to the currently active performance mode (performance stage) is displayed in a loop in the background of the decorative patterns during this display. This loop display of the stage background image is performed in a manner in which the stage background image is scrolled left and right. Also, in synchronization with the loop display of the stage background image, stage BGM set corresponding to the currently active performance mode (performance stage) is output from speaker P11. Note that when the display of decorative patterns begins, a special operation may be performed in which the decorative patterns move upward once and then downward (scroll display), but such a special operation is not performed for small patterns when the display of small patterns begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 1B, the decorative symbols are displayed temporarily stopped. In this example, the decorative symbols are displayed temporarily stopped in the combination of “2, 1, 4” (miss).

Next, as shown in (C) in the figure, the variable display ends and the decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop with the combination of "2, 1, 4" (a miss), which indicates a miss.

Next, as shown in (D) in the figure, when the activation reserved balls of the first and second special symbols are not stored, the decorative symbol fixed stop time (symbol fixed time) elapses, and the game moves to a variable standby state (variable standby period), and the first standby period begins. With the start of this first standby period, a standby operation performance begins, and the combination of decorative symbols (missing symbols) is displayed in a stopped state in the first display mode from the end of the decorative symbol fixed stop period, and the stage background image is displayed in a continuous loop behind the decorative symbols. During the execution of this standby operation performance (first standby period), the same stage BGM is output from the end of the decorative symbol fixed stop period. In other words, during this first standby period, the stage background image and stage BGM immediately before the start of the first standby period (the most recent decorative symbol fixed stop period) are output continuously. As a variant, the output of the stage BGM may be stopped when the standby action presentation (first standby period) starts (when the decorative pattern determination stop period ends).

Next, as shown in (E) in the figure, when a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the variable waiting period (first waiting period), the display mode of the decorative pattern in the stopped display is switched from the first display mode to the second display mode. Note that even when the stopped display mode of the decorative pattern changes to the second display mode, the stage background image continues to be displayed in a loop and the stage BGM continues to be output. However, in this embodiment, when a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed since the display mode of the decorative pattern in the stopped display changed to the second display mode, the output of the stage BGM is stopped and the silent state (mute state) is entered. Note that, regarding the stop of the output of the stage BGM, the loop playback of the stage BGM may continue, but the volume of the stage BGM may be set to 0 (mute state). When transitioning to the silent state (mute state) or mute state, the silent state may be suddenly entered, but it is preferable to configure it so that the volume is gradually reduced (faded out). In addition, the BGM output before and after the start of the first standby period (the BGM output during a predetermined period before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the first display mode, or the BGM output during a predetermined period after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the first display mode) may be different from the BGM output from when the decorative pattern being stopped and displayed becomes the second display mode until it becomes silent or muted. As another modified example, when the first standby period is executed multiple times during one variable standby period, the BGM output when the decorative pattern changes from the first display mode to the second display mode during the first first standby period may be different from the BGM output when the second or subsequent first standby periods start (i.e., when the decorative pattern appears in the second display mode during the second or subsequent first standby periods).

Next, as shown in (F) in the figure, the first standby period ends and the second standby period begins. When the second standby period begins, the standby action presentation is interrupted and the standby demo presentation begins. That is, when the second standby period begins, the decorative pattern that had been displayed in a stopped state becomes invisible, and the background image is switched from the normal background image to a background image dedicated to the standby demo (demonstration). Also, even during the standby demo presentation (second standby period), the output of the stage BGM is stopped and the silent state (mute state) is entered. As a variant, the loop playback of the stage BGM may continue, but the volume may be set to 0 (mute state). Also, during this second standby period, the decorative pattern becomes invisible, but the small pattern (small pattern in a stopped display) continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in (G) in the figure, when the second standby period ends, the first standby period starts again. In this second first standby period, the standby operation performance includes the display of the decorative pattern and the loop display of the stage background image. The display mode of the decorative pattern in this standby operation performance is the same as the display mode (second display mode) of the decorative pattern that was displayed at the end of the previous standby operation performance. In other words, in the second standby operation performance, the display mode of the decorative pattern is the second display mode from start to finish (it never becomes the first display mode). In addition, in this first standby period, the output of the stage BGM is stopped and the silent state (mute state) continues from the end of the most recent standby demo performance. In addition, as a modified example, the loop playback of the stage BGM may continue, but the volume may be set to 0 (mute state).

Next, as shown in (H) in the figure, when the standby end condition is satisfied during the first standby period, the variable standby period ends, the variable display of the decorative patterns begins, and the stage background image is displayed in a loop that has continued from the end of the previous first standby period. In other words, the end of the variable standby period triggers the decorative patterns to switch from a stopped display (static display) to a variable display (moving display), and the stage background image continues to be displayed in a loop both before and after the end of the variable standby period (before and after the start of the variable display). In addition, the start of a new variable display triggers the start or restart of output of the stage BGM. When this new display change begins, the stage BGM may be output from the beginning (the beginning of the song), but as mentioned above, even in a silent state (silenced state) such as when a standby demo performance is being performed, if the volume is set to 0 (muted state) while looping the stage BGM to continue, the volume of the looped stage BGM may be returned to normal from the point when this new display change begins, so that the stage BGM is output from the middle (the middle of the song) when the change begins.

Next, as shown in (I) in the figure, while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a changing manner, a button effect occurs and an image prompting the player to operate the button is displayed on the screen. Details of the button effect will be described later.

Next, as shown in (J) in the figure, operation of effect button P15 triggers the execution of a during-changing action effect that vibrates the displayed stage background image up and down. In other words, in the during-changing action effect shown in the figure, the loop display of the stage background image is temporarily stopped and the screen vibrates up and down, just as if due to the force (recoil) generated when effect button P15 was operated. As a variant, the during-changing action effect may be configured to be executed immediately after a dialogue preview effect is executed in which a specified character image appears and utters the line "It's shaking!".

Next, as shown in (K) in the figure, when the changing action presentation ends, the loop display of the stage background image is resumed. Note that this changing action presentation may also include a vibration action (second action) while continuing the loop display of the stage background image (first action).

Next, as shown in (L) in the figure, the decorative symbols are displayed as a provisional stop in the combination "3-3-5" (a miss).

Next, as shown in (M) in the figure, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols ends, and the decorative symbols are displayed as a fixed stop with the combination of "3-3-5" (miss), which indicates a miss. Note that in the illustrated example, when the variable display ends (when the fixed stop display is displayed), the activation pending ball for the special symbol is stored, so there is no transition to the variable standby period after the variable display ends (after the fixed stop time has elapsed).

Next, as shown in (N) in the figure, the next special symbol variable display starts, and in synchronization with the start of the special symbol variable display, the decorative symbol variable display starts. In this way, the stage background image loop display continues from (A) in the figure until just before (F) in the figure, and the stage background image loop display continues from (G) in the figure to (N) in the figure (as mentioned above, the loop display may be temporarily suspended when the variable operation performance is being performed, but the loop display may also continue during the variable operation performance).

<Contents of standby action effects according to game status>
In this embodiment, the content of the standby operation presentation is different depending on the current game state (low base state/high base state). That is, when the current game state is a low base state (normal game state), the stage background image (normal background image) corresponding to the low base state is displayed in a loop during the display of the decorative pattern. Also, when the current game state is a high base state (time-saving game state or probability-changing game state), the stage background image (time-saving background image or probability-changing background image) corresponding to the high base state is displayed in a loop during the display of the decorative pattern. In this way, since the stage background image is different depending on the current game state (low base state/high base state), the content of the standby operation presentation is different depending on the current game state (low base state/high base state). As mentioned above, the decorative patterns (such as character patterns) that are displayed in a variable manner and stopped in the low base state and the decorative patterns (such as character patterns) that are displayed in a variable manner and stopped in the high base state can be formed with different patterns (by making the stopped display manner of the decorative patterns different), so that the standby operation performance performed in the low base state and the standby operation performance performed in the high base state can be configured to have different performance contents.

<Contents of the action effects during fluctuations according to the game state>
In addition, in this embodiment, the content of the action during the change varies depending on the current game state (low base state/high base state). That is, when the current game state is a low base state, the stage background image (normal background image) corresponding to the low base state vibrates during the display of the decorative pattern. Also, when the current game state is a high base state, the stage background image (time-saving background image or probability-changing background image) corresponding to the high base state vibrates during the display of the decorative pattern. In this way, since the stage background image differs depending on the current game state (low base state/high base state), the content of the action during the change varies depending on the current game state (low base state/high base state). As mentioned above, the decorative patterns (such as character patterns) that change and are displayed stationary in the low base state and the decorative patterns (such as character patterns) that change and are displayed stationary in the high base state can be formed with different patterns (by making the change display mode of the decorative patterns different), so that the change-in-progress action presentation performed in the low base state and the change-in-progress action presentation performed in the high base state can be configured to have different presentation contents.

<Waiting demo effect common to all game states>
In this embodiment, the standby demo performance performed during the variable standby period (second standby period) in the low base state is configured to have the same performance content as the standby demo performance performed during the variable standby period (second standby period) in the high base state. That is, as described above, the standby operation performance performed during the first standby period in the low base state and the standby operation performance performed during the first standby period in the high base state have different performance contents, but the standby demo performance performed during the second standby period in the low base state and the standby demo performance performed during the second standby period in the high base state have the same performance content. That is, the standby operation performance performed during the first standby period has performance contents that depend on the performance mode (performance stage) during which the player is staying, so the performance contents differ depending on the game state during which the player is staying (low base state, high base state), but the standby demo performance performed during the second standby period has fixed performance contents that do not depend on the performance mode (performance stage) during which the player is staying, so the performance contents are the same regardless of the game state during which the player is staying (low base state, high base state).

<Special drawing during the standby demo>
In this embodiment, if a game ball enters the first start port P51 or the second start port P52 during execution of the standby demo performance, a predetermined performance (waiting winning performance) occurs. This predetermined performance (waiting winning performance) is performed when a game ball enters the first start port P51 or the second start port P52 during the variable waiting period (first waiting period or second waiting period), and is a performance that suggests or notifies that the variable waiting period has ended and the game will be resumed. This predetermined performance (waiting winning performance) is a performance in which a specific sound (specific variable start sound) is output from a speaker. In this embodiment, sound pattern 1 (sound effect A), sound pattern 2 (sound effect B), and sound pattern 3 (sound effect C) are set as the sound patterns of the specific sound. The sound patterns of the specific sound are related to the expectation of a jackpot, and are set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases by one step in the order of sound pattern 1 (sound effect A) < sound pattern 2 (sound effect B) < sound pattern 3 (sound effect C). In addition, the predetermined performance (waiting winning performance) performed in the low base state and the predetermined performance (waiting winning performance) performed in the high base state may be configured to have different performance contents. In addition, a specific character may be displayed on the performance display device P70 in association with a specific sound, and in such a configuration, it is preferable to configure it so that a character corresponding to the sound pattern is displayed. In addition, in the low base state, if there is a game ball in the first start port P51, the predetermined performance can be executed, but if there is a game ball in the second start port P52, the predetermined performance is not executed (or, in the low base state, if there is a game ball in the first start port P51, all types of predetermined performances can be executed, but if there is a game ball in the second start port P52, only some of the predetermined performances can be executed). Furthermore, in the high base state, a predetermined effect can be executed when a game ball enters the second starting port P52, but the predetermined effect is not executed when a game ball enters the first starting port P51 (or, in the high base state, all types of predetermined effects can be executed when a game ball enters the second starting port P52, but only some of the predetermined effects can be executed when a game ball enters the first starting port P51).

In addition, if the special winning (entry of the game ball into the first starting hole P51 or the second starting hole P52) during the variable waiting period is a jackpot winning, a special winning performance is executed in addition to the execution of the predetermined performance (waiting winning performance). This special winning performance is a jackpot confirmation performance (premium performance) that definitely notifies the winning of a jackpot, and is a performance that outputs a special sound (jackpot confirmation sound) from the speaker P11. This special winning performance is executed by outputting a special sound (jackpot confirmation sound) immediately after the predetermined performance (waiting winning performance) is executed (immediately after the predetermined sound is output), or during the execution of the variable display that is executed in response to the winning of the jackpot. In addition, the special sound executed in the low base state and the special sound executed in the high base state may be configured as different performance contents. In addition, a specific character may be displayed on the performance display device P70 in association with the special sound, and in such a configuration, it is preferable to configure so that a character corresponding to the special sound is displayed. In addition, in the low base state, when a game ball is placed in the first starting hole P51, a special sound can be executed, but when a game ball is placed in the second starting hole P52, a special sound is not executed (or, in the low base state, when a game ball is placed in the first starting hole P51, all types of special sounds can be executed, but when a game ball is placed in the second starting hole P52, only some special sounds can be executed). Furthermore, in the high base state, when a game ball is placed in the second starting hole P52, a special sound can be executed, but when a game ball is placed in the first starting hole P51, a special sound is not executed (or, in the high base state, when a game ball is placed in the second starting hole P52, all types of special sounds can be executed, but when a game ball is placed in the first starting hole P51, only some special sounds can be executed).
The configuration may be as follows.

≪Special drawing during the action during the change≫
In addition, in this embodiment, even if a game ball enters the first start port P51 or the second start port P52 during the execution of the during-change operation performance, the waiting-time winning performance (output of a specific sound) is not executed. That is, as described above, the waiting-time winning performance is a performance that suggests or notifies that the waiting state for the change has ended and the game will be resumed, so even if a special winning (a game ball enters the first start port P51 or the second start port P52) occurs during this change display (during the execution of the during-change operation performance), the waiting-time winning performance is not executed. However, if a special winning occurs during the change display (during the execution of the during-change operation performance), a predetermined sound different from the specific sound (a predetermined winning sound, or a predetermined change start sound corresponding to a specific change start sound) may be configured to be output. In addition, even if a game ball enters the first start hole P51 or the second start hole P52 during the fixed stop time (fixed stop period) when the activation reserved ball of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is not stored, the waiting winning performance (output of specific sound) is not executed. In that case, a predetermined sound different from the specific sound may be output. As the sound patterns of the predetermined sound, sound pattern 4 (sound effect D), sound pattern 5 (sound effect E), and sound pattern 6 (sound effect F) are set. The sound patterns of the predetermined sound are related to the expectation of a big win, and are set so that the expectation of a big win increases by one step in the order of sound pattern 4 (sound effect D) < sound pattern 5 (sound effect E) < sound pattern 6 (sound effect F). In addition, the predetermined sound performed in the low base state and the predetermined sound performed in the high base state may be configured as different performance contents. In addition, even if a game ball enters the first start port P51 or the second start port P52 during the fixed stop time (fixed stop period) when the activation reserved ball of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is stored, the waiting winning performance (output of a specific sound) is not executed. In that case, a predetermined sound different from the specific sound may be output. In addition, in the low base state, when a game ball enters the first start port P51, a predetermined sound can be executed, but when a game ball enters the second start port P52, the predetermined sound is not executed (or, in the low base state, when a game ball enters the first start port P51, all types of predetermined sounds can be executed, but when a game ball enters the second start port P52, only some of the predetermined sounds can be executed). Furthermore, in the high base state, a predetermined sound can be executed when a game ball enters the second starting hole P52, but the predetermined sound is not executed when a game ball enters the first starting hole P51 (or, in the high base state, all types of predetermined sounds can be executed when a game ball enters the second starting hole P52, but only some of the predetermined sounds can be executed when a game ball enters the first starting hole P51).

Here, if a game ball enters the first starting hole P51 during the execution of the variable action performance, an activation reserved ball of the first special pattern is generated, and if a game ball enters the second starting hole P52, an activation reserved ball of the second special pattern is generated. At this time, when the current game state is a game state in which the variable display of the first special pattern is the main focus of the game (low base state), the activation reserved ball of the first special pattern is generated as a trigger to execute a pre-reading lottery process. In this pre-reading lottery process, the activation reserved ball of the first special pattern is set as the target activation reserved ball to determine whether or not a specific performance (specific pre-reading performance) can be executed. Also, when the current game state is a game state in which the variable display of the second special pattern is the main focus of the game (high base state), the activation reserved ball of the second special pattern is generated as a trigger to execute a pre-reading lottery process. In this look-ahead lottery process, the activation reserved ball of the second special pattern is set as the target activation reserved ball, and it is determined whether or not a specific effect (specific look-ahead effect) can be executed.

In this embodiment, the specific performance (specific pre-reading performance) is composed of a same-color pattern stop pre-reading performance that is performed when the decorative pattern is stopped. This same-color pattern stop pre-reading performance is a performance that is performed when the target activation reserved ball is generated and the target activation reserved ball is generated.
In one or more variable displays until the previous activation reserved ball is consumed, a combination of a predetermined same-color pattern (a specific losing pattern called a chance eye) is stopped as a combination of decorative patterns, and this is a pre-reading performance that suggests or notifies the expectation of winning a jackpot in the variable display when the target activation reserved ball is consumed. In this embodiment, this same-color pattern stop pre-reading performance is executed from the start of the temporary stop display period of the chance eye as the decorative pattern stop pattern to the end of the fixed stop display period (pattern fixing time). Here, the chance eye (same-color chance eye) refers to a result in which the decorative patterns of the same pattern attribute (same color) are aligned as the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern. However, in this embodiment, even if three decorative patterns of the same attribute (same color) are aligned, a reach mode (so-called reach state eye) is not formed. This is to prevent the pre-reading notice performance from being diluted by the mixture of the chance eye and the reach state eye. That is, the same color chance eye refers to a non-reach type result in which three decorative symbols are aligned with the same attribute (same color). In this embodiment, blue attribute chance eyes (e.g., "2, 6, 4"), green attribute chance eyes (e.g., "1, 5, 9"), and red attribute chance eyes (e.g., "3, 3, 7") are set in accordance with the above-mentioned symbol attributes. In addition, when the chance eye is displayed in a stop state in the variable display when the target activation reserved ball is generated, the combination of the decorative symbols determined by lottery at the start of the variable display is replaced with the chance eye in the pre-reading lottery process performed when the target activation reserved ball is generated, so that the chance eye can be displayed in a stop state at the end of the variable display.

Note that, as the specific performance (specific look-ahead performance), a look-ahead performance other than the same-color pattern stop look-ahead performance may be applied. For example, a countdown performance or a winning reserve change performance may be adopted as this specific performance. The countdown performance is a look-ahead performance that counts down the number of executions until the variable display (target variable display) that is executed when a new activation reserved ball (target activation reserved ball) is consumed, triggered by the occurrence of this target activation reserved ball. In this countdown performance, for example, the variable display two times before the target variable display displays "2", the variable display one time before the target variable display displays "1", and the target variable display displays "0". In addition, the winning reserve change look-ahead performance is a reserve change performance (look-ahead performance) that suddenly displays the target reserved image in a special display mode (for example, a blue icon, a green icon, a red icon, a rainbow icon, etc.) triggered by the occurrence of a new activation reserved ball (target activation reserved ball).

<Regarding the prescribed effects when the base level is low>
Next, the possibility of executing a predetermined performance (a winning performance during standby) in a low base state will be described. Fig. 178 (A) is a time chart when a game ball enters the first start hole P51 during the execution of a standby demo performance in a low base state, and Fig. 178 (B) is a time chart when a game ball enters the second start hole P52 during the execution of a standby demo performance in a low base state.

First, as shown in FIG. 178(A), when the current game state is a low base state, a predetermined performance (waiting winning performance) is executed when the game ball enters the first start port P51 during execution of the waiting demo performance. Also, as shown in FIG. 178(B), when the current game state is a low base state, a predetermined performance (waiting winning performance) is executed when the game ball enters the second start port P52 during execution of the waiting demo performance. In other words, when the current game state is a low base state, the same predetermined performance (waiting winning performance) can be executed when the game ball enters the first start port P51 or the second start port P52, regardless of the type of start port into which the game ball entered during execution of the waiting demo performance. Note that, as mentioned above, when the game ball enters the second start port P52 as a trigger, some types of predetermined performance (waiting winning performance) may not be executed.

(Regarding specific effects in low base states)
Next, the possibility of executing a specific performance (same color pattern stop pre-reading performance) in a low base state will be described. Fig. 179 (A) is a time chart when a game ball enters the first start port P51 during the execution of a low base state fluctuation action performance, and Fig. 179 (B) is a time chart when a game ball enters the second start port P52 during the execution of a low base state fluctuation action performance.

First, as shown in FIG. 179(A), when the current game state is a low base state, a specific performance (same color pattern stop pre-reading performance) can be executed in the variable display when the game ball enters the first starting port P51 during the execution of the variable operation performance. Note that, instead of executing a specific performance (same color pattern stop pre-reading performance) in the variable display, a specific performance (same color pattern stop pre-reading performance) may be executed from the next variation, and in such a configuration, it is preferable that the next variation is not a target variation display (a variation display before the target). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 179(B), when the current game state is a low base state, even if a game ball enters the second starting port P52 during the execution of the variable operation performance, a specific performance (same color pattern stop pre-reading performance) is not executed in the variable display. In other words, in the current game state where the main focus of the game is the variable display of the first special pattern (low base state), it is possible to execute a specific effect (same color pattern stop pre-reading effect) with the activated reserved ball of the first special pattern as the target activated reserved ball, but it is not possible to execute a specific effect (same color pattern stop pre-reading effect) with the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern as the target activated reserved ball.

(Regarding the specified effects when the base is high)
Next, the execution of a predetermined performance (a winning performance during standby) in a high base state will be described. Fig. 180 (A) is a time chart when a game ball enters the first start hole P51 during the execution of a standby demo performance in a high base state, and Fig. 180 (B) is a time chart when a game ball enters the second start hole P52 during the execution of a standby demo performance in a high base state.

First, as shown in FIG. 180(A), when the current game state is a high base state, a predetermined performance (waiting winning performance) is executed when the game ball enters the first start port P51 during execution of the waiting demo performance. Also, as shown in FIG. 180(B), when the current game state is a high base state, a predetermined performance (waiting winning performance) is executed when the game ball enters the second start port P52 during execution of the waiting demo performance. In other words, when the current game state is a high base state, the same predetermined performance (waiting winning performance) can be executed when the game ball enters the first start port P51 or the second start port P52, regardless of the type of start port into which the game ball entered during execution of the waiting demo performance. Note that, as mentioned above, when the game ball enters the second start port P52 as a trigger, some types of predetermined performance (waiting winning performance) may not be executed.

(Regarding specific effects in high base states)
Next, the possibility of executing a specific performance (same color pattern stop pre-reading performance) in a low base state will be described. Fig. 181 (A) is a time chart when a game ball enters the first start port P51 during the execution of a high base state fluctuation action performance, and Fig. 181 (B) is a time chart when a game ball enters the second start port P52 during the execution of a high base state fluctuation action performance.

First, as shown in FIG. 181(B), when the current game state is a high base state, a specific performance (same color pattern stop pre-reading performance) can be executed in the variable display when the game ball enters the second starting port P52 during the execution of the variable operation performance. It should be noted that, instead of executing the specific performance (same color pattern stop pre-reading performance) in the variable display, the specific performance (same color pattern stop pre-reading performance) may be executed from the next variation, and in such a configuration, it is preferable that the next variation is not a target variation display (a variation display before the target). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 181(A), when the current game state is a high base state, even if the game ball enters the first starting port P51 during the execution of the variable operation performance, the specific performance (same color pattern stop pre-reading performance) is not executed in the variable display. In other words, when the current game state is a game state (high base state) in which the main focus of the game is the varying display of the second special pattern, it is possible to execute a specific effect (same color pattern stop pre-reading effect) with the activated reserved ball of the second special pattern as the target activated reserved ball, but it is not possible to execute a specific effect (same color pattern stop pre-reading effect) with the activated reserved ball of the first special pattern as the target activated reserved ball.

<Comparison of dynamic display of stage background images>
Next, the dynamic display speed (loop display speed) of the stage background image will be described as the first operation speed of the second image. In this embodiment, the stage background image (normal background image) displayed in the low base state and the stage background image (time-saving background image and/or probability variable background image) displayed in the high base state are dynamically displayed (loop display) in which the same image is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals, but the dynamic display (loop display) of the normal background image is displayed at a relatively slow speed, while the dynamic display (loop display) of the time-saving background image and/or probability variable background image is displayed at a relatively high speed. That is, the normal background image displayed in the low base state loops at a relatively slow speed (movement speed, scroll speed), while the time-saving background image and/or probability variable background image displayed in the high base state loops at a relatively fast speed (movement speed, scroll speed). For example, it may be configured so that it takes 6 seconds for the cloud image displayed in the normal background image to move from the right end to the left end of the screen, while it takes only 1 second for the character image displayed in the time-saving background image and/or probability variable background image to move from the right end to the left end of the screen. In addition, there may be five background images a to e that are displayed as normal background images, each of which is dynamically displayed and changes every five seconds (background images a → b → c → d → e), while there may be seven background images f to l that are displayed as time-saving background images and/or probability-changing background images, each of which is dynamically displayed and changes every second (background images f → g → h → i → j → k → l).

The loop operation of the time-saving background image and/or the probability-change background image displayed in the high base state may be configured to have a relatively shorter period than the loop operation of the normal background image displayed in the low base state. In other words, the time from when the start image (first image) of the normal background image displayed in the high base state is displayed to when the next start image (first image) is displayed may be shorter than the time from when the start image (first image) of the normal background image displayed in the low base state is displayed to when the next start image (first image) is displayed.

<Display speed of decorative patterns>
Next, the speed of change display (low-speed change, high-speed change) of the decorative pattern will be described as the operating speed of the decorative pattern (first pattern). In this embodiment, when normal change (non-reach miss change) is executed as the change display, in the scroll display of the decorative pattern, the decorative patterns in the three columns accelerate immediately after starting the change display, and the decorative patterns in each column transition to a high-speed change state. During this high-speed change, the decorative patterns in each column are in a display state in which they are indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish, and the transparency of the decorative patterns is higher than during the stop display. Therefore, the image displayed behind the decorative pattern during high-speed change (the image superimposed behind the decorative pattern), i.e., the stage background image corresponding to the current performance mode, is visible or easily visible (transparent display state). When a predetermined time has passed since the decorative patterns in each column transition to a high-speed change state, each decorative pattern during high-speed change decelerates and transitions to a low-speed change state. During this low-speed change,
The decorative patterns of each row are in a display state in which they are identifiable or easily identifiable, and the transparency of the decorative patterns of each row is lower than that of the decorative patterns during high-speed fluctuation. Therefore, during low-speed fluctuation, the image displayed behind the decorative patterns (the image superimposed behind the decorative patterns) is in a state in which it is not visible or is difficult to see (non-transparent display state). Then, the decorative patterns of each row during low-speed fluctuation are gradually decelerated, and when the fluctuation speed of the decorative patterns of each row becomes "0", the decorative patterns are displayed as stopped (displayed as a temporary stop and then displayed as a definite stop).

In this embodiment, in normal fluctuations (non-reach miss fluctuations) that occur when the game state is in a low base state, the time required from when the decorative pattern starts to change display until it reaches a high-speed change state (transparent display state) is set to a relatively long time (e.g., 1.5 seconds). On the other hand, in normal fluctuations (non-reach miss fluctuations) that occur when the game state is in a high base state, the time required from when the decorative pattern starts to change display until it reaches a high-speed change state (transparent display state) is set to a relatively short time (e.g., 0.5 seconds).

In addition, in this embodiment, in normal fluctuations (non-reach miss fluctuations) that occur when the game state is in a low base state, the time required from when the decorative pattern transitions to a slow-changing state (non-transparent display state) until it is displayed as stopped (provisional stop display or confirmed stop display) is set to a relatively long time (e.g., 2 seconds). On the other hand, in normal fluctuations (non-reach miss fluctuations) that occur when the game state is in a high base state, the time required from when the decorative pattern transitions to a slow-changing state (non-transparent display state) until it is displayed as stopped (provisional stop display or confirmed stop display) is set to a relatively short time (e.g., 0.3 seconds).

[Image transformation effects]
Next, the image transformation effect of this embodiment will be described. Fig. 182 is a schematic diagram for explaining the image transformation effect.

The image transformation effect of this embodiment is a special effect that applies transformations such as enlargement, reduction, rotation, translation, distortion, and tilt to an image of a specific area included in the displayed screen (called the "image to be transformed"). As an example, FIG. 182(B) shows the state where the image to be transformed has been transformed by shrinking it, and FIG. 182(C) shows the state where the image to be transformed has been transformed by tilting it diagonally.

In this embodiment, the images displayed on the performance display device P70 are drawn in a number of layers with predetermined priorities set. "Layer" refers to each layer in the hierarchical structure that defines the display priority of each image that makes up the overall image (frame image). Layers with higher display priority are placed in higher layers (forward from the player's perspective), and layers with lower display priority are placed in lower layers (backward from the player's perspective).

FIG. 183 is a schematic diagram conceptually showing the layer structure of a frame image in a variable performance (when the image action performance is not being executed). This frame image includes, in order of display priority, a layer LA1 displaying a stage background image, a layer LA2 displaying a decorative pattern, a layer LA3 displaying a reserved image and a variable image, a layer LA4 displaying the number of reserved balls for a special chart, a layer LA5 displaying a small pattern, a layer LA6 displaying a volume/light intensity setting image (referred to as a volume adjustment image and a light intensity adjustment image), and a layer LA7 displaying an error notification image. The images of the multiple layers LA1 to LA7 are drawn in a frame buffer without undergoing a transformation process described later, and the image drawn in this frame buffer is output to the performance display device as a frame image for one frame and displayed. The frame buffer is a buffer memory (VRAM) that temporarily stores frames of image data to be output to the performance display device P70.
It is.

Figure 184 is a schematic diagram conceptually showing the layer structure of a frame image during a change performance (when an image transformation performance is being performed). This frame image includes, in order of lowest display priority, layer LB1 displaying a special background image, layer LB2 displaying the image to be transformed, layer LA3 displaying the reserved image and the image currently changing, layer LA4 displaying the number of balls reserved for the special chart, layer LA5 displaying small patterns, layer LA6 displaying a volume/light intensity setting image, and layer LA7 displaying an error notification image. Note that the special background image is a background image exclusively for image transformation performances, and is configured as a special background image that does not appear except in image transformation performances. In other words, when an image transformation performance is being performed, the special background image is used as the background image displayed behind the image to be transformed, rather than the stage background image.

Layer LB2 of the image to be transformed contains a decorative pattern, a stage background image, and a frame image. The frame image included in this layer LB is a frame-shaped image that forms the outer edge of the image to be transformed, and an image within the frame, such as a decorative pattern or a stage background image, is displayed inside this frame image. The entire image included in this layer LB2 becomes the subject of the image transformation performance (image to be transformed). Note that a specified decorative object image, such as an effect image or a character image, may be added to this image to be transformed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 184(B), layer LB2 of the image to be transformed is generated as a new layer (combined layer) by combining (integrating) layer LA1 displaying the stage background image, layer LA2 displaying the decorative pattern, and layer LB3 displaying the frame image. This layer LB2 of the image to be transformed is drawn in the frame buffer after a predetermined transformation process that transforms the image to be transformed into an irregular shape. Meanwhile, layers of other images that are not subject to change are drawn directly in the frame buffer without transformation process. The image drawn in the frame buffer is then output to the performance display device P70 as one frame's worth of frame image and displayed.

Next, an example of the image transformation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 182. FIG. 182 illustrates an example in which an image transformation effect is executed during execution of a normal change (non-reach change), but the image transformation effect may be executed during a reach change (SP reach change). In that case, it may be executed before the reach effect is executed (before the reach is established), or the image transformation effect may be executed during the reach effect (during the execution of the SP reach effect). In such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the image transformation effect so that the probability of execution is higher when a reach change (SP reach change) is executed than when a non-reach change is executed. Note that, even in the case of a non-reach change, it is preferable to configure the image transformation effect so that the probability of execution is higher when there is a target activation reserved ball that is an activation reserved ball that triggers the execution of a look-ahead effect or a look-ahead lottery (when there is a change display in front of the target) than when there is no target activation reserved ball (when there is no change display in front of the target).

First, as shown in FIG. 182(A), the change display is started, and the display of the change of the decorative pattern, the change of the small pattern, the display of the reserved image, the display of the image during change, the display of the number of balls in operation, the display of the stage background image, etc. are performed on the screen of the performance display device P70. Note that the decorative pattern and the stage background image displayed here are displayed as a part of the image (the image inside the frame image) included in the layer LB2 of the transformation target image generated by combining the layer LA2 of the decorative pattern and the layer LA1 of the stage background image, etc. At this time, the frame image is formed as an image of a size larger than the display area of the performance display device P70 (an image protruding from the display area of the performance display device P70), and is not displayed on the screen. Note that in the state of FIG. 182(A), the layer LB2 of the transformation target image may not be generated, and the images included in the layer of the stage background image LA1 and the layer LA2 of the decorative pattern may be displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(B), the image transformation performance begins, and the image to be transformed, including the decorative pattern, stage background image, and frame image, is gradually reduced in size. In other words, as the image to be transformed is gradually reduced in size relative to the entire screen, the frame image that was not displayed in FIG. 182(A) above is gradually displayed, and a special background image dedicated to the image transformation performance appears around this frame image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(C), the image to be transformed that has been reduced in size in FIG. 182(B) above is gradually tilted toward the left side when viewed from the front, thereby imparting a three-dimensional effect to the image to be transformed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 182(D), the image to be transformed is gradually enlarged and displayed facing forward again, and is restored to its original size, ending the image transformation performance. When the image to be transformed is restored to its original size (normal size), the frame image that was displayed during the image transformation performance is no longer displayed.

Here, in this embodiment, the image transformation performance is configured to be able to be executed during the execution of the during-change action performance. When the image transformation performance is executed during the execution of the during-change action performance, the object image of the during-change action performance that has been displayed up until then (the decorative pattern during the change display, the stage background image during the first action and/or the second action) is displayed as the transformation target image. In other words, the during-change action performance is executed by forming the transformation target image by fitting the object image of the during-change action performance (the decorative pattern during the change display, the stage background image during the first action and/or the second action) inside the frame image, and performing the first action (loop action) and/or the second action (vibration action) on the stage background image (second image) included in this transformation target image. In other words, the image transformation performance can be executed simultaneously while performing the first action (loop action) and/or the second action (vibration action) as the during-change action performance. Note that the performance in which the image transformation performance is executed simultaneously while performing the first action (loop action) and/or the second action (vibration action) as the during-change action performance may be called a special transformation performance. On the other hand, the system is configured not to execute image transformation effects while standby action effects are being performed. This prevents players from mistakingly believing that decorative patterns and other object images are being displayed in a changing manner due to the special transformation of the decorative patterns and other object images during the change standby period.

In the above embodiment, the decorative pattern, the stage background image, and the frame image are applied as the transformation target image, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and other object images such as reserved images and variable images may be included in the transformation target image. However, it is preferable not to include the error notification image, the volume/light intensity setting image, the small pattern display, and the special reserved number display in the transformation target image. This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of the error notification image from being hindered even if an error occurs in the gaming machine during the execution of the image transformation performance. Furthermore, by excluding the volume/light intensity setting image from the transformation target image to ensure its visibility, it is possible to prevent the player from hindering the adjustment operation of the volume and/or light intensity even during the execution of the image transformation performance. In addition, by excluding the small pattern display and the special reserved number display from the transformation target image to ensure their visibility, it becomes possible for the player to properly recognize the current game situation (variable display, stop display, number of balls in operation, etc.) even during the execution of the image transformation performance. In addition, it is preferable that various images of the jackpot performance (such as the above-mentioned big prize winning port count-up performance, emphasis performance, over winning performance, bonus winning performance, etc.) displayed during the execution of the jackpot game are not included in the transformation target image in order to ensure the visibility of these displays. Here, an image transformation performance (special transformation performance) can be executed while the error notification image is displayed, an error notification image can be displayed while the image transformation performance (special transformation performance) is executed, and further, an image transformation performance (special transformation performance) can be executed while the volume/light amount setting image is displayed, and a volume/light amount setting image can be displayed while the image transformation performance (special transformation performance) is executed. In addition, when the image transformation performance (special transformation performance) is executed, a special sound can be output at approximately the same time as the start of the transformation, and the special sound is configured to end before the execution of the image transformation performance (special transformation performance) ends. In addition, the transformation target image also includes the general notice performance including the button image, indicator image, button appearance notice performance, etc., which will be described later.

Next, a modified example of the image action presentation (waiting action presentation, changing action presentation) of this embodiment will be described. That is, in the above embodiment, a case where a decorative pattern is applied as the first image and a background image (stage background image) is applied as the second image in the image action presentation (waiting action presentation, changing action presentation) is exemplified, but this configuration is not limited to this, and a number pattern of the decorative pattern may be applied as the first image and a character pattern of the decorative pattern (a character pattern displayed behind the number pattern) may be applied as the second pattern. The image action presentation of this modified example is composed of a waiting action presentation in which the character pattern (second image) performs a first action while the number pattern (first image) is stationary during the stopped display of the special pattern, and a changing action presentation in which the character pattern (second image) performs a second action during the changing display of the special pattern. That is, the image action presentation of this modified example is a presentation in which a predetermined action is performed for a part of the image constituting the decorative pattern.

In the standby operation performance, during the stopped display of the decorative pattern, among the images constituting the decorative pattern, only the character pattern (second image) is made to perform the first operation while the number pattern (first image) is completely stopped. The first operation of the character pattern is, for example, an operation in which the character image corresponding to the character pattern (second image) nods its head. Note that this first operation is performed without changing the display position (position coordinates relative to the entire screen) of the character pattern (second image). In other words, the first operation is an operation performed in a state in which the position coordinates of the character pattern (second image) are fixed. As in the above embodiment, this standby operation performance is performed in the first standby period of the variable standby state, and ends (interrupts) when the standby end condition is satisfied or the transition to the second standby period occurs. Note that, in this standby operation performance, the number pattern (first image) may be displayed in a stopped state in the first display mode during the first standby period A, and the number pattern (first image) may be displayed in a stopped state in the second display mode during the first standby period B.

The action during change performance is a performance in which, while the decorative pattern is changing and being displayed, one of the images that make up the decorative pattern, a character pattern (second image), is made to perform a second action. The second action of the character pattern (second image) is, for example, an action in which the character image corresponding to the character pattern (second image) shakes its body from side to side. This standby action during change performance is performed at a timing when the display state of the decorative pattern can be recognized or is easily recognized, such as immediately after the decorative pattern starts to change and be displayed, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the pseudo consecutive display, or when the decorative pattern decelerates before it is stopped.

[Button operation effects]
Next, the button effect of the seventh embodiment will be described. Fig. 185 is a schematic diagram for explaining the outline of the button effect of the seventh embodiment. As described above, the button effect is a notice effect that suggests or notifies the player of the probability of a big win based on the operation of the effect button P15 by the player.

As shown in FIG. 185, the button effects include an operation prompt effect that is performed during the valid operation period of the effect button P15, and an operation trigger effect that is performed after the valid operation period of the effect button P15 ends. Note that "end of the valid operation period" includes both cases where the period ends because the valid operation period elapses (expires) without the operation button being operated, and cases where the period ends partway through the valid operation period even before the period has elapsed (expired) because the effect button is operated during the valid operation period.

The operation promotion effect is an effect that is executed during the valid operation period of the effect button P15, and is an effect that encourages the player to operate the effect button P15. The valid operation period is the period during which, when the effect button P15 is operated, this operation is validly accepted (the operation acceptance period during which the operation of the effect button P15 is validly accepted in the effect control board P200). Therefore, this operation promotion effect can also be said to be an effect that notifies the player that the operation is in the valid operation period. The operation promotion effect is also called an "operation means promotion effect."

During the execution of the operation promotion effect (during the operation valid period), a button image (also called the "effect button image" or "operation means image") that imitates the effect button P15 and an indicator image (also called the "meter image" or "operation valid period suggestion image") that visually indicates the remaining period of the operation valid period are displayed on the screen, and a notification that the operation of the effect button P15 is valid and a notification to encourage the operation of the effect button P15 are performed. In addition, it is also preferable to accompany text images such as "Press!!" or "One hit!!!" near the button image to encourage the player to perform a single operation, or to accompany text images such as "Continuous hit!!" or "Continuous hit hard!!!" to encourage repeated hits. Note that "One hit!!!" has a higher chance of winning than "Press!!", and "Continuous hit hard!!!" is more likely to appear simultaneously with the special button image described later than "Continuous hit!!", and is more likely to appear via the second appearance notice effect described later. Also, "One hit!!!" has a higher chance of winning than "Push it!!", and "Hit it hard!!!" is more likely to appear at the same time as the special button image described below than "Hit it hard!!", and is more likely to appear via the second appearance preview effect described below.

There are two types of the operation valid period: a first valid period and a second valid period. When the operation valid period is set as the first valid period, the operation trigger effect can be executed only if the effect button is operated within the first valid period. When the operation valid period is set as the second valid period, the operation trigger effect can be executed if the effect button is operated within the second valid period, or if the effect button P15 is not operated within the second valid period and the second valid period ends. The first valid period and the second valid period may be the same time value, or may be different time values. In the following description, when there is no need to particularly distinguish between the first valid period and the second valid period, they will simply be referred to as the "operation valid period".

Here, FIG. 186 is a schematic diagram showing the notification mode of the performance button P15. In this embodiment, the notification mode of the performance button P15 is determined by a combination of the operation mode (light-emitting notification mode) of the performance button lamp 15a and the operation mode (vibration notification mode) of the vibration motor. The light-emitting notification mode includes a notification mode in which the performance button P15 is turned off, a notification mode in which the performance button P15 is lit in white, a notification mode in which the performance button P15 is lit in red, a notification mode in which the performance button P15 flashes in red, and a notification mode in which the performance button P15 is lit in rainbow colors. The vibration notification mode includes a notification mode in which the performance button P15 does not vibrate and a notification mode in which the performance button P15 vibrates. Note that the operation mode is not limited to vibration, and as described above, the operation mode may be a rotation notification mode in which a movable object inside the performance button P15 is rotated by the internal mechanism of the performance button P15. Therefore, it should be noted that the vibration notification mode may simply be referred to as the action notification mode (a notification mode other than light emission), the vibration notification mode (presence or absence of vibration) may be replaced with the action notification mode (presence or absence of action) or the rotation notification mode (presence or absence of rotation), and the button vibration effect may be referred to as the button action effect (button action effect) or the button rotation effect (button rotation effect).

The notification modes of the performance button are broadly divided into a first notification mode, a second notification mode, a third notification mode, a fourth notification mode, and a fifth notification mode, depending on the combination of the light emission notification mode and the vibration notification mode. The first notification mode is a notification mode in which the performance button P15 is lit in white and does not vibrate. The second notification mode is a notification mode in which the performance button P15 is lit in red and does not vibrate. The third notification mode is a notification mode in which the performance button P15 is lit in red and vibrates. The fourth notification mode is a notification mode in which the performance button P15 is lit in rainbow colors and vibrates. The fifth notification mode is a notification mode in which the performance button P15 flashes in red and does not vibrate. Therefore, the first and second notification modes are notification modes for a state in which the aforementioned button vibration effect is not being executed, and the third and fourth notification modes are notification modes for a state in which the aforementioned button vibration effect is being executed.

In this embodiment, the notification mode during the effective operation period of the effect button P15 is the second notification mode (red light and non-vibration). Furthermore, the notification mode during the effective non-operation period of the effect button P15 (excluding during the operation trigger performance and the initialization operation) is the first notification mode (white light and non-vibration). Furthermore, the notification mode during the effective non-operation period of the effect button P15 and during the operation trigger performance is the third notification mode (red light and vibration) or the fourth notification mode (rainbow light and vibration). Furthermore, the notification mode during the effective non-operation period of the effect button P15 and during the initialization operation is the fifth notification mode (flashing red light and non-vibration). Note that the fifth notification mode may also be flashing red light and vibration. Here, in this embodiment, when executing the button performance, regardless of whether the operation effective period of the performance button P15 is set to the first effective period or the second effective period, the notification mode of the performance button P15 is switched from the first notification mode to the second mode when the operation effective period of the performance button P15 (operation promotion performance) starts. On the other hand, when the operation effective period of the performance button P15 ends, the notification mode of the performance button P15 is controlled to be switched from the second notification mode to any of the first notification mode, the third notification mode, and the fourth notification mode according to the type of this operation effective period (first effective period/second effective period) and the type of operation trigger performance scheduled to be executed after the end of this operation effective period (described in detail later).

In addition, as a modified example, the first notification mode may be a notification mode in which the performance button P15 is not lit (turned off) and does not vibrate, the second notification mode may be a notification mode in which the performance button P15 is lit in white and does not vibrate, the third notification mode may be a notification mode in which the performance button P15 is lit in red and vibrates, the fourth notification mode may be a notification mode in which the performance button P15 is lit in rainbow colors and vibrates, and the fifth notification mode may be a notification mode in which the performance button flashes red and does not vibrate. In addition, the fifth notification mode may be a notification mode in which the performance button P15 flashes red and vibrates. As another variation, the first notification mode may be a notification mode in which the effect button P15 is not lit (turned off) and does not vibrate, the second notification mode may be a notification mode in which the effect button P15 is lit and does not vibrate, the third notification mode may be a notification mode in which the effect button P15 is lit and vibrates, the fourth notification mode may be a notification mode in which the effect button P15 is lit in rainbow colors and vibrates, and the fifth notification mode may be a notification mode in which the effect button P15 flashes and does not vibrate. Note that the fifth notification mode may also be a notification mode in which the effect button P15 flashes red and vibrates.

The operation trigger performance is a performance that is executed when the performance button P15 is operated. This operation trigger performance is a performance mode (such as a role action, image display, sound output, lamp light emission, button vibration, etc.) that corresponds to the type of button performance. In this embodiment, "executed when the performance button P15 is operated" includes (1) the meaning that it is executed only when the performance button P15 is operated within the operation effective period, and (2) the meaning that it is executed when the performance button P15 is operated within the operation effective period or when the operation effective period has elapsed without the performance button P15 being operated within the operation effective period. Therefore, the execution condition of the operation trigger performance differs depending on the type of the operation effective period of the performance button described above. That is, when the operation effective period is set as the first effective period, the execution condition of the operation trigger performance is established only when the performance button P15 is operated within this operation effective period (when the performance button is not operated within the operation effective period, the execution condition of the operation trigger performance is not established). In addition, when the operation valid period is set to the second valid period, the execution condition of the operation trigger effect is satisfied even if the effect button P15 is operated during this operation valid period, or even if the operation valid period elapses without the effect button P15 being operated during this operation valid period. Note that the operation trigger effect is also called an "operation response effect" or an "operation result effect."

The types of operation trigger effects include operation trigger effects of a type in which it is uncertain whether the currently executing variable display is a jackpot or not (referred to as "predetermined type of operation trigger effect"), and operation trigger effects of a type in which it is definitively notified that the currently executing variable display is a jackpot ("specific type of operation trigger effect"). In addition, as the predetermined type of operation trigger effect, there are multiple types of operation trigger effects with different performance modes (display contents) and jackpot expectation rates. Furthermore, the predetermined type of operation trigger effect includes weak operation trigger effects that suggest that the jackpot expectation rate is relatively low, and strong operation trigger effects that suggest that the jackpot expectation rate is relatively high. In addition, as the weak operation trigger effect, there are multiple types of operation trigger effects with different performance modes (display contents) and jackpot expectation rates (1% to 10%), and as the strong operation trigger effect, there are multiple types of operation trigger effects with different performance modes (display contents) and jackpot expectation rates (40% to 80%). The weak operation trigger effect may include an operation trigger effect in which the jackpot expectation rate is set to 0% (operation trigger effect from which only a miss is derived). In addition, the strong operation trigger effect does not include an operation trigger effect in which the jackpot expectation rate is set to 100% (operation trigger effect from which only a jackpot is derived). On the other hand, the specific type of operation trigger effect is a jackpot confirmation effect (premium effect) that suggests that a jackpot is confirmed (the jackpot expectation rate is 100%). In other words, the specific type of operation trigger effect includes only an operation trigger effect in which the jackpot expectation rate is set to 100% (operation trigger effect from which only a jackpot is derived). In addition, the specific type of operation trigger effect has multiple types of operation trigger effects with different presentation modes (display contents). This specific type of operation trigger effect may include not only an operation trigger effect (jackpot confirmation effect) in which the operation effective period of the effect button P15 is set to the win/lose branching period described below, but also an operation trigger effect (jackpot confirmation effect) in which the operation effective period of the effect button P15 is set to the pre-reach warning period and/or post-reach warning period described below.

<Button effects example>
Next, examples of effects when various button effects are executed will be described with reference to Figures 187 to 192. Note that in Figures 187 to 192, for the sake of convenience, the background display (background image) is omitted.

≪Prescribed type of action trigger effect: dialogue preview effect≫
An example of the button effect when a predetermined type of operation trigger effect is executed as a weak operation trigger effect (dialogue preview effect) will be described. Fig. 187 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the button effect including the weak operation trigger effect (dialogue preview effect).

First, as shown in (A) in the figure, the display of changing decorative patterns begins. Although not shown, a stage background image corresponding to the current presentation mode (presentation stage) is displayed on the screen. At this time, the notification mode of the presentation button P15 is the first notification mode (white light and no vibration).

Next, as shown in (B) in the figure, the button operation promotion effect is started, and operation promotion images such as button images and indicator images are displayed on the screen. At the same time that this operation promotion effect is started, the operation valid period of the effect button P15 is set. In addition, at the start of this operation valid period, the notification mode of the effect button P15 is switched from the first notification mode (white light and vibration) to the second notification mode (red light and non-vibration).

Here, when the operation effective period is controlled to the first effective period, the execution condition of the operation trigger effect is met on condition that the effect button P15 is operated within this operation effective period, and the state transitions to the state (C) in the figure. On the other hand, when the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button P15 being operated, the execution condition of the operation trigger effect is not met, and the state transitions to the state (D2) in the figure.

On the other hand, if the operation valid period is set to the second valid period, when the effect button is operated within this operation valid period, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without effect button P15 being operated, the execution condition for the operation trigger effect is met and the state transitions to (C) in the figure.

Here, as shown in (C) in the figure, if the execution condition for the operation trigger effect is met, the operation trigger effect (weak operation trigger effect) is executed after the end of the operation effective period (first effective period or second effective period). This operation trigger effect is a dialogue preview effect in which a dialogue image (dialogue image) of a predetermined character string is displayed. In this dialogue preview effect, one of several types of dialogue images such as "Not so good" (expected jackpot 1%), "Good luck" (expected jackpot 5%), and "Chance" (expected jackpot 20%) is displayed on the screen depending on the expected jackpot probability, etc. In addition, when the effective operation period ends, the notification mode of the effect button P15 switches from the second notification mode (lit in red and not vibrating) to the first notification mode (lit in white and not vibrating). In addition, there may be cases where a specific type of operation trigger effect is executed as the line preview effect. For example, there may be an image of a line such as "Congratulations!", which indicates that the probability of winning is 100%. When the image of the line is displayed and the effective operation period ends, the notification mode of the effect button P15 switches from the second notification mode (red light and non-vibration) to the first notification mode (white light and non-vibration), but the notification mode of the effect button P15 may also switch from the second notification mode (red light and non-vibration) to the third notification mode (red light and vibration).

Then, as shown in (D1) in the figure, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed since the dialogue image was displayed, the dialogue image is erased and the button presentation (operation trigger presentation) ends. After that, the variable display continues.

On the other hand, as shown in (D2) in the figure, if the conditions for executing the operation trigger effect are not met, after the effective operation period has elapsed, the button effect ends without the operation trigger effect (dialogue preview effect) being executed. In addition, as the effective operation period has elapsed, the notification mode of the effect button P15 switches from the second notification mode (red light lit and non-vibration) to the first notification mode (white light lit and non-vibration). Then, as in (D1) in the figure, the variable display continues.

In this way, in a button effect that includes a weak operation trigger effect (a weak operation trigger effect without a revival effect described later) as a predetermined type of operation trigger effect, the operation effective period of the effect button P15 may be set to the first effective period or the second effective period. Whether this operation effective period is set to the first effective period or the second effective period, the notification mode of the effect button P15 is switched from the first notification mode to the second notification mode when the operation effective period starts, and the notification mode of the effect button P15 is switched from the second notification mode to the first notification mode when the operation effective period ends. In addition, when the operation effective period is set to the first effective period, if the effect button P15 is not operated during the operation effective period, the dialogue preview effect corresponding to the weak operation trigger effect is not executed. On the other hand, when the operation effective period is set to the second effective period, the dialogue preview effect corresponding to the weak operation trigger effect is executed even when the effect button P15 is not operated during the operation effective period. In addition, for the dialogue preview effect, which is a weak operation trigger effect, only the first effective period may be set, and the second effective period may not be set. Also, when a specific type of operation trigger effect is executed as the dialogue preview effect, only the first effective period may be set.

≪Prescribed type of operation trigger effect: Strong operation trigger effect≫
Next, a description will be given of an example of a button performance when a predetermined type of operation trigger performance is executed as a strong operation trigger performance (cut-in notice performance). FIG. 188 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a button performance including a strong operation trigger performance (cut-in notice performance). In the following, the description of the parts common to the performance example of FIG. 187 may be omitted.

As shown in (A) in the figure, the display of changing decorative patterns begins. Although not shown, a stage background image corresponding to the current presentation mode (presentation stage) is displayed on the screen. At this time, the notification mode of the presentation button P15 is the first notification mode (white light and no vibration). Although not shown in the figure in this example, a reach is achieved during the execution of the changing display, and then develops into an SP reach.

As shown in (B) in the figure, an SP reach performance is being performed in the variable display. This SP reach performance is configured as a battle performance (battle reach performance) in which an ally character fights an enemy character. While this SP reach performance is being performed, a reach background image corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed. Note that in the drawing, the characters "SP reach" are added to indicate that an SP reach performance is being performed or a reach background image is being displayed. Therefore, unless there are special circumstances, when the characters "SP reach" are not added, it is assumed that a stage background image or another type of background image is being displayed. Also, in the SP reach performance, the display mode of the left and right patterns of the decorative patterns is only number patterns (a display mode with low decorativeness), and they are displayed (variably displayed) in a form that has been moved to the left and right edges of the screen.

Next, as shown in (C) in the figure, while this SP reach effect is being executed, a button effect operation promotion effect is started, and operation promotion images such as button images and indicator images are displayed on the screen. At the same time that this operation promotion effect is started, the operation valid period of the effect button P15 is set. Also, at the start of this operation valid period, the notification mode of the effect button P15 is switched from the first notification mode (white light lit and vibration) to the second notification mode (red light lit and non-vibration).

Here, if the operation valid period is controlled to the first valid period, the execution conditions for the operation trigger effect are met, provided that the effect button P15 is operated within this operation valid period, and the state transitions to (D) in the figure. On the other hand, if the operation valid period has elapsed without the effect button P15 being operated, the execution conditions for the operation trigger effect are not met, and the state transitions to (E2) in the figure.

On the other hand, if the operation valid period is set to the second valid period, when the effect button P15 is operated within this operation valid period, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without the effect button P15 being operated, the execution condition for the operation trigger effect is met, and the state transitions to (D) in the figure.

Here, as shown in (D) in the figure, if the execution conditions for the operation trigger performance are met, the operation trigger performance (strong operation trigger performance) is executed after the end of the operation valid period (first valid period or second valid period). This operation trigger performance is a cut-in notice performance in which a cut-in image of the main character of this model is displayed. In this cut-in notice performance, one of several types of cut-in images such as a blue cut-in image (expected jackpot 5%), a green cut-in image (expected jackpot 15%), a red cut-in image (expected jackpot 40%), and a gold cut-in image (expected jackpot 75%) is displayed on the screen depending on the expected jackpot probability, etc. In addition, when this operation trigger performance starts (when the effective operation period ends), the notification mode of the performance button P15 switches from the second notification mode (red light and non-vibration) to the third notification mode (red light and vibration).

Then, as shown in (E1) in the figure, when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the cut-in image was displayed, the cut-in image is erased and the button effect (operation trigger effect) ends. Furthermore, the end of the button effect (operation trigger effect) triggers the notification mode of the effect button P15 to switch from the third notification mode (red light and vibration) to the first notification mode (white light and non-vibration). After that, the effect returns to the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character, and the SP reach effect continues. As a variant, the notification mode of the effect button P15 may be configured to return to the first notification mode (white light and non-vibration) while the operation trigger effect is being executed (in the middle of it).

On the other hand, as shown in (E2) in the figure, if the conditions for executing the operation trigger effect are not met, after the effective operation period has elapsed, the button effect ends without the operation trigger effect (cut-in preview effect) being executed. In addition, as the effective operation period has elapsed, the notification mode of the effect button P15 switches from the second notification mode (red light lit and non-vibration) to the first notification mode (white light lit and non-vibration). Then, as in (E1) in the figure, the game returns to the battle effect between the ally character and enemy character, and the SP reach effect continues.

In this way, in the button performance including the strong operation trigger performance as a predetermined type of operation trigger performance, the operation effective period of the performance button P15 may be set to the first effective period or the second effective period. Whether this operation effective period is set to the first effective period or the second effective period, the notification mode of the performance button P15 is switched from the first notification mode to the second notification mode when the operation effective period starts, and the notification mode of the performance button P15 is switched from the second notification mode to the first notification mode when the operation effective period ends. In addition, when the operation effective period is set to the first effective period, if the performance button P15 is not operated during the operation effective period, the cut-in notice performance corresponding to the strong operation trigger performance is not executed. On the other hand, when the operation effective period is set to the second effective period, the cut-in notice performance corresponding to the strong operation trigger performance is executed even when the performance button P15 is not operated during the operation effective period. In addition, for the cut-in notice effect, which is a strong operation trigger effect, only the second effective period may be set, and the first effective period may not be set. Also, only when the gold cut-in image is displayed among the blue cut-in image, the green cut-in image, the red cut-in image, and the gold cut-in image, the notification mode of the effect button P15 may be switched from the first notification mode (white light and no vibration) to the third notification mode (red light and vibration). In addition, there may be cases where a specific type of operation trigger effect is executed as a cut-in advance notice effect. For example, when a rainbow-colored cut-in image with a jackpot expectation rate of 100% is displayed and the operation valid period ends, the notification mode of the effect button P15 switches from the second notification mode (red light and non-vibration) to the third notification mode (red light and vibration), but the notification mode of the effect button P15 may switch from the second notification mode (red light and non-vibration) to the fourth notification mode (rainbow light and vibration) (in this case, only the second valid period may be set). In addition, a similar or similar cut-in advance notice effect may be executed during an N reach, in which case it may be configured so that only a gold cut-in image or a rainbow cut-in image is displayed (it is preferable that the switching pattern of the notification mode of the effect button P15 is configured in the same way as the cut-in advance notice effect executed during the execution of the SP reach effect).

≪Specific type of operation trigger effect: Big hit confirmed effect≫
Next, an example of the button effect when a specific type of operation trigger effect is executed will be described. Figures 189 to 190 are schematic diagrams showing an example of the button effect including a specific type of operation trigger effect. In the following, the description of the parts common to the above-mentioned examples of Figures 187 to 188 may be omitted.

First, as shown in (A) in the figure, the display of the decorative pattern starts to change.
As shown in FIG. 1, the SP reach effect is being executed in the variable display.

Next, as shown in (C) in the figure, in the final stage of the SP reach performance (the scene where the winning or losing branch occurs), the button performance operation promotion performance begins, and operation promotion images such as button images and indicator images are displayed on the screen. At the same time that this operation promotion performance begins, the operation effective period of the performance button P15 is set. Also, at the start of this operation effective period, the notification mode of the performance button P15 is switched from the first notification mode (white light lit and vibration) to the second notification mode (red light lit and non-vibration). This button operation performance is referred to as the deciding performance.

Here, if the operation valid period is controlled to the first valid period, the execution conditions for the operation trigger effect are met, provided that the effect button P15 is operated within this operation valid period, and the state transitions to (D) in the figure. On the other hand, if the operation valid period has elapsed without the effect button P15 being operated, the execution conditions for the operation trigger effect are not met, and the state transitions to (E2) in the figure.

On the other hand, if the operation valid period is set to the second valid period, when the effect button P15 is operated within this operation valid period, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without the effect button P15 being operated, the execution condition for the operation trigger effect is met, and the state transitions to (D) in the figure.

Here, as shown in (D) in the figure, if the execution condition of the operation trigger performance is met, the operation trigger performance (jackpot confirmation performance) is executed after the operation effective period (first effective period or second effective period) ends. This operation trigger performance (jackpot confirmation performance) is also called a successful decision performance (details will be described later). In this operation trigger performance, a role performance in which the first movable role P651 falls to the front of the screen is performed, and a rainbow-colored effect image is displayed around the first movable role P651, thereby definitively notifying the winning of the jackpot. In addition, when this operation trigger performance starts (when the operation effective period ends), the notification mode of the performance button P15 switches from the second notification mode (red light and non-vibration) to the fourth notification mode (rainbow light and vibration). In addition, as a modified example, the notification mode of the effect button P15 that appears at the start of the operation trigger effect (at the end of the operation valid period) may be different between when the execution conditions of the operation trigger effect are satisfied in the first valid period and when the execution conditions of the operation trigger effect are satisfied in the second valid period. That is, when the execution conditions of the operation trigger effect are satisfied in the second valid period, the notification mode of the effect button P15 is switched to the fourth mode (lighting in rainbow colors and vibrating) when the operation trigger effect starts (the operation valid period ends). On the other hand, when the execution conditions of the operation trigger effect are satisfied in the first valid period, the notification mode of the effect button P15 may be switched to the third notification mode (lighting in red and vibrating) or a specific notification mode (lighting in rainbow colors and not vibrating) when the operation trigger effect starts (the operation valid period ends). In addition, the mode of the operation trigger performance (for example, the operation mode of the movable role, the display mode of the effect image, etc.) may be different when the execution conditions of the operation trigger performance are satisfied in the first effective period and when the execution conditions of the operation trigger performance are satisfied in the second effective period. In other words, the operation trigger performance corresponding to the first effective period and the operation trigger performance corresponding to the second effective period may be configured as different performances (modes) from each other. In that case, at the start of the operation trigger performance corresponding to the first effective period (at the end of the effective operation period), the notification mode of the performance button P15 may be switched to the third notification mode (red light and vibration) or a specific notification mode (rainbow light and non-vibration), and at the start of the operation trigger performance corresponding to the second effective period (at the end of the effective operation period), it may be switched to the fourth mode (rainbow light and vibration).

Next, as shown in (E1) in the figure, when the button effect (operation trigger effect) ends, the decorative symbols are displayed as a provisional stop with the combination of "3, 3, 3" (a jackpot). At this time, the SP reach effect is in a state immediately before its end (the background image is a reach background image), and the decorative symbols are displayed as provisional stop with only the number patterns. Note that both (D) and (E1) in the figure may be combined to form a decision success effect, which is an operation trigger effect (a jackpot confirmation effect).

Next, as shown in (F1) in the figure, the background image returns to the original stage background image (the stage background image before it was switched to the reach background image) as the SP reach performance ends. This also causes the decorative pattern that is being temporarily stopped to return to a display mode that combines a number pattern and a character pattern. Note that while the background image is shifting from (E1) to (F1) in the figure, that is, while the background image is returning to the original stage background image (the stage background image before it was switched to the reach background image), the notification mode of the performance button P15 may be a special notification mode of rainbow lighting and non-vibration. As a variation, the background image may not return to the original stage background image (the stage background image before it was switched to the reach background image), and the decorative pattern may stop on the reach background image with only a number pattern.

Then, as shown in (G1) in the figure, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols ends, and the decorative symbols are displayed as definitely stopped in the combination of "3-3-3" (a jackpot), which indicates a jackpot. Note that before the decorative symbols are displayed as definitely stopped, the notification mode of the performance button P15 switches from the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration) to the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration). As a variation, the notification mode of the performance button P15 may not switch from the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration) to the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration), but may remain in the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration).

On the other hand, as shown in (E2) in the figure, if the conditions for executing the operation trigger effect are not met, after the operation valid period has elapsed, the button effect ends without executing the operation trigger effect (jackpot confirmation effect), and the decorative symbols are displayed as a provisional stop with the combination of "3-3-3" (jackpot eye) indicating a jackpot. In addition, as the operation valid period has elapsed, the notification mode of the effect button P15 switches from the second notification mode (red light and no vibration) to the first notification mode (white light and no vibration). In addition, in (E2) to (F2) in the figure, as in (E1) to (F1) in the above figure, during the provisional stop display of the decorative symbols, the background image returns from the reach background image to the original stage background image, and the decorative symbols during this provisional stop display return from a display mode of only number symbols to a display mode consisting of number symbols and character symbols. In the figure (G2), similarly to the above figure (G1), the decorative symbols are displayed as a fixed stop with the combination "3-3-3" (a jackpot), indicating a jackpot. As a modified example, the background image may not return to the original stage background image (the stage background image before it was switched to the reach background image), and the decorative symbols may be fixed and stopped with only the number symbols on the reach background image. As a modified example, the notification mode of the performance button P15 may not be switched from the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration) to the first notification mode (white lighting and no vibration), but may remain in the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration).

In this way, in the button effect including the jackpot confirmation effect as the special type of operation trigger effect, the operation effective period of the effect button P15 may be set to the first effective period or the second effective period. Whether the operation effective period is set to either the first effective period or the second effective period, the notification mode of the effect button P15 is switched from the first notification mode to the second notification mode when the operation effective period starts. Also, whether the operation effective period is set to either the first effective period or the second effective period, when the execution condition of the operation trigger effect is satisfied, the notification mode of the effect button P15 is switched from the second notification mode to the fourth notification mode when the operation effective period ends (when the jackpot confirmation effect is executed). On the other hand, when the operation effective period is set to the first effective period, when the execution condition of the operation trigger effect is not satisfied, the notification mode of the effect button P15 is switched from the second notification mode to the first notification mode when the operation effective period elapses. In addition, when the operation valid period is set to the first valid period, if the effect button P15 is not operated during the operation valid period, the big win confirmation effect corresponding to the specific type of operation trigger effect is not executed. On the other hand, when the operation valid period is set to the second valid period, even if the effect button P15 is not operated during the operation valid period, the big win confirmation effect corresponding to the specific type of operation trigger effect is executed. Note that, for this deciding effect, only the second valid period may be set, and the first valid period may not be set. Therefore, both the deciding success effect and the deciding failure effect described later may be effects executed by setting the second valid period in the deciding effect.

<<Prescribed type of operation trigger effect: Decision failure effect>>
Next, a description will be given of an example of a button effect when a predetermined type of operation trigger effect is executed as a weak operation trigger effect (decision failure effect). FIG. 191 to FIG. 192 are schematic diagrams showing an example of a button effect including a weak operation trigger effect (decision failure effect). The decision failure effect is a failure effect (effect suggesting a miss) in a win/loss branch effect, and the decision success effect is a success effect (effect suggesting a big win) in a win/loss branch effect. These FIG. 191 to FIG. 192 show an example of an effect when a so-called revival effect is executed after the decision failure effect is executed. In this embodiment, when a revival effect is executed after the decision failure effect is executed (i.e., when a weak operation trigger effect accompanied by a revival effect is executed), only the second effective period is set as the operation effective period of the effect button P15 (the first effective period is not applicable). In the case where the first effective period is applied as a modified example, when the performance button P15 is operated during the first effective period, it is preferable that (D) in the figure is not executed, and that the performance transitions from (C) to (E) in the figure (that is, it is preferable that the performance of (D) in the figure corresponds to the operation trigger performance). Note that, in the following, explanations of parts common to the performance examples of Figures 187 to 190 above may be omitted.

First, as shown in (A) in the figure, the display of the decorative symbols begins to change. Then, as shown in (B) in the figure, the SP reach effect is executed in the display.

Next, as shown in (C) in the figure, in the final stage of the SP reach performance (the scene where the winning or losing branch occurs), a button operation prompt is started. At the same time that this operation prompt is started, the operation valid period of the performance button P15 is set.

As mentioned above, in this button performance (button performance with revival performance), the valid operation period is set to the second valid period, and when performance button P15 is operated within this valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without performance button P15 being operated, the execution conditions for the operation trigger performance are met and the state transitions to (D) in the figure. In other words, in this button performance (button performance with revival performance), the execution conditions for the operation trigger performance are never not met (in simple terms, the failed decision performance is always executed regardless of whether performance button P15 is operated within the valid operation period).

Here, as shown in (D) in the figure, when the conditions for executing the operation trigger effect are met, the operation trigger effect (failed decision effect) is executed after the end of the operation valid period. In this operation trigger effect (failed decision effect), an effect is displayed in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character. In addition, almost simultaneously with the execution of this operation trigger effect (failed decision effect), the decorative symbols are displayed temporarily stopped with the combination of "3, 4, 3" indicating a miss (a miss at a reach). At this time, the state is immediately before the end of the SP reach effect (the background image is a reach background image), and the decorative symbols are displayed temporarily stopped with only number patterns. In addition, the execution of this operation trigger effect (the end of the operation valid period) triggers the notification mode of the effect button P15 to switch from the second notification mode (lit in red and not vibrating) to the first notification mode (lit in white and not vibrating).

Next, as shown in (E) in the figure, the background image returns to the original stage background image (the stage background image before switching to the reach background image) by ending the SP reach effect. This also causes the decorative pattern in the provisional stop display to return to a display mode that combines a number pattern and a character pattern. If the change display is a miss change (if the result of the hit/miss judgment related to the change display is a miss), the decorative pattern will stop in this state, that is, the decorative pattern will stop at the combination of "3, 4, 3" indicating a miss (a reach miss). If the change is a big win change (if the result of the hit/miss judgment related to the change display is a big win), the revival effect described below will be executed.

Next, as shown in (F) in the figure, a revival effect is executed. In this revival effect, for example, an effect is displayed on the screen in which an ally character is surrounded by a rainbow-colored aura. In addition, when the revival effect is executed, the notification mode of the effect button P15 switches from the first notification mode (white light and no vibration) to the fourth notification mode (rainbow light and vibration). In addition, while this revival effect is being executed, a background image dedicated to that revival effect is temporarily displayed. Note that on the background image dedicated to the revival effect, the decorative pattern may be displayed as a provisionally stopped number pattern only ("3-3-3.").

Next, as shown in (G) in the figure, the background image switches from the background image dedicated to the revival performance to the original stage background image, and the decorative symbols are displayed as a temporary stop with the combination of "3-3-3" (a jackpot), indicating a jackpot. The decorative symbols during this temporary stop display are a display mode that combines number symbols and character symbols. Note that while transitioning from (F) to (G) in the figure, that is, while the background image is switching from the background image dedicated to the revival performance to the original stage background image, the notification mode of the effect button P15 may be a special notification mode of rainbow lighting and non-vibration. As a variation, the background image may not return from the background image dedicated to the revival performance to the original stage background image, and the decorative symbols may stop as confirmed numbers only on the background image dedicated to the revival performance.

Then, as shown in (H) in the figure, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols ends, and the decorative symbols are displayed as definitely stopped in the combination of "3-3-3" (a jackpot), which indicates a jackpot. Note that before the decorative symbols are displayed as definitely stopped, the notification mode of the effect button P15 switches from the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration) to the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration). As a variation, the notification mode of the effect button P15 may not switch from the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration) to the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration), but may remain in the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration).

In the above embodiment, after the operation trigger performance (failed decision performance) ends, no further button performance is executed (no new effective operation period is set) and the notification mode of the performance button P15 changes from the first notification mode (white light and non-vibration) to the fourth notification mode (rainbow light and vibration). However, this is not limited to this configuration, and after the operation trigger performance (failed decision performance) ends, a further button performance is executed (a new effective operation period is set), changing the notification mode of the performance button P15 from the first notification mode (white light and non-vibration) to the second notification mode (red light and non-vibration), and at the end of the effective operation period (provided that the execution conditions for the operation trigger performance are met), the notification mode of the performance button P15 changes from the second notification mode (red light and non-vibration) to the fourth notification mode (rainbow light and vibration). Alternatively, after the operation trigger performance (failed decision performance) ends, a further button performance is executed (a new operation valid period is set) to change the notification state of the performance button P15 from the first notification state (white light and non-vibration) to the fourth notification state (rainbow light and vibration) or special notification state (rainbow light and non-vibration), and at the end of the operation valid period (provided that the conditions for executing the operation trigger performance are met), the notification state of the performance button P15 may be changed (or continued) from the fourth notification state (rainbow light and vibration) or special notification state (rainbow light and non-vibration) to the fourth notification state (rainbow light and vibration). Note that, with respect to the new operation valid period in such a case, only the second valid period may be set, and the first valid period may not be set.

<Occurrence of multiple operation valid periods during one variable display>
Next, a case where multiple operation effective periods are set during one variable display will be described. Fig. 193 is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of multiple performance buttons executed during one variable display. In this embodiment, multiple operation effective periods are set during the period from when the variable display starts to when it ends, and multiple button performances corresponding to the multiple operation effective periods may be executed.

In this embodiment, the operation valid period of the effect button P15 may be set as a part of the period until the reach is established during one variable display (referred to as the "pre-reach notice period"); a part of the period after the reach is established during one variable display (excluding the win/lose branching performance) (referred to as the "post-reach notice period"); or a part of the period during the win/lose branching performance during one variable display (referred to as the "win/lose branching period"). FIG. 193 illustrates a case in which a button effect E occurs corresponding to the pre-reach notice period (first operation valid period), a button effect F occurs corresponding to the post-reach notice period (second operation valid period), and a button effect G occurs corresponding to the win/lose branching period (third operation valid period). Note that the game is equipped with an automatic operation function that considers the effect button P15 to have been operated even if the player does not operate the effect button P15, and the automatic operation function is set to either an automatic operation function setting state or an automatic operation function cancellation state. In the automatic operation function deactivation state, by satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, pressing and holding the effect button P15 for one second outside the operation valid period), the automatic operation function is switched to the automatic operation function setting state, and by satisfying a specific condition in the automatic operation function setting state (for example, operating the effect button P15 once regardless of whether it is in the operation valid period or not), the automatic operation function is switched to the automatic operation function deactivation state. When the operation valid period is reached in the automatic operation function setting state, even if the effect button P15 is not operated by the player, it is considered that the effect button P15 has been operated, and the operation promotion effect ends at a predetermined timing within the operation valid period, and the operation trigger effect is executed (note that if the effect button P15 is operated by the player before the predetermined timing is reached, the operation is prioritized, and the operation promotion effect ends and the operation trigger effect is executed by the operation). In this case, the switching of the notification mode of the effect button P15 is the same as when the effect button P15 is operated by the player, that is, the content is as described above. Just to be clear, when the automatic operation function is deactivated, as described above, if it is the first valid period, the operation prompt effect ends and the operation trigger effect is executed when the player operates the effect button P15, and if it is the second valid period, the operation prompt effect ends and the operation trigger effect is executed when the player operates the effect button P15 or the valid operation period expires (the notification mode of the effect button P15 also changes as described above).

Button performance E is a button performance that is executed before a reach is reached during the variable display. In this button performance E, the operation effective period of the performance button P15 is controlled to the pre-reach notice period and the first effective period. In other words, in button performance E, if the performance button P15 is operated during the operation effective period, the operation of the performance button P15 triggers the end of the operation effective period and the operation trigger performance starts, but if the performance button P15 is not operated during the operation effective period, the operation trigger performance is not executed and the button performance ends with the end of the operation effective period. The operation trigger performance of this button performance E is a line notice performance (comment notice performance) in which a specified character image speaks a line. This button effect E is the same as or similar to the button effect shown in FIG. 187 (a button effect when a predetermined type of operation trigger effect is executed as a dialogue preview effect, or a button effect when a specific type of operation trigger effect is executed as a dialogue preview effect), and for details of the effect content, please refer to FIG. 187 (however, in this button effect E, since the operation effective period is set to the first effective period, the effect flow corresponds to the first effective period). Note that, if the automatic operation function is set, when half (50%) of the operation effective period related to button effect E has elapsed, the operation promotion effect ends and the operation trigger effect is executed.

Button performance F is a button performance that is executed after a reach is reached during the variable display (excluding when the winning/losing branch occurs). In this button performance F, the operation effective period of the performance button P15 is controlled to the post-reach notice period and the second effective period. In other words, in the button performance F, if the performance button P15 is operated during the operation effective period (during the execution of the operation prompting performance), the operation effective period (operation prompting performance) ends with the operation of the performance button P15, and the operation trigger performance (cut-in notice performance) is executed. Also, if the performance button P15 is not operated during the operation effective period (during the execution of the operation prompting performance), the operation prompting performance ends with the end of the operation effective period, and then the operation trigger performance (cut-in notice performance) is executed. The operation trigger performance of this button performance F is a cut-in notice performance in which an image of the main character of this model is displayed in a cut-in. This button effect F is the same as or similar to the button effect shown in FIG. 188 (the button effect when a predetermined type of operation trigger effect is executed as a cut-in advance notice effect, or the button effect when a specific type of operation trigger effect is executed as a cut-in advance notice effect), and please refer to FIG. 188 for details of the effect content (however, in this button effect F, since the operation valid period is set to the second valid period, the effect flow corresponds to the second valid period). Note that, when the automatic operation function is set, when the operation valid period related to button effect F has half (50%) passed, the operation promotion effect ends and the operation trigger effect is executed.

The button performance G is a button performance executed at the time of the winning/losing branch during the variable display. In this button performance G, the operation effective period of the performance button P15 is controlled to the winning/losing branch period and the second effective period. That is, in the button performance G, if the performance button P15 is operated during the operation effective period (during the execution of the operation prompting performance), the operation effective period (operation prompting performance) ends with the operation of the performance button P15, and the operation trigger performance (gimmick performance) is executed. Also, if the performance button P15 is not operated during the operation effective period (during the execution of the operation prompting performance), the operation trigger performance (gimmick performance) is executed after the operation prompting performance ends with the end of the operation effective period. The operation trigger performance of this button performance G is a gambling performance in which a movable gambling device (first movable gambling device P651) falls to the front of the screen. In addition, this button effect G is the same as or similar to the button effect shown in the above-mentioned Figures 189 to 192 (the button effect when a specific type of operation trigger effect is executed as a decision success effect, or the button effect when a predetermined type of operation trigger effect is executed as a decision failure effect), and please refer to Figures 189 to 192 for details of the effect content (however, in this button effect G, since the operation effective period is set to the second effective period, the flow of the effect corresponding to the second effective period will be the flow of the effect). In addition, in the case of the automatic operation function setting state, when 80% of the operation effective period related to the button effect G has elapsed, the operation prompt effect ends and the operation trigger effect is executed. As a modified example, the button effect G may be excluded from the target of the automatic operation function (even in the case of the automatic operation function setting state, the operation prompt effect may be configured to end and the operation trigger effect is executed when the player operates the effect button P15 or the operation effective period expires). In addition, the special period, which is a part of the period after the execution period of the button effect F and before the execution period of the button effect G, may be set as the special effective period. During the special effective period, the operation prompting effect is not executed, but a special operation effect in which a flame-shaped effect image is displayed around the screen and the color may change each time the effect button P15 is operated (by repeatedly tapping the button) may be executed. During this special effective period, the player performs a successive tap operation, and the color of the flame-shaped effect image can be changed from blue to green to red to rainbow (the rainbow can only be displayed when a jackpot is hit), and the more the color changes, the higher the jackpot expectation. Here, as described above, since the operation prompting effect is not executed during the special effective period, the notification mode of the effect button P15 during the special effective period is the first notification mode (white light and non-vibration) regardless of the color of the flame-shaped effect image. However, as a modified example, the first notification mode (white light and no vibration) may be switched to the fourth notification mode (rainbow light and vibration) or the special notification mode (rainbow light and no vibration) only when the color of the flame-shaped effect image becomes rainbow-colored.

Here, when the operation effective period of the effect button P15 is the pre-reach notice period, the stage BGM corresponding to the current effect mode (effect stage) is continuously output during this operation effective period. The volume of the stage BGM output during the operation effective period (before the operation trigger effect is executed) during this pre-reach notice period is relatively loud (particularly compared to when the operation effective period is the win/lose branch period). Note that the volume of the stage BGM when the operation trigger effect is executed is the same or reduced compared to before the execution, but it is not not output (muted). Also, when the operation effective period is the post-reach notice period, the reach BGM corresponding to the currently executed reach effect is continuously output during this operation effective period. The volume of the reach BGM when output during the operation effective period (before the operation trigger effect is executed) during this post-reach notice period is relatively loud (particularly compared to when the operation effective period is the win/lose branch period). In addition, the volume of the reach BGM when the operation trigger performance is executed is the same as or reduced compared to before the execution, but it is not not output (muted) (it is preferable that it is reduced). However, as described above, the volume of the reach BGM output during the operation effective period (before the operation trigger performance is executed) when a cut-in advance notice performance is executed in the post-reach advance notice period during N reach is relatively loud (especially compared to when the operation effective period is the win/lose branch period), but it is preferable that the volume of the reach BGM when the operation trigger performance is executed is not output (muted) unlike before the execution.

On the other hand, if the operation effective period is a win/lose branch period, during this operation effective period, BGM is not output (muted), or the reach BGM corresponding to the currently executed reach performance is output, but the volume of the reach BGM when output during the operation effective period (before the operation trigger performance is executed) during this win/lose branch notice period is relatively low (especially compared to when the operation effective period is a pre-reach notice period or a post-reach notice period). Note that even if the reach BGM is muted during the operation effective period during this win/lose branch period, the sound accompanying the button performance (operation prompt performance), such as the button appearance sound, is output as usual. Note that after the operation trigger performance is executed, if the successful decision performance is executed, the reach BGM is output at a relatively high volume (especially compared to the operation effective period during the win/lose branch period), and if the failed decision performance is executed, the reach BGM is output at a relatively low volume (especially compared to after the successful decision performance is executed as the operation trigger performance), but it is output at a higher volume than the operation effective period that is the win/lose branch period.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a situation where the operation effective period is controlled to the first effective period or the second effective period, BGM is more likely to be output during the operation effective period when the button performance is a continuous operation performance than when the button performance is a single operation performance, or the volume of the BGM being output is set to be relatively louder. Note that a single operation performance is a button performance that encourages the performance button P15 to be operated only once, and a continuous operation performance is a button performance that encourages the performance button P15 to be operated multiple times (continuously). Here, when the button performance is executed at the time of the win/lose branch at the end of the SP reach, as described above, the BGM is likely to be muted or reduced during the operation effective period, but it is preferable that the button performance is configured so that BGM is more likely to be output during the operation effective period (or the volume of the BGM being output is less reduced) when the button performance is set as a continuous operation performance than when the button performance is set as a single operation performance.

<Relationship between button effects and special reserved numbers>
Next, the relationship between the button performance and the number of reserved special symbols will be described. In this embodiment, in the button performance E (hereinafter, for convenience, also referred to as the "first button performance") in which the operation effective period of the performance button P15 is executed as the pre-reach notice period and the first effective period, the appearance rate (execution probability) of the first button performance is set to be different depending on the number of activated reserved balls of the special pattern stored at the start of the variable display. In other words, the probability (appearance rate) of this first button performance (button performance E) occurring during the variable display is set higher for the variable display executed when the number of activated reserved balls of the special pattern is relatively small (the number of activated reserved balls is smaller than a predetermined number) than for the variable display executed when the number of activated reserved balls of the special pattern is relatively large (the number of activated reserved balls is larger than a predetermined number).

On the other hand, in the button effects F and G (hereinafter, for convenience, also referred to as "second button effects") that are executed when the operation effective period of the effect button P15 is the post-reach notice period and the second effective period, or the win/lose branch period and the second effective period, the appearance rate (execution probability) of the second button effect does not differ depending on the number of activated reserved balls of the special pattern stored at the start of the variable display. In other words, the probability (appearance rate) of the second button effect (button effects F and G) occurring during the variable display is set to be the same for the variable display executed when the number of activated reserved balls of the special pattern is relatively large (the number of activated reserved balls is greater than a predetermined number) and the variable display executed when the number of activated reserved balls is relatively small (the number of activated reserved balls is less than a predetermined number). As a variant, the probability (appearance rate) of the second button effect (button effects F, G) occurring during a variable display executed when the number of pending activation balls of the special pattern is relatively large (the number of pending activation balls is greater than a predetermined number) may be set to be higher than the probability of the variable display executed when the number of pending activation balls of the special pattern is relatively small (the number of pending activation balls is greater than a predetermined number), but it is preferable that the difference in probability be smaller than the difference between the probability of the first button effect (button effect E) occurring during a variable display executed when the number of pending activation balls of the special pattern is relatively large (the number of pending activation balls is greater than a predetermined number) and the probability of the first button effect (button effect E) occurring during a variable display executed when the number of pending activation balls is relatively small (the number of pending activation balls is less than a predetermined number).

The number of activated balls for the special pattern here refers to the number of activated balls for the first special pattern if the current game state is a low base state (a game state in which the variable display of the first special pattern is the main focus of the game), and the number of activated balls for the second special pattern if the current game state is a high base state (a game state in which the variable display of the second special pattern is the main focus of the game). The number of activated balls for this special pattern is the number of activated balls that exist at the start of the variable display (when the activated balls are consumed) (does not include the activated balls that have been consumed by the variable display). As a variation of this, the combined number of activated balls for the first special pattern and the number of activated balls for the second special pattern may be used.

In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, when considering the range of variation between the probability (appearance rate) of a button effect occurring in the variable display executed when the number of pending activation balls of the special pattern is relatively large (the number of pending activation balls is greater than a predetermined number) and the probability (appearance rate) of a button effect occurring in the variable display executed when the number of pending activation balls of the special pattern is relatively small (the number of pending activation balls is less than a predetermined number), the range of variation in the appearance rate of the second button effect may be configured to be smaller than the range of variation in the appearance rate of the first button effect.

<Button image>
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 194, the type of button image displayed during the operation valid period of the effect button P15 can be different depending on the type of button effect. Fig. 194 is a schematic diagram showing a plurality of types of button images.

As shown in FIG. 194, the button images include a normal button image (first button image) showing the effect button P15 in a normal state, and a special button image (second button image) showing the effect button P15 in a special state. Both the normal button image and the special button image are button images imitating the form of the effect button P15, but the special button image is a button image (enlarged button image) that is a size obtained by enlarging the normal button image. In this embodiment, when any button image (normal button image, special button image) is displayed, an operation prompting image such as an indicator image (also called an "operation valid period suggestion image") that visually indicates the remaining period of the operation valid period is displayed together with the display of this button image. In this embodiment, when there is no need to particularly distinguish between the normal button image (first button image) and the special button image (second button image), they are simply called "button images".

During the effective operation period of the first button effect (button effect E), the special button image is never displayed, and the normal button image is always displayed. In other words, if the effective operation period of the effect button P15 is set as the pre-reach warning period and the first effective period, the button image displayed during that effective operation period will always be the normal button image.

During the operation valid period of the second button effect (button effects F, G), a normal button image may be displayed or a special button image may be displayed. That is, when the operation valid period of the effect button P15 is set as the post-reach notice period and the second valid period, or the win/lose branch period and the second valid period, either the normal button image or the special button image can be selectively displayed during the operation period. As a modified example, it may be configured so that the probability of a jackpot is higher when a special button image is displayed in button effect G than when a special button image is displayed in button effect F (or, even if a special button image is displayed in button effect F, a jackpot is not confirmed, but when a special button image is displayed in button effect G, a jackpot is confirmed). In such a configuration, it may be configured so that the revival effect is not executed when a special button image is displayed in button effect F. As a further variation, for button effect G of the second button effects, only the special button image can be displayed, or the special button images may include special button image A (enlarged display) and special button image B (enlarged display and gold display), with special button image B having a higher probability of winning than special button image A (or special button image A does not guarantee a win, but special button image B does), and furthermore, the revival effect may be configured not to be executed when special button image B is displayed.

<Button appearance sound>
In this embodiment, the type of button appearance sound output from the speaker P11 when the button image appears (at the start of the operation valid period) can be different depending on the type of button effect to be executed. This button appearance sound is not only a sound that notifies the user that the button image has appeared on the screen, but also a sound that promotes (instructs) the operation of the effect button. Since this sound is output immediately before the button image, it may be called an "operation prompt sound," an "operation instruction sound," or a "pre-appearance sound." The types of button appearance sounds include appearance sound A and appearance sound B. Appearance sound A is a sound effect such as "pon" or "pico" that has a relatively low jackpot expectation. Appearance sound B is a sound effect such as "pip poppa" or "shakin" that has a relatively high jackpot expectation. Note that the volume of appearance sound A and the volume of appearance sound B may be output at the same level, but it is preferable that the volume of appearance sound B is set to a higher level than the volume of appearance sound A, and the output period of appearance sound B is longer than that of appearance sound A. As a modification, the volume of the appearance sound A may be set to a higher level than the volume of the appearance sound B, or the output period of the appearance sound A may be set to be longer than that of the appearance sound B.

In the first button effect (button effect E), when the button image appears, appearance sound A is always output, and appearance sound B is never output. In other words, when the operation effective period of the effect button P15 is controlled as the pre-reach warning period and the first effective period, the button appearance sound output when the button image appears is always appearance sound A.

In the second button effects (button effects F and G), when a button image appears, there are cases where a button appearance sound A is output and cases where a button appearance sound B is output. In other words, when the operation valid period of the effect button P15 is executed as the post-reach notice period and the second valid period, or the win/lose branch period and the second valid period, it is possible to selectively output either the appearance sound A or the appearance sound B as the button appearance sound output when a button image appears. Note that while the appearance sound B can be output in the button effect G, it may be configured not to be output in the button effect F.

In addition, in this embodiment, the volume of the BGM that has been output up until then is more likely to be lowered or muted when the button image appears in the second button performance (button performance F, G) than when the button image appears in the first button performance (button performance E). That is, in the first button performance (button performance E), the volume of the BGM (stage BGM) being output is relatively low (particularly compared to immediately before the button appearance sound in the second button performance (button performance F, G) is output) or is not lowered or muted. On the other hand, in the second button performance (button performance F, G), the volume of the BGM (reach BGM) being output is relatively high (particularly compared to immediately before the button appearance sound in the first button performance (button performance E) is output) or is always lowered or muted when the button appearance sound is output when the operation valid period begins. In particular, for the button performance G at the time of the winning/losing branch, it is preferable to lower or mute the volume of the BGM (reach BGM) being output when the button image appears (when the button appearance sound is output) or immediately before that. In other words, immediately before or at the start of the winning/losing branch, it is preferable to limit or suppress the output of the BGM (reach BGM) being output in some way (for example, stop playing the BGM, interrupt playing the BGM, set the volume to zero (mute), or reduce the volume). In this button effect G, when the effect button P15 is operated, if a successful hit effect (successful win/lose branch) is executed, it is preferable to switch to a jackpot-only BGM (a reach BGM that is only output when a jackpot occurs, but is a jackpot-only reach BGM that is output only when a jackpot occurs), and if a failed hit effect (failed win/lose branch) is executed, it is preferable to switch to a miss-only BGM (a reach BGM that is only output when a miss occurs or when a jackpot occurs and a revival effect is selected) or to a BGM stopped state (mute state).

<Button appearance preview>
In this embodiment, a button appearance advance notice effect may be executed by utilizing the time before the button effect is executed, i.e., the time before the button image (operation prompt image) appears on the screen. This button appearance advance notice effect is configured as a button appearance suggestion effect (a button appearance teasing effect that teases whether or not the button image will appear) that predicts that the button effect will occur, i.e., that the button image will appear on the screen. Note that the button appearance suggestion effect (button appearance teasing effect) may be configured to confirm the occurrence of the button effect, i.e., to confirm that the button image will appear, by executing the button appearance suggestion effect (button appearance teasing effect).

Figure 195 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a button appearance preview performance. In this embodiment, there are two types of button appearance preview performance: a first appearance preview performance and a second appearance preview performance. The button images displayed after this button appearance preview performance include a normal button image (first button image) and a special button image (second button image). Note that while Figure 195 shows a case where a normal button image is displayed as the button image displayed after the button appearance preview performance is executed, this is merely a representative example of a normal button image, and it is also possible to use a special button image in place of this normal button image. Since there is no need to particularly distinguish between normal button images and special button images here, they will simply be referred to as "button images" in the following description.

The first appearance notice performance is a normal effect performance that displays an effect image (normal effect image) that imitates an aura of light, as shown in FIG. 195(A). If a button image appears after this normal effect image is displayed, it is a successful performance. On the other hand, if this normal effect image is displayed but the button image does not appear and the normal effect image disappears, it is a failed performance. This first appearance notice performance can be executed regardless of whether the button performance type is the first button performance or the second button performance.

As shown in FIG. 195 (B), the second appearance notice performance is a special effect performance in which effect images (special effect images) that express multiple performance buttons P15 semi-transparently are gathered in one place. When these special effect images are gathered in one place and synthesized to form one complete button image (non-transparent button image), it is a successful performance. On the other hand, even if these special effect images are gathered in one place, if a button image is not formed and the effect image disappears, it is a failed performance. This second appearance notice performance is not executed when the type of button performance is the first button performance, but can be executed when the type of button performance is the second button performance. Here, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the second appearance notice performance is executed than when the first appearance notice performance is executed. In addition, in the case of the second button performance, it may be configured so that the second appearance notice performance is more likely to be executed when the button performance G is executed than when the button performance F is executed. As a modified example, a third appearance notice performance may be provided that has a higher probability of winning than the first appearance notice performance and the second appearance notice performance and has a different performance format, and the first button performance, button performance E, executes either the first appearance notice performance or the second appearance notice performance (without executing the third appearance notice performance) and has a relatively low probability of executing the second appearance notice performance, the second button performance, button performance F, executes either the first appearance notice performance or the second appearance notice performance (without executing the third appearance notice performance) and has a relatively high probability of executing the second appearance notice performance, and the second button performance, button performance G, executes the third appearance notice performance (without executing the first appearance notice performance and the second appearance notice performance).

Here, in this embodiment, a button effect (referred to as "button effect 1") in which the operation effective period of the effect button P15 is set to a first time, which is a relatively short time, and a button effect (referred to as "button effect 2") in which the operation effective period of the effect button P15 is set to a second time, which is a relatively long time, may be provided. Note that the button images displayed during the operation effective period of the effect button P15 for button effect 1 and button effect 2 are the same. In this case, when button effect 1 is executed, there are cases where the operation effective period is set to the first effective period and the first time, and cases where the operation effective period is set to the second effective period and the first time. Also, when button effect 2 is executed, there are cases where the operation effective period is set to the first effective period and the second time, and cases where the operation effective period is set to the second effective period and the second time. As a modified example, focusing on the decrease speed of the indicator image showing the remaining time of the effective operation period of the effect button P15 (the speed at which the image showing the length of the remaining time gradually decreases or disappears), the button effect 1 may be configured as a button effect in which the decrease speed of the indicator image is set relatively fast, and the button effect 2 may be configured as a button effect in which the decrease speed of the indicator image is set relatively slow. In this case, it is preferable to configure both button effects 1 and 2 as single operation effects. When the button effect is executed not only as a single operation effect but also as a continuous operation effect, it is preferable that the decrease speed of the indicator image is set relatively slower for the button effect related to the continuous operation effect than for the button effect related to the single operation effect.

In this embodiment, when the first and second times are set as the time values of the effective operation period of the effect button P15, the probability that the second time is set as the effective operation period for the win/lose branching period is set relatively higher than the probability that the first time is set as the effective operation period (particularly compared to the effective operation period of the pre-reach prediction period and the effective operation period of the post-reach prediction period).

In addition, when the first and second hours are set as the time values of the effective operation period of the effect button P15, if a jackpot is won in the variable display, the probability of button effect 2, whose effective operation period has a time value of the second time, being executed is higher than the probability of button effect 1, whose effective operation period has a time value of the first time, being executed (compared to when a jackpot is not won in the variable display).

In addition, when the first time and the second time are set as the time values of the operation effective period of the effect button, if a button effect 2 whose operation effective period time value is the second time is executed during the changing display, the probability that a further button effect will be executed after the execution of this button effect 2 is relatively low, but when a button effect 1 whose operation effective period time value is the first time is executed during the changing display, the probability that a further button effect will be executed after the execution of this button effect 2 is relatively high. As a modified example, when the first time and the second time are set as the time values of the operation effective period of the effect button, if a button effect 1 whose operation effective period time value is the first time is executed during the changing display, the probability that a further button effect will be executed after the execution of this button effect 1 is relatively low, but when a button effect 2 whose operation effective period time value is the second time is executed during the changing display, the probability that a further button effect will be executed after the execution of this button effect 2 is relatively high.

(Notification effect accompanying the button effect at the time of winning or losing)
Next, the notification effect that accompanies the button effect at the time of the winning/losing branch will be described. Figure 196 is a time chart when the button effect is executed at the time of the winning/losing branch of the variable display of the big win.

First, at time t91, the variable display of a jackpot begins as the variable display. At time t92, while the variable display is being executed, it progresses to an SP reach. At time t93, a button effect occurs at the end of the SP reach when the win/lose branch occurs, and a second valid period is set as the operation valid period of this button effect. In other words, the button effect executed at time t93 is a button effect (second button effect) that is executed with an operation valid period being the second valid period and the win/lose branch period.

Next, at time t94, the operation button P15 is operated within the operation valid period, which ends the operation valid period and starts an operation trigger effect (successful decision effect) that suggests a jackpot win. In this operation trigger effect, a successful decision image (for example, a rainbow-colored effect image) is displayed on the screen, and a role effect is performed in which the first movable role object P651 falls in front of the screen. Also, at this time t94, simultaneously with the start of the operation trigger effect, the following notification effects are started to notify the jackpot: a first notification effect in which a jackpot confirmation sound (one-shot notification sound) is output from the speaker P11, a second notification effect in which the performance lamp LP lights up in a specific light-emitting pattern (rainbow light-emitting pattern), and a third notification effect in which the notification mode of the performance button P15 is set to the fourth mode (rainbow lighting and vibration).

Next, at time t95, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the operation trigger performance, the output of the jackpot confirmation sound stops, and the first notification performance ends. Also, at time t96, the first movable role P651 returns to its initial position, and the operation trigger performance ends. Also, at this time t96, the decorative pattern is displayed as a temporary stop in a combination (a jackpot eye) indicating a jackpot. At time t97, during the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern, the notification mode of the performance button P15 switches from the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration) to the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration), and the third notification performance ends. Also, at time t98, the lighting of the performance lamp LP stops, and the second notification performance ends. Then, at time t99, the variable display ends, and the decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop in a combination (a jackpot eye) indicating a jackpot. In this way, in this embodiment, the first notification effect (audio notification), the second notification effect (lighting notification), and the third notification effect (vibration notification) are terminated in stages, so that the player can fully experience the afterglow of the operation trigger effect (win/lose branching effect) resulting in a favorable result (jackpot) for the player. Note that the second notification effect may be configured not to end during the change, but to continue to be executed even after the change ends (after the start of the jackpot game).

In the above embodiment, at time t97 during the jackpot change display, the notification mode of the effect button P15 returns from the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration) to the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration). However, after the notification mode of the effect button P15 returns from the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration) to the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration), the notification mode of the button effect may be changed again to the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration) when a predetermined promotion effect is executed. In this predetermined promotion effect, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a predetermined jackpot type (for example, a combination indicating a normal jackpot such as "2-2-2" or "4-4-4") is temporarily stopped and then re-changed, and a re-lottery effect is performed to incite whether a combination of decorative symbols indicating a specific jackpot type that is more advantageous than the predetermined jackpot type (for example, a combination indicating a specific jackpot such as "3-3-3" or "7-7-7") is displayed as a definite stop. If the combination of decorative symbols indicating a specific jackpot type is displayed as a fixed stop after the re-variation display, it will be a promotion success performance, and if the combination of decorative symbols indicating a specific jackpot type is not displayed as a fixed stop after the re-variation display and the combination of decorative symbols indicating a specific jackpot type is displayed as a fixed stop again, it will be a promotion failure performance. If this promotion performance (re-draw performance) is a promotion success performance, the notification mode of the performance button P15 will change again from the first notification mode (white light and non-vibration) to the fourth notification mode (rainbow light and vibration) upon the execution of the promotion success performance. On the other hand, if this promotion performance (re-draw performance) is a promotion failure performance, even if the promotion failure performance is executed, the notification mode of the performance button P15 will continue to be the first notification mode (white light and non-vibration) without changing again to the fourth notification mode (rainbow light and vibration). Here, when the successful promotion effect is executed and the notification mode of the effect button P15 changes again to the fourth notification mode (rainbow color lighting and vibration), it is preferable that the notification mode of the effect button P15 return to the first notification mode (white color lighting and non-vibration) before the second notification effect ends (before the effect lamp LP goes out). Here, the above-mentioned "the notification state of the effect button P15 returns to the first notification state (white light lit and non-vibration) before the second notification effect ends (before the effect lamp LP goes out)" means that (1) when the notification state of the effect button P15 first becomes the fourth notification state (time t94), the first notification effect and the second notification effect start simultaneously, and then after all of these first to third notification effects have ended (the second notification effect finished last), when the notification state of the effect button P15 changes again to the fourth state due to the promotion success effect, the first notification effect and the second notification effect start simultaneously, and then, at a timing before the second notification effect ends, the effect button P15 returns to the first notification state (white light lit and non-vibration) before the second notification effect ends. The notification state of the effect button P15 returns to the first notification state, or (2) when the notification state of the effect button P15 first becomes the fourth notification state (time t94), the first notification effect and the second notification effect start simultaneously, and then the first notification effect and the third notification effect end (the second notification effect does not end), and then, while the second notification effect is continuing, a promotion success effect is executed and the notification state of the effect button P15 changes again to the fourth state, and the first notification effect starts simultaneously (the second notification effect continues here), and then, at a timing before the timing when the second notification effect ends, the notification state of the effect button P15 returns to the first notification state.

The main effects achieved in the seventh embodiment (including the modified examples) can be summarized as follows:

First, according to the seventh embodiment, by making the decorative pattern (first image) and the background image (second image) displayed behind this decorative pattern perform different operations when waiting for a change and when the change is being displayed, it is possible to realize a game presentation that does not bore the player while preventing the player from mistakingly confusing the waiting for a change state and the change display state, and as a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the seventh embodiment, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the standby operation presentation, the display mode of the decorative pattern in the standby operation presentation is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, thereby reducing the burden of control processing during the variable standby period and attracting the player's interest in the gaming machine even during the variable standby period, thereby improving the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In addition, according to the seventh embodiment, if a start winning (special winning) occurs during the execution of a standby operation effect, a predetermined effect (standby winning effect) is executed in response to the start winning, regardless of the current game state (low base state, high base state) or the type of winning start port. On the other hand, if a start winning (special winning) occurs during the execution of a variable operation effect, the possibility of executing a specific effect (same color pattern stop pre-reading effect) that may be executed in response to the start winning is varied depending on the current game state (low base state, high base state) and the type of winning start port. This can further increase the player's interest and attention in the effects that are executed in response to the start winning, and can eliminate the monotony of the predetermined and specific effects, thereby making it possible to improve the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, according to the seventh embodiment, the display mode of the decorative pattern (first pattern) and background pattern (second pattern) in the standby operation presentation is executed in a manner that continues the display mode of the decorative pattern (first pattern) and background pattern (second pattern) in the immediately preceding fixed stop period. This reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player when this standby operation presentation is executed, and prevents the player from mistaking that the decorative pattern is being displayed in a changing state (it can clearly notify the player that the decorative pattern is in a changing waiting state), thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the seventh embodiment, by executing the image transformation effect in a overlapping manner while the in-changing action effect is being executed, it is possible to realize a novel and unique game effect that combines the changing action (changing display) of the decorative pattern, the second action of the background image, and the transformation action of the image to be transformed, and as a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the seventh embodiment, the dynamic display speed (loop display speed) of the stage background image displayed in the low base state is relatively slow, and the tempo of the stage BGM output in the low base state is relatively slow, while the dynamic display speed (loop display speed) of the stage background image displayed in the high base state is relatively fast, and the tempo of the stage BGM output in the high base state is relatively fast. This creates harmony and a sense of unity between the stage background image and the stage BGM in each game state, thereby further enhancing the production effect in the mode production (stage production), and as a result, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the seventh embodiment, when a button effect is executed during a variable display, the notification mode of the effect button P15 after the end of the operation effective period is made different depending on the type of operation effective period of the effect button P15 (first effective period, second effective period) and the type of operation trigger effect that is triggered by the operation of the effect button P15. This makes it possible to correctly notify the player of the current game situation by the notification mode of the effect button P15 (preventing a situation in which the player continues playing with a mistaken understanding), and to diversify the player-participation type button effects, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the seventh embodiment, even if a button effect is executed multiple times in one variable display, the type of operation effective period (first effective period, second effective period), the appearance rate of the button effect according to the number of reserved special charts, the type of button image, the appearance prediction pattern of the button image, etc. can be made different depending on the execution timing of the button effect (before reaching, after reaching, winning/losing branch), thereby making it possible to diversify the player-participation type button effects and to realize button effects that the player will not get bored of, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the seventh embodiment, with regard to the various notification effects that are performed in synchronization with the button operation trigger effect (win/lose branching effect), the first notification effect (audio notification), the second notification effect (lighting notification), and the third notification effect (vibration notification) are gradually terminated, allowing the player to fully experience the afterglow of the operation trigger effect (win/lose branching effect) resulting in a favorable result (jackpot), thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

[Eighth embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine according to one or a combination of two or more of the second to seventh embodiments described above (including those in which some of the components have been removed or converted using well-known or commonly used techniques, etc.), and in the following, the same reference numerals will be used to designate parts having the same configuration, and explanations will be omitted, and mainly differences will be described. In other words, in the following explanation, except in special cases, it is possible to apply the configuration common to the second to seventh embodiments described above.

The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment will be explained below in order. The pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a suppression function that stops the game and notifies the player when a predetermined condition is met. The predetermined condition corresponds to the suppression function activation condition described below.

<Board configuration>
First, the board configuration of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment will be briefly described. In this eighth embodiment, as in the above-mentioned sixth embodiment (see FIG. 133), the game balls flowing down the left side area PA1 can mainly enter either the first start port P51 or the general winning ports P61 to P63 arranged below the center ornament P21. On the other hand, the game balls flowing down the right side area PA2 can mainly enter either the operation gate P53, the second start port P52, or the large winning port P54 arranged to the right of the center ornament P21. On the other hand, at the lower end of the game area PA, an out port P29 is provided to discharge the game balls that flow down without entering each winning port to the back side of the game board P20. In this embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment described above, the number of game balls that have been shot into the game area PA and used for play, that is, the number of game balls (played balls) that have entered each winning hole or outlet P29 of the game area PA and been discharged to the back side of the game board P20, is counted by a played ball detection switch P891 described later. Note that, among the game areas PA equipped with various winning holes, a hitting method in which the game balls are shot so as to flow down to the left side area PA1 is called a "left hit," and a hitting method in which the game balls are shot so as to flow down to the right side area PA2 is called a "right hit."

<Electrical configuration of gaming machine>
Next, the electrical configuration of the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment will be described. In this eighth embodiment, the main control board P100 is equipped with a setting key switch P810, a RAM clear switch P820, a performance display monitor P830, and the like, as in the above-mentioned fifth embodiment (see FIG. 116). Also, as in the above-mentioned fifth embodiment (see FIG. 116), the main control board P100 is equipped with a played ball detection switch P891 that detects game balls discharged from the game area PA, a frame opening switch P892 that detects whether the front frame P2 is opened relative to the outer frame 1, and the like.
are electrically connected. The played ball detection switch P891 and the frame opening switch P892 output their respective detection signals to the main CPU P101 via the I/O port circuit P104. Also in this eighth embodiment, the main control display device P27 (see FIG. 106) is provided with various display means such as the first special symbol display device 71, the second special symbol display device P72, the first special symbol reserved lamp P73, the second special symbol reserved lamp P74, the normal symbol display device P75, the normal symbol reserved lamp P76, the round indicator lamp P77, the status indicator lamp P78, the right hit indicator lamp P79, and the error indicator lamp Er. Also in this eighth embodiment, the sub-control display device P28 (see FIG. 134) is provided with various display means such as the first variable state auxiliary display unit P801, the second variable state auxiliary display unit P802, the first reserved number auxiliary display unit P803, and the second reserved number auxiliary display unit P804. As described above, the sub-control display device P28 auxiliary displays some of the various information displayed by the main control display device P27. The rest of the configuration is basically the same as in the second embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

<Major functional configuration of gaming machine>
Next, various functions of the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment (mainly the main control board P100/presentation control board P200) will be described. FIG. 197 is a functional block diagram of the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment (mainly the main control board P100/presentation control board P200). The main control board P100 of the eighth embodiment is provided with a suppression function control means P177 as a difference from the fifth embodiment and the like. The suppression function control means P177 executes control to activate the suppression function when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The main control board P100 of the eighth embodiment is provided with a power-on transition mode control means P175, as in the fifth embodiment described above. As described above, this power-on transition mode control means P175 controls four modes (a setting change mode, a setting confirmation mode, a RAM clear mode, and a game mode, which will be described later) that are transitioned to according to a selection operation performed when the gaming machine is powered on. The contents of the transition modes (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM clear mode, game mode) that occur when the power is turned on have been described in detail in the fifth embodiment, so explanation will be omitted here (please refer to the fifth embodiment for details).

<Game specifications>
Next, the basic game specifications of the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment will be described. Fig. 198 is a diagram showing the basic game specifications of the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. The game specifications of the eighth embodiment (Fig. 198) are basically almost the same as the game specifications of the fifth embodiment (Fig. 121), and the following describes the points (jackpot types) that are different from the game specifications of the fifth embodiment.

The jackpot type (jackpot breakdown) of this eighth embodiment will be explained. In the eighth embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is "jackpot", the jackpot type (jackpot symbol, symbol group) is determined by referring to the special symbol jackpot symbol table shown in FIG. 199. As mentioned above, "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probable jackpot) that triggers the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game, and "normal jackpot" means a jackpot (non-probable jackpot) that does not trigger the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game. Details will be described later, but if a specific jackpot is won, the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol will be activated after the end of the jackpot game, and will continue until the number of times the special symbol's variable display reaches the specified ST number (100 times) from the end of the jackpot game, or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). In addition, regardless of whether a "specific jackpot" or a "normal jackpot" is won, the special symbol change time reduction function and the electric chute support function will be activated after the jackpot game ends, and will continue until the number of times the special symbol changes from the end of the jackpot game reaches a predetermined number (100 times). In this embodiment, the special symbol change time reduction function and the electric chute support function start and end operation at the same time, so the "number of times change time is reduced" and the "number of times electric support is activated" will be the same number (for this reason, in Figure 199, the "number of times change time is reduced" and the "number of times electric support is activated" are listed in the same column).

Figure 199 (A) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, the special symbol jackpot symbol random number value is associated with a symbol group (stop symbol), jackpot type, number of probability fluctuations, number of fluctuation time reductions (number of electric support times), specified number of rounds of jackpot play, and opening time of the large prize slot P54 for each round. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, two types of jackpot types (symbol groups) are set: 5R specific jackpot (symbol group A) and 5R normal jackpot (symbol group B).

When the first special symbol "5R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "5 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot entrance P54 in one round game is set to "29 seconds", a long opening time that is expected to have a sufficient possibility of the number of game balls entering the jackpot entrance P54 reaching the specified number (specified count number: 10 balls). In addition, when the first special symbol "5R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the probability change number of times, the change time shortening number of times, and the electric support number of times are set to "100 times", regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot win, and the game state after the jackpot game ends is set to a probability change game state. This probability change game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes and displays reaches the specified ST number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). If the special symbol variation display count reaches the set number of ST times (100 times) and the special symbol variation state ends, the game will transition to normal play from the next special symbol variation display.

When the first special symbol "5R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "5 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot entrance P54 in one round of play is set to "29 seconds", a long opening time that is expected to have a sufficient possibility of the number of game balls entering the jackpot entrance P54 reaching the specified number (specified count number: 10 balls). In addition, when the first special symbol "5R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot winning, the probability fluctuation number is set to "0 times", the fluctuation time reduction number is set to "100 times", and the electric support number is set to "100 times", and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol's fluctuation display reaches the specified number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified number (100 times). If the time-saving game mode ends when the number of times the special symbol changes is reached a predetermined number (100 times), the game will transition to normal game mode from the next time the special symbol changes.

Figure 199 (B) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, the special symbol jackpot symbol random number value is associated with a symbol group (stop symbol), jackpot type, number of probability fluctuations, number of fluctuation time reductions (number of electric support times), number of specified rounds of jackpot play, and opening time of the large prize slot P54 for each round. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, two types of jackpot types (symbol groups) are set: 10R specific jackpot (symbol group C) and 5R normal jackpot (symbol group D).

When the "10R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" of the second special symbol is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "10 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot entrance P54 in one round of play is set to "29 seconds", a long opening time that is expected to have a sufficient possibility of the number of game balls entering the jackpot entrance P54 reaching the specified number (specified count number: 10 balls). In addition, when the "10R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" of the second special symbol is won, the probability fluctuation number of times is set to "100 times", the fluctuation time shortening number of times is set to "100 times", and the electric support number of times is set to "100 times", regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot winning, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to a probability variable game state. This probability variable game state continues until the number of times the special symbol's fluctuation display reaches the specified ST number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). If the special symbol variation display count reaches the set number of ST times (100 times) and the special symbol variation state ends, the game will transition to normal play from the next special symbol variation display.

When the second special symbol "5R normal jackpot (symbol group D)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "5 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot entrance P54 in one round game is set to "29 seconds", a long opening time that is expected to have a sufficient possibility of the number of game balls entering the jackpot entrance P54 reaching the specified number (specified count number: 10 balls). In addition, when the second special symbol "5R normal jackpot (symbol group D)" is won, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot winning, the probability fluctuation number is set to "0 times", the fluctuation time reduction number is set to "100 times", and the electric support number is set to "100 times", and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol's fluctuation display reaches the specified number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified number (100 times). If the time-saving game mode ends when the number of times the special symbol changes is reached a predetermined number (100 times), the game will transition to normal game mode from the next time the special symbol changes.

The expected value of winning balls for each type of jackpot is as follows. The "expected value of winning balls" is the number of winning balls (theoretical number of winning balls) that a player can expect to win in one jackpot game. The expected value of winning balls for the "5R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" of the first special symbol is set to 750 balls (5 rounds x 10 counts x 15 winning balls = 750 balls). The expected value of winning balls for the "5R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" of the first special symbol is set to 750 balls (5 rounds x 10 counts x 15 winning balls = 750 balls). The expected value of winning balls for the "10R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" of the second special symbol is set to 1500 balls (10 rounds x 10 counts x 15 winning balls = 1500 balls). Additionally, the expected number of winning balls for the second special symbol "5R normal jackpot (symbol group D)" is set to 750 (5 rounds x 10 counts x 15 winning balls = 750).

<Suppression function>
Next, the suppression function of the gaming machine will be described. The suppression function, which will be described in detail later, is a function that stops the game and notifies the player when a predetermined count value "MY" reaches a predetermined specified value.

In this embodiment, data related to the suppression function is stored in the suppression function information memory area P103D of the RAMP103 provided on the main control board P100.

Here, FIG. 200(A) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the memory area of the RAMP103 of the main control board P100. The RAMP103 is provided with a game control information memory area P103A, a set value information memory area P103B, a performance information memory area P103C, a suppression function information memory area P103D, and the like. The game information memory area P103A stores information for controlling the progress of the game (information on the variable display of special and normal symbols, information on the jackpot game, information on the game state, information on the payout of prize balls, etc.). The set value information memory area P103B stores information on the set value for specifying the winning probability (jackpot probability) at which the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol is a jackpot. The performance information memory area P103C stores information for specifying the performance information (base value) of the game. Note that the performance information memory area P103C may store information used in the process for performing the test specified by the game rules. The suppression function information storage area P103D stores information for controlling the suppression function.

Figure 200 (B) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the suppression function information storage area P103D of RAMP103. The suppression function information storage area P103D is provided with an MY counter P1038, a suppression function activation flag P1039, etc.

The MY counter P1038 is a counter for counting MY. "MY" is a count value based on the difference in the number of balls between the number of safes and the number of outs, as shown in the following formula (A), and is an index showing the number of game values (balls held by the player or balls dispensed by the gaming machine) given to the player.
MY = number of safes (number of winning balls) - number of outs (number of played balls) ... (A)

The suppression function activation flag P1039 is a flag indicating that the count value of the MY counter P1038 has reached a predetermined threshold value (a specified value of "95,000" described below), i.e., that the suppression function activation conditions described below have been satisfied. The suppression function activation flag P1039 is turned ON when the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied. In addition, the suppression function activation flag P1039 is turned OFF when power is turned on with RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch P820).

Here, FIG. 201 is a diagram for explaining the increment and decrement of the MY counter P1038. In this embodiment, the MY counter P1038 is updated (incremented or decremented) when the game ball enters each winning hole or the out hole P29.

In this embodiment, the safe number is added to the count value of the MY counter P1038. The "safe number" means the number of game balls (safe balls) that are scheduled to be paid out as prize balls from the payout device (prize ball payout unit P34) based on the entry of game balls into each winning hole, that is, the planned number of prize balls. In other words, the safe number in this embodiment is not the actual number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout device, but the planned number of prize balls that the main CPUP101 has decided to have the payout device pay out. When one game ball enters the first start hole P51 (when the first start hole switch P511 detects the entry of a game ball), the MY counter P1038 adds "4" as the number of safe balls (planned number of prize balls) that are scheduled to be paid out when one game ball enters the first start hole P51. In addition, when one game ball enters the second start port P52 (when the second start port switch P521 detects the entry of a game ball), the MY counter P1038 adds "1" as the number of safe balls (planned number of prize balls) to be paid out when the game ball enters the second start port P52. In addition, when one game ball enters the general winning ports P61 to P64 (when the general winning port switches P611, 641 detect the entry of a game ball), the MY counter P1038 adds "3" as the number of safe balls (planned number of prize balls) to be paid out when the game ball enters the general winning ports P61 to P64. In addition, when one game ball enters the large prize opening P54 (when the large prize opening switch P541 detects the entry of a game ball), the MY counter P1038 adds "15" as the number of safes (the number of planned prize balls) that are scheduled to be paid out when the game ball enters the large prize opening P54.

In this embodiment, the number of outs is subtracted from the count value of the MY counter P1038. The "number of outs" is the number of game balls (out balls) that have been shot into the game area PA and used in the game, that is, the number of game balls (out balls) that have entered each winning hole (first starting hole P51, second starting hole P52, general winning holes P61-P64, large winning hole P54) of the game area PA or the out hole P29 and discharged to the back side of the game board P20. The out balls are detected by the played ball detection switch P891 described above. The MY counter P1038 subtracts "1" as the number of outs each time the played ball detection switch P891 detects one out ball. However, if the MY counter P1038 is "0", the MY counter P1038 is not subtracted even if an out ball (played ball) is detected by the played ball detection switch P891. In other words, the count value of MY counter P1038 will not become a number less than "0" (a negative number), and even if an out ball (a ball that has already been played) occurs when the count value of MY counter P1038 is "0", the number corresponding to the number of outs will not be subtracted, and the count value of MY counter P1038 will remain "0".

In addition, the main CPU P101 generates a performance control command (called a "difference ball count signal") for specifying the count value of the MY counter P1038 every time the MY counter P1038 is updated, and outputs this to the performance control board P200. The performance control board P200 executes the suppression function-related performance (pre-notification performance, suppression notification performance) described later based on this difference ball count signal.

Next, a specific example of a method for updating the MY counter P1038 will be described. FIG. 202(A) is a diagram conceptually showing the count value of the MY counter P1038. The horizontal axis indicates the time axis, and the vertical axis indicates the count value of the MY counter P1038. FIG. 202(B) is a diagram conceptually showing the actual cumulative value of the difference in pitches. The horizontal axis indicates the time axis, and the vertical axis indicates the actual cumulative value of the difference in pitches. Here, the "count value of the MY counter P1038" indicates the cumulative value (processed value) of the difference in pitches when the number of outs is not subtracted when the difference in pitches between the number of safes and the number of outs is "0" or less, while the "actual cumulative value of the difference in pitches" indicates the cumulative value (actual value) of the difference in pitches when the number of outs is subtracted even when the difference in pitches between the number of safes and the number of outs is "0" or less. Note that (A) and (B) in the diagram indicate the same event, and each time point t101 to t107 corresponds to each other. In addition, no power outages or power restorations will occur between times t101 and t107.

First, let us assume that the count value of MY counter P1038 is "0" at the start of the game at time t101. Between time t101 and t102, the number of outs exceeds the number of safes, so the actual cumulative value of the difference in balls tends to decrease (slide to the right). Note that when the count value of MY counter P1038 is "0", the count value of MY counter P1038 is not subtracted even if the number of outs is counted (even if a game ball is released) (the count value of MY counter P1038 does not become a negative value).

At time t102, for example, the first jackpot occurs, and the jackpot game begins. As a result, from time t102 to t103, the number of safes exceeds the number of outs, and the actual cumulative value of the difference in the number of balls begins to increase (rising to the right). Therefore, the count value of MY counter P1038 continues to increase by the difference in the number of balls between the number of safes and the number of outs, with time t102 as the base (bottom value = 0), from time t102 to t103. Then, at time t103, the first jackpot game ends. At this time t103, the count value of MY counter P1038 is assumed to be "700".

Next, from time t103 to t105, the next jackpot does not occur, and the number of outs falls below the number of safes, so the actual cumulative value of the difference in the number of balls again starts to decrease (sloping downward to the right). Here, from time t103 to t104, the count value of MY counter P1038 is "1" or more, so it continues to decrease by the difference in the number of balls between the number of safes and the number of outs. In other words, from time t103 to t104, unlike the previous time period from t101 to t102, the count value of MY counter P1038 is subtracted. Note that at time t104, the actual cumulative value of the difference in the number of balls at this time t104 falls to the same value as the actual cumulative value of the difference in the number of balls at time t102, so the count value of MY counter P1038 becomes "0" again. As a result, even if the number of outs is counted (even if game balls are released) between time t104 and time t105, the count value of MY counter P1038 is not subtracted (the count value of MY counter P1038 does not become a negative value).

Next, at time t105, for example, a second jackpot occurs, and the jackpot game starts. As a result, the number of safes exceeds the number of outs from time t105 to t106, and the actual cumulative value of the difference in the number of balls again starts to increase (rising to the right). Therefore, the count value of the MY counter P1038 continues to increase by the difference in the number of balls between the number of safes and the number of outs from time t105 to t106, with time t105 as the reference (bottom value = 0). Then, at time t106, the second jackpot game ends. At this time t106, the count value of the MY counter P1038 is assumed to be "1400". After that, after multiple jackpot games, the cumulative value of the difference in the number of balls continues to increase overall, while repeatedly decreasing and increasing. Then, at time t107, the suppression function is activated when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a specified value "95000" described later. In addition, if time t107 is during a jackpot game, that is, if the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95,000" described below during the jackpot game, the suppression function will be activated after the jackpot game ends.

<Activation of the suppression function>
In this embodiment, the suppression function is activated when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a predetermined threshold value (referred to as the "prescribed value"). That is, the activation condition of the suppression function (referred to as the "suppression function activation condition") is that the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the prescribed value. In this embodiment, "95000" is set as the prescribed value, and the suppression function activation condition is met when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the prescribed value "95000". As described above, when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, the suppression function activation flag P1039 provided in the RAMP103 (suppression function information storage area P103D) is turned ON. In addition, when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" and satisfies the suppression function activation condition, even if a safe ball or an out ball occurs until the suppression function is released (until the suppression function activation flag P1039 is turned OFF), the count value of the MY counter P1038 is not updated (added or subtracted), and the count value of the MY counter P1038 maintains the specified value "95000". In other words, the upper limit value of the MY counter P1038 is "95000", and even if MY exceeds "95000", the value of the MY counter P1038 will not be updated from "95000". To add, even if MY falls below "95000" after reaching or exceeding "95000", the value of the MY counter P1038 will not be updated from "95000". In other words, before MY reaches "95000", the MY counter P1038 is updated in conjunction with the update of MY. As a modified example, even if MY exceeds "95000", the value of the MY counter P1038 may be updated in conjunction, that is, updated to exceed "95000", and even if MY falls below "95000" after reaching or exceeding "95000", the value of the MY counter P1038 may be updated in conjunction, that is, updated to fall below "95000". Even in such a configuration, the suppression function activation flag P1039 is turned ON when the MY counter P1038 reaches "95000", so that the suppression function can be activated reliably. As another modified example, when MY exceeds "95000", the value of the MY counter P1038 may be set to "95000" and then switched to "0" (initialized (cleared)), and the MY counter P1038 may not be updated (fixed at "0"). Even in such a configuration, the suppression function activation flag P1039 is turned ON when the MY counter P1038 reaches "95000", so that the suppression function can be activated reliably.

In this embodiment, when the suppression function is activated, the game is stopped and the game progress is stopped. At this time, the main CPU P101 sets the timer interruption process (see FIG. 79) as a game stop process when the suppression function is activated, and stops the execution of each control process S51 to S77 executed in the timer interruption process. As an example, when the suppression function is activated, the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern, the pattern judgment, the change pattern judgment, etc. are not executed, and the high base state and the special game are not executed. In addition, when the suppression function is activated, the operation of the launching device is restricted, and the launch of the game ball is stopped regardless of the operation of the launching handle P12. However, even if the suppression function is activated, if there are game balls to be paid out (prize balls based on the winning before the suppression function is activated), the operation of the payout device (payout control board P400 and prize ball payout unit P34, etc.) is permitted, and the payout of the game balls is executed without delay. That is, since the increment of the MY counter P1038 is based on the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out, not on the number of actual prize balls actually paid out, even in a situation where all the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out have not been paid out, if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" by the increment of the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out, the suppression function operates (because the suppression function operation condition is naturally satisfied), but even in that case, the remaining part of the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out (the remaining number of prize balls that have not been paid out at the time the suppression function starts to operate) is paid out firmly to the end. Therefore, in this embodiment, although details will be described later, even during the operation of the suppression function, a prize ball error (payout error) may occur in the gaming machine due to the payout of game balls during the operation of the suppression function, and in that case, an error notification corresponding to the prize ball error will be executed. In this embodiment, even if a jackpot game is not being played, with respect to the prize balls that cause the count value of MY counter P1038 to reach the specified value of "95000" (for example, when the count value of MY counter P1038 is "94999" and "3" prize balls are paid out as a result of game balls entering the general winning ports P61 to P64), the prize balls for which the count value of MY counter P1038 exceeds the specified value of "95000" (the remaining one prize ball in the above example) will be paid out until the end (however, naturally, prize balls will not be paid out based on any subsequent wins).

In the above embodiment, when the suppression function is activated, the state transitions to a game stop state and a firing stop state, but this configuration is not limited to this, and the state may be configured so that when the suppression function is activated, the state transitions to a game stop state but does not transition to a firing stop state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the timing of the suppression function activation differs between when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" while a jackpot game is not being played (when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied) and when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" while a jackpot game is being played (when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied).

First, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied while the jackpot game is not being played, the suppression function is activated at the same time or approximately at the same time as the suppression function activation condition is satisfied. In other words, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied while the jackpot game is not being played, the timing when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied and the suppression function is activated are substantially the same. In this embodiment, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the display of a pattern change as a situation during which the jackpot game is not being played, the suppression function is activated at the time when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (the time when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000") regardless of whether the change display is a miss change display or a jackpot change display. Therefore, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied while the pattern change display is being played, the suppression function is activated at the time when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, without waiting for the change display to be stopped (even before the change display is stopped), and the change display is forcibly terminated at an intermediate stage. Therefore, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of the jackpot variable display, the player cannot enjoy the jackpot game that would normally be played after the variable display ends, and cannot obtain the profit (prize balls) that can be obtained in the jackpot game. The reason for this is that even if the game is forcibly stopped in the middle of the jackpot variable display, the player cannot know the result of the game (that he or she has won the jackpot) at this point, so even if the game suddenly stops in the middle of the variable display, the player is unlikely to feel dissatisfied or distrustful. In this embodiment, when the second start port P52 (normal electric device P522) is in the long open state in the high base state, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value of "95,000" due to a prize ball based on a game ball entering the second start port P52 (normal electric device P522) in the open state, or even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value of "95,000" due to a prize ball based on a game ball entering another general winning port P64, etc., it is preferable to forcibly close the second start port P52 (normal electric device P522) when the specified value is reached (even if the opening time remains).

On the other hand, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, the suppression function will not be activated until the jackpot game (jackpot end demo) ends, and the suppression function will be activated after the jackpot game (jackpot end demo) ends. In other words, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, it is possible to continue playing from the time the suppression function activation condition is satisfied until the jackpot game ends, and the timing when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied and the suppression function activation are substantially different. The reason for this is that if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, even if the jackpot game is not immediately stopped and the game is continued, the player will only win a limited number of prize balls in the remaining rounds of play, and the player will not win excessive benefits (no sense of unfairness with other players will occur), and if the suppression function is suddenly activated during the execution of a jackpot game and the game is stopped, it may cause the player to feel distrustful or dissatisfied.

As a modified example of this embodiment, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, the suppression function may not be activated until the end of the final round of the jackpot game, and the suppression function may be activated after the end of the final round. Also, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, the suppression function may not be activated until the start of the jackpot end demo for the jackpot game, and the suppression function may be activated after the start of the jackpot end demo.

In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of the jackpot game (even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied), if a safe ball and an out ball occur during the period until the jackpot game ends (until the suppression function is activated), the count value of the MY counter P1038 may be configured to be updateable. In that case, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 falls below the specified value "95000" after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (even if it returns to the state before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied), a configuration in which the suppression function is activated after the jackpot game ends can be applied. In other words, once the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of the jackpot game, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 increases or decreases from the specified value "95000" during the period until the jackpot game ends, the operation of the suppression function may be guaranteed when the jackpot game ends. In this modified example, after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, prize balls can be paid out based on the entry of game balls into the jackpot opening P54 until the jackpot game ends.

<Removing the suppression function>
Next, a method for canceling the suppression function will be described. In this embodiment, when the suppression function is activated, the operation of the suppression function can be cancelled by a RAM clear process at the time of power-on. That is, when the suppression function is activated, the suppression function activation flag P1039 can be switched from ON to OFF by performing a power-on power-on power-on power-on power-on with a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch P820) and then the operation of the suppression function can be cancelled. Here, the power-on ...

In addition, if the suppression function is activated, and the power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820) after the gaming machine is turned off, the suppression function activation flag P1039 will not switch from ON to OFF, and the suppression function will not be released. In that case, the suppression function will continue to operate even after the power is restored, and the game stop state and the firing stop state will continue.

In addition, if the suppression function activation conditions are met during the execution of a jackpot game (if the suppression function activation flag P1039 is ON), and the power is turned off before the jackpot game ends and the power is restored with the RAM cleared (by operating the RAM clear switch P820), the suppression function activation flag P1039 will switch from ON to OFF when the power is restored, and the suppression function will not be activated even if the jackpot game resumed after the power is restored ends.

On the other hand, if the suppression function activation conditions are met during the execution of a jackpot game (when the suppression function activation flag P1039 is ON), and the power is turned off before the jackpot game ends and the power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820), the suppression function activation flag P1039 does not switch from ON to OFF when the power is restored, and the suppression function is activated when the jackpot game resumed after the power is restored ends.

<Initializing MY counter>
Next, a method for initializing the MY counter P1038 will be described with reference to FIG.

In this embodiment, if the gaming machine is powered off and powered back on before the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied (when the suppression function activation flag P1039 is OFF), the MY counter P1038 is cleared when the power is restored, whether the power is restored with RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch P820) or without RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch P820). In other words, before the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied, the MY counter P1038 is cleared (the count value before the power cut is erased) when the gaming machine is powered on, regardless of whether the RAM clear switch P820 is operated when the power is turned on. Therefore, before the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied, the MY counter P1038 is cleared when the power is restored, regardless of whether the transition mode when the gaming machine is powered on (when the power is turned on) is the above-mentioned RAM clear mode, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, or game mode.

On the other hand, if the gaming machine is powered off and then restored after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied (when the suppression function activation flag P1039 is ON), if the power restoration is a restoration that does not involve clearing the RAM (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), the MY counter P1038 will not be cleared when the power is restored, and will retain the count value before the power was removed (95,000). Also, if the gaming machine is powered off and then restored after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied (when the suppression function activation flag P1039 is ON), if the power restoration is a restoration that involves clearing the RAM (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), the MY counter P1038 will be cleared when the power is restored (the count value before the power was removed will be erased).

As a modified example of this embodiment, the MY counter P1038 may be configured to be initialized (cleared) when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a specified value of "95000", i.e., when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied.

As a modification of this embodiment, the main control board P100 may be equipped with an operating means (referred to as a "count continuation switch") for prohibiting initialization of the MY counter P1038. For example, even if the power is cut off before the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied during the execution of the advance notification performance described below and the power is restored without clearing the RAM, if the power is restored while the count continuation switch is being operated (power is restored without clearing the RAM), the MY counter P1038 will not be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored, and will continue to have the count value before the power was cut off.

<External information signals related to inhibitory function>
Next, an external information signal related to the suppression function will be described. In this embodiment, among the external information signals output by the external information terminal board P600, there are a suppression function pre-activation signal and a suppression function activation signal as external information signals related to the suppression function. Fig. 204 is a time chart of the suppression function pre-activation signal and the suppression function activation signal.

(Signal before suppression function activation)
The suppression function pre-activation signal is an external information signal indicating that the suppression function is scheduled to be activated soon. The suppression function pre-activation signal is output continuously for a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) at a predetermined opportunity before the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000". The predetermined opportunity is when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a specific value (for example, any numerical value greater than or equal to 90000 and less than 95000 can be applied). In this embodiment, for example, "94500", which is 500 values before the specified value "95000", is adopted as the specific value. Therefore, the output start timing of the suppression function pre-activation signal is not the same or approximately the same as the execution start timing of the advance notification performance described later (it is not substantially the same timing).

As a modified example of this embodiment, when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a predetermined value of "90000", a signal before the suppression function is activated may be output, so that the output timing of the signal before the suppression function is the same or approximately the same as the execution timing of the advance notification performance described below (they may be substantially the same).

(Suppression function activation signal)
The suppression function activation signal is an external information signal that indicates that the suppression function is activated. The suppression function activation signal is output continuously from when the suppression function is activated until the activation of the suppression function is deactivated. In other words, the suppression function activation signal starts to be output when the suppression function is activated, and stops to be output when the power is restored accompanied by RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch P820). Therefore, the output timing of the suppression function activation signal is the same or approximately the same as the activation timing of the suppression function (substantially the same timing).

[Various performances]
As described above, in the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board P200 and the image control board P300 according to the progress of the game, etc. In the following, the contents of the "inhibition function related effect" among the game effects that are characteristic of the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment will be described.

[Inhibitory function-related effects]
The suppression function related effects include advance notification effects (notification effects before the suppression function is activated) and suppression notification effects (notification effects when the suppression function is activated).

<Advance notice performance>
The advance notification effect is executed before the suppression function is activated, and is an effect that suggests or notifies that the suppression function is scheduled to be activated soon. The advance notification effect is executed when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a predetermined value. In other words, the execution condition of the advance notification effect (referred to as the "advance notification condition") is met when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a predetermined value. In this embodiment, "90000" is set as the predetermined value. The specified value, which is the count value of the MY counter P1038 ("95000") that is the execution condition of the suppression notification, may be referred to as the first specified value, and the specified value, which is the count value of the MY counter P1038 (here, "90000") that is the advance notification condition, may be referred to as the second specified value.

The predetermined value is not limited to "90000" and can be set by the administrator at will (however, it is preferable that the predetermined value is "90000" or less). In other words, the execution conditions for the advance notification effect (advance notification conditions) are set as variable conditions (fluid conditions) that can be set by the administrator at will. On the other hand, the specified value is limited to "95000" and cannot be set by the administrator at will. In other words, the activation conditions for the suppression function (suppression function activation conditions) are set as fixed conditions that cannot be set by players at will. The "administrator" is a person who manages gaming machines, and typically corresponds to a staff member of an amusement store or an employee of a gaming machine manufacturer.

Here, FIG. 205 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an advance notification effect. The advance notification effect includes an advance notification display effect and an advance notification sound output effect. Note that FIG. 205 is an example of an effect when the count value of MY counter P1038 is between "90000" and "90499" (an example of an effect when there are approximately 5000 shots remaining before the suppression function is activated). Note that hereafter, unless otherwise specified, the term "advance notification effect" refers to "advance notification display effect only" or "advance notification effect and advance notification sound output effect".

The advance notification display effect includes, as an image display on the effect display device P70, a first message display stating, "When today's ball output reaches 95,000 balls, the suppression function will be activated. After activation, play will end and firing will stop," and a second message display stating, "Approximately **** balls remaining until activation." Note that "****" indicates the remaining MY value until the suppression function is activated. This "****" value is updated based on the difference ball count signal output from the main control board P100.

The first and second message displays are displayed continuously from when the pre-alert condition is satisfied until the suppression function is activated (except when the count value of the MY counter P1038 falls to a predetermined lower limit value of "89000" described below). The first message display is not dependent on the increase or decrease of the MY counter P1038, and is always a fixed message display during the execution of this pre-alert performance (pre-alert display performance) (the first message display does not change). On the other hand, the second message display is updated and displayed every time the count value of the MY counter P1038 increases by "500" starting from when the pre-alert condition is satisfied (when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "90000"). In other words, the second message display is a message display that depends on the count value of the MY counter P1038, and the "****" part is updated and displayed every time "500" is added from the specified value "90000". Specifically, first, when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a predetermined value of "90000", the second message display is changed to "Approximately 5000 shots remaining until activation", and when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches "90500", the second message display is changed to "Approximately 4500 shots remaining until activation", and when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches "91000", the second message display is changed to "Approximately 5000 shots remaining until activation". When the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches "91,500", the second message display switches to "Approximately 3,500 shots remaining until activation", and similarly every time the count value of the MY counter P1038 is incremented by "500", the second message display switches to "Approximately 500 shots remaining until activation", and finally, when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches "94,500", the second message display switches to "Approximately 500 shots remaining until activation". Note that in this embodiment, the second message display is updated in units of 500, but this is not limited to this configuration, and the second message display may be updated in units of a different number (for example, in units of 1, 10, 100, 1,000, etc.).

In addition, the advance notification display effect does not have a dedicated background image, and a background image (stage background image, reach background image, big win background image) according to the current game situation is displayed on the background of the first and second wording displays. The display priority (layer priority) of this advance notification display effect is set higher than the display priority of the background image and the decorative pattern, and lower than the display priority (layer priority) of the left hit notification image, the right hit notification image, the small pattern, the operation reserved ball number display of the special pattern, the reserved image, and the variable image. In addition, when the player performs the volume adjustment operation or the light amount adjustment operation, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect is set lower than the display priority (layer priority) of the volume adjustment image and the light amount adjustment image. In addition, when a predetermined error occurs in the gaming machine, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect is set lower than the display priority (layer priority) of the error notification image. In addition, when an image transformation performance (see FIG. 182) is executed, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display performance is set higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the image to be transformed. In addition, when an image transformation performance (see FIG. 182) is executed, it is preferable that the performance image (first wording display, second wording display) of the advance notification display performance is not included in the image to be transformed (framed image). In addition, the decorative pattern can be superimposed on the advance notification display performance, but it is preferable that the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display performance is set higher. Therefore, when the advance notification display performance is executed while the decorative pattern variation start operation, the temporary stop operation, the reach establishment operation, and the swinging operation are being executed, the display of each operation and the display of the advance notification display performance are superimposed, while the advance notification display performance has a higher display priority (layer priority), so the advance notification display performance is displayed in front. However, it is preferable that the small pattern is not superimposed on the advance notification display performance. In addition, the image transformation effect can be superimposed on the advance notification display effect, but it is preferable that the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect is set higher. In addition, the standby demo effect can be superimposed on the advance notification display effect, but it is preferable that the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect is set higher. In addition, it is preferable that the volume adjustment image, the light amount adjustment image, and the right hit image are not superimposed on the advance notification display effect.

The pre-alarm sound output effect is an effect in which a predetermined pre-alarm sound is output from the speaker P11. The pre-alarm sound is, for example, a sound such as "The suppression function will be activated with **** shots remaining." Note that "****" is the remaining MY (number of balls difference) value until the suppression function is activated, and is a value that matches the "****" in the second text display. This pre-alarm sound is output from the speaker P11 once or multiple times when the count value of the MY counter reaches "90000", "90500", "91000", "91500", "92000", "92500", "93000", "93500", "94000", or "94500", that is, when the second text display is updated and displayed. During the output of this pre-alarm sound, that is, during the display of the first text display and the second text display and the output of the pre-alarm sound, other production sounds (such as background music and sound effects) are silent. Then, after the advance warning sound is output, i.e., while the first and second wording displays are displayed and the advance warning sound is not being output, the original sound effects (such as background music and sound effects) are restored. As a variation, while the first and second wording displays are displayed and the advance warning sound is being output, other sound effects (such as background music and sound effects) may be simultaneously executed, and in such a configuration, while the first and second wording displays are displayed and the advance warning sound is being output, the volume of the other sound effects (such as background music and sound effects) may be reduced to make the advance warning sound easier to hear (after the advance warning sound is output, i.e., while the first and second wording displays are displayed and the advance warning sound is not being output, the original volume is restored).

This advance notification effect ends when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" (when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied). In other words, in this embodiment, when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, the advance notification effect is switched to the suppression notification effect. However, when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of a jackpot game (when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied), the advance notification effect continues to be executed until the end of the jackpot game, and when the jackpot game ends, the advance notification effect ends and the suppression notification effect starts. In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of the jackpot game (when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied), the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000", and the advance notification display effect is switched to a special wording that says "Since today's ball output has reached 95000, the game will end after the end of the jackpot game and the firing will stop", and this special wording may be configured to be displayed continuously until the end of the jackpot game. This special wording is also a type of advance notification effect, and may be called a special advance notification effect (special advance notification display effect). In addition, as a further modified example, the advance notification effect may be configured not to be executed during the execution of the jackpot game. In other words, if a jackpot game is started during the execution of a pre-notification effect, the pre-notification effect being executed may be interrupted when the jackpot game is started, and the interrupted pre-notification effect may be resumed when the jackpot game is ended. In such a configuration, it is preferable to resume the pre-notification effect in a display mode based on the counter value of the MY counter P1038 after the jackpot game ends. In addition, if the pre-notification condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, the pre-notification effect may not be started during the execution of the jackpot game (the execution of the pre-notification effect is waited until the end of the jackpot game), and the pre-notification effect may be started after the end of the jackpot game. In such a configuration, it is preferable to start the pre-notification effect in a display mode based on the counter value of the MY counter P1038 after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, the advance notification effect ends even when the count value of the MY counter P1038 falls to a predetermined lower limit (for example, "89000"). In other words, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" and the advance notification effect starts, if the count value of the MY counter P1038 does not reach the specified value "95000" and falls to the specified lower limit "89000" or less, the advance notification effect ends without progressing to the suppression notification effect. Here, in this embodiment, when the advance notification effect starts, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 falls to less than the specified value "90000" without reaching the specified value "95000", the advance notification effect continues to be executed until it falls to the specified lower limit "89000". In addition, when the count value of the MY counter P1038 falls to a predetermined lower limit of "89000", the pre-notification effect is not executed again even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value of "90000" again. However, if a special condition is satisfied after the count value of the MY counter P1038 falls to the predetermined lower limit of "89000" and before the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value of "90000" again, the pre-notification effect may be executed again when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value of "90000" again. For example, when the count value of the MY counter P1038 falls to a predetermined lower limit value "89000", the special condition may be satisfied when the count value of the MY counter P1038 subsequently falls to "80000", which is a value even smaller than the predetermined lower limit value "89000", and when the count value of the MY counter P1038 again reaches the predetermined value "90000", a pre-notification effect may be executed again. As another modified example, when the count value of the MY counter P1038 falls to a predetermined lower limit value "89000", the special condition may be satisfied when the count value of the MY counter P1038 subsequently falls to the initial value "0" (when the bottom value at which MY is not subtracted even if there is an out ball, or when it is cleared), and when the count value of the MY counter P1038 again reaches the predetermined value "90000", a pre-notification effect may be executed again. In addition, when the count value of the MY counter P1038 falls below the predetermined value "90000" and before it falls to the predetermined lower limit value "89000", so-called consecutive wins are broken (when the consecutive win state ends), the execution of the advance notification effect may be canceled even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 has not fallen to the predetermined lower limit value "89000". As a further modified example, without requiring any special condition, when the count value of the MY counter P1038 falls to the predetermined lower limit value "89000", the advance notification effect may be executed again when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" again.

As for the second message display, as mentioned above, the display is updated (the difference between the thresholds is increased by 500) each time the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches each threshold (90000, 90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500) that triggers an update of the pre-alarm performance, but the opposite event also occurs when the count value of MY counter P1038 falls below each threshold (90000, 90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500) that triggers an update of the pre-alarm performance (the difference between the thresholds is decreased by 500). For example, when the MY counter is subtracted from "91000" to "90999", the second message display is updated (decremented) from "Approximately 3500 shots remaining until activation" to "Approximately 4000 shots remaining until activation". However, even when the count value of the MY counter P1038 falls below the specified value "90000", the second message display is not updated and continues to display "Approximately 5000 shots remaining until activation" until it falls to the specified lower limit value "89000". In other words, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 is subtracted from "90000" to "89999", the second message display continues to display "Approximately 5000 shots remaining until activation" (continues until it falls below the specified lower limit value "89000"). As a variation of this embodiment, when the count value of MY counter P1038 falls below each threshold value (90000, 90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500) that triggers an update of the advance notification effect, the second text display may not be updated and the current display (original display) may be continued.

In the following description, for convenience, the pre-announcement effect performed when the count value of the MY counter P1038 is "90000" to "90499" (the pre-announcement effect when "about 5000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "first unit notification effect" with the MY 500 units being one unit, which is the update cycle of the second text display. Also, the pre-announcement effect performed when the count value of the MY counter P1038 is "90500" to "90999" (the pre-announcement effect when "about 4500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "second unit notification effect". Also, the pre-announcement effect performed when the count value of the MY counter P1038 is "91000" to "91499" (the pre-announcement effect when "about 4000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "third unit notification effect". Also, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter P1038 is between "91500" and "91999" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 3500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "fourth unit notification effect." Also, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter P1038 is between "92000" and "92499" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 3000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "fifth unit notification effect." Also, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter P1038 is between "92500" and "92999" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 2500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "sixth unit notification effect." Also, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter P1038 is "93000" to "93499" (the advance notification effect when "about 2000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "seventh unit notification effect." Also, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter P1038 is "93500" to "93999" (the advance notification effect when "about 1500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "eighth unit notification effect." Also, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter P1038 is "94000" to "94499" (the advance notification effect when "about 1000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "ninth unit notification effect." In addition, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of MY counter P1038 is between "94,500" and "94,999" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) is sometimes referred to as the "10th unit notification effect."

<Suppression notification effect>
The suppression notification effect is an effect that suggests or notifies that the count value of the MY counter P1038 has reached the specified value "95000", that is, that the suppression function has been activated and the game has transitioned to a stopped state. This suppression notification effect is executed when the suppression function is activated. Specifically, if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" while a jackpot game is not being played, the suppression notification effect is executed when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000", and if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" while a jackpot game is being played, the suppression notification effect is executed after the jackpot game ends.

Here, FIG. 206 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a suppression notification effect. The suppression notification effect includes a suppression notification image display effect and a suppression notification sound output effect. Although not shown, while the suppression notification effect is being executed, all of the lamps (top lamp, side lamp, globe lamp, etc.) that make up the frame lamp P10 are fully lit (or fully flashing) in red, and all of the lamps that make up the board lamp P25 are turned off.

The suppression notification display effect is an effect that displays a dedicated screen (suppression screen) that notifies that the suppression function has been activated. This suppression screen includes a special message display and a special background image. The special message display includes a message display such as "Today's ball output has reached 95,000 balls, the suppression function has been activated, today's game will end, please be careful not to forget to remove your cards." The special background image is a special background image displayed behind the special message display, and is composed of, for example, a blackout image. The display priority of this suppression screen is set higher than the display priority of any other effect image (i.e., it is set as the top priority layer), and when this suppression screen is displayed, any other effect image (normal game screen) becomes invisible or difficult to see. Note that when a specified error (for example, an error with high priority or importance) occurs, an error notification image corresponding to this specified error may be displayed in front of the suppression screen.

The suppression notification sound output performance is a performance in which a suppression notification sound is output from speaker P11. The suppression notification sound is, for example, a voice saying "The suppression function has been activated." This suppression notification sound output performance repeatedly outputs the suppression notification sound while the suppression function is activated. Note that the suppression notification sound output performance may be configured to output a specific error sound for a short period of time, and then repeatedly output the suppression notification sound.

The suppression notification effect ends when the suppression function is released. That is, in this embodiment, the suppression function is released and the suppression notification effect ends when the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on. The suppression notification display effect continues until the suppression function is released, while the suppression notification sound output effect may continue for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) after the suppression function is activated. In this case, if a power outage occurs before the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the suppression notification effect was executed, and the power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820), it is preferable that the suppression notification display effect continues to be executed after the power is restored, but the suppression notification sound output effect is not executed (even if there is time remaining in the above-mentioned predetermined time).

Next, we will explain some specific examples of the suppression function-related effects of this embodiment.

<Example 1 of the suppression function-related effects>
First, during non-execution of the big win game, the count value of the MY counter P1038 is set to the specified value "950
207 to 208 are schematic diagrams showing examples of presentations when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" during non-execution of a big win game.

First, as shown in FIG. 207(A), when the count value of MY counter P1038 is less than the predetermined value "90000", no notification regarding the suppression function is made (assuming, however, that the count value of MY counter P1038 has never reached the predetermined value "90000" since power was turned on). Note that in the figure (A), it is assumed that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state).

Next, as shown in FIG. 207(B), when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value of "90000", a pre-notification effect is started. This pre-notification effect (first unit notification effect) suggests or notifies the player that there are approximately 5000 shots remaining before the suppression function is activated. Note that (B) in the figure is the first round of the Nth jackpot game after the power is turned on (where N is a natural number).

Next, as shown in FIG. 207(C), when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches "90,500", the advance notification effect is updated from the first unit notification effect to the second unit notification effect. This advance notification effect (second unit notification effect) suggests or notifies the player that there are approximately 4,500 shots remaining before the suppression function is activated. Note that (C) in the figure is the fifth round of the Nth jackpot game after the power is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 207(D), when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches "91000", the advance notification effect is updated from the second unit notification effect to the third unit notification effect. This advance notification effect (third unit notification effect) suggests or notifies the player that there are approximately 4000 shots remaining until the suppression function is activated. Note that (D) in the figure indicates the end of the Nth jackpot game after the power is turned on, and the current game state is a sure-win game state (high probability high base state) or a time-saving game state (low probability high base state). Also, (D) in the figure indicates that the consecutive win state has continued since FIG. 207(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 207(E), when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches "91500", the advance notification effect is updated from the third unit notification effect to the fourth unit notification effect. This advance notification effect (fourth unit notification effect) suggests or notifies the player that there are approximately 3500 shots remaining before the suppression function is activated. Note that (E) in the figure is the third round of the N+1th jackpot game after the power is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 207(F), when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches "92000", the advance notification effect is updated from the fourth unit notification effect to the fifth unit notification effect. This advance notification effect (fifth unit notification effect) suggests or notifies the player that there are approximately 3000 shots remaining before the suppression function is activated. Also, in FIG. 207(F), an emphasis effect is executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value of "97500". In other words, in this embodiment, even during the advance notification effect, an emphasis effect is executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls). Note that in FIG. 207(F), it is assumed that the eighth round of the N+1th jackpot game after the power is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 207(G), when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches "92500", the advance notification effect is updated from the 5th unit notification effect to the 6th unit notification effect. This advance notification effect (6th unit notification effect) suggests or notifies the player that there are approximately 2500 shots remaining before the suppression function is activated. Note that (G) in the figure is the first round of the N+2th jackpot game after the power is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 207(H), when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches "93000", the advance notification effect is updated from the 6th unit notification effect to the 7th unit notification effect. This advance notification effect (7th unit notification effect) suggests or notifies the player that there are approximately 2000 shots remaining before the suppression function is activated. Note that (H) in the figure is the 5th round of the N+2th jackpot game after the power is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 208 (I), when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches "93,500", the advance notification effect is updated from the 7th unit notification effect to the 8th unit notification effect. This advance notification effect (8th unit notification effect) suggests or notifies the player that there are approximately 1,500 shots remaining before the suppression function is activated. Note that (I) in the figure is the first round of the N+3th jackpot game after the power is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 208(J), when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches "94000", the advance notification effect is updated from the 8th unit notification effect to the 9th unit notification effect. This advance notification effect (9th unit notification effect) suggests or notifies the player that there are about 1000 shots remaining before the suppression function is activated. Also, in the figure (J), since the cumulative prize ball count display has already reached the upper limit of "99999", even if a game ball enters the big prize hole P54, the cumulative prize ball count display will not change. The upper limit of this cumulative prize ball count display (display limit value) will be described later. Note that in the figure (J), it is assumed that the fourth round of the N+3 big win game after the power is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 208 (K), when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches "94500", the advance notification effect is updated from the 9th unit notification effect to the 10th unit notification effect. This advance notification effect (10th unit notification effect) suggests or notifies the player that there are about 500 shots remaining before the suppression function is activated. Also, in the figure (K), since the cumulative prize ball count display has already reached the upper limit of "99999", even if a game ball enters the big prize hole P54, the cumulative prize ball count display will not change. The upper limit of this cumulative prize ball count display (display limit value) will be described later. Note that in the figure (K) is the 8th round of the N+3rd big win game after the power is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 208(L), the count value of MY counter P1038 is one "94999" away from reaching the specified value of "95000". Note that (L) in the figure indicates the end of the N+3rd jackpot game after the power is turned on, and the currently active game state is a sure-win game state (high probability, high base state) or a time-saving game state (low probability, high base state). Also, (L) in the figure indicates that the consecutive win state has continued since FIG. 207(C).

As shown in FIG. 208(M), when the jackpot game is not being played (when the pattern is being displayed), the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" (for example, the specified value "95000" is reached upon winning at the general winning port P64), and the suppression notification effect is executed, suggesting or notifying the player that the suppression function has been activated. Note that the game state immediately before this suppression function is activated is a high base state (high probability game state or time-limited game state), and the activation of the suppression function ends the high base state (high probability game state or time-limited game state). Therefore, when the suppression function is activated, the flag indicating the high base state is turned OFF, and if the second start port P52 (normal electric role P522) is open, it is forcibly closed in the middle of the opening, and the display of the change in the high base state (the display of the change currently being executed) is forcibly terminated.

<Example 2 of the suppression function-related effects>
Next, a description will be given of an example of a performance in which the advance notification performance is cancelled after the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a predetermined value "90000". Fig. 209 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a performance in which the advance notification performance is cancelled after the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a predetermined value "90000".

First, as shown in Fig. 209(A) to (D), when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches a predetermined value "90000", the advance notification effect starts, and the advance notification effect is updated and displayed every time the count value of MY counter P1038 increases by 500 from the predetermined value "90000". Since Fig. 209(A) to (D) have the same contents as Fig. 207(A) to (D) described above, individual explanations of Fig. 209(A) to (D) are omitted. In Fig. 209(A), the currently active game state is a normal game state (low probability low base state), and in Fig. 209(D), the currently active game state is a probability game state (high probability high base state) or a time-saving game state (low probability high base state). In Fig. 209(D), the consecutive win state continues from Fig. 209(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 209(E), the count value of the MY counter P1038 falls to "90999" (below "91000"), and the advance notification effect returns to the previous unit notification effect (second unit notification effect). Note that FIG. 209(E) is the state after the consecutive win state of FIG. 209(D) has been broken (after falling into a low base state). In other words, FIG. 209(E) is the state in which the currently executed game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state). In addition, in this case, since MY (the player's balls) has decreased, it is preferable not to execute the advance notification sound output effect again (not to output the advance notification sound) even if the advance notification display effect (second text display) is switched.

Next, as shown in FIG. 209(F), the count value of the MY counter P1038 falls to "90499" (below "90500"), and the advance notification effect returns to the previous unit notification effect (first unit notification effect). Note that FIG. 209(F) shows that the currently executed game state is a normal game state (low probability low base state), that is, the normal game state (low probability low base state) has continued since FIG. 209(E). In this case, since MY (the player's balls) has decreased, it is preferable not to execute the advance notification sound output effect again (not to output the advance notification sound) even if the advance notification display effect (second text display) is switched.

Next, as shown in FIG. 209(G), the count value of MY counter P1038 falls to "89999", which is less than the predetermined value. In this embodiment, even if the count value of MY counter P1038 falls below the predetermined value of "90000", as long as it is above the predetermined lower limit of "89000", the advance notification effect continues (the first unit notification effect continues). Note that FIG. 209(G) shows that the currently executed game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state), that is, the normal game state (low probability low base state) has continued since FIG. 209(E).

Then, as shown in FIG. 209(H), when the count value of MY counter P1038 falls to the predetermined lower limit of "89000", the execution of the advance notification effect is cancelled. Note that FIG. 209(H) shows that the currently executed game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state), i.e., the normal game state (low probability low base state) has continued since FIG. 209(E).

<Example 3 of the suppression function-related effects>
Next, an example of a presentation when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" during a big win game will be described. FIG. 210 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a presentation when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" during a big win game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the value immediately before "94500" before reaching (A) in the figure.

First, as shown in FIG. 210(A), in the first round of the Mth jackpot game after the power is turned on today, the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches "94500", and the advance notification effect is updated from the 9th unit notification effect to the 10th unit notification effect (where M is a natural number). This advance notification effect (10th unit notification effect) suggests or notifies the player that there are approximately 500 shots remaining before the suppression function is activated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 210(B), in the fifth round of the Mth jackpot game, the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000". However, if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of the jackpot game, the suppression function does not operate until the jackpot game (jackpot end demo) ends, and the advance notification effect (10th unit notification effect) continues to be executed until the end of the jackpot game (jackpot end demo). In this embodiment, if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of the jackpot game, the count value of the MY counter P1038 is not updated even if a safe ball (scheduled number of prize balls) and an out ball (played ball) occur until the end of the jackpot game (the count value of the MY counter P1038 holds the specified value "95000"). In addition, in this embodiment, if the suppression function activation condition is met during the execution of a jackpot game (if the count value of 1038 of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000"), the most recent advance notification effect (10th unit notification effect: approximately 500 balls remaining until activation) will continue to be displayed until the end of the jackpot game, but this is not limited to this configuration, and for example, the message "The suppression function will be activated after the jackpot ends" may be displayed, or as described above, the advance notification display effect may be switched to a special message saying "Today's ball output has reached 95000 balls, so the game will end after the jackpot game ends and firing will stop," and this special message may be displayed continuously until the end of the jackpot game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 210(C), the advance notification effect (tenth unit notification effect) continues to be executed even in the tenth round (final round) of the Mth jackpot game. Here again, the advance notification effect (tenth unit notification effect) is not limited to being continuously executed, and may be configured to display, for example, a message such as "The suppression function will be activated after the jackpot ends," or, as described above, to switch from the advance notification display effect to a special message such as "Today's ball output has reached 95,000 balls, so the game will end after the jackpot game ends and firing will stop," and this special message may be displayed continuously until the jackpot game ends.

Then, as shown in FIG. 210(D), when the Mth jackpot game ends, a suppression notification effect is executed, suggesting or informing the player that the suppression function has been activated.

[Other features of the eighth embodiment]
Next, other features of the eighth embodiment will be described. In the following, other features of the suppression function related effects and the relationship between the suppression function related effects and other effects will be mainly outlined.

<Relationship between the MY counter's specified value and the upper limit of the cumulative winning ball count display>
In this embodiment, as in the second embodiment and the like, the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 (see FIG. 59) of the screen displays the cumulative value (cumulative prize ball number) of the number of prize balls acquired up to the present time based on the game ball entering the large prize winning port P54 or the general prize winning port P64 in the jackpot game during the consecutive wins. This value of the cumulative prize ball number (cumulative prize ball number display) is updated and displayed by executing the prize ball count-up effect. Here, the prize ball count-up effect is an effect that adds and displays the value of the number of prize balls paid out based on the game ball entering the large prize winning port P54 or the general prize winning port P64 to the value of the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 when the game ball enters the large prize winning port P54 or the general prize winning port P64 during the execution of the special game during the consecutive wins. That is, the prize ball count-up effect includes the large prize winning port count-up effect and the general prize winning port count-up effect in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, since the specification is such that "15" prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the large prize opening P54 (the unit prize ball number of the large prize opening P54 is 15), when a game ball enters the large prize opening P54, the value of the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 is counted up in units of "15" (a prize ball count-up effect is performed in which "15" is added to the value of the cumulative prize ball number). Also, since the specification is such that "3" prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the general prize opening P64 (the unit prize ball number of the general prize opening P64 is 3), when a game ball enters the general prize opening P64, the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 is counted up in units of "3" (a prize ball count-up effect is performed in which "3" is added to the value of the cumulative prize ball number).

The cumulative prize ball count display area P733 can display a five-digit number, and more specifically, can display 100,000 different numbers from "0" to "99999" as the cumulative prize ball count display. Therefore, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display is "99999". At this time, if the cumulative prize ball count display has reached the upper limit of "99999", even if a game ball enters the large prize ball slot P54 or the general prize ball slot P64, the cumulative prize ball count display will not change and will maintain the upper limit of "99999".

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display, "99999", is set to a value larger than the specified value "95000", which is the upper limit of MY. In other words, as shown in Figures 208 (J) to (K), the cumulative prize ball count display when the upper limit "99999" is reached can take a value larger than the MY specified value "95000" notified in advance in the advance notification performance, so that the player can be accurately notified that the number of prize balls he has won has exceeded the MY specified value "95000", giving the player a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment. In addition, since the cumulative prize ball count display is a value that does not take into account out balls and can take a value that exceeds the MY specified value "95000", it is preferable to configure it so that it can display up to the upper limit "99999".

As a variation of this embodiment, even if the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit of "99999", if a game ball enters the large prize winning port P54 or the general prize winning port P64, a pseudo prize ball count-up effect (variable display of the cumulative prize ball count display) may be executed. As a pseudo prize ball count-up effect, for example, 99999 → 91111 → 92222 → 93333 → ... → 98888 → 99999, while the first value (99999) and the last value (99999) are the same, the numbers in between may be displayed randomly, making it look as if the cumulative prize ball count is being counted up.

In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, when the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit "99999", if a new prize ball is paid out (when a game ball enters the large prize entry port P54 or the general prize entry port P64), "FFFFF" may be displayed as the cumulative prize ball count display to suggest or inform that the cumulative prize ball count display has exceeded the display limit (is in an overflow state). As a further modified example, when the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit "99999", or when a new prize ball is paid out after the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit "99999", the display may be switched to "FFFFF" (without displaying "99999" thereafter), and the display of "FFFFF" may be maintained at all times regardless of whether or not a new prize ball is paid out thereafter.

In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display may be set to "94999", which is the numerical value one number before the MY default value "95000", and when the numerical value is exceeded, a text image of "Limit Reached" is displayed, and the cumulative prize ball count display is not updated thereafter, and the text image of "Limit Break" is continuously displayed. As a modified example, when the numerical value is exceeded, the cumulative prize ball count display may be hidden, and instead the text image of "Limit Break" is displayed in the display area where the cumulative prize ball count display was displayed. Similarly, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display may be set to "95000", which is the numerical value same as the MY default value "95000", and when the numerical value is exceeded, a text image of "Limit Reached" is displayed, and when the numerical value is exceeded, the cumulative prize ball count display is not updated thereafter, and the text image of "Limit Break" is continuously displayed. Even in such a configuration, when the numerical value is exceeded, the cumulative prize ball count display may be hidden, and instead the text image of "Limit Break" is displayed in the display area where the cumulative prize ball count display was displayed.

In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, in order to prevent players from being overly gambling, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display may be set to a value (e.g., "50,000") that is sufficiently smaller than the specified value "95,000," and when that value is exceeded, a text image of "Limit Reached" may be displayed, and the cumulative prize ball count display may not be updated thereafter, and the text image of "Limit Break" may be continuously displayed. Even in such a configuration, when the value is exceeded, the cumulative prize ball count display may be hidden, and instead the text image of "Limit Break" may be displayed in the display area where the cumulative prize ball count display was displayed. In this way, the display conditions for "Limit Break" can be set as appropriate, but it is preferable not to highlight the cumulative prize ball count while "Limit Break" is displayed, even if the cumulative prize ball count value is a specific value.

<Relationship between the MY counter's specified value and the specific value of the emphasis effect>
As described above, the emphasis effect is an effect that notifies the player that the cumulative number of winning balls has reached a predetermined specific value when a game ball enters the big winning hole P54 or the general winning hole P64 during a big winning game. The specific value is a number that corresponds to a multiple of the predetermined number of winning balls (2500 balls), and is set in units of 2500 balls, such as "2500", "5000", "7500", "10000", "12500", and so on.

In this embodiment, the value of the specified number of prize balls, "2500", is set to a value smaller than the difference value "5000" obtained by subtracting the specified value "90000" from the MY specified value "95000". As a result, between the time when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the expected value "90000" and the time when it reaches the specified value "95000", that is, between the time when the advance notification effect starts and the suppression function is activated, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls will reach a specific value (a multiple of the specified number of prize balls) at least once, and the emphasis effect will be executed at least once. As a result, even in a situation immediately before the suppression function is activated, it is possible to reliably guarantee the execution of at least one emphasis effect, and to give the player a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment.

<Relationship between the prize ball count-up effect and the suppression function activation conditions>
Fig. 211 is a time chart when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up performance. In Fig. 211, the prize ball count-up performance based on the entry of the game ball into the large prize winning hole P54 is illustrated, but it is also possible to apply the prize ball count-up performance based on the entry of the game ball into the general prize winning hole P64.

In this embodiment, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect during the execution of the jackpot game and the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, the prize ball count-up effect being executed is not interrupted and the execution of the prize ball count-up effect is continued. In other words, in this embodiment, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect (the suppression function activation flag P1039 is ON),
Even if the jackpot game is ended, the suppression function is not activated (the suppression screen is not displayed) until the end of the jackpot game, and the jackpot game is continued as it is, so the prize ball count-up performance being executed is not terminated midway, and the prize ball counter-up performance being executed is completed (executed to the end). Note that, as will be described later in detail, during the execution of a previous prize ball count-up performance based on the entry of a game ball into the first large prize winning port P54 in the figure, if a subsequent prize ball count-up performance based on the entry of a game ball into the second large prize winning port P54 in the figure (a winning that triggers the count value of the MY counter P1038 to reach the specified value "95000") is executed, the previous prize ball count-up performance and the subsequent prize ball count-up performance are seamlessly connected, and these previous and subsequent prize ball count-up performances are configured as continuous and integrated count-up performances, so that even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up performance, the prize ball count-up performance being executed can be continued without interrupting the currently executed prize ball count-up performance. This allows the player to view the prize ball count-up effect to the end without interruption, so that the player's motivation to play can be maintained even after the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value of "95000." In other words, if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value of "95000" during the execution of a jackpot game, the game is not immediately stopped (the suppression function is not immediately activated), but the jackpot game is continued as is, so that no particular harm is caused even if the execution of the prize ball count-up effect is permitted, and on the contrary, if the execution of the prize ball count-up effect is hindered, the player's motivation to play may be diminished. In this embodiment, the winning combination that triggers the count value of the MY counter P1038 to reach the specified value of "95,000" is "a game ball entering the large prize opening P54," but this is not limited to this configuration, and the winning combination that triggers the count value of the MY counter P1038 to reach the specified value of "95,000" may also be "a game ball entering the general prize opening P64."

<Relationship between the prize ball count-up effect and advance notification conditions>
Fig. 212 is a time chart when the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up performance. Note that Fig. 212 illustrates the prize ball count-up performance based on the entry of the game ball into the large prize winning hole P54, but it is also possible to apply the prize ball count-up performance based on the entry of the game ball into the general prize winning hole P64.

In this embodiment, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a predetermined value "90000" during the execution of the prize ball count-up performance during the execution of the jackpot game and the advance notification condition is satisfied, the prize ball count-up performance being executed is not interrupted and the prize ball count-up performance being executed is continued. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up performance (the advance notification performance is started), the suppression function is not activated (the suppression screen is not displayed) until the end of the jackpot game, and the jackpot game is continued as it is, so that the prize ball count-up performance being executed is not terminated midway, and the prize ball counter-up performance being executed is completed (executed to the end). Although the details will be described later, when a later prize ball count-up performance based on a game ball entering the second large prize winning port P54 in the figure (a winning that triggers the count value of the MY counter P1038 to reach the predetermined value "90000") is executed during the execution of a previous prize ball count-up performance based on the entry of a game ball into the first large prize winning port P54 in the figure, the previous prize ball count-up performance and the later prize ball count-up performance are seamlessly connected, and these previous and subsequent prize ball count-up performances are configured as continuous and integrated count-up performances, so that even if the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up performance, the prize ball count-up performance in progress can be continued without interrupting the prize ball count-up performance in progress. As a result, the prize ball count-up performance can be shown to the player until the end without being interrupted, so that the player's motivation to play can be maintained even after the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000". In other words, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" during the execution of the jackpot game, the jackpot game will continue as it is until the suppression function is activated, so there is no particular harm even if the execution of the prize ball count-up effect is permitted, and if the execution of the prize ball count-up effect is hindered, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be reduced. Note that when the prize ball count-up effect and the advance notification effect are displayed in an overlapping manner, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification effect is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the prize ball count-up effect, and the advance notification effect is displayed on the front side of the prize ball count-up effect. In this embodiment, the winning combination that triggers the count value of the MY counter P1038 to reach the predetermined value "90,000" is "a game ball entering the large prize opening P54," but this is not limited to this configuration, and the winning combination that triggers the count value of the MY counter P1038 to reach the predetermined value "90,000" may also be "a game ball entering the general prize opening P64."

<Relationship between emphasis effects and suppression function activation conditions>
Fig. 213 is a time chart when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of the emphasis effect. Note that Fig. 213 illustrates an example in which the emphasis effect is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize winning hole P54, but it is also applicable to the case in which the emphasis effect is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize winning hole P64.

In this embodiment, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of the highlighting effect during the execution of the jackpot game and the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, the highlighting effect being executed is continued without interrupting the execution. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of the highlighting effect (when the suppression function activation flag P1039 is ON), the suppression function is not activated (the suppression screen is not displayed) until the end of the jackpot game, and the jackpot game is continued as it is, so the highlighting effect being executed is not terminated midway, but is completed (executed to the end). As a result, the highlighting effect can be shown to the player to the end without being interrupted, so that the player's desire to play can be maintained even after the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000". In other words, if the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value of "95000" during the execution of a jackpot game, the game will not be immediately stopped (the suppression function will not be immediately activated), but the jackpot game will continue as is, so even if the execution of the emphasis effect is permitted, no particular harm will occur, and on the contrary, if the execution of the emphasis effect is hindered, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be diminished.

<Relationship between emphasis effects and advance notification conditions>
Fig. 214 is a time chart when the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of the emphasis effect. Note that Fig. 214 illustrates an example in which the emphasis effect is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize winning hole P54, but it is also applicable to the case in which the emphasis effect is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize winning hole P64.

In this embodiment, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a predetermined value "90000" during the execution of the highlighting effect during the jackpot game and the advance notification condition is satisfied, the highlighting effect being executed is continued without interrupting the execution. That is, in this embodiment, even if the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of the highlighting effect (when the execution of the advance notification effect is started), the suppression function is not activated (the suppression screen is not displayed) until the end of the jackpot game, and the jackpot game is continued as it is, so that the highlighting effect being executed is not terminated midway, but is completed (executed to the end). As a result, the highlighting effect can be shown to the player to the end without being interrupted, so that the player's desire to play can be maintained even after the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000". In other words, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" during the execution of a jackpot game, the jackpot game will continue as is until the suppression function is activated, so no particular harm will occur even if the execution of the emphasis effect is permitted, and if the execution of the emphasis effect is hindered, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be reduced. Note that, when the emphasis effect and the advance notification effect are displayed in a superimposed manner, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification effect is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the emphasis effect, and the advance notification effect is displayed on the front side of the emphasis effect.

<Relationship between prize ball count-up duration and emphasis duration>
FIG. 215 is a time chart showing the relationship between the execution time of the prize ball count-up effect and the execution time of the highlight effect. In this embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the time required for the count-up display of one prize ball (the time required for the count-up display from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 seconds". In other words, the value of the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 is counted up and displayed in increments of "0.03 seconds". Therefore, the execution time of the prize ball count-up effect performed when one game ball enters the large prize winning hole P54 is derived by multiplying the time value required for the count-up of one prize ball by the value of the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) awarded when one game ball enters the large prize winning hole P54. In other words, the execution time of this prize ball count-up effect (the time value from the start to the end of one prize ball count-up effect) is "15 (unit prize ball number) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds".

On the other hand, the execution time of the highlighting effect is the time value from when the display of the highlighting image (enlarged display image) of the cumulative number of winning balls starts to when it ends. In this embodiment, the execution time of the highlighting effect is set to "3 seconds" regardless of which specific value (2500, 5000, 7500, 10000...) the value of the cumulative number of winning balls reaches. In this embodiment, the execution time of this highlighting effect (3 seconds) is set longer than the execution time (0.45 seconds) of the prize ball count-up effect corresponding to the entry of one game ball into the large winning port P54. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 215, when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value due to the entry of one game ball into the large prize opening P54, the prize ball count-up effect and the highlight effect are executed simultaneously or approximately simultaneously. However, by setting the execution time of the highlight effect to be longer than the execution time of the prize ball count-up effect executed in response to the entry of one game ball into the large prize opening P54, even if the highlight effect and the prize ball count-up effect are executed simultaneously or approximately simultaneously, the highlight effect with a high rarity can be made to stand out, and the satisfaction and sense of accomplishment of the player when the highlight effect occurs can be further improved. Note that when the highlight effect and the prize ball count-up effect are displayed in an overlapping manner, the display priority (layer priority) of the highlight effect is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the prize ball count-up effect, and the highlight effect is displayed in front of the prize ball count-up effect.

<Relationship between advance notice duration and emphasis duration>
Next, the relationship between the execution time of the pre-notification performance and the execution time of the highlighting performance will be described. The execution time of the pre-notification performance is the time value from the start to the end of one pre-notification performance. In other words, the execution time of the pre-notification performance is the time value from when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "90000" to when it reaches the specified value "95000". However, this execution time of the pre-notification performance does not include the execution time of the pre-notification performance when the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "90000" and then falls below the specified lower limit value "89000" without reaching the specified value "95000". In other words, the execution time of the pre-notification performance here is the execution time when the pre-notification performance is completed by reaching the specified value.

Here, the execution time of this advance notification effect is the time value until the count value of the MY counter P1038 increases from the predetermined value "90000" to "5000 (95000-90000=5000)". Since this increase of 5000 balls requires the number of prize balls obtained by multiple jackpot games (for example, in the case of a 10R jackpot, about 1500 balls x 3 times or more), it basically takes the execution time of multiple jackpot games from the start to the end of one advance notification effect. Therefore, the execution time of the advance notification effect is significantly longer than the execution time of the emphasis effect (3 seconds in this embodiment). Therefore, even if the advance notification effect and the emphasis effect are executed in overlap, the advance notification effect, which is a continuous display, is made more prominent than the emphasis effect, which is a temporary display, and the attention of the player to the advance effect can be improved, so that the player can be sure to grasp the current game situation (that the suppression function is scheduled to be activated soon). The pre-alert performance described here is an pre-alert display performance, but the same relationship applies when compared with the execution time of the pre-alert sound output performance (for example, 5 seconds of sound output).

As described above, the advance notification effect is updated and displayed every time the count value of the MY counter P1038 is added by "500" from the predetermined value "90000", and progresses in the order of the first unit notification effect → the second unit notification effect → the third unit notification effect → ... → the tenth unit notification effect. However, the execution time of any of the unit notification effects from the first unit notification effect to the tenth unit notification effect that constitute this advance notification effect is longer than the execution time of the emphasis effect (3 seconds in this embodiment). In other words, the execution time of each unit notification effect is the time value until the count value of the MY counter P1038 increases by "500", and this increase of 500 requires the number of prize balls obtained in multiple rounds of play (for example, about 150 balls x 3 rounds or more), so basically, it takes the execution time of multiple rounds of play from the start to the end of one unit notification effect. Therefore, the execution time of the unit notification effect is longer than the execution time of the emphasis effect (3 seconds in this embodiment). Therefore, even if the unit notification effect and the emphasis effect are executed at the same time, the unit notification effect, which is a continuous display, is given priority over the emphasis effect, which is a temporary display, and the player's attention to the unit notification effect can be increased, so that the player can reliably know how many shots are left before the suppression function is activated each time the unit notification effect (second text display) switches.

In this embodiment, the highlighting effect is performed in units of 2500 winning balls, so that the highlighting effect is performed at most once during one jackpot game (for example, a 10R jackpot game: number of winning balls = about 1500 balls) (at most one type of highlighting effect is displayed during one jackpot game), but the unit notification effect is performed in units of MY 500 balls, so that the unit notification effect can be performed multiple times during one jackpot game (for example, a 10R jackpot game: number of winning balls = about 1500 balls) (multiple types of unit notification effects can be displayed during one jackpot game). This allows the player to see multiple types of unit notification effects during one jackpot game, making it possible to further increase the player's attention to the advance notification effects.

＜Winning ball count-up effect when winning consecutively＞
Next, a case where a plurality of game balls (two game balls in this embodiment) enter the big prize winning hole P54 in succession during the execution of the special game will be described. Fig. 216 is a time chart showing a case where a plurality of game balls enter the big prize winning hole P54 in succession.

First, when the first game ball enters the large prize opening P54 and the large prize opening switch P541 detects the entry of the first game ball, a prize ball count-up effect based on the entry of the first ball (referred to as the "first prize ball count-up effect") is started. When a second game ball (a new game ball) enters the large prize opening P54 during the execution of the first prize ball count-up effect and the large prize opening switch P541 detects the entry of the second game ball, the first prize ball count-up effect is interrupted and a prize ball count-up effect based on the second ball (referred to as the "next prize ball count-up effect") is started. Specifically, in the previous prize ball count-up performance, if a count-up display from "1000" to "1015" is originally scheduled, if a new game ball enters the large prize winning port P54 during the execution of the previous prize ball count-up performance and is detected by the large prize winning port switch P541, the previous prize ball count-up performance being executed is terminated midway (for example, the count-up display is interrupted at "1010"), and the subsequent prize ball count-up performance is started. Then, in the subsequent prize ball count-up performance, the remaining part of the previous prize ball count-up performance (the count-up display from "1011" to "1015") is omitted, and the count-up display from "1016" to "1030", which is the continuation of the final value "1015", is performed. Although some of the count-up displays of the previous prize ball count-up performance (the count-up displays from "1011" to "1015") are omitted, the end (interruption) of the previous prize ball count-up performance and the start of the subsequent prize ball count-up performance are seamlessly connected, and these previous and subsequent prize ball count-up performances are configured as a continuous and integrated count-up display.

In this way, in this embodiment, the priority of the later prize ball count-up performance is set higher than the priority of the earlier prize ball count-up performance, and if the end of the earlier prize ball count-up performance and the start of the later prize ball count-up performance overlap in time, the execution of the earlier prize ball count-up performance is interrupted and the later prize ball count-up performance is started with priority. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if game balls enter the large prize winning hole P54 consecutively and two prize ball count-up performances are executed consecutively, the earlier and later prize ball count-up performances can be smoothly executed without a hitch, so that it is possible to prevent a timing discrepancy between the entry of the game ball into the large prize winning hole P54 and the execution of the prize ball count-up performance (which causes a player to feel uncomfortable), and it is possible to properly complete the prize ball count-up performance during the execution of the jackpot game (round game).

As a variation of this embodiment, when the execution of the previous prize ball count-up effect is interrupted, the count-up display may be forcibly switched to the final value "1015" (i.e., if it was interrupted at "1010", it may be switched from "1010" to the final value "1015" in one go), and the count-up display of the subsequent prize ball count-up effect (a count-up display from "1016" to "1030") may be started from this final value.

<Relationship between music selection and emphasis>
Next, a case where an emphasis effect is performed during execution of a song selection effect will be described. Fig. 217 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect when a song selection effect and an emphasis effect are executed at the same time.

In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a music selection effect that allows the player to select the music to be output during a jackpot game in response to the player's operation (operation of the effect button P15 and the cross key P16). Therefore, during a jackpot game, the currently output music can be changed to another music by the player's selection operation.

During the execution of the music selection performance, as shown in FIG. 217, an image showing the names of multiple types of music as BGM options, an image of the cross key switch 16 (upper and lower keys P16a, 16b) for selecting BGM, and an image of the performance button P15 for confirming the selected music are displayed on the screen of the performance display device P70 (these are also referred to as images related to the music selection performance). In the illustrated example, "music 1", "music 2", "music 3", and "music 4" are displayed as the names of multiple types of music. That is, in FIG. 217, the name of the currently outputted music "music 1" and the names of three types of music indicating candidates as new options "music 2", "music 3", and "music 4" are displayed in order from the top. In this embodiment, the desired music can be selected by operating the upper and lower keys P16a and 16b, and the selected music can be confirmed by operating the performance button P15. In the illustrated example, a state in which "music 2" is selected from multiple types of music is shown. In addition, as a modified example, the operation of the performance button P15 is not required, and the selection may be confirmed by operating only the above keys. In other words, the selection may be completed simply by operating the up and down keys P16a and P16b to move the cursor to the position indicated by the right arrow, where the desired song title is located.

In this embodiment, even when the music selection effect is being executed, if the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value, an emphasis effect (emphasis display effect, emphasis sound output effect) is executed. Note that FIG. 217 shows a state in which the emphasis effect is executed by displaying an emphasis image (in the illustrated example, "97,500 points achieved") on the screen of the effect display device P70 indicating that the cumulative number of winning balls has reached a specific value, and by outputting a special sound (in the illustrated example, the sound "In top form") from the speaker P11. Even when this emphasis effect (emphasis display effect, emphasis sound output effect) is being executed, the music can be changed by the player's selection operation (the player's music selection operation is valid).

Here, FIG. 218 is a time chart when the music is changed in the music selection effect. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 218(A), even if the music is changed from "music 1" to "music 2" while the special sound of the emphasis effect is being output, the special sound is configured to be continuously output before and after the change of music. That is, in this illustrated example, before the change from "music 1" to "music 2", the sound of "music 1" with the special sound superimposed thereon is output from speaker P11, and after the change from "music 1" to "music 2", the sound of music 2 with the special sound superimposed thereon is output from speaker P11. Note that, if there is a portion where "music 1" and "music 2" cross-fade before and after the change from "music 1" to "music 2", the sound with the special sound superimposed on this cross-faded portion is output from speaker P11.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 218(B), even if the music is changed from "Music 1" to "Music 2" immediately before the output of the special sound for the emphasis effect, the special sound is output during playback of the changed music 2. That is, in this illustrated example, after the change from "Music 1" to "Music 2", audio with the special sound superimposed on the changed music 2 is output from speaker P11. Note that, if there is a part where "Music 1" and "Music 2" cross-fade after the change from "Music 1" to "Music 2", audio with the emphasis sound superimposed on this cross-faded part is output from speaker P11.

In this embodiment, even if the currently output music is changed by the player's selection operation while the emphasis effect is being performed, the special sound of the emphasis effect continues to be output, preventing the player's sense of accomplishment or satisfaction from the occurrence of the emphasis effect (the cumulative number of winning balls reaching a specific value) from being diminished.

<Power off before suppression function activation conditions are met>
Next, a case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied will be described below. Fig. 219 is a time chart showing a case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied.

In this embodiment, if one more game ball enters the large prize opening P54 during the execution of a jackpot game, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls will reach a specific value (a multiple of 2500). On the other hand, if one game ball enters the general prize opening P64 before one more game ball enters the large prize opening P54, there is a situation (referred to as a "specific situation") in which the value of the cumulative number of prize balls does not reach the specific value and the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000". Specifically, in a specific situation where the value of the cumulative number of winning balls during the execution of a big win game is "97485" and the count value of the MY counter P1038 is "94998", if one more game ball enters the big win opening P54 (if 15 winning balls are paid out), the value of the cumulative number of winning balls will reach the specific value "97500" and an emphasis effect will be executed, while if one more game ball enters the big win opening P54, If one game ball enters the general winning port P64 before the payout (if three prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will not reach the specific value of "97,500", and the count value of the MY counter P1038 will reach the specified value of "95,000" (number of safes = 3, number of outs = 1, difference in number of balls = 3 - 1 = 2, MY = 94,998 + 2 = 95,000), satisfying the suppression function activation condition (the suppression function activation flag P1039 turns ON).

In this particular situation, if the power is restored to the gaming machine after a power outage, and this power restoration is not accompanied by RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), the jackpot game that was being executed at the time of the power outage will be resumed after the power restoration. When the jackpot game is resumed, even if one more game ball enters the jackpot entry port P54, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97500") will not be executed. In other words, when the power is restored, the performance information regarding the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero), so even if the jackpot game (the performance during the jackpot) is resumed after the power restoration, the cumulative prize ball display will be displayed again from the initial value "0", and the execution conditions for the highlighting effect (the conditions until the specific value is reached) will also be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage is in a situation where it will reach a specific value when one more game ball enters the large prize opening P54, when the jackpot game is resumed after the power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will be restarted from the initial value "0", so even if one more game ball enters the large prize opening P54, the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value "0", if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2500") by continuing the game after the power is restored, the highlight effect will be executed each time the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2500").

In addition, if the power is cut off and then restored (without clearing the RAM) before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, the MY counter P1038 is initialized when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), so that after the power is restored, the MY counter P1038 starts counting again from the initial value "0". Therefore, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 at the time of the power cut reaches the specified value "95000" when one more game ball enters the large prize opening P54, in the jackpot game resumed after the power is restored, the MY counter P1038 will restart from the initial value "0", so that even if one more game ball enters the large prize opening P54, the count value of the MY counter P1038 will not reach the specified value "95000", and the suppression function activation condition will not be satisfied (the suppression function activation flag P1039 will not be ON). However, even if the MY counter P1038 returns to its initial value of "0", if you continue playing after the power is restored and the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value of "95,000", the suppression function activation condition will be met (the suppression function activation flag P1039 will be ON).

<Power cut before advance notification conditions are met>
Next, a case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the advance notification condition is satisfied will be described below. Fig. 220 is a time chart showing a case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the advance notification condition is satisfied.

In this embodiment, if one more game ball enters the large prize opening P54 during the execution of a jackpot game, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls will reach a specific value (a multiple of 2500). On the other hand, if one game ball enters the general prize opening P64 before one more game ball enters the large prize opening P54, there is a situation (referred to as a "specified situation") in which the value of the cumulative number of prize balls does not reach the specific value and the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a specified value of "90,000". Specifically, in a predetermined situation where the value of the cumulative number of prize balls during the execution of a jackpot game is "97485" and the count value of the MY counter P1038 is "89998", if one more game ball enters the large prize winning port P54 (if 15 prize balls are paid out), the value of the cumulative number of prize balls will reach a specific value of "97500" and an emphasis effect will be executed, whereas if one game ball enters the general prize winning port P64 before one more game ball enters the large prize winning port P54 (if three prize balls are paid out), the value of the cumulative number of prize balls will not reach the specific value of "97500" and the count value of the MY counter P1038 will reach the specified value of "90000" (number of safes = 3, number of outs = 1, difference in number of balls = 3-1 = 2, MY = 89998 + 2 = 90000), thereby satisfying the advance warning condition.

In this specified situation, if the power is restored after a power outage occurs in the gaming machine, the jackpot game that was being executed when the power was off will be resumed after the power is restored if the power is restored without clearing the RAM (operation of the RAM clear switch P820). When the jackpot game is resumed, even if one more game ball enters the jackpot entry port P54, the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97500") will not be executed. In other words, when the power is restored, the performance information regarding the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero), so even if the jackpot game (the performance during the jackpot) is resumed after the power is restored, the cumulative prize ball display will be displayed again from the initial value "0", and the execution conditions for the highlight effect (the conditions until a specific value is reached) will also be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage is in a situation where it will reach a specific value when one more game ball enters the large prize opening P54, when the jackpot game is resumed after the power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will be restarted from the initial value "0", so even if one more game ball enters the large prize opening P54, the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value "0", if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2500") by continuing the game after the power is restored, the highlight effect will be executed each time the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2500").

In addition, if the power is cut off and power is restored (power is restored without clearing the RAM) before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, the MY counter P1038 is initialized when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), so after this power restoration, the MY counter P1038 starts counting again from the initial value "0". Therefore, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 at the time of power cut reaches the predetermined value "90000" when one more game ball enters the large prize winning hole P54, in the jackpot game resumed after this power restoration, the MY counter P1038 restarts from the initial value "0", so even if one more game ball enters the large prize winning hole P54, the count value of the MY counter P1038 does not reach the predetermined value "90000", and the advance notification condition is not satisfied. However, even if the MY counter P1038 returns to the initial value "0", if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" by continuing playing after the power is restored, the pre-alarm condition will be satisfied. As a variation of this embodiment, in the case where the aforementioned "count continuation switch" is installed, if the power is turned off before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied and the power is restored while operating the count continuation switch (power is restored without clearing the RAM), the MY counter P1038 will not be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored, but the pre-alarm presentation may be configured not to resume immediately after the power is restored. For example, in the case of a second unit notification presentation (approximately 4 seconds remaining until activation),
If the power is turned off during the execution of the pre-alarm notification (when the count value of MY counter P1038 is between "90,500" and "90,999") and the power is restored by operating the count continuation switch (without clearing the RAM), the MY counter P1038 will not be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored, but the second unit notification performance (approximately 4,500 shots remaining until activation) will not be resumed immediately after the power is restored, and thereafter, when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches "91,000", the pre-alarm notification performance may be resumed from the third unit notification performance (approximately 4,000 shots remaining until activation). As a further modified example, in the case where the aforementioned "count continuation switch" is installed, if the power is turned off before the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied, and then power is restored while the count continuation switch is being operated (power is restored without clearing the RAM), the MY counter P1038 will not be initialized (cleared) when power is restored, but the pre-alarm performance will not be resumed immediately after the power is restored. For example, if the power is turned off while the second unit alarm performance (approximately 4,500 shots remaining until activation) is being executed (the power is turned off when the count value of the MY counter P1038 is between "90,500" and "90,999"), and then power is restored by operating the count continuation switch (power is restored without clearing the RAM), the MY counter P1038 will not be initialized (cleared) when power is restored, and the second unit alarm performance (approximately 4,500 shots remaining until activation) may be resumed immediately after the power is restored.

<Power off after suppression function activation conditions are met>
Next, a case where a power outage occurs after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied will be described below. Fig. 221 is a time chart showing a case where a power outage occurs after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied.

In this embodiment, during the execution of a jackpot game, after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (after the suppression function activation flag P1039 is turned ON), there is a situation (referred to as "Situation A") in which the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple value of 2500) by entering one more game ball into the large prize winning port P54. Specifically, in situation A, during the execution of a jackpot game, the count value of the MY counter P1038 has already reached the specified value "95000" and the value of the cumulative number of prize balls is "97485", which is 15 balls less than the predetermined specific value "97500". In this situation, when one more game ball enters the large prize winning port P54 (15 prize balls are paid out), the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the specific value "97500" and an emphasis effect is executed.

In this situation A, if a power outage occurs in the gaming machine and the power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820), the big win game that was being performed before the power outage will be resumed, but after the big win game is resumed, even if one more game ball enters the big winning port P54, the cumulative prize ball count will not reach the specified value "97500", and the highlight effect that was scheduled before the power outage (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be performed when the cumulative prize ball count reached "97500") will not be performed. In other words, when the power is restored, the performance information regarding the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero), so even if the big win game (the performance during the big win) is resumed after the power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value "0", and the execution conditions for the highlight effect (the conditions until the specific value is reached) will also be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage is in a situation where it will reach a specific value with one more game ball entering the large prize opening P54, in the jackpot game resumed after the power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will be restarted from the initial value "0", so even if one more game ball enters the large prize opening P54, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value "0", if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2500") by continuing the game after the power is restored, the highlighting effect will be executed each time the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the specific value (a multiple of "2500").

In addition, in this situation A, if power is restored without clearing the RAM (if power is restored without clearing the RAM after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied), the MY counter P1038 is not initialized when power is restored (the count value "95000" of the MY counter P1038 is not cleared), and the suppression function activation flag P1039 remains ON. Therefore, when the jackpot game (jackpot end demo) resumed after the power is restored ends, the suppression function is activated, and at the same time or almost at the same time, the suppression notification performance is executed.

<Power cut after advance notification conditions are met>
Next, a case where a power outage occurs after the advance notification condition is satisfied will be described below. Fig. 222 is a time chart showing a case where a power outage occurs after the advance notification condition is satisfied.

In this embodiment, during the execution of a jackpot game, after the pre-notification conditions are satisfied, i.e., after the pre-notification performance has begun, there is a situation (referred to as "situation B") in which the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of 2500) when one more game ball enters the jackpot entry port P54. Specifically, in situation B, during the execution of a jackpot game, the count value of MY counter P1038 has already reached the specified value "90000" (however, it is preferable that the count value of MY counter P1038 is "90000" or "90500" or the like, with some margin before it reaches the specified value "95000"), and the value of the cumulative number of prize balls is "97485", which is 15 balls less than the specified specific value "97500". In this case, when one more game ball enters the big prize opening P54 (15 prize balls are paid out), the value of the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value "97500" and an emphasis effect will be executed.

In this situation B, if a power outage occurs in the gaming machine and the power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820), the big win game that was being played before the power outage will be resumed. However, after the big win game is resumed, even if one more game ball enters the big winning port P54, the cumulative number of prize balls will not reach the specified value "97500", and the highlight effect that was scheduled before the power outage (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be performed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97500") will not be executed. In other words, when the power is restored, the performance information regarding the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero), so even if the big win game (the big win performance) is resumed after the power is restored, the cumulative prize ball display will be displayed again from the initial value "0", and the execution conditions for the highlight effect (the conditions until the specific value is reached) will be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage is in a situation where it will reach a specific value when one more game ball enters the large prize opening P54, when the jackpot game is resumed after the power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will be restarted from the initial value "0", so even if one more game ball enters the large prize opening P54, the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value "0", if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2500") by continuing the game after the power is restored, the highlight effect will be executed each time the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2500").

In addition, even if the pre-notification condition is satisfied, if the power is turned off and the power is restored (power is restored without clearing the RAM) before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, the MY counter P1038 is initialized when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), so when the jackpot game is resumed after the power is restored, the MY counter P1038 will start counting again from the initial value "0". Therefore, after the power is restored, the pre-notification condition is returned to a state where it is not satisfied, and after the power is restored (the jackpot game resumed after the power is restored), the pre-notification performance that was executed at the time of the most recent power outage will not be resumed (the pre-notification performance will not be executed). However, even if the MY counter P1038 returns to the initial value "0", if the game is continued after the power is restored, and the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a predetermined value "90000" (if the pre-notification condition is satisfied), the pre-notification performance will be executed.

<Volume and light adjustment while suppression function is active>
In this embodiment, the volume and light amount adjustments are disabled during the operation of the suppression function (during execution of the suppression notification performance). That is, when the suppression function is activated and the game is stopped, even if the volume button (left key P16c or right key P16d) is operated, the volume level does not change (the volume operation is invalid). Therefore, even if the volume button (left key P16c or right key P16d) is operated during the execution of the suppression notification performance, the volume level of the suppression notification sound (the sound saying "The suppression function has been activated" in this embodiment) does not change, and the suppression notification sound is always output at a constant volume (a predetermined constant volume). As a modified example, the suppression notification sound may be output in an output mode according to the set volume level. Similarly, when the suppression function is activated and the game is stopped, even if the light amount button (up key P16a or down key P16b) is operated, the light amount level does not change (the light amount operation is invalid). Therefore, even if the light amount button (up key P16a or down key P16b) is operated during the execution of the suppression notification performance, the light amount of the frame lamp P10 related to the suppression notification when fully lit does not change. However, even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, if a jackpot game is being played, the suppression function is not activated (the suppression notification performance is not being executed), so volume adjustment and light amount adjustment are possible during the execution of the jackpot game. Note that, if the advance notification performance is being played, the volume level changes (volume operation is enabled) by operating the volume button (left key P16c or right key P16d) even if the volume is fluctuating or the jackpot game is being played, and the light amount level changes (light amount operation is disabled) by operating the light amount button (up key P16a or down key P16b). Here, the advance notification sound output performance may be configured to be output at a constant volume (predetermined constant volume) rather than in an output mode corresponding to the set volume level, or may be configured to be output in an output mode corresponding to the set volume level.

<Performance display when suppression function is operating>
In this embodiment, the display of the base value (including switching of the display of the base value) indicating the performance information of the game is configured not to be updated during the operation of the suppression function (during the execution of the suppression notification performance). In other words, when the suppression function is activated and the game is stopped, even if a game ball enters each winning hole during the operation of the suppression function, the prize ball is not paid out, and the out ball (played ball) used in the game is not detected, so the base value is not measured and the display of the base value on the performance display monitor P830 is not updated. However, even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, if a jackpot game is being played, the suppression function is not activated (the suppression notification performance is not executed), so the display of the base value can be updated during the execution of the jackpot game. Note that, if the advance notification performance is being executed, the display of the base value can be updated even if the value is fluctuating or during a jackpot game.

<Error notification when suppression function is activated>
In this embodiment, the types of errors that occur in the gaming machine are broadly classified into "Type 1 Error", "Type 2 Error", and "Type 3 Error" according to the priority (importance) of the error. Type 1 error is an error type in which the priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing is set to a low level. Type 1 errors include, for example, prize ball errors (payout errors). Type 2 errors are error types in which the priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing is set to a high level. Type 2 errors include, for example, magnetic sensor errors and radio wave sensor errors. Type 3 errors are error types in which the priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing is set to the highest level. Type 3 errors include, for example, illegal winning errors.

A magnetic sensor error occurs when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism and when the magnetic sensor is disconnected, short-circuited, or broken. A radio wave sensor error occurs when the radio wave sensor detects radio waves and when the radio wave sensor is disconnected, short-circuited, or broken. An illegal winning error occurs, for example, when the big winning port switch detects a game ball entering when the big winning port P54 is not open (during non-big winning play), or when the big winning port switch detects an abnormal number of game balls entering per unit time (for example, 100 balls in 0.1 seconds) during big winning play. A prize ball error (payout error) occurs when there is a problem with the payout of prize balls. These prize ball errors (payout errors) include a full tank error in which the lower ball tray P9 is full of game balls (full tank switch is on), a ball jam/ball jam error in the prize ball payout unit P34, and a no-ball error in which game balls are not replenished from the game island. Note that the above errors are examples of errors that are highly relevant to this embodiment, but other errors can also be applied. In other words, the first to third type errors are not limited to the above errors, and other errors can also be applied. For example, a CR unconnected error can be applied as a second type error. This CR unconnected error is an error that occurs when this gaming machine and the CR (lending device) are not connected.

When the above-mentioned errors occur in the gaming machine, various error notifications are made in the form of image display effects, audio output effects, lamp lighting effects, etc. Specifically, an error notification image (notification of the error) is displayed on the screen of the effect display device P70, an error notification sound is output from the speaker P11 at an error volume, and the effect lamp LP is lit or flashes at an error brightness.

First, if a first-type error (a prize ball error) is detected during the operation of the suppression function, an error notification corresponding to the first-type error can be executed even while the suppression function is in operation (while the suppression notification performance is being executed). Also, even if a first-type error is detected after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, an error notification corresponding to the first-type error can be executed (the error notification can be continued even after the jackpot ends). In other words, if a first-type error is detected during a jackpot game and the suppression function activation condition is subsequently satisfied during the jackpot game, or if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during a jackpot game and a first-type error is subsequently detected during the jackpot game, an error notification corresponding to the first-type error can be executed during the jackpot game, and if the first-type error is not released during the jackpot game, an error notification corresponding to the first-type error can be executed throughout the operation of the suppression function after the jackpot game ends (while the suppression notification performance is being executed).

In addition, if a Type 2 error (magnetic/radio sensor error) is detected while the suppression function is operating, the error notification corresponding to the Type 2 error is not executed (error notification is restricted) while the suppression function is operating (while the suppression notification performance is being executed). If a Type 2 error is detected during a jackpot game after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied, the error notification corresponding to the Type 2 error can be executed until the jackpot game ends. Then, when the jackpot game ends, i.e., when the suppression function is activated, the error notification corresponding to the Type 2 error is terminated.

Here, if the suppression function operation condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game and a second type error is detected just before the jackpot game ends, an error notification corresponding to the second type error is performed until the jackpot game ends (although the error notification corresponding to the second type error ends when the jackpot game ends), but if the suppression function operation condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game and a first type error is detected just before the jackpot game ends, the error notification corresponding to the first type error can be continued not only before the jackpot game ends but also after the jackpot game ends. In other words, even if the suppression function operation condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, the prize balls can be paid out until the jackpot game ends, so a first type error (prize ball error) may occur just before the jackpot game ends, and in that case, the error notification corresponding to this first type error can be continued even after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, if a Type 3 error (unauthorized winning error) is detected while the suppression function is operating, no error notification corresponding to the Type 3 error is executed (error notification is restricted) while the suppression function is operating (while the suppression notification presentation is being executed). Also, if a Type 3 error is detected after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, no error notification corresponding to the Type 3 error is executed (error notification is restricted). As a variation, if a Type 3 error is detected after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, the error notification corresponding to the Type 3 error may be executed only by some of the notification means. Specifically, if a first type error or a second type error is detected after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied during a jackpot game, an error notification image (error notification content) is displayed on the screen of the performance display device P70, an error notification sound is output from the speaker P11 at an error volume, and the performance lamp LP is displayed as lit or flashing at an error brightness. However, if a third type error is detected during a jackpot game after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied, an error notification image (error notification content) is displayed on the screen of the performance display device P70, but the error notification sound is not output from the speaker P11 at an error volume, and the performance lamp LP is not displayed as lit or flashing at an error brightness. In either case, if a third type error (illegal winning error) is detected during the operation of the suppression function, it is preferable not to execute an error notification corresponding to the third type error (limit the error notification) during the operation of the suppression function (during the execution of the suppression notification performance).

In this embodiment, the reason why an error notification (except for an error notification of a first type error) is not executed while the suppression function is operating is that while the suppression function is operating, the game is stopped and the ball is not released, and the game cannot be continued (stopped state), so even if an error occurs in the gaming machine, the player is not likely to suffer an unexpected disadvantage, and the store staff can easily inspect and investigate the error that occurred in the gaming machine, so there is little need to simultaneously notify the suppression function and the error. However, even when the suppression function is operating, if there are game balls to be paid out, the game balls are paid out, so if a first type error (prize ball error) occurs during the payment of the game balls, an error notification corresponding to the first type error (prize ball error) is executed to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage. As a modified example, if a type 2 error is detected during a jackpot game and the suppression function activation condition is subsequently satisfied during the jackpot game, or if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during a jackpot game and a type 2 error is subsequently detected during the jackpot game, an error notification corresponding to the type 2 error can be executed during the jackpot game, and if the type 2 error is not released during the jackpot game, an error notification corresponding to the type 2 error can be executed throughout the operation of the suppression function after the jackpot game ends (while the suppression notification presentation is being executed).

<Various notification effects in the first situation>
In this embodiment, when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, if a first type error or a second type error occurs in the gaming machine, there is a situation (referred to as the "first situation") in which an error notification corresponding to the type of error that occurred and a large prize winning presentation (highlighting presentation and/or a large prize winning presentation count-up presentation) based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize winning presentation P54 are executed in an overlapping manner. Note that the overlapping execution of the error notification and the large prize winning presentation means that the execution period (or execution timing) of the error notification and the execution period (or execution timing) of the large prize winning presentation overlap, and includes a case where the execution periods of both presentations overlap in their entirety and a case where the execution periods of both presentations overlap in part.

In this first situation, the suppression function activation condition is met (the count value of MY counter P1038 has reached the specified value of "95000"), but since a jackpot game is being played, the suppression notification effect is not executed in this first situation (the suppression function is not activated), and the advance notification effect (10th unit notification effect) continues to be executed. Note that, as a variation of this embodiment, in this first situation, it may be configured so that neither the advance notification effect nor the suppression notification effect is executed.

In this embodiment, when a player performs a specified operation during the execution of a jackpot game (for example, when the left and right keys P16c and P16d of the cross key P16 are operated simultaneously), a volume adjustment image (see FIG. 72) showing multiple volume levels is displayed side by side on the screen, and the player can adjust the output level (volume level) of the sound being output from the speaker P11 by operating the left or right key. Specifically, while the volume adjustment image is displayed, the player can adjust the volume by operating the right key to increase the volume level, or by operating the left key to decrease the volume level.

In this embodiment, when a volume adjustment image and an image of the large prize slot winning performance (highlighted, prize ball count-up display) are displayed simultaneously in the first situation, the volume adjustment image has a higher display priority than the image of the large prize slot winning performance, and even if the image of the large prize slot winning performance (highlighted, prize ball count-up display) and the volume adjustment image are superimposed, the volume adjustment image will be displayed in front of the image of the large prize slot winning performance (part or all of the image of the large prize slot winning performance will be hidden by the volume adjustment image).

In addition, when the volume is adjusted in the first situation, the error notification sound corresponding to the occurring first or second type error is output at a predetermined volume (fixed volume) regardless of the volume adjustment. That is, in this first situation, even if the left key P16c or the right key P16d is pressed while the volume adjustment image is displayed, the error notification sound is always output at a constant volume (predetermined fixed volume (for example, maximum volume)), and the volume of the error notification sound does not change. On the other hand, while the error notification sound is being output, the output of other sounds such as the jackpot BGM is stopped. However, while the output of the jackpot BGM is stopped, the jackpot BGM is internally continuously played in a muted state (silenced or silent state). If a volume adjustment operation is performed during the muted playback of this jackpot BGM, the muted playback continues, but the internal processing variably sets the set value of the volume level to a value corresponding to the volume adjustment operation. For example, in this first situation, if the volume level is changed from "2" to "4" in response to the player's volume adjustment operation, the error notification sound is always output at a constant volume (fixed volume) regardless of the volume level, and while the background music is stopped (muted) during a jackpot, the volume level setting is variably set to "4" internally (the volume adjustment operation is validly accepted internally).

<Various notification effects in the second situation>
In this embodiment, when a third type error occurs in the gaming machine while the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, there is a situation (called the "second situation") in which the error notification corresponding to the third type error is not executed, and even if a game ball enters the big prize winning port P54, the big prize winning port winning performance (highlighting performance and/or prize ball count-up performance) is not executed. Note that in this second situation, among the execution modes of the error notification corresponding to the third type error, some execution modes (e.g., output of an error notification sound) may not be executed, and other execution modes (e.g., display of an error notification image) may be executed.

This second situation satisfies the suppression function activation condition (the count value of MY counter P1038 has reached the specified value of "95000"), but since the jackpot game is in progress, the suppression notification effect is not executed in this second situation (the suppression function is not activated). Also, in this second situation, unlike the above first situation, the pre-notification effect (10th unit notification effect) is not executed until the suppression function is activated (until the jackpot game ends). In other words, when the second situation is reached (when the third type error is detected), the pre-notification effect (10th unit notification effect) that had been executed up until that point is forcibly terminated.

The reason for not executing the advance notification effect in this second situation is that the occurrence of the highest priority type 3 error (unauthorized winning error) when the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" means that there is a high probability that a large-scale fraudulent act (unauthorized winning) that would cause the MY counter P1038 to reach the specified value "95000" is being carried out, so by showing behavior that is different from normal (specific behavior that the gaming establishment can identify as abnormal), it is possible to detect the fraudulent act early. In addition, if the error notification and advance notification effect are executed while the fraudulent act is being carried out as described above, the fraudster may foresee that the suppression function will soon be activated and the game will be stopped (stopped), and the fraudster may conceal the fraudulent act or run away from the gaming establishment, but by secretly monitoring the fraudster by sending and receiving the above-mentioned external information signal, the gaming establishment can detect the fraudulent act without causing distrust or discomfort to legitimate players around them. In addition, in the second situation, if the gaming machine is powered off and then powered back on, if the power is restored along with a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), the third type of error will be released and the suppression function will be activated after the big win game ends (the suppression notification performance will be executed).

The relationship between the various error notifications and the suppression function is as described above, but the relationship between the various effects (standby demo effect, button vibration effect, specified operation of the decorative pattern, image transformation effect) and the suppression function is as follows. The standby demo effect can be executed (can be started) even during the execution of the advance notification effect, but the standby demo effect is not executed (started) while the suppression notification effect is being executed. Note that the advance notification effect can be executed (can be started) and can be executed in parallel even during the execution of the standby demo effect, but the suppression notification effect can be executed (can be started) while the standby demo effect is being executed, but the standby demo effect is forcibly terminated. Note that the button vibration effect can be executed (can be started) even during the advance notification effect, but the button vibration effect is not executed (started) while the suppression notification effect is being executed. Note that the advance notification effect can be executed (can be started) and can be executed in parallel even during the execution of the button vibration effect, but the suppression notification effect can be executed (can be started) while the button vibration effect is being executed, but the button vibration effect is forcibly terminated. In addition, the predetermined operation of the decorative pattern (operation at the start of the fluctuation, operation at the temporary stop, operation at the time of the reach, and swinging operation) can be executed (can be started) even during the execution of the advance notification performance, but the predetermined operation of the decorative pattern is not executed (started) during the execution of the suppression notification performance. In addition, the advance notification performance can be executed (can be started) even during the execution of the predetermined operation of the decorative pattern and can be executed in parallel, but the suppression notification performance can be executed (can be started) while the predetermined operation of the decorative pattern is being executed, while the predetermined operation of the decorative pattern is forcibly terminated. In addition, the image transformation performance can be executed (can be started) even during the advance notification performance, but the image transformation performance is not executed (started) during the execution of the suppression notification performance. In addition, the advance notification performance can be executed (can be started) even during the execution of the image transformation performance and can be executed in parallel, but the suppression notification performance can be executed (can be started) while the image transformation performance is being executed, while the image transformation performance is forcibly terminated.

The main effects achieved in the eighth embodiment (including the modified examples) can be summarized as follows:

First, according to the eighth embodiment, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display, "99999", is set to a value greater than the specified value of "95000", which is the upper limit of MY. Even before the suppression function is activated, it is possible to display a cumulative prize ball count display with a value greater than the specified value of MY, "95000", which is the execution condition of the suppression function. This gives the player a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment, and as a result, makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the eighth embodiment, the reference unit of the specific value "2500", which is the execution condition for the emphasis effect, is set to a value smaller than the difference value "5000" between the MY specified value "95000" and the predetermined value "90000". Therefore, between the start of the advance notification effect and the activation of the suppression function, the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value (a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls) at least once, and the emphasis effect will be executed at least once. Therefore, even in the situation immediately before the activation of the suppression function, the execution of the emphasis effect can be guaranteed, and a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment can be given to the player, which results in increased interest in the game.

In addition, according to the eighth embodiment, even if MY reaches the specified value "95,000" during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect and the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, the prize ball count-up effect being executed is continued without being interrupted, thereby realizing an effect that does not feel strange to the player, and also maintaining the player's desire to play even after MY reaches the specified value "95,000" (a situation in which the suppression function will soon be activated), thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the eighth embodiment, even if MY reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of an emphasis effect and the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, the emphasis effect being executed is continued without being interrupted, thereby realizing an effect that does not feel strange to the player, and also maintaining the player's motivation to play even after MY reaches the specified value "95000" (a situation in which the suppression function will soon be activated), thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the eighth embodiment, even if MY reaches a predetermined value of "90,000" during the execution of the prize ball count-up performance and the advance notification condition is satisfied (the advance notification performance is started), the ongoing prize ball count-up performance is continued without interrupting the ongoing prize ball count-up performance, thereby realizing a performance that does not feel strange to the player, and maintaining the player's desire to play even after the advance notification performance has started, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the eighth embodiment, even if MY reaches a predetermined value of "90000" during the execution of an emphasis effect and the advance notification condition is satisfied (if the advance notification effect is started), the emphasis effect being executed is continued without being interrupted, thereby realizing an effect that does not feel strange to the player, and maintaining the player's desire to play even after the advance notification effect has started, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the eighth embodiment, even if the highlighting effect is about to be executed during the execution of a big win game, the highlighting effect is not executed due to an irregular win other than the big win port, and the suppression function activation condition can be satisfied, so that an appropriate performance progress according to the situation can be realized, and the suppression function can be activated even in this irregular event to ensure a fair and impartial game, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that, in such a situation, it is possible to reset the performance content and the activation condition of the suppression function by turning the power off once and then turning it on again, so to speak, to start over from scratch.

Furthermore, according to the eighth embodiment, even if an emphasis effect is about to be executed during a jackpot game, an irregular win other than at the jackpot entry port can result in a situation in which the emphasis effect is not executed and the advance notification condition can be satisfied, thereby realizing an appropriate performance progression according to the situation, and even in this irregular event, an advance notification regarding the suppression function can be promptly executed to ensure a fair and impartial game, thereby making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game. Note that in such a situation, it is possible to reset the performance content and advance notification by turning the power off and then on again, so to speak, and start over from scratch.

In addition, according to the eighth embodiment, by setting the execution time of the emphasis effect to be longer than the execution time of the prize ball count-up effect that is performed in response to the entry of one game ball into the large prize opening P54, even if the emphasis effect and the prize ball count-up effect are executed simultaneously or approximately simultaneously, the emphasis effect with a high rarity can be made to stand out, thereby further increasing the satisfaction and sense of accomplishment of the player when the emphasis effect occurs, and as a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the eighth embodiment, by setting the execution time of the advance notification effect to be longer than the execution time of the emphasis effect, even if the advance notification effect and the emphasis effect are executed at the same time, the advance notification effect, which is a continuous display, is given priority over the emphasis effect, which is a temporary display, and the player's attention to the advance notification effect can be increased. This allows the player to reliably understand the current game situation (that the suppression function is scheduled to be activated soon), and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, according to the eighth embodiment, even in a situation where game balls enter the large prize winning port P54 successively and two prize ball count-up effects are executed successively, the first and second prize ball count-up effects can be performed smoothly without a hitch. This makes it possible to prevent a timing discrepancy between the entry of the game ball into the large prize winning port P54 and the execution of the prize ball count-up effect (which would cause the player to feel uncomfortable), and also makes it possible to properly complete the prize ball count-up effect during the execution of the jackpot game (round game), thereby making it possible to improve the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, according to the eighth embodiment, even if the music being output is changed by the player's selection operation while the emphasis effect is being executed, the special sound of the emphasis effect continues to be output. This prevents the player from losing a sense of accomplishment or satisfaction from the occurrence of the emphasis effect (the cumulative number of winning balls reaching a specific value), and also provides variety and selectivity to the presentation during a jackpot, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the eighth embodiment, if the power is restored without clearing the RAM after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied during a jackpot game, the emphasis effect (the emphasis effect scheduled to be executed before the power was cut off) is not executed after the power is restored, but the suppression notification effect is executed after the jackpot game resumed after the power is restored. This prioritizes the notification of the power recovery over the execution of the emphasis effect, making it possible to promptly notify the player that the power has been restored and that play can be resumed, and also ensures a fair and impartial game by reliably notifying and activating the suppression function after the power is restored, thereby making it possible to improve the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, according to the eighth embodiment, if the power is restored without clearing the RAM after the pre-notification conditions are satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, the emphasis effect (the emphasis effect scheduled to be executed before the power was cut off) is not executed after the power is restored, and the pre-notification effect (the pre-notification effect executed at the time of the power cut) is not resumed after the power is restored. This prioritizes the notification of the power recovery over the execution of the emphasis effect and the pre-notification effect, and allows the player to be promptly notified that the power has been restored and that play can be resumed, and allows the player to recognize that the MY has been initialized by the power recovery (eliminating the player's misunderstanding or anxiety that the suppression function will be activated immediately after the power is restored), thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Next, a modified version of the first to eighth embodiments will be described. The gaming machine according to this modified version basically has the same configuration as the gaming machines according to the first to eighth embodiments, and in the following, the same reference numerals will be used to designate parts having the same configuration, and a description will be omitted, and differences will be mainly described.

<Modification 1>
In the above embodiment, a normal probability change game machine is used that judges whether or not a probability change will occur based on the stopping pattern of the special pattern (the jackpot pattern) when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern is a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a V probability change game machine may be used that judges whether or not a probability change will occur based on whether or not the game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern is a jackpot. Also, as a modified example of the game machine of the above embodiment, a game machine equipped with a limiter function for limiting the number of consecutive times of the probability change game state or the potential probability game state that is given when the first special pattern or the second special pattern is a jackpot, up to a preset limit number (upper limit number), may be used. In the second embodiment, the probability variation function of the special symbol is configured as a probability variable game machine that continues from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot occurs, but the probability variation function of the special symbol may be configured as a probability variable game machine (a number-limited probability variable game machine, an ST machine) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol continues to operate for a specified number of STs (for example, 100 times). Conversely, in the fifth embodiment, the probability variation function of the special symbol is configured as a probability variable game machine (a number-limited probability variable game machine, an ST machine) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol continues to operate for a specified number of STs, but the probability variation function of the special symbol may be configured as a probability variable game machine that continues from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot occurs.

<Modification 2>
In the above embodiment, a machine type having only one large prize opening in the game area is described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a machine type having multiple large prize openings in the game area may be applied. In addition, when adopting a machine type having multiple large prize openings, the V-variable game machine may have two or more large prize openings, that is, a first large prize opening having a specific area (probability variation function activation area, V area) that is a trigger for the activation of the probability variation function of the special pattern, and a second large prize opening having no specific area (probability variation function activation area, V area). As an example of the board arrangement, the first large prize opening and the second large prize opening may be arranged approximately vertically or horizontally in the right area of the game area, or the board area where the first large prize opening is arranged and the board area where the second large prize opening is arranged may be different areas. In this case, the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) paid out when the game ball enters the first large prize opening and the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) paid out when the game ball enters the second large prize opening may be the same or different. Also, of the two large prize openings, the first large prize opening (or the second large prize opening) may be configured as a large prize opening for small prize games, and the second large prize opening (or the first large prize opening) may be configured as a large prize opening for big prize games. In that case, the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) of the large prize opening for small prize games may be 10, and the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) of the large prize opening for big prize games may be 15, etc.

<Modification 3>
In the above embodiment, among the multiple game states, the latent probability change game state is defined as a game state in which the probability change function of the special symbol and the change time shortening function of the special symbol are activated and the electric chute support function is not activated, but this is not limited to this, and the latent probability change game state may be defined as a game state in which only the probability change function of the special symbol is activated and the change time shortening function of the special symbol and the electric chute support function are not activated. In addition, the change time shortening function of the special symbol may be functionally divided into a change time shortening function of the first special symbol and a change time shortening function of the second special symbol, and the latent probability change game state may be defined as a game state in which the probability change function of the special symbol and the change time shortening function of the second special symbol are activated and the electric chute support function is not activated. In addition, the electric chute support function may be one that operates in synchronization with the change time shortening function of the special symbol (change time shortening function of the second special symbol) or one that operates independently of the change time shortening function of the special symbol (change time shortening function of the second special symbol).

Next, in order to make it easier to understand the technical significance of the above embodiment and modified examples, we will outline the issues associated with the above embodiment and modified examples.

Conventional pachinko gaming machines are known to execute a special prize presentation (such as displaying the number of winning balls or outputting sound effects) when a game ball enters the special prize opening during a special game (see, for example, JP Patent Publication No. 2013-123602).

However, since there are already many conventional pachinko machines that use this type of configuration, further improvements to the entertainment value of the game are required to differentiate the new machine from the conventional models.

Also, in conventional pachinko gaming machines, there are known machines that notify the player during the execution of a special game of the number of round games that have been executed in the currently executed special game, and which round the currently executed round game is (see, for example, JP 2012-125303 A).

However, since there are already many conventional pachinko machines that use this type of configuration, further improvements to the entertainment value of the game are required to differentiate the new machine from the conventional models.

Also, among conventional pachinko gaming machines, there are known ones equipped with a performance display device that displays game performance information obtained by measuring the number of game balls discharged from the game area and the number of prize balls awarded to the player (see, for example, JP 2018-186936 A).

However, there are already many conventional pachinko machines that use this type of configuration, and there is room for further improvement in order to achieve an appropriate evaluation of game performance.

Also, among conventional pachinko gaming machines, there are known ones that are equipped with a function (a so-called setting function) that sets the probability of winning the jackpot as a result of the win/loss judgment (see, for example, JP Patent Publication No. 2019-205605).

However, there are already many conventional pachinko gaming machines that use this type of configuration, and there is room for further improvement in terms of reducing the processing load on these gaming machines.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machines according to the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, the above-mentioned configurations are adopted in order to achieve further improvements, and the above-mentioned effects are achieved.

[Ninth embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine according to the ninth embodiment will be described. In the above-mentioned second to eighth embodiments, a normal pachinko machine that pays out game balls (prize balls) to a ball tray has been described, but in this ninth embodiment, a pachinko machine that uses game balls enclosed inside the machine in a cyclical manner, which is called a managed game machine, an ECO game machine, or an enclosed game machine, will be described. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine according to the ninth embodiment will be referred to as a "managed game machine."

The pachinko game machine (managed game machine) of the ninth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine according to one or a combination of two or more of the second to eighth embodiments described above (including some of the components that have been removed or converted using well-known or commonly used technology, etc.), and in the following, the same reference numerals are used to denote parts that have the same configuration, and explanations are omitted, and mainly differences are explained. In other words, in the following explanation, except in special cases, it is possible to apply the configuration common to the second to eighth embodiments described above, and it is possible to implement games (including game presentations) similar to those of the second to eighth embodiments described above. In addition, in the first embodiment described above, a slot machine was used as an example of a game machine equipped with a board, but the configuration (board structure) of this board may be applied to a board mounted on a managed game machine.

First, let me explain the main terms that will be used below.

A "managed gaming machine" is a gaming machine that has the function of outputting various information about the gaming machine to a gaming machine information center (sometimes called an "gaming machine" or a "pachinko gaming machine").

The "main control CPU" is the CPU installed on the main control board of the managed gaming machine (sometimes called the "main CPU").

The "frame control CPU" is the CPU installed on the frame control board of the managed gaming machine.

A "dedicated unit" is a unit (a device for dispensing gaming balls, etc.) that is dedicated to an amusement machine.

The "dedicated unit main board" is the main board of the dedicated unit.

The "control microcomputer" is a dedicated unit control CPU (hereafter referred to as "CU").

The "dedicated PIF" is an interface that specifies the communication specifications between the managed gaming machine and the dedicated unit.

The "gaming machine information center" is a center that collects various information output from managed gaming machines.

"Card company data center" refers to the center of a card unit organization or card company that is connected to the gaming machine information center.

The "management computer" is the computer that is connected to the dedicated unit.

The "hall computer" is a computer that collects various information output from the hall computer output box (hereafter abbreviated as "hall computer").

The "hall controller output box" is a serial/pulse conversion device that connects to a dedicated unit and outputs various information to the hall controller.

"Main control chip ID number" is the ID number of the main control CPU.

"Frame control chip ID number" is the ID number of the frame control CPU.

"Number of game balls" refers to the number of game balls that can be released by the managed gaming machine (the number of game balls recorded on the game ball number display device).

"Counted ball count" refers to the number of counted balls transmitted by the managed gaming machine.

"Number of loaned balls" refers to the number of loaned balls transmitted by the dedicated unit.

"Number of balls owned" refers to the number of counted balls received by the dedicated unit and the number of balls managed by the card company.

"Gaming machine information" is a general term for gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall control and fraud monitoring information.

"Amusement machine installation information" refers to the type of gaming machine, manufacturer code of the main control CPU/frame control CPU, product code, and chip ID number, and is information sent to the gaming machine information center.

"Machine performance information" refers to information such as MY, number of game balls acquired per minute (base), feature ratio, consecutive feature ratio, etc., which is sent to the gaming machine information center.

"Hall control information" refers to information on jackpots, probability fluctuations, shortened fluctuation time, number of winning balls at each winning slot, etc.

"Fraud monitoring information" is information that indicates fraud detection status 1 among fraud detection statuses 1 to 3. Fraud detection status 1 indicates the fraud detection status on the main control board side. Fraud detection statuses 2 and 3 indicate the fraud detection status on the frame control board side.

"Error information" is information that indicates an error state of the gaming machine.

[Overall configuration of the managed gaming machine]
Next, the overall configuration of the managed gaming machine PC of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 223 and 224. In the following, the directions indicated by the arrows in Figure 223 will be referred to as the up-down direction, the front-rear direction, and the left-right direction, respectively.

First, the basic structure of the front side of the managed gaming machine PC will be described. As shown in FIG. 223, the managed gaming machine PC is mainly composed of an outer frame P1, which is a vertical fixed holding frame configured with an outer rectangular frame size, and a front frame P2, which is configured with a rectangular frame size to match this and is an opening/closing mounting frame. The front frame P2 is attached to the front opening of the outer frame P1 so that it can be opened and closed sideways and can be attached and detached by upper and lower hinge mechanisms P3a, P3b arranged on the left edge of the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2. In addition, the front frame P2 is always held in a closed state engaged with the outer frame P1 by using a locking device P4 called a double lock provided on the right edge.

A rectangular glass frame P5 that fits the upper front area of the front frame P2 is attached to the front side of the front frame P2 by using upper and lower hinge mechanisms P3a, P3b so that it can be opened and closed sideways and can be attached and detached. The glass frame P5 is normally kept in a closed state that covers the front of the front frame P2 by using the locking device P4 described above. A game board P20 is set and held in the front frame 2 so that the game area PA on the front of the game board P20 can be seen through the double-glazed glass of the glass frame P5 that is normally kept closed.

On the front side of the glass frame P5, there is a frame lamp (LED lamp) P10 that emits light according to the development status of the game, and a speaker P7 that generates sound effects according to the development status of the game. A launch handle P12 for launching the game balls is provided at the lower right of the front frame P2. A decorative member P19 that protrudes forward and bulges is provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5. A performance button P11 such as a button, switch, or dial for performing a specified performance operation is attached to the center of this decorative member P19. A cross key P16 for performing setting operations related to the performance is attached to the left side of the upper surface of the decorative member P19. A game ball number display device P851 that displays the number of game balls available for play, etc., and a counting button P852 for performing a counting process that subtracts the number of game balls and adds them to the number of balls held are attached to the right side of the upper surface of the decorative member P19. Due to its structure, the managed gaming machine PC does not have ball trays (upper ball tray, lower ball tray) on the front side, so players do not directly touch the gaming balls. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the managed gaming machine PC is equipped with a gaming ball circulation device for circulating a predetermined number of gaming balls inside the gaming machine. This gaming ball circulation device collects gaming balls (out balls) that have been launched from the launching device into the gaming area PA, and supplies the collected gaming balls back to the launching device, thereby circulating and using the predetermined number of gaming balls enclosed inside the gaming machine.

Next, the basic structure of the rear side of the managed gaming machine PC will be described. As shown in FIG. 224, a rear mechanism board P30 is attached to the rear side of the front frame P2, which has a window in the center that communicates with the front and rear and is formed in a rectangular frame shape somewhat smaller than the front frame P2. A game board cover (not shown) that covers the entire rear side of the game board 20 is attached to the rear side of the rear mechanism board P30. A frame control board (frame control board case unit) P800 that manages and stores game balls (number of game balls), a power supply board (power supply board case unit) P500 that receives power from the gaming facility and supplies power to various control devices and electric and electronic components, and the like are attached to the rear side of the rear mechanism board P30. In addition, a main control board (main control board case unit) P100 that comprehensively controls the operation of the managed gaming machine PC, and a performance control board (performance control board case unit) 200 that controls the overall performance such as image display, effect lighting, and sound effects according to the game development are attached to the rear side of the game board P20. These control devices and the electrical and electronic components of each part of the managed gaming machine PC are connected by harnesses (connector cables) to configure the managed gaming machine PC to be operational.

The configuration of the boards installed in the slot machine of the first embodiment described above can be applied to the main control board P100, the performance control board P200, the power supply board P500, the frame control board P800, etc. installed in the management gaming machine PC of this embodiment, and can achieve the same effects as those of the first embodiment described above.

[Interface specifications between main control board and frame control board]
Next, the interface specifications between the main control board P100 and the frame control board P800 of the managed gaming machine PC will be explained.

1. System Configuration
Next, the system configuration of the managed gaming machine PC will be described. Fig. 225 is a block diagram showing the system configuration of the managed gaming machine PC. In the figure, as interfaces of this system, the hardware interface is shown with a double line, and the software interface is shown with a single line (single line arrow).

The managed gaming machine PC includes a main control board P100, a frame control board P800, a performance control board P200, a power supply board P500, a game ball number display device P851, a count button P852, a dedicated PIF circuit P860, and the like. The main control board P100 and the performance control board P200 are connected to be able to communicate in only one direction from the main control board P100 to the performance control board P200, and various performance control commands are sent from the main control board P100 to the performance control board P200. The main control board P100 and the frame control board P800 are connected to be able to communicate in both directions. Gaming machine installation information, messages to notify gaming machine information, and the like are sent from the main control board P100 to the frame control board P800. Response messages to respond to the main control board P100 with the results of message reception are sent from the frame control board P800 to the main control board P100.

The frame control board P800 manages the addition and subtraction of the number of game balls, controls the circulation of game balls, controls the launch of game balls, calculates performance information, etc. The frame control board P800 is connected to a game ball number display device P851, a counting button P852, a dedicated PIF circuit P853, etc. The frame control board P800 controls the display of the game ball number display device P851. The game ball number display device P851 is a display device having, for example, a 6-digit 7-segment LED, and displays the number of game balls that can be launched by the managed game machine PC. This game ball number display device P851 can display the number of game balls in units of one. The counting button P852 is operated between the managed game machine PC and the dedicated unit P900 to perform a counting process that holds the number of game balls and transfers them to the number of balls. The operation signal of this counting button P852 is input to the frame control board P800. When the counting button P852 is pressed, a predetermined counting process is performed, the number of counted balls (250 balls) is subtracted from the number of game balls, and the subtracted number of counted balls (250 balls) is added to the number of balls held. In other words, when one counting process is performed, the number of balls equivalent to the preset number of counted balls (250 balls) is transferred from the number of game balls to the number of balls held (the number of game balls managed by the frame control board P800 is transferred to the number of balls managed by the dedicated unit P900). Although not shown, a performance display monitor (see the performance display monitor 830 in FIG. 120, etc.) is connected to the frame control board P800. In this managed game machine PC, performance information is calculated by the frame control board P800, and the calculation result is displayed on the performance display monitor. In addition, the frame control board P800 is connected to the dedicated unit P900 by a dedicated PIF cable P860.

A power switch for starting/stopping the managed gaming machine PC is connected to the power supply board P500, and power is supplied to each control board, etc., by turning on the power switch. Power for the power supply board P500 is supplied from the power supply board P500 to the main control board P100 through power lines provided between the power supply board P500, the main control board P100, the performance control board P200, and the frame control board P800, and is then supplied to the performance control board P200 and the frame control board P800 via the main control board P100. Note that power for the power supply board P500 may also be supplied from the power supply board P500 to the frame control board P800, and then supplied to the main control board P100 and the performance control board P200 via the frame control board P800.

[2. Communication between the main control board and the frame control board]
Between the main control board P100 and the frame control board P800, communication is performed by a message method via an asynchronous serial port. Information (messages) transmitted and received between the main control board P100 and the frame control board P800 include "gaming machine installation information notification", "gaming machine installation information response", "gaming machine information notification", and "gaming machine information response". The main control board P100 transmits the gaming machine installation information notification as a single message when the power is turned on. The frame control board P800 transmits the gaming machine installation information response within 10 ms as a response message to the gaming machine installation information notification. The main control board P100 also transmits the gaming information notification as a single message at regular intervals. The frame control board P800 transmits the gaming machine installation information response within 10 ms as a response message to the gaming machine information notification.

[3. Communication Conditions]
Next, the communication conditions between the main control board P100 and the frame control board P800 will be explained.
The communication speed (baud rate) between the main control board P100 and the frame control board P800 is "31250 bps". The bit configuration is set to a start bit of "1 bit", data bits of "8 bits", stop bit of "1 bit", and no parity bit. The communication method is asynchronous serial communication. The communication control is full-duplex communication, and the communication cycle is "108 ms".

[4. Data structure of telegram]
Next, the data structure of the message will be described. The data structure of this message will be described in detail later, but it can be applied to the data structures of gaming machine installation information notification, gaming machine installation information response, gaming machine information notification, and gaming machine information response. Note that the "message" can be rephrased as a command, a signal (control signal), or information (control information).

The message contains the following data (information) from the beginning: "Message length", "Command", "Serial number", "Data section", and "Checksum". In other words, the data from the beginning "Message length" to the final "Checksum" is the message range. The data format of each piece of data that makes up the message is HEX (hexadecimal). The main control board P100 always completes the message in one frame and does not send it in parts. Furthermore, if the frame control board P800 is unable to receive up to the "Checksum" within 20 ms after receiving the "Message length", it will cancel the data received up to that point and start receiving again from the "Message length".

"Message length" is the length of the message from this "Message length" to the "Checksum". The data length of this "Message length" is 1 byte.

"Command" is the command code of the message. In this embodiment, the command codes of the message include "0x01 (gaming machine installation information notification)", "0x11 (gaming machine installation information response)", "0x02 (gaming machine information notification)", and "0x12 (gaming machine information response)", and the command code is set according to the type of message. The data length of this "command" is 1 byte.

The "serial number" is the communication serial number (sequence number) assigned to the message. A value between "0" and "255" ("0x00" to "0xFF" in hexadecimal) is stored as the communication serial number. The data length of this "serial number" is 1 byte.

The "data section" contains the data of the message. The length of this "data section" is 1 byte.

The "checksum" is the result of adding up the "message length" to the "data section." The data length of this "checksum" is 1 byte.

[5. Types of telegrams]
Next, the types of messages (message names) will be described. There are four types of messages: (A) gaming machine installation information notification, (B) gaming machine installation information response, (C) gaming machine information notification, and (D) gaming machine information response. Details of each message will be described below in order.

[A. Notification of gaming machine installation information]
First, an explanation will be given of the "gaming machine installation information notification." The "gaming machine installation information notification" is a message for notifying the frame control board P800 of gaming machine installation information from the main control board P100.

The "Game Machine Installation Information Notification" contains, in order from the beginning, "Message Length", "Command", and "Communication Number".
The data length is 25 bytes, including the data (information) for "Gaming Machine Installation Information,""Checksum." In the "Gaming Machine Installation Information Notification," the "Gaming Machine Installation Information" corresponds to the "data section" of the message.

<A1. Length of message＞
The data length of the "message length" is 1 byte. The value "0x19" indicating the length of the message (25 bytes) is set in this "message length".

<A2. Commands>
The data length of the "command" is 1 byte. The value "0x01" is set in the "command" to indicate the command code of the message (gaming machine installation information notification).

<A3. Communication number>
The data length of the "communication number" is 1 byte. The fixed value of this "communication number" is set to "0x00".

<A4-A7. Gaming machine installation information>
The data length of the "gaming machine installation information" is 21 bytes. This "gaming machine installation information" includes a "gaming machine type", a "main control chip ID number", a "main control chip manufacturer code", and a "main control chip product code".

<A4. Types of gaming machines>
"Machine type" is composed of a data length of 1 byte (8 bits), Bit 7 indicates the management medium (0 = gaming ball, 1 = gaming medal), Bit 6 to Bit 4 indicate the group classification (0 = group A, 1 = group B, 2 to 7 = unused), and Bit 3 to Bit 0 indicate the gaming machine (1 = pachinko machine, 2 = reel type gaming machine, 3 = arrange ball gaming machine, 4 = Jankyu ball gaming machine, 0 = unused, 5 to 15 = unused). When "machine type" is "0x00", it indicates that the management medium is a gaming ball, the group classification is group A, and the gaming machine is a pachinko machine. When "machine type" is "0x82", it indicates that the management medium is a gaming medal, the group classification is group A, and the gaming machine is a reel type gaming machine. If the "game machine type" is "0x83", it indicates that the managed medium is a game medal, the group classification is group A, and the game machine is an arrange ball game machine. If the "game machine type" is "0x84", it indicates that the managed medium is a game medal, the group classification is group A, and the game machine is a Jan-ball game machine. If the "game machine type" is "0x92", it indicates that the managed medium is a game medal, the group classification is group B, and the game machine is a reel type game machine.

<A5. Main control chip ID number>
The data length of the "main control chip ID number" is 1 byte. This "main control chip ID number" is set with the ID number assigned to the main control chip (the chip individual number or chip individual code displayed on the ID reader). The "main control chip ID number" includes an identification code for identifying the CPU manufacturer and CPU type.

<A6. Main control chip manufacturer code>
The data length of the "main control chip manufacturer code" is 3 bytes. The manufacturer code written in the management area of the main control chip is set in this "main control chip manufacturer code".

<A7. Main control chip product code>
The data length of the "main control chip product code" is 8 bytes. The product code written in the management area of the main control chip is set in this "main control chip product code".

<A8. Checksum>
The data length of the "checksum" is 1 byte. The value obtained by adding up the "message length" through the "gaming machine installation information" is set to this "checksum".

When the main control board P100 is powered on, it sends a "gaming machine installation information notification" to the frame control board P800 (notifying the frame control board P800 of the gaming machine installation information). Note that the main control board P100 does not allow normal play (launch of gaming balls) until it receives a "gaming machine installation information response" from the frame control board P800.

[B. Gaming machine installation information response]
Next, a description will be given of the "gaming machine installation information response." The "gaming machine installation information response" is a message for responding to the main control board P100 with the result of receipt of the gaming machine installation information notification from the frame control board P800.

The "gaming machine installation information response" is composed of a total of 5 bytes of data length, including, in order from the beginning, "message length," "command," "communication number," "gaming machine installation information receipt result," and "checksum." In the "gaming machine installation information response," the "gaming machine installation information receipt result" corresponds to the "data section" of the message.

<B1. Length of message＞
The data length of the "message length" is 1 byte. The value "0x05" indicating the length of the message (5 bytes) is set in this "message length".

<B2. Commands>
The data length of the "command" is 1 byte. In this "command", a value "0x11" is set, which is a command code of the message (gaming machine installation information response).

<B3. Communication number>
The data length of the "communication number" is 1 byte. The fixed value of this "communication number" is set to "0x00".

<B4. Gaming machine installation information receipt result>
The data length of the "gaming machine installation information receipt result" is 1 byte. This "gaming machine installation information receipt result" is set to "0x00", which is information indicating that a "gaming machine installation information notification" has been received from the main control board P100. However, if the managed gaming machine PC is in a ball removal state (a state in which the gaming balls enclosed in the managed gaming machine PC can be discharged outside the machine) when the power is turned on, the "gaming machine installation information receipt result" is set to "0x01", which is information indicating that it is in a ball removal state.

<B5. Checksum>
The data length of the "checksum" is 1 byte. The "checksum" is set to a value obtained by adding up the "message length" through the "gaming machine installation information receipt result".

When the frame control board P800 sends a "gaming machine installation information receipt confirmation", it responds with the communication number received in the "gaming machine installation information notification". In addition, if the communication number of the received "gaming machine installation information notification" is other than 0, the frame control board P800 will not respond.

[C. Gaming Machine Information Notification]
Next, the "game machine information notification" will be explained. The "game machine information notification" is a message for notifying the frame control board P800 of game machine information (hall control information, fraud monitoring information) from the main control board P100. In addition, as used below, the terms "condition device" and "continuous operation device of special device" mean conceptual control devices, and the "condition device" is operated when a jackpot occurs in a special pattern game, and the "continuous operation device of special device" is a device that can operate the special electric special device P542 multiple times in succession.

The "Gaming Machine Information Notification" is composed of a total data length of 11 to 21 bytes, including the following data (information) from the beginning: "Message Length", "Command", "Communication Serial Number", "Main Control Status 1", "Main Control Status 2", "Gaming Machine Error Status", "Fraud Detection Status 1", "Number of Prize Balls for Device Operation", "Number of Prize Balls for Continuous Device Operation", "Number of Game Information", "Game Information", and "Checksum". Note that in the "Gaming Machine Information Notification", "Main Control Status 1", "Main Control Status 2", "Gaming Machine Error Status", "Fraud Detection Status", "Number of Prize Balls for Device Operation", "Number of Prize Balls for Continuous Device Operation", "Number of Game Information", and "Game Information" correspond to the "data section" of the message.

<C1. Length of message＞
The data length of "Message Length" is 1 byte. A value from "0x05" to "0x15" indicating the length of the message (11 to 21 bytes) is set in this "Message Length".

<C2. Command>
The data length of the "command" is 1 byte. The value "0x02" indicating the command code of the message (gaming machine information notification) is set in the "command".

<C3. Communication number>
The data length of the "communication serial number" is 1 byte. This "communication serial number" is set to a value between "0 and 255 (0x00 to 0xFF)." The main control board P100 adds 1 to the "communication serial number" when sending a "game machine information notification" (adding 1 to the previous "communication serial number"). If the result of this addition exceeds the maximum value "255," it will return to the minimum value "0."

<C4. Main control state 1>
"Main control status 1" is composed of a data length of 1 byte (8 bits), Bit 0 indicates "jackpot 1", Bit 1 indicates "jackpot 2", Bit 2 indicates "jackpot 3", Bit 3 indicates "gaming machine status signal 1", Bit 4 indicates "gaming machine status signal 2", Bit 5 indicates "gaming machine status signal 3", Bit 6 indicates "gaming machine status signal 4", and Bit 7 is unused.

"Jackpot 1" is jackpot 1 information, and "1" is set during the jackpot to be notified. "Jackpot 2" is jackpot 2 information, and "1" is set during all jackpots. "Jackpot 3" is jackpot 3 information, and "1" is set during any state such as Yu-time, small jackpot rush, or C time reduction. Yu-time refers to a time reduction game state (low probability high base state) that is entered when a specified number of consecutive misses are found in the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern in the normal game state (low probability low base state) (the variable display of misses is displayed a specified number of consecutive times). Small jackpot rush refers to a potential game state (high probability low base state) in which small jackpots are frequently generated in the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern (second special pattern), and small jackpot games are continuously generated until a jackpot is won. C time-saving refers to a time-saving game state (low probability, high base state) that is entered when the special symbol stops and is displayed as a specific losing symbol (time-saving symbol).

"Gaming machine status signal 1", "gaming machine status signal 2", "gaming machine status signal 3" and "gaming machine status signal 4" are used to output a status from the extended external terminal board of the dedicated unit P900 to an external device such as the hall control HC, and correspond to "external terminal board status output signals 1 to 4" output from the extended external terminal board of the dedicated unit P900. "Gaming machine status signal 1" is set to "1" while gaming machine status signal 1 is ON. "Gaming machine status signal 2" is set to "1" while gaming machine status signal 2 is ON. "Gaming machine status signal 3" is set to "1" while gaming machine status signal 3 is ON. "Gaming machine status signal 4" is set to "1" while gaming machine status signal 4 is ON.

<C5. Main control state 2>
The "main control state 2" is composed of a data length of 1 byte (8 bits), Bit 0 indicates "during a big win + time reduction (time reduction) or during an advantageous state", Bit 1 indicates "during a high probability", Bit 2 indicates "during a time reduction (time reduction) or during an advantageous state", and Bits 3 to 7 are unused. "During a big win + time reduction (time reduction) or during advantageous play" is set to "1" during a big win and during time reduction (time reduction) after the big win, or during an advantageous state (such as during a special chance or reserved consumption) after the big win. "During high probability" is set to "1" when the big win probability of the special pattern is relatively high. "During time reduction (time reduction) or during advantageous state" is set to "1" during time reduction (time reduction) or during advantageous play. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that does not notify that the probability fluctuation function is operating, the information "high probability" is not output.

<C6. Gaming machine error state>
"Game machine error status" is composed of a data length of 1 byte (8 bits), Bit 0 to Bit 5 indicate the error code occurring in the managed game machine PC, Bit 6 indicates an error on the frame control board P800 side if it is "0", and an error on the main control board P100 side if it is "1", and Bit 7 indicates only an error (error notification) if it is "0", and an error (error notification) and hole control output if it is "1". Note that when Bit 0 to Bit 7 are "0", it indicates that no error has occurred.

<C7. Fraud detection status 1>
"Fraud detection status 1" is composed of a data length of 1 byte (8 bits), where Bit 0 indicates a "settings changing signal", Bit 1 indicates a "settings checking signal", Bit 2 indicates a "RAM clear signal", Bit 3 indicates an "fraud detection signal 1", Bit 4 indicates an "fraud detection signal 2", Bit 5 indicates an "fraud detection signal 3", Bit 6 indicates a "complete signal", and Bit 7 is unused.The "settings changing signal" and "settings checking signal" are stored by the frame control board P800, and the signals are turned off after 180 seconds or more.

The "settings changing signal" is information that indicates that settings are being changed, and is set to "0" when normal (settings are not being changed), and is set to "1" when settings are being changed.

The "settings checking signal" is information that indicates that the settings are being checked, and is set to "0" when normal (other than when the settings are being checked), and is set to "1" when the settings are being checked.

The "RAM clear signal" is information indicating that the RAM of the main control board 100 has been cleared, and is set to "0" when normal (other than when a RAM clear has occurred), and is set to "1" when a RAM clear has occurred.

"Fraud Detection Signal 1" is information indicating the possibility of fraud (urgency: low) in addition to the above (settings being changed, settings being checked, RAM being cleared), and is set to "0" if normal, and "1" if an abnormality has occurred.

The "Fraud Detection Signal 2" is information indicating the possibility of fraud (urgency: medium) in addition to the above (settings being changed, settings being confirmed, RAM being cleared), and is set to "0" if the situation is normal, and to "1" if an abnormality has occurred.

The "Fraud Detection Signal 3" is information indicating the possibility of fraud (urgency: high) in addition to the above (settings being changed, settings being checked, RAM being cleared), and is set to "0" if normal, and "1" if an abnormality has occurred.

The "complete signal" is information indicating that the complete function has been activated, and is set to "0" if normal, and "1" if the complete function is activated. This complete function corresponds to the "suppression function" described in the eighth embodiment above.

The urgency of "Fraud Detection Signal 1" to "Fraud Detection Signal 3" is the level at which the machine history server will report the fraud, and so it is output as "Weak," "Medium," and "Strong" in order of severity.

<C8. Number of balls that activate special features>
The "number of prize balls awarded when the special feature is activated" is composed of a data length of 1 byte (8 bits) and is information for notifying the frame control board P800 of the total number of prize balls (0 to 255) awarded when the special feature is activated since the previous gaming machine information notification.

<C9. Number of consecutive feature activation balls>
The "number of winning balls from continuous device operation" is composed of a data length of 1 byte (8 bits) and is information for notifying the frame control board P800 of the total number of winning balls (0 to 255) from the operation of the continuous device operation device since the previous gaming machine information notification.

<C10. Number of game information>
The "number of game information" is composed of a data length of 1 byte (8 bits) and is information indicating the number of "game information" (n = 0 to 5). For example, when the "number of game information" is 1, it includes "game information 1" as one piece of "game information", when the "number of game information" is 2, it includes "game information 1" and "game information 2" as two pieces of "game information", when the "number of game information" is 3, it includes "game information 1", "game information 2", and "game information 3" as three pieces of "game information", when the "number of game information" is 4, it includes "game information 1", "game information 2", "game information 3", and "game information 4" as four pieces of "game information", when the "number of game information" is 5, it includes "game information 1", "game information 2", "game information 3", "game information 4", and "game information 5" as four pieces of "game information". It should be noted that when the "number of game information" is 0, it does not include any "game information".

<C11-C20. Game information>
The "game information" is information that notifies the frame control board P800 of the start port winning, the big winning port winning, the number of pattern determinations, etc., that have occurred on the main control board P100. The "game information" is composed of a total of 2 bytes of data length, consisting of "type information (upper byte)" and "count information (lower byte)".

<Type information>
The "type information" is composed of a data type and a data number, and a data number is set for each data type. Specifically, of the 1-byte "type information", the data type is assigned to the upper 4 bits (bits 4 to 7), and the data number is assigned to the lower 4 bits (bits 0 to 3). The content of the "type information" is specified by the combination of the value of the data type (bits 4 to 7) and the value of the data number (bits 0 to 3). Note that the following data types (bits 4 to 7) are unused: "0", "5 to 8", and "11".

When the data type is "1", it is information notifying the start gate winning (winning at the start gate). The data number is information indicating the start gate number, with "1" indicating start gate 1, "2" indicating start gate 2, and "3" indicating start gate 3. Note that data numbers "0" and "4 to 15" are unused. Here, for example, as in the above embodiment, if there are two start gates, the first start gate P51 and the second start gate P52, it is possible to assign "start gate 1" to the first start gate P51 and "start gate 2" to the second start gate P52. In addition, in this embodiment, the information of start gate 3 is not output to the hall control HC, so if output to the hall control HC is required, the command will be output as information of start gate 1 or start gate 2.

If the data type is "2", it is information notifying that a special electric device has been activated to win a prize at the large prize slot (a prize has been won at the large prize slot). The data number is information indicating the large prize slot number, with "1" indicating large prize slot 1 and "2" indicating large prize slot 2. Note that the data numbers "0" and "3-15" are unused.

If the data type is "3", it is information notifying of a prize-winning slot (a prize has been won at a prize-winning slot). The data number is information indicating the prize-winning slot number, with "1" indicating prize-winning slot 1, "2" indicating prize-winning slot 2, "3" indicating prize-winning slot 3, "4" indicating prize-winning slot 4, ... and "15" indicating prize-winning slot 15. Note that the data number "0" is unused. This prize-winning slot winning information also includes prizes won at prize-winning slots due to the operation of regular electric devices.

If the data type is "4", it is information notifying all start gate wins (winning at the start gate or normal map operation gate related to the main game, or passing through the gate). The data number is information indicating winning at the start gate or normal map operation gate related to the main game, or passing through the gate, and "1" indicates winning or passing through. Note that data numbers "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

If the data type is "9", it is information notifying the number of times the pattern has been determined (the number of times the pattern related to the main game has changed). The data number is information indicating the number of times the pattern related to the main game (special pattern, normal pattern, special pattern 1, special pattern 2, etc.) has been determined, and if it is "1", it indicates the number of times the pattern related to the main game has been determined. Note that the data numbers "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

If the data type is "10", it is information notifying the number of jackpots (that the continuous operation device for the special device has been activated). The data number indicates the number of jackpots, and if it is "1", it indicates that the continuous operation device for the special device has been activated (a jackpot). Note that the data numbers "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

If the data type is "12", it is information notifying the number of times the special feature has been played (number of times the special feature opening is opened: mainly in old type 2 gaming machines, when you want to use the number of times the special feature opening is opened when a small win occurs as the starting number, the number of times the special feature continuous operation device is not activated). The data number is information indicating the special feature number, and "1" indicates special feature 1. Note that data numbers "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

If the data type is "13", it is information notifying passage through a specific area (the game ball has passed through a specific area). The data number is information indicating the specific area, and if it is "1", it indicates specific area 1. Note that the data numbers "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

When the data type is "14", it is information indicating the external terminal board pulse output (external terminal board pulse output signal terminal of the dedicated unit P900). This external terminal board pulse output is used to instruct a pulse output from the extended external terminal board of the dedicated unit P900, and the data number specifies the output signal terminal of the dedicated unit P900. The data number is information specifying the output signal terminal (external terminal board pulse output signal terminal) of the dedicated unit P900, and "1" indicates external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 1, "2" indicates external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 2, "3" indicates external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 3, and "4" indicates external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 4. Note that data numbers "5 to 15" are unused.

When the data type is "15", the information notifies the performance information status (the status required for the frame control board to calculate performance information). The data number is fixed to "1". The data numbers "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

When calculating the performance display monitor on the frame control board P800, in order to correctly calculate the performance display monitor, the winning notifications of "1 to 3" and performance information status notifications of "15" among the data types are sent to the frame control board P800 in the chronological order in which they were generated on the main control board P100.

<Count information>
The "count information" is set to information on the number of times that different data types are recorded. The contents of the count information for each data type and an example of data storage will be described below.

(a) In the case of data types 1 to 3, when the data type is 1 = winning at the starting gate, 2 = winning at the large winning gate due to the operation of a special electric device, or 3 = winning at the winning gate, the "count information" is composed of the number of prize balls (top 4 bits) and the number of winning balls (bottom 4 bits). The number of prize balls (Bits 4 to 7) is set to "1 to 15 (balls)". The number of winning balls (Bits 0 to 3) is set to "1 (balls)", and "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

(Example 1) When 2 balls enter starting hole 1 with 3 prize balls, the "type information" has a data type of 1 = start hole entry, and a data number of 1 = start hole 1. The "count information" has a number of prize balls of 3 = 3 prize balls, and a number of prize balls of 1 = 1 prize. As a result, two pieces of data "0x1131" are generated as "game information".

(Example 2) When 3 of the 15 winning balls are won in the large prize slot 2 The "type information" has a data type of 2 = winning in the large prize slot due to the operation of a special electric device, and a data number of 2 = large prize slot 2. The "count information" has a number of winning balls of 15 = 15 winning balls, and a number of winning balls of 1 = 1 winning ball. As a result, three pieces of data "0x22F1" are generated as "game information".

(Example 3) When one ball wins in the winning slot 2 for one prize ball The "type information" has a data type of 3 = winning slot, and a data number of 2 = winning slot 2. The "count information" has a number of winning balls of 1 = 1 prize ball, and a number of winning balls of 1 = 1 winning ball. As a result, one piece of data "0x3211" is generated as the "game information".

(b) In the case of data type 4 When the data type is 4, i.e. all start port winning, the "count information" is composed of unused bits (top 4 bits) and all start port winning (bottom 4 bits). Unused bits (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed at "0". All start port winning (Bits 0 to 3) is set to "1 (time)", and "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

(Example 4) When one ball is won at the start gate or normal operation gate related to the main game, or one gate is passed through. The "type information" has a data type of 4 = all start gates are won, and a data number of 1 = start gate related to the main game. The "count information" is fixed at 0 for unused numbers, and 1 for all start gates is won = one ball is won or passed through. As a result, one piece of data "0x4101" is generated as the "game information".

(c) In the case of data type 9 When the data type is 9 = the number of times the pattern has been determined, the "count information" is composed of unused bits (upper 4 bits) and the number of times the pattern has been determined (lower 4 bits). Unused bits (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed to "0". The number of times the pattern has been determined (Bits 0 to 3) is set to "1 (times)", and "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

(Example 5) When the symbol related to the main game stops once The "type information" has a data type of 9 = number of times the symbol has been determined, and a data number of 1 = the symbol related to the main game. The "count information" is fixed at 0 for unused symbols, and 1 for number of times the symbol has been determined = one stop. As a result, one piece of data "0x9101" is generated as the "game information".

(d) In the case of data type 10 When the data type is 10 = the number of jackpots, the "count information" is composed of unused bits (upper 4 bits) and the number of hits (lower 4 bits). Unused bits (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed at "0". The number of hits (Bits 0 to 3) is set to "1 (times)", and "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

(Example 6) When the continuous operation device of the role operates once (jackpot), the "type information" has a data type of 10 = number of jackpots, and a data number of 1 = jackpot. The "count information" is fixed at 0 for unused, and 1 for number of hits = 1 occurrence. As a result, one piece of data "0xA101" is generated as the "game information".

(e) In the case of data type 12 When the data type is 12 = number of times the special feature has been played (number of times the large prize opening has been opened), the "count information" is composed of unused bits (upper 4 bits) and the number of times the special feature has been played (lower 4 bits). Unused bits (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed at "0". The number of times the special feature has been played (Bits 0 to 3) is set to "1 (time)", and "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

(Example 7) When reel 1 is opened once, the "type information" has a data type of 12 (number of reels) and a data number of 1 (reel 1). The "count information" is fixed at 0 for unused reels and 1 for number of reels opened once. As a result, one piece of data "0xC101" is generated as the "game information".

(f) In the case of data type 13 When the data type is 13, i.e., passage through a specific area, the "count information" is composed of unused bits (upper 4 bits) and the number of times a specific area was passed (lower 4 bits). The unused bits (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed at "0". The number of times a specific area was passed (Bits 0 to 3) is set to "1 (times)", and "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

(Example 8) When a gaming ball passes through specific area 1 once, the "type information" has a data type of 13 = passing through specific area, and a data number of 1 = specific area 1. The "count information" is fixed at 0 for unused areas, and 1 = passing through a specific area once. As a result, one piece of data "0xD101" is generated as the "game information".

(g) In the case of data type 14 When the data type is 14 = external terminal board pulse output, the "count information" consists of unused (upper 4 bits) and the number of pulse outputs (lower 4 bits). Unused bits (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed at "0". The number of pulse outputs (Bits 0 to 3) is set to "1 (times)", and "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

(Example 9) When outputting one pulse from external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 1 of dedicated unit P900, the "type information" has a data type of 14 = external terminal board pulse output, and a data number of 1 = external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 1. The "count information" is fixed at 0 for unused, and the number of pulse outputs is 1 = one pulse output. As a result, one piece of data "0xE101" is generated as the "game information".

(h) In the case of data type 15 In the case of data type 15 = performance information status notification, the "count information" is composed of unused (upper 4 bits) and a status flag (lower 4 bits). Unused (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed at "0". The status flags (Bits 0 to 3) are as follows: Bit 0 is the base ("0" = low base, "1" = high base), Bit 1 is in jackpot ("0" = normal, "1" = jackpot), Bit 2 is in high probability ("0" = low probability, "1" = high probability), and Bit 3 is unused. This notification is issued when the power is turned on and when the settings are changed or the game moves from the setting confirmation state to the playable state during play, etc.

(Example 10) When the state changes to high base The "type information" has a data type of 15 = performance information status notification, and the data number is fixed to 1. The "count information" has unused bits (Bits 4 to 7) fixed to 0, and in the status flags (Bits 0 to 3), Bit 0 (base) is 1 = high base, Bit 1 (during jackpot) is 0 = normal, Bit 2 (high probability) is 0 = low probability, and Bit 3 is fixed to 0. As a result, one piece of data "0xF101" is generated as the "game information".

<C21. Checksum>
The data length of the "checksum" is 1 byte. The value obtained by adding up the "message length" through the "game information" is set to this "checksum".

D. Gaming Machine Information Response
Next, the "gaming machine information response" will be described.
The "gaming machine information response" is a message sent from the frame control board P800 to the main control board P100 informing it of the receipt of the gaming machine information notification.

The "gaming machine information response" is composed of a total of 5 bytes of data length, including, in order from the beginning, "message length," "command," "communication number," "gaming machine information receipt result," and "checksum." In the "gaming machine information response," the "gaming machine information receipt result" corresponds to the "data section" of the message.

<D1. Length of message＞
The data length of the "message length" is 1 byte. The value "0x05" indicating the length of the message (5 bytes) is set in this "message length".

<D2. Commands>
The data length of the "command" is 1 byte. In this "command", a value "0x12" is set, which is a command code of the message (gaming machine information response).

<D3. Communication number>
The data length of the "communication number" is 1 byte. This "communication number" is set to a value between 0 and 255 (0x00 to 0xFF). Note that the communication number received in the "game machine information notification" is used as is for this "communication number".

<D4. Gaming machine information receipt result>
The data length of the "gaming machine information receipt result" is 1 byte. In this "gaming machine information receipt result", "0x00" is set, which is information indicating that a "gaming machine information notification" has been received from the main control board P100.

<D5. Checksum>
The data length of the "checksum" is 1 byte. The value obtained by adding up the "message length" through the "gaming machine information receipt result" is set to this "checksum".

When the frame control board P800 sends a "gaming machine information receipt confirmation", it responds with the same communication number received in the "gaming machine information notification". In other words, if the communication number of the gaming machine information notification received from the main control board P100 is 1, the frame control board P800 replies to the main control board P100 with a gaming machine information response with a communication number of 1, and if the communication number of the gaming machine information notification received from the main control board P100 is 2, it replies to the main control board P100 with a gaming machine information response with a communication number of 2.

[6. Communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board]
Next, a communication procedure between the main control board P100 and the frame control board P800 will be explained. Fig. 226 is a diagram showing the communication procedure between the main control board P100 and the frame control board P800 from when power is turned on.

First, after power is turned on, the main control board P100 sends a gaming machine installation information notification (communication number = 0) to the frame control board P800.

The frame control board P800 sends a gaming machine installation information response (communication number = 0) to the main control board P100 within 10 ms of receiving the gaming machine installation information notification (communication number = 0).

After the main control board P100 successfully receives the gaming machine installation information response (response from the frame control board P800 within 10 ms), when the game becomes playable, it allows the launch of gaming balls and transmits gaming machine information notifications at regular intervals (communication cycle 108 ms).

Specifically, the main control board P100 transmits a gaming machine information notification (communication number = 1) to the frame control board P800 108 ms after transmitting the previous gaming machine installation information notification (communication number = 0). Note that this gaming machine information notification (communication number = 1) begins with transmitting gaming information related to a performance information status notification (data type = 15) so that the frame control board P800 can calculate performance information.

The frame control board P800 sends a gaming machine information response (communication number = 1) to the main control board P100 within 10 ms of receiving the gaming machine information notification (communication number = 1).

Next, 108 ms after sending the previous gaming machine information notification (communication number = 1), the main control board P100 sends a gaming machine information notification (communication number = 2) to the frame control board P800.

The frame control board P800 sends a gaming machine information response (communication number = 2) to the main control board P100 within 10 ms of receiving the gaming machine information notification (communication number = 2).

Next, 108 ms after sending the previous gaming machine information notification (communication number = 2), the main control board P100 sends a gaming machine information notification (communication number = 3) to the frame control board P800.

The frame control board P800 sends a gaming machine information response (communication number = 3) to the main control board P100 within 10 ms of receiving the gaming machine information notification (communication number = 3).

After that, the main control board P100 transmits a gaming machine information notification (communication number = 4, 5, 6, ...) to the frame control board P800 while counting up the communication number at regular intervals (communication cycle 108 ms). In response, the frame control board P800 transmits a gaming machine information response (communication number = 4, 5, 6, ...) to the main control board P100 within 10 ms of receiving the gaming machine information notification (communication number = 4, 5, 6, ...) with the same communication number as the received communication number.

The startup time for the main control board P100 and the frame control board P800 is a maximum of three minutes. If the frame control board P800 fails to receive a gaming machine installation information notification within three minutes of startup, it will report an error indicating that the communication line has been disconnected. If the frame control board P800 receives a gaming machine installation information notification after the communication line has been disconnected, it will cancel the error notification.

In addition, if a setting change or setting confirmation operation is performed when the power is turned on, the main control board P100 will normally receive a gaming machine installation information response (response from the frame control board P800 within 10 ms), then transition to a setting change state (setting change mode) or setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) and send a gaming machine information notification with a communication cycle of 108 ms. In this gaming machine information notification, the main control information 1, main control information 2, and gaming machine error state are set to "0", and only the corresponding flag is set for the fraud detection state 1 and sent. After the setting change or setting confirmation is completed, the main control board P100 will allow the launch of gaming balls and send a gaming machine information notification when it becomes playable. Note that the first gaming machine information notification (communication number = n + 1) sent after the setting change or setting confirmation is completed sends gaming information related to the performance information status notification (data type = 15) at the beginning, in order for the frame control board P800 to calculate performance information (notifying it before the gaming information buffered when the power is restored).

In addition, if the main control board P100 does not receive a response message (gaming machine installation information response or gaming machine information response) from the frame control board P800 after notifying it of a message (gaming machine installation information notification or gaming machine information notification), it will resend the message to the frame control board P800 (however, the communication number will be counted up). If the main control board P100 fails to receive a response message from the frame control board P800 ten times in a row, it will determine that the communication line has been cut off and will issue an error notification. Note that after this communication line cut off, the communication cut off can be restored by turning the power on/off.

In addition, if the frame control board P800 is unable to receive the next message for 1000 ms after receiving a message (gaming machine installation information notification or gaming machine information notification) from the main control board P100, it determines that the communication line has been cut off and issues an error notification. Note that if the frame control board P800 successfully receives a message from the main control board P100 after the communication line has been cut off, it will cancel the error notification.

Furthermore, if the managed gaming machine PC is in a ball-removing state (a state in which gaming balls enclosed in the managed gaming machine PC can be discharged outside the machine) when the power is turned on, the data section (gaming machine installation information receipt result) of the gaming machine installation information response (communication number = 0) is set with information (0x01) indicating that it is in a ball-removing state. In that case, after receiving this gaming machine installation information response (communication number = 0), the main control board P100 allows firing and then executes an infinite loop process (for example, preventing processes required for normal game progress (such as main control timer interrupt processing) from being performed).
The main control board P100 and the frame control board P800 do not communicate after sending and receiving the ball removal state. The "ball removal state" continues to operate from when the power is turned on until the power is turned off.

In the ninth embodiment, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board P100 includes a 4 ms timer interrupt processing and a 108 ms timer interrupt processing. The 4 ms timer interrupt processing is executed in the same manner as the main control side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 79) described in the second embodiment and the like. The 108 ms timer interrupt processing is executed in the generation and transmission of a communication message (game machine information communication) to the frame control board P800. It is preferable that the 4 ms timer interrupt processing is set to have a higher interrupt priority than the 108 ms timer interrupt processing. However, the 108 ms timer interrupt processing may be set to have a higher interrupt priority than the 4 ms timer interrupt processing. In addition, when an interrupt request for the 4 ms timer interrupt processing or the 108 ms timer interrupt processing occurs while one of the timer interrupt processing is being executed, the other interrupt processing may be executed after the execution of one of the timer interrupt processing is completed.

As described above, the ninth embodiment of the managed gaming machine PC enables appropriate information to be sent and received between the main control board P100 and the frame control board P800, and has the effect of enabling the number of game balls and the number of balls in possession to be appropriately managed without increasing the control burden, and enabling the game to be processed smoothly.

The present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment and modifications, and can be modified as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the scope of the present invention also includes combinations of the components described in the above-mentioned embodiment and modifications, or deletions or conversions of some of the components described in the above-mentioned embodiment and modifications using well-known or commonly used techniques.

LIST OF SYMBOLS 1 Slot machine 2 Front door 3a, 3b, 3c Reel 5 Cabinet 5a Left side panel 5b Right side panel 5c Top panel 5d Bottom panel 5e Back panel 55 Power supply unit 60 Reel unit 111 Main control board 502 Sub-control board 550 Power supply board 650 Back lamp unit 711 Reel tape 721 Reel wheel 731 Reel frame PM Pachinko game machine PC Managed game machine PA Play area P1 Outer frame P2 Front frame P5 Glass frame P15 Performance button P20 Game board P51 First start port P52 Second start port P54 Big prize port P70 Performance display device P71 First special symbol display device P72 Second special symbol display device P100 Main control board P200 Performance control board P300 Image control board P400 Payout control board P500 Power supply board P800 Frame control board P851 Game ball number display device P852 Count button P900 Dedicated unit

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a reel (e.g., reels 3a, 3b, and 3c in the embodiment), a stepping motor for rotating the reel, and a back lamp unit (e.g., back lamp unit 650 in the embodiment). The reel includes a reel frame (e.g., a reel wheel 721 and a reel frame 731 in the embodiment) and a strip-shaped reel tape (e.g., a reel tape 711 in the embodiment) attached to an outer circumferential surface of the reel frame. The reel tape has a plurality of pattern display areas divided in the circumferential direction of the outer circumferential surface of the reel frame, and one pattern is drawn in each pattern display area. The back lamp unit includes a back lamp house (e.g., a reel frame 731 in the embodiment). The light source mounting board is attached to the back side of the back lamp house with a light source (e.g., LED elements 654a, 654b, 654c in the embodiment) that irradiates light onto a pattern, and the light source mounting board is attached to the back side of the back lamp house with the component mounting surface facing the inner peripheral surface of the reel. The back lamp house includes a predetermined light source exposure surface portion (e.g., light source exposure surfaces 663a, 663b, 663c in the embodiment) that has an opening facing the inner peripheral surface of the reel tape that exposes a predetermined light source mounted on the component mounting surface of the light source mounting board and a concealing portion that hides at least a part of the component mounting surface by an area other than the opening, and a predetermined shade portion (e.g., shade portions 664a , 664b, 664c in the embodiment) that extends from the periphery of the predetermined light source exposure surface portion toward the inner peripheral surface of the reel tape and collects light irradiated from the predetermined light source to the pattern display area . ) is formed, a predetermined partition portion is formed by the predetermined shade portion and other specific shade portions, the plurality of patterns includes a light-transmitting pattern (e.g., the "Seven" pattern in the embodiment) having a predetermined light-transmitting region (e.g., the light-transmitting region LT in the embodiment) that easily transmits light from the predetermined light source, and it is recognizable that the color of the predetermined light source exposed surface portion, the color of the predetermined light source exposed surface portion visually recognized through the predetermined light-transmitting region of the light-transmitting pattern, and the color of an area of the reel tape on which no pattern is drawn are all different colors, It is recognizable that the color of the partition visible through the light-transmitting area is different from the color of the area on the reel tape on which no pattern is drawn, the narrowest pattern spacing among the multiple patterns drawn on the reel tape (e.g., minimum pattern spacing DGmin in the embodiment) is wider than the pattern movement spacing when the stepping motor rotates by one step (e.g., movement distance Ad in the embodiment), and the thickness of the partition (e.g., thickness TH3 in the embodiment) is narrower than the narrowest pattern spacing among the multiple patterns drawn on the reel tape .

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a reel (e.g., reels 3a, 3b, and 3c in the embodiments) and a back lamp unit (e.g., back lamp unit 650 in the embodiments), the reel includes a reel frame (e.g., a reel wheel 721 and a reel frame 731 in the embodiments) and a strip-shaped reel tape (e.g., a reel tape 711 in the embodiments) attached to the outer circumferential surface of the reel frame, the reel tape includes a plurality of pattern display areas divided in the circumferential direction of the outer circumferential surface of the reel frame, one pattern is drawn in each pattern display area, and the back lamp unit includes a back lamp house ( The light source mounting board includes a light source (e.g., LED elements 654a, 654b, 654c in the embodiments) that irradiates light onto a pattern and is mounted on a component mounting surface of the light source mounting board, and the component mounting surface faces the inner circumferential surface of the reel and is attached to the back side of the back lamp house. The back lamp house includes an opening that faces the inner circumferential surface of the reel tape and exposes a predetermined light source mounted on the component mounting surface of the light source mounting board, and a concealing portion that hides at least a part of the component mounting surface by an area other than the opening. and a predetermined shade portion (e.g., shade portions 664a, 664b, 664c in the embodiment) that extends from the periphery of the predetermined light source exposed surface portion toward the inner peripheral surface of the reel tape and collects light irradiated from the predetermined light source into the pattern display area. A predetermined partition portion is formed by the predetermined shade portion and other specific shade portions. The plurality of patterns include a light-transmitting pattern (e.g., light-transmitting pattern 663a, 663b, 663c in the embodiment) that is provided with a predetermined light-transmitting region (e.g., the transmissive region LT in the embodiment) that easily transmits light from the predetermined light source. the color of the partition portion visible through the specified light transmitting area is recognizable as being different from the color of the area of the reel tape on which no pattern is drawn, the color of the partition portion visible through the specified light transmitting area is recognizable as being different from the color of the area of the reel tape on which no pattern is drawn, the specified shade portion is substantially white , and a thickness of the specified partition portion (for example, thickness TH3 in the embodiment) is narrower than the narrowest pattern spacing among the multiple pattern spacings drawn on the reel tape.

Claims (1)

A reel with multiple designs,
A back lamp unit,
The reel has a substantially cylindrical reel frame and a band-shaped reel tape attached to an outer peripheral surface of the reel frame,
the reel tape has a plurality of rectangular pattern display areas formed by dividing an outer circumferential surface of the reel frame into equal lengths in a circumferential direction, and one pattern is displayed in each of the pattern display areas;
The back lamp unit includes:
A light source that irradiates light onto the plurality of patterns and a back lamp house,
The back lamp house is
a predetermined light source exposure surface facing an inner circumferential surface of the reel and having an opening for exposing the light source;
a shade portion extending cylindrically from the peripheral portion of the predetermined light source exposure surface toward the inner peripheral surface of the reel and converging the illumination area of the light source to the range of the symbol display area;
The light sources are provided corresponding to each of a plurality of pattern display areas displayed in the display window,
A partition plate is provided inside the shade portion so as to match the position of a boundary line of each of the plurality of pattern display areas displayed in the display window,
A gaming machine characterized in that the thickness of the partition plate is shorter than the length of the arrangement interval of the symbols.

Images